Power Systems
Site and hardware planning



Power Systems
Site and hardware planning
 Note
Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in “Notices,” on
page 733, “Safety notices” on page xiii, the IBM Systems Safety Notices manual, G229-9054, and the
IBM Environmental Notices and User Guide, Z125–5823.

This edition applies to IBM Power Systems servers that contain the POWER6 processor and to all associated
models.
© Copyright IBM Corporation 2007, 2009.
US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract
with IBM Corp.
Contents
Safety notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii

Chapter 1. Site and hardware physical planning overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Chapter 2. What's new in Planning for the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Chapter 3. Planning activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Planning task checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
General considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Site preparation and physical planning guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Chapter 4. Server specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Model 7037-A50 server and 7047-185 workstation specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
ASHRAE declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Model 8203-E4A, 8261-E4S, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25 server specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3D ASHRAE view for models 8203-E4A, 8261-E4S, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25 . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Model 8204-E8A and 9409-M50 server specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Plan view for model 8204-E8A and 9409-M50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3D ASHRAE view for models 8204-E8A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Model 8234-EMA server specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Plan view for model 8234-EMA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Model 9110-510, OpenPower 710 (9123-710), and 9110-51A server specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Model 9115-505 server specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Model 9117-MMA and 9406-MMA server specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Plan view for model 9117-MMA and 9406-MMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
ASHRAE declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Model 9118-575 server specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Breaker rating and cord information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Power cord features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Doors and covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Plan views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Raised-floor requirements and preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Cutting and placing floor panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Securing the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Installing the frame tie-down kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Positioning the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Attaching the rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Attaching the rack to a 9 - 13 in. or 12 - 22 in. floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Considerations for multiple-system installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Service clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
ASHRAE declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Total system power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Cooling requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Cooling requirements graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Requirements for the chilled airflow area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Moving the system to the installation site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Phase imbalance and BPR configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Balancing power panel loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Configuring power cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Dual power installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Approximate system weights by configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Weight distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Unit emergency power off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Computer room emergency power off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2007, 2009 iii

 Machine holdup times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Model 9119-FHA server specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Power cord features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Doors and covers for the 9119-FHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Plan views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Raised-floor requirements and preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Cutting and placing floor panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Configuring power cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Installing the frame tie-down kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Positioning the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Securing the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Attaching the rack to a 9 - 13 in. or 12 - 22 in. floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Considerations for multiple-system installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Service clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Total system power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Power cord and breaker information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Cooling requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Cooling requirements graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Requirements for the chilled airflow area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Moving the system to the installation site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Phase imbalance and BPR configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Balancing power panel loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Dual power installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Approximate system weights by configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Weight distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Unit emergency power off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Computer room emergency power off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Machine holdup times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Model 9119-590, 9406-595, and 9119-595 server specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Breaker rating and cord information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Power cord features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Doors and covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Plan views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Raised-floor requirements and preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Cutting and placing floor panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Securing the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Installing the frame tie-down kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Positioning the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Attaching the rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Attaching the rack to a 9 - 13 in. or 12 - 22 in. floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Considerations for multiple-system installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Service clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
ASHRAE declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Total system power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Cooling requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Cooling requirements graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Requirements for the chilled airflow area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Moving the system to the installation site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Phase imbalance and BPR configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Balancing power panel loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Configuring power cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Dual power installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Approximate system weights by configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Weight distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Unit emergency power off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Computer room emergency power off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Machine holdup times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Model 9125-F2A server specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Breaker rating and cord information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Advantages of using high input voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Doors and covers for model 9125-F2A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

iv Site and hardware planning

 Plan views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Raised-floor requirements and preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Cutting and placing floor panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
9125-F2A installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Installing the frame tie-down kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Positioning the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Securing the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Attaching the rack to a 9 - 13 in. or 12 - 22 in. floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Positioning and installing the frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Total system power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Air cooling requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Water cooling requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Moving the system to the installation site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Phase imbalance and BPR configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Balancing power panel loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Facility electrical equipment requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Coordinating line cord over current protection with internal 9125-F2A protection. . . . . . . . . . . 257
Approximate system weights by configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Unit emergency power off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Computer room emergency power off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Model 9406-250 server specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Model 9406-270 server specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Model 9406-520, 9111-520, 9405-520, 9111-285, 9131-52A, 9406-525, and 9407-515 server specifications . . . . . 266
Plan view for model 9406-520 and 9111-520 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
ASHRAE declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Planning for model 9406-550, 9113-550, OpenPower 720 (9124-720), and 9133-55A server specifications . . . . 273
Plan view for model 9406-550, 9113-550, and OpenPower 720 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
ASHRAE declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Model 9406-570, 9117-570, and 9116-561 server specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Plan view for model 9406-570, 9117-570, and 9116-561 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
ASHRAE declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Model 9406-800 and 9406-810 server specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Model 9406-820 server specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Model 9406-825 server specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Model 9406-830 and SB2 server specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Model 9406-840 and SB3 server specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Model 9406-870 and 9406-890 server specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
iSeries 9406-870 and 9406-890 power and height considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Doors and covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Moving, weight, and height considerations for the 9406-870 and 9406-890 . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Power and electrical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Phase imbalance and bulk power regulator configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Balancing power panel loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Power cord configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Checking the facility outlets and power source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Dual power installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Additional installation considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 307

5074 expansion unit or 9079 expansion unit with 5078 expansion unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
5075 PCI expansion entry tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
5078 or 0578 expansion unit for 5074 expansion unit, 9079 base, or 0551 IBM i rack . . . . . . . . . . . 310
0588 and 5088 expansion unit for 5094 expansion unit, 9094 I/O expansion unit, 5074 expansion unit, 9079 I/O
expansion unit, or 0551 System i rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
5094 expansion unit, 9094 I/O expansion unit with 5088 PCI-X expansion unit, or 9194 expansion unit . . . . 315
0595 or 5095 PCI-X expansion unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
5096 expansion unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
5294 or 8294 1.8 m I/O rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
5296 1.8 m I/O rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
5786, 5787, 7031-D24, and 7031-T24 expansion units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
5790 PCI expansion drawer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Contents v
5877 expansion unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Planning for 5792 base rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Breaker rating and cord information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Power cord features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Doors and covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Plan views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Raised-floor requirements and preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Cutting and placing floor panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Securing the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Installing the frame tie-down kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Positioning the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Attaching the rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Attaching the rack to a 9 - 13 in. or 12 - 22 in. floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Considerations for multiple-system installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Service clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
ASHRAE declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Total system power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Cooling requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Cooling requirements graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Requirements for the chilled airflow area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Moving the system to the installation site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Phase imbalance and BPR configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Balancing power panel loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Power cord configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Dual power installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Approximate system weights by configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Weight distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Unit emergency power off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Computer room emergency power off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Machine holdup times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
5802 expansion unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
5886 expansion unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Planning for 6954 and 6953 racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Power cord and breaker information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Doors and covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Plan views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Installing the frame tie-down kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Positioning the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Securing the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Attaching the rack to a 9 - 13 in. or 12 - 22 in. floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Cutting and placing floor panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Securing the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Considerations for multiple-system installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Service clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Total system power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Cooling requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Cooling requirements graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Requirements for the chilled airflow area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Phase imbalance and BPR configuration balancing power panel loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Weight distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
7101 or 7102 expansion unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
7104 expansion unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
7116 expansion unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
7214-1U2 media drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
7311-D10 expansion unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
7311-D11 expansion unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
7311-D20 expansion unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
7314-G30 and 5796 expansion unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
8079 optional base 1.8 m model 9406-840 I/O rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
8094 and 5097 base I/O expansion unit optional 1.8 m rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
9074 base I/O enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

vi Site and hardware planning

9079 base I/O expansion unit or 5074 expansion unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
9094 base I/O expansion unit, 9194 I/O expansion unit, or 5094 expansion unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
5079 1.8 m storage and PCI expansion unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440

Chapter 6. Rack specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

0550 model 9406-830 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
0550 rack configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
0551 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Model 7014-T42, 7014-B42, and 0553 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
0551, 0553, 0555, and 7014 rack configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
0551 model 9406-270 rack system units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Model 0554 and 7014-S11 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Model 0555 and 7014-S25 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Planning for the 7014-T00 and 7014-T42 racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Model 7014-T00 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
7014-T00, 7014-T42, and 0553 service clearances and caster location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
7014-T00, 7014-T00, and 0553 racks multiple attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
7014-T00, 7014-T42, and 0553 rack weight distribution and floor loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

Chapter 7. Hardware management console specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

7042-C07 desktop Hardware Management Console specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
7042-CR6 rack-mounted Hardware Management Console specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
7042-CR5 rack-mounted Hardware Management Console specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
7310-C03 desktop Hardware Management Console specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
7310-C04 desktop Hardware Management Console specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
7310-C05 desktop Hardware Management Console specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
7310-C06 and 7042-C06 desktop Hardware Management Console specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
7310-CR2 rack-mounted Hardware Management Console specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
7310-CR3 rack-mounted Hardware Management Console specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
7310-CR4 and 7042-CR4 Hardware Management Console specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478

Chapter 8. Uninterruptible power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481

Chapter 9. Power distribution unit and power cord options for 7014, 0551, 0553, and
0555 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487

Chapter 10. Planning for power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499

Determining your power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Server Information Form 3A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Workstation Information Form 3B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Determining power cord, plug, and receptacle type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Plugs and receptacles: By country or region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Plug and receptacle types: 2 , 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Plug and receptacle types: 12, 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Plug and receptacle types: 12, 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Plug and receptacle types: 23, 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Plug and receptacle types: 18, 46 (P+N+E) [32A]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Plug and receptacle types: 18, 46 (3P+N+E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Plug and receptacle types: 22, 46 (P+N+E) [32A]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Plug and receptacle types: 23, 46 (P+N+E) [32A]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Plug and receptacle types: 24, 46 (P+N+E) [16A], 46 (3P+N+E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Plug and receptacle types: 25, 46 (P+N+E) [32A]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Plug and receptacle types: 4, 10, 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Plug and receptacle types: 4, 5, 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Plug and receptacle types: 2, 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Plug and receptacle types: 6, 54, PDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Plug and receptacle types: 46 (P+N+E) [32A], 70, 73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Plug and receptacle types: 4, 7, 51, 5, 10, 34, 40, 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Plug and receptacle types: 18, 46 (P+N+E) [32A]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527

Contents vii
 Plug and receptacle types: 25, 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Plug and receptacle types: 62, 12, 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Plug and receptacle types: 19, 46 (3P+N+E), 46 (P+N+E) [16A] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Plug and receptacle types: 32, 46 (P+N+E) [32A], 46 (3P+N+E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Plug and receptacle types: 34, 10, 12, 57, 59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Plug and receptacle types: 66, KP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Plug and receptacle types: 18, 46 (3P+N+E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Plug and receptacle types: 22, 46 (P+N+E) [32A]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Plug and receptacle types: 4, 5, 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Plug and receptacle types: 22, 46 (3+N+E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Plug and receptacle types: 5, 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Plug and receptacle types: 4, 7, 51, 5, 10, 34, 40, 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Plug and receptacle types: 6, 54, 46 (P+N+E) [32A] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Plug type 12 countries or regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Plug type 18 countries or regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Plug type 46 (P+N+E) [32A] countries or regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Plug type 46 (P+N+E) [16A] countries or regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Plug and receptacle type 12 part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Plug and receptacle types: By model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Plug and receptacle types: Model 7037-A50 and 7047-185 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Plug and receptacle types: Model 5886 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Plug and receptacle types: Model 6458 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Plug and receptacle types: Model 7214-1U2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Plug and receptacle types: Model 7311-D10, 7311-D11, 5790 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Plug and receptacle types: Model 7311-D20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Plug and receptacle types: Model 7314-G30, 5796 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Plug and receptacle types: Model 8204-E8A and 9409-M50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Plug and receptacle types: Model 8234-EMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Plug and receptacle types: Models 8203-E4A, 9407-M15, 9408-M25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Plug and receptacle types: Model 9110-510 and OpenPower 710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Plug and receptacle types: Model 9115-505 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Plug and receptacle types: Model 9119-FHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Plug and receptacle types: Model 9125-F2A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Plug and receptacle types: Model 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, and OpenPower 720, 9111-285,
9131-52A, 9133-55A, 9406-525, 9407-515 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Plug and receptacle types: Model 9116-561 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Plug and receptacle types: Model 9406-570 and 9117-570 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Plug and receptacle types: Model 9117-MMA and 9406-MMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Plug and receptacle types: Model 9118-575 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Plug and receptacle types: Model 9119-590, 9119-595, and 9406-595 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Plug and receptacle types: 8079, 8093, and 9094 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Plug and receptacle types: 0550 and 0551 (1.8 m racks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Plug and receptacle types: 0553 and 7014-T42 (1.8 m racks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Plug and receptacle types: 0554, 0555, 7014-S11, 7014-S25 racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Plug and receptacle types: Model 9406-250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Plug and receptacle types: Model 9406-270 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Plug and receptacle types: Models 9406-870 and 9406-890 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Plug and receptacle types: Models 9406-800, 9406-810, 9406-825, and 5075, 5095, 0595, 7116, 7316, and 9316 562
Plug and receptacle types: 5094 and 5294 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Plug and receptacle types: 5096, 5296 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Plug and receptacle types: Model 9406-820 and expansion units 5074, 5075, 5077, 5078, and 5079 . . . . 563
Plug and receptacle types: 0554, 0555, 7014-S11, 7014-S25 racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Plug and receptacle types: 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24 expansion units . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Plug and receptacle types: 5792 rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Plug and receptacle types: models 9406-830 and SB2; base I/O enclosure 9074; and expansion units 5065,
5066, 5074, and 5079 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Plug and receptacle types: Models 9406-840 and SB3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Plug and receptacle types: 9079 base I/O expansion unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Plug and receptacle configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Plug and receptacle type 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Plug and receptacle type 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570

viii Site and hardware planning

 Plug and receptacle type 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Plug and receptacle type 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Plug and receptacle type 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Plug and receptacle type 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Plug and receptacle type 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Plug and receptacle type 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Plug and receptacle type 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
Plug and receptacle type 19 (P+N+E) [10A] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Plug and receptacle type 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Plug and receptacle type 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Plug and receptacle type 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Plug and receptacle type 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
Plug and receptacle type 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
Plug and receptacle type 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Plug and receptacle type 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Plug and receptacle type 34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Plug and receptacle type 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Plug and Receptacle type 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Plug and receptacle type 46 (P+N+E) [32A] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
Plug and receptacle type 46 (3P+N+E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Plug and receptacle type 46 (P+N+E) [16A] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Plug and receptacle type 51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Plug and receptacle type 54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Plug and receptacle type 57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Plug and receptacle type 59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
Plug and receptacle type 62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Plug and receptacle type 64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Plug and receptacle type 66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
Plug and receptacle type 68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
Plug and receptacle type 69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Plug and receptacle type 70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Plug and receptacle type 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Plug and receptacle type 73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
Plug and receptacle type 74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
Plug and receptacle type 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
Plug and receptacle type 76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
Power cords: Plugs and receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
Plug and receptacle type KP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Plug and receptacle type PDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
Plug type 430 P7W and receptacle type 430 R7W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Plug type 460 P9W and receptacle type 460 R9W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Power cord features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
Power load calculating for 7188 or 9188 power distribution units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
Power cord 1300 for models 9406-870 and 9406-890. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
Power cord 1301 for models 9406-870 and 9406-890. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Power cord 1302 for models 9406-870 and 9406-890. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Power cord 1303 for models 9406-870 and 9406-890. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Power cord 1304 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Power cord 1394 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Power cord 1395 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Power cord 1396 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Power cord 1397 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Power cord 1398 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Power cord 1399 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Power cord 1401 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Power cord 1406 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Power cord 1407 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Power cord 1408 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Power cord 1409 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
Power cord 1410 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
Power cord 1411 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628

Contents ix
 Power cord 1412 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
Power cord 1414 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Power cord 1415 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Power cord 1418 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Power cord 1419 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Power cord 1420 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Power cord 1421 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Power cord 1422 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Power cord 1426 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Power cord 1427 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Power cord 1438 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Power cord 1439 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Power cord 1440 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Power cord 1441 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Power cord 1442 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Power cord 1443 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Power cord 1444 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Power cord 1445 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Power cord 1446 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Power cord 1447 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Power cord 1448 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Power cord 1449 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Power cord 1450 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Power cord 1451 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Power cord 1452 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Power cord 1453 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Power cord 1454 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Power cord 1455 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Power cord 1456 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Power cord 1457 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Power cord 1458 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Power cord 1459 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Power cord 1476 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Power cord 1477 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Power cord 2960 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Power cord 2961 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Power cord 4961 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Power cord 5102 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Power cord 5103 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Power cord 5104 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Power cord 5105 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Power cord 5106 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Power cord 6451 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Power cord 6452 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Power cord 6453 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Power cord 6454 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Power cord 6455 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Power cord 6456 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Power cord 6458 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Power cord 6459 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
Power cord 6460 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
Power cord 6461 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Power cord 6462 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Power cord 6463 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Power cord 6464 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
Power cord 6465 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
Power cord 6466 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
Power cord 6467 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
Power cord 6468 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
Power cord 6469 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
Power cord 6470 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642

x Site and hardware planning

 Power cord 6471 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
Power cord 6472 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
Power cord 6473 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
Power cord 6474 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
Power cord 6475 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
Power cord 6476 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
Power cord 6477 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
Power cord 6478 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
Power cord 6479 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
Power cord 6487 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
Power cord 6488 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
Power cord 6489 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Power cord 6491 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Power cord 6492 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
Power cord 6493 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
Power cord 6494 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Power cord 6495 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
Power cord 6496 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
Power cord 6497 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
Power cord 6498 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
Power cord 6499 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
Power cord 6651 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
Power cord 6653 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
Power cord 6654 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
Power cord 6655 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
Power cord 6656 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
Power cord 6657 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
Power cord 6658 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
Power cord 6659 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
Power cord 6660 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
Power cord 6663 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
Power cord 6665 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
Power cord 6669 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
Power cord 6670 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
Power cord 6671 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
Power cord 6672 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
Power cord 6673 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
Power cord 6680 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
Power cord 6681 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
Power cord 6687 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
Power cord 6690 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
Power cord 6691 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
Power cord 6692 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
Power cord 8677 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
Power cord 8686 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
Power cord 8687 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Power cord 8688 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Power cord 8689 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Power cord 8694 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Power cord 8697 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Power cord 8698 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Power cord 9002 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
Power cord 9080 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
Power cord 9081 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
Power cord 9082 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
Power cord 9083 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
Power cord 9180 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
Power cord 9182 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
Power cord 9183 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
Modification of IBM-provided power cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667

Contents xi
Chapter 11. Planning for cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
General cabling considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
Measuring cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
Special requirements for model 595 cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
Determining cable requirements and ordering cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
High-speed link information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
High-speed link cable options and loop maximums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
Model 820 HSL loop configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
High-speed link terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
HSL, SPCN, RIO, and InfiniBand cable planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
Serial-attached SCSI cable planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
Cable connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
Twinaxial console requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
Local console directly attached to the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
Ordering server cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
Twinaxial cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
General twinaxial cabling considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
Twinaxial workstations cabling configurations for model 9406-7xx and 9406-8xx 8-port attachment . . . . . . 709
Distance guidelines for workstation cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
Twinaxial cables from IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
Operations Console and remote control panel cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
Optical cable fiber specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
Labeling cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
Label templates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
Cables available from IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714

Chapter 12. Rack installation procedures for racks not purchased at IBM . . . . . . 725

Appendix. Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733

Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
Electronic emission notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
Class A Notices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
Terms and conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738

xii Site and hardware planning

Safety notices
Safety notices may be printed throughout this guide:
v DANGER notices call attention to a situation that is potentially lethal or extremely hazardous to
people.
v CAUTION notices call attention to a situation that is potentially hazardous to people because of some
existing condition.
v Attention notices call attention to the possibility of damage to a program, device, system, or data.

World Trade safety information

Several countries require the safety information contained in product publications to be presented in their
national languages. If this requirement applies to your country, a safety information booklet is included
in the publications package shipped with the product. The booklet contains the safety information in
your national language with references to the U.S. English source. Before using a U.S. English publication
to install, operate, or service this product, you must first become familiar with the related safety
information in the booklet. You should also refer to the booklet any time you do not clearly understand
any safety information in the U.S. English publications.

German safety information

Das Produkt ist nicht für den Einsatz an Bildschirmarbeitsplätzen im Sinne § 2 der
Bildschirmarbeitsverordnung geeignet.

Laser safety information

IBM® servers can use I/O cards or features that are fiber-optic based and that utilize lasers or LEDs.

Laser compliance

All lasers are certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Subchapter J for class
1 laser products. Outside the U.S., they are certified to be in compliance with IEC 60825 as a class 1 laser
product. Consult the label on each part for laser certification numbers and approval information.

CAUTION:
This product might contain one or more of the following devices: CD-ROM drive, DVD-ROM drive,
DVD-RAM drive, or laser module, which are Class 1 laser products. Note the following information:
v Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product could result in exposure to
hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable parts inside the device.
v Use of the controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
(C026)

CAUTION:
Data processing environments can contain equipment transmitting on system links with laser modules
that operate at greater than Class 1 power levels. For this reason, never look into the end of an optical
fiber cable or open receptacle. (C027)

CAUTION:
This product contains a Class 1M laser. Do not view directly with optical instruments. (C028)

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2007, 2009 xiii

CAUTION:
Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser diode. Note the following
information: laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view directly with optical
instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the beam. (C030)

Power and cabling information for NEBS (Network Equipment-Building System)

GR-1089-CORE

The following comments apply to the IBM servers that have been designated as conforming to NEBS
(Network Equipment-Building System) GR-1089-CORE:

The equipment is suitable for installation in the following:

v Network telecommunications facilities
v Locations where the NEC (National Electrical Code) applies

The intrabuilding ports of this equipment are suitable for connection to intrabuilding or unexposed
wiring or cabling only. The intrabuilding ports of this equipment must not be metallically connected to the
interfaces that connect to the OSP (outside plant) or its wiring. These interfaces are designed for use as
intrabuilding interfaces only (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in GR-1089-CORE) and require isolation
from the exposed OSP cabling. The addition of primary protectors is not sufficient protection to connect
these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring.

Note: All Ethernet cables must be shielded and grounded at both ends.

The ac-powered system does not require the use of an external surge protection device (SPD).

The dc-powered system employs an isolated DC return (DC-I) design. The DC battery return terminal
shall not be connected to the chassis or frame ground.

xiv Site and hardware planning

Chapter 1. Site and hardware physical planning overview
Successful installation requires effective planning of your physical and operational environment. You are
the most valuable resource in site planning because you know where and how your system, and devices
attached to it, will be used.

Site preparation for the complete system is the responsibility of the customer. The primary task of your
site planner is to ensure that each system is installed so that it can operate and be serviced efficiently.

This topic collection provides the basic information you need to plan for your system installation. It
provides an overview of each planning task, as well as valuable reference information useful throughout
the performance of these tasks. Depending on the complexity of the system you ordered and your
existing computing resource, you might not need to perform all the steps noted here.

First, with the help of your systems engineer, sales representative, or with the help of those coordinating
your installation, list the hardware for which you need to plan. Use the summary of your order to help
you when making your list. This list is now your “To Do” list. You can use the Planning task checklist to
assist you.

While you are responsible for planning, vendors, contractors, and your sales representative are also
available to help with any aspect of the planning. For some system units, a customer service
representative will install your system unit and verify correct operation. Some system units are
considered customer-installed. If you are not sure, check with your sales representative.

The physical planning section of this topic collection provides the physical characteristics of many system
units, and associated products. For information on products not included in this topic collection, contact
your sales representative or your authorized dealer.

Before proceeding with planning, ensure that the hardware and software you have chosen meets your
needs. Your sales representative is available to answer questions.

While this information is for hardware planning, the system memory and disk storage needed are a
function of the software to be used, therefore some things to consider are listed below. Information on
software products is generally in or with the software Licensed Program Product itself.

In assessing the adequacy of hardware and software, consider the following:

v Available disk space and system memory for accommodating software, online documentation, and data
(including future growth needs resulting from additional users, more data, and new applications)
v Compatibility of all devices
v Compatibility of software packages with each other and with the hardware configuration
v Adequate redundancy or backup capabilities in hardware and software
v Software portability to the new system, if necessary
v Prerequisites and corequisites of chosen software have been satisfied
v Data to be transferred to the new system

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2007, 2009 1

2 Site and hardware planning
Chapter 2. What's new in Planning for the system
Read about new or significantly changed information in Planning for the system since the previous
update of this topic collection.

October 2009

The following updates have been made to the content:

v There are new specifications for the 5877 expansion unit: 5877 expansion unit.
v There are new specifications for the 7042-CR5 desktop HMC: 7042-CR5 desktop Hardware
Management Console specifications.
v There are new specifications for the 8261-E4S: Model 8203-E4A, 8261-E4S, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25
server specifications.
v New information has been added to Serial-attached SCSI cable planning.
v New information has been added to Configuring power cords.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2007, 2009 3

4 Site and hardware planning
Chapter 3. Planning activities
You can use this information to help you plan the physical installation for your server.

Proper planning for your system will facilitate a smooth installation and fast system start-up. Sales and
installation planning representatives are also available to help you with installation planning.

As part of your planning activity, you will make decisions about where to locate your server and who
will operate the system

Planning task checklist

Use this checklist to document your planning progress.

Working with your sales representative, establish completion dates for each of the tasks. You might want
to review your planning schedule periodically with your sales representative.
Table 1. Planning task checklist
Planning step Person responsible Target date Completion date
Plan your office or computer
room layout (physical planning)
Prepare for power cords and
electrical needs
Prepare for cables and cabling
Create or modify communications
networks
Perform building alterations, as
needed
Prepare maintenance, recovery,
and security plans
Develop an education plan
Order supplies
Prepare for system delivery

General considerations
Planning your system requires attention to the numerous details.

When determining the placement of your system, consider the following:

v Adequate space for the devices.
v Working environment of personnel who will be using the devices (their comfort, ability to access the
devices, supplies, and reference materials).
v Adequate space for maintaining and servicing the devices.
v Physical security requirements necessary for the devices.
v Weight of the devices.
v Heat output of the devices.
v Operating temperature requirements of the devices.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2007, 2009 5

v Humidity requirements of the devices.
v Air flow requirements of the devices.
v Air quality of the location where the devices will be used. For example, excess dust could damage
your system.

Note: The system and devices are designed to operate in normal office environments. Dirty or other
poor environments might damage the system or the devices. You are responsible for providing the
proper operating environment.
v Altitude limitations of the devices.
v Noise emission levels of the devices.
v Any vibration of equipment near where the devices will be placed.
v Paths of power cords.

The following pages contain the information you need to evaluate these considerations.

Site preparation and physical planning guidelines

These guidelines help you prepare your site for the delivery and installation of your server.

Information contained in the Site preparation and physical planning might be helpful for preparing your
data center for the arrival of a server.

The Site preparation and physical planning covers the following topics:

Site selection, building and space considerations

v Site selection
v Access
v Static electricity and floor resistance
v Space requirements
v Floor construction and floor loading
v Raised floors
v Conductive contamination
v Computer room layout

Site environment, safety, and security

v Vibration and shock
v Lighting
v Acoustics
v Electromagnetic compatibility
v Computer room location
v Material and data storage protection
v Emergency planning for continuous operations

Electrical power and grounding

v General power information
v Power quality
v Voltage and frequency limits
v Power load
v Power source

6 Site and hardware planning

v Dual power installations

Air conditioning
v Air conditioning determination
v General guidelines for data centers
v Temperature and humidity design criteria
v Temperature and humidity recording instruments
v Relocation and temporary storage
v Acclimation
v System air distribution

Planning for the installation of rear door heat exchangers

v Planning for the installation of rear door heat exchangers
v Heat exchanger specifications
v Water specifications for the secondary cooling loop
v Water delivery specifications for secondary loops
v Layout and mechanical installation
v Suggested sources for secondary loop components

Communications
v Planning for communications

Chapter 3. Planning activities 7

8 Site and hardware planning
Chapter 4. Server specifications
Server specifications provide detailed information for your server, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Select the appropriate models to view the specifications for your server.

Model 7037-A50 server and 7047-185 workstation specifications

Server specifications provide detailed information for your server, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Use the following specifications to plan for your server.

Table 2. Rack-mounted 7037-A50 server
Dimensions Width Depth Height EIA units1 Weight
Metric 429 mm 524 mm 218 mm 25 kg
5
English 16.9 in. 20.6 in. 8.6 in. 55 lb

Table 3. Stand-alone 7037-A50 server

Dimensions Width Depth Height Weight
216 mm
496 mm (without rear cover
Metric 257 mm (including
469 mm 25 kg
525 mm (with rear cover1)
stabilizer foot)
8.5 in.
19.5 in. (without rear cover)
English 18.5 in. 55 lb
10.1 in. (including
20.7 in. (with rear cover1)
stabilizer foot)
1
An optional acoustical cover is available for the 7037-A50 server tower that will reduce LWAd and LpAm
approximately 0.3 B and 3 dB, respectively.

Table 4. Stand-alone 7047-185 workstation

Dimensions Width Depth Height Weight
216 mm
Metric 640 mm (with acoustical 469 mm 25 kg
257 mm (including
cover)
stabilizer foot)
8.5 in.
English 25.2 in. (with acoustical 18.5 in. 55 lb
10.1 in. (including
cover)
stabilizer foot)

Table 5. Shipping dimensions

Dimensions Width Depth Height Weight
Metric 625 mm 655 mm 485 mm 30 kg
English 24.6 in. 25.8 in. 19.1 in. 67 lb

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2007, 2009 9

Table 6. Shipping dimensions (China)
Dimensions Width Depth Height Weight
Metric 625 mm 655 mm 599 mm 30 kg
English 24.6 in. 25.8 in. 23.5 in. 67 lb

Table 7. Electrical
Electrical characteristics Properties
kVA (maximum) 0.474
1
Rated voltage and frequency 100 - 127/200 - 240 V ac at 50/60 plus or minus 0.5 Hz
Thermal output (maximum) 1536 BTU/hr
Maximum power consumption 530 W (1-core 7037-A50 , 1-core 7047-185, and 2-core 7047-185)
750 W (2-core 7037-A50 )
Power factor 0.95
Inrush current (maximum) 90 A
Leakage current (maximum) 1.6 mA
Phase 1
Branch circuit breaker 20 A (maximum)
1
The power supplies automatically accept any voltage with the published, rated-voltage range. If dual power
supplies are installed and operating, the power supplies draw approximately equal current from the utility (mains)
and provide approximately equal current to the load.

Table 8. Environment requirements

Environment Temperature
Recommended operating 5 - 35 °C (41 - 95 °F)
temperature 1
Nonoperating temperature 5 - 45 °C (41 - 113 °F)
Shipping temperature -40 - 60 °C (-40 - 140 °F)
Operating Nonoperating
Maximum dew point 28 °C (82.4 - °F) 29 °C (84.2 - °F)
Noncondensing humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80%
Maximum altitude 3048 m (10 000 ft) 3048 m (10 000 ft)
1
Class 3 product as defined in ASHRAE Thermal Guidelines for Data Processing Environments. The allowable
operating range is 5 - 35 °C (41 - 95 °F). See the Temperature and humidity design criteria topic for more information.

Table 9. Noise emissions

Product description Declared A-weighted sound power level,LWAd (B) Declared A-weighted sound pressure level,LpAm (dB)
Operating Idling Operating Idling
7047-185 1-core workstation
with two 10 000 rpm hard disk
drives, 2843 graphics card and
5.0 4.7 314 284
2 GB of memory (workstations
have acoustical front and rear
covers)
7047-185 2-core workstation
with two 10 000 rpm hard disk
drives, 2843 graphics card and
5.1 4.9 33 31
4GB of memory (workstations
have acoustical front and rear
covers)
7037-A50 1-core server tower
with three 10 000 rpm hard 5.3 5.0 38 35
disk drives8

10 Site and hardware planning

Table 9. Noise emissions (continued)
Product description Declared A-weighted sound power level,LWAd (B) Declared A-weighted sound pressure level,LpAm (dB)
7037-A50 2-core server tower
with three 10 000 rpm hard 5.8 5.6 40 39
disk drives8
7037-A50 1-core rack-mounted
server with three 10 000 rpm 5.3 5.0 384 354
hard disk drives
7037-A50 2-core server tower
or rack-mounted server with
5.7 5.6 42 41
three 10 000 rpm hard disk
drives and 4 GB of memory
This is an estimated value.

When a tape drive is installed, using the acoustic cover feature will reduce the noise emissions when the tape drive is in use.

All measurements made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.

For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.

Table 10. Service clearances

Clearances Front Back Left or right Top
Operating 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.)
762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30
Nonoperating 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.)
in.)

Electromagnetic compatibility compliance: This server meets the following electromagnetic compatibility
specifications: FCC (CFR 47, Part 15); VCCI; CISPR-22; 89/336/EEC; BSMI (A2/NZS 3548:1995); C-Tick;
ICES/NMB-003; Korean EMI/EMC (MIC Notice 2000–94, Notice 2000–72); People's Republic of China
Commodity Inspection Law.

Safety compliance: This server is designed and certified to meet the following safety standards: UL
60950; CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950–00; EN 60950; IEC 60950 including all National Differences

Note: See 0551, 0553, 7014, and 0555 rack configurations for typical configurations when the 0551, 0553,
7014, and 0555 rack is populated with various server models.
Related reference:
“0551, 0553, 0555, and 7014 rack configurations” on page 451
The 0551 or 7014-T00 provide a 1.8 meter rack (36 EIA units of total space). The 7014-T42 or 0553
provides a 2.0 meter rack (42 EIA units of total space).
Related information:
Temperature and humidity design criteria
Acoustics

ASHRAE declarations
Use the ASHRAE declarations table and figures to determine the measurement reporting requirements
defined in the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
Thermal Guidelines for Data Processing Environments.

These guidelines are available at ASHRAE Technical Committee.

Table 11. ASHRAE declarations
Airflow maximum at 35°C
Typical Heat Release Airflow nominal
(95°F)
Description watts cfm m3/hr cfm m3/hr
Minimum configuration 300 42 71 83 141

Chapter 4. Server specifications 11

Table 11. ASHRAE declarations (continued)
Airflow maximum at 35°C
Typical Heat Release Airflow nominal
(95°F)
Maximum configuration 450 42 71 83 141
Typical configuration 375 42 71 83 141
See Model 7037-A50 server and 7047-185 workstation specifications for weight and overall system dimension.
ASHRAE Class 3
Minimum configuration 1-core, 2.5 GHz processor, 2 GB memory, three hard disk drives, five PCI cards
Maximum configuration 2-core, 2.5 GHz processor, 8 GB memory, three hard disk drives, six PCI cards
Typical configuration 2-core, 2.5 GHz processor, 4 GB memory, three hard disk drives, four PCI cards

Figure 1. Airflow figure for server mounted in a rack

12 Site and hardware planning

Figure 2. Airflow figure for stand-alone server

Related information:
ASHRAE Technical Committee
ASHRAE guidelines are available in this website

Model 8203-E4A, 8261-E4S, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25 server

specifications
Server specifications provide detailed information for your server, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Use the following specifications to plan for your server.

Table 12. Dimensions - rack-mounted drawer
Width Depth Height EIA units1 Weight
440 mm (17.3 in.) 538 mm (21.2 in.) 173 mm (6.81 in.) 4 34.0 kg (75 lb )

Table 13. Dimensions - stand-alone model

Width Depth Height Weight
328.5 mm (12.9 in.) (with
tip foot)
628 mm (24.7 in. ) 540 mm (21.3 in.) 37.6 kg (83 lb)
182.3 mm (7.2 in.)
(without tip foot)

Chapter 4. Server specifications 13

Table 14. Shipping dimensions - rack-mounted drawer
Width Depth Height Weight1
68 - 113 kg (150 - 250
610 mm (24 in.) 711 mm (28 in.) 1016 mm (40 in.)
lb)
1
This is an estimated value.

Table 15. Shipping dimensions - rack-mounted drawer (China)

Width Depth Height Weight1
68 - 113 kg (150 - 250
610 mm (24 in.) 597 mm (23.5 in.) 1016 mm (40 in.)
lb)
1
This is an estimated value.

Table 16. Shipping dimensions - Stand-alone model

Width Depth Height Weight1
68 -113 kg (150 - 250
660 mm (26 in.) 737 mm (29 in.) 1016 mm (40 in.)
lb)
1
This is an estimated value.

Table 17. Shipping dimensions - Stand-alone model (China)

Width Depth Height Weight1
68 - 113 kg (150 - 250
660 mm (26 in.) 622 mm (24.5 in.) 1016 mm (40 in.)
lb)
1
This is an estimated value.

Table 18. Electrical

Electrical characteristics Properties
Rated voltage and frequency1 100 - 127 V ac or 200 - 240 V ac at 50 - 60 plus or minus 3 Hz
Thermal output (maximum)2 2628 Btu/hr
Maximum power consumption2 770 W
Maximum kVA 0.7943
Power factor 0.97
Inrush current (maximum) 80 A
Leakage current (maximum) 1.4 mA4
Phase 1
Dual power feature code 7703 (2x)
Branch circuit breaker (maximum) 20 A
0278
Drawer mounted in 7014-T00 and 7014-T42
racks, and power distribution unit (PDU)

14 Site and hardware planning

Table 18. Electrical (continued)
Electrical characteristics Properties
Notes:
1. The power supplies automatically accept any voltage with the published, rated-voltage range. If dual power
supplies are installed and operating, the power supplies draw approximately equal current from the utility
(mains) and provide approximately equal current to the load.
2. Power draw and heat load vary greatly by configuration. When planning for an electrical system, it is important
to use maximum values. However, when planning for heat load, you can use the IBM Systems Energy Estimator
to obtain a heat output estimate based on a specific configuration. See The IBM Systems Energy Estimator Web
site for more information.
3. To calculate the amperage, multiply the kVA by 1000 and divide that number by the operating voltage.
4. Measured according to IEC 60950.

Table 19. Environment requirements

Environment Properties
Operating temperature range 5 - 35°C (41 - 95°F)
Nonoperating temperature 5 - 43°C (41 - 109°F)
Shipping temperature -40 - 60°C (-40 - 140°F)
Operating Nonoperating
Maximum dew point 17°C (62.6°F) 27°C (80.6°F)
Noncondensing humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80% (5 - 100% shipping)
1
Maximum altitude 3048 m (10 000 ft) 3048 m (10 000 ft)2
Notes:
1. The upper temperature limit should be derated 1°C for every 300 m above 900 m.
2. The power supplies automatically accept any voltage with the published, rated-voltage range. If dual power
supplies are installed and operating, the power supplies draw approximately equal current from the utility
(mains) and provide approximately equal current to the load.

Table 20. Noise emissions for the 8261-E4S, 8203-E4A (with 4.2 GHz processor), 9407-M15, and 9408-M25
Declared A-weighted sound power level, Declared A-weighted sound pressure level,
Product description LWad (B) LpAm (dB)
Operating Idle Operating Idle
Stand-alone model
3 hard drives
1-way or 2-way
6.1 6.1 45 44
processor
1 power supply
With rear cover
Stand-alone model
Fully configured 6.6 6.6 49 49
With rear cover
Rack-mounted at 27U
position
3 hard drives 6.5 6.5 51 51
2 processor books
1 power supply

Chapter 4. Server specifications 15

Table 20. Noise emissions for the 8261-E4S, 8203-E4A (with 4.2 GHz processor), 9407-M15, and
9408-M25 (continued)
Declared A-weighted sound power level, Declared A-weighted sound pressure level,
Product description LWad (B) LpAm (dB)
Rack-mounted at 27U
position 6.9 6.9 54 52
Fully configured
Rack-mounted at 27U
position
3 hard drives
2 processor books
6.1 6.1 46 45
1 power supply
With acoustic
door: feature code
6248 or 6249
Rack-mounted at 27U
position
Fully configured
6.5 6.5 49 49
With acoustic
door: feature code
6248 or 6249
Notes:

For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.

All measurements are made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.

Table 21. Noise emissions for the 8203-E4A (with 4.7 GHz processor)
Declared A-weighted sound power level, Declared A-weighted sound pressure level,
Product description LWad (B) LpAm (dB)
Operating Idle Operating Idle
Rack-mounted with
7 7 54 54
slim line door
Rack-mounted with
6.6 6.6 49 49
acoustic door
Stand-alone model 6.9 6.9 50 50
Notes:

For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.

All measurements are made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.

Table 22. Service clearances

Clearances Front Back Left or right Top
Operating 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.)
Nonoperating 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.)

16 Site and hardware planning

Electromagnetic compatibility compliance: FCC (CFR 47, Part 15); VCCI; CISPR-22; 89/336/EEC; BSMI
(A2/NZS 3548:1995); C-Tick; ICES/NMB-003; Korean EMI/EMC (MIC Notice 2000–94, Notice 2000–72);
People's Republic of China Commodity Inspection Law.

Safety compliance: IEC 60950; UL 60950; CSA 60950; EN 60950

Special Hardware Management Console considerations

When the server is managed by a Hardware Management Console (HMC), the console must be provided
within the same room and within 8 m (26 ft) of the server. For additional considerations, see Planning for
consoles, interfaces, and terminals for your service environment.

Note: As an alternative to the local HMC requirement, it is acceptable for you to provide a supported
device, such as a PC, with connectivity and authority to operate through a remotely attached HMC. This
local device must be in the same room and within 8 m (26 ft) of your server, and provide functional
capability equivalent to the HMC that it replaces and that is needed by the service representative to
service the system.
Related reference:
“Planning for the 7014-T00 and 7014-T42 racks” on page 464
Rack specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.
“Model 7014-T42, 7014-B42, and 0553 rack” on page 448
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical,
power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.
Chapter 9, “Power distribution unit and power cord options for 7014, 0551, 0553, and 0555 rack,” on page
487
Power distribution units (PDUs) can be used with the 7014, 0551, 0553 and 0555 racks. The various
configurations and specifications are provided.
“0551, 0553, 0555, and 7014 rack configurations” on page 451
The 0551 or 7014-T00 provide a 1.8 meter rack (36 EIA units of total space). The 7014-T42 or 0553
provides a 2.0 meter rack (42 EIA units of total space).
Related information:
Acoustics

3D ASHRAE view for models 8203-E4A, 8261-E4S, 9407-M15, and

9408-M25
Use the ASHRAE declarations table and figures to determine the measurement reporting requirements
defined in the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
Thermal Guidelines for Data Processing Environments.
Table 23.
Description
Typical Heat
Description Release2 Airflow nominal1 Airflow maximum1 at 35°C (95°F)
Configuration watts cfm m3/hr cfm m3/hr
Minimum 320 85 144 130 221
Typical 425 85 144 130 221
Full 683 85 144 130 221
Weight and See “Model 8203-E4A, 8261-E4S, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25 server specifications” on page 13 for
system dimension weight and system dimensions.
ASHRAE Class 3

Chapter 4. Server specifications 17

Table 23. (continued)
Description
Typical Heat
Description Release2 Airflow nominal1 Airflow maximum1 at 35°C (95°F)
Minimum 1-core, 4.2 GHz processor, two 1 GB memory DIMMs, two 15 k RPM hard disk drives, one PCI
Configuration card, DVD, Dual 1 Gb host Ethernet adapter
Typical 2-core, 4.7 GHz processor, four 2 GB memory DIMMs, four 15 k RPM hard disk drives, two PCI
Configuration cards, DVD, Quad 1 Gb host Ethernet adapter
Full 4-core, 4.7 GHz processor, eight 8 GB memory DIMMs, eight 15 k RPM SFF hard disk drives,
Configuration four PCI cards, DVD, Dual 10 Gb host Ethernet adapter
Notes:
1. Airflow includes the redundant power supplies (total of two power supplies per server).
2. The product safety rating label contains the following information:
v 100-127/200-240 V ac
v 10/6 A | 1.2 kVA
v 50/60 Hz | 1-phase

Model 8204-E8A and 9409-M50 server specifications

Server specifications provide detailed information for your server, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Use the following specifications to plan for your server.

Table 24. Dimensions - rack-mounted drawer
Measurements Width Depth Height EIA units1 Weight
Metric 440 mm 730 mm 173 mm 48.7 kg
4
English 17.3 in. 28.7 in. 6.81 in. 107.4 lb
1
See 0551, 0553, 7014, and 0555 rack configurations for typical configurations when the 0551, 0553, 7014, and 0555 rack
is populated with various server models.

Table 25. Dimensions - stand-alone model

Measurements Width Depth Height Weight
382.5 mm (with tip
foot)
Metric 778 mm 540 mm 57.2 kg
182.5 mm (without
tip foot)
12.9 in. (with tip
foot)
English 30.6 in. 21.3 in. 117.3 lb
7.2 in. (without tip
foot)

Table 26. Shipping dimensions - Rack-mounted drawer

Measurements Width Depth Height Weight1
Metric 610 mm 711 mm 1016 mm 68 - 113 kg
English 24 in. 28 in. 40 in. 150 - 250 lb
1
This is an estimated value.

18 Site and hardware planning

Table 27. Shipping dimensions - Rack-mounted drawer (China)
Measurements Width Depth Height Weight1
Metric 610 mm 597 mm 1016 mm 68 - 113 kg
English 24 in. 23.5 in. 40 in. 150 - 250 lb
1
This is an estimated value.

Table 28. Shipping dimensions - Stand-alone model

Measurements Width Depth Height Weight3
Metric 660 mm 737 mm 1016 mm 68 -113 kg
English 26 in. 29 in. 40 in. 150 - 250 lb
This is an estimated value.

Table 29. Shipping dimensions - Rack-mounted drawer (China)

Measurements Width Depth Height Weight1
Metric 660 mm 622 mm 1016 mm 68 - 113 kg
English 26 in. 24.5 in. 40 in. 150 - 250 lb
0288
Drawer mounted in 7014-T00 and 7014-T42 racks, and Power
distribution unit (PDU)
1
This is an estimated value.

Table 30. Electrical

Electrical characteristics Properties
kVA (maximum) 1.546 kVA4
Rated voltage and frequency1 100 - 127 V ac or 200 - 240 V ac at 50/60 plus or minus 3 Hz
2
Thermal output (maximum) 5120 Btu/hr
2
Maximum power consumption 1500 W
Power factor 0.97
Inrush current (maximum) 90 A
Leakage current (maximum) 1.6 mA3
Phase 1
Dual power feature code 7707 (2x)
Branch circuit breaker 20 A maximum
Notes:
1. The power supplies automatically accept any voltage with the published, rated-voltage range. If dual power
supplies are installed and operating, the power supplies draw approximately equal current from the utility
(mains) and provide approximately equal current to the load.
2. Power draw and heat load vary greatly by configuration. When planning for an electrical system, it is important
to use maximum values. However, when planning for heat load, you can use the IBM Systems Energy Estimator
to obtain a heat output estimate based on a specific configuration. See The IBM Systems Energy Estimator Web
site for more information.
3. Measured according to IEC 60950.
4. To calculate the amperage, multiply the kVA by 1000 and divide that number by the operating voltage.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 19

Table 31. Environment requirements
Environment Temperature
Operating temperature range 5 - 35 °C (41 - 95 °F)
Nonoperating temperature 5 - 40 °C (41 - 104 °F)
Shipping temperature -40 - 60 °C (-40 - 140 °F)
Operating Nonoperating
Maximum dew point 17 °C (62.6 - °F) 27 °C (80.6 - °F)
Noncondensing humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80% (5 - 100% shipping)
Maximum altitude 3048 m (10 000 ft) 3048 m (10 000 ft)

Table 32. Noise emissions

Declared A-weighted sound power level, LWad (B) Declared A-weighted sound pressure level, LpAm (dB)
Product description
Operating Idle Operating Idle
Rack mounted server 7.3 7.3 57 57
Rack mounted with
6.7 6.7 51 51
acoustic door
Stand alone server 7.3 7.3 57 57
For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.

All measurements are made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.

Table 33. Service clearances

Clearances Front Back Left or right Top
Operating 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.)
Nonoperating 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.)

Electromagnetic compatibility compliance: FCC Part 15, ICES-003

Safety compliance: IEC 60950; UL 60950; CSA 60950; EN 60950

Special Hardware Management Console considerations

When the server is managed by a Hardware Management Console (HMC), the console must be provided
within the same room and within 8 m (26 ft) of the server. For additional considerations, see Planning for
consoles, interfaces, and terminals for your service environment.

Note: As an alternative to the local HMC requirement, it is acceptable for you to provide a supported
device, such as a PC, with connectivity and authority to operate through a remotely attached HMC. This
local device must be in the same room and within 8 m (26 ft) of your server, and provide functional
capability equivalent to the HMC that it replaces and that is needed by the service representative to
service the system.
Related reference:
“Planning for the 7014-T00 and 7014-T42 racks” on page 464
Rack specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.
“Model 7014-T42, 7014-B42, and 0553 rack” on page 448
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical,
power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.

20 Site and hardware planning

Chapter 9, “Power distribution unit and power cord options for 7014, 0551, 0553, and 0555 rack,” on page
487
Power distribution units (PDUs) can be used with the 7014, 0551, 0553 and 0555 racks. The various
configurations and specifications are provided.
“0551, 0553, 0555, and 7014 rack configurations” on page 451
The 0551 or 7014-T00 provide a 1.8 meter rack (36 EIA units of total space). The 7014-T42 or 0553
provides a 2.0 meter rack (42 EIA units of total space).
“Model 0555 and 7014-S25 rack” on page 461
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical,
power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.
Related information:
Acoustics

Plan view for model 8204-E8A and 9409-M50

Dimensional planning information is shown in this top-down view of your server.

The following figure shows dimensional planning information for model 8204-E8A and 9409-M50 .

Figure 3. Model 8204-E8A and 9409-M50 plan view (rack-mount)

3D ASHRAE view for models 8204-E8A

Use the ASHRAE declarations table and figures to determine the measurement reporting requirements
defined in the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
Thermal Guidelines for Data Processing Environments.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 21

Table 34.
Description
Typical Heat
Description Release2 Airflow nominal1 Airflow maximum1 at 35°C (95°F)
Configuration watts cfm m3/hr cfm m3/hr
Minimum 320 85 144 130 221
Typical 425 85 144 130 221
Full 683 85 144 130 221
Weight and See “Model 8204-E8A and 9409-M50 server specifications” on page 18 for weight and system
system dimension dimensions.
ASHRAE Class 3
Minimum 1-core, 4.2 GHz processor, two 1 GB memory DIMMs, two 15 k RPM hard disk drives, one PCI
Configuration card, DVD, Dual 1 Gb host Ethernet adapter
Typical 2-core, 4.7 GHz processor, four 2 GB memory DIMMs, four 15 k RPM hard disk drives, two PCI
Configuration cards, DVD, Quad 1 Gb host Ethernet adapter
Full 4-core, 4.7 GHz processor, eight 8 GB memory DIMMs, eight 15 k RPM SFF hard disk drives,
Configuration four PCI cards, DVD, Dual 10 Gb host ethernet adapter
Notes:
1. Airflow includes the redundant power supplies (total of two power supplies per server).
2. The product safety rating label contains the following information:
v 100-127/200-240 V ac
v 10/6 A | 1.2 kVA
v 50/60 Hz | 1-phase

Model 8234-EMA server specifications

Server specifications provide detailed information for your server, including dimensions, electrical data,
power, temperature, environment requirements, and service clearances.

Use the following specifications to plan for your server.

Rack-mounted drawer
Table 35. Rack-mounted drawer. This table provides the dimensions for the 8234-EMA server.
Width Depth Height EIA units Weight
483 mm (19 in.) 790 mm (31.1 in.) 174.1 mm (6.85 in.) 4 63.6 kg (140 lb)

Shipping dimensions
Table 36. Shipping dimensions for a rack-mounted drawer. This table provides the shipping dimensions for the
8234-EMA rack-mounted drawer.
Width Depth Height Weight
648 mm (25.5 in.) 991 mm (39 in.) 704 mm (27.7 in.) 80 kg (175 lb)

22 Site and hardware planning

Table 37. PDU
PDU Four-core processor system
Drawer mounted in 0551 rack, 7014-T00, 7014-T42 and 0231 ( 8-core)
0553, 0555 racks, Power distribution unit (PDU)
0232 ( 16-core)

Electrical
Table 38. Electrical. This table provides the electrical information for the 8234-EMA server.
Electrical characteristics Properties
Maximum kVA 1.224 kVA2
Rated voltage and frequency 200 - 240 V ac at 50/60 plus or minus 3 Hz
Maximum thermal output 4096 BTU/hr maximum
Maximum power consumption 1200 watts maximum
Power factor 0.98
Maximum inrush current 88 A
Maximum leakage current 3 mA1
Phase 1
Dual power feature code Included
Maximum branch circuit breaker 20 A
Note:
1. Measured according to IEC 60950.
2. To calculate the amperage, multiply the kVA by 1000 and divide that number by the operating voltage.

Environment requirements
Table 39. Environment requirements. This table provides the recommended temperatures, humidity, and altitude for
the 8234-EMA server.
Environment Temperature
Recommended operating temperature 18 - 26°C (64.4 - 78.8°F)1
Operating temperature 5 - 35°C (41 - 95°F)
Recommended humidity 34 - 54%
Operating humidity 8 - 80%
Maximum operating altitude 3048 m (10 000 ft)1
Storage temperature 1 - 60°C
Storage relative humidity 5 - 80%
Shipping temperature -40 - 60°C (-40 - 140°F)
Shipping relative humidity 5 - 100%
Operating dew point 28°C (82°F)
Nonoperating 21 °C (70 - °F)

Chapter 4. Server specifications 23

Table 39. Environment requirements (continued). This table provides the recommended temperatures, humidity, and
altitude for the 8234-EMA server.
Environment Temperature
1
The allowable operating temperature is dependent on the installation altitude. The maximum upper limit dry bulb
temperature is 35°C, up to an elevation of 900 m above sea level. The upper limit temperature is derated by 1°C per
300 m above 900 m, up to an elevation of 2400 m. The upper limit temperature is derated by 1°C per 143 m above
900 m for elevations between 2400 and 3050 m.

Figure 4. Elevation and temperature

Noise emissions
Table 40. Noise emissions eight-core processor. This table provides the acoustical noise emissions for a typical
configuration for the 8234-EMA server.
Declared A-weighted sound power level, Declared A-weighted sound pressure level,
Product description
LWad (B) LpAm (dB)
Operating Idle Operating Idle
FC 7537 (3.6 gHz)

Single rack drawer

7.8 7.8 63 63
6 hard drives

2 power supplies

24 Site and hardware planning

Table 40. Noise emissions eight-core processor (continued). This table provides the acoustical noise emissions for
a typical configuration for the 8234-EMA server.
Declared A-weighted sound power level, Declared A-weighted sound pressure level,
Product description
LWad (B) LpAm (dB)
FC 7537 (3.6 gHz)

Single rack drawer

6 hard drives

2 power supplies 7.3 7.3 56 56

19 in. rack acoustical

doors

1.8 m FC 6248, 2 m
FC 6249
LWAD is the statistical upper-limit A-weighted sound power level (rounded to the nearest 0.1).

LPAM is the mean A-weighted emission sound pressure level measured at the 1–meter bystander positions (rounded
to the nearest dB).

10 dB (decibel) = 1 B (bel).

All measurements made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.

19 in. acoustical doors are available: 1.8 m FC 6248, 2 m FC 6249. Acoustical doors provide approximately 0.5 bels
sound power and 5 dB sound pressure level attenuation.

Table 41. Noise emissions sixteen-core processor. This table provides the acoustical noise emissions for a typical
configuration for the 8234-EMA server.
Declared A-weighted sound power level, Declared A-weighted sound pressure level,
Product description
LWad (B) LpAm (dB)
Operating Idle Operating Idle
FC 7537 (3.6 gHz)

2 rack drawers
8.0 8.0 65 65
6 hard drives

2 power supplies
FC 7537 (3.6 gHz)

2 rack drawers

6 hard drives

2 power supplies 7.6 7.6 58 58

19 in. rack acoustical

doors

1.8 m FC 6248, 2 m
FC 6249

Chapter 4. Server specifications 25

Table 41. Noise emissions sixteen-core processor (continued). This table provides the acoustical noise emissions
for a typical configuration for the 8234-EMA server.
Declared A-weighted sound power level, Declared A-weighted sound pressure level,
Product description
LWad (B) LpAm (dB)
LWAD is the statistical upper-limit A-weighted sound power level (rounded to the nearest 0.1).

LPAM is the mean A-weighted emission sound pressure level measured at the 1–meter bystander positions (rounded
to the nearest dB).

10 dB (decibel) = 1 B (bel).

All measurements made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.

19 in. acoustical doors are available: 1.8 m FC 6248, 2 m FC 6249. Acoustical doors provide approximately 0.5 bels
sound power and 5 dB sound pressure level attenuation.

Table 42. Noise emissions thirty two-core processor. This table provides the acoustical noise emissions for a typical
configuration for the 8234-EMA server.
Declared A-weighted sound power level, Declared A-weighted sound pressure level,
Product description
LWad (B) LpAm (dB)
Operating Idle Operating Idle
FC 7540 (4.2 gHz)

4 rack drawer

6 hard drives

2 power supplies 7.9 7.9 60 60

19 in. rack acoustical

doors

1.8 m FC 6248, 2 m
FC 6249
LWAD is the statistical upper-limit A-weighted sound power level (rounded to the nearest 0.1).

LPAM is the mean A-weighted emission sound pressure level measured at the 1–meter bystander positions (rounded
to the nearest dB).

10 dB (decibel) = 1 B (bel).

All measurements made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.

19 in. acoustical doors are available: 1.8 m FC 6248, 2 m FC 6249. Acoustical doors provide approximately 0.5 bels
sound power and 5 dB sound pressure level attenuation.

Service clearances
Table 43. Service clearances. This table provides the service clearance area measurements. These measurements
are the area around the server that is needed for authorized service representatives to service the server.
Clearances Front Back Left or right Top
Operating 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.)
Nonoperating 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.)

26 Site and hardware planning

Electromagnetic compatibility compliance

The electromagnetic compatibility compliance is: FCC Part 15, ICES-003

Safety compliance

The safety compliance is: IEC 60950; UL 60950; CSA 60950

Special Hardware Management Console considerations

When the server is managed by a Hardware Management Console (HMC), the console must be provided
within the same room and within 8 m (26 ft) of the server.

Note: As an alternative to the local HMC requirement, it is acceptable for you to provide a supported
device, such as a PC, with connectivity and authority to operate through a remotely attached HMC. This
local device must be in the same room and within 8 m (26 ft.) of your server, and provide functional
capability equivalent to the HMC that it replaces and that is needed by the service representative to
service the system.

Delivery and subsequent transportation of the equipment

DANGER
Heavy equipment—personal injury or equipment damage might result if mishandled. (D006)

You must prepare your environment, with assistance from an authorized service provider, to accept the
new product based on the installation planning information provided. In anticipation of the equipment
delivery, prepare the final installation site in advance so that professional movers or riggers can transport
the equipment to the final installation site within the computer room. If, for some reason, this is not
possible at the time of delivery, you must make arrangements to have professional movers or riggers
return to finish the transportation at a later date. Only professional movers or riggers should transport
the equipment. The authorized service provider can only perform minimal frame repositioning within the
computer room, as needed, to perform required service actions. You are also responsible for using
professional movers or riggers when you relocate or dispose of equipment.

Plan view for model 8234-EMA

Dimensional planning information is shown in this top-down view of the server and cover.

The following figure shows dimensional planning information for model 8234-EMA.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 27

Figure 5. Model 8234-EMA plan view (rack-mount)

Model 9110-510, OpenPower 710 (9123-710), and 9110-51A server

specifications
Server specifications provide detailed information for your server, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Use the following specifications to plan for your server.

Table 44. Dimensions - Rack-mounted drawer
Measurements Width Depth Height EIA units1 Weight
Metric 437 mm 691 mm 88.9 mm 23 kg
2
English 17.20 in. 27.2 in. 3.5 in. 51 lb

Table 45. Shipping dimensions - Rack-mounted drawer

Measurements Width Depth Height Weight
Metric 635 mm 864 mm 457 mm 53 kg
English 25 in. 34 in. 18 in. 117 lb

Table 46. Shipping dimensions - Rack-mounted drawer (China)

Measurements Width Depth Height Weight
Metric 635 mm 864 mm 457 mm 53 kg
English 25 in. 34 in. 18 in. 117 lb

28 Site and hardware planning

Table 46. Shipping dimensions - Rack-mounted drawer (China) (continued)
Measurements Width Depth Height Weight

Feature code for drawer mounted in rack 7998

Power distribution unit and power cord options for 7014, 0551, or 7999
0553, 0551, and 7014-T00 racks

Table 47. Electrical

Electrical characteristics Properties
kVA (maximum) 0.500 ( 9110-510 OpenPower™ 710)

0.658 (9110-51A with 4-core, 1.5 GHz processor

configuration)
Rated voltage and frequency 100 - 127 or 200-240V ac at 50/60 plus or minus 0.5 Hz
Thermal output (maximum) 1622 Btu/hr ( 9110-510 OpenPower 710)

2133 Btu/hr (9110-51A with 4-core, 1.5 GHz processor

configuration)
Maximum power consumption 475 W ( 9110-510 OpenPower 710)

625 W (9110-51A with 4-core, 1.5 GHz processor

configuration)
Power factor 0.95
Inrush current (maximum) 75 A
Leakage current (maximum) 1.2 mA
Phase 1
Dual power feature code 7989 (quantity 2)
Branch circuit breaker 20 A (maximum)

Table 48. Environment requirements

Environment Temperature
Recommended operating temperature 5 - 35 °C (41 - 95 °F)
1

Nonoperating temperature 5 - 45 °C (41 - 113 °F)

Shipping temperature -40 - 60 °C (-40 - 140 °F)
Operating Nonoperating
Maximum dew point 28 °C (82 - °F) 29 °C (84.2 - °F)
Noncondensing humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80%
Maximum altitude 3048 m (10 000 ft) 3048 m (10 000 ft)
1
Class 3 product as defined in ASHRAE Thermal Guidelines for Data Processing Environments. The allowable
operating range is 5 - 35 °C (41 - 95 °F). See the Temperature and humidity design criteria topic for more information.

Table 49. Noise emissions

Declared A-weighted sound power Declared A-weighted sound power
Product description level level
LWAd (Category 2D, General business)
6.2 bels1 6.2 bels1
– rack drawer

Chapter 4. Server specifications 29

Table 49. Noise emissions (continued)
Declared A-weighted sound power Declared A-weighted sound power
Product description level level
LpAm (1-meter bystander) 44 dB1 44 dB1
1
Preliminary data.

For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.

Table 50. Service clearances

Clearances Front Back Left or right Top
Operating 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) Not applicable Not applicable
Nonoperating 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.)

Electromagnetic compatibility compliance: This server meets the following electromagnetic compatibility
specifications: FCC (CFR 47, Part 15); VCCI; CISPR-22; 89/336/EEC; BSMI (A2/NZS 3548:1995); C-Tick;
ICES/NMB-003; Korean EMI/EMC (MIC Notice 2000–94, Notice 2000–72); People's Republic of China
Commodity Inspection Law

Safety compliance: This server is designed and certified to meet the following safety standards: UL
60950; CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950–00; EN 60950; IEC 60950 including all National Differences

See 0551, 0553, 7014, and 0555 rack configurations for typical configurations when the 0551, 0553, 7014, or
0555 rack is populated with various server models.
Related reference:
Chapter 9, “Power distribution unit and power cord options for 7014, 0551, 0553, and 0555 rack,” on page
487
Power distribution units (PDUs) can be used with the 7014, 0551, 0553 and 0555 racks. The various
configurations and specifications are provided.
“0551 rack” on page 445
The 0551 rack specifications provide detailed information for your rack.
“Planning for the 7014-T00 and 7014-T42 racks” on page 464
Rack specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.
“Model 7014-T42, 7014-B42, and 0553 rack” on page 448
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical,
power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.
“0551, 0553, 0555, and 7014 rack configurations” on page 451
The 0551 or 7014-T00 provide a 1.8 meter rack (36 EIA units of total space). The 7014-T42 or 0553
provides a 2.0 meter rack (42 EIA units of total space).
Related information:
Temperature and humidity design criteria
Acoustics

30 Site and hardware planning

Model 9115-505 server specifications
Server specifications provide detailed information for your server, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Use the following specifications to plan for your server.

Table 51. Dimensions - Rack-mounted drawer
Measurements Width Depth Height EIA Units1 Weight
Metric 440 mm 710 mm 43 mm 17 kg
1
English 17.3 in. 28.0 in. 1.7 in. 37 lb
1
See 0551, 0553, 7014, and 0555 rack configurations for typical configurations when the 0551, 0553, 7014, and 0555 rack
is populated with various server models.

Table 52. Shipping dimensions - Rack-mounted drawer

Measurements Width Depth Height Weight
Metric 635 mm 851 mm 330 mm 20 kg
English 25.0 in. 33.5 in. 13.0 in. 43 lb

Table 53. Shipping dimensions - Rack-mounted drawer (China)

Measurements Width Depth Height Weight
Metric 610 mm 1016 mm 445 mm 27 kg
English 24.0 in. 40 in. 17.5 in. 60 lb
0259
Feature code for drawer mounted in rack

Power distribution Unit (PDU), 0551, 7014-T00, 7014-T42, 0553, and 0555
racks

Table 54. Electrical

Electrical characteristics Properties
kVA (maximum) 0.526
4
Rated voltage, rated amps, and frequency 100 - 127 V ac (12 A) to 200 - 240 V ac (10 A) at 50 to 60 plus
or minus 0.5 Hz
Thermal output (maximum) 1707 Btu/hr
Maximum power consumption 500 W
Power factor 0.95
Inrush current (maximum) 75 A
Leakage current (maximum) 1.2 mA
Phase 1
Dual power feature code 7958 (quantity 2)
Branch circuit breaker 20 A (maximum)

Table 55. Environment requirements

Environment Temperature
Recommended operating 5 - 35°C (41 - 95°F)
temperature2

Chapter 4. Server specifications 31

Table 55. Environment requirements (continued)
Environment Temperature
Nonoperating temperature 5 - 45°C (41 - 113°F)
Shipping temperature -40 - 60°C (-40 - 140°F)
Operating Nonoperating
Maximum dew point 28°C (82.4°F) 29°C (84.2°F)
Noncondensing humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80%
Maximum altitude 3048 m (10 000 ft) 3048 m (10 000 ft)

Table 56. Noise emissions1, 5

Declared A-weighted sound Declared A-weighted sound
Product description power level, LWad (B) pressure level, LpAm (dB)
Operating Idle Operating Idle
9115-505 with two hard drives and two power
6.8 6.8 52 52
supplies
9115-505 with acoustic door (feature code 6248 or
6249) with two hard drives and two power 6.2 6.2 44 44
supplies

Table 57. Service clearances

Clearances Front Back Left or right Top
Operating 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.)
762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30
Nonoperating 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.)
in.)

Electromagnetic compatibility compliance: This server meets the following electromagnetic compatibility
specifications: FCC (CFR 47, Part 15); VCCI; CISPR-22; 89/336/EEC; BSMI (A2/NZS 3548:1995); C-Tick;
ICES/NMB-003; Korean EMI/EMC (MIC Notice 2000–94, Notice 2000–72); People's Republic of China
Commodity Inspection Law

Safety compliance: This server is designed and certified to meet the following safety standards: UL
60950; CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950–00; EN 60950; IEC 60950 including all National Differences
Table 58. Notes
Notes:
1. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.
2. Class 3 product as defined in ASHRAE Thermal Guidelines for Data Processing Environments. The allowable
operating range is 5 - 35°C (41 - 95°F. See the Temperature and humidity design criteria topic for more information.
3.
4. The power supplies automatically accept any voltage with the published rated voltage range for a defined
processor configuration. If dual power supplies are installed and operating, the power supplies draw
approximately equal current from the utility (mains) and provide approximately equal current to the load.
5. All measurements made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.

Related reference:
Chapter 9, “Power distribution unit and power cord options for 7014, 0551, 0553, and 0555 rack,” on page
487
Power distribution units (PDUs) can be used with the 7014, 0551, 0553 and 0555 racks. The various
configurations and specifications are provided.

32 Site and hardware planning

“0551 rack” on page 445
The 0551 rack specifications provide detailed information for your rack.
“Planning for the 7014-T00 and 7014-T42 racks” on page 464
Rack specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.
“Model 7014-T42, 7014-B42, and 0553 rack” on page 448
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical,
power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.
“0551, 0553, 0555, and 7014 rack configurations” on page 451
The 0551 or 7014-T00 provide a 1.8 meter rack (36 EIA units of total space). The 7014-T42 or 0553
provides a 2.0 meter rack (42 EIA units of total space).
Related information:
Temperature and humidity design criteria
Acoustics

Model 9117-MMA and 9406-MMA server specifications

Server specifications provide detailed information for your server, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Use the following specifications to plan for your server.

Table 59. Dimensions
Measurements Width Depth Height EIA units1 Weight
Metric 483 mm 790 mm 174.1 mm 63.6 kg
4
English 19 in. 31.1 in. 6.85 in. 140 lb
1
See 0551, 0553, 7014, and 0555 rack configurations for typical configurations when the 0551, 0553, 7014, and 0555
rack is populated with various server models.

Table 60. Shipping dimensions - Rack-mounted drawer

Measurements Width Depth Height Weight
Metric 648 mm 991 mm 704 mm 80 kg
English 25.5 in. 39 in. 27.7 in. 175 lb

Table 61. Shipping dimensions - Rack-mounted drawer (China)

Measurements Width Depth Height Weight
Metric 640 mm 965 mm 692 mm 80 kg
English 25.2 in. 38 in. 27.25 in. 175 lb

Table 62. PDU

9117-MMA Two-core processor 9117-MMA Four-core processor
PDU system system
Drawer mounted in 0551 rack, 0231 ( 4-core) 0231 ( 8-core)
7014-T00, 7014-T42 and 0553, 0555
racks, Power distribution unit (PDU) 0232 ( 8-core) 0232 ( 16-core)

0241 (12-core) 0241 (24-core)

0242 (16-core) 0242 (32-core)

Chapter 4. Server specifications 33

Table 63. Electrical
Electrical characteristics Properties
kVA (maximum) 1.4286
Rated voltage and frequency1 200 - 240 V ac at 50/60 plus or minus 3 Hz
2, 4
Thermal output (maximum) 4778 Btu/hr
3, 4
Maximum power consumption 1400 W
Power factor 0.98
Inrush current (maximum) 88 A
Leakage current (maximum) 3 mA 5
Phase 1
Dual power feature code Included
Branch circuit breaker 20 A maximum
Note:
1. The power supplies automatically accept any voltage with the published, rated-voltage range. If dual power
supplies are installed and operating, the power supplies draw approximately equal current from the utility
(mains) and provide approximately equal current to the load.
2. Thermal output value is for each 4-core drawer configuration.
3. Maximum power consumption is specified for each 9117-MMA 8-core drawer. The 16-core, 24-core, and 32-core
configurations are based on the use of multiple 8-core drawers (for example, an 16-core configuration consists of
two 8-core drawers, a 24-core configuration consists of three 8-core drawers, and a 32-core configuration consists
of four 8-core drawers).
4. Power draw and heat load vary greatly by configuration. When planning for an electrical system, it is important
to use maximum values. However, when planning for heat load, you can use the IBM Systems Energy Estimator
to obtain a heat output estimate based on a specific configuration. See The IBM Systems Energy Estimator Web
site for more information.
5. Measured according to IEC 60950.
6. To calculate the amperage, multiply the kVA by 1000 and divide that number by the operating voltage.

Table 64. Environment requirements

Environment Temperature
Recommended operating temperature 20 - 25 °C (68 - 77 °F)1
Operating temperature range 5 - 35 °C (41 - 95 °F)
Nonoperating temperature 5 - 40 °C (41 - 104 °F)
Shipping temperature -40 - 60 °C (-40 - 140 °F)
Operating Nonoperating
Dew point 28 °C (82 °F) 21 °C (70 - °F)
Noncondensing humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80% (5 - 100% shipping)
Maximum altitude 9117-MMA Two-core processor
3048 m (10 000 ft)
system: 3048 m (10 000 ft)
9117-MMA Four-core processor
system: 3048 m (10 000 ft)8

34 Site and hardware planning

Table 64. Environment requirements (continued)
Environment Temperature
1
The allowable operating temperature is dependent on the installation altitude. The maximum upper limit dry bulb
temperature is 35°C, up to an elevation of 900 m above sea level. The upper limit temperature is derated by 1°C per
300 m above 900 m, up to an elevation of 2400 m. The upper limit temperature is derated by 1°C per 143 m above
900 m for elevations between 2400 and 3050 m.

Figure 6. Elevation and temperature

Table 65. Noise emissions two-core processor system

Product description Declared A-weighted sound power level, LWad (B) Declared A-weighted sound pressure level, LpAm (dB)
Operating Idle Operating Idle
2-core or 4-core system with
3.5 or 4.2 GHz processors,
7.1 7.1 56 34
six hard drives and two
power supplies
2-core or 4-core system with
4.7 GHz processors, six hard
7.4 7.4 59 59
drives and two power
supplies
16-core system with 3.5 or
4.2 GHz processors, six hard
7.8 7.8 61 61
drives per chassis and two
power supplies per chassis
16-core system with 4.7
GHz processors, six hard
8.1 8.1 62 62
drives per chassis and two
power supplies per chassis

Chapter 4. Server specifications 35

Table 65. Noise emissions two-core processor system (continued)
Product description Declared A-weighted sound power level, LWad (B) Declared A-weighted sound pressure level, LpAm (dB)
2-core or 4-core system with
3.5 or 4.2 GHz processors,
six hard drives and two 6.73 6.7 501 50
power supplies with rack
acoustical doors
2-core or 4-core system with
4.7 GHz processors, six hard
drives and two power 6.91 6.91 541 541
supplies with rack
acoustical doors
16-core system with 3.5 or
4.2 GHz processors, six hard
drives per chassis and two 7.31 7.31 561 561
power supplies per chassis
with rack acoustical doors
16-core system with 4.7
GHz processors, six hard
drives per chassis and two 7.61 7.61 571 571
power supplies per chassis
with rack acoustical doors
For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.

All measurements made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.

1
This is an estimated value.

Table 66. Noise emissions four-core processor system (9117-MMA)

Product description Declared A-weighted sound power level, LWad (B) Declared A-weighted sound pressure level, LpAm (dB)
Operating Idle Operating Idle
FC 7387 (4.4 gHz)

Single rack drawer

7.1 7.1 56 54
6 hard drives

2 power supplies
FC 7388 (4.4 gHz)

Single rack drawer

7.4 7.4 59 59
6 hard drives

2 power supplies
FC 7540 (4.4 gHz)

Single rack drawer

7.8 7.8 63 63
6 hard drives

2 power supplies
LWAD is the statistical upper-limit A-weighted sound power level (rounded to the nearest 0.1).

LPAM is the mean A-weighted emission sound pressure level measured at the 1–meter bystander positions (rounded to the nearest dB).

10 dB (decibel) = 1 B (bel).

All measurements made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.

19 in. acoustical doors are available: 1.8 m FC 6248, 2 m FC 6249. Acoustical doors provide approximately 0.5 bels sound power and 5 dB sound
pressure level attenuation.

Table 67. Noise emissions sixteen-core processor system (9117-MMA)

Product description Declared A-weighted sound power level, LWad (B) Declared A-weighted sound pressure level, LpAm (dB)
Operating Idle Operating Idle

36 Site and hardware planning

Table 67. Noise emissions sixteen-core processor system (9117-MMA) (continued)
Product description Declared A-weighted sound power level, LWad (B) Declared A-weighted sound pressure level, LpAm (dB)
FC 7387 (4.4 gHz)

6 hard drives 7.8 7.8 61 61

2 power supplies
FC 7387 (4.4 gHz)

6 hard drives

2 power supplies 7.3 7.3 56 56

19 in. acoustical doors

1.8 m FC 6248, 2 m FC 6249

FC 7388 (5.0 gHz)

4 rack drawers
8.1 8.1 62 62
6 hard drives

2 power supplies
FC 7388 (5.0 gHz)

4 rack drawers

6 hard drives
7.6 7.6 57 57
2 power supplies

19 in. acoustical doors

1.8 m FC 6248, 2 m FC 6249

LWAD is the statistical upper-limit A-weighted sound power level (rounded to the nearest 0.1).

LPAM is the mean A-weighted emission sound pressure level measured at the 1–meter bystander positions (rounded to the nearest dB).

10 dB (decibel) = 1 B (bel).

All measurements made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.

19 in. acoustical doors are available: 1.8 m FC 6248, 2 m FC 6249. Acoustical doors provide approximately 0.5 bels sound power and 5 dB sound
pressure level attenuation.

Table 68. Noise emissions thirty two-core processor system (9117-MMA)

Product description Declared A-weighted sound power level, LWad (B) Declared A-weighted sound pressure level, LpAm (dB)
Operating Idle Operating Idle
FC 7540 (4.2 gHz)

4 rack drawers
8.3 8.3 65 65
6 hard drives

2 power supplies
LWAD is the statistical upper-limit A-weighted sound power level (rounded to the nearest 0.1).

LPAM is the mean A-weighted emission sound pressure level measured at the 1–meter bystander positions (rounded to the nearest dB).

10 dB (decibel) = 1 B (bel).

All measurements made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.

19 in. acoustical doors are available: 1.8 m FC 6248, 2 m FC 6249. Acoustical doors provide approximately 0.5 bels sound power and 5 dB sound
pressure level attenuation.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 37

Table 69. Service clearances
Clearances Front Back Left or right Top
Operating 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.)
Nonoperating 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.)

Electromagnetic compatibility compliance: FCC Part 15, ICES-003

Safety compliance: IEC 60950; UL 60950; CSA 60950

Special Hardware Management Console considerations

When the server is managed by a Hardware Management Console (HMC), the console must be provided
within the same room and within 8 m (26 ft) of the server.

Note: As an alternative to the local HMC requirement, it is acceptable for you to provide a supported
device, such as a PC, with connectivity and authority to operate through a remotely attached HMC. This
local device must be in the same room and within 8 m (26 ft) of your server, and provide functional
capability equivalent to the HMC that it replaces and that is needed by the service representative to
service the system.

Delivery and subsequent transportation of the equipment

DANGER
Heavy equipment—personal injury or equipment damage might result if mishandled. (D006)

You must prepare your environment to accept the new product based on the installation planning
information provided, with assistance from an IBM Installation Planning Representative (IPR) or IBM
authorized service provider. In anticipation of the equipment delivery, prepare the final installation site in
advance so that professional movers or riggers can transport the equipment to the final installation site
within the computer room. If for some reason, this is not possible at the time of delivery, you must make
arrangements to have professional movers or riggers return to finish the transportation at a later date.
Only professional movers or riggers should transport the equipment. The IBM authorized service
provider can only perform minimal frame repositioning within the computer room, as needed, to perform
required service actions. You are also responsible for using professional movers or riggers when you
relocate or dispose of equipment.
Related reference:
“0551 rack” on page 445
The 0551 rack specifications provide detailed information for your rack.
“Planning for the 7014-T00 and 7014-T42 racks” on page 464
Rack specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.
“Model 7014-T42, 7014-B42, and 0553 rack” on page 448
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical,
power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.
Chapter 9, “Power distribution unit and power cord options for 7014, 0551, 0553, and 0555 rack,” on page
487
Power distribution units (PDUs) can be used with the 7014, 0551, 0553 and 0555 racks. The various
configurations and specifications are provided.
“0551, 0553, 0555, and 7014 rack configurations” on page 451
The 0551 or 7014-T00 provide a 1.8 meter rack (36 EIA units of total space). The 7014-T42 or 0553
provides a 2.0 meter rack (42 EIA units of total space).

38 Site and hardware planning

“ASHRAE declarations”
Use the ASHRAE declarations table and figures to determine the measurement reporting requirements
defined in the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
Thermal Guidelines for Data Processing Environments.
Related information:
Acoustics

Plan view for model 9117-MMA and 9406-MMA

Dimensional planning information is shown in this top-down view of your server.

The following figure shows dimensional planning information for model 9117-MMA and 9406-MMA.

Figure 7. Model 9117-MMA and 9406-MMA plan view (rack-mount)

ASHRAE declarations
Use the ASHRAE declarations table and figures to determine the measurement reporting requirements
defined in the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
Thermal Guidelines for Data Processing Environments.
Table 70. ASHRAE declarations
Typical Heat Airflow maximum1 at 35°C
Airflow nominal1
Release2 (95°F)
Description watts cfm m3/hr cfm m3/hr
Configuration 1 1102 90 153 140 238
Configuration 2 890 90 153 140 238
See Model 9117-MMA and 9406-MMA server specifications for Weight and Overall system dimension.
ASHRAE Class 3

Chapter 4. Server specifications 39

Table 70. ASHRAE declarations (continued)
Typical Heat Airflow maximum1 at 35°C
Airflow nominal1
Release2 (95°F)
Configuration 1 4-core, 4.7 GHz processor, 96 GB memory, six hard disk drives, four PCI cards, I/O
riser, CD-RW
Configuration 2 4-core, 3.5 GHz processor, 62 GB memory, six hard disk drives, five PCI cards, I/O
riser, high speed link (HSL) card, DVD
Notes:
1. Airflow for the typical and minimum configurations.
2. The product safety rating label contains the following information:
v 200 - 240 V ac
v 10 A | 2.0 kVa
v 50/60 Hz | 1-phase

Figure 8. Airflow figure for server mounted in a rack

Related reference:
“Model 9117-MMA and 9406-MMA server specifications” on page 33
Server specifications provide detailed information for your server, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.
Related information:
ASHRAE Technical Committee
ASHRAE guidelines are available in this website

Model 9118-575 server specifications

Server specifications provide detailed information for your server, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.

The model 9118-575 refers to the complete system. The system consists of multiple components, as
summarized in the following table.

40 Site and hardware planning

Table 71. Model 9118-575 components
Minimum per Maximum per
Model Description system system
FC5793 42 EIA unit, 24-inch rack (54-inch deep) 1 1
1
FC7945 Slimline door set for FC5793 rack (front and 1 11
rear)
FC7947 Acoustic door set for FC5793 rack (front and 11 11
rear)
9118-575 (FC7836)3 8-core, 1.9 GHz processor 1 12
3
9118-575 (FC7657) 16-core, 1.5 GHz processor 1 12
3
9118-575 (FC7675) 8-core, 2.2 GHz processor 1 12
3
9118-575 (FC7676) 16-core, 1.9 GHz processor 1 12
2
Various Hardware Management Console (HMC) 1 2
7045-SW4 HPS switch 0 2
FC5791 and FC5794 I/O drawer 0 5
FC6200 or FC6201 Optional integrated battery backup 0 6
Note:
1. Either slimline doors or acoustical doors are selected during the order process. Slimline doors do not meet the
acoustic limits for Category 1A or 1B.
2. For model 9118-575, a Hardware Management Console must be provided within the same room and within 8 m
(26 ft) of the server. Or, as an alternative to the local HMC requirement, it is acceptable for you to provide a
supported device (such as, a PC), with connectivity and authority to operate through a remotely-attached HMC.
This local device must be in the same room and within 8 m (26 ft) of your server, and provide functional
capability equivalent to the HMC that it replaces and that is needed by the service representative to service the
server.
3. The maximum number of processors per system is the total number of FC7836, FC7657, FC7675, and FC7676 that
can be combined to a maximum of 12.

Table 72. Dimensions and weight1

Physical Characteristic Slimline doors2 Acoustical doors2
Height 2025 mm (79.7 in.) 2025 mm (79.7 in.)
Width 785 mm (30.9 in.) 785 mm (30.9 in.)
Depth 1529 mm (60.2 in.) 1885 mm (74.2 in.)

Table 73. Weight - maximum configuration (with 1.9 GHz processor) Single frame
Without integrated battery With integrated battery Without integrated battery
With integrated battery backup with slimline backup and with backup and with
backup and slimline doors doors acoustical doors acoustical doors
1569 kg (3460 lb) 1439 kg (3173 lb) 1578 kg (3479 lb) 1448 kg (3192 lb)

Table 74. Shipping dimensions and weight

Dimensions Measurement
Height 2311 mm (91 in.)
Width 940 mm (37 in.)
Depth 1613 mm (63.5 in.)
Weight Varies by configuration

Chapter 4. Server specifications 41

Table 75. Electrical and thermal characteristics (3-phase)
Rated voltage and frequency 380 - 415 V ac at 50 480 V ac at 50 - 60
(three-phase) 200 - 240 V ac at 50 - 60 Hz - 60 Hz Hz
Rated current, power cord with 48A
plug, FC 8688 or 8689 (amperes per 48 -- --
phase)
Rated current, all other power cords
60 32 24
(amps, per phase)
Maximum power 41.6 kW
Power factor, typical 0.99 0.97 0.93
3
Inrush current (maximum) 163 A
Thermal output 142 kBtu/hr 142 kBtu/hr 142 kBtu/hr
7
Dual power feature code Standard
Branch circuit breaker and cord information See Breaker rating
and cord information

Table 76. Environment specifications (based on an altitude of 1295 m (4250 ft)

Environment Operating Nonoperating Storage4 Shipping4
Maximum wet bulb 23°C (73.4°F) 27°C (80.6°F) 29°C (84.2°F) 29°C (84.2°F)
Noncondensing
8 - 80 % 8 - 80 % 5 - 80 % 5 - 100 %
relative humidity

Table 77. Environment temperatures (based on an altitude of 1295 m (4250 ft)

Environment Temperature
8
Recommended operating temperature 10 - 32°C (50 - 89.6°F)
Nonoperating temperature 10 - 43°C (50 - 109.4°F)
Storage temperature 1 - 60°C (33.8 - 140°F)
Shipping temperature -40 - 60°C (-40 - 140°F)

Table 78. Declared acoustical noise emissions7

Product Declared A-Weighted Sound Power Level, Declared A-Weighted Sound Pressure Level,
configuration LWAd (Bels)5, 6 LpAM (dB)5, 6 (bystander, 1 m)
Operating Idle Operating Idle
Small configuration:
Two processors, bulk
power, and one I/O
8.2 8.2 65 65
drawer; nominal
conditions, slimline
door set
Small configuration:
Two processors, bulk
power, and one I/O
7.6 7.6 59 59
drawer; nominal
conditions, acoustical
door set

42 Site and hardware planning

Table 78. Declared acoustical noise emissions7 (continued)
Product Declared A-Weighted Sound Power Level, Declared A-Weighted Sound Pressure Level,
configuration LWAd (Bels)5, 6 LpAM (dB)5, 6 (bystander, 1 m)
Typical configuration:
six processors, bulk
power, and one I/O
8.67 8.67 69 69
drawer; nominal
conditions, slimline
door set
Typical configuration:
six processors, bulk
power, and one I/O
7.9 7.9 62 62
drawer; nominal
conditions, acoustical
door set
Maximum
configuration: 12
processors, bulk
power, and two I/O 8.97 8.97 727 727
drawers; nominal
conditions, slimline
door set
Maximum
configuration: 12
processors, bulk
power, and two I/O 8.2 8.2 65 65
drawers; nominal
conditions, acoustical
door set

Electromagnetic compatibility compliance: This server meets the following electromagnetic compatibility
specifications: FCC (CFR 47, Part 15); VCCI; CISPR-22; 89/336/EEC; BSMI (A2/NZS 3548:1995); C-Tick;
ICES/NMB-003; Korean EMI/EMC (MIC Notice 2000–94, Notice 2000–72); People's Republic of China
Commodity Inspection Law

Safety compliance: This server is designed and certified to meet the following safety standards: UL
60950-1; CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1; EN 60950-1; IEC 60950-1 including all national differences

Chapter 4. Server specifications 43

Table 79. Notes
Notes:
1. For configuration weights, see Approximate system weights by configuration
2. Doors are not installed during product shipment to the customer.
3. Inrush currents occur only at initial application of power (short duration for charging capacitors). No inrush
currents occur during the normal power off-on cycle.
4. When an IBM-approved vapor bag and desiccant packets are used to protect the system, the storage
specifications are valid for 6 months and the shipping specifications are valid for 1 month. Otherwise, storage
and shipping specifications are valid for two weeks each.
5. LWAd is the upper-limit A-weighted sound level; LpAM is the mean A-weighted sound pressure measured at the
1-meter bystander postions; 1 B = 10 dB.
6. All measurements made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with 9296.
7. Attention: Your server installation might be subject to government regulations (such as those prescribed by
OSHA or European Community Directives) that cover noise level exposure in the workplace. The model
9118-575 is available with an optional acoustical door feature that can reduce the likelihood of exceeding noise
level exposure limits for densely populated racks. The actual sound pressure levels in your installation will
depend on a variety of factors, including the number of racks in the installation; the size, materials, and
configuration of the room where the racks are installed; the noise levels from other equipment; the room
ambient temperature, and employees' location in relation to the equipment. It is recommended that a qualified
person, such as an industrial hygienist or acoustical consultant, be consulted to determine whether the sound
pressure levels to which employees might be exposed exceed regulatory limits.
8. The upper limit of the dry bulb temperature must be derated 1°C (1.8 °F) per 219 m (719 ft) above 1295 m (4250
ft). Maximum altitude is 3048 m (10000 ft).

Breaker rating and cord information

Use the Breaker rating and cord information table to determine the circuit breaker rating for the power
cords used with your server.

Note: The 9119–FHA server design incorporates electromagnetic interference filter capacitors required to
block electrical noise from penetrating the power grid. A characteristic of filter capacitors, during normal
operation, is high leakage currents. Depending on the server configuration, this leakage current can reach
350mA. For most reliable operation, Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI), Earth Leakage Circuit
Breaker (ELCB) or Residual Current Circuit Breaker (RCCB) type circuit breakers are not recommended
for use with 9119–FHA servers. By its internal design and grounding, the 9119–FHA server is fully
certified for safe operation (compliance with IEC, CN, UL, CSA 60950-1). However, if a leakage detection
circuit breaker is required by local electrical practice or standards, the breaker should be sized for a
leakage current rating not less than 500ma in order to reduce the risk of a server outage caused by
erroneous and spurious tripping.
Table 80. Breaker rating and cord information
Three-phase supply voltage (50/60 Hz) 200 - 240 V ac 380 - 415 V ac 480 V ac
Recommended customer-circuit-breaker 60 A (60-A plug) or 80 40 A 30 A
rating1 A (100-A plug)
Cord information 1.8 m (6 ft) and 4.3 m 14 foot, 8 AWG power 6 and 14 foot, 8AWG
(14 ft) 6 AWG power cord, (electrician power cord
cord (60-A plug), or 1.8 installed)
m (6 ft) and 4.3 m (14
ft) 6 AWG power cord
(100-A Plug)

44 Site and hardware planning

Table 80. Breaker rating and cord information (continued)
Three-phase supply voltage (50/60 Hz) 200 - 240 V ac 380 - 415 V ac 480 V ac
Recommended receptacle IEC 60309, 60 A, type Not specified, IEC 60309, 30 A, type
460R9W (not provided) electrician installed 430R7W (not provided)
or IEC 60309, 100 A,
type 4100R9W (not
provided)
Notes:
1. The exact circuit breaker ratings might not be available in all countries. Where the specified circuit breaker
ratings are not acceptable, use the nearest available rating. Always consult local electrical codes.
2. When possible, use metal backbox with power cords using IEC 60309 plugs.

Power cord features

Use the Power cord features table to view the power cord specifications available for your server.

The following three-phase power cord features are available for the three-phase model 9118-575.
Table 81. Power cord features
Nominal voltage range (V
Supply type ac) Voltage tolerance (V ac) Frequency range (Hz)
Two 3-phase power cords 200 - 480 180 - 509 47 - 63

Table 82. Power cord features

Feature code Description Voltage (V ac) Plug
8697 Power cord, 8 AWG, 4.3 m 480 IEC 60309 30 A plug
(14 ft)
8698 Power cord, 8 AWG, 1.8 m 480 IEC 60309 30 A plug
(6 ft)
8688 Power cord, 6 AWG/Type 200-240 IEC 60309 60 A plug
W, 4.3 m (14 ft)
8689 Power cord, 6 AWG/Type 200-240 IEC 60309 60 A plug
W, 1.8 m (6 ft)
8686 Power cord, 6 AWG, 4.3 m 200-240 IEC 60309 100 A plug
(14 ft)
8687 Power cord, 6 AWG, 1.8 m 200-240 IEC 60309 100 A plug
(6 ft)
86941 Power cord, 6 AWG/Type 380-415 No plug
W, 4.3 m (14 ft)
86771 Power cord, 8 AWG, 4.3 m 380-415 No plug
(14 ft)
1
These power cords are shipped without a plug or receptacle. An electrician might be required to install the plug
and receptacle to meet applicable country or region electrical codes.

Doors and covers

Doors and covers are an integral part of the system and are required for product safety, proper airflow
and cooling, and electromagnetic compatibility compliance.

The following rear door options are available for model 9118-575:
v Enhanced acoustical cover option

Chapter 4. Server specifications 45

 This feature provides a low-noise option for sites with stringent acoustical requirements and where a
minimal system footprint is not critical. The acoustical cover option consists of special front and rear
doors that are approximately 250 mm (10 in.) deep and contain acoustical treatment that lowers the
noise level of the machine by approximately 7 dB (0.7 B) compared to the slimline doors. This
reduction in noise emission levels means that the noise level of a single model system with slimline
covers is about the same as the noise level of five model systems with acoustical covers.
v Slimline cover option
This feature provides an option to take up less floor space and cost less, when space is be more critical
than acoustical noise levels. The slimline cover option consists of a front door, which is approximately
100 mm (4 in.) deep, and a rear door, which is approximately 50 mm (2 in.) deep. No acoustical
treatment is available for this option.
v Rear door heat exchanger option
The rear door heat exchanger is a water-cooled device that mounts on the rear of the IBM 19-inch and
24-inch racks to cool the air that is heated and exhausted by devices inside the rack. A supply hose
delivers chilled, conditioned water to the heat exchanger. A return hose delivers warmed water back to
the water pump or chiller. Each rear door heat exchanger can remove up to 50 000 Btu (or
approximately 15 000 watts) of heat from your data center. For detailed information on preparing your
data center for using the rear door heat exchanger, see Planning for the installation of rear door heat
exchangers.
Related information:
Planning for the installation of rear door heat exchangers

Plan views
Dimensional planning information is shown in this top down view of your server.

The following figure shows dimensional planning information for single-frame systems.

Figure 9. Plan view for single-frame systems with acoustical doors

46 Site and hardware planning

Figure 10. Plan view for single frame systems with slimline doors

Attention: When moving the rack, note the caster swivel diameters shown in the following figure. Each
caster swivels in an approximate 130 mm (5.1 inch) diameter.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 47

Figure 11. Leveling foot and frame dimensions

Raised-floor requirements and preparation

A raised-floor is strongly recommended for model 9118-575 and its associated rack to ensure optimal
performance for system cooling, cable management, and to comply with electromagnetic compatibility
requirements.

Raised-floor cutouts should be protected by electrically nonconductive molding, appropriately sized, with
edges treated to prevent cable damage and to prevent casters from rolling into the floor cutouts.

Cutting and placing floor panels

These guidelines specify how to make the necessary openings in the raised floor for installing your
server.

Use the following procedure to cut and place floor panels in the raised floor. The x-y alphanumeric grid
positions are used to identify relative positions of cutout floor panels that might be cut in advance.
1. Measure the panel size of the raised floor.
2. Verify the floor panel size. The floor panel size illustrated is 600 mm (23.6 in.) and 610 mm (24 in.)
panels.

48 Site and hardware planning

3. Ensure adequate floor space is available to place the frames over the floor panels exactly as shown in
the figure. Use the plan view, if necessary. Consider all obstructions above and below the floor.
4. Identify the panels needed, and list the total quantity of each panel required for the installation.
5. Cut the required quantity of panels. When cutting the panels, you must adjust the size of the cut for
the thickness of the edge molding you are using. The dimensions shown in the figures are finished
dimensions. For ease of installation, number each panel as it is cut, as shown in the following figure.

Note: Depending on the panel type, additional panel support (pedestals) might be required to restore
structural integrity of the panel. Consult the panel manufacturer to ensure that the panel can sustain a
concentrated load of 525 kg (1160 lb). For multiple frame installation, it is possible that two casters
will produce loads as high as 1050 kg (2320 lb).
6. Use the following raised-floor figure to install the panels in the proper positions.

Note:
a. This floor-tile arrangement is recommended so that the casters or leveling pads are placed on
separate floor tiles to minimize the weight on a single floor tile. Furthermore, tiles bearing the
weight (having casters or leveling pads on the tiles) should be uncut to retain the strength of the
floor tile.
b. The following figure is intended only to show relative positions and accurate dimensions of floor
cutouts. The figure is not intended to be a machine template and is not drawn to scale.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 49

Figure 12. Raised floor with 610 mm (24 in.) floor panels

Securing the rack

Securing your rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor or to a raised floor prevents movement when
vibrations occur.

Securing the rack is an optional procedure. See Vibration and shock for more information.

The following can be ordered by the customer as additional rack-securing options for model 9118-575.
v Request for Price Quotation (RPQ) 8A1183 for attaching the rack-mounting plates to the concrete floor
(nonraised floor)
v RPQ 8A1185 to attach the rack to a concrete floor when server is on a raised floor 228.6 -330.2 mm (9
-13 in. depth)
v RPQ 8A1186 to attach the rack to a concrete floor when server is on a raised floor 304.8 -558.8 mm (12
-22 in. depth)

Before the service representative can perform the tie-down procedure, you must complete the floor
preparation described in Cutting and placing floor panels and the procedures described in Attaching the
rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor or Attaching the rack to a 9 - 13 in. or 12 - 22 in. floor.

50 Site and hardware planning

Related reference:
“Cutting and placing floor panels” on page 48
These guidelines specify how to make the necessary openings in the raised floor for installing your
server.
“Attaching the rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor”
Use this procedure to attach the rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor.
“Attaching the rack to a 9 - 13 in. or 12 - 22 in. floor” on page 55
Use these steps to attach your rack to a 228.6 - 330.2 mm (9 - 13 in. depth). floor.
Related information:
Vibration and shock

Installing the frame tie-down kit

This procedure describes how to install a frame tie-down kit and floor tie-down hardware.

The following procedures describe how to install a frame tie-down kit and floor tie-down hardware to
secure an IBM rack to a concrete floor beneath a 228.6 - 330.2 mm (9 - 13 in. depth) or a 304.8 - 558.8 mm
(12 - 22 in. depth) raised-floor environment or to a nonraised floor.

Positioning the rack

Use this procedure to unpack and position your rack.

To unpack and position the rack, do the following:

Note: See Moving the system to the installation site before attempting to position the rack.
1. Remove all packing and tape from the rack.
2. Place the last floor covering exactly adjacent and in the front of the final installation location.
3. Position the rack according to the customer floor plan.
4. Lock each caster wheel by tightening the thumbscrew on the caster.

Figure 13. Caster thumbscrew

5. While moving the system to its final installed location and during relocation, it might be necessary to
lay down floor covering, such as Lexan sheets, to prevent floor panel damage.
Related reference:
“Moving the system to the installation site” on page 74
Several factors must be considered before moving the system to the installation site.

Attaching the rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor

Use this procedure to attach the rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor.

Attention: It is your responsibility to ensure the following steps are completed before the service
representative performs the tie-down procedure.

Note: You should obtain the service of a qualified structural engineer to determine appropriate anchoring
of the mounting plates. A minimum of five anchor bolts for each mounting plate must be used to secure

Chapter 4. Server specifications 51

the plates to the concrete floor. Because some of the drilled holes might be aligned with concrete
reinforcement rods below the surface of the concrete floor, additional holes must be drilled. Each
mounting plate must have at least five usable holes, two that are on the right-hand sides and the other
two are on opposite ends, and one hole at the center. The mounting plates should be able to withstand
1134 kg (2500 lb) pulling force on each end.
1. Be sure the rack is in the correct location. To ensure that the holes are in the correct location, the
diagonal distance of the center of the holes should be 1211.2 mm (47.7 in.). The distance between the
center holes to the center of the next holes should be 654.8 mm (25.8 in.) (the side-to-side distance)
and 1019 mm (40.1 in.) (the front-to-back distance).

52 Site and hardware planning

Figure 14. Rack tie down (nonraised floor)

2. Place the mounting plates (item 1 in the previous figure), front and rear, in the approximate
mounting position under the system rack.
3. To align the mounting plates to the system rack, do the following:
a. Place the four rack-mounting bolts (item 6 in the previous figure) through the plate assembly
holes at the bottom of the rack. Install the bushings and washers (item 4 and 5 in the previous
figure) to ensure bolt positioning.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 53

 Note: The plastic bushing is intended to provide electrical insulation between the frame and the
ground. When such insulation is not required, the plastic bushing does not need to be installed.
b. Position the mounting plates (item 1 in the previous figure) under the four rack-mounting bolts
(item 6 in the previous figure) so that the mounting bolts are centered directly over the tapped
holes.
c. Turn the rack-mounting bolts (item 6 in the previous figure) three or four rotations into the
tapped holes.
4. Mark the floor around the edge of the mounting plates, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 15. Mark floor around edge of mounting plates

5. Remove the mounting bolts from the threaded holes.

6. Move the rack away from the mounting plates.
7. Mark the floor at the center of each hole in the mounting plate (including tapped holes).
8. Remove the mounting plates from the marked locations.
9. At the marked location of the tapped mounting holes, drill two holes approximately 19 mm (.75 in.)
to allow clearance for the ends of the two rack-mounting bolts. The ends of the rack-mounting bolts
might protrude past the thickness of the mounting plate. Drill one hole in each group of anchor bolt
location marks as indicated on the marked floor.
10. Using at least five heavy-duty-concrete anchoring bolts for each mounting plate, mount the
mounting plates to the concrete floor.

54 Site and hardware planning

Attaching the rack to a 9 - 13 in. or 12 - 22 in. floor
Use these steps to attach your rack to a 228.6 - 330.2 mm (9 - 13 in. depth). floor.

Attention: The frame tie downs are intended to secure a frame weighing less than 1429 kg (3150 lb).
These tie downs are designed to secure the frame on a raised floor installation. It is the customer's
responsibility to ensure the following steps are completed before the service representative performs the
tie-down procedure.

Use the following to determine your next step:

1. If the rack is being attached to a short depth raised floor environment 228.6 mm to 330.2 mm (9 in. to
13 in. depth) install the Raised Floor Tie Down Kit (Part number 16R1102) described in the following
table.
Table 83. Raised Floor Tie Down Kit (Part number 16R1102)
Item Part Number Quantity Description
1 44P3438 1 Wrench
2 44P2996 2 Stabilizer bar
3 44P2999 4 Turnbuckle Assembly

2. If the rack is being attached to a deep raised floor environment 304.8 mm to 558.8 mm (12 in. to 22 in.
depth) install the Raised Floor Tie Down Kit (Part number 16R1103) described in the following table.
Table 84. Raised Floor Tie Down Kit (Part number 16R1103)
Item Part Number Quantity Description
1 44P3438 1 Wrench
2 44P2996 2 Stabilizer bar
3 44P3000 4 Turnbuckle Assembly

It is the customer's responsibility to ensure the following steps are completed before the service
representative performs the tie-down procedure.

Note: To accommodate a floor with a depth of more than 558.8 mm (22 in.), a steel beam or a steel
channel adapter for mounting the subfloor eyebolts is required. The customer must supply the floor
eyebolts.

Consider the following when preparing the floor for tie-down:

v The hardware is designed to support a frame weighing no more than 1578.5 kg (3480 lb).
v The estimated maximum concentrated load on one caster for a 1578.5 kg (3480 lb)-system is 526.2 kg
(1160 lb). For a multiple system installation, it is possible that one floor tile will bear a total
concentrated load of 1052.3 kg (2320 lb).

To install the eyebolts, do the following:

1. Obtain the service of a qualified structural engineer to determine appropriate installation of the
eyebolts.
2. Consider the following before installing the eyebolts:
v Floor eyebolts must be securely anchored to the concrete floor.
v For a single frame installation, four 1/2-in. diameter by 13-inch subfloor eyebolts should be secured
to the subfloor.
v The minimum height of the center of the internal diameter is 2.54 mm (1 in.) above the concrete
floor surface.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 55

 v The maximum height is 63.5 mm (2.5 in.) above the concrete floor surface. Higher than 63.5 mm
(2.5 in.) can cause excessive lateral deflection to the tie-down hardware.
v The eyebolt's internal diameter should be 1-3/16 inch, and each eyebolt should be able to withstand
1224.7 kg (2700 lb). The customer should obtain the service of a qualified consultant or structural
engineer to determine the appropriate anchoring method for these eyebolts and to ensure that the
raised floor and the building can support the floor-loading specifications.
v To ensure that the holes are in the correct location, the diagonal distance of the center of the holes
should be 1211.2 mm (47.7 in.). The distance between the center holes to the center of the next holes
should be 654.8 mm (25.8 in.) (the side to side distance) and 1019 mm (40.1 in.) (the front to back
distance).
3. Verify that the four eyebolts are positioned to match the dimensions is given in the following figures.

Figure 16. Eyebolt positioning for 610 mm (24 in.) floor tile layout

56 Site and hardware planning

Figure 17. Eyebolt positioning for 600 mm (23.6 in.) floor tile layout

Chapter 4. Server specifications 57

Figure 18. Stabilizer bar layout (top view)

4. Install the eyebolts to the floor.

58 Site and hardware planning

Figure 19. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie-down hardware for 228.6 mm to 330.2 mm (9 in. to 13 in.) raised floor (Part
number 44P2999)

Chapter 4. Server specifications 59

Figure 20. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie-down hardware for 228.6 mm to 330.2 mm (9 in. to 13 in.) raised floor (Part
number 44P2999)

60 Site and hardware planning

Figure 21. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie-down hardware for 304.8 mm to 558.8 mm (12 in. to 22 in.) raised floor
(Part number 44P3000)

Chapter 4. Server specifications 61

Figure 22. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie-down hardware for 304.8 mm to 558.8 mm (12 in. to 22 in.) raised floor
(Part number 44P3000)

Considerations for multiple-system installations

Learn about the installation requirements for a multiple-system installation.

In a multiple-system installation, it is possible that a floor tile with cable cutouts (refer to Cutting and
placing floor panels) will bear two concentrated static loads up to 526 kg (1160 lb) per caster and leveler.
Thus, the total concentrated load can be as high as 1052 kg (2320 lb). Contact the floor tile manufacturer
or consult a structural engineer to ensure that the raised floor assembly can support this load.

When you are integrating a model 9118-575 into an existing multiple-system environment, or when
adding additional systems to an installed 9118-575, consider the following factors:
v Minimum aisle width
For multiple rows of systems containing one or more 9118-575 models, the minimum aisle width in the
front of the system is 1473 mm (58 in.) and 914 mm (36 in.) in the rear of the system to allow room to
perform service operations. The front and rear service clearances should be at least 1473 mm (58 in.)
and 914 mm (36 in.), respectively. Service clearances are measured from the edges of the frame (with
doors open) to the nearest obstacle.
v Thermal interactions

62 Site and hardware planning

Systems should be faced front-to-front and rear-to-rear to create "cold" and "hot" aisles to maintain
effective system thermal conditions, as shown in the following figure.
Cold aisles need to be of sufficient width to support the airflow requirements of the installed systems
as indicated in Cooling requirements. The airflow per tile will be dependent on the underfloor pressure
and perforations in the tile. A typical underfloor pressure of 0.025 in. of water will supply 300-400 cfm
through a 25% open 2 ft by 2 ft floor tile.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 63

Figure 23. Proposed floor layout for multiple systems

Related reference:
“Cutting and placing floor panels” on page 48
These guidelines specify how to make the necessary openings in the raised floor for installing your
64 Site and hardware planning
server.
“Cooling requirements” on page 71
Use the cooling system requirements in the proceeding table in conjunction with the cooling requirements
graph and chilled airflow area graphic to determine the area of floor tiles to supply chilled air to the
system.

Service clearances
The service clearance area is the area around the server that is needed for IBM service representatives to
service the server.

The minimum service clearance for systems with slimline doors is shown in the following figures.

Figure 24. Service clearances for 9118-575 single frame systems with slimline doors

Chapter 4. Server specifications 65

Figure 25. Service clearances for 9118-575 single frame systems with slimline doors (with alternative right-side service
clearance)

The minimum service clearance for systems with acoustical doors is shown in the following figures.

66 Site and hardware planning

Figure 26. Service clearances for 9118-575 single-frame systems with acoustical doors

Chapter 4. Server specifications 67

Figure 27. Service clearances for 9118-575 single-frame systems with acoustical doors (with alternative right-side
service clearance)

Front service access is necessary on model 9118-575 to accommodate a lift tool for the servicing of large
drawers (the processor books and I/O drawers). Front and rear service access is necessary to
accommodate the lift tool for servicing of the optional integrated battery backup.

68 Site and hardware planning

Figure 28. Floor plan considerations for single units

ASHRAE declarations
Use the ASHRAE declarations table and figures to determine the measurement reporting requirements
defined in the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
Thermal Guidelines for Data Processing Environments.

These guidelines are available at ASHRAE Technical Committee.

Table 85. ASHRAE declarations
Airflow maximum1 at 35°C
Typical Heat Release Airflow nominal1
Description (95°F)
kW cfm m3/hr cfm AEm3/hr
Minimum configuration 3.7 485 824 725 1232
Maximum configuration 41.6 2960 5029 4300 7306
Typical configuration 22.2 1610 2735 2350 3993
ASHRAE Class 3
Minimum configuration One processor drawer
Maximum configuration 12 processor drawers and two I/O drawers
Typical configuration 6 processor drawers and 2 I/O drawers

See Model 9118-575 server specifications for Weight and Overall system dimension.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 69

Figure 29. Airflow figure for server mounted in a rack

Related information:
ASHRAE Technical Committee
ASHRAE guidelines are available in this website

Total system power consumption

Use the System power requirements for 1.9 GHz processor systems table to determine the total system
power consumption for your server's configuration.

The following table contains the maximum power requirements for model 9118-575.
Table 86. System power requirements for 1.9 GHz processor systems (9118-575 only) - (kW)
I/O drawers and switch drawers
Processor
drawers8, 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
4 4 1,4 2, 4
1 3.7 4.9 5.9 7.0
4 4 4
2 6.9 8.1 9.2 10.31,4 11.42, 4
3 10.24 11.34 12.44 13.64 14.71, 4 15.82, 4
4 13.54 14.64 15.64 16.84 17.94 19.01, 5 20.11, 5
5 16.74 17.84 18.95 20.05 21.25 22.33, 5
6 19.95 21.15 22.25 23.36, 10 24.46, 10 25.53, 6, 10
7 23.26, 10 24.36, 10 25.46, 10 26.56, 10 27.63, 6, 10 28.83, 6, 10
8 26.46, 10 27.66, 10 28.76, 10 29.86, 10 30.93, 6, 10
9 29.76, 10 30.86, 10 31.97, 10 33.07, 10 34.13, 7, 10
10 32.97, 10 34.07, 10 35.27, 10 36.37, 10
11 36.27, 10 37.37, 10 38.43, 7, 10 39.57, 10
12 39.47, 10 40.57, 10 41.63, 7, 10

The following notes apply to the preceding table.

70 Site and hardware planning

Note:
1. This configuration is valid only when populated with one 7045-SW4 switch drawer.
2. This configuration is valid only when populated with two 7045-SW4 switch drawers.
3. Not supported with integrated battery backup.
4. Power cord rules for this configuration:

480 V ac (30-A cord)

60 A cord allowed 60 A cord redundant 380 - 415 V ac (no plug)

Yes Yes Yes

5. Power cord and bulk power jumper rules for this configuration:

480 V ac (30-A cord)

60 A cord allowed 60 A cord redundant 380 - 415 V ac (no plug)

Yes No Yes

6. Power cord and bulk power jumper rules for this configuration:

480 V ac (30-A cord)

60 A cord allowed 60 A cord redundant 380 - 415 V ac (no plug)

Yes No No

7. Power cord and bulk power jumper rules for this configuration:

480 V ac (30-A cord)

60 A cord allowed 60 A cord redundant 380 - 415 V ac (no plug)

No Not applicable No

8. The maximum number of processors drawers per system is the total number of FC7836, FC7657,
FC7675, and FC7676 that can be combined to a maximum of 12.
9. For each FC7657, FC7675, and FC7676 installed, subtract 0.2 kW from the total system power
specified in this table.
10. A bulk power jumper (BPJ) is provided for this configuration. The presence of the BPJ prevents the
concurrent maintenance of the bulk power controllers (BPC) and bulk power distributors (BPD) in
the bulk power assemblies.

Maximum configurations are based on 64 memory cards per processor, two disk drives and four PCI
adapter cards. To determine the typical power consumption for a specific configuration, subtract the
following typical power values.

Component Typical power value (W)

Disk drives 20
PCI adapter card 20
Memory cards 10

Cooling requirements
Use the cooling system requirements in the proceeding table in conjunction with the cooling requirements
graph and chilled airflow area graphic to determine the area of floor tiles to supply chilled air to the
system.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 71

The model 9118-575 requires air for cooling. As shown in Considerations for multiple system installations,
rows of model 9118-575, and systems must face front-to-front. The use of a raised floor is recommended
to provide air through perforated floor panels placed in rows between the fronts of systems (the cold
aisles shown in Considerations for multiple system installations).

The following table provides system cooling requirements based on system configuration. The letter
designations in the table correspond to the letter designations shown in Cooling requirements graph.
Table 87. System cooling requirements for processor systems
Number of Number of I/O drawers and switch drawers
processor
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
drawers
1 A B B1 B2
2 B C C D1 D2
3 D D E E F1 F2
4 E E F F G G1 H2
5 F G G G H H3
6 G H H I I J3
7 J J K K L3 L3
8 K K L L M3
9 K K L L3 M3
10 L M M N3
11 M N N3 O3
12 O O P3
Note:
1. This configuration is valid only when populated with one 7045-SW4 switch drawer.
2. This configuration is valid only when populated with two 7045-SW4 switch drawers.
3. Not supported with integrated battery backup.

Related reference:
“Considerations for multiple-system installations” on page 62
Learn about the installation requirements for a multiple-system installation.

Cooling requirements graph

Use the cooling requirements graph in conjunction with the cooling requirements tables and the chilled
airflow area graphic to determine the area of the floor tiles to supply chilled air to the system.

72 Site and hardware planning

Figure 30. Cooling requirements graph

Requirements for the chilled airflow area

The Chilled airflow area figure shows the chilled airflow area required for your system.

Use the system cooling requirements tables and the cooling requirements graph to determine the area of
floor tiles to supply chilled air to the system.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 73

Figure 31. Chilled airflow area

Moving the system to the installation site

Several factors must be considered before moving the system to the installation site.

Prior to moving the system to the installation site, you should:

v Determine the path that must be taken to move the system from the delivery location to the
installation site.
v Verify that the height of all doorways, elevators, and so on are sufficient to allow moving the system to
the installation site.
v Verify that the weight limitations of elevators, ramps, floors, floor tiles, and so on are sufficient to
allow moving the system to the installation site. If the height or weight of the system can cause a
problem when the system is moved to the installation site, you should contact your local site planning
or sales representative.

For more detailed information, see .

If needed, a height reduction feature 7960 might be ordered. This feature allows for the system frame and
the expansion frame to be shipped in two pieces and assembled at your location. With this feature, the
top section of the system frame (including the power subsystem) is removed. The height of the system

74 Site and hardware planning

frame with the upper section removed is reduced by .35 m (14 in.) to approximately 1.64 m (65 in.). For
planning purposes, the weight of the rack top frame and components are shown in the following table.
Table 88. Weight of rack top frame and components
Item Weight1
Rack top frame and crate 210.5 kg (463 lb)
Rack top frame with power (4 bulk power regulators, 4 bulk power 149.5 kg (329 lb)
distributors, and 2 bulk power assemblies)2
Bulk power regulator 13.6 kg (30 lb)
Bulk power distributor 6.4 kg (14 lb)
Bulk power assembly 18 kg (40 lb)
Rack top frame without rails 30 kg (66 lb)
Rack top frame with rails 33 kg (73 lb)
3
Side cover 22.7 kg (50 lb)
Front acoustic door 17.9 kg (39.4 lb)
Rear acoustic door 17.2 kg (37.9 lb)
Front slimline door 17.2 kg (38 lb)
Rear slimline door 9.1 kg (20 lb)
Note:
1. Maximum total weight can be up to 255 kg (561 lb)
2. Can be shipped with up to six bulk power regulators and six bulk power distributors.
3. Each side cover consists of two panels.

Delivery and subsequent transportation of the equipment

DANGER
Heavy equipment—personal injury or equipment damage might result if mishandled. (D006)

You must prepare your environment to accept the new product based on the installation planning
information provided, with assistance from an IBM Installation Planning Representative (IPR) or IBM
authorized service provider. In anticipation of the equipment delivery, prepare the final installation site in
advance so that professional movers or riggers can transport the equipment to the final installation site
within the computer room. If for some reason, this is not possible at the time of delivery, you must make
arrangements to have professional movers or riggers return to finish the transportation at a later date.
Only professional movers or riggers should transport the equipment. The IBM authorized service
provider can only perform minimal frame repositioning within the computer room, as needed, to perform
required service actions. You are also responsible for using professional movers or riggers when you
relocate or dispose of equipment.
Related information:
Acoustics

Phase imbalance and BPR configuration

Use the Phase imbalance and BPR configuration table to determine the phase imbalance of your server's
configuration.

Depending on the number of bulk power regulators (BPRs) in your system, phase imbalance can occur in
line currents. All systems are provided with two bulk power assemblies (BPAs), with separate power

Chapter 4. Server specifications 75

cords. Phase currents will be divided between two power cords in normal operation. The following table
illustrates phase imbalance as a function of BPR configuration. For information about power
consumption, see Total system power consumption.
Table 89. Phase imbalance and BPR configuration
Number of BPRs per BPA Phase A line current Phase B line current Phase C line current
1 Power / Vline Power / Vline 0
2 0.5 Power / Vline 0.866 Power / Vline 0.5 Power / Vline
3 0.577 Power / Vline 0.577 Power / Vline 0.577 Power / Vline
Note: Power is calculated from Total system power consumption. Vline is line-to-line nominal input voltage. Because
total system power is divided between two power cords, divide the power number by 2.

Related reference:
“Total system power consumption” on page 70
Use the System power requirements for 1.9 GHz processor systems table to determine the total system
power consumption for your server's configuration.

Balancing power panel loads

Use these methods to ensure that power panel loads are balanced.

When three-phase power is used, and depending on the system configuration, the phase currents can be
fully balanced or unbalanced. System configurations with three BPRs per BPA have balanced power panel
loads, while configurations with only one or two have unbalanced loads. With two BPRs per BPA, two of
the three-phases draw an equal amount of current, and are, nominally, 57.8% of the current on the third
phase. With one BPR per BPA, two of three-phases carry an equal amount of current, with no current
drawn on the third phase. The following figure is an example of feeding several loads of this type from
two power panels in a way that balances the load among the three-phases.

Note: Use of ground fault interrupt (GFI) circuit breakers is not recommended for this system because
GFI circuit breakers are earth leakage current sensing circuit breakers and this system is a high earth
leakage current product.

Figure 32. Power panel load balancing

The method illustrated in the preceding figure requires that the connection from the three poles of each
breaker to the three-phase pins of a connector be varied. Some electricians might prefer to maintain a
consistent wiring sequence from the breakers to the connectors. The following figure shows a way to
balance the load without changing the wiring on the output of any breakers. The three-pole breakers are

76 Site and hardware planning

alternated with single-pole breakers, so that the three-pole breakers do not all begin on Phase A.

Figure 33. Power panel load balancing

The following figure shows another way of distributing the unbalanced load evenly. In this case, the
three-pole breakers are alternated with two-pole breakers.

Figure 34. Power panel load balancing

Configuring power cords

Use the Single-frame system power cord configuration figure to route power cords through floor tile
cutouts.

The power cords exit the system from different points of the frame as indicated in the following figure.
For raised-floor applications, it is recommended that both cords be routed to the rear of the frame and
through the same floor-tile cutout. For more information about raised-floor applications, refer to Cutting
and placing floor panels.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 77

Figure 35. Single-frame system power cord configuration

Related reference:
“Cutting and placing floor panels” on page 48
These guidelines specify how to make the necessary openings in the raised floor for installing your
server.

Dual power installation

To take full advantage of the redundancy and reliability that is built into the 9118-575 system must be
powered from two different power distribution panels.

The model 9118-575 is designed with dual power cords with a fully redundant power system, except on
some larger configurations. Total system power consumption and Machine-holdup times provide details for the
configurations that have fully-redundant power and those that do not. The possible power installation
configurations are described in Dual power installations.
Related reference:
“Total system power consumption” on page 70
Use the System power requirements for 1.9 GHz processor systems table to determine the total system
power consumption for your server's configuration.
“Machine holdup times” on page 84
Use the Typical machine holdup time tables to determine the typical machine holdup times (time versus
load) for fresh and aged batteries.

78 Site and hardware planning

Related information:
Dual power installations

Approximate system weights by configuration

Use the Approximate system weights tables to calculate the approximate weight of your system based on
its configuration.

If the system that you order weighs more than 1134 kg (2500 lb) when it is shipped from the factory, a
weight-distribution plate is provided for the system. This plate is used to minimize the point loading
from casters and leveling pads.
Table 90. Approximate system weights with acoustical covers and without integrated battery backup – kg (lb)3
Number of Drawers (I/O and switches)
processor
drawers 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2
1 531 (1168) 636 (1400) 735 (1618) 835 (1836)
2 587 (1294) 714 (1574) 841 (1853) 939 (2071)1 1038 (2289)2
3 687 (1515) 793 (1747) 898 (1979) 1003 (2211) 1102 (2429)1 1201 (2647)2
4 744 (1641) 850 (1873) 955 (2105) 1060 (2337) 1166 (2570) 1265 (2788)1 1364 (3006)2
5 802 (1767) 907 (1999) 1012 (2231) 1117 (2464) 1223 (2696) 1328 (2928)
6 859 (1893) 964 (2126) 1069 (2358) 1175 (2590) 1280 (2822) 1385 (3054)
7 916 (2020) 1021 (2252) 1127 (2484) 1232 (2716) 1337 (2948) 1430 (3152)
8 973 (2146) 1078 (2378) 1184 (2610) 1289 (2842) 1394 (3074)
9 1030 (2272) 1136 (2504) 1241 (2736) 1346 (2968) 1439 (3172)
10 1088 (2398) 1193 (2630) 1298 (2862) 1403 (3094)
11 1145 (2524) 1250 (2756) 1355 (2988) 1448 (3192)
12 1202 (2650) 1307(2882) 1412 (3114)
Note:
1. This configuration is only valid when populated with one 7045-SW4 switch drawer.
2. This configuration is only valid when populated with two 7045-SW4 switch drawers.
3. For systems with slimline doors subtract 9 kg (19 lb).

Table 91. Approximate system weights with acoustical covers and with integrated battery backup – kg (lb)3
Number of Drawers (I/O and switches)
processor
drawers 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 620 (1367) 725 (1599) 824 (1817)1 923 (2035)2
2 677 (1493) 894 (1972) 1111 (2450) 1210 (2668)1 1309 (2886)2
3 958 (2112) 1063 (2344) 1169 (2576) 1274 (2808) 1373 (3026)1 1472 (3244)2
4 1015 (2238) 1121 (2470) 1226 (2702) 1331 (2934) 1436 (3167) 1535 (3385)1 Not
supported
5 1072 (2364) 1178 (2596) 1283 (2828) 1388 (3061) 1493 (3293)
6 1130 (2490) 1235 (2723) 1340 (2955) 1445 (3187) 1551 (3419)
7 1187 (2617) 1292 (2849) 1397 (3081) 1503 (3313)
8 1244 (2743) 1349 (2975) 1455 (3207) 1560 (3439)
9 1301 (2869) 1406 (3101) 1512 (3333)

Chapter 4. Server specifications 79

Table 91. Approximate system weights with acoustical covers and with integrated battery backup – kg
(lb)3 (continued)
Number of Drawers (I/O and switches)
processor
drawers 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
10 1358 (2995) 1464 (3227) 1569 (3459)
11 1416 (3121) 1521 (3353)
12 1473 (3247) 1578 (3479)
Note:
1. This configuration is only valid when populated with one 7045-SW4 switch drawer.
2. This configuration is only valid when populated with two 7045-SW4 switch drawers.
3. For systems with slimline doors subtract 9 kg (19 lb).

Weight distribution
Use the Floor loading dimensions figure and the Floor loading for system tables to determine the floor
loading for various configurations.

The following figure shows the floor loading dimensions for the model 9118-575. Use this figure in
conjunction with the floor loading tables to determine the floor loading for various configurations.

80 Site and hardware planning

Figure 36. Floor loading dimensions

The following table shows the values used for calculating floor loading for model 9118-575. Weights
include covers, width and depth are indicated without covers.
Table 92. Floor loading for system with 12 processors, 2 I/O drawers, and without integrated battery backup
Floor loading for system with 12 processors, 2 I/O drawers, and without integrated battery backup
a (sides) b (front) c (back) 1 frame
mm in. mm in. mm in. lb/ft2 kg/m2
25 1.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 206.6 1008.7
25 1.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 168.0 820.4
25 1.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 143.0 698.1
254 10.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 140.6 686.3
254 10.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 116.0 566.5
254 10.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 100.1 488.7
508 20.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 107.3 523.9
508 20.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 89.8 438.6
508 20.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 78.5 383.2

Chapter 4. Server specifications 81

Table 92. Floor loading for system with 12 processors, 2 I/O drawers, and without integrated battery
backup (continued)
Floor loading for system with 12 processors, 2 I/O drawers, and without integrated battery backup
a (sides) b (front) c (back) 1 frame
762 30.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 88.9 434.1
762 30.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 75.3 367.9
762 30.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 66.5 324.8
Notes:
1. Floor calculations should not be based on a weight shed area beyond 30 in. from each side of the system.
2. All floor calculations are intended for a raised-floor environment.
3. Contact your IBM installation planning representative or structural engineer for further assistance with
calculating floor load.

Table 93. Floor loading for system with 12 processors, 1 I/O drawer, and with integrated battery backup
Floor loading for system with 12 processors, 1 I/O drawer, and with integrated battery backup
a (sides) b (front) c (back) 1 frame
mm in. mm in. mm in. lb/ft2 kg/m2
25 1.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 229.1 1118.5
25 1.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 185.7 906.9
25 1.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 157.6 769.5
254 10.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 154.9 756.2
254 10.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 127.3 621.5
254 10.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 109.4 534.1
508 20.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 117.5 573.7
508 20.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 97.9 477.8
508 20.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 85.1 415.5
762 30.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 96.8 472.8
762 30.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 81.6 398.3
762 30.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 71.7 349.9
Notes:
1. Floor calculations should not be based on a weight shed area beyond 30 in. from each side of the system.
2. All floor calculations are intended for a raised-floor environment.
3. Contact your IBM installation planning representative or structural engineer for further assistance with
calculating floor load.

Floor loading for the system is illustrated in the Proposed Floor Layout for Multiple Systems in
Considerations for multiple system installations.
Related reference:
“Considerations for multiple-system installations” on page 62
Learn about the installation requirements for a multiple-system installation.

Unit emergency power off

The server has a unit emergency power off (UEPO) switch on the front of the first frame (A Frame).
When the switch is reset, the utility power is confined to the system power compartment, and all volatile
data is lost.

82 Site and hardware planning

Refer to the following figure, which shows a simplified UEPO panel.

Figure 37. Unit emergency power off figure

It is possible to attach the computer room emergency power off (EPO) system to the system UEPO. When
this is done, resetting the computer room EPO disconnects all power from the power cords and the
internal battery backup unit, if it is provided. All volatile data will be lost in this case also.

If the room EPO is not connected to the UEPO, resetting the computer room EPO removes ac power from
the system. If the interlock bypass feature is used, the system remains powered for a short time based on
system configuration.

Computer room emergency power off

You can incorporate the integrated battery backup into a computer room emergency power off (EPO)
system. Otherwise, volatile data can be lost.

When the integrated battery backup is installed and the room EPO is reset, the batteries engage and the
computer continues to run. It is possible to attach the computer room EPO system to the machine EPO.
When this is done, resetting the room EPO disconnects all power from the power cords and the internal
battery backup unit. In this event, all volatile data will be lost.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 83

To incorporate the integrated battery backup into the room Emergency Power Off systems (EPO), a cable
must connect to the back of the system EPO panel. The following figures illustrate how this connection is
made.

Figure 38. Computer room emergency power off figure

The preceding figure illustrates the back of the machine UEPO panel with the room EPO cable plugging
into the machine. Notice the switch actuator. After it is moved to make the cable connection possible, the
room EPO cable must be installed for the machine to power on.

In the following figure, AMP connector 770019-1 is needed to connect to the system EPO panel. For room
EPO cables using wire sizes #20 AWG to #24 AWG, use AMP pins (part number 770010-4). This
connection should not exceed 5 Ohms, which is approximately 61 m (200 ft) of #24 AWG.

Figure 39. AMP connector figure

Machine holdup times

Use the Typical machine holdup time tables to determine the typical machine holdup times (time versus
load) for fresh and aged batteries.

84 Site and hardware planning

The following criteria apply to both machine holdup time tables.
v All times are listed in minutes.
v Machine load is listed in total ac input power (power for both power cords combined).
v A fresh battery is defined as 2.5 years old or less.
v An aged battery is defined as 6.5 years.

Note: Battery capacity decreases gradually as the battery ages (from fresh-battery value to aged-battery
value). The system diagnoses a failed-battery condition if the capacity decreases below the aged-battery
value.
Table 94. Typical machine-holdup time versus load for fresh battery
Typical machine-holdup time versus load for fresh battery
Machine load 3.3 kW 6.67 kW 10 kW 13.33 kW 16.67 kW 20 kW 21.67 kW
Integrated
battery backup N R N R N R N R N R N R N R
configuration
1 BPR 7.0 21.0 2.1 7.0
2 BPR 21.0 50.0 7.0 21.0 4.0 11.0 2.1 7.0
3 BPR 32.0 68.0 12.0 32.0 7.0 21.0 4.9 12.0 3.2 9.5 2.1 7.0 1.7 6.5
N=Nonredundant, R=Redundant

Table 95. Typical machine-holdup time versus load for aged battery
Typical machine-holdup time versus load for aged battery
Machine load 3.3 kW 6.67 kW 10 kW 13.33 kW 16.67 kW 20 kW 21.67 kW
Integrated
battery backup N R N R N R N R N R N R N R
configuration
1 BPR 4.2 12.6 1.3 4.2
2 BPR 12.6 30.0 4.2 12.6 2.4 6.6 1.3 4.2
3 BPR 19.2 41.0 7.2 19.2 4.2 12.6 2.9 7.2 1.9 5.7 1.3 4.2 1.0 3.9
N=Nonredundant, R=Redundant

Table 96. Bulk power regulator rules

Bulk power regulator (BPR) per bulk power assembly (BPA) rules5
Number of Number of I/O drawers and switch drawers
processor
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
drawers
1 12 12 12 12 Not Not Not
applicable1 applicable1 applicable
2 12 22 22 22 22 Not Not
applicable1 applicable
3 22 22 22 32 32 32 Not
applicable
4 32 32 32 32 32 33 33
5 32 32 33 33 33 33 Not
applicable
6 33 33 33 34 34 34 Not
applicable

Chapter 4. Server specifications 85

Table 96. Bulk power regulator rules (continued)
Bulk power regulator (BPR) per bulk power assembly (BPA) rules5
7 34 34 34 34 34 34 Not
applicable
8 34 34 34 34 34 Not Not
applicable applicable
9 34 34 35 35 35 Not Not
applicable applicable
10 35 35 35 35 Not Not Not
applicable applicable applicable
11 35 35 35 35 Not Not Not
applicable applicable applicable
12 35 35 35 Not Not Not Not
applicable applicable applicable applicable
13 33 33 Not Not Not Not Not
applicable applicable applicable applicable applicable
14 33 33 Not Not Not Not Not
applicable applicable applicable applicable applicable

The following notes apply to the preceding table.

Note:
1. Maximum of two 7045-SW4 switches in rack and one 5791 or 5794 per processor drawer.
2. Power cord and bulk power jumper rules for this configuration:

60 A cord allowed 60 A cord redundant Other cords redundant Bulk power jumper provided
Yes Yes Yes No

3. Power cord and bulk power jumper rules for this configuration:

60 A cord allowed 60 A cord redundant Other cords redundant Bulk power jumper provided
Yes No Yes Yes - for 60 A cords

No - for other cords

4. Power cord and bulk power jumper rules for this configuration:

60 A cord allowed 60 A cord redundant Other cords redundant Bulk power jumper provided
Yes No No Yes

5. Power cord and bulk power jumper rules for this configuration:

60 A cord allowed 60 A cord redundant Other cords redundant Bulk power jumper provided
No Not applicable No Yes

86 Site and hardware planning

Model 9119-FHA server specifications
Server specifications provide detailed information for your server, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.
Table 97. Rack dimensions
Dimensions Rack only Rack with side doors
Height 2024.38 mm (79.7 in.) 2024.38 mm (79.7 in.)
Width 749.3 mm (29.5 in.) 784.86 mm (30.9 in.)
Depth 1272.54 mm (50.1 in.) 1272.54 mm (50.1 in.)

Table 98. Slimline door dimensions

Dimensions One frame Two frame Front and rear door heat
exchanger system unit
frame
Height 2024.38 mm (79.7 in.) 2024.38 mm (79.7 in.) 2024.38 mm (79.7 in.)
Width 784.86 mm (30.9 in.) 1567.18 mm (61.7 in.) 784.86 mm (30.9 in.)
Depth 1485.9 mm (58.5 in.) 1485.9 mm (58.5 in.) 1521.46 mm (59.9 in.)

Table 99. Acoustic door dimensions

Dimensions One frame Two frame Front and rear door heat
exchanger system unit
frame
Height 2024.38 mm (79.7 in.) 2024.38 mm (79.7 in.) 2024.38 mm (79.7 in.)
Width 784.86 mm (30.9 in.) 1567.18 mm (61.7 in.) 784.86 mm (30.9 in.)
Depth 1805.94 mm (71.1 in.) 1805.94 mm (71.1 in.) 1795.78 mm (70.7 in.)

Table 100. Full system weights (no covers)

Physical characteristics Weight
Fully configured system unit frame 1451 kg (3200 lb)

Table 101. Cover weights

Physical characteristics Weight
Side covers, pair 50 kg (110 lb)
Slimline door, single 15 kg (33 lb)
Acoustic door, single 25 kg (56 lb)

Table 102. Shipping dimensions

Physical characteristics Dimensions
Height 231 cm (91 in.)
Width 94 cm (37 in.)
Depth 162 cm (63.5 in.)
Weight Varies by configuration. The maximum weight is 1724 kg
(3800 lb).

Chapter 4. Server specifications 87

Table 103. Electrical and thermal characteristics for the US, Canada, Japan
Electrical and thermal characteristics Properties
Voltage and frequency 200 - 240 V ac at 50 - 60 Hz
System rating, 5 GHz 48 A 80 A
System rating, 4.2 GHz 48 A 63 A
The system rating varies by configuration. See Total system power consumption to determine which system
configurations have the higher rating.

Table 104. Electrical and thermal characteristics for US high voltage

Electrical and thermal characteristics Properties
Voltage and frequency 480 V ac at 50 - 60 Hz
System rating, 5 GHz 24 A 34 A
System rating, 4.2 GHz 24 A 24 A

Table 105. Electrical and thermal characteristics for the World Trade Corporation
Electrical and
thermal
characteristics Properties
Voltage and 200 - 240 V ac at 50 - 60 Hz 380 - 415 V ac at 50 - 60 Hz
frequency
System rating, 5 GHz 48 A 80 A 34 A 43 A
System rating, 4.2 48 A 63 A 34 A 34 A
GHz

Table 106. Electrical and thermal characteristics (Three-phase)

Electrical and thermal characteristics Properties
Maximum power (fully configured 5 GHz system) 27.7 kW
Maximum power (fully configured 4.2 GHz system) 21.7 kW
Power factor .99
Inrush current 250
Note: Refer to the Inrush current table.
Thermal output (5 GHz system)1 94.5 kBTU/hr
1
Thermal output (4.2 GHz system) 74.1 kBTU/hr
Note: The system rating of the 9119-FHA is dependent on its configuration. See Total system power consumption for
more information.
1
Power draw and heat load vary greatly by configuration. When planning for an electrical system, it is important to
use maximum values. However, when planning for heat load, the IBM Systems Energy Estimator allows a user to
obtain a heat output estimate based on a specific configuration. See The IBM Systems Energy Estimator web site for
more information.

Table 107. Inrush current. Inrush current per phase of each line cord to BPE
208 time (micro 480 time (micro
BPR number 208 V ac amperage seconds) 480 V ac amperage seconds)
Zero 100 20 120 20
One 110 150 140 150
Two 140 150 170 150

88 Site and hardware planning

Table 107. Inrush current (continued). Inrush current per phase of each line cord to BPE
208 time (micro 480 time (micro
BPR number 208 V ac amperage seconds) 480 V ac amperage seconds)
Three 170 150 210 150
Four 200 150 250 150

Table 108. Environment specifications

Environment Properties Operating Storage Shipping
Temperature 8 - 32-core 50 - 89.6°F (10 - 32°C) 33.8 - 140°F (1 - 60°C) -40 - 140°F (-40 -
60°C)
Temperature 40 - 64-core 50 - 82.4°F (10 - 28°C) 33.8 - 140°F (1 - 60°C) -40 - 140°F (-40 -
60°C)
Relative humidity 20 - 80% 5 - 80% 5 - 100%
Maximum altitude 8 - 32 core 3048 m (10 000 ft)
40 - 64 core 2133 m (7000 ft)

Table 109. Declared acoustical noise emissions for typical configuration of the 9119-FHA
Declared A-Weighted Sound Power Level, Declared A-Weighted Sound Pressure Level,
LWAd (B) LpAm (dB)
Product
configuration Operating Idling Operating Idling
4 4
5.0-GHz, Typical 8.0 8.0 62 62
configuration with
acoustical door set:
five processor nodes
(40-core), three I/O
drawers, and bulk
power assembly.
Blowers at nominal
speeds.
5.0-GHz, Typical 9.06 9.06 72 72
configuration with
nonacoustical
(slimline) door set:
five processor nodes
(40-core), three I/O
drawers, and bulk
power assembly.
Blowers at nominal
speeds.
5.0-GHz, Typical 8.5 8.5 70 70
configuration with
rear door heat
exchanger option and
acoustical door set:
five processor nodes
(40-core), three I/O
drawers, and bulk
power assembly.
Blowers at nominal
speeds.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 89

Table 109. Declared acoustical noise emissions for typical configuration of the 9119-FHA (continued)
Declared A-Weighted Sound Power Level, Declared A-Weighted Sound Pressure Level,
LWAd (B) LpAm (dB)
Product
configuration Operating Idling Operating Idling
5 5
4.2-GHz, Typical 7.7 7.7 60 60
configuration with
acoustical door set:
five processor nodes
(40-core), two I/O
drawers, and bulk
power assembly.
Blowers at nominal
speeds.
4.2-GHz, Typical 8.5 8.5 68 68
configuration with
nonacoustical
(slimline) door set:
five processor nodes
(40-core), two I/O
drawers, and bulk
power assembly.
Blowers at nominal
speeds.
4.2-GHz, Typical 8.04 8.04 65 65
configuration with
rear door heat
exchanger option and
acoustical door set:
five processor nodes
(40-core), two I/O
drawers, and bulk
power assembly.
Blowers at nominal
speeds.
1
Declared level LWAd is the upper-limit A-weighted sound power level. Declared level LpAm is the mean A-weighted
sound pressure level measured at the 1-meter bystander positions.
2
All measurements are made in conformance with ISO 7779 and are declared in conformance with ISO 9296.
3
1 Bel (B) equals 10 Decibels (dB).
4
Meets IT Product Noise Limits for, Generally Unattended Data Center, per Statskontoret Technical Standard 26:6.
5
Meets IT Product Noise Limits for, Generally Attended Data Center, per Statskontoret Technical Standard 26:6.
Note: 6 Government regulations (such as those prescribed by Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA) or European Community Directives) might govern noise level exposure in the workplace and might apply
to you and your server installation. This IBM system is available with an optional acoustical door feature that can
help reduce the noise emitted from this system. The actual sound pressure levels in your installation depend on; a
variety of factors, including the number of racks in the installation, the size, materials, the configuration of the room
where you designate the racks to be installed, the noise levels from other equipment, the room ambient
temperature, and employees' location in relation to the equipment. Compliance with such government regulations
also depends on a variety of additional factors, including the duration of employees' exposure and whether
employees wear hearing protection. It is recommended that you consult qualified experts in this field to determine
whether you are in compliance with the applicable regulations.

90 Site and hardware planning

Table 110. Declared acoustical noise emissions for maximum configuration of the 9119-FHA
Declared A-Weighted Sound Power Level, Declared A-Weighted Sound Pressure Level,
LWAd (B) LpAm (dB)
Product
Configuration Operating Idling Operating Idling
5.0-GHz, Maximum 8.3 8.3 65 65
configuration with
acoustical door set:
eight processor nodes
(64-core), three I/O
drawers, and bulk
power assembly.
Blowers at nominal
speeds.
5.0-GHz, Maximum 9.36 9.36 76 76
configuration with
nonacoustical
(slimline) door set:
eight processor nodes
(64-core), three I/O
drawers, and bulk
power assembly.
Blowers at nominal
speeds.
5.0-GHz, Maximum 8.96 8.96 73 73
configuration with
rear door heat
exchanger option and
acoustical door set:
eight processor nodes
(64-core), three I/O
drawers, and bulk
power assembly.
Blowers at nominal
speeds.
4.2-GHz, Maximum 8 8 62 62
configuration with
acoustical door set:
eight processor nodes
(64-core), two I/O
drawers, and bulk
power assembly.
Blowers at nominal
speeds.
4.2-GHz, Maximum 9.06 9.06 72 72
configuration with
nonacoustical
(slimline) door set:
eight processor nodes
(64-core), two I/O
drawers, and bulk
power assembly.
Blowers at nominal
speeds.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 91

Table 110. Declared acoustical noise emissions for maximum configuration of the 9119-FHA (continued)
Declared A-Weighted Sound Power Level, Declared A-Weighted Sound Pressure Level,
LWAd (B) LpAm (dB)
Product
Configuration Operating Idling Operating Idling
4.2-GHz, Maximum 8.5 8.5 68 68
configuration with
rear door heat
exchanger option and
acoustical door set:
eight processor nodes
(64-core), two I/O
drawers, and bulk
power assembly.
Blowers at nominal
speeds.
1
Declared level LWAd is the upper-limit A-weighted sound power level. Declared level LpAm is the mean A-weighted
sound pressure level measured at the 1-meter bystander positions.
2
All measurements are made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.
3
1 Bel (B) equals 10 Decibels (dB).
4
Meets IT Product Noise Limits for, Generally Unattended Data Center, per Statskontoret Technical Standard 26:6.
5
Meets IT Product Noise Limits for, Generally Attended Data Center, per Statskontoret Technical Standard 26:6.
Note: 6 Government regulations (such as those prescribed by OSHA or European Community Directives) might
govern noise level exposure in the workplace and might apply to you and your server installation. This IBM system
is available with an optional acoustical door feature that can help reduce the noise emitted from this system. The
actual sound pressure levels in your installation depend upon a variety of factors, including the number of racks in
the installation, the size, materials, the configuration of the room where you designate the racks to be installed, the
noise levels from other equipment, the room ambient temperature, and employees' location in relation to the
equipment. Compliance with such government regulations also depends upon a variety of additional factors,
including the duration of employees' exposure and whether employees wear hearing protection. It is recommended
that you consult qualified experts in this field to determine whether you are in compliance with the applicable
regulations.

Electromagnetic compatibility compliance

This server meets the following electromagnetic compatibility specifications: FCC (CFR 47, Part 15); VCCI;
CISPR-22; 2004/108/EC; BSMI (CNS-13438, 2006 - Certification in Taiwan is for 220 V ac/60 Hz only);
AS/NZS CISPR 22: 2006; ICES/NMB-003; Korean EMI/EMC (RLL Notice 2007-69, Notice 2007-71);
People's Republic of China Commodity Inspection Law

The 6954 base rack is an optional second base frame with its own separate connection to AC power that
is designed for use with model 9119-FHA For a complete set of planning information refer toPlanning for
6954 and 6953 racks.
Related reference:
“Planning for 6954 and 6953 racks” on page 375
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical,
power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Power cord features

Use the Power cord features table to view the power cord specifications available for your server.

The following three-phase power cord features are available for the three-phase model 9119-FHA.

92 Site and hardware planning

Table 111. Power cord features
Nominal voltage range (V
Supply type ac) Voltage tolerance (V ac) Frequency range (Hz)
Two redundant three-phase 200 - 480 180 - 508 47 - 63
power cords

Table 112. Power cord features

Feature Code Description Plug
1
8677 Power cord, 8 AWG, 4.3 m (14 ft), 380 none
- 415 V ac
8686 Power cord, 6 AWG, 4.3 m (14 ft), 200 IEC 60309, 100 A, 3P+E
- 240 V ac
8687 Power cord, 6 AWG, 1.8 m (6 ft), 200 IEC 60309, 100 A, 3P+E
- 240 V ac
8688 Power cord, 6 AWG, 4.3 m (14 ft), 200 IEC 60309, 60 A, 3P+E
- 240 V ac
8689 Power cord, 6 AWG, 1.8 m (6 ft), 200 IEC 60309, 60 A, 3P+E
- 240 V ac
86941 Power cord, 6 AWG, 4.3 m (14 ft), 380 none
- 415 V ac
86951 Power cord, 4 AWG, 4.3 m (14 ft), 200 none
- 240 V ac
8696 Power cord, 4 AWG, 4.3 m (14 ft), 200 IEC 60309, 100 A, 3P+E
- 240 V ac
8696 and Request for Price Quotation Power cord, 4 AWG, 1.8 m (6 ft), 200 IEC 60309, 100 A, 3P+E
(RPQ) 8A1668 - 240 V ac
8697 Power cord, 8 AWG, 4.3 m (14 ft), 480 IEC 60309, 30 A, 3P+E
V ac
8698 Power cord, 8 AWG, 1.8 m (6 ft), 480 IEC 60309, 30 A, 3P+E
V ac
8699 Power cord, 6 AWG, 4.3 m (14 ft), 480 IEC 60309 60 A
V ac
8699 and RPQ 8A1668 Power cord, 6 AWG, 1.8 m (6 ft), 480 IEC 60309 60 A
V ac
RPQ 8A1871 Power cord, 6 AWG, 4.3 m (14 ft), 380 RussellStoll 7328DP
- 415 V ac
1
These power cords are shipped without a plug or receptacle. An electrician might be required to install the plug
and receptacle to meet applicable country or region electrical codes.

Doors and covers for the 9119-FHA

Doors and covers are an integral part of the system and are required for product safety, proper airflow
and cooling, electromagnetic compatibility compliance, and, for certain options, acoustical noise
reduction.

The following rear door options are available for model 9119-FHA:
v Acoustical door option
This feature provides a specially designed, noise-reducing door set for those who want lower noise
levels in their data center or who might want to meet certain acoustical or noise exposure
requirements. The acoustical door option consists of a set of special front and rear doors, each

Chapter 4. Server specifications 93

 approximately 250 mm (10 in.) in depth. It contains acoustical treatment and unique air flow ducts. The
acoustical door set provides about a 10 dB (1.0 B) reduction in the overall noise emission level of the
rack when compared to the non-acoustical (Slimline) door set. This is the default door set that is
offered, in order to provide the lowest noise option available for any configuration of electronics in the
rack itself.

Note: A special acoustical attachment is available to provide noise reduction when ordering the rear
door heat exchanger.
v Slimline door option
This feature provides an option to take up less floor space, when space is be more critical than
acoustical noise levels. The slimline door option consists of a front and rear door set, approximately
100 mm (4 in.) in depth, to be used in conjunction with the required rear-door heat exchanger
previously described. Acoustical treatment is not available for the slimline door option, and the
9119-FHA system generally does not meet industry acoustical noise limits with this option installed.
The slimline door set is offered as a selectable option for those who are more concerned with floor
space than noise levels because each slimline door is about 150 mm (6 in.) less deep than each
acoustical door.
v Rear door heat exchanger
The rear-door heat exchanger feature is a water-cooled device that is mounted on the rear of the rack
to cool the air that is heated and exhausted by devices inside the rack. A supply hose delivers chilled,
conditioned water to the heat exchanger. A return hose delivers warmed water back to the water pump
or chiller. Each rear-door heat exchanger can remove up to 50 000 British thermal unit (Btu) (or
approximately 15 000 watts) of heat from your data center. See Planning for the installation of rear door
heat exchangers for more information.

Note: For declared levels of acoustical noise emissions, refer to Acoustical noise emissions.
Related information:
Planning for the installation of rear door heat exchangers

Plan views
Dimensional planning information is shown in this top down view of your server.

The following figure shows dimensional planning information for single-frame systems.

94 Site and hardware planning

Figure 40. Plan view for single-frame systems with acoustical doors

The following figure shows dimensional planning information for single-frame systems.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 95

Figure 41. Plan view for single-frame systems with slimline doors

The following figure shows dimensional planning information for single-frame systems.

96 Site and hardware planning

Figure 42. Plan view for single-frame systems with slimline doors and a Rear door heat exchanger

Chapter 4. Server specifications 97

Figure 43. Leveling foot and frame dimensions

Attention: When planning for both the movement and positioning of the system, be aware that each
caster swivels in an approximate 130 mm (5.1 in.) diameter.

Raised-floor requirements and preparation

A raised floor is required for model 9119-FHA and its associated racks to ensure optimal performance
and to comply with electromagnetic compatibility requirements.

A raised floor is required for all cabling on the system. Overhead cabling is not supported. Raised-floor
cutouts should be protected by electrically non-conductive molding, appropriately sized, with edges
treated to prevent cable damage and to prevent casters from rolling into the floor cutouts.

Front-service access is necessary on model 9119-FHA to accommodate a lift tool for the servicing of large
drawers (the processor books and I/O drawers). Front and rear service access is necessary to
accommodate the lift tool for servicing of the optional integrated battery backup.

98 Site and hardware planning

Figure 44. Floor plan considerations for single units

Cutting and placing floor panels

These guidelines specify how to make the necessary openings in the raised floor for installing your
server.

Use the following procedure to cut and place floor panels in the raised floor. The x-y alphanumeric grid
positions are used to identify relative positions of cutout floor panels that might be cut in advance.
1. Measure the panel size of the raised floor.
2. Verify the floor panel size. The floor panel size illustrated in the following figures is 600 mm (23.6 in.)
and 610 mm (24 in.) panels.
3. Ensure adequate floor space is available to place the frames over the floor panels exactly as shown in
the following figures. For front-to-back and side-to-side clearances, refer to Considerations for
multiple-system installations. Use the plan view, if necessary. Consider all obstructions above and below
the floor.
4. Identify the panels needed, and list the total quantity of each panel required for the installation.
5.

Important: Cut the required quantity of panels. When cutting the panels, you must adjust the size of
the cut for the thickness of the edge molding you are using. The dimensions shown in the figures are
finished dimensions. For ease of installation, number each panel as it is cut.

Note: For a multiple frame installation, two casters could produce loads as high as 2750 lb.

Notes:
1. The weight distribution bar is a requirement for a model 9119-FHA on a raised floor. It is needed to
maintain the integrity of the floor that is holds the weight of the frame.
2. This floor-tile arrangement is recommended so that the casters or leveling pads are placed on separate
floor tiles to minimize the weight on a single floor tile. Load bearing tiles that have cutouts might
require additional pedestals to keep their structural integrity. Additionally, the cutouts span two tiles.
Raised floors utilizing a stringer system should leave the stringer intact.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 99

3. The Raised floor with 610 mm (24 in.) floor panels figure and Raised floor with 600 mm (23.6 in.) floor panels
figure are intended only to show relative positions and accurate dimensions of floor cutouts. The
figures are not intended to be a machine template and is not drawn to scale.

Raised floor with 610 mm (24 in.) floor panels figure

Figure 45. Rack placement for 610 mm (24 in.) tiles

This image shows an overview perspective of the rack placement on floor tiles. The dashed lines
represent the rack. The solid lines are used for dimensions.
1. The rear of the server is placed 75 mm (3.0 in.) measuring up from the bottom edge of the first row
tile.
2. The front of the server is placed 20 mm (0.7 in.) measuring up from the bottom edge of the third row
tile.

100 Site and hardware planning

Figure 46. Cable cutout placement 610 mm (24 in.) tiles

This figure shows the floor cutouts for the cables. The solid rectangles indicate the cutouts, and the solid
lines are used for dimensions.
1. The first cutout is 94 mm (3.7 in.) high measuring up from the bottom edge of the first row tile. The
width of the first cutout is 110 mm (4.3 in.) measuring left from the right edge of the first column tile.
Continue cutting out an additional 545 mm (21.5 in.) measuring right from the left edge of the second
column tile. The total width of the cutout is 655 mm (25.8 in.).
2. The second cutout is 94 mm (3.7 in.) high measuring up from the bottom edge of the third row tile.
The width of the second cutout is 110 (4.3 in.) mm measuring left from the right edge of the first
column tile. Continue cutting out an additional 545 mm (21.5 in.) measuring right from the left edge
of the second column tile. The total width of the cutout is 655 mm (25.8 in.).

Chapter 4. Server specifications 101

Raised floor with 600 mm (23.6 in.) floor panels figure

Figure 47. Rack placement for 600 mm (23.6 in.) tiles

This image shows an overview perspective of the rack placement on the floor tiles. The dashed lines
represent the rack. The solid lines are used for dimensions.
1. The rear of the server is placed 83 mm (3.3 in.) measuring up from the bottom edge of the first row
tile.
2. The front of the server is placed 10 mm (0.4 in.) measuring up from the bottom edge of the third row
tile.

102 Site and hardware planning

Figure 48. Cable cutout placement 600 mm (23.6 in.) tiles

This figure shows the floor cutouts for the cables. The solid rectangles indicate the cutouts, and the solid
lines are used for dimensions.
1. The first cutout is 94 mm (3.7 in.) high measuring up from the bottom edge of the first row tile. The
width of the first cutout is 110 mm (4.3 in.) measuring left from the right edge of the first column tile.
Continue cutting out an additional 545 mm (21.5 in.) measuring right from the left edge of the second
column tile. The total width of the cutout is 655 mm (25.8 in.).
2. The second cutout is 94 mm (3.7 in.) high measuring up from the bottom edge of the third row tile.
The width of the second cutout is 110 mm (4.3 in.) measuring left from the right edge of the first
column tile. Continue cutting out an additional 545 mm (21.5 in.) measuring right from the left edge
of the second column tile. The total width of the cutout is 655 mm (25.8 in.).

Additional pedestal placement

Placing large cutouts in the raised floor tiles, such as the cutouts needed for the 9119-FHA, can
substantially change the structural integrity of each tiles. Additional support pedestals might be needed.
Pedestals might be placed approximately under each caster position to prevent tiles from sagging.
Pedestals might also be used to support the cut corners of floor tiles. Pedestals might be needed for tiles
where the equipment is moving across, even though they are not permanent load bearing tiles. All
pedestals should be installed and adjusted to barely contact the underside of each floor panel, before the
frames are rolled into place. All pedestal locations are recommendations. Each facility is unique and
additional pedestal supports might be needed for certain floors. You are responsible for verifying all floor
loading capacities and requirements to determine where any additional pedestals might be needed.

Note: Use the following figure as an example of where the floor pedestals should be placed. It is only
intended to show relative positions. This figure is not drawn to scale.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 103

Figure 49. Additional pedestal placement

Important: Extra pedestals might be placed as shown.

1. Pedestals Ap1, Ap2, and might be used to support the cut corners of floor tiles. Although these floor
tiles are not load-bearing after the machine is installed, the rolling loads put on these tiles during the
installation of the machine can place high loads momentarily on these tiles.
2. Pedestals Bp1, Bp2, Cp1, and Cp2 might be placed under each caster position to prevent floor tiles
from sagging.
Related reference:
“Installing the frame tie-down kit” on page 105
This procedure describes how to install a frame tie-down kit and floor tie-down hardware.
“Considerations for multiple-system installations” on page 114
Learn about the installation requirements for a multiple-system installation.

Configuring power cords

Learn how to route power cords through floor tile cutouts.

The power cords exit the system from different points of the frame as indicated in the following figure.
For raised-floor applications, if possible, route both cords to the rear of the frame and through the same

104 Site and hardware planning

floor-tile cutout. For more information about raised-floor applications, refer to Cutting and placing floor
panels.

Figure 50. Single-frame system power cord configuration

RPQ for overhead cabling

v RPQ 8A1715 enables a 9119-FHA frame to be installed on a non-raised floor environment without
overhead cabling.
v RPQ 8A1732 enables a 9119-FHA frame to be installed with overhead I/O cabling in a raised floor
environment.
v RPQ 8A1737 enables a 9119-FHA frame to be installed with overhead I/O cabling in a nonraised floor
environment.
v RPQ 8A1735 enables feature code 6954, the Powered expansion rack, to be installed with overhead I/O
cabling in a raised floor environment.
Related reference:
“Cutting and placing floor panels” on page 99
These guidelines specify how to make the necessary openings in the raised floor for installing your
server.

Installing the frame tie-down kit

This procedure describes how to install a frame tie-down kit and floor tie-down hardware.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 105

The following procedures describe how to install a frame tie-down kit and floor tie-down hardware to
secure an IBM rack to a concrete floor beneath a 228.6 - 330.2 mm (9 -13 in. depth) or a 304.8 - 558.8 mm
(12 - 22 in. depth) raised-floor environment or to a nonraised floor.

Positioning the rack

Use this procedure to unpack and position your rack.

To unpack and position the rack, do the following steps:

Note: Before attempting to position the rack, see Moving the system to the installation site.
1. Remove all packing and tape from the rack.
2. Place the last floor covering exactly adjacent and in the front of the final installation location.
3. Position the rack according your floor plan.
4. Lock each caster wheel by tightening the thumbscrew on the caster.

Figure 51. Caster thumbscrew

5. While moving the system to its final installed location and during relocation, it might be necessary to
lay down floor covering, such as Lexan sheets, to prevent floor panel damage.
Related reference:
“Moving the system to the installation site” on page 129
Several factors must be considered before moving the system to the installation site.

Securing the rack

Securing your rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor or to a raised floor prevents movement when
vibrations occur.

Note: Securing the rack is an optional procedure. See Vibration and shock for more information.

Before the service representative can perform the tie-down procedure, you must complete the floor
preparation described in Cutting and placing floor panels and Attaching the rack to a 9 - 13 in. or 12 - 22 in.
floor.
Related reference:
“Cutting and placing floor panels” on page 99
These guidelines specify how to make the necessary openings in the raised floor for installing your
server.
“Attaching the rack to a 9 - 13 in. or 12 - 22 in. floor” on page 107
Use these steps to attach your rack to a 228.6 mm to 330.2 mm (9 in. to 13 in. depth). floor.
Related information:
Vibration and shock

106 Site and hardware planning

Attaching the rack to a 9 - 13 in. or 12 - 22 in. floor
Use these steps to attach your rack to a 228.6 mm to 330.2 mm (9 in. to 13 in. depth). floor.

Attention: The frame tie downs are intended to secure a frame weighing less than 1429 kg (3150 lb).
These tie downs are designed to secure the frame on a raised-floor installation.

Use the following to determine your next step:

1. If the rack is being attached to a short-depth raised-floor environment 228.6 - 330.2 mm (9 - 13 in.
depth), install the Raised floor tie-down kit (part number 16R1102) described in the following table.
Table 113. Raised floor tie-down kit 228.6 - 330.2 mm (9 - 13 in. depth)
Item Part number Quantity Description
1 44P3438 1 Wrench
2 44P2996 2 Stabilizer bar
3 44P2999 4 Turnbuckle Assembly

2. If the rack is being attached to a deep, raised-floor environment 304.8 - 558.8 mm (12 - 22 in. depth),
install the Raised floor tie-down kit (part number 16R1103) described in the following table.
Table 114. Raised floor tie-down kit 304.8 - 558.8 mm (12 - 22 in. depth)
Item Part number Quantity Description
1 44P3438 1 Wrench
2 44P2996 2 Stabilizer bar
3 44P3000 4 Turnbuckle Assembly

It is your responsibility to ensure that the following steps are completed before the service representative
performs the tie-down procedure.

Note: To accommodate a floor with a depth of more than 558.8 mm (22 in.), a steel beam or a steel
channel adapter for mounting the sub-floor eyebolts are required. The customer must supply the floor
eyebolts.

Consider the following when preparing the floor for tie-down procedure:
v The hardware is designed to support a frame weighing no more than 1429 kg (3150 lb).
v The estimated maximum concentrated load on one caster for a 1429 kg (3150 lb) system is 476.3 kg
(1050 lb). For a multiple-system installation, one floor tile might bear a total concentrated load of 952.5
kg (2100 lb).

To install the eyebolts, do the following steps:

1. Obtain the service of a qualified structural engineer to determine the appropriate installation of the
eyebolts.
2. Consider the following before installing the eyebolts:
v Floor eyebolts must be securely anchored to the concrete floor.
v For a single-frame installation, four 1/2-in. diameter by 13-in. sub-floor eyebolts should be secured
to the sub-floor.
v The minimum height of the center of the internal diameter is 2.54 mm (1 in.) above the concrete
floor surface.
v The maximum height is 63.5 mm (2.5 in.) above the concrete floor surface. A height greater than
63.5 mm (2.5 in.) can cause excessive lateral deflection to the tie-down hardware.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 107

 v The eyebolt's internal diameter should be 1-3/16 inch, and each eyebolt should be able to withstand
1224.7 kg (2700 lb). The customer should obtain the services of a qualified consultant or structural
engineer to determine the appropriate anchoring method for these eyebolts and to ensure that the
raised floor and the building can support the floor-loading specifications.
3. Verify that the four eyebolts are positioned to match the dimensions in the following figures:

Figure 52. Single rack tiedown hole pattern. Raised floor with 610 mm (24 in.) floor panels figure

This figure shows the location of the rack tiedown for a single rack. The solid rectangles indicate the
cutouts, and the solid lines are used for dimensions.
a. The first circle, located on the top left, is 109 mm (4.3 in.) measuring right from the right edge of
the first column tile. It is 52 mm (2.0 in.) measuring down from the top edge of the second row
tile.
b. The second circle, located on the top right, is 65 mm (2.6 in.) measuring right from the right edge
of the second column tile. It is 52 mm (2.0 in.) measuring down from the top edge of the second
row tile.
c. The third circle, located on the bottom left, is 109 mm (4.3 in.) measuring right from the right edge
of the first column tile. It is 1019 mm (40.1 in.) measuring down from the first circle.
d. The fourth circle, located on the bottom right, is 65 mm (2.6 in.) measuring right from the right
edge of the second column tile. It is 1019 mm (40.1 in.) measuring down from the second circle.
Refer to Install the frame tie-down kit for instructions on how to install a frame tie-down kit and floor
tie-down hardware.

108 Site and hardware planning

Figure 53. Rack tiedown hole pattern. Raised floor with 600 mm (23.6 in.) floor panels figure

This figure shows the location of the rack tiedown for a single rack. The solid rectangles indicate the
cutouts, and the solid lines are used for dimensions.
a. The first circle, located on the top left, is 119 mm (4.7 in.) measuring from the right edge of the
first column tile. It is 44 mm (1.7 in.) measuring down from the top edge of the second row tile.
b. The second circle, located on the top right, is 65 mm (2.6 in.) measuring from the right edge of the
second column tile. It is 44 mm (1.7 in.) measuring down from the top edge of the second row tile.
c. The third circle, located on the bottom left, is 119 mm (4.7 in.) measuring from the right edge of
the first column tile. It is 1019 mm (40.1 in.) measuring down from the first circle.
d. The fourth circle, located on the bottom right, is 65 mm (2.6 in.) measuring from the right edge of
the second column tile. It is 1019 mm (40.1 in.) measuring down from the second circle.
Refer to Installing the frame tie-down kit for instructions on how to install a frame tie-down kit and
floor tie-down hardware.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 109

Figure 54. Stabilizer bar layout (top view)

4. Install the eyebolts to the floor. The service representative can now install the frame.

110 Site and hardware planning

Figure 55. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie-down hardware for 228.6 - 330.2 mm (9 - 13 in.) raised floor (part number
44P2999)

Chapter 4. Server specifications 111

Figure 56. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie-down hardware for 228.6 - 330.2 mm (9 - 13 in.) raised floor (part number
44P2999)

112 Site and hardware planning

Figure 57. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie-down hardware for 304.8 - 558.8 mm (12 - 22 in.) raised floor (part number
44P3000)

Chapter 4. Server specifications 113

Figure 58. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie-down hardware for 304.8 - 558.8 mm (12 - 22 in.) raised floor (part number
44P3000)

Considerations for multiple-system installations

Learn about the installation requirements for a multiple-system installation.

In a multiple-system installation, it is possible that a floor tile with cable cutouts (refer to Cutting and
placing floor panels) will bear two concentrated static loads up to 476 kg (1050 lb) per caster and leveler.
Thus, the total concentrated load can be as high as 1247.38 kg (2750 lb). Contact the floor tile
manufacturer or consult a structural engineer to ensure that the raised-floor assembly can support this
load.

When you are integrating model 9119-FHA into an existing multiple-system environment or when you
are adding additional systems to an installed 9119-FHA, consider the following factors:
v Minimum aisle width
For multiple rows of systems containing one or more 9119-FHA models, the minimum aisle width in
the front of the systems is 1219 mm (48 in.) and the minimum width in the rear of the systems is 914
mm (36 in.). The front and rear clearances are necessary for service operations. Service clearances are
measured from the edges of the frame (with doors open) to the nearest obstacle.
v Thermal interactions

114 Site and hardware planning

Systems should be faced front-to-front and rear-to-rear to create "cold" and "hot" aisles to maintain
effective system thermal conditions, as shown in the following figure.
Cold aisles need to be of sufficient width to support the airflow requirements of the installed systems
as indicated in Cooling requirements. The airflow per tile is dependent on the underfloor pressure and
perforations in the tile. A typical underfloor pressure of 0.025 in. of water supplies 300 - 400 cubic feet
per minute (CFM) through a 25% open 2 ft by 2 ft floor tile.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 115

Figure 59. Proposed floor layout for multiple systems

Related reference:
“Cutting and placing floor panels” on page 99
These guidelines specify how to make the necessary openings in the raised floor for installing your
116 Site and hardware planning
server.
“Cooling requirements” on page 126
Use the system cooling requirements and chilled airflow to determine the area of floor tiles that should
supply chilled air to the system.

Service clearances
The service clearance area is the area around the server that is needed for authorized service
representatives to service the server.

The minimum service clearance for systems with slimline doors is shown in the following figures.

Figure 60. Service clearance for single system unit frame or single I/O rack with slimline doors

Chapter 4. Server specifications 117

Figure 61. Service clearance for single system unit frame or single I/O rack with slimline doors (with alternative right
side service clearance)

The minimum service clearance for systems with acoustical doors is shown in the following figures.

118 Site and hardware planning

Figure 62. Service clearance for single system unit frame or single I/O rack with acoustic doors

Chapter 4. Server specifications 119

Figure 63. Service clearance for single system unit frame or single I/O rack with acoustic doors (with alternative right
side service clearance)

Refer to the figure in Raised-floor requirements and preparation for service clearances that are shown in a
raised-floor installation.
Related reference:
“Raised-floor requirements and preparation” on page 98
A raised floor is required for model 9119-FHA and its associated racks to ensure optimal performance
and to comply with electromagnetic compatibility requirements.

Total system power consumption

Use the tables to determine the total system power consumption for your server's configuration.

The following tables show the maximum utility power in kilowatts. Actual system power is affected by
memory configuration and system workload. The actual system power is typically less than the
maximum listed amount. BPR current determines power cord size. Systems with 2 BPRs are unbalanced.
A balanced power feature should be optionally available for customers whose configuration calls for 1 or
2 BPRs but want a simple way to achieve balanced three-phase power loading without having to custom
wire their three-phase AC power distribution.

120 Site and hardware planning

The configuration of the system determines the power cord that is needed. See Power cord and breaker
information for more information. Amperage calculations based on the maximum measured power
consumption could exceed the derated circuit breaker value. If this occurs based on the voltage used in
the facility, the actual power consumption based on the configuration should be calculated.
Table 115. System power requirements for 5 GHz processor system in kW
I/O drawer
Processor books
(nodes) 0 1 2 3
2 2 2
1 3.6 4.8 5.9 7.12
2 6.32 7.52 8.72 9.82
3 9.42 10.62 11.72 12.92
4 12.52 13.72 14.82 16.02
5 15.61 16.71 17.91 19.11
6 18.81 19.91 21.11 22.21
7 21.91 23.11 24.21 25.41
8 24.21 25.41 26.51 27.71
1
A higher rated power cord is required.
2
It is recommended that breakers and branch circuits be sized to accommodate the system rating. The ability to add
additional processor books and I/O drawers can be restricted by the breaker rating. IBM cannot guarantee system
availability with circuit breaker ratings that are below the system ratings. For each of these configurations operating
at 380-415VAC, IBM supports the use of a 32 A breaker. Use of a 32 A breaker will not affect system warranty.
Installations using smaller than recommended circuit breakers are subject to review by local electrical code
enforcement or authorities having jurisdiction over the electrical installation.

Table 116. System power requirements for 4.2 GHz processor system in kW
I/O drawer
Processor books
(nodes) 0 1 2 3
2 2 2
1 2.9 4.1 5.2 6.42
2 52 6.12 7.32 8.52
3 7.42 8.12 9.72 10.92
4 9.82 11.02 12.12 13.32
5 122 13.12 14.32 15.52
6 14.31 15.41 16.61 17.71
7 16.51 17.71 18.81 20.01
8 18.21 19.41 20.61 21.71
1
A higher rated power cord is required.
2
It is recommended that breakers and branch circuits be sized to accommodate the system rating. The ability to add
additional processor books and I/O drawers can be restricted by the breaker rating. IBM cannot guarantee system
availability with circuit breaker ratings that are below the system ratings. For each of these configurations operating
at 380-415VAC, IBM supports the use of a 32 A breaker. Use of a 32 A breaker will not affect system warranty.
Installations using smaller than recommended circuit breakers are subject to review by local electrical code
enforcement or authorities having jurisdiction over the electrical installation.

Table 117. Powered I/O racks

Drawers kW
1 1.2

Chapter 4. Server specifications 121

Table 117. Powered I/O racks (continued)
Drawers kW
2 2.5
3 3.7
4 4.9
5 6.2
6 7.4
7 8.6
8 9.8
1
9 11.1
1
10 12.3
1
11 13.5
1
12 14.8
1
13 16.0
1
14 17.2
1
15 18.5
16 19.71
1
A higher rated power cord is required.

Typical system power consumption

System power consumption can vary greatly depending by components, utilization, ambient temperature
and workload. The following tables are provided as power estimates for a smaller configuration at a
nominal ambient temperature when compared to the maximum configuration in the total system power
consumption. Actual power consumption varies greatly with workload and can also vary with time.
These are estimates only. To understand your server's actual power consumption, you should consistently
measure and monitor the power draw of the system.
Table 118. 5.0 GHz special configuration typical power draw in kW
I/O drawers
Processor books
(nodes) 0 1 2 3
2 4.4 4.8 5.3 5.7
3 6.5 6.9 7.3 7.8
4 8.6 8.9 9.4 9.9
5 10.6 11 11.5 12
6 12.8 13.2 13.7 14.2
7 15 15.4 15.9 16.4
8 17.1 17.5 18 18.5

Table 119. 4.2 GHz special configuration typical power draw in kW

I/O drawers
Processor books
(nodes) 0 1 2 3
2 3.9 4.3 4.8 5.3
3 5.7 6.1 6.6 7.1

122 Site and hardware planning

Table 119. 4.2 GHz special configuration typical power draw in kW (continued)
I/O drawers
Processor books
(nodes) 0 1 2 3
4 7.5 7.9 8.4 8.9
5 9.4 9.8 10.2 10.7
6 11.3 11.7 12.2 12.7
7 13.2 13.6 14.1 14.6
8 15.1 15.5 16.0 16.4

The following tables are the estimated power consumption for the following configuration:
1. 4GB DIMMS, half sites populated (32 GB memory per processor book total)
2. 15% of peak bandwidth
3. 2 hub cards per I/O drawer plugged
4. 14 adapters per I/O drawer
5. 2 hard disk drives per I/O drawer
6. Nominal room temperature

To create a more specific cooling estimate for your specific configuration, use the proceeding tables by
subtracting the power value times the number of components from the full configurations.
Table 120. DIMM feature power estimates (One DIMM feature equals 4 DIMMS.)
DIMM size (GB) Typical power (W) Max power (W)
1 36 44.4
2 41.6 50.4
4 38.4 53.6
8 37.2 48
16 63.6 72.4

Table 121. Device power

Device Typical power (W) Max power (W)
PCI adapter 8.0 25
Disk drive 10 20
I/O hub adapter 30 30

Related concepts:
“Power cord and breaker information”
Use the breaker rating and cord information tables to determine the circuit breaker rating for the power
cords used with your server

Power cord and breaker information

Use the breaker rating and cord information tables to determine the circuit breaker rating for the power
cords used with your server

Note: The 9119–FHA server design incorporates electromagnetic interference filter capacitors required to
block electrical noise from penetrating the power grid. A characteristic of filter capacitors, during normal
operation, is high leakage currents. Depending on the server configuration, this leakage current can reach
350 mA. For most reliable operation, Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI), Earth Leakage Circuit

Chapter 4. Server specifications 123

Breaker (ELCB) or Residual Current Circuit Breaker (RCCB) type circuit breakers are not recommended
for use with 9119–FHA servers. By its internal design and grounding, the 9119–FHA server is fully
certified for safe operation (compliance with IEC, CN, UL, CSA 60950-1). However, if a leakage detection
circuit breaker is required by local electrical practice or standards, the breaker should be sized for a
leakage current rating not less than 500 mA in order to reduce the risk of a server outage caused by
erroneous and spurious tripping.
Table 122. 5 GHz Power cord and breaker information US, Canada, Japan (200 - 240 V ac)
Properties Lower-rated power cord set Higher-rated power cord set
Plug rating 60 A 100 A1
System rating 48 A 80 A1
Recommended circuit breaker rating 60 A 100 A1
Cord size 6 AWG 4 AWG1
Recommended receptacle (not IEC60309, 60 A, type 460R9W IEC60309, 100A, type 4100R9W
provided)
Power Cord Feature Code 4.3 m (14 8688 8696
ft)
1
The configurations that require the higher-rated power cord set are those with 5 or more processor books.

Table 123. 5 GHz Power cord and breaker information North America (380 - 415 V ac)
Properties Lower-rated power cord set Higher-rated power cord set
Plug rating N/A 60 A
System rating N/A 43 A
Recommended circuit breaker rating N/A 63 A
Cord size N/A 6 AWG
Recommended receptacle (not N/A RussellStoll 7324-78
provided)
Power Cord Feature Code 4.3 m (14 N/A RPQ 8A1871
ft)

Table 124. 5 GHz Power cord and breaker information US High Voltage (480 V ac)
Properties Lower-rated power cord set Higher-rated power cord set
Plug rating 30 A 60 A1
System rating 24 A 34 A1
Recommended circuit breaker rating 30 A 60 A1
1
Cord size 8 AWG 6 AWG
Recommended receptacle (not IEC60309, 30 A, type 430R7W IEC60309, 60 A, type 460R7W1
provided)
Power Cord Feature Code 4.3 m (14 8697 8699
ft)
1
The configurations that require the higher-rated power cord set are those with 5 or more processor books.

Table 125. 5 GHz Power cord and breaker information World Trade Corporation (200 - 240 V ac)
Properties Lower-rated power cord set Higher-rated power cord set
Plug rating No plug No plug1
System rating 48 A 80 A1

124 Site and hardware planning

Table 125. 5 GHz Power cord and breaker information World Trade Corporation (200 - 240 V ac) (continued)
Properties Lower-rated power cord set Higher-rated power cord set
Recommended circuit breaker rating 60 A 100 A1
1
Cord size 6 AWG 4 AWG
Recommended receptacle (not Not specified, electrician installed Not specified, electrician installed1
provided)
Power Cord Feature Code 4.3 m (14 8694 8695
ft)
1
The configurations that require the higher-rated power cord set are those with 5 or more processor books.

Table 126. 5 GHz Power cord and breaker information World Trade Corporation (380 - 415 V ac)
Properties Lower-rated power cord set Higher-rated power cord set
Plug rating No plug No plug1
System rating 34 A 43 A1
Recommended circuit breaker rating 40 A 63 A1
Cord size 8 AWG 6 AWG1
Recommended receptacle (not Not specified, electrician installed Not specified, electrician installed1
provided)
Power Cord Feature Code 4.3 m (14 8677 8694
ft)
1
The configurations that require the higher-rated power cord set are those with 5 or more processor books.

Table 127. 4.2 GHz Power cord and breaker information US, Canada, Japan (200 - 240 V ac)
Properties Lower-rated power cord set Higher-rated power cord set
Plug rating 60 A 100 A1
System rating 48 A 63 A1
Recommended circuit breaker rating 60 A 80 A1
Cord size 6 AWG 6 AWG1
Recommended receptacle (not
provided) IEC60309, 60 A, type 460R9W IEC60309, 100A, type 4100R9W1
Power Cord Feature Code 4.3 m (14
ft) 8688 8686
1
The configurations that require the higher-rated power cord set are those with 6 or more processor books.

Table 128. 4.2 GHz Power cord and breaker information US High Voltage (480 V ac)
Properties Lower-rated power cord set Higher-rated power cord set
Plug rating 30 A 30 A1
System rating 24 A 24 A1
Recommended circuit breaker rating 30 A 30 A1
1
Cord size 8 AWG 8 AWG
Recommended receptacle (not IEC309, 30 A, type 430R7W IEC309, 30 A, type 430R7W1
provided)
Power Cord Feature Code 4.3 m (14 8697 8697
ft)
1
The configurations that require the higher-rated power cord set are those with 6 or more processor books.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 125

Table 129. 4.2 GHz Power cord and breaker information World Trade Corporation (200 - 240 V ac)
Properties Lower-rated power cord set Higher-rated power cord set
Plug rating No plug No plug1
System rating 48 A 63 A1
Recommended circuit breaker rating 60 A 80 A1
1
Cord size 6 AWG 6 AWG
Recommended receptacle (not Not specified, electrician installed Not specified, electrician installed1
provided)
Power Cord Feature Code 4.3 m (14 8694 8694
ft)
1
The configurations that require the higher-rated power cord set are those with 6 or more processor books.

Table 130. 4.2 GHz Power cord and breaker information World Trade Corporation (380 - 415 V ac)
Properties Lower-rated power cord set Higher-rated power cord set
Plug rating No plug No plug1
System rating 34 A 34 A1
Recommended circuit breaker rating 40 A 40 A1
Cord size 8 AWG 8 AWG1
Recommended receptacle (not Not specified, electrician installed Not specified, electrician installed1
provided)
Power Cord Feature Code 4.3 m (14 8677 8677
ft)
1
The configurations that require the higher-rated power cord set are those with 6 or more processor books.

Related reference:
“Total system power consumption” on page 120
Use the tables to determine the total system power consumption for your server's configuration.

Cooling requirements
Use the system cooling requirements and chilled airflow to determine the area of floor tiles that should
supply chilled air to the system.

The model 9119-FHA requires air for cooling. As shown in Considerations for multiple-system installations,
rows of model 9119-FHA systems must face front to front. The use of a raised floor is recommended to
provide airflow through perforated floor panels placed in rows between the fronts of systems (the cold
aisles shown in Considerations for multiple-system installations).

The following table provide system cooling requirements based on the system configuration. The letter
designations in the table correspond to the letter designations in the graph shown in Cooling requirements
graph.
Table 131. 5 GHz Processor system maximum utility power feed requirements
I/O drawers
Nodes 0 1 2 3
1 B B C C
2 C C D D

126 Site and hardware planning

3 D E E F
4 F F F G
5 F G G H
6 G H H I
7 H I I J
8 I I J K

Table 132. 4.2 GHz Processor system maximum utility power feed requirements
I/O drawers
Nodes 0 1 2 3
1 A B B C
2 B C C D
3 C D D E
4 D E E F
5 E E F G
6 F F G H
7 G G H H
8 G H I I

Related reference:
“Considerations for multiple-system installations” on page 114
Learn about the installation requirements for a multiple-system installation.

Cooling requirements graph

Use the cooling requirements graph in conjunction with the cooling requirements tables and the chilled
airflow area graphic to determine the area of the floor tiles to supply chilled air to the system.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 127

Figure 64. Cooling requirements

Requirements for the chilled airflow area

Use this information to understand the chilled airflow area that is required for your system.

Use the system cooling requirements tables and the cooling requirements graph to determine the area of
floor tiles to supply chilled air to the system.

128 Site and hardware planning

Figure 65. Chilled airflow area requirements

Moving the system to the installation site

Several factors must be considered before moving the system to the installation site.

Prior to moving the system to the installation site, do the following tasks:
v Determine the path that must be taken to move the system from the delivery location to the
installation site.
v Verify that the height of all doorways, elevators, and small openings are sufficient to allow moving the
system to the installation site.
v Verify that the weight limitations of elevators, ramps, floors, floor tiles, and other restricted weight
objects are sufficient to allow moving the system to the installation site. If the height or weight of the
system can cause a problem when the system is moved to the installation site, contact your local site
planner or sales representative.

For more detailed information, see Access.

If needed, you can order the height reduction feature 7960 for 9119-FHA. This feature ships the system
frame and the expansion frame in two pieces so that it can be assembled at your location. With this
feature, the top section of the system frame (including the power subsystem) is removed. The height of
the system frame with the upper section removed is reduced by .35 m (14 in.) to approximately 1.64 m

Chapter 4. Server specifications 129

(65 in.). Feature code 6850, Weight Reduction Option, can be ordered to reduce the weight of the rack to
below 1133.98 kg (2500 lb). This feature allows the system rack to utilize elevators that have a 1133.98 kg
(2500 lb) limit.

To determine a more specific system weight for your configuration, start with the maximum system
weight and subtract the component values below.

Component Weight
Processor book (node) 43.1 kg (95 lb)
I/O drawer 55.8 kg (123 lb)
Bulk power enclosure, single 26.8 kg (59 lb)
Bulk power regulator, single 12.7 kg (28 lb)
Bulk power distributor, single 4.5 kg (10 lb)
Internal battery feature with rails, single 51.7 kg (114 lb)
RIO cable, single 5.4 kg (12 lb)
Power cord, single 4.5 kg (10 lb)
Shipping brackets 11.3 kg (25 lb)
Acoustic cover, single 25.4 kg (56 lb)
Side covers, set 49.9 kg (110 lb)
Base redundant bulk power System (includes two bulk
power enclosures, two bulk power regulators, and two
bulk power distributors) 134.3 kg (296 lb)
Maximum redundant bulk power system (includes two
bulk power enclosures, four bulk power distributors and
eight bulk power regulators) 195.0 kg (430 lb)

Delivery and subsequent transportation of the equipment

DANGER
Heavy equipment—personal injury or equipment damage might result if mishandled. (D006)

You must prepare your environment to accept the new product based on the installation planning
information provided, with assistance from an IBM installation planning representative (IPR) or IBM
authorized service provider. In anticipation of the equipment delivery, prepare the final installation site in
advance so that professional movers or riggers can transport the equipment to the final installation site
within the computer room. If for some reason, this is not possible at the time of delivery, you must make
arrangements to have professional movers or riggers return to finish the transportation at a later date.
Only professional movers or riggers should transport the equipment. The IBM authorized service
provider can only perform minimal frame repositioning within the computer room, as needed, to perform
required service actions.

You are also responsible for using professional movers or riggers when you relocate or dispose of
equipment.
Related information:
Access

Phase imbalance and BPR configuration

Depending on the number of Bulk Power Regulators (BPRs) in your system, phase imbalance can occur
in line currents
130 Site and hardware planning
All systems are provided with two bulk power assemblies (BPAs), with separate power cords. The
number of BPRs in your system will vary by configuration
Table 133. Phase imbalance and BPR configuration
Number of BPRs per BPA Phase A Line Current Phase B Line Current Phase C Line Current
1 Power / Vline Power / Vline 0
2 0.5 Power / Vline 0.866 Power / Vline 0.5 Power / Vline
3 or 4 0.577 Power / Vline 0.577 Power / Vline 0.577 Power / Vline
Note: Power is calculated from Total system power consumption. Vline is line-to-line nominal input voltage. Because
total system power is divided between two power cords, divide the power number by 2.

Related reference:
“Total system power consumption” on page 120
Use the tables to determine the total system power consumption for your server's configuration.

Balancing power panel loads

Use these methods to ensure that power panel loads are balanced.

The 9119-FHA system can use as many as four bulk power regulators (BPRs) per bulk power assembly
(BPA), depending on the system configuration. Systems with three and four BPR configurations present a
balanced three-phase load. Configurations with only one or two BPRs have unbalanced loads. . The
following figure is an example of feeding several loads of this type from two power panels in a way that
balances the load among the three-phases.

Note: Use of ground-fault-interrupt (GFI) circuit breakers is not recommended for this system because
GFI circuit breakers are earth-leakage-current sensing circuit breakers and this system is a high
earth-leakage-current product.

Figure 66. Power panel load balancing

The method illustrated in the preceding figure requires that the connection from the three poles of each
breaker to the three-phase pins of a connector be varied. Some electricians might prefer to maintain a
consistent wiring sequence from the breakers to the connectors. The following figure shows a way to
balance the load without changing the wiring on the output of any breakers. The three-pole breakers are
alternated with single-pole breakers so that the three-pole breakers do not all begin on phase A.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 131

Figure 67. Power panel load balancing

The following figure shows another way of distributing the unbalanced load evenly. In this case, the
three-pole breakers are alternated with two-pole breakers.

Figure 68. Power panel load balancing

Dual power installation

To take full advantage of the redundancy and reliability that is built into the computer system, the
system must be powered from two distribution panels.

Model 9119-FHA configurations are designed with a fully redundant power system. These systems have
two power cords attached to two power input ports which, in turn, power a fully redundant power
distribution system within the system.

Approximate system weights by configuration

Use the approximate system weights tables to calculate the approximate weight of your system based on
its configuration of I/O drawers and processor books (nodes).

132 Site and hardware planning

Table 134. Approximate system weights with acoustical covers without the internal battery feature
Processor Books (Nodes) I/O drawers
1 2 3
1 757 kg (1670 lb) 855 kg (1885 lb) 953 kg (2100 lb)
2 816 kg (1800 lb) 914 kg (2015 lb) 1012 kg (2230 lb)
3 921 kg (2030 lb) 1018 kg (2245 lb) 1116 kg (2460 lb)
4 980 kg (2160 lb) 1077 kg (2375 lb) 1175 kg (2590 lb)
5 1048 kg (2310 lb) 1145 kg (2525 lb) 1243 kg (2740 lb)
6 1132 kg (2495 lb) 1229 kg (2710 lb) 1327 kg (2925 lb)
7 1191 kg (2625 lb) 1288 kg (2840 lb) 1386 kg (3055 lb)
8 1250 kg (2755 lb) 1347 kg (2970 lb) 1445 kg (3185 lb)

Table 135. Approximate system weights with acoustical covers and with the internal battery feature
Processor Books (Nodes) I/O drawers
1 2
1 862 kg (1900 lb) 957 kg (2110 lb)
2 919 kg (2025 lb) 1016 kg (2240 lb)
3 1025 kg (2260 lb) 1123 kg (2475 lb)
4 1084 kg (2390 lb) 1179 kg (2600 lb)
5 1150 kg (2535 lb) 1247 kg (2750 lb)
6 1234 kg (2720 lb) 1331 kg (2935 lb)
7 1293 kg (2850 lb) 1390 kg (3065 lb)
8 1352 kg (2980 lb) 1449 kg (3195 lb)

Weight distribution
Use the floor loading information to determine the floor loading for various configurations.

The following figure shows the floor loading dimensions for model 9119-FHA. Use this figure in
conjunction with the tables to determine the floor loading for various configurations.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 133

Figure 69. Floor loading dimensions

The following tables show values for calculating floor loading for the model 9119-FHA. Weights include
acoustical covers. Width and depth are indicated without covers.
Table 136. 8 processor books and 3 I/O drawers
Condition a (sides) b (front) c (back) System unit
1 25.4 mm (1 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 222.7 lb/ft2 1087.2 kg/m2
2
2 25.4 mm (1 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 178.8 lb/ft 872.9 kg/m2
2
3 25.4 mm (1 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 150.9 lb/ft 736.5 kg/m2
2
4 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 150.8 lb/ft 736.2 kg/m2
2
5 254 mm (10 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 122.9 lb/ft 599.9 kg/m2
6 254 mm (10 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 105.1 lb/ft2 513.1 kg/m2
7 508 mm (20 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 114.6 lb/ft2 559.5 kg/m2
2
8 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 94.7 lb/ft 462.4 kg/m2
2
9 508 mm (20 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 82.0 lb/ft 400.6 kg/m2
2
10 762 mm (30 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 94.6 lb/ft 461.7 kg/m2
2
11 762 mm (30 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 79.1 lb/ft 386.3 kg/m2
12 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 69.3 lb/ft2 338.3 kg/m2

134 Site and hardware planning

Table 137. 4 processor books and 2 I/O drawers
Condition a (sides) b (front) c (back) System unit
1 25.4 mm (1 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 169.8 lb/ft2 829.3 kg/m2
2
2 25.4 mm (1 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 137.7 lb/ft 672.3 kg/m2
2
3 25.4 mm (1 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 117.2 lb/ft 572.3 kg/m2
2
4 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 117.2 lb/ft 572.1 kg/m2
5 254 mm (10 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 96.7 lb/ft2 472.2 kg/m2
6 254 mm (10 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 83.7 lb/ft2 408.6 kg/m2
2
7 508 mm (20 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 90.6 lb/ft 442.6 kg/m2
2
8 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 76.1 lb/ft 371.4 kg/m2
2
9 508 mm (20 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 66.8 lb/ft 326.1 kg/m2
10 762 mm (30 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 76.0 lb/ft2 371.0 kg/m2
11 762 mm (30 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 64.7 lb/ft2 315.7 kg/m2
2
12 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 57.5 lb/ft 280.5 kg/m2

Table 138. 2 processor books and 1 I/O drawer

Condition a (sides) b (front) c (back) System unit
1 25.4 mm (1 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 132.3 lb/ft2 646.2 kg/m2
2
2 25.4 mm (1 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 108.5 lb/ft 529.8 kg/m2
2
3 25.4 mm (1 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 93.3 lb/ft 455.8 kg/m2
4 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 93.3 lb/ft2 455.6 kg/m2
5 254 mm (10 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 78.1 lb/ft2 381.6 kg/m2
2
6 254 mm (10 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 68.5 lb/ft 334.4 kg/m2
2
7 508 mm (20 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 73.7 lb/ft 359.6 kg/m2
2
8 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 62.9 lb/ft 306.9 kg/m2
2
9 508 mm (20 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 56.0 lb/ft 273.3 kg/m2
10 762 mm (30 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 62.8 lb/ft2 306.5 kg/m2
11 762 mm (30 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 54.4 lb/ft2 265.6 kg/m2
2
12 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 49.1 lb/ft 239.5 kg/m2

Table 139. 8 processor books, 2 I/O drawers and internal battery feature
Condition a (sides) b (front) c (back) System unit
1 25.4 mm (1 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 223.3 lb/ft2 1090.4 kg/m2
2
2 25.4 mm (1 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 179.3 lb/ft 875.4 kg/m2
2
3 25.4 mm (1 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 151.3 lb/ft 738.6 kg/m2
4 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 151.2 lb/ft2 738.2 kg/m2
5 254 mm (10 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 123.2 lb/ft2 601.5 kg/m2
2
6 254 mm (10 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 105.4 lb/ft 514.4 kg/m2
2
7 508 mm (20 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 114.9 lb/ft 560.9 kg/m2
2
8 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 94.9 lb/ft 463.5 kg/m2
9 508 mm (20 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 82.2 lb/ft2 401.5 kg/m2
10 762 mm (30 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 94.8 lb/ft2 462.9 kg/m2
2
11 762 mm (30 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 79.3 lb/ft 387.2 kg/m2
2
12 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 69.4 lb/ft 339.0 kg/m2

Floor loading for the system is illustrated in the Proposed Floor Layout for Multiple Systems in
Considerations for multiple system installations.

Unit emergency power off

The server has a unit emergency power off (EPO) switch on the front of the first frame (A frame). When
the switch is reset, the utility power is confined to the system power compartment, and all volatile data is
lost.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 135

Refer to the following figure, which shows a simplified unit EPO panel.

Figure 70. Unit emergency power off

It is possible to attach the computer room emergency power off (EPO) system to the unit EPO. When this
is done, resetting the computer room EPO disconnects all power from the power cords and the internal
battery backup unit, if it is provided. All volatile data will be lost in this case also.

If the room EPO is not connected to the unit EPO, resetting the computer room unit EPO removes
alternating current power from the system. If the interlock bypass feature is used, the system remains
powered for a short time based on system configuration.

Computer room emergency power off

You can incorporate the integrated battery backup into a computer room emergency power off (EPO)
system. Otherwise, volatile data can be lost.

When the integrated battery backup is installed and the computer room EPO is reset, the batteries engage
and the computer continues to run. It is possible to attach the computer room EPO circuit to the unit
EPO. When this is done, resetting the computer room EPO disconnects all power from the power cords
and from the internal battery backup unit. In this event, all volatile data will be lost.

136 Site and hardware planning

To incorporate the integrated battery backup into the computer room EPO circuit, a cable must connect to
the back of the unit EPO panel.

This figure illustrates the back of the unit EPO panel with the computer room EPO cable plugging into
the system. Notice the switch actuator. After it is moved to make the cable connection possible, the
computer room EPO cable must be installed for the system to power on.

Figure 71. Computer room emergency power off

In the following figure, AMP connector 770019-1 is needed to connect to the unit EPO panel. For
computer room EPO cables using wire sizes #20 - #24 AWG, use AMP pins (part number 770010-4). This
connection should not exceed 5 Ohms, which is approximately 61 m (200 ft) of #24 AWG.

Figure 72. AMP connector

Machine holdup times

Use this information to determine the typical machine holdup times (time versus load) for fresh and aged
batteries.

The following criteria apply to both tables:

Chapter 4. Server specifications 137

v All times are listed in minutes
v Machine load is listed in total alternating current (ac) input power (power for both power cords
combined)
v A fresh battery is defined as 2.5 years old or less.
v An aged battery is defined as 6.5 years.

Note: Battery capacity decreases gradually as the battery ages (from fresh-battery value to aged-battery
value). The system diagnoses a failed-battery condition if the capacity decreases below the aged-battery
value.
Table 140. Typical machine holdup time versus load for fresh battery
Machine load 3.33 kW
Integrated battery backup configuration N R
1 BPR 7.0 21.0
2 BPR 21.0 50.0
3 BPR 32.0 68.0
Machine load 6.67 kW
Integrated battery backup configuration N R
1 BPR 2.1 7.0
2 BPR 7.0 21.0
3 BPR 12.0 32.0
Machine load 10 kW
Integrated battery backup configuration N R
1 BPR
2 BPR 4.0 11.0
3 BPR 7.0 21.0
Machine load 13.33 kW
Integrated battery backup configuration N R
1 BPR
2 BPR 2.1 7.0
3 BPR 4.9 12.0
Machine load 16.67 kW
Integrated battery backup configuration N R
1 BPR
2 BPR
3 BPR 3.2 9.5
Machine load 20 kW
Integrated battery backup configuration N R
1 BPR
2 BPR
3 BPR 2.1 7.0
Machine load 21.67 kW
Integrated battery backup configuration N R
1 BPR

138 Site and hardware planning

Table 140. Typical machine holdup time versus load for fresh battery (continued)
Machine load 3.33 kW
2 BPR
3 BPR 1.7 6.5
Note: N mean non-redundant. R means redundant.

Table 141. Typical machine holdup time versus load for aged battery
Machine load 3.3 kW
Integrated battery backup configuration N R
1 BPR 4.2 12.6
2 BPR 12.6 30.0
3 BPR 19.2 41.0
Machine load 6.67 kW
Integrated battery backup configuration N R
1 BPR 1.3 4.2
2 BPR 4.2 12.6
3 BPR 7.2 19.2
Machine load 10 kW
Integrated battery backup configuration N R
1 BPR
2 BPR 2.4 6.6
3 BPR 4.2 12.6
Machine load 13.33 kW
Integrated battery backup configuration N R
1 BPR
2 BPR 1.3 4.2
3 BPR 2.9 7.2
Machine load 16.67 kW
Integrated battery backup configuration N R
1 BPR
2 BPR
3 BPR 1.9 5.7
Machine load 20 kW
Integrated battery backup configuration N R
1 BPR
2 BPR
3 BPR 1.3 4.2
Machine load 21.67 kW
Integrated battery backup configuration N R
1 BPR
2 BPR
3 BPR 1.0 3.9

Chapter 4. Server specifications 139

Table 141. Typical machine holdup time versus load for aged battery (continued)
Machine load 3.3 kW
Note: N mean non-redundant. R means redundant.

Model 9119-590, 9406-595, and 9119-595 server specifications

Server specifications provide detailed information for your server, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.

The IBM eServer™ i5 and eServer p5 model 590 and 595 consist of multiple components, as summarized
in the following table.
Table 142. Model 9119-590, 9406-595, and 9119-595 components
Minimum per Maximum per
Model Description system system
FC6251 (9119-590, 9119-595, Slimline door set for primary rack (front and 1 1
9406-595) rear) See Doors and covers.
FC6252 (9119-590, 9119-595, Acoustic door set for primary rack (front and 1 1
9406-595) rear) See Doors and covers.
FC8691 (9119-590, 9119-595) 0 1
Optional expansion frame

(Based on number of I/O and switch drawers

installed.)
FC8294 ( 9406-595) 0 1
Optional base 1.8 m rack
FC6253 (9119-590, 9119-595) Slimline door set for 8691 (front and rear) 0 1
FC6254 (9119-590, 9119-595) Acoustical door set for 8691 (front and rear) 0 1
10
9119-595 (FC8970) 16-core, 2.1 GHz processor book 1 4
10
9119-595 and 9406-595 16-core, 2.3 GHz processor book 1 4
(FC8968)
9119-590 (FC8967) 16-core, 2.1 GHz processor book 110 2
10
9406-595 (FC8966) 16-core, 1.9 GHz processor book 1 4
10
9406-595 (FC8981) 16-core, 1.65 GHz processor book 1 4
10
9119-590 (FC7981) 16-core, 1.9 GHz processor book 1 2
10
9119-595 (FC7813) 16-core, 1.9 GHz processor book 1 4
9119-595 (FC8969) 16-core, 1.9 GHz processor book
9119-595 (FC7988) 16-core, 1.65 GHz processor book 110 4
FC5792 (9119-595) Optional base rack. See Planning for 5792 base
rack.
Various Hardware Management Console (HMC)6 04 24

140 Site and hardware planning

Table 142. Model 9119-590, 9406-595, and 9119-595 components (continued)
Minimum per Maximum per
Model Description system system
Optional I/O drawer (20 PCI cards max., 16
7040-61D disk drives maximum) 0 (9406) 8-core or 16-core:
6 drawers
5791 (9119-590, 9119-595) 1 (9119) maximum1
5794 (9119-590, 9119-595) 32-core: 12
drawers
maximum2

48-core and
64-core: 4
drawers
maximum3

9406-5959
FC6200 or FC6201 Optional integrated battery backup feature 0 6
(9119-590, 9119-595)
FC3757 (9119-590, 9119-595, Service Shelf Tool Kit8 1 1
9406-595)
FC9194 ( 9406-595) Base PCI-X Expansion tower (shipped with a 1 1
9406-595)
Note:
1. For the 9119-590 and 9119-595 the 16-core processor configuration supports up to 6 I/O drawers.
2. For the 9119-590 and 9119-595, the 32-core processor configurations support up to 12 I/O drawers.
3. For the 9119-590and 9119-595, the 48-core and 64-core processor configurations support a maximum of 12 I/O
drawers, which require a FC5792 frame.
4. An HMC can connect to multiple systems (therefore, an HMC might not need to be ordered), or up to two
HMCs can connect to the system for redundancy.
5. For the 9119-590 and 9119-595 the 32-core, 48-core, and 64-core processor configurations are based on the
combining of multiple 16-core processors. The 8-core processor configuration is a 16-core with eight processors
available for upgrade on demand.
6. For model 590 and 595, a Hardware Management Console must be provided within the same room and within
8 m (26 ft) of the server. Or, as an alternative to the local HMC requirement, it is acceptable for you to provide
a supported device (such as, a PC), with connectivity and authority to operate through a remotely-attached
HMC. This local device must be in the same room and within 8 m (26 ft) of your server, and provide functional
capability equivalent to the HMC that it replaces and that is needed by the service representative to service the
server.
7. The 32-core processor configuration of the 9119-590 supports a maximum of eight I/O drawers.
8. The FC3757 Service Shelf Tool Kit contains six separate tool kits that are required for the installation and
maintenance of the 9119-590, 9119-595, and 9406-595 processor books and memory cards. Each kit weighs ≤ 40
lb. Without this feature, installation and maintenance might be delayed. At least one FC3757 is required on site
where one or more model 590 or 595 are located.
9. A number 4643 indicates that a 7040-61D I/O drawer is installed in the 24-inch primary rack of a model
9406-595. One to four 4643s might be installed. Only I/O features supported by the AIX® and Linux operating
systems can be installed in the 7040-61D. Other IBM i I/O towers or drawers might be attached by using
HSL/RIO loops.
10. Minimum per system is based on one processor with this feature code. Processor feature codes cannot be
mixed.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 141

Table 143. Dimensions and weight8
Dimensions Slimline doors1 Acoustical doors1
1 Frame 2 Frames 1 Frame 2 Frames
Height 2025 mm (79.7 in.) 2025 mm (79.7 in.) 2025 mm (79.7 in.) 2025 mm (79.7 in.)
Width 785 mm (30.9 in.) 1575 mm (62.0 in.) 785 mm (30.9 in.) 1575 mm (62.0 in.)
Depth 1326 mm (52.2 in.) 1326 mm (52.2 in.) 1681 mm (66.2 in.) 1681 mm (66.2 in.)

Table 144. Weight10 - model 9119-595 maximum configuration

With integrated Without integrated With integrated Without integrated
battery backup and battery backup with battery backup and battery backup and
Number of frames slimline doors slimline doors with acoustical doors with acoustical doors
Single frame 1419 kg (3128 lb) 1358 kg (2995 lb) 1427 (3147 lb) 1367 kg (3014 lb)
Double frame 2441 kg (5381 lb) 2381 kg (5249 lb) 2458 (5420 lb) 2398 (5287 lb)

Table 145. Weight10 - model 9406-595 configuration - Single frame12, 13

Without integrated battery backup and with acoustical

Without integrated battery backup with slimline doors doors
1358 kg (2995 lb) 1367 kg (3014 lb)

Table 146. Weight10 - model 9119-590 maximum configuration

With integrated Without integrated With integrated Without integrated
battery backup and battery backup and battery backup and battery backup and
Number of frames with slimline doors with slimline doors with acoustical doors with acoustical doors
Single frame 1419 kg (3128 lb) 1358 kg (2995 lb) 1427 kg (3147 lb) 1367 kg (3014 lb)
Double frame 2230 kg (4917 lb) 1960 kg (4321 lb) 2248 kg (4956 lb) 1977 kg (4359 lb)
Note: Weight does not include the required I/O tower. See the 9194 I/O expansion unit specification sheet for more
details

Table 147. Shipping dimensions and weight9

Dimensions Measurement
Height 2311 mm (91 in.)
Width 940 mm (37 in.)
Depth 1511 mm (59.5 in.)
Weight Varies by configuration

Table 148. Electrical and thermal characteristics (3-phase) - 9119-590 and 9119-595
Electrical characteristics Properties
Rated voltage and 200 - 240 V ac at 50 - 60 Hz 380 - 415 V ac at 50 - 60 Hz 480 V ac at 50 - 60 Hz
frequency (three-phase)
Rated current, power cord 60 32 24
with 100 A plug FC 8686 or
8687 (amperes per phase)
Rated current, power cord
with 60 A plug, FC 8688 or 48
8689 (amperes per phase)

142 Site and hardware planning

Table 148. Electrical and thermal characteristics (3-phase) - 9119-590 and 9119-595 (continued)
Electrical characteristics Properties
Rated current, all other
power cords (amps per 60 32 24
phase)
Maximum power (1.9 GHz,
2.1 GHz, and 2.3 GHz 22.7 kW
processors)
Maximum power (1.65 GHz
20.3 kW
processor)
Power factor 0.99 0.99 0.99
3
Inrush current (maximum) 163 A
Thermal output (maximum
for 1.9 GHz , 2.1 GHz, and 77.5 kBtu/hr 77.5 kBtu/hr 77.5 kBtu/hr
2.3 GHz processors)
Thermal output (maximum 69.3 kBtu/hr 69.3 kBtu/hr 69.3 kBtu/hr
for 1.65 GHz processor)
Note: For additional information, see Total system power consumption

Table 149. Electrical and thermal characteristics (3-phase) - 9406-595

Electrical properties Characteristics
Rated voltage and 200 to 240 V ac at 50 to 60 380 to 415 V ac at 50 to 60 480 V ac at 50 to 60 Hz
frequency (single phase) Hz Hz
Rated current, power cord 60 32 24
with 100 A plug FC 8686 or
8687 (amperes per phase)
Rated current, power cord
with 60 A plug, FC 8688 or 48 –– ––
8689 (amperes per phase)
Rated current, all 60 32 24
Maximum power (1.65 GHz 19.4 kW 19.4 kW
19.4 kW
processor)
Power factor 0.99 0.97 0.93
3
Inrush current (maximum) 163 A 163 A 163 A
Thermal output (maximum 66.2 kBtu/hr
66.2 kBtu/hr 66.2 kBtu/hr
for 1.65 GHz processor)
Phase 9406-595, 9119-595, 9119-590 3
Dual power feature code Standard7
Branch circuit breaker and See Breaker rating and cord
cord information information
Note: For additional information, see Total system power consumption

Table 150. Environment temperatures

Environment Temperatures
5
Recommended operating temperature (16-core, 32-core) 10 - 32°C (50 - 89.6°F)
5
Recommended operating temperature (48-core and 10 - 28°C (50 - 82.4°F)
64-core)

Chapter 4. Server specifications 143

Table 150. Environment temperatures (continued)
Environment Temperatures
Nonoperating temperature (All models) 10 - 43°C (50 - 109.4°F)
Storage temperature (All models) 1 - 60°C (33.8 - 140°F)
Shipping temperature (All models) -40 - 60°C (-40 - 140°F)

Table 151. Environment specifications

Properties Operating Nonoperating Storage4 Shipping4
Maximum wet bulb 23 °C (73.4 °F) 23 °C (73.4 °F) 27 °C (80.6 °F) 29 °C (84.2 °F)
Noncondensing
8 - 80 % 8 - 80 % 5 - 80 % 5 to 100 %
relative humidity
Maximum altitude
(operating) 8-core, 16-core,
32-core - 3048 m
(10000 ft)

48-core, 64-core - 2133

m (7000 ft)

Table 152. Acoustical noise emissions6, 15

Product configuration LWAd (Bels)6 LpAM (dB)6 (bystander, 1 m)

Operating Idle Operating Idle
Typical configuration with
two processors, two I/O
7.6 7.6 59 59
drawers, and bulk power
unit; acoustical door set
Typical configuration with
two processors, two I/O
8.3 8.3 65 65
drawers, and bulk power
unit; slimline door set
Maximum configuration
with four processors, four
I/O drawers, and bulk 7.9 7.9 61 61
power unit; acoustical door
set
Maximum configuration
with four processors, four
I/O drawers, and bulk 8.611 8.611 6811 6811
power unit; slimline door
set

Electromagnetic compatibility compliance: This server meets the following electromagnetic compatibility
specifications: FCC (CFR 47, Part 15); VCCI; CISPR-22; 89/336/EEC; BSMI (A2/NZS 3548:1995); C-Tick;
ICES/NMB-003; Korean EMI/EMC (MIC Notice 2000–94, Notice 2000–72); People's Republic of China
Commodity Inspection Law

Safety compliance: This server is designed and certified to meet the following safety standards: UL
60950-1; CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1; EN 60950-1; IEC 60950-1 including all national differences

144 Site and hardware planning

Table 153. Notes
Note:
1. Doors are not installed during product shipment to the customer.
2. Refer to Approximate system weights by configuration for the approximate weight of your system
configuration.
3. Inrush currents occur only at initial application of power (short duration for charging capacitors). No inrush
currents occur during the normal power off-on cycle.
4. When an IBM-approved vapor bag and desiccant packets are used to protect the system, the storage
specifications are valid for 6 months and the shipping specifications are valid for 1 month. Otherwise, storage
and shipping specifications are valid for two weeks each.
5. For the 8-core, 16-core, and 32-core processor configurations, the upper limit of the dry bulb temperature must
be derated 1°C (1.8 - °F) per 219 m (719 ft) above 1295 m (4250 ft). Maximum altitude is 3048 m (10000 ft). For
the 48-core and 64-core configurations, the upper limit of the dry bulb temperature must be derated 1°C (1.8
°F) per 210 m (688 ft) above 1295 m (4250 ft). Maximum altitude is 2133 m (7000 ft).
6. LWAd is the upper-limit A-weighted sound level; LpAM is the mean A-weighted sound pressure measured at
the 1-meter bystander postions; 1 B = 10 dB.
7. Dual power and power cords are standard on the Model 9119-590, 9406-595, and 9119-595. For maximum
availability, each of the power cords should be fed from independent power grids.
8. For specific configuration weights, see Approximate system weights by configuration. The feature code 7960
(Compact Handling Option) allows the processor or expansion frame to pass through doors that are less than
2.0 m (79.5 in.). The top 8U section of the frame, including the power subsystem, is removed at the factory and
shipped separately for installation at the customer location. The height of the rack with the upper section
removed is approximately 1.65 m (65 in.).
9. Shipping dimensions are indicated for each frame. Each frame is shipped separately.
10. See Approximate system weights by configuration for detailed information on weights based on configuration.
11. Attention: Your server installation might be subject to government regulations (such as those prescribed by
OSHA or European Community Directives that cover noise level exposure in the workplace. The model
9119-590, 9119-595, and 9406-595 is available with an optional acoustical door feature that can reduce the
likelihood of exceeding noise level exposure limits for densely populated racks. The actual sound pressure
levels in your installation will depend on a variety of factors, including the number of racks in the installation;
the size, materials, and configuration of the room where the racks are installed; the noise levels from other
equipment; the room ambient temperature, and employees' location in relation to the equipment. It is
recommended that a qualified person, such as an industrial hygienist, be consulted to determine whether the
sound pressure levels to which employees might be exposed exceed regulatory limits.
12. The 9406-595 has a maximum of four 7040-61D 24-inch I/O drawers in the primary processor rack. It does not
support a double or secondary rack
13. The 9406-595 does not support internal battery backup.
14. The cabling requirements of model 595 limit the distance between the server frame and a separately powered
I/O frame. See Special considerations for model 595 cabling for details.
15. All measurements made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.

Related reference:
“Planning for 5792 base rack” on page 327
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical,
power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.
“9094 base I/O expansion unit, 9194 I/O expansion unit, or 5094 expansion unit” on page 438
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your expansion unit, including dimensions,
electrical, power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.
“Special requirements for model 595 cabling” on page 670
The distance between the server frame and the I/O frame is limited by the RIO-G cable length.

Breaker rating and cord information

Use the Breaker rating and cord information table to determine the circuit breaker rating for the power
cords used with your server.
Chapter 4. Server specifications 145
Table 154. Breaker rating and cord information
3-phase supply voltage (50/60 Hz) 200 - 240 V ac 200 - 240 V ac 380 - 415 V ac 480 V ac
Recommended customer-circuit- 60 A (60-A plug)or80 63 A (no plug) 32 A (no plug) 30 A(30A plug)
breaker rating1 A (100-A plug)
Cord information 1.8 m (6 ft) and 4.3 14 foot, 6 AWG 14 foot, 8 AWG 6 and 14 foot, 8AWG
m (14 ft) 6 AWG power cord, power cord, power cord (30A
power cord (60-A (electrician installed) (electrician installed) plug)
plug), or 1.8 m (6 ft)
and 4.3 m (14 ft) 6
AWG power cord
(100-A Plug)
Recommended receptacle IEC 60309, 60 A, type Not specified, Not specified, IEC 60309, 30 A, type
460R9W (not electrician installed electrician installed 430R7W (not
provided) or IEC provided)
60309, 100A, type
4100R9W (not
provided)

1
The exact circuit breaker ratings might not be available in all countries. Where the specified circuit breaker ratings are not
acceptable, use the nearest available rating. Use of a time delayed circuit breaker is recommended. Use of a GFI circuit breaker is
not recommended.
2
When possible, use metal backbox with power cords using IEC 60309 plugs.

Power cord features

Use the Power cord features table to view the power cord specifications available for your server.

The following three-phase power cord features are available for the three-phase model 9119-590, 9406-595,
and 9119-595.
Table 155. Power cord features
Supply type Nominal voltage range Voltage tolerance Frequency range
Two redundant 200 - 480 V ac 180 - 509 V ac 47 - 63 Hz
three-phase power
cords

Table 156. Power cord features

Feature code Description Voltage (V ac) Plug
8697 Power cord, 8 AWG, 4.3 m (14 ft) 480 IEC 60309 30 A plug
8698 Power cord, 8 AWG, 1.8 m (6 ft) 480 IEC 60309 30 A plug
8688 Power cord, 6 AWG, 4.3 m (14 ft) 200-240 IEC 60309 60 A plug
8689 Power cord, 6 AWG, 1.8 m (6 ft) 200-240 IEC 60309 60 A plug
8686 Power cord, 6 AWG, 4.3 m (14 ft) 200-240 IEC 60309 100 A plug
8687 Power cord, 6 AWG, 1.8 m (6 ft) 200-240 IEC 60309 100 A plug
1
8694 Power cord, 6 AWG, 4.3 m (14 ft) 380-415 no plug
1
8677 Power cord, 8 AWG, 4.3 m (14 ft) 380-415 no plug
1
These power cords are shipped without a plug or receptacle. An electrician might be required to install the plug
and receptacle to meet applicable country or region electrical codes.

Doors and covers

Doors and covers are an integral part of the system and are required for product safety, proper airflow
and cooling, and electromagnetic compatibility compliance.

146 Site and hardware planning

The following rear door options are available for your server:
v Enhanced acoustical cover option
This feature provides a low-noise option for sites with stringent acoustical requirements and where a
minimal system footprint is not critical. The acoustical cover option consists of a special front and rear
doors that are approximately 250 mm (10 in.) deep and contain acoustical treatment that lowers the
noise level of the machine by approximately 7 dB (0.7 B) compared to the slimline doors. This
reduction in noise emission levels means that the noise level of a single model system with slimline
covers is about the same as the noise level of five model systems with acoustical covers.
v Slimline cover option
This feature provides an option to take up less floor space and cost less, when space is be more critical
than acoustical noise levels. The slimline cover option consists of a front door, which is approximately
100 mm (4 in.) deep, and a rear door, which is approximately 50 mm (2 in.) deep. No acoustical
treatment is available for this option.
v Rear Door Heat Exchanger
The heat exchanger is a water-cooled device that mounts on the rear of the IBM 19-inch and 24-inch
racks to cool the air that is heated and exhausted by devices inside the rack. A supply hose delivers
chilled, conditioned water to the heat exchanger. A return hose delivers warmed water back to the
water pump or chiller. Each heat exchanger can remove up to 50 000 Btu (or approximately 15 000
watts) of heat from your data center. For detailed information on preparing your data center for using
the heat exchanger, see Planning for the installation of rear door heat exchangers. For detailed information
about installing a heat exchanger on your rack, see Installing the rear door heat exchanger.

Note: For declared levels of acoustical noise emissions, refer to the Acoustics.
Related information:
Planning for the installation of rear door heat exchangers

Plan views
Dimensional planning information is shown in this top down view of your server.

The following figure shows dimensional planning information for single-frame systems.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 147

Figure 73. Plan view for single-frame systems with acoustical doors

The following figure shows dimensional planning information for double-frame systems.

Figure 74. Plan view for double-frame systems with acoustical doors

148 Site and hardware planning

Attention: When moving the rack, note the caster swivel diameters shown in the following figure. Each
caster swivels in an approximate 130 mm (5.1 inch) diameter.

Figure 75. Leveling foot and frame dimensions

Raised-floor requirements and preparation

A raised floor is required for model 9119-595 and its associated racks to ensure optimal performance and
to comply with electromagnetic compatibility requirements.

A raised floor is not required for model 9119-590, but it is recommended for optimum system cooling and
cable management. Raised-floor cutouts should be protected by electrically nonconductive molding,
appropriately sized, with edges treated to prevent cable damage and to prevent casters from rolling into
the floor cutouts.

Front-service access is necessary on model 9119-590, and 9119-595 to accommodate a lift tool for the
servicing of large drawers (the processor books and I/O drawers). Front and rear service access is
necessary to accommodate the lift tool for servicing of the optional integrated battery backup.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 149

Figure 76. Floor plan considerations for single units

Cutting and placing floor panels

These guidelines specify how to make the necessary openings in the raised floor for installing your
server.

Use the following procedure to cut and place floor panels in the raised floor. The x-y alphanumeric grid
positions are used to identify relative positions of cutout floor panels that might be cut in advance.
1. Measure the panel size of the raised floor.
2. Verify the floor panel size. The floor panel size illustrated is 600 mm (23.6 in.) and 610 mm (24 in.)
panels.
3. Ensure adequate floor space is available to place the frames over the floor panels exactly as shown in
the figure. For front-to-back and side-to-side clearances, refer to Considerations for multiple system
installations. Use the plan view, if necessary. Consider all obstructions above and below the floor.
4. Identify the panels needed, and list the total quantity of each panel required for the installation.
5. Cut the required quantity of panels. When cutting the panels, you must adjust the size of the cut for
the thickness of the edge molding you are using. The dimensions shown in the figure are finished
dimensions. For ease of installation, number each panel as it is cut, as shown in the following figure.

Note: Depending on the panel type, additional panel support (pedestals) might be required to restore
structural integrity of the panel. Consult the panel manufacturer to ensure that the panel can sustain a
concentrated load of 476 kg (1050 lb). For multiple frame installation, it is possible that two casters
will produce loads as high as 953 kg (2100 lb).
6. Use Raised floor with 610 mm (24 in.) floor panels figure to install the panels in the proper positions.

Note:
a. This floor-tile arrangement is recommended so that the casters or leveling pads are placed on
separate floor tiles to minimize the weight on a single floor tile. Furthermore, it is recommended
that tiles bearing the weight (having casters or leveling pads on the tiles) be uncut to retain the
strength of the floor tile.
b. The following figure is intended only to show relative positions and accurate dimensions of floor
cutouts. The figure is not intended to be a machine template and is not drawn to scale.

150 Site and hardware planning

Raised floor with 610 mm (24 in.) floor panels figure

Figure 77. Raised floor with 610 mm (24 in.) floor panels figure

Related reference:
“Considerations for multiple-system installations” on page 163
Learn about the installation requirements for a multiple-system installation.

Securing the rack

Securing your rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor or to a raised floor prevents movement when
vibrations occur.

Note: Securing the rack is an optional procedure. See Vibration and shock for more information.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 151

The following can be ordered by the customer as additional rack-securing options for the model 9119-590,
9406-595, and 9119-595.
v Request for Price Quotation (RPQ) 8A1183 for attaching the rack-mounting plates to the concrete floor
(nonraised floor)
v RPQ 8A1185 to attach the rack to a concrete floor when on a raised floor 241 - 298.5 mm (9.5 - 11.75 in.
high)
v RPQ 8A1186 to attach the rack to a concrete floor when on a raised floor 298.5 - 406.4 mm (11.75 – 16
in. high)

Before the service representative can perform the tie-down procedure, you must complete the floor
preparation described in Cutting and placing floor panels and the procedures described in Attaching the rack
to a concrete (nonraised) floor or Attaching the rack to a 9 - 13 in. or 12 - 22 in. floor.
Related reference:
“Cutting and placing floor panels” on page 150
These guidelines specify how to make the necessary openings in the raised floor for installing your
server.
“Attaching the rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor” on page 153
Use this procedure to attach the rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor.
“Attaching the rack to a 9 - 13 in. or 12 - 22 in. floor” on page 155
Use these steps to attach your rack to a 228.6 mm to 330.2 mm (9 in. to 13 in. depth). floor.
Related information:
Vibration and shock

Installing the frame tie-down kit

This procedure describes how to install a frame tie-down kit and floor tie-down hardware.

The following procedures describe how to install a frame tie down kit and floor tie-down hardware to
secure an IBM rack to a concrete floor beneath a 228.6 mm to 330.2 mm (9 in. to 13 in. depth) or a 304.8
mm to 558.8 mm (12 in. to 22 in. depth) raised-floor environment or to a nonraised floor.

Positioning the rack

Use this procedure to unpack and position your rack.

To unpack and position the rack, do the following:

Note: Before attempting to position the rack, see Moving the system to the installation site.
1. Remove all packing and tape from the rack.
2. Place the last floor covering exactly adjacent and in the front of the final installation location.
3. Position the rack according to the customer floor plan.
4. Lock each caster wheel by tightening the thumbscrew on the caster.

Figure 78. Caster thumbscrew

152 Site and hardware planning

5. While moving the system to its final installed location and during relocation, it might be necessary to
lay down floor covering, such as Lexan sheets, to prevent floor panel damage.
Related reference:
“Moving the system to the installation site” on page 177
Several factors must be considered before moving the system to the installation site.

Attaching the rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor

Use this procedure to attach the rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor.

Attention: It is your responsibility to ensure the following steps are completed before the service
representative performs the tie-down procedure.

Note: Obtain the service of a qualified structural engineer to determine appropriate anchoring of the
mounting plates. A minimum of five anchor bolts for each mounting plate must be used to secure the
plates to the concrete floor. Because some of the drilled holes might be aligned with concrete
reinforcement rods below the surface of the concrete floor, additional holes must be drilled. Each
mounting plate must have at least five usable holes, two that are on the right-hand sides and the other
two are on opposite ends, and one hole at the center. The mounting plates should be able to withstand
1134 kg (2500 lb) pulling force on each end.
1. Be sure the rack is in the correct location. To ensure that the holes are in the correct location, the
diagonal distance of the center of the holes should be 1211.2 mm (47.7 in.). The distance between the
center holes to the center of the next holes should be 654.8 mm (25.8 in.) (the side-to-side distance)
and 1019 mm (40.1 in.) (the front-to-back distance).

Chapter 4. Server specifications 153

Figure 79. Rack tie down (nonraised floor)

2. Place the mounting plates (item 1 in the proceeding figure), front and rear, in the approximate
mounting position under the system rack.
3. To align the mounting plates to the system rack, do the following:
a. Place the four rack-mounting bolts (item 6 in the proceeding figure) through the plate assembly
holes at the bottom of the rack. Install the bushings and washers (item 4 and 5 in the proceeding
figure) to ensure bolt positioning.

154 Site and hardware planning

 Note: The plastic bushing is intended to provide electrical insulation between the frame and the
ground. When such insulation is not required, the plastic bushing does not need to be installed.
b. Position the mounting plates (item 1 in the proceeding figure) under the four rack-mounting
bolts (item 6 in the previous figure) so that the mounting bolts are centered directly over the
tapped holes.
c. Turn the rack-mounting bolts (item 6 in the previous figure) three or four rotations into the
tapped holes.
4. Mark the floor around the edge of the mounting plates, as shown in the following figure:

Figure 80. Mark floor around edge of mounting plates

5. Remove the mounting bolts from the threaded holes.

6. Move the rack away from the mounting plates.
7. Mark the floor at the center of each hole in the mounting plate (including tapped holes).
8. Remove the mounting plates from the marked locations.
9. At the marked location of the tapped mounting holes, drill two holes approximately 19 mm (.75 in.)
to allow clearance for the ends of the two rack-mounting bolts. The ends of the rack-mounting bolts
might protrude past the thickness of the mounting plate. Drill one hole in each group of anchor bolt
location marks as indicated on the marked floor.
10. Using at least five heavy-duty-concrete anchoring bolts for each mounting plate, mount the
mounting plates to the concrete floor.

Attaching the rack to a 9 - 13 in. or 12 - 22 in. floor

Use these steps to attach your rack to a 228.6 mm to 330.2 mm (9 in. to 13 in. depth). floor.

Attention: The frame tie downs are intended to secure a frame weighing less than 1429 kg (3150 lb).
These tie downs are designed to secure the frame on a raised-floor installation.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 155

Use the following to determine your next step:
1. If the rack is being attached to a short-depth raised-floor environment 228.6 - 330.2 mm (9 - 13 in.
depth), install the Raised Floor Tie Down Kit (Part number 16R1102) described in the following table.
Table 157. Raised Floor Tie Down Kit (Part number 16R1102)
Item Part number Quantity Description
1 44P3438 1 Wrench
2 44P2996 2 Stabilizer bar
3 44P2999 4 Turnbuckle Assembly

2. If the rack is being attached to a deep, raised-floor environment 304.8 - 558.8 mm (12 - 22 in. depth),
install the Raised Floor Tie Down Kit (Part number 16R1103) described in the following table.
Table 158. Raised Floor Tie Down Kit (Part number 16R1103)
Item Part number Quantity Description
1 44P3438 1 Wrench
2 44P2996 2 Stabilizer bar
3 44P3000 4 Turnbuckle Assembly

It is the your responsibility to ensure that the following steps are completed before the service
representative performs the tie-down procedure.

Note: To accommodate a floor with a depth of more than 558.8 mm (22 in.), a steel beam or a steel
channel adapter for mounting the subfloor eyebolts are required. The customer must supply the floor
eyebolts.

Consider the following when preparing the floor for the tie-down procedure:
v The hardware is designed to support a frame weighing no more than 1429 kg (3150 lb).
v The estimated maximum concentrated load on one caster for a 1429 kg (3150 lb) system is 476.3 kg
(1050 lb). For a multiple-system installation, one floor tile might bear a total concentrated load of 952.5
kg (2100 lb).

To install the eyebolts, do the following steps:

1. Obtain the service of a qualified structural engineer to determine the appropriate installation of the
eyebolts.
2. Consider the following before installing the eyebolts:
v Floor eyebolts must be securely anchored to the concrete floor.
v For a single-frame installation, four 1/2-in. diameter by 13-inch subfloor eyebolts should be secured
to the subfloor.
v The minimum height of the center of the internal diameter is 2.54 mm (1 in.) above the concrete
floor surface.
v The maximum height is 63.5 mm (2.5 in.) above the concrete floor surface. A height greater than
63.5 mm can cause excessive lateral deflection to the tie-down hardware.
v The eyebolt's internal diameter should be 1-3/16 inch, and each eyebolt should be able to withstand
1224.7 kg (2700 lb). The customer should obtain the services of a qualified consultant or structural
engineer to determine the appropriate anchoring method for these eyebolts and to ensure that the
raised floor and the building can support the floor-loading specifications.

156 Site and hardware planning

 v To ensure that the holes are in the correct location, the diagonal distance of the center of the holes
should be 1211.2 mm (47.7 in.). The distance between the center holes to the center of the next holes
should be 654.8 mm (25.8 in.) (the side-to-side distance) and 1019 mm (40.1 in.) (the front-to-back
distance)
3. Verify that the four eyebolts are positioned to match the dimensions is given in the following figures.

Figure 81. Eyebolt positioning for 610 mm (24 in.) floor tile layout

Chapter 4. Server specifications 157

Figure 82. Eyebolt positioning for 600 mm (23.6 in.) floor tile layout

158 Site and hardware planning

Figure 83. Stabilizer bar layout (top view)

4. Install the eyebolts to the floor. The service representative can now install the frame.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 159

Figure 84. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie-down hardware for 228.6 mm to 330.2 mm (9 in. to 13 in.) raised floor (Part
number 44P2999)

160 Site and hardware planning

Figure 85. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie-down hardware for 228.6 mm to 330.2 mm (9 in. to 13 in.) raised floor (Part
number 44P2999)

Chapter 4. Server specifications 161

Figure 86. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie-down hardware for 304.8 mm to 558.8 mm (12 in. to 22 in.) raised floor
(Part number 44P3000)

162 Site and hardware planning

Figure 87. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie-down hardware for 304.8 mm to 558.8 mm (12 in. to 22 in.) raised floor
(Part number 44P3000)

Considerations for multiple-system installations

Learn about the installation requirements for a multiple-system installation.

In a multiple-system installation, it is possible that a floor tile with cable cutouts (refer to Cutting and
placing floor panels) will bear two concentrated static loads up to 476 kg (1050 lb) per caster and leveler.
Thus, the total concentrated load can be as high as 953 kg (2100 lb). Contact the floor tile manufacturer or
consult a structural engineer to ensure that the raised floor assembly can support this load.

When you are integrating a model 9119-590, 9406-595, and 9119-595 into an existing multiple-system
environment, or when adding additional systems to an installed 9119-590, 9406-595, and 9119-595
consider the following factors:
v Minimum aisle width
For multiple rows of systems containing one or more model 9119-590, 9406-595, or 9119-595 the
minimum aisle width in the front of the system is 1219 mm (48 in.) and 914 mm (36 in.) in the rear of
the system to allow room to perform service operations. The front and rear service clearances should
be at least 1219 mm (48 in.) and 914 mm (36 in.), respectively. Service clearances are measured from the
edges of the frame (with doors open) to the nearest obstacle.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 163

v Thermal interactions
Systems should be faced front-to-front and rear-to-rear to create "cold" and "hot" aisles to maintain
effective system thermal conditions, as shown in the following figure.
Cold aisles need to be of sufficient width to support the airflow requirements of the installed systems
as indicated in Cooling requirements. The airflow per tile will be dependent on the underfloor pressure
and perforations in the tile. A typical underfloor pressure of 0.025 in. of water will supply 300-400 cfm
through a 25% open 2 ft by 2 ft floor tile.

164 Site and hardware planning

Figure 88. Proposed floor layout for multiple systems

Related reference:
“Cutting and placing floor panels” on page 150
These guidelines specify how to make the necessary openings in the raised floor for installing your
Chapter 4. Server specifications 165
server.
“Cooling requirements” on page 174
Use the system cooling requirements table in conjunction with the cooling requirements graph and chilled
airflow area graphic to determine the area of floor tiles to supply chilled air to the system.

Service clearances
The service clearance area is the area around the server that is needed for IBM service representatives to
service the server.

The minimum service clearance for systems with slimline doors is shown in the following figures.

Figure 89. Service clearances for single frame systems with slimline doors

166 Site and hardware planning

Figure 90. Service clearances for single frame systems with slimline doors (with alternative right-side service
clearance)

Chapter 4. Server specifications 167

Figure 91. Service clearances for double-frame systems with slimline doors

The minimum service clearance for systems with acoustical doors is shown in the following figures.

168 Site and hardware planning

Figure 92. Service clearances for single-frame systems with acoustical doors

Chapter 4. Server specifications 169

Figure 93. Service clearances for single-frame systems with acoustical doors (with alternative right-side service
clearance)

170 Site and hardware planning

Figure 94. Service clearances for double-frame systems with acoustical doors

Refer to the figure in Raised-floor requirements and preparation for service clearances shown in a raised-floor
installation.
Related reference:
“Raised-floor requirements and preparation” on page 149
A raised floor is required for model 9119-595 and its associated racks to ensure optimal performance and
to comply with electromagnetic compatibility requirements.

ASHRAE declarations
Use the ASHRAE declarations table and figures to determine the measurement reporting requirements
defined in the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
Thermal Guidelines for Data Processing Environments.

These guidelines are available at ASHRAE Technical Committee.

Table 159. ASHRAE declarations
Airflow maximum1 at 35°C
Typical Heat Release Airflow nominal1
Description (95°F)
Minimum configuration 6.1 kW 635 cfm 1080 m3/hr 915 cfm 1556 m3/hr

Chapter 4. Server specifications 171

Table 159. ASHRAE declarations (continued)
Airflow maximum1 at 35°C
Typical Heat Release Airflow nominal1
Description (95°F)
Maximum configuration 22.7 kW 1760 cfm 2992 m3/hr 2460 cfm 4182 m3/hr
Typical configuration 13.0 kW 1310 cfm 2227 m3/hr 1790 cfm 3043 m3/hr
ASHRAE Class 3
Minimum configuration 16-core with a single I/O drawer
Maximum configuration 64-core with 4 I/O drawers
Typical configuration 32-core with 4 I/O drawers

See Model 9119-590, 9406-595, 9119-595 server specifications for Weight and Overall system dimension.

Figure 95. Airflow figure for server mounted in a rack

Related information:
ASHRAE Technical Committee
ASHRAE guidelines are available in this website

Total system power consumption

The following table contains the maximum power requirements for model 9119-590, 9406-595, and
9119-595.
Table 160. System power requirements for 1.9 GHz, 2.1 GHz, or 2.3 GHz processor systems (9119-595, and
9406-595) - (kW)2
I/O drawers and Processor books
switches
1 2 3 4
0 5.3 9.7 13.2 16.7
1 6.1 10.5 14.0 17.5
2 7.0 11.3 14.8 18.3

172 Site and hardware planning

Table 160. System power requirements for 1.9 GHz, 2.1 GHz, or 2.3 GHz processor systems (9119-595, and
9406-595) - (kW)2 (continued)
I/O drawers and Processor books
switches
1 2 3 4
3 7.7 12.1 15.6 19.11
4 8.5 12.9 16.4 19.81
5 9.3 13.7
6 10.1 14.4
7 15.2
8 16.1
9 16.9
10 17.7
11 18.41
12 19.21
Note:
1. 100 A power cord is required unless a 5792 optional base rack is ordered and the noted drawers are installed in
the 5792 rack. See Planning for 5792 base rack.
2. To obtain the kBtu/hr value, multiply the kW value times 3.413.

Table 161. System power requirements for 1.65 GHz processor systems (9406-595, 9119-590, and 9119-595- (kW)1
I/O drawers and Processor books
switches
1 2 3 4
0 5.1 9.3 12.5 15.7
1 6.1 10.2 13.5 16.6
2 7.0 11.2 14.4 17.6
3 7.9 12.1 15.3
4 8.8 13.0 16.2
5 9.8 13.9
6 10.7 14.8
7 15.8
8 16.7
9 17.6
10 18.5
11
12
Note:
1. To obtain the kBtu/hr value, multiply the kW value times 3.413.

Maximum configurations are based on 16 memory cards per processor book, 16 disk drives per I/O
drawer. 20 PCI cards per I/O drawer and 16 switch cards per HPS switch. To determine the typical
power consumption for a specific configuration, subtract the following typical power values.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 173

Table 162. Typical power values
Component Typical power value (W)
Disk drives 20
I/O PCI card 20
Memory cards 100
Switch card 30

Related reference:
“Planning for 5792 base rack” on page 327
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical,
power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Cooling requirements
Use the system cooling requirements table in conjunction with the cooling requirements graph and chilled
airflow area graphic to determine the area of floor tiles to supply chilled air to the system.

The model 9119-590, 9406-595, and 9119-595 require air for cooling. As shown in Considerations for multiple
system installation rows of model 9119-590, 9406-595, and 9119-595 systems must face front-to-front. The
use of a raised floor is recommended to provide air through perforated floor panels placed in rows
between the fronts of systems (the cold aisles shown in Considerations for multiple system installation).

The following table provides system cooling requirements based on system configuration. The letter
designations in the table correspond to the letter designations in the graph shown in Cooling requirements
graph.
Table 163. System cooling requirements for 1.9 GHz, 2.1 GHz, or 2.3 GHz processor systems (9119-595 and
9406-595)
Number of I/O drawers Number of processor books
1 2 3 4
0 B D F H
1 C E F H
2 C E G H
3 C E G I
4 D F G I
5 D F
6 E G
7 G
8 G
9 H
10 H
11 H
12 I

Table 164. System cooling requirements for 1.65 GHz processor systems (9406-595, 9119-590, and 9119-595)
Number of I/O drawers Number of processor books
1 2 3 4
0 B D E F

174 Site and hardware planning

Table 164. System cooling requirements for 1.65 GHz processor systems (9406-595, 9119-590, and
9119-595) (continued)
Number of I/O drawers Number of processor books
1 2 3 4
1 B D E G
2 C D F G
3 C E F G
4 C E F H
5 D E
6 D F
7 F
8 G
9 G
10 G
11 H
12 H

Related reference:
“Considerations for multiple-system installations” on page 163
Learn about the installation requirements for a multiple-system installation.

Cooling requirements graph

Use the cooling requirements graph in conjunction with the cooling requirements tables and the chilled
airflow area graphic to determine the area of the floor tiles to supply chilled air to the system.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 175

Figure 96. Cooling requirements graph

Requirements for the chilled airflow area

The Chilled airflow area figure shows the chilled airflow area required for a system.

Use the system cooling requirements tables and the cooling requirements graph to determine the area of
floor tiles to supply chilled air to the system.

176 Site and hardware planning

Figure 97. Chilled airflow area

Moving the system to the installation site

Several factors must be considered before moving the system to the installation site.

Prior to moving the system to the installation site, you should:

v Determine the path that must be taken to move the system from the delivery location to the
installation site.
v Verify that the height of all doorways, elevators, and so on are sufficient to allow moving the system to
the installation site.
v Verify that the weight limitations of elevators, ramps, floors, floor tiles, and so on are sufficient to
allow moving the system to the installation site. If the height or weight of the system can cause a
problem when the system is moved to the installation site, you should contact your local site planning
or sales representative.

For more detailed information, see Access.

If needed, a height reduction feature ( 7960 for ) might be ordered. This feature allows for the system
frame and the expansion frame to be shipped in two pieces and assembled at your location. With this
feature, the top section of the system frame (including the power subsystem) is removed. The height of

Chapter 4. Server specifications 177

the system frame with the upper section removed is reduced by .35 m (14 in.) to approximately 1.64 m
(65 in.). For planning purposes, the weight of the rack top frame and components are shown in the
following table.
Table 165. Weight of rack top frame and components
Weight
lb kg
Bulk Power Assembly (Max value. 179 81.2
Varies by Configuration)
Bulk Power Enclosure 45 20.4
Bulk power Controler 10 4.5
Bulk Power Regulator 28 12.7
Bulk Power Distributor 10 4.5
Bulk Power Hub 10 4.5
Side Cover, pair 110 49.9
Front acoustic door, system unit 56 25.4
Rear acoustic door, system unit 36 16.3
Front and Rear Acoustic door, I/O 56 25.4
rack
Front and rear slimline door 33 15

Delivery and subsequent transportation of the equipment

DANGER
Heavy equipment—personal injury or equipment damage might result if mishandled. (D006)

You must prepare your environment to accept the new product based on the installation planning
information provided, with assistance from an IBM Installation Planning Representative (IPR) or IBM
authorized service provider. In anticipation of the equipment delivery, prepare the final installation site in
advance so that professional movers or riggers can transport the equipment to the final installation site
within the computer room. If for some reason, this is not possible at the time of delivery, you must make
arrangements to have professional movers or riggers return to finish the transportation at a later date.
Only professional movers or riggers should transport the equipment. The IBM authorized service
provider can only perform minimal frame repositioning within the computer room, as needed, to perform
required service actions. You are also responsible for using professional movers or riggers when you
relocate or dispose of equipment.
Related information:
Acoustics

Phase imbalance and BPR configuration

Use the Phase imbalance and BPR configuration table to determine the phase imbalance of your server's
configuration.

Depending on the number of Bulk Power Regulators (BPRs) in your system, phase imbalance can occur
in line currents. All systems are provided with two bulk power assemblies (BPAs), with separate power
cords. Phase currents will be divided between two power cords in normal operation. The following table
illustrates phase imbalance as a function of BPR configuration. For information about power
consumption, see Total system power consumption.

178 Site and hardware planning

Table 166. Phase imbalance and BPR configuration
Number of BPRs per BPA Phase A Line Current Phase B Line Current Phase C Line Current
1 Power / Vline Power / Vline 0
2 0.5 Power / Vline 0.866 Power / Vline 0.5 Power / Vline
3 0.577 Power / Vline 0.577 Power / Vline 0.577 Power / Vline
Note: Power is calculated from Total system power consumption. Vline is line-to-line nominal input voltage. Because
total system power is divided between two power cords, divide the power number by 2.

Related reference:
“Total system power consumption” on page 172

Balancing power panel loads

Use these methods to ensure that power panel loads are balanced.

When three-phase power is used, and depending on the system configuration, the phase currents can be
fully balanced or unbalanced. System configurations with three BPRs per BPA have balanced power panel
loads, while configurations with only one or two have unbalanced loads. With two BPRs per BPA, two of
the three-phases draw an equal amount of current, and are, nominally, 57.8% of the current on the third
phase. With one BPR per BPA, two of three-phases carry an equal amount of current, with no current
drawn on the third phase. The following figure is an example of feeding several loads of this type from
two power panels in a way that balances the load among the three-phases.

Note: Use of ground-fault-interrupt (GFI) circuit breakers is not recommended for this system because
GFI circuit breakers are earth-leakage-current sensing circuit breakers and this system is a high
earth-leakage-current product.

Figure 98. Power panel load balancing

The method illustrated in the preceding figure requires that the connection from the three poles of each
breaker to the three-phase pins of a connector be varied. Some electricians might prefer to maintain a
consistent wiring sequence from the breakers to the connectors. The following figure shows a way to
balance the load without changing the wiring on the output of any breakers. The three-pole breakers are
alternated with single-pole breakers, so that the three-pole breakers do not all begin on Phase A.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 179

Figure 99. Power panel load balancing

The following figure shows another way of distributing the unbalanced load evenly. In this case, the
three-pole breakers are alternated with two-pole breakers.

Figure 100. Power panel load balancing

Configuring power cords

Use the Single-frame system power cord configuration and Double-frame system power cord
configuration figures to route power cords through floor tile cutouts.

The power cords exit the system from different points of the frame as indicated in the following figure.
For raised-floor applications, it is recommended that both cords be routed to the rear of the frame and
through the same floor-tile cutout. For more information about raised-floor applications, refer to Cutting
and placing floor panels.

180 Site and hardware planning

Figure 101. Single-frame system power cord configuration

Chapter 4. Server specifications 181

Figure 102. Double-frame system power cord configuration

Related reference:
“Cutting and placing floor panels” on page 150
These guidelines specify how to make the necessary openings in the raised floor for installing your
server.

Dual power installation

To take full advantage of the redundancy and reliability that is built into the computer system, the
system must be powered from two distribution panels.

The model 9119-590, 9406-595, and 9119-595 configurations are designed with a fully redundant power
system. These systems have two power cords attached to two power input ports which, in turn, power a
fully redundant power distribution system within the system.

Approximate system weights by configuration

Use the Approximate system weights tables to calculate the approximate weight of your system based on
its configuration.

If the system that you order has a frame that weighs more than 1134 kg (2500 lb) when it is shipped from
the factory, a weight-distribution plate is provided for the system. This plate is used to minimize the
point loading from casters and leveling pads.

182 Site and hardware planning

Table 167. Approximate system weights with acoustical covers and with integrated battery backup – kg (lb)1, 2, 3

I/O drawers and Processor books

switches with
redundant integrated
battery backup
(non-redundant 1 2 3 4
available)
0 809 (1784) 1075 (2370) 1246 (2747) 1223 (2697)
1 908 (2002) 1092 (2408) 1263 (2785) 1322 (2915)
2 1125 (2480) 1309 (2887) 1368 (3017) 1427 (3147)
3 1534 (3382) 1719 (3789)
4 1639 (3614) 1824 (4021)
5 1744 (3846) 1929 (4253)
6 1853 (4085) 2037 (4492)
7 2143 (4724)
8 2248 (4956)
9 2353 (5188)
10 2458 (5420)
11
12
Note:
1. A primary rack with one or two processor books and either greater than four I/O drawers or greater than two
I/O drawers and two integrated battery backup units requires a FC8691. A primary frame with three or four
processor books and either greater than four I/O drawers or greater than two I/O drawers and two integrated
battery backup units requires a FC5792.
2. The 9119-590 with two processor books supports a maximum of eight I/O drawers.
3. The integrated battery backup option is not available for model the 9406-595.

Table 168. Approximate system weights with acoustical covers and without integrated battery backup – kg (lb)1, 2

I/O drawers and Processor books

switches without
integrated battery
backup 1 2 3 4

0 719 (1585) 895 (1972) 975 (2150) 952 (2100)

1 818 (1803) 912 (2010) 992 (2188) 1051 (2318)
2 944 (2082) 1039 (2290) 1098 (2420) 1157 (2550)
3 1050 (2315) 1158 (2522) 1203 (2652) 1262 (2782)
4 1155 (2547) 1249 (2754) 1308 (2884) 1367 (3014)
5 1564 (3448) 1658 (3656)
6 1669 (3680) 1764 (3888)
7 1869 (4120)
8 1977 (4359)
9 2082 (4591)
10 2188 (4823)
11 2293 (5055)
12 2398 (5287)

Chapter 4. Server specifications 183

Table 168. Approximate system weights with acoustical covers and without integrated battery backup – kg (lb)1,
2 (continued)

I/O drawers and Processor books

switches without
integrated battery
backup 1 2 3 4

Note:
1. A primary rack with one or two processor books and either greater than four I/O drawers or greater than two
I/O drawers and two integrated battery backup units requires a FC8691. A primary frame with three or four
processor books and either greater than four I/O drawers or greater than two I/O drawers and two integrated
battery backup units requires a FC5792.
2. The 9119-590 with two processor books supports a maximum of eight I/O drawers.

Table 169. Approximate system weights with slimline covers and with integrated battery backup – kg (lb)1, 2, 3

I/O drawers and Processor books

switches with
redundant integrated
battery backup
(non-redundant 1 2 3 4
available)
0 801 (1765) 985 (2371) 1156 (2748) 1215 (2678)
1 900 (1983) 1084 (2389) 1255 (2766) 1314 (2896)
2 1116 (2461) 1301 (2868) 1360 (2998) 1419 (3128)
3 1517 (3344) 1619 (3750)
4 1622 (3576) 1806 (3982)
5 1727 (3808) 1911 (4214)
6 1836 (4047) 2020 (4453)
7 2125 (4685)
8 2230 (4917)
9 2335 (5149)
10 2441 (5381)
11
12
Note:
1. A primary rack with one or two processor books and either greater than four I/O drawers or greater than two
I/O drawers and two integrated battery backup units requires a FC8691. A primary frame with three or four
processor books and either greater than four I/O drawers or greater than two I/O drawers and two integrated
battery backup units requires a FC5792.
2. The 9119-590 with two processor books supports a maximum of eight I/O drawers.
3. The integrated battery backup option is not available for model 9406-595.

Table 170. Approximate system weights with slimline covers and without integrated battery backup – kg (lb)1, 2

I/O drawers and Processor books

switches without
integrated battery
backup 1 2 3 4

0 710 (1566) 886 (1953) 967 (2131) 944 (2081)

1 809 (1784) 903 (1991) 984 (2169) 1043 (2299)

184 Site and hardware planning

Table 170. Approximate system weights with slimline covers and without integrated battery backup – kg (lb)1,
2 (continued)

I/O drawers and Processor books

switches without
integrated battery
backup 1 2 3 4

2 936 (2063) 1030 (2271) 1089 (2401) 1148 (2531)

3 1041 (2295) 1135 (2503) 1194 (2633) 1253 (2763)
4 1146 (2527) 1241 (2735) 1299 (2865) 1358 (2995)
5 1547 (3410) 1641 (3618)
6 1652 (3642) 1746 (3850)
7 1852 (4082)
8 1960 (4321)
9 2065 (4553)
10 2170 (4785)
11 2276 (5017)
12 2381 (5249)
Note:
1. A primary rack with one or two processor books and either greater than four I/O drawers or greater than two
I/O drawers and two integrated battery backup units requires a FC8691. A primary frame with three or four
processor books and either greater than four I/O drawers or greater than two I/O drawers and two integrated
battery backup units requires a FC5792.
2. The 9119-590 with two processor books supports a maximum of eight I/O drawers.

Weight distribution
Use the Floor loading dimensions figure and the Floor loading for system tables to determine the floor
loading for various configurations.

The following figure shows the floor loading dimensions for the model 9119-590, 9406-595, and 9119-595.
Use this figure in conjunction with the floor loading tables to determine the floor loading for various
configurations.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 185

Figure 103. Floor loading dimensions

The following table shows the values used for calculating floor loading for model 9119-590, 9406-595, and
9119-595. Weights include covers, width and depth are indicated without covers.
Table 171. Floor loading for system with 2 processor books, 12 drawers, and without integrated battery backup
a (sides) b (front) c (back) 2 frames
mm in. mm in. mm in. lb/ft2 kg/m2
25 1.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 198.6 969.6
25 1.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 158.3 772.9
25 1.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 133.2 650.4
254 10.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 159.8 780.3
254 10.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 128.5 627.6
254 10.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 109.0 532.4
508 20.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 133.0 649.4
508 20.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 108.0 527.1
508 20.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 92.3 450.8
762 30.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 115.1 562.0

186 Site and hardware planning

Table 171. Floor loading for system with 2 processor books, 12 drawers, and without integrated battery
backup (continued)
a (sides) b (front) c (back) 2 frames
762 30.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 94.2 459.9
762 30.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 81.2 396.3

Table 172. Floor loading for systems with 4 processor books, 4 drawers, and without integrated battery backup
a (sides) b (front) c (back) 2 frames
mm in. mm in. mm in. lb/ft2 kg/m2
25 1.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 223.3 1090.5
25 1.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 177.3 865.8
25 1.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 148.6 725.7
254 10.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 151.2 738.3
254 10.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 121.9 595.3
254 10.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 103.7 506.2
508 20.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 114.9 561.0
508 20.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 94.0 459.1
508 20.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 81.0 395.7
762 30.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 94.8 462.9
762 30.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 78.6 383.8
762 30.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 68.5 334.5

Table 173. Floor loading for system with 2 processor books, 10 drawers, and with integrated battery backup
a (sides) b (front) c (back) 2 frames
mm in. mm in. mm in. lb/ft2 kg/m2
25 1.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 203.2 992.1
25 1.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 161.9 790.3
25 1.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 136.1 664.4
254 10.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 163.4 797.8
254 10.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 131.3 641.0
254 10.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 111.3 543.3
508 20.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 135.9 663.5
508 20.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 110.2 537.9
508 20.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 94.1 459.6
762 30.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 117.5 573.7
762 30.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 96.0 468.9
762 30.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 82.7 403.6

Table 174. Floor loading for system with 4 processor books, 2 drawers, and with integrated battery backup
a (sides) b (front) c (back) 2 frames
mm in. mm in. mm in. lb/ft2 kg/m2
25 1.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 232.5 1135.3

Chapter 4. Server specifications 187

Table 174. Floor loading for system with 4 processor books, 2 drawers, and with integrated battery
backup (continued)
a (sides) b (front) c (back) 2 frames
25 1.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 184.4 900.2
25 1.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 154.4 753.6
254 10.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 157.1 766.8
254 10.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 126.4 617.2
254 10.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 107.3 524.0
508 20.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 119.1 581.3
508 20.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 97.2 474.7
508 20.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 83.6 408.3
762 30.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 98.0 478.7
762 30.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 81.1 395.9
762 30.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 70.5 344.3

Floor loading for the system is illustrated in the Proposed Floor Layout for Multiple Systems in
Considerations for multiple system installations.
Related reference:
“Considerations for multiple-system installations” on page 163
Learn about the installation requirements for a multiple-system installation.

Unit emergency power off

You can incorporate the integrated battery backup into a computer room emergency power off (EPO)
system. Otherwise, volatile data can be lost.

The server has a unit emergency power off (UEPO) switch on the front of the first frame (A Frame). Refer
to the following figure, which shows a simplified UEPO panel.

188 Site and hardware planning

Figure 104. Unit emergency power off figure

When the switch is reset, the utility power is confined to the system power compartment. All volatile
data will be lost.

It is possible to attach the computer room emergency power off (EPO) system to the system UEPO. When
this is done, resetting the computer room EPO disconnects all power from the power cords and the
internal battery backup unit, if it is provided. All volatile data will be lost in this case also.

If the room EPO is not connected to the UEPO, resetting the computer room EPO removes ac power from
the system. If the interlock bypass feature is used, the system remains powered for a short time based on
system configuration.

Computer room emergency power off

You can incorporate the integrated battery backup into a computer room emergency power off (EPO)
system. Otherwise, volatile data can be lost.

When the integrated battery backup is installed and the room EPO is reset, the batteries engage and the
computer continues to run. It is possible to attach the computer room EPO system to the machine EPO.
When this is done, resetting the room EPO disconnects all power from the power cords and the internal
battery backup unit. In this event, all volatile data will be lost.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 189

To incorporate the integrated battery backup into the room Emergency Power Off systems (EPO), a cable
must connect to the back of the system EPO panel. The following figures illustrate how this connection is
made.

Figure 105. Computer room emergency power off figure

The preceding figure illustrates the back of the machine UEPO panel with the room EPO cable plugging
into the machine. Notice the switch actuator. After it is moved to make the cable connection possible, the
room EPO cable must be installed for the machine to power on.

In the following figure, an AMP connector 770019-1 is needed to connect to the system EPO panel. For
room EPO cables using wire sizes #20 AWG to #24 AWG, use AMP pins (part number 770010-4). This
connection should not exceed 5 Ohms, which is approximately 61 m (200 ft) of #24 AWG.

Figure 106. AMP connector figure

Machine holdup times

Use the Typical machine holdup time tables to determine the typical machine holdup times (time versus
load) for fresh and aged batteries.

190 Site and hardware planning

The following criteria apply to both tables.
v All times are listed in minutes
v Machine load is listed in total ac input power (power for both power cords combined)
v A fresh battery is defined as 2.5 years old or less.
v An aged battery is defined as 6.5 years.

Note: Battery capacity decreases gradually as the battery ages (from fresh-battery value to aged-battery
value). The system diagnoses a failed-battery condition if the capacity decreases below the aged-battery
value.
Table 175. Typical machine holdup time versus load for fresh battery
Typical machine holdup time versus load for fresh battery
Machine load 3.33 kW 6.67 kW 10 kW 13.33 kW 16.67 kW 20 kW 21.67 kW
Integrated battery backup
N R N R N R N R N R N R N R
configuration
1 BPR 7.0 21.0 2.1 7.0
2 BPR 21.0 50.0 7.0 21.0 4.0 11.0 2.1 7.0
3 BPR 32.0 68.0 12.0 32.0 7.0 21.0 4.9 12.0 3.2 9.5 2.1 7.0 1.7 6.5
N=Non-redundant, R=Redundant

Table 176. Typical machine holdup time versus load for aged battery
Typical machine holdup time versus load for aged battery
Machine load 3.3 kW 6.67 kW 10 kW 13.33 kW 16.67 kW 20 kW 21.67 kW
Integrated battery backup
N R N R N R N R N R N R N R
configuration
1 BPR 4.2 12.6 1.3 4.2
2 BPR 12.6 30.0 4.2 12.6 2.4 6.6 1.3 4.2
3 BPR 19.2 41.0 7.2 19.2 4.2 12.6 2.9 7.2 1.9 5.7 1.3 4.2 1.0 3.9
N=Non-redundant, R=Redundant

Model 9125-F2A server specifications

Server specifications provide detailed information for your server, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.
Table 177. Model 9125-F2A components
Model Description Minimum per system Maximum per system
FC 57701 42 EIA unit, 24-inch rack 1 1
(60-inch deep)
FC 5798 PCI-X I/O drawer (4U) 0 4
2
FC 6872 Water cooling option 1 1
FC 6874 Slimline doors (front and 0 1
rear) with integrated rear
heat exchanger
FC 6875 Acoustic doors (front and 0 1
rear) with integrated rear
heat exchanger
FC 7298 32-core, 4.7 GHz, POWER6® 1 14
processor (2U)
1
The customer must choose between either acoustical doors or slimline doors during the order process. Slimline
doors take up slightly less floor space in front of the rack but provide no noise reduction and generally do not meet
industry acoustical noise limits. See Doors and covers for model 9125-F2A.
2
Maximum water coolant contained in a rack of 12 CEC drawers and 1 disk enclosure: 100 liters (26.5 gallons).

Chapter 4. Server specifications 191

Table 178. Dimensions
Dimensions Slimline doors Acoustical doors
Height 2013 mm (79.5 in.) 2013 mm (79.5 in.)
Width 785 mm (30.9 in.) 785 mm (30.9 in)
Depth 1785 mm (70.3 in.) 1939 mm (76.3 in.)
1
The front and rear doors are shipped separately from the rack assembly.

Table 179. Weight

Maximum total system weight
1680 kg (3703 lb)
For configuration weight, see Approximate system weights by configuration.

Table 180. Electrical and thermal characteristics (Three-phase)

Electrical and thermal
characteristics Properties
Rated voltage and 200 - 240 V ac at 50 - 60 Hz 380 - 480 V ac at 50 - 60 Hz
frequency
Rated current (Amps) 100 A 60 A
Power consumption See Total system power consumption
Typical power factor 0.99 0.96 0.96
1
Thermal output
Dual power feature code Standard
Branch circuit breaker and See Breaker rating and cord information
cord
1
Power draw and heat load vary greatly by configuration. When planning for an electrical system, it is important to
use maximum values. However, when planning for heat load, you can use the IBM Systems Energy Estimator to
obtain a heat output estimate based on a specific configuration. See The IBM Systems Energy Estimator Web site for
more information.

Table 181. Inrush current. Inrush current per phase of each line cord to BPE
208 time (micro 480 time (micro
BPR number 208 V ac amperage seconds) 480 V ac amperage seconds)
Zero 100 20 120 20
One 110 150 140 150
Two 140 150 170 150
Three 170 150 210 150
Four 200 150 250 150

The environment must adhere to all American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
Engineers (ASHRAE) class 1 specifications except for operating temperature range and the wet bulb
temperature. The maximum allowable operating temperature is reduced for altitudes above 4250 feet as
shown in the Operating inlet air temperature versus elevation graphic.

192 Site and hardware planning

 1, 2
Table 182. Environmental specifications 2100 meters (6890 ft)
ASHRAE Class 1 (Except for temperature range)
Operating 10 - 28°C (50 - 82.4°F)
temperature
(maximum inlet (Dry
bulb) (0 - 2100 m (0 -
6890 ft) altitude)
Nonoperating 10 - 43°C (50 - 109°F)
temperature
Storage temperature 1 - 60°C (34 - 140°F)
Shipping temperature -40 - 60°C (-40 - 140°F)
Maximum altitude 3000 meters (9843 ft)
Operating Nonoperating Storage Shipping
Noncondensing 20 - 80% 20 - 80% 5 - 80% 5 - 100%
relative humidity
1
When an IBM-approved vapor bag and desiccant packets are used to protect the system, the storage specifications
are valid for 6 months and the shipping specifications are valid for 1 month. Otherwise, storage and shipping
specifications are valid for 2 weeks each.
2
The upper limit of the dry bulb temperature must be derated above 2100 m (6890 ft), as is shown in Operating inlet
air temperature versus elevation. The maximum altitude is 3000 m (9843 ft).

Figure 107. Operating inlet air temperature versus elevation

Chapter 4. Server specifications 193

Table 183. Declared acoustical noise emissions for the 9125-F2A
Declared A-Weighted Sound Power Level, Declared A-Weighted Sound Pressure Level,
LWAd (B) LpAm (dB)
Product
configuration Operating Idling Operating Idling
4 4
Typical configuration 8.2 8.2 65 65
with acoustical door
set: seven processor
nodes, two modular
water units, and one
bulk power assembly.
All air moving
devices at nominal
speeds.
Typical configuration 8.5 8.5 68 68
with nonacoustical
(slimline) door set:
seven processor
nodes, two modular
water units, and one
bulk power assembly.
All air moving
devices at nominal
speeds.
Maximum 8.75 8.75 70 70
configuration with
acoustical door set:
fourteen processor
nodes, two modular
water units, and one
bulk power assembly.
All air moving
devices at nominal
speeds.
Maximum 8.95 8.95 72 72
configuration with
nonacoustical
(slimline) door set:
fourteen processor
nodes, two modular
water units, and one
bulk power assembly.
All air moving
devices at nominal
speeds.

194 Site and hardware planning

Table 183. Declared acoustical noise emissions for the 9125-F2A (continued)
Declared A-Weighted Sound Power Level, Declared A-Weighted Sound Pressure Level,
LWAd (B) LpAm (dB)
Product
configuration Operating Idling Operating Idling
1 WAd pAm
Declared level L is the upper-limit A-weighted sound power level. Declared level L is the mean A-weighted
sound pressure level measured at the 1-meter bystander positions.
2
All measurements are made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.
3
1 Bel (B) equals 10 Decibels (dB).
4
Meets IT Product Noise Limits for, Generally Unattended Data Center, per Statskontoret Technical Standard 26:6.
Note: 5 Government regulations (such as those prescribed by Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA) or European Community Directives) might govern noise level exposure in the workplace and might apply
to you and your server installation. This IBM system is available with an optional acoustical door feature that can
help reduce the noise emitted from this system. The actual sound pressure levels in your installation depend on a
variety of factors, including the number of racks in the installation, the size, materials, the configuration of the room
where you designate the racks to be installed, the noise levels from other equipment, the room ambient
temperature, and employees' location in relation to the equipment. Compliance with such government regulations
also depends on a variety of additional factors, including the duration of employees' exposure and whether
employees wear hearing protection. Consult qualified experts in this field to determine whether you are in
compliance with the applicable regulations.

Table 184. Service clearances

Front Back
1549.4 mm (61 in.) 914.4 mm (36 in.)
1
Service clearances are always referenced off of the side covers or the front and back of the frame, and not the front
and back doors.
2
There is no side service clearance required next to the frame on either side.
3
Side service clearance is required in the front and back of the frame.
4
Air flow is from the front of the frame to the back of the frame.
5
Note the dimension from the back of the frame to the floor tile grid alignment point. It is extremely important that
this point on the frame is aligned properly to the floor tile. It is essential that the weight distribution plates and
floor tile cutouts correspond to the features on the base of the frame.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 195

Figure 108. Service clearance

196 Site and hardware planning

Figure 109. Multiple frames - Hot aisle and cold aisle

Chapter 4. Server specifications 197

Figure 110. Multiple frames - Hot aisle and cold aisle

To effectively plan for model 9125-F2A, you need to see the following topics and incorporate the
information into your server planning, as appropriate.

198 Site and hardware planning

Electromagnetic compatibility compliance

This server meets the following electromagnetic compatibility specifications: FCC (CFR 47, Part 15); VCCI;
CISPR-22; 2004/108/EC; BSMI (CNS-13438, 2006 - Certification in Taiwan is for 220 V ac /60 Hz only);
AS/NZS CISPR 22: 2006; ICES/NMB-003; Korean EMI/EMC (RLL Notice 2007-69, Notice 2007-71);
People's Republic of China Commodity Inspection Law

Breaker rating and cord information

Use the breaker rating and cord information to determine the circuit breaker rating for the power cords
used with your server.

Voltage, frequency, and circuit breaker rating

Table 185. Voltage, frequency, and circuit breaker rating
Input configuration Three-phase and ground (not Three-phase and ground (not
neutral) neutral)
Rated nominal voltage and frequency 200 - 240 Volts alternating current V 380 - 480 Volts alternating current V
ac at 50 - 60 Hz ac at 50 - 60 Hz
Rated current (amperes per phase) 100 A 60 A
Acceptable voltage tolerance at 180 - 259 333 - 508
machine power cord
Note: The voltage ranges are standard world wide alternating current voltages. The machine runs voltage 180 - 508
V ac. This range represents some nonstandard nominal voltages. If operation from a nonstandard voltage is
required, contact IBM for guidance with selecting the correct power cord. This server is designed to tolerate
momentary power line disturbances beyond the acceptable voltage tolerance range.

Power cord information

The frame has four power cords. Frames configured with less than four processor books and without I/O
drawers only require two of the power cords for voltage ranges up to 415 V ac. Frames configured with
less than four processor books and up to three I/O drawers only require two of the power cords for
voltage range of 480 V ac. If it is possible that additional processor books will be added in the future,
feeds should be installed for four power cords.

Power cords are available in two current ratings, 60 - 100 A, two facility termination styles, IEC-60309
and un-terminated, and two lengths 1.83 m (6 ft) and 4.27 m (14 ft). The required current rating is
dependent on the input voltage that the machine is connected to. You can select the desired length and
termination style.
Table 186. Power cord information
Facilities Water Tight Examples
Model Description Wire size Customer side plug Receptacle Connector Inlet
FC 8693 Power cord: 6 ft 15R7496 41V2338 60 A / 480 V 460R7W 460C7W 460B7W
(380-480 V ac) ac 460P7V05
#6 American wire
Three-phase gauge
IEC-6033091
Type PPE
FC 8694 Power cord: 14 ft 41U0426 No Connector (Cut
(380-480 V ac) end)
#6 American wire
Three-phase gauge
Un-terminated
DP-1

Chapter 4. Server specifications 199

Table 186. Power cord information (continued)
Facilities Water Tight Examples
Model Description Wire size Customer side plug Receptacle Connector Inlet
FC 8695 Power cord: 14 ft 41V2339 No Connector (Cut
(200-240 V ac) end)
#4 American wire
Three-phase gauge
Un-terminated
Type PPE
FC 8696 Power cord: 14 ft 41V2339 11J4847 100 A / 250 V 4100R9W 4100C9W 4100B9W
(200-240 V ac) ac 4100P9V01
#4 American wire
Three-phase gauge
IEC-603309
Type PPE
FC 8696 and Request Power Cord, 6 ft 100 A
for Price Quotation
(RPQ) 8A1668 Three-phase
IEC-603309
FC 8699 Power cord: 14 ft 15R7496 41V2338 60 A / 480 V 460R7W 460C7W 460B7W
(380-480 V ac) ac 460P7V05
#6 American wire
Three-phase gauge
IEC-603309
Type PPE
8699 and RPQ 8A1668 Power Cord, 6 ft 60 A

Three-phase
IEC-603309
1
This is required in Chicago, USA.

Advantages of using high input voltages

The 9125-F2A has a 180 - 508 V ac three-phase universal power input so that it can be installed in any
geography in the world. For some installations, you can choose to run the system from a higher voltage
(380 - 480 V ac) or a lower voltage (200 - 240 V ac). When this choice is available, the higher voltage
group provides several advantages:
1. Power cords, power cord connectors, if applicable, and building wiring are all smaller, which can
reduce the installation cost and complexity.
2. Step down transformers on the computer floor are not required, which can reduce the installation cost
significantly.
3. Energy efficiency and typically the building infrastructure that feeds power to it will be higher, which
reduces operating costs.

This is an example of energy efficiency for North America.

Figure 111. Low versus high line cost of ownerships

200 Site and hardware planning

Doors and covers for model 9125-F2A
Doors and covers are an integral part of the system and are required for product safety, proper airflow
and cooling, electromagnetic compatibility compliance, and, for certain options, acoustical noise
reduction.

The following rear door options are available for model 9125-F2A:
v Acoustical door option, with a rear door heat exchanger that is integrated
This feature provides a specially designed, noise-reducing door set for those who want lower noise
levels in their data center or who might want to meet certain acoustical or noise exposure
requirements. The acoustical door option consists of a special front door, approximately 250 mm (10
in.) in depth, which contains acoustical treatment and which lowers the noise level of the system by
approximately 5 dB (0.5 B) compared to the slimline door option. An integrated rear door heat
exchanger is delivered with the door kit.
v Slimline door option, with a rear door heat exchanger that is integrated
This feature provides an option to take up less floor space, when space might be more critical than
acoustical noise levels. The slimline door option consists of a front door, approximately 100 mm (4 in.)
in depth, and can be used in conjunction with the required rear door heat exchanger previously
described. Acoustical treatment is not available for the slimline door option, and the 9125-F2A system
generally does not meet industry acoustical noise limits with this option installed. A rear door heat
exchanger that is integrated is delivered with the door kit.

For declared levels of acoustical noise emissions, refer to the Model 9125-F2A server specifications.

Plan views
Dimensional planning information is shown in this top-down view of your server.

Figure 112. Service clearance

Chapter 4. Server specifications 201

Raised-floor requirements and preparation
A raised floor is required for model 9125-F2A to ensure optimal performance and to comply with
electromagnetic compatibility requirements.

Use these guidelines when setting up a system in a datacenter:

v A raised floor is required to enable the water cooling hoses, power line cords, and signal cables to exit
the rack. Top exits for hoses, line cords, and cables are not supported. There are acceptable alternatives
to a raised floor, such as a structurally sound pedestal or troughs in a poured concrete floor.
v A raised floor is required for all cabling on the system. Overhead cabling is not supported.
v See Plan views for the service clearances and external dimensions for both the standard and acoustic
door options.

Note: The rack must be aligned to the floor tile grid as displayed in Service clearances in Model
9125-F2A server specifications to enable use of the weight distribution hardware and to facilitate proper
floor tile cutouts.
v Multiple rack floor plan layouts using a standard hot and cold aisle cooling technique are shown in
Plan views. The layout in the Plan views graphic shows the most compact floor plan layouts possible on
the smaller 600 mm floor tile grid.

Note: When multiple rows of systems are deployed, the minimum aisle width between 9125-F2A
models is a function of aligning the racks with the floor tiles rather than the minimum service
clearances.
v Floor strength must be considered when determining floor plan layouts. To accommodate the most
compact floor plan layouts, the concentrated load for the raised floor must be 896 kg/m2(183 lb / ft 2)
or greater. If the floor does not have a load rating at least this high, the layout will have to be spread
out to distribute the weight over the floor area, or the floor will have to be modified to improve its
capability. See Approximate system weights by configuration for instructions on how to calculate the floor
loading for given floor plan layouts.
Related concepts:
“Approximate system weights by configuration” on page 259
Use the tables to calculate the approximate weight of your system based on its configuration.
Related reference:
“Plan views” on page 201
Dimensional planning information is shown in this top-down view of your server.

Cutting and placing floor panels

These guidelines specify how to make the necessary openings in a raised floor for installing a model
9125-F2A.

Installation of facilities power, cooling, and cable management hardware

Installations of plumbing, signal cable troughs, electrical power, and air conditioning are your
responsibilities, and they should be performed by licensed professionals.

Cutting floor tiles

Raised floor cutouts must be positioned in accordance with the provided dimensions. They must be
protected by molding that is not electrically conductive, appropriately sized, with edges treated to
prevent cable damage and to prevent casters from rolling into the floor cutouts.

The following examples of floor cutouts are properly positioned and fitted with molding.

202 Site and hardware planning

Note: The hose positioning fixture was designed to hold the hoses in place and to be used as template
for both back and front tile cutouts.

Figure 113. Rear cutout with molding

Figure 114. Rear cutout images

Chapter 4. Server specifications 203

Figure 115. Front cutout with molding

Figure 116. Front cutout images

204 Site and hardware planning

Figure 117. 610 mm Floor tile cutout definition

Chapter 4. Server specifications 205

Figure 118. 610 mm tile cutout with multiple frames (first frame centered on tile)

Note: The cutout of individual tiles varies from tile to tile. All tiles are not cut exactly the same.

Figure 119. 610 mm tile cutout with multiple frames (first frame on edge of tile)

Note: The cutout of individual tiles varies from tile to tile. All tiles are not cut exactly the same.

206 Site and hardware planning

Figure 120. 600 mm Floor tile cutout

Chapter 4. Server specifications 207

Figure 121. 600 mm tile cutout with multiple frames (first frame on edge of tile)

Note: The cutout of individual tiles varies from tile to tile. All tiles are not cut exactly the same.

Figure 122. 600 mm tile cutout with multiple frames (first frame centered on tile)

Note: The cutout of individual tiles varies from tile to tile. All tiles are not cut exactly the same.

9125-F2A installation
This procedure describes how to install a model 9125-F2A.
1. Position the rack with the weight distribution hardware installed, over the raised floor cutouts.
2. Position the signal cable trough, facility chilled water distribution plumbing, and the facility power
distribution under the floor in the appropriate locations.
3. Attach the cooling water hose assemblies and power line cords to the building facility.

This graphic shows a side view of a typical 9125-F2A installation that displays what is above and below
the raised floor.

208 Site and hardware planning

Figure 123. Floor cutout view of two racks

Installing the frame tie-down kit

This procedure describes how to install a frame tie-down kit and floor tie-down hardware.

The following procedures describe how to install a frame tie-down kit and floor tie-down hardware to
secure an IBM rack to a concrete floor beneath a 228.6 - 330.2 mm (9 -13 in. depth) or a 304.8 - 558.8 mm
(12 - 22 in. depth) raised-floor environment or to a nonraised floor.

Positioning the rack

Use this procedure to unpack and position your rack.

Important: See Moving the system to the installation site before attempting to position the rack.

To unpack and position the rack, do the following:

1. Remove all packing and tape from the rack.
2. Place the last floor covering exactly adjacent and in the front of the final installation location.
3. Position the rack according to the customer floor plan.

Note: While moving the system to its final installed location and during relocation, it might be
necessary to lay down floor covering, such as Lexan sheets, to prevent damage to the floor panels.
4. Lock each caster wheel by tightening the thumbscrew on the caster.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 209

Figure 124. Caster thumbscrew

Related reference:
“Moving the system to the installation site” on page 251
Several factors must be considered before moving the system to the installation site.

Securing the rack

Prevent movement when vibrations occurs by securing your rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor or to a
raised floor.

Securing the rack is an optional procedure.

The following features can be ordered by the customer as additional rack-securing options for model
9125-F2A:
v FC 7937 to attach the rack to a concrete floor when the server is on a raised floor 228.6 - 330.2 mm (9 -
13 in. depth)
v FC 7938 to attach the rack to a concrete floor when the server is on a raised floor 304.8 - 558.8 mm (12
- 22 in. depth)

Note: Do not remove the orange-colored shipping bracket from systems that have the tie-down feature.

Before the service representative can perform the tie-down procedure, you must complete the floor
preparation described in the Attaching the rack to a 9 - 13 in. or 12 - 22 in. floor topic.
Related reference:
“Attaching the rack to a 9 - 13 in. or 12 - 22 in. floor”
Use these steps to attach your rack to a 228.6 - 330.2 mm (9 - 13 in. depth). floor.

Attaching the rack to a 9 - 13 in. or 12 - 22 in. floor

Use these steps to attach your rack to a 228.6 - 330.2 mm (9 - 13 in. depth). floor.

Attention: The frame tie downs are intended to secure a frame weighing less than 1429 kg (3150 lb).
These tie downs are designed to secure the frame on a raised floor installation.

Complete the appropriate step for your raised floor environment:

1. If the rack is being attached to a short-depth-raised-floor-environment 228.6 - 330.2 mm (9 - 13 in.
deep) install the Raised floor tie-down kit (part number 16R1102) described in the following table.
Table 187. Raised floor tie-down kit part number 16R1102
Item Part number Quantity Description
1 44P3438 1 Wrench
2 44P2996 2 Stabilizer bar
3 44P2999 4 Turnbuckle Assembly

2. If the rack is being attached to a deep-raised-floor-environment 304.8 - 558.8 mm (12 - 22 in. deep)
install the Raised floor tie-down kit (part number 16R1103) described in the following table.

210 Site and hardware planning

Table 188. Raised floor tie-down kit part number 16R1103
Item Part number Quantity Description
1 44P3438 1 Wrench
2 44P2996 2 Stabilizer bar
3 44P3000 4 Turnbuckle Assembly

Note: To accommodate a floor with a depth of more than 558.8 mm (22 in.), a steel beam or a steel
channel adapter for mounting the subfloor eyebolts is required. The customer must supply the floor
eyebolts.

Consider the following requirements when preparing the floor for tie-down:
v The hardware is designed to support a frame weighing no more than 1578.5 kg (3480 lb).
v The estimated maximum concentrated load on one caster for a 1578.5 kg (3480 lb) system is 526.2 kg
(1160 lb). For a multiple-system installation, it is possible that one floor tile will bear a total
concentrated load of 1052.3 kg (2320 lb).

To install the eyebolts, do the following steps:

1. Obtain the service of a qualified structural engineer to determine the appropriate installation of the
eyebolts.
2. Consider the following before you install the eyebolts:
v Floor eyebolts must be securely anchored to the concrete floor.
v For a single frame installation, four 1/2 in. wide by 13 in. long eyebolts should be secured to the
subfloor.
v The minimum height of the center of the internal diameter is 2.54 mm (1 in.) above the concrete
floor surface.
v The maximum height is 63.5 mm (2.5 in.) above the concrete floor surface. Higher than 63.5 mm
(2.5 in.) can cause excessive lateral deflection to the tie-down hardware.
v The eyebolt's internal diameter should be 1-3/16 inch, and each eyebolt should be able to withstand
1224.7 kg (2700 lb). The customer should obtain the services of a qualified consultant or structural
engineer to determine the appropriate anchoring method for these eyebolts and to ensure that the
raised floor and the building can support the floor-loading specifications.
v To ensure that the holes are in the correct location, the diagonal distance between the center of the
holes should be 1211.2 mm (47.7 in.). The distance between the center holes to the center of the next
holes should be 654.8 mm (25.8 in.) (the side-to-side distance) and 1019 mm (40.1 in.) (the
front-to-back distance).
3. Verify that the four eyebolts are positioned to match the dimensions shown in the following figures.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 211

Figure 125. Eyebolt positioning for 610 mm (24 in.) floor tile layout

212 Site and hardware planning

Figure 126. Eyebolt positioning for 600 mm (23.6 in.) floor tile layout

Chapter 4. Server specifications 213

Figure 127. Stabilizer bar layout (top view)

4. Install the eyebolts by using the following figures:

214 Site and hardware planning

Figure 128. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie-down hardware for 228.6 - 330.2 mm (9 - 13 in.) raised floor (part number
44P2999)

Chapter 4. Server specifications 215

Figure 129. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie-down hardware for 228.6 - 330.2 mm (9 - 13 in.) raised floor (part number
44P2999)

216 Site and hardware planning

Figure 130. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie-down hardware for 304.8 - 558.8 mm (12 - 22 in.) raised floor (part number
44P3000)

Chapter 4. Server specifications 217

Figure 131. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie-down hardware for 304.8 - 558.8 mm (12 - 22 in.) raised floor (part number
44P3000)

Positioning and installing the frame

This topics shows how to position and install a 9125-F2A frame.

All 9125-F2A frames are delivered with weight distribution plates. The installation of these plates is
required. Install the front cutout tile after the frame is in place. This will remove the possibility of
accidentally rolling the frame into the cutout.

These images show the installation of the weight distribution plates.

218 Site and hardware planning

Figure 132. Frame with installation plate and weight distribution plate

Figure 133. Frame with weight distribution plate and bolts

Chapter 4. Server specifications 219

Figure 134. Close-up view of bolt and weight distribution plate

Figure 135. Close-up view of weight distribution installed

220 Site and hardware planning

Total system power consumption
Use the System tables to determine the total system power consumption for your server's configuration.
Table 189. Rack power
I/O drawers 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
0 Maximum 7700 13900 20000 26200 32400 38600 44800 50900 57100 63300 69500 75700 81800 88000
(Watts)
Typical 6500 11500 16500 21500 26500 31500 36500 41500 46500 51500 56500 61500 66600 71600
(Watts)
1 Maximum 8800 15000 21200 27300 33500 39700 45900 52100 58200 64400 70600 76800
(Watts)
Typical 7600 12600 17600 22600 27600 32600 37600 42700 47700 52700 57700 62700
(Watts)
2 Maximum 16100 22300 28500 34600 40800 47000 53200 59400 65500
(Watts)
Typical 13800 18800 23800 28800 33800 38800 43800 48800 53800
(Watts)
3 Maximum 23400 29600 35800 41900 48100 54300
(Watts)
Typical 19900 24900 29900 34900 39900 44900
(Watts)
4 Maximum 30700 36900 43100
(Watts)
Typical 26000 31000 36000
(Watts)

Bulk power assembly (BPA) Input Power (Power Cord Power) 200 - 240 V ac

32 W at 4.7 GHz (water cooled), 128 GB or 256 GB memory, full- feature I/O, two PCIe, two 10 GB
Ethernet adapters, two disk drives, two quad port 4x host channel adapters

Total 4 Power Cord Power (Watts)

Table 190. Rack power
I/O drawers 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
0 Maximum 7500 13500 19500 25000 31500 37500 43500 49500 55600 61600 67600 73600 79600 85600
(Watts)
Typical 6300 11200 16100 20900 25800 30700 35500 40400 45300 50100 55000 59900 64700 69600
(Watts)
1 Maximum 8600 14600 20600 26600 32600 38600 44600 50600 56600 62700 68700 74700
(Watts)
Typical 7400 12300 17100 22000 26900 31800 36600 41500 46400 51200 56100 61000
(Watts)
2 Maximum 15700 21700 27700 33700 39700 45700 51700 57700 63700
(Watts)
Typical 13400 18200 23100 28000 32800 37700 42600 47400 52300
(Watts)
3 Maximum 22800 28800 34800 40800 46800 52800
(Watts)
Typical 19300 24200 29100 33900 38800 43700
(Watts)
4 Maximum 29900 35900 41900
(Watts)
Typical 25300 30200 35000
(Watts)
1The power for the full-feature configured processor book is previously defined. It is configured with a full-feature I/O unit, two 10 GB Ethernet adapters, two quad port 4x host channel adapters (HCA), 2
PCIe adapters, and 64 dual inline memory module (DIMMs), either 2 GB or 4 GB per DIMM.

2Subtract 170 W (Watts) 580 British thermal unit per hour (Btu/hr) per processor book if lite I/O is substituted for full-featured I/O, subtract 92 W (314 BTU/hr) from water power, and subtract 78 W from air
power.

3Subtract 75 W (256 BTU/hr) for each Quad Port 4x InfiniBand adapter removed from a processor book, subtract 41 W (140 BTU/hr) from water power and 34 W from air power.

4Subtract 34 W (116 BTU/hr) for each PCI adapter removed from the I/O drawer or from the processor book I/O unit, subtract 18 W (61 BTU/hr) from water power, and subtract 16 W (55 BTU/hr) from air
power. (The configuration contains two adapter slots per processor book and 20 adapter slots per I/O drawer).

5Subtract 22 W (75 BTU/hr) from an I/O drawer for every disk removed, 12 W (41 BTU/hr) from water power, and 10 W (34 BTU/hr) from air power. (The I/O drawer configuration contains 16 disk bays per
drawer.)

6Maximum power is under conditions of maximum ambient room temperature, most aggressive workload, and water-cooled component manufacturing tolerances. Typical power is under conditions of typical
ambient room temperature (22 C), typical workload, and nominal component manufacturing tolerances.

BPA Input Power (Power Cord Power) 380 - 480 V ac

32 W at 4.7G Hz (water cooled), 128 GB or 256 GB memory, full- feature I/O, two PCIe, two 10 GB
Ethernet adapters, two disk drives, two quad port 4x host channel adapters

Chapter 4. Server specifications 221

Total 4 Power Cord Power (Watts)

Air cooling requirements

When planning an installation, the facility air cooling system must have enough capacity to cool two
9125-F2A frames with the rear door heat exchanger opened and the other 9125-F2A racks with the rear
door heat exchanger closed.

This assures proper air cooling during typical service scenarios and certain equipment faults in the
9125-F2A frame.

Even though more than 70% of the system heat is transferred from the processor to water through the
processor cold plates and the rear door heat exchanger, some heat still exits the frame into the room
under normal operating conditions. During a service scenario, with the rear door heat exchanger door
opened, only the processor cold plates transfer heat to water. The door in the open position provides no
heat transfer to water.
Table 191. Maximum watts, British thermal unit per hour (BTU) hr, to Water and Air
Normal conditions (rear door heat Service scenario (rear door heat
exchanger Eff equal 54% and closed) exchanger open)
Heat to water through cold plates 43000 W (146700 BTU/hr) 43000 W (146700 BTU/hr)
Heat to water through rear door heat 24300 W (82900 BTU/hr) 0
exchanger
Heat to air 20700 W (70631 BTU/hr) 45000 W (153546 BTU/hr)

The following tables provide maximum and typical heat load to air and water as a function of system
configuration with both the rear door heat exchanger closed and opened.
Table 192. Heat load (Watts), low line voltage, rear door heat exchanger closed.

Rack power dissipation 200 - 240 V ac

32 W at 4.7 GHz (water cooled), 128 GB or 256 GB memory, full feature I/O, 2 PCIe, two 10 GB Ethernet adapters,
two disk drives, 2 quad port 4x host channel adapters
I/O drawers 1 2 3 4 5
0 Maximum (Watts) Water 5600 10 300 15 000 19 800 24 600
Air 2100 3600 5000 6400 7800
Typical (Watts) Water 4800 8700 12 700 16 600 20 600
Air 1700 2800 3800 4900 5900
1 Maximum (Watts) Water 6200 10 900 15 700 20 400 25 100
Air 2600 4100 5500 6 900 8 400
Typical (Watts) Water 5400 9300 13 300 17 200 21 200
Air 2200 3300 4300 5400 6400
2 Maximum (Watts) Water 11 500 16 300 21 000 25 700
na
Air 4600 6000 7500 8900
Typical (Watts) Water 10 000 13 900 17 900 21 800
na
Air 3800 4900 5900 7000
3 Maximum (Watts) Water 16 900 21 600 26 400
na na
Air 6500 8 000 9 400
Typical (Watts) Water 14 500 18 500 22 400
na na
Air 5400 6400 7500
4 Maximum (Watts) Water 22 200 27 000
na na na
Air 8500 9900
Typical (Watts) Water na na na 19 100 23 000
Air

222 Site and hardware planning

Table 193. Heat load (Watts), low line voltage, rear door heat exchanger closed.

Rack power dissipation 200 - 240 V ac

32 W at 4.7 GHz (water cooled), 128 GB or 256 GB memory, full feature I/O, 2 PCIe, two 10 GB Ethernet adapters,
two disk drives, 2 quad port 4x host channel adapters
I/O drawers 6 7 8 9 10
0 Maximum (Watts) Water 29 300 34 100 38 800 43 500 48 300
Air 9300 10 700 12 100 13 600 15 000
Typical (Watts) Water 24 500 28 500 32 400 36 400 40 300
Air 7000 8000 9100 10 100 11 200
1 Maximum (Watts) Water 29 900 34 700 39 400 44 100 48 900
Air 9 800 11 200 12 700 14 100 15 500
Typical (Watts) Water 25 100 29 100 33 100 37 000 41 000
Air 7500 8500 9600 10 700 11 700
2 Maximum (Watts) Water 30 500 35 300 40 000 44 800 49 500
Air 10 300 11 700 13 200 14 600 16 000
Typical (Watts) Water 25 800 29 700 33 700 37 600 41 600
Air 8000 9100 10 100 11 200 12 200
3 Maximum (Watts) Water 31 100 35 900 40 600
na na
Air 10 800 12 200 13 700
Typical (Watts) Water 26 400 30 300 34 300
na na
Air 8500 9600 10 600
4 Maximum (Watts) Water 31 700
na na na na
Air 11 400
Typical (Watts) Water 27 000 na na na na

Table 194. Heat load (Watts), low line voltage, rear door heat exchanger closed.

Rack power dissipation 200 - 240 V ac

32 W at 4.7 GHz (water cooled), 128 GB or 256 GB memory, full feature I/O, 2 PCIe, two 10 GB Ethernet adapters,
two disk drives, 2 quad port 4x host channel adapters
I/O drawers 10 11 12 13 14
0 Maximum (Watts) Water 48 300 53 100 57 800 62 500 67 300
Air 15 000 16 400 17 900 19 300 20 700
Typical (Watts) Water 40 300 44 300 48 200 52 300 56 200
Air 11 200 12 200 13 300 14 300 15 400
1 Maximum (Watts) Water 48 900 53 700 58 400
na na
Air 15 500 16 900 18 400
Typical (Watts) Water 41 000 44 900 48 900
na na
Air 11 700 12 800 13 800
2 Maximum (Watts) Water 49 500
na na na na
Air 16 000
Typical (Watts) Water 41 600
na na na na
Air 12 200
3 Maximum (Watts) Water
na na na na na
Air
Typical (Watts) Water
na na na na na
Air
4 Maximum (Watts) Water
na na na na na
Air
Typical (Watts) Water na na na na na

Table 195. Heat load (BTUs), low line voltage, rear door heat exchanger closed
I/O drawers 1 2 3 4 5
0 Maximum (BTUs) Water 19 113 35 154 51 195 67 577 83 960
Air 7167 12 287 17 065 21 843 26 621
Typical (BTUs) Water 16 382 29 693 43 345 56 656 70 308
Air 5802 9556 12 969 16 724 20 137
1 Maximum (BTUs) Water 21 161 37 202 53 584 69 625 85 666
Air 8874 13 993 18 772 23 550 28 669
Typical (BTUs) Water 18 430 31 741 45 393 58 704 72 356
Air 7509 11 263 14 676 18 430 21 843

Chapter 4. Server specifications 223

Table 195. Heat load (BTUs), low line voltage, rear door heat exchanger closed (continued)
I/O drawers 1 2 3 4 5
2 Maximum (BTUs) Water 39 250 55 632 71 673 87 714
na
Air 15 700 20 478 25 598 30 376
Typical (BTUs) Water 34 130 47 441 61 093 74 403
na
Air 12 969 16 724 20 137 23 891
3 Maximum (BTUs) Water 57 680 73 721 90 103
na na
Air 22 185 27 304 32 082
Typical (BTUs) Water 49 489 63 141 76 451
na na
Air 18 430 21 843 25 598
4 Maximum (BTUs) Water 75 769 92 151
na na na
Air 29 011 33 789
Typical (BTUs) Water na na na 65 188 78 499
Air
1The power for the full-feature configured processor book is previously defined. It is configured with a full-feature I/O unit, two 10 GB Ethernet adapters, two quad port 4x host channel adapters (HCA), 2
PCIe adapters, and 64 dual inline memory module (DIMMs), either 2 GB or 4 GB per DIMM.

2Subtract 170 W (Watts) 580 British thermal unit per hour (Btu/hr) per processor book if lite I/O is substituted for full-featured I/O, subtract 92 W (314 BTU/hr) from water power, and subtract 78 W from air
power.

3Subtract 75 W (256 BTU/hr) for each Quad Port 4x InfiniBand adapter removed from a processor book, subtract 41 W (140 BTU/hr) from water power and 34 W from air power.

4Subtract 34 W (116 BTU/hr) for each PCI adapter removed from the I/O drawer or from the processor book I/O unit, subtract 18 W (61 BTU/hr) from water power, and subtract 16 W (55 BTU/hr) from air
power. (The configuration contains two adapter slots per processor book and 20 adapter slots per I/O drawer).

5Subtract 22 W (75 BTU/hr) from an I/O drawer for every disk removed, 12 W (41 BTU/hr) from water power, and 10 W (34 BTU/hr) from air power. (The I/O drawer configuration contains 16 disk bays per
drawer.)

6Maximum power is under conditions of maximum ambient room temperature, most aggressive workload, and water-cooled component manufacturing tolerances. Typical power is under conditions of typical
ambient room temperature (22 C), typical workload, and nominal component manufacturing tolerances.

Table 196. Heat load (BTUs), low line voltage, rear door heat exchanger closed
I/O drawers 6 7 8 9 10
0 Maximum (BTUs) Water 100 001 116 383 132 424 148 466 164 848
Air 31 741 36 519 41 297 46 417 51 195
Typical (BTUs) Water 83 619 97 271 110 581 124 233 137 544
Air 23 891 27 304 31 058 34 471 38 226
1 Maximum (BTUs) Water 102 049 118 431 134 472 150 513 166 896
Air 33 447 38 226 43 345 48 123 52 902
Typical (BTUs) Water 85 666 99 318 112 970 126 281 139 933
Air 25 598 29 011 32 765 36 519 39 932
2 Maximum (BTUs) Water 104 097 120 479 136 520 152 902 168 944
Air 35 154 39 932 45 052 49 830 54 608
Typical (BTUs) Water 88 055 101 366 115 018 128 329 141 981
Air 27 304 31 058 34 471 38 226 41 639
3 Maximum (BTUs) Water 106 144 122 527 138 568
na na
Air 36 860 41 639 46 758
Typical (BTUs) Water 90 103 103 414 117 066
na na
Air 29 011 32 765 36 178
4 Maximum (BTUs) Water 108 192
na na na na
Air 38 908
Typical (BTUs) Water 92 151 na na na na
Air
1The power for the full-feature configured processor book is previously defined. It is configured with a full-feature I/O unit, two 10 GB Ethernet adapters, two quad port 4x host channel adapters (HCA), 2
PCIe adapters, and 64 dual inline memory module (DIMMs), either 2 GB or 4 GB per DIMM.

2Subtract 170 W (Watts) 580 British thermal unit per hour (Btu/hr) per processor book if lite I/O is substituted for full-featured I/O, subtract 92 W (314 BTU/hr) from water power, and subtract 78 W from air
power.

3Subtract 75 W (256 BTU/hr) for each Quad Port 4x InfiniBand adapter removed from a processor book, subtract 41 W (140 BTU/hr) from water power and 34 W from air power.

4Subtract 34 W (116 BTU/hr) for each PCI adapter removed from the I/O drawer or from the processor book I/O unit, subtract 18 W (61 BTU/hr) from water power, and subtract 16 W (55 BTU/hr) from air
power. (The configuration contains two adapter slots per processor book and 20 adapter slots per I/O drawer).

5Subtract 22 W (75 BTU/hr) from an I/O drawer for every disk removed, 12 W (41 BTU/hr) from water power, and 10 W (34 BTU/hr) from air power. (The I/O drawer configuration contains 16 disk bays per
drawer.)

6Maximum power is under conditions of maximum ambient room temperature, most aggressive workload, and water-cooled component manufacturing tolerances. Typical power is under conditions of typical
ambient room temperature (22 C), typical workload, and nominal component manufacturing tolerances.

Table 197. Heat load (BTUs), low line voltage, rear door heat exchanger closed
I/O drawers 11 12 13 14
0 Maximum (BTUs) Water 181 230 197 271 213 313 229 695
Air 55 973 61 093 65 871 70 649
Typical (BTUs) Water 151 196 164 507 178 500 191 811
Air 41 639 45 393 48 806 52 560

224 Site and hardware planning

Table 197. Heat load (BTUs), low line voltage, rear door heat exchanger closed (continued)
I/O drawers 11 12 13 14
1 Maximum (BTUs) Water 183 278 199 319
na na
Air 57 680 62 799
Typical (BTUs) Water 153 244 166 896
na na
Air 43 686 47 099
2 Maximum (BTUs) Water
na na na na
Air
Typical (BTUs) Water
na na na na
Air
3 Maximum (BTUs) Water
na na na na
Air
Typical (BTUs) Water
na na na na
Air
4 Maximum (BTUs) Water
na na na na
Air
Typical (BTUs) Water na na na na
Air
1The power for the full-feature configured processor book is previously defined. It is configured with a full-feature I/O unit, two 10 GB Ethernet adapters, two quad port 4x host channel adapters (HCA), 2
PCIe adapters, and 64 dual inline memory module (DIMMs), either 2 GB or 4 GB per DIMM.

2Subtract 170 W (Watts) 580 British thermal unit per hour (Btu/hr) per processor book if lite I/O is substituted for full-featured I/O, subtract 92 W (314 BTU/hr) from water power, and subtract 78 W from air
power.

3Subtract 75 W (256 BTU/hr) for each Quad Port 4x InfiniBand adapter removed from a processor book, subtract 41 W (140 BTU/hr) from water power and 34 W from air power.

4Subtract 34 W (116 BTU/hr) for each PCI adapter removed from the I/O drawer or from the processor book I/O unit, subtract 18 W (61 BTU/hr) from water power, and subtract 16 W (55 BTU/hr) from air
power. (The configuration contains two adapter slots per processor book and 20 adapter slots per I/O drawer).

5Subtract 22 W (75 BTU/hr) from an I/O drawer for every disk removed, 12 W (41 BTU/hr) from water power, and 10 W (34 BTU/hr) from air power. (The I/O drawer configuration contains 16 disk bays per
drawer.)

6Maximum power is under conditions of maximum ambient room temperature, most aggressive workload, and water-cooled component manufacturing tolerances. Typical power is under conditions of typical
ambient room temperature (22 C), typical workload, and nominal component manufacturing tolerances.

Table 198. Heat load (Watts), high line voltage, rear door heat exchanger closed.

Rack power dissipation 380 - 480 V ac

32 W at 4.7 GHz (water cooled), 128 GB or 256 GB memory, full feature I/O, 2 PCIe, two 10 GB Ethernet adapters,
two disk drives, 2 quad port 4x host channel adapters
I/O drawers 1 2 3 4 5
0 Maximum (Watts) Water 5500 10 100 14 800 19 400 24 100
Air 2000 3400 4700 6100 7400
Typical (Watts) Water 4700 8600 12 500 16 300 20 200
Air 1600 2600 3600 4600 5600
1 Maximum (Watts) Water 6100 10 700 15 400 20 000 24 700
Air 2500 3900 5200 6600 7900
Typical (Watts) Water 5200 9100 13 000 16 900 20 800
Air 2200 3200 4100 5100 6100
2 Maximum (Watts) Water 11 300 16 000 20 600 25 300
na
Air 4400 5700 7100 8400
Typical (Watts) Water 9700 13 600 17 500 21 400
na
Air 3700 4600 5600 6600
3 Maximum (Watts) Water 16 500 21 200 25 900
na na
Air 6300 7600 8900
Typical (Watts) Water 14 200 18 100 22 000
na na
Air 5100 6100 7100
4 Maximum (Watts) Water 21 800 26 400
na na na
Air 8100 9500
Typical (Watts) Water na na na 18 700 22 600
Air

Chapter 4. Server specifications 225

Table 199. Heat load (Watts), high line voltage, rear door heat exchanger closed.

Rack power dissipation 380 - 480 V ac

32 W at 4.7 GHz (water cooled), 128 GB or 256 GB memory, full feature I/O, 2 PCIe, two 10 GB Ethernet adapters,
two disk drives, 2 quad port 4x host channel adapters
I/O drawers 6 7 8 9 10
0 Maximum (Watts) Water 28 700 33 400 38 000 42 700 47 400
Air 8800 10 100 11 500 12 900 14 200
Typical (Watts) Water 24 100 27 900 31 800 35 700 39 600
Air 6600 7600 8600 9600 10 500
1 Maximum (Watts) Water 29 300 34 000 38 600 43 300 48 000
Air 9300 10 600 12 000 13 300 14 700
Typical (Watts) Water 24 700 28 500 32 400 36 300 40 200
Air 7100 8100 9100 10 100 11 000
2 Maximum (Watts) Water 29 900 34 600 39 200 43 900 48 500
Air 9800 11 100 12 500 13 800 15 200
Typical (Watts) Water 25 200 29 100 33 000 36 900 40 800
Air 7600 8600 9600 10 500 11 500
3 Maximum (Watts) Water 30 500 35 200 39 800
na na
Air 10 300 11 600 13 000
Typical (Watts) Water 25 800 29 700 33 600
na na
Air 8100 9100 10 100
4 Maximum (Watts) Water 31 100
na na na na
Air 10 800
Typical (Watts) Water 26 400 na na na na
Air

Table 200. Heat load (Watts), high line voltage, rear door heat exchanger closed.

Rack power dissipation 380 - 480 V ac

32 W at 4.7 GHz (water cooled), 128 GB or 256 GB memory, full feature I/O, 2 PCIe, two 10 GB Ethernet adapters,
two disk drives, 2 quad port 4x host channel adapters
I/O drawers 11 12 13 14
0 Maximum (Watts) Water 52 000 56 700 61 300 66 000
Air 15 600 16 900 18 300 19 600
Typical (Watts) Water 43 500 47 400 51 200 55 100
Air 11 500 12 500 13 500 14 500
1 Maximum (Watts) Water 52 600 57 300
na na
Air 16 100 17 400
Typical (Watts) Water 44 100 48 000
na na
Air 12 000 13 000
2 Maximum (Watts) Water
na na na na
Air
Typical (Watts) Water
na na na na
Air
3 Maximum (Watts) Water
na na na na
Air
Typical (Watts) Water
na na na na
Air
4 Maximum (Watts) Water
na na na na
Air
Typical (Watts) Water na na na na
Air

Table 201. Heat load (BTUs), high line voltage, rear door heat exchanger closed
I/O drawers 1 2 3 4 5
0 Maximum (BTUs) Water 18772 34471 50512 66212 82253
Air 6826 11604 16041 20819 25256
Typical (BTUs) Water 6041 29352 42663 55632 68943
Air 5461 8874 12287 15700 19113
1 Maximum (BTUs) Water 20819 36519 52560 68260 84301
Air 8533 13311 17748 22526 26963
Typical (BTUs) Water 17748 31058 44369 57680 70990
Air 7509 10922 13993 17406 20819

226 Site and hardware planning

Table 201. Heat load (BTUs), high line voltage, rear door heat exchanger closed (continued)
I/O drawers 1 2 3 4 5
2 Maximum (BTUs) Water 38567 54608 70308 86349
Air 15017 19454 24232 28669
Typical (BTUs) Water 33106 46417 59728 73038
Air 12628 15700 19113 22526
3 Maximum (BTUs) Water 56315 72356 88397
Air 21502 25939 30376
Typical (BTUs) Water 48465 61775 75086
Air 17406 20819 24232
4 Maximum (BTUs) Water 74403 90103
Air 27645 32424
Typical (BTUs) Water 63823 77134
Air 22526 25939
1The power for the full-feature configured processor book is previously defined. It is configured with a full-feature I/O unit, two 10 GB Ethernet adapters, two quad port 4x host channel adapters (HCA), 2
PCIe adapters, and 64 dual inline memory module (DIMMs), either 2 GB or 4 GB per DIMM.

2Subtract 170 W (Watts) 580 British thermal unit per hour (Btu/hr) per processor book if lite I/O is substituted for full-featured I/O, subtract 92 W (314 BTU/hr) from water power, and subtract 78 W from air
power.

3Subtract 75 W (256 BTU/hr) for each Quad Port 4x InfiniBand adapter removed from a processor book, subtract 41 W (140 BTU/hr) from water power and 34 W from air power.

4Subtract 34 W (116 BTU/hr) for each PCI adapter removed from the I/O drawer or from the processor book I/O unit, subtract 18 W (61 BTU/hr) from water power, and subtract 16 W (55 BTU/hr) from air
power. (The configuration contains two adapter slots per processor book and 20 adapter slots per I/O drawer).

5Subtract 22 W (75 BTU/hr) from an I/O drawer for every disk removed, 12 W (41 BTU/hr) from water power, and 10 W (34 BTU/hr) from air power. (The I/O drawer configuration contains 16 disk bays per
drawer.)

6Maximum power is under conditions of maximum ambient room temperature, most aggressive workload, and water-cooled component manufacturing tolerances. Typical power is under conditions of typical
ambient room temperature (22 C), typical workload, and nominal component manufacturing tolerances.

Table 202. Heat load (BTUs), high line voltage, rear door heat exchanger closed
I/O drawers 6 7 8 9 10
0 Maximum (BTUs) Water 97953 113994 129694 145735 161776
Air 30034 34471 39250 44028 48465
Typical (BTUs) Water 82253 95223 108533 121844 135155
Air 22526 25939 29352 32765 35837
1 Maximum (BTUs) Water 100001 116042 131742 147783 163824
Air 31741 36178 40956 45393 50171
Typical (BTUs) Water 84301 97271 110581 123892 137203
Air 24232 27645 31058 34471 37543
2 Maximum (BTUs) Water 102049 118090 133790 149831 165531
Air 33447 37884 42663 47099 51878
Typical (BTUs) Water 86008 99318 112629 125940 139250
Air 25939 29352 32765 35837 39250
3 Maximum (BTUs) Water 104097 120138 135837
Air 35154 39591 44369
Typical (BTUs) Water 88055 101366 114677
Air 27645 31058 34471
4 Maximum (BTUs) Water 106144
Air 36860
Typical (BTUs) Water 90103
Air 29352
1The power for the full-feature configured processor book is previously defined. It is configured with a full-feature I/O unit, two 10 GB Ethernet adapters, two quad port 4x host channel adapters (HCA), 2
PCIe adapters, and 64 dual inline memory module (DIMMs), either 2 GB or 4 GB per DIMM.

2Subtract 170 W (Watts) 580 British thermal unit per hour (Btu/hr) per processor book if lite I/O is substituted for full-featured I/O, subtract 92 W (314 BTU/hr) from water power, and subtract 78 W from air
power.

3Subtract 75 W (256 BTU/hr) for each Quad Port 4x InfiniBand adapter removed from a processor book, subtract 41 W (140 BTU/hr) from water power and 34 W from air power.

4Subtract 34 W (116 BTU/hr) for each PCI adapter removed from the I/O drawer or from the processor book I/O unit, subtract 18 W (61 BTU/hr) from water power, and subtract 16 W (55 BTU/hr) from air
power. (The configuration contains two adapter slots per processor book and 20 adapter slots per I/O drawer).

5Subtract 22 W (75 BTU/hr) from an I/O drawer for every disk removed, 12 W (41 BTU/hr) from water power, and 10 W (34 BTU/hr) from air power. (The I/O drawer configuration contains 16 disk bays per
drawer.)

6Maximum power is under conditions of maximum ambient room temperature, most aggressive workload, and water-cooled component manufacturing tolerances. Typical power is under conditions of typical
ambient room temperature (22 C), typical workload, and nominal component manufacturing tolerances.

Table 203. Heat load (BTUs), high line voltage, rear door heat exchanger closed
I/O drawers 11 12 13 14
0 Maximum (BTUs) Water 177476 193517 209217 225258
Air 53243 57680 62458 66895
Typical (BTUs) Water 148466 161776 174746 188056
Air 39250 42663 46076 49489

Chapter 4. Server specifications 227

Table 203. Heat load (BTUs), high line voltage, rear door heat exchanger closed (continued)
I/O drawers 11 12 13 14
1 Maximum (BTUs) Water 179524 195565
Air 54949 59386
Typical (BTUs) Water 150513 163824
Air 40956 44369
2 Maximum (BTUs) Water
Air
Typical (BTUs) Water
Air
3 Maximum (BTUs) Water
Air
Typical (BTUs) Water
Air
4 Maximum (BTUs) Water
Air
Typical (BTUs) Water
Air
1The power for the full-feature configured processor book is previously defined. It is configured with a full-feature I/O unit, two 10 GB Ethernet adapters, two quad port 4x host channel adapters (HCA), 2
PCIe adapters, and 64 dual inline memory module (DIMMs), either 2 GB or 4 GB per DIMM.

2Subtract 170 W (Watts) 580 British thermal unit per hour (Btu/hr) per processor book if lite I/O is substituted for full-featured I/O, subtract 92 W (314 BTU/hr) from water power, and subtract 78 W from air
power.

3Subtract 75 W (256 BTU/hr) for each Quad Port 4x InfiniBand adapter removed from a processor book, subtract 41 W (140 BTU/hr) from water power and 34 W from air power.

4Subtract 34 W (116 BTU/hr) for each PCI adapter removed from the I/O drawer or from the processor book I/O unit, subtract 18 W (61 BTU/hr) from water power, and subtract 16 W (55 BTU/hr) from air
power. (The configuration contains two adapter slots per processor book and 20 adapter slots per I/O drawer).

5Subtract 22 W (75 BTU/hr) from an I/O drawer for every disk removed, 12 W (41 BTU/hr) from water power, and 10 W (34 BTU/hr) from air power. (The I/O drawer configuration contains 16 disk bays per
drawer.)

6Maximum power is under conditions of maximum ambient room temperature, most aggressive workload, and water-cooled component manufacturing tolerances. Typical power is under conditions of typical
ambient room temperature (22 C), typical workload, and nominal component manufacturing tolerances.

Table 204. Heat load (Watts), low line voltage, rear door heat exchanger open.

Rack Power Dissipation 200 - 240 V ac

32 W at 4.7 GHz (water cooled), 128 GB or 256 GB memory, full feature I/O, 2 PCIe, two 10 GB Ethernet adapters,
two disk drives, 2 quad port 4x host channel adapters
I/O drawers 1 2 3 4 5
0 Maximum (Watts) Water 3100 6100 9200 12300 15300
Air 4600 7800 10800 13900 17100
Typical (Watts) Water 2700 5400 8200 10900 13600
Air 3800 6100 8300 10600 12900
1 Maximum (Watts) Water 3100 6100 9200 12300 15300
Air 5700 8900 12000 15000 18200
Typical (Watts) Water 2700 5400 8200 10900 13600
Air 4900 7200 9400 11700 14000
2 Maximum (Watts) Water 6100 9200 12300 15300
10000 13100 16200 19300
Typical (Watts) Water 5400 8200 10900 13600
Air 8400 10600 12900 15200
3 Maximum (Watts) Water 9200 12300 15300 18400 21500
Air 14200 17300 20500 23500 26600
Typical (Watts) Water 8200 10900 13600 16300 19100
Air 11700 14000 16300 18600 20800
4 Maximum (Watts) Water 12300 15300
Air 18400 21600
Typical (Watts) Water 10900 13600
Air 15100 17400

228 Site and hardware planning

Table 205. Heat load (Watts), low line voltage, rear door heat exchanger open.

Rack Power Dissipation 200 - 240 V ac

32 W at 4.7 GHz (water cooled), 128 GB or 256 GB memory, full feature I/O, 2 PCIe, two 10 GB Ethernet adapters,
two disk drives, 2 quad port 4x host channel adapters
I/O drawers 6 7 8 9 10
0 Maximum (Watts) Water 18400 21500 24600 27600 30700
Air 20200 23300 26300 29500 32600
Typical (Watts) Water 16300 19100 21800 24500 27200
Air 15200 17400 19700 22000 24300
1 Maximum (Watts) Water 18400 21500 24600 27600 30700
Air 21300 24400 27500 30600 33700
Typical (Watts) Water 16300 19100 21800 24500 27200
Air 16300 18500 20900 23200 25500
2 Maximum (Watts) Water 18400 21500 24600 27600 30700
22400 25500 28600 31800 34800
Typical (Watts) Water 16300 19100 21800 24500 27200
Air 17500 19700 22000 24300 26600
3 Maximum (Watts) Water 24600
Air 29700
Typical (Watts) Water 21800
Air 23100
4 Maximum (Watts) Water 18400
Air 24700
Typical (Watts) Water 16300
Air 19700

Table 206. Heat load (Watts), low line voltage, rear door heat exchanger open.

Rack Power Dissipation 200 - 240 V ac

32 W at 4.7 GHz (water cooled), 128 GB or 256 GB memory, full feature I/O, 2 PCIe, two 10 GB Ethernet adapters,
two disk drives, 2 quad port 4x host channel adapters
I/O drawers 11 12 13 14
0 Maximum (Watts) Water 33800 36800 39900 43000
Air 35700 38900 41900 45000
Typical (Watts) Water 30000 32700 35400 38100
Air 26500 28800 31200 33500
1 Maximum (Watts) Water 33800 36800
Air 36800 40000
Typical (Watts) Water 30000 32700
Air 27700 30000
2 Maximum (Watts) Water

Typical (Watts) Water

Air
3 Maximum (Watts) Water
Air
Typical (Watts) Water
Air
4 Maximum (Watts) Water
Air
Typical (Watts) Water
Air

Table 207. Heat load (BTUs), low line voltage, rear door heat exchanger open
I/O drawers 1 2 3 4 5
0 Maximum (BTUs) Water 10580 20819 31400 41980 52219
Air 15700 26621 36860 47441 58362
Typical (BTUs) Water 9215 18430 27987 37202 46417
Air 12969 20819 28328 36178 44028
1 Maximum (BTUs) Water 10580 20819 31400 41980 52219
Air 19454 30376 40956 51195 62117
Typical (BTUs) Water 9215 18430 27987 37202 46417
Air 16724 24574 32082 39932 47782

Chapter 4. Server specifications 229

Table 207. Heat load (BTUs), low line voltage, rear door heat exchanger open (continued)
I/O drawers 1 2 3 4 5
2 Maximum (BTUs) Water 20819 31400 41980 52219
Air 34130 44710 55291 65871
Typical (BTUs) Water 18430 27987 37202 46417
Air 28669 36178 44028 51878
3 Maximum (BTUs) Water 31400 41980 52219
Air 48465 59045 69967
Typical (BTUs) Water 27987 37202 46417
Air 39932 47782 55632
4 Maximum (BTUs) Water 41980 52219
Air 62799 73721
Typical (BTUs) Water 37202 46417
Air 51536 59386
1The power for the full-feature configured processor book is previously defined. It is configured with a full-feature I/O unit, two 10 GB Ethernet adapters, two quad port 4x host channel adapters (HCA), 2
PCIe adapters, and 64 dual inline memory module (DIMMs), either 2 GB or 4 GB per DIMM.

2Subtract 170 W (Watts) 580 British thermal unit per hour (Btu/hr) per processor book if lite I/O is substituted for full-featured I/O, subtract 92 W (314 BTU/hr) from water power, and subtract 78 W from air
power.

3Subtract 75 W (256 BTU/hr) for each Quad Port 4x InfiniBand adapter removed from a processor book, subtract 41 W (140 BTU/hr) from water power and 34 W from air power.

4Subtract 34 W (116 BTU/hr) for each PCI adapter removed from the I/O drawer or from the processor book I/O unit, subtract 18 W (61 BTU/hr) from water power, and subtract 16 W (55 BTU/hr) from air
power. (The configuration contains two adapter slots per processor book and 20 adapter slots per I/O drawer).

5Subtract 22 W (75 BTU/hr) from an I/O drawer for every disk removed, 12 W (41 BTU/hr) from water power, and 10 W (34 BTU/hr) from air power. (The I/O drawer configuration contains 16 disk bays per
drawer.)

6Maximum power is under conditions of maximum ambient room temperature, most aggressive workload, and water-cooled component manufacturing tolerances. Typical power is under conditions of typical
ambient room temperature (22 C), typical workload, and nominal component manufacturing tolerances.

Table 208. Heat load (BTUs), low line voltage, rear door heat exchanger open
I/O drawers 6 7 8 9 10
0 Maximum (BTUs) Water 62799 73380 83960 94199 104779
Air 68943 79523 89762 100684 111264
Typical (BTUs) Water 55632 65188 74403 83619 92834
Air 51878 59386 67236 75086 82936
1 Maximum (BTUs) Water 62799 73380 83960 94199 104779
Air 72697 83277 93858 104438 115018
Typical (BTUs) Water 55632 65188 74403 83619 92834
Air 55632 63141 71332 79182 87032
2 Maximum (BTUs) Water 62799 73380 83960 94199 104779
Air 76451 87032 97612 108533 118772
Typical (BTUs) Water 55632 65188 74403 83619 92834
Air 59728 67236 75086 82936 90786
3 Maximum (BTUs) Water 62799 73380 83960
Air 80206 90786 101366
Typical (BTUs) Water 55632 65188 74403
Air 63482 70990 78840
4 Maximum (BTUs) Water 62799
Air 84301
Typical (BTUs) Water 55632
Air 67236
1The power for the full-feature configured processor book is previously defined. It is configured with a full-feature I/O unit, two 10 GB Ethernet adapters, two quad port 4x host channel adapters (HCA), 2
PCIe adapters, and 64 dual inline memory module (DIMMs), either 2 GB or 4 GB per DIMM.

2Subtract 170 W (Watts) 580 British thermal unit per hour (Btu/hr) per processor book if lite I/O is substituted for full-featured I/O, subtract 92 W (314 BTU/hr) from water power, and subtract 78 W from air
power.

3Subtract 75 W (256 BTU/hr) for each Quad Port 4x InfiniBand adapter removed from a processor book, subtract 41 W (140 BTU/hr) from water power and 34 W from air power.

4Subtract 34 W (116 BTU/hr) for each PCI adapter removed from the I/O drawer or from the processor book I/O unit, subtract 18 W (61 BTU/hr) from water power, and subtract 16 W (55 BTU/hr) from air
power. (The configuration contains two adapter slots per processor book and 20 adapter slots per I/O drawer).

5Subtract 22 W (75 BTU/hr) from an I/O drawer for every disk removed, 12 W (41 BTU/hr) from water power, and 10 W (34 BTU/hr) from air power. (The I/O drawer configuration contains 16 disk bays per
drawer.)

6Maximum power is under conditions of maximum ambient room temperature, most aggressive workload, and water-cooled component manufacturing tolerances. Typical power is under conditions of typical
ambient room temperature (22 C), typical workload, and nominal component manufacturing tolerances.

Table 209. Heat load (BTUs), low line voltage, rear door heat exchanger open
I/O drawers 11 12 13 14
0 Maximum (BTUs) Water 115359 125598 136179 146759
Air 121844 132766 143005 153585
Typical (BTUs) Water 102390 111605 120820 130035
Air 90445 98294 106486 114336

230 Site and hardware planning

Table 209. Heat load (BTUs), low line voltage, rear door heat exchanger open (continued)
I/O drawers 11 12 13 14
1 Maximum (BTUs) Water 115359 125598
Air 125598 136520
Typical (BTUs) Water 102390 111605
Air 94540 102390
2 Maximum (BTUs) Water
Air
Typical (BTUs) Water
Air
3 Maximum (BTUs) Water
Air
Typical (BTUs) Water
Air
4 Maximum (BTUs) Water
Air
Typical (BTUs) Water
Air
1The power for the full-feature configured processor book is previously defined. It is configured with a full-feature I/O unit, two 10 GB Ethernet adapters, two quad port 4x host channel adapters (HCA), 2
PCIe adapters, and 64 dual inline memory module (DIMMs), either 2 GB or 4 GB per DIMM.

2Subtract 170 W (Watts) 580 British thermal unit per hour (Btu/hr) per processor book if lite I/O is substituted for full-featured I/O, subtract 92 W (314 BTU/hr) from water power, and subtract 78 W from air
power.

3Subtract 75 W (256 BTU/hr) for each Quad Port 4x InfiniBand adapter removed from a processor book, subtract 41 W (140 BTU/hr) from water power and 34 W from air power.

4Subtract 34 W (116 BTU/hr) for each PCI adapter removed from the I/O drawer or from the processor book I/O unit, subtract 18 W (61 BTU/hr) from water power, and subtract 16 W (55 BTU/hr) from air
power. (The configuration contains two adapter slots per processor book and 20 adapter slots per I/O drawer).

5Subtract 22 W (75 BTU/hr) from an I/O drawer for every disk removed, 12 W (41 BTU/hr) from water power, and 10 W (34 BTU/hr) from air power. (The I/O drawer configuration contains 16 disk bays per
drawer.)

6Maximum power is under conditions of maximum ambient room temperature, most aggressive workload, and water-cooled component manufacturing tolerances. Typical power is under conditions of typical
ambient room temperature (22 C), typical workload, and nominal component manufacturing tolerances.

Table 210. Heat load (Watts), high line voltage, rear door heat exchanger open.

Rack Power Dissipation 380 - 480 V ac

32 W at 4.7 GHz (water cooled), 128 GB or 256 GB memory, full feature I/O, 2 PCIe, two 10 GB Ethernet adapters,
two disk drives, 2 quad port 4x host channel adapters

Total rack power to water and air with rear door heat exchanger closed (Watts)
I/O drawers 1 2 3 4 5
0 Maximum (Watts) Water 3100 6100 9200 12 300 15 300
Air 4400 7400 10 300 13 200 16 200
Typical (Watts) Water 2700 5400 8200 10 900 13 600
Air 3600 5800 7900 10 000 12 200
1 Maximum (Watts) Water 3100 6100 9200 12 300 15 300
Air 5500 8500 11 400 14 300 17 300
Typical (Watts) Water 2700 5400 8200 10 900 13 600
Air 4700 6900 8900 11 100 13 300
2 Maximum (Watts) Water 6100 9200 12 300 15 300
na
Air 9600 12 500 15 400 18 400
Typical (Watts) Water 5400 8200 10 900 13 600
na
Air 8000 10 000 12 200 14 400
3 Maximum (Watts) Water 9200 12 300 15 300
na na
Air 13 600 16 500 19 500
Typical (Watts) Water 8200 10 900 13 600
na na
Air 11 100 13 300 15 500
4 Maximum (Watts) Water 12 300 15 300
na na na
Air 17 600 20 600
Typical (Watts) Water na na na 10 900 13 600
Air

Chapter 4. Server specifications 231

Table 211. Heat load (Watts), high line voltage, rear door heat exchanger open.

Rack Power Dissipation 380 - 480 V ac

32 W at 4.7 GHz (water cooled), 128 GB or 256 GB memory, full feature I/O, 2 PCIe, two 10 GB Ethernet adapters,
two disk drives, 2 quad port 4x host channel adapters

Total rack power to water and air with rear door heat exchanger closed (Watts)
I/O drawers 5 6 7 8 9 10
0 Maximum (Watts) Water 15 300 18 400 21 500 24 600 27 600 30 700
Air 16 200 19 100 22 000 24 900 28 000 30 900
Typical (Watts) Water 13 600 16 300 19 100 21 800 24 500 27 200
Air 12 200 14 400 16 400 18 600 20 800 22 900
1 Maximum (Watts) Water 15 300 18 400 21 500 24 600 27 600 30 700
Air 17 300 20 200 23 100 26 000 29 000 32 000
Typical (Watts) Water 13 600 16 300 19 100 21 800 24 500 27 200
Air 13 300 15 500 17 500 19 700 21 900 24 000
2 Maximum (Watts) Water 15 300 18 400 21 500 24 600 27 600 30 700
Air 18 400 21 300 24 200 27 100 30 100 33 000
Typical (Watts) Water 13 600 16 300 19 100 21 800 24 500 27 200
Air 14 400 16 500 18 600 20 800 22 900 25 100
3 Maximum (Watts) Water 15 300 18 400 21 500 24 600
na na
Air 19 500 22 400 25 300 28 200
Typical (Watts) Water 13 600 16 300 19 100 21 800
na na
Air 15 500 17 600 19 700 21 900
4 Maximum (Watts) Water 15 300 18 400
na na na na
Air 20 600 23 500
Typical (Watts) Water 13 600 16 300 na na na na
Air

Table 212. Heat load (Watts), high line voltage, rear door heat exchanger open.

Rack Power Dissipation 380 - 480 V ac

32 W at 4.7 GHz (water cooled), 128 GB or 256 GB memory, full feature I/O, 2 PCIe, two 10 GB Ethernet adapters,
two disk drives, 2 quad port 4x host channel adapters

Total rack power to water and air with rear door heat exchanger closed (Watts)
I/O drawers 11 12 13 14
0 Maximum (Watts) Water 33 800 36 800 39 900 43 000
Air 33 800 36 800 39 700 42 600
Typical (Watts) Water 30 000 32 700 35 400 38 100
Air 25 000 27 200 29 300 31 500
1 Maximum (Watts) Water 33 800 36 800
na na
Air 34 900 37 900
Typical (Watts) Water 30 000 32 700
na na
Air 26 100 28 300
2 Maximum (Watts) Water na na na na
Air
Typical (Watts) Water
na na na na
Air
3 Maximum (Watts) Water
na na na na
Air
Typical (Watts) Water
na na na na
Air
4 Maximum (Watts) Water
na na na na
Air
Typical (Watts) Water na na na na
Air

Table 213. Heat load (BTUs), high line voltage, rear door heat exchanger open. Total rack power to water and air
with rear door heat exchanger closed (Watts)
I/O drawers 1 2 3 4 5
0 Maximum (Watts) Water 10 580 20 819 31 400 41 980 52 219
Air 15 017 25 256 35 154 45 052 55 291
Typical (Watts) Water 9215 18 430 27 987 37 202 46 417
Air 12 287 19 795 26 963 34 130 41 639

232 Site and hardware planning

Table 213. Heat load (BTUs), high line voltage, rear door heat exchanger open (continued). Total rack power to
water and air with rear door heat exchanger closed (Watts)
I/O drawers 1 2 3 4 5
1 Maximum (Watts) Water 10 580 20 819 31 400 41 980 52 219
Air 18 772 29 011 38 908 48 806 59 045
Typical (Watts) Water 9215 18 430 27 987 37 202 46 417
Air 16 041 23 550 30 376 37 884 45 393
2 Maximum (Watts) Water 20 819 31 400 41 980 52 219
na
Air 32 765 42 663 52 560 62 799
Typical (Watts) Water 18 430 27 987 37 202 46 417
na
Air 27 304 34 130 41 639 49 147
3 Maximum (Watts) Water 31 400 41 980 52 219
na na
Air 46 417 56 315 66 554
Typical (Watts) Water 27 987 37 202 46 417
na na
Air 37 884 45 393 52 902
4 Maximum (Watts) Water 41 980 52 219
na na na
Air 60 069 70 308
Typical (Watts) Water na na na 37 202 46 417
Air
1The power for the full-feature configured processor book is previously defined. It is configured with a full-feature I/O unit, two 10 GB Ethernet adapters, two quad port 4x host channel adapters (HCA), 2
PCIe adapters, and 64 dual inline memory module (DIMMs), either 2 GB or 4 GB per DIMM.

2Subtract 170 W (Watts) 580 British thermal unit per hour (Btu/hr) per processor book if lite I/O is substituted for full-featured I/O, subtract 92 W (314 BTU/hr) from water power, and subtract 78 W from air
power.

3Subtract 75 W (256 BTU/hr) for each Quad Port 4x InfiniBand adapter removed from a processor book, subtract 41 W (140 BTU/hr) from water power and 34 W from air power.

4Subtract 34 W (116 BTU/hr) for each PCI adapter removed from the I/O drawer or from the processor book I/O unit, subtract 18 W (61 BTU/hr) from water power, and subtract 16 W (55 BTU/hr) from air
power. (The configuration contains two adapter slots per processor book and 20 adapter slots per I/O drawer).

5Subtract 22 W (75 BTU/hr) from an I/O drawer for every disk removed, 12 W (41 BTU/hr) from water power, and 10 W (34 BTU/hr) from air power. (The I/O drawer configuration contains 16 disk bays per
drawer.)

6Maximum power is under conditions of maximum ambient room temperature, most aggressive workload, and water-cooled component manufacturing tolerances. Typical power is under conditions of typical
ambient room temperature (22 C), typical workload, and nominal component manufacturing tolerances.

Table 214. Heat load (BTUs), high line voltage, rear door heat exchanger open. Total rack power to water and air
with rear door heat exchanger closed (Watts)
I/O drawers 6 7 8 9 10
0 Maximum (Watts) Water 62 799 73 380 83 960 94 199 104 779
Air 65 188 75 086 84 984 95 564 105 462
Typical (Watts) Water 55 632 65 188 74 403 83 619 92 834
Air 49 147 55 973 63 482 70 990 78 158
1 Maximum (Watts) Water 62 799 73 380 83 960 94 199 104 779
Air 68 943 78 840 88 738 98 977 109 216
Typical (Watts) Water 55 632 65 188 74 403 83 619 92 834
Air 52 902 59 728 67 236 74 745 81 912
2 Maximum (Watts) Water 62 799 73 380 83 960 94 199 104 779
Air 72 697 82 595 92 492 102 731 112 629
Typical (Watts) Water 55 632 65 188 74 403 83 619 92 834
Air 56 315 63 482 70 990 78 158 85 666
3 Maximum (Watts) Water 62 799 73 380 83 960
na na
Air 76 451 86 349 96 247
Typical (Watts) Water 55 632 65 188 74 403
na na
Air 60 069 67 236 74 745
4 Maximum (Watts) Water 62 799
na na na na
Air 80 206
Typical (Watts) Water 55 632 na na na na
Air
1The power for the full-feature configured processor book is previously defined. It is configured with a full-feature I/O unit, two 10 GB Ethernet adapters, two quad port 4x host channel adapters (HCA), 2
PCIe adapters, and 64 dual inline memory module (DIMMs), either 2 GB or 4 GB per DIMM.

2Subtract 170 W (Watts) 580 British thermal unit per hour (Btu/hr) per processor book if lite I/O is substituted for full-featured I/O, subtract 92 W (314 BTU/hr) from water power, and subtract 78 W from air
power.

3Subtract 75 W (256 BTU/hr) for each Quad Port 4x InfiniBand adapter removed from a processor book, subtract 41 W (140 BTU/hr) from water power and 34 W from air power.

4Subtract 34 W (116 BTU/hr) for each PCI adapter removed from the I/O drawer or from the processor book I/O unit, subtract 18 W (61 BTU/hr) from water power, and subtract 16 W (55 BTU/hr) from air
power. (The configuration contains two adapter slots per processor book and 20 adapter slots per I/O drawer).

5Subtract 22 W (75 BTU/hr) from an I/O drawer for every disk removed, 12 W (41 BTU/hr) from water power, and 10 W (34 BTU/hr) from air power. (The I/O drawer configuration contains 16 disk bays per
drawer.)

6Maximum power is under conditions of maximum ambient room temperature, most aggressive workload, and water-cooled component manufacturing tolerances. Typical power is under conditions of typical
ambient room temperature (22 C), typical workload, and nominal component manufacturing tolerances.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 233

Table 215. Heat load (BTUs), high line voltage, rear door heat exchanger open. Total rack power to water and air
with rear door heat exchanger closed (Watts)
I/O drawers 11 12 13 14
0 Maximum (Watts) Water 115 359 125 598 136 179 146 759
Air 115 359 125 598 135 496 145 394
Typical (Watts) Water 102 390 111 605 120 820 130 035
Air 85 325 92 834 100 001 107 510
1 Maximum (Watts) Water 115 359 125 598
na na
Air 119 114 129 353
Typical (Watts) Water 102 390 111 605
na na
Air 89 079 96 588
2 Maximum (Watts) Water
na na na na
Air
Typical (Watts) Water
na na na na
Air
3 Maximum (Watts) Water
na na na na
Air
Typical (Watts) Water
na na na na
Air
4 Maximum (Watts) Water
na na na na
Air
Typical (Watts) Water na na na na
Air
1The power for the full-feature configured processor book is previously defined. It is configured with a full-feature I/O unit, two 10 GB Ethernet adapters, two quad port 4x host channel adapters (HCA), 2
PCIe adapters, and 64 dual inline memory module (DIMMs), either 2 GB or 4 GB per DIMM.

2Subtract 170 W (Watts) 580 British thermal unit per hour (Btu/hr) per processor book if lite I/O is substituted for full-featured I/O, subtract 92 W (314 BTU/hr) from water power, and subtract 78 W from air
power.

3Subtract 75 W (256 BTU/hr) for each Quad Port 4x InfiniBand adapter removed from a processor book, subtract 41 W (140 BTU/hr) from water power and 34 W from air power.

4Subtract 34 W (116 BTU/hr) for each PCI adapter removed from the I/O drawer or from the processor book I/O unit, subtract 18 W (61 BTU/hr) from water power, and subtract 16 W (55 BTU/hr) from air
power. (The configuration contains two adapter slots per processor book and 20 adapter slots per I/O drawer).

5Subtract 22 W (75 BTU/hr) from an I/O drawer for every disk removed, 12 W (41 BTU/hr) from water power, and 10 W (34 BTU/hr) from air power. (The I/O drawer configuration contains 16 disk bays per
drawer.)

6Maximum power is under conditions of maximum ambient room temperature, most aggressive workload, and water-cooled component manufacturing tolerances. Typical power is under conditions of typical
ambient room temperature (22 C), typical workload, and nominal component manufacturing tolerances.

A fully configured 14–processor book water system with fans at maximum revolutions per minute (RPM)
has an airflow of approximately 3000 cubic feet per minute (CFM). Air flow enters the side of the frame
and exits the rear side of the frame.

The following tables shows airflow as a function of rack configuration. In most applications, rack airflow
can be at the typical values shown in the table. In a case that the room is at or near maximum
temperature, and an aggressive workload is being run, rack airflow can reach the maximum values
shown in the table. Be sure to plan for the maximum values, and use the numbers for a fully configured
rack if you anticipate an upgrade to a partially populated rack in the future. Failure to provide adequate
return airflow to the building air conditioner from the rear door can result in excessive recirculation of
frame exit air to the frame air inlet. The maximum operating inlet air temperature of the 9125-F2A cannot
be exceeded under any condition.
Table 216. System airflow through rack (CFM)
I/O drawers 1 2 3 4 5
0 Maximum (Watts) 670 840 1010 1180 1350
Typical (Watts) 300 390 490 580 680
1 Maximum (Watts) 870 1040 1210 1380 1550
Typical (Watts) 450 540 640 730 830
2 Maximum (Watts) 1240 1410 1580 1750
Typical (Watts) 690 790 880 980
3 Maximum (Watts) 1610 1780 1950
Typical (Watts) 940 1030 1130
4 Maximum (Watts) 1980 2150
Typical (Watts) 1180 1280

Table 217. System airflow through rack (CFM)

I/O drawers 6 7 8 9 10
0 Maximum (Watts) 1520 1690 1860 2030 2200
Typical (Watts) 780 870 970 1060 1160

234 Site and hardware planning

Table 217. System airflow through rack (CFM) (continued)
I/O drawers 6 7 8 9 10
1 Maximum (Watts) 1720 1890 2060 2230 2400
Typical (Watts) 930 1020 1120 1210 1310
2 Maximum (Watts) 1920 2090 2260 2430 2600
Typical (Watts) 1080 1170 1270 1360 1460
3 Maximum (Watts) 2120 2290 2460
Typical (Watts) 1230 1320 1420
4 Maximum (Watts) 2320
Typical (Watts) 1380

Table 218. System airflow through rack (CFM)

I/O drawers 11 12 13 14
0 Maximum (Watts) 2370 2540 2710 2880
Typical (Watts) 1260 1350 1450 1540
1 Maximum (Watts) 2570 2740
Typical (Watts) 1410 1500
2 Maximum (Watts)
Typical (Watts)
3 Maximum (Watts)
Typical (Watts)
4 Maximum (Watts)
Typical (Watts)

Water cooling requirements

Follow these requirements when using water cooling for the 9125-F2A.

Determining minimum required system flow and pressure

v Allowable system inlet water temperature range is 6 - 16°C (43 - 61°F), using standard building chilled
water (BCW). A special water system for model 9125-F2A is typically not required.
v Required flow rate to the cabinet is 3.7 - 79.4 lpm (1 -21 gpm), depending on inlet water temperature
and the number of nodes populated in the rack. Colder inlet water temperatures require less flow then
warmer water temperatures. Racks that are partially populated with nodes require less flow than
maximum populated racks.
v Minimum water pressure required across the hose ends is 0.34 - 2.32 bar (5 - 33.7 psi), depending on
the minimum flow required.

Determining minimum required system flow and pressure for a normal operating
system
1. Determine the inlet water temperature. This is the temperature of the chilled water that is present in
the room where the system is installed.
2. Determine the minimum design flow rate for your rack configuration using tables Required building
chilled water flow, pressure drop and Required building chilled water flow, pressure drop and outlet
temperature (English units). Under normal operating conditions the flow into the frame will be
double that of the numbers shown in the tables. This is because both Water Conditioning Units
(WCU) in the frame operate simultaneously.

Note: If there is a possibility that you will add nodes to a partially populated system at a later date,
you should plan for it during the initial installation.
3. Determine the minimum pressure required across the ends of the hoses to provide the flow rate
determined in the step above. Maximum continuous operating pressure must not exceed 2.32 bars
(33.7 psi).

Determining additional required system flow for a fault condition

Define the maximum facility pressure drop that can be present across the ends of the model 9125-F2A
hoses, and locate the equivalent pressure drop in tables Required building chilled water flow, pressure
drop and Required building chilled water flow, pressure drop and outlet temperature (English units). The

Chapter 4. Server specifications 235

corresponding flow rate multiplied by two represents the maximum flow a single rack could experience
under a worst-case fault condition. The facility must be able to accommodate this condition for at least
one 9125-F2A racks in the installation.
Table 219. Required building chilled water flow, pressure drop °C (1 of 2)
Cooling capacity
with two active Required Chilled
Nodes WCUs Water per WCU 6 7 8 9 10
Flow (lpm) 3.7 4 4.4 4.9 5.5
Pressure Drop (Bar) 0.34 0.34 0.34 0.34 0.34
2 4.9
Outlet temperature
25.1 24.4 23.8 23.2 22.7
°C
Flow (lpm) 8.4 9.1 9.9 10.8 11.9
Pressure Drop (Bar) 0.34 0.34 0.34 0.34 0.34
4 9.7
Outlet temperature
22.7 22.4 22.2 22.0 21.8
°C
Flow (lpm) 13 14 15.1 16.5 18.1
Pressure Drop (Bar) 0.34 0.34 0.34 0.34 0.34
6 14.6
Outlet temperature
22.2 22.0 21.8 21.7 21.6
°C
Flow (lpm) 17.5 18.9 20.5 22.3 24.5
Pressure Drop (Bar) 0.34 0.34 0.34 0.34 0.34
8 19.5
Outlet temperature
21.9 21.8 21.7 21.5 21.4
°C
Flow (lpm) 22.2 23.9 25.9 28.3 31.2
Pressure Drop (Bar) 0.34 0.34 0.34 0.34 0.39
10 24.4
Outlet temperature
21.8 21.6 21.5 21.4 21.2
°C
Flow (lpm) 26.9 29 31.5 34.6 38.4
Pressure Drop (Bar) 0.34 0.34 0.4 0.47 0.58
12 29.2
Outlet temperature
21.6 21.5 21.3 21.1 20.9
°C
Flow (lpm) 31.7 34.4 37.5 41.3 46.2
Pressure Drop (Bar) 0.4 0.47 0.55 0.67 0.82
14 34.1
Outlet temperature
21.4 21.2 21.1 20.8 20.6
°C

Table 220. Required building chilled water flow, pressure drop °C (2 of 2)

Cooling capacity Required
with two active Chilled Water
Nodes WCUs per WCU 11 12 13 14 15 16
Flow (lpm) 6.2 7 8.1 9.6 11.5 14.4
Pressure Drop
0.34 0.34 0.34 0.34 0.34 0.34
2 4.9 (Bar)
Outlet
22.3 21.9 21.6 21.3 21.1 20.9
temperature °C
Flow (lpm) 13.2 14.8 16.9 19.7 23.6 29.5
Pressure Drop
0.34 0.34 0.34 0.34 0.34 0.35
4 9.7 (Bar)
Outlet
21.6 21.4 21.3 21.1 20.9 20.7
temperature °C
Flow (lpm) 20.1 22.6 25.9 30.3 36.8 47.8
Pressure Drop
0.34 0.34 0.34 0.37 0.53 0.88
6 14.6 (Bar)
Outlet
21.4 21.3 21.1 20.9 20.7 20.4
temperature °C
Flow (lpm) 27.3 30.8 35.5 42.2 53.1 77.8
Pressure Drop
0.34 0.38 0.5 0.69 1.08 2.23
8 19.5 (Bar)
Outlet
21.2 21.1 20.9 20.6 20.3 19.6
temperature °C
Flow (lpm) 34.9 39.8 46.5 57.1 78.5
Pressure Drop
0.48 0.62 0.83 1.23 2.27
10 24.4 (Bar)
Outlet
21.0 20.8 20.5 20.1 19.5
temperature °C

236 Site and hardware planning

Table 220. Required building chilled water flow, pressure drop °C (2 of 2) (continued)
Cooling capacity Required
with two active Chilled Water
Nodes WCUs per WCU 11 12 13 14 15 16
Flow (lpm) 43.3 50 60.1 79
Pressure Drop
0.73 0.96 1.36 2.3
12 29.2 (Bar)
Outlet
20.7 20.4 20.0 19.3
temperature °C
Flow (lpm) 52.8 62.5 79.4
Pressure Drop
1.06 1.47 2.32
14 34.1 (Bar)
Outlet
20.3 19.8 19.2
temperature °C

Table 221. Required building chilled water flow, pressure drop and outlet temperature (English units) °F (1 of 2)
Cooling capacity Required
with two active Chilled Water
Nodes WCUs per WCU 42.8 44.6 46.4 48.2 50.0 51.8
Flow (gpm) 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.5 1.6
Pressure Drop
5 5 5 5 5 5
2 16.6 (psid)
Outlet
77.1 75.9 74.8 73.8 72.9 72.1
temperature °F
Flow (gpm) 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.1 3.5
Pressure Drop
5 5 5 5 5 5
4 33.3 (psid)
Outlet
72.8 72.3 71.9 71.6 71.2 70.9
temperature °F
Flow (gpm) 3.4 3.7 4 4.4 4.8 5.3
Pressure Drop
5 5 5 5 5 5
6 49.9 (psid)
Outlet
71.9 71.6 71.3 71.1 70.8 70.5
temperature °F
Flow (gpm) 4.6 5 5.4 5.9 6.5 7.2
Pressure Drop
5 5 5 5 5 5
8 66.6 (psid)
Outlet
71.5 71.3 71.0 70.8 70.5 70.2
temperature °F
Flow (gpm) 5.9 6.3 6.8 7.5 8.2 9.2
Pressure Drop
5 5 5 5 5.6 7
10 83.2 (psid)
Outlet
71.2 71.0 70.7 70.4 70.2 69.8
temperature °F
Flow (gpm) 7.1 7.7 8.3 9.1 10.1 11.4
Pressure Drop
5 5 5.7 6.9 8.4 10.5
12 99.9 (psid)
Outlet
70.9 70.6 70.4 70.0 69.7 69.2
temperature °F
Flow (gpm) 8.4 9.1 9.9 10.9 12.2 14
Pressure Drop
5.8 6.8 8 9.6 12 15.4
14 116.5 (psid)
Outlet
70.6 70.2 69.9 69.5 69.1 68.5
temperature °F

Table 222. Required building chilled water flow, pressure drop and outlet temperature (English units) °F (2 of 2)
Cooling capacity
with two active Required Chilled
Nodes WCUs Water per WCU 53.6 55.4 57.2 59.0 60.8
Flow (gpm) 1.9 2.1 2.5 3 3.8
Pressure Drop
5 5 5 5 5
2 16.6 (psid)
Outlet temperature
71.5 70.9 70.4 69.9 69.6
°F
Flow (gpm) 3.9 4.5 5.2 6.2 7.8
Pressure Drop
5 5 5 5 5.1
4 33.3 (psid)
Outlet temperature
70.6 70.3 70.0 69.7 69.3
°F

Chapter 4. Server specifications 237

Table 222. Required building chilled water flow, pressure drop and outlet temperature (English units) °F (2 of
2) (continued)
Cooling capacity
with two active Required Chilled
Nodes WCUs Water per WCU 53.6 55.4 57.2 59.0 60.8
Flow (gpm) 6 6.8 8 9.7 12.6
Pressure Drop
5 5 5.3 7.7 12.8
6 49.9 (psid)
Outlet temperature
70.3 70.0 69.7 69.3 68.7
°F
Flow (gpm) 8.1 9.4 11.2 14 20.5
Pressure Drop
5.5 7.2 10.1 15.6 32.4
8 66.6 (psid)
Outlet temperature
69.9 69.6 69.1 68.5 67.3
°F
Flow (gpm) 10.5 12.3 15.1 20.7
Pressure Drop
9 12.1 17.9 32.9
10 83.2 (psid)
Outlet temperature
69.4 68.9 68.2 67.0
°F
Flow (gpm) 13.2 15.9 20.9
Pressure Drop
13.9 19.8 33.3
12 99.9 (psid)
Outlet temperature
68.7 68.0 66.8
°F
Flow (gpm) 16.5 21
Pressure Drop
21.3 33.7
14 116.5 (psid)
Outlet temperature
67.7 66.5
°F

Figure 136. Pressure versus flow with a 427 cm (14 ft) hose – International System of Units (SI units)

238 Site and hardware planning

Figure 137. Pressure versus flow with a 427 cm (14 ft ) hose – English units

Note: Curves are with MWU inlet valve in the fully opened position. The customer pressure-versus-flow
behavior of the system will not match this curve under normal operating conditions because the valve
position adjusts to regulate the flow to maintain a fixed system-side water temperature.

Principal of operation
v Two pairs of hoses and two WCU's are in parallel at the water cooling input of the model 9125-F2A.
Normally both of the WCU's operate in parallel to cool the rack, with half of the water flow circulating
through each of the water cooling units. The control valve in the WCU regulates the flow of water that
goes through it in order to maintain the proper water temperature of the system-side water in the
9125-F2A. If the facility water temperature gets cooler, the valve opening will shrink. If the facility
water temperature gets hotter, the valve will become more open. There must be enough pressure across
the ends of the hoses to force the minimum required amount of water through the WCUs. This is
information is available in Determining minimum required system flow and pressure.
v The 9125-F2A has two pairs of hoses and two WCUs. This allows the system to continue to function
even if one of the WCUs should experience some type of failure. If a WCU fails in a way that does not
enable it to cool the load, the other WCU will pick up the entire rack load. In this case, the valve in the
functioning WCU will open wider to increase the water flow through it to maintain system
temperatures. In addition, water will likely be shut off to the rear door heat exchanger of the rack to
shed the water cooling load, so the single WCU can cool the processors in the rack. This causes the
heat that is exhausted to the room to rise. By removing the WCU from the front side, the faulty WCU
can be replaced concurrently, without shutting the system down to restore the rack water cooling
system to its fully redundant state. It is possible that a faulty WCU could have its input valve stuck in
the full opened position. If this happens, the rack will require two times the amount of available water
flow until the faulty WCU is repaired. The facility must be capable of providing this additional flow
for this fault case. This is information is available in Determining minimum required system flow and
pressure.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 239

v The system-side water is completely isolated from facility water by the water-to-water heat exchangers
in the WCUs. Heat is transferred from the system-side water to the facility water by thermal
conduction through the water-to-water heat exchangers. System-side water is maintained by IBM
service personnel using special water treated with a corrosion inhibitor.
v Provided that the room dew point is within class 1 specification, condensation will not form on the
system side of the water cooling system. This is because the system-side water is regulated above the
temperature at which condensation occurs. Condensation will not form on the facility-side
water-cooling system because the components, including the quick disconnects and hoses, are
insulated. Protection against condensation at the point where the hoses connect to facility plumbing
and condensation protection of the facility side plumbing itself is a customer responsibility.

Figure 138. Simplified schematic of water cooling system

Calculating building chilled water return temperature (SI units)

Treturn (°C) = Tsupply (°C)+ 14.4 (Q (MWU (kW)/ (MWU BCW Flow (lpm))

Return water temperature can be calculated under normal operating conditions using the previous table,
Required Building Chilled Water Flow per MWU (lpm).

240 Site and hardware planning

Examples in SI units

Tsupply(°C) = 10. That is, the facilities water is 10 °C.

Frame Heat Load(kw) = 34.1. T he heat load to water in kilowatts of the system is 34.1 kW.

Frame BCW Flow(gpm) = 44.9. The flow of the facilities water is 44.9 liters per minute.

Treturn = 10+ 14.4 (34.1/44.9) = 20.9 °C

Calculating building chilled water return temperature (English units)

Treturn (°F) = Tsupply (F) + 2.0 (QMWU (kBTU/hr) / (MWU BCW Flow (gpm))

Return water temperature can be calculated under normal operating conditions using the Required
Building Chilled Water Flow per MWU (gpm) table.

Examples in English units

Tsupply(°F) = 50. That is, the facilities water is 50 °F.

Frame Heat Load(kw) = 116.5 The heat load to water in Kilo British Thermal Units (kBTU) per hour of
the system is 116.5 kBTU per hour.

Frame BCW Flow(gpm) = 11.9. The flow of the facilities water is 11.9 gallons per minute.

Treturn = 50+2.0 (116.5/11.9) = 69.6 °F

Facility water momentary flow interruption and out of specification temperature

The system is designed to tolerate a momentary interruption of facility water flow or temperature
increase that might occur as a result of a failure in the facility water distribution system.

Momentary interruption of facility water flow

The system can tolerate complete loss of facilities water flow for 60 seconds. There is a high probability
that nodes will be powered off by thermal protection circuits internal to the 9125-F2A if loss of flow
exceeds this time.

Over-temperature of facility water

The system can tolerate a 14°C (26°F temperature rise above the maximum facilities operating
temperature at a given flow rate. It should be assumed that the system will be powered off by the
thermal protection circuits internal to the 9125-F2A for facility water temperatures greater than this
maximum temperature rise. Continuous operation in an over-temperature condition of 1 - 14°C (2 - 25°F)
cannot be sustained, even though the system will run without powering down. When the maximum
allowable facility water temperature of 16°C (60.8°F) is exceeded, or when the system-side water
temperature cannot be regulated, an error is sent to the customer, and corrective action is required.

Under-temperature facility water

If facility water is below the minimum allowable temperature of 4.4 °C (40 °F) an error will be surfaced
to the customer and corrective action will be required. The only problem that can result from
under-temperature facility water is condensation on the facility side of the system. The temperature at
which condensation might occur is dependant on the severity of the facility water under-temperature and
the air temperature and humidity in the room.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 241

Facility water quality and fowling

In general the 9125-F2A requires standard building chilled water temperatures without any special
requirements.

Note: The facility water flows only through the facility side of the water-to-water heat exchanges located
in the bottom rear of the rack. Therefore, contaminated facility water cannot damage components within
the rack other than the WCUs.

The quality of the facilities water is as follows.

v Total hardness must not exceed 200 mg/L as calcium carbonate.
v The pH must be 7 - 9.
v Turbidity must be less than 10 Nephelometric Turbidity Unit (NTU).
v Bacteria must be less than 1000 10 colony forming unit (CFU)/ml.
v Water should be as free of particulate matter as feasible.

Note: Facility water should be tested by qualified personnel to determine whether it meets these
requirements.

Deionized water with benzotriazole solution installation and maintenance

IBM is responsible for supplying and maintaining the internal frame secondary loop side water. This
protects the system processor books and distribution plumbing from damage that could result from the
use of contaminated water.

IBM supplies a water solution that is mixed with benzotriazole (BTA), a corrosion inhibitor, for the
internal secondary cooling loop of the frame when it is installed and when any repairs are performed
that require water to be added.

IBM uses certified suppliers for the water solution that satisfy all pertinent environmental control
requirements.

Deionized water with benzotriazole disposal

The customer must dispose of the water solution in accordance with applicable laws and regulations and
product characteristics at the time of disposal.

Internal frame water solutions

IBM will supply the system-side water.

Water and benzotriazole solution

Benzotriazole (BTA) is mixed with the deionized (DI) water to a concentration of 1000 parts per million
by weight.

Deionized water

The deionized water used in IBM water cooling systems conforms to type II, grade A specifications in
ASTM D1193-06 entitled, standard specifications for reagent water. Specifications are as follows:
v Electrical resistivity at 25 °C > 0.5 Mvcm
v Total organic carbon < 50 µg/L
v Sodium < 5 µg/L
v Chloride < 5 µg/L

242 Site and hardware planning

v Total Silica < 3 µg/L
v Total organic carbon < 50 µg/L
v Heterotrophic bacteria count (HBC) less than 10 colony forming unit (cfu) / 1000 mL as measured per
ASTM F1094 or IBM approved equivalent

Benzotriazole

Benzotriazole (BTA) is purchased from Sigma-Aldrich or an alternative IBM approved supplier, and is
defined as follows:
v Product Name: Benzotriazole, 99%
v Product Number: B11400
v Brand: Aldrich Chemical
v Substance Name: 1H-Benzotriazole
v Chemical abstracts service number: 95-14-7
v Formula: C6H5N3
v Molecular weight: 119.12

Connection of facility water to the system

Two pairs of insulated 25.4 mm (1 in.) inside diameter (38.4 mm outside diameter / 1.51 in.) hoses, which
are specified by IBM, connect facility water to the system. The hoses are available in 1.83 m (6 ft) and
4.27 m (14 ft) lengths, and can be purchased from IBM or purchased directly from the hose assembly
manufacturer using a part number. The hoses must be attached to the facility water source, and the
system ends must be properly positioned above the raised floor prior to the server arriving so that the
rack can be rolled into positions, up to the hoses, without delay.

Installation of IBM system connection hoses in facility

The following figure shows the four hoses (two supply hoses and two return hoses) connected to the
building water manifolds under the raised floor with the ends that connect to the system properly
positioned 188 mm (7.4 in.) above the floor.

The facility end of the provided hoses is a cut hose without a fitting. It is the customer's responsibility to
determine the connection technique on this side.

It is suggested, but not required, that a shutoff valve be provided in front of the hose assembly as shown.
This shutoff valve is not required for maintenance of the equipment, but can be useful if hose removal is
ever desired by the customer.

The 1.83 m (6 ft) and 4.27 m (14 ft) hose length is the customer's responsibility and depends on the
distance from the facility manifolds to the rack. The facility end of the hose can be cut to the desired
length by the hose installer.

Route the hoses through the floor cutout as shown, being sure to avoid sharp edges of metal and to leave
some slack in the hose. Cable management is required for signal cables that exit the rear of the rack and
must be considered when routing the hoses. In the proceeding figure the cable management tray is
provided as part of the facility at the rear of the rack.

IBM hose assembly ordering information

Four hoses (two supply and two return) and one hose positioning fixture is required for each rack that
will be installed. The hose positioning fixture is removed after the hoses are connected to the system.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 243

Ordered hose kits from IBM arrive with the system. However, it is recommended that you order the hose
kits before the system, so that they can be attached to the facilities plumbing in advance. The hose kits
must be ordered directly from the hose kit manufacturer.

Hose assembly ordering information

Two supply hoses, two return hoses, and one hose positioning fixture are required for each rack to be
installed.

Note: The hose positioning fixture is removed after the hoses are connected to the system.

In order for the hose kits to arrive before the system, the hose kits must be ordered from IBM by ordering
the 9125-F2A Site Preparation/Install Support Model 9125-F2B. The 9125-F2A Site Preparation/Install
Support Model (9125-F2B) enables the ability to place an order for the Coolant Supply/Return Hoses
(#6876 or #6877) prior to delivery of the system. This allows the site chilled water plumbing to be
completed ahead of the system arrival, so the hose kits can be attached to facilities plumbing in advance,
reducing overall installation time. Order either of the following if hoses are required before the systems.
v 9125-F2B 6876 coolant supply and return hoses, 1.83 m (6 ft)
v 9125-F2B 6877 coolant supply and return hoses, 4.27 m (14 ft)

If it is not necessary to receive the hose kits prior to installation, then you can order the following hose
kits:
v Feature code 6876 and part number 45D2215.
– Two 1.83 m (6 ft) hose assembly (black supply) –P/N 45D0907
– Two 1.83 m (6 ft) hose assembly (white return) – P/N 45D0908
– One hose positioning fixture – P/N 45D2245
v Feature code 6877 and part number 45D2214.
– Two 4.27 m (14 ft) hose assembly (black supply) – P/N 45D1952
– Two 4.27 m (14 ft) hose assembly (white return) – P/N 45D1951
– One hose positioning fixture – P/N 45D2245

244 Site and hardware planning

Figure 139. View of properly positioned facilities hoses

Figure 140. Facility water quick disconnects at rear base of frame

Chapter 4. Server specifications 245

Figure 141. 9125-F2A water hook up locations

Hose materials

Only IBM hoses can be used to connect to the IBM 9125-F2A server. This protects against leaks and
condensation that can result from using insufficient hose assemblies and incompatible quick disconnect
couplings.

The hose contains the following components:

v Gates terminator hose: 25.4 mm (1 in.) inner diameter (Gates part number 308504)
v Armacell and Armaflex Hose insulation: Armacell part number APT15838 919-304-3846
v Bentley Harris Expando flame retardant plus protective mesh covering (Bentley Harris part number
BSBHFRP-175)
v Aeroquip System-side quick disconnect couplings (IBM part number 45D0909 or 45D0915)
v Aluminum-bronze elbow and stainless steal clamp

246 Site and hardware planning

Figure 142. Facilities connection hose

Quick disconnect couplings insulator information

The quick disconnect coupling insulators shown in the following figure, are shipped with the system.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 247

Figure 143. Quick disconnect coupling insulator open and closed

The quick disconnect couplings insulators must be attached as shown in Quick disconnect couplings without
insulator (left) and with insulator (right) or condensation might occur on the quick disconnect.

Figure 144. Quick disconnect coupling without insulator (left) and with insulator (right)

Purging air from facilities-side hoses

It is recommended that you purge the air from the facilities connection hoses when the contractor installs
the hoses.

The hoses can contain a maximum of 0.51 liters per meter (0.041 gallons per foot) of air.

248 Site and hardware planning

A hose purge operation is not done when the system is connected to the hoses because it is assumed that
purging the hoses is completed by the hose installation contractor if it is thought to be necessary in the
facility. The suggested procedure to purge air from the hoses during installation is as follows.

Figure 145. Purge drawing

Figure 146. Facilities water quick disconnects (disengaged with both valves opened)

Chapter 4. Server specifications 249

Figure 147. Facilities water quick disconnects (mated with one valve opened)

Figure 148. Facilities water quick disconnects (mated with both valves opened)

1. After final connection of the hoses to the facility supply and return is made, connect the supply quick
disconnect coupling to the return quick disconnect coupling as shown in the preceding figure.
2. After the connectors are twisted together, open the valve handle on one of the two connectors to lock
the quick disconnects together.
3. Slowly open the valve on the other connector, allowing the air trapped in the hoses to be moved
slowly into the return side of the facility. Slowly removing the air prevents a large amount of air from
entering the return all at once and allows the air to find its way to the facility's high point vent.
4. After purging is complete, disconnect the quick disconnects from one another and place them in their
proper locations in the positioning fixture above the raised floor, in preparation for rack installation.

Note: Knowledge of how the water cooling system works is beneficial to the mechanical engineering
firm, mechanical contracting firm, the plumbing firm, and the customer.
Related concepts:

250 Site and hardware planning

“Air cooling requirements” on page 222
When planning an installation, the facility air cooling system must have enough capacity to cool two
9125-F2A frames with the rear door heat exchanger opened and the other 9125-F2A racks with the rear
door heat exchanger closed.

Moving the system to the installation site

Several factors must be considered before moving the system to the installation site.

Frame shipping box and frame dimension

Prior to moving the system to the installation site, you should:

1. Determine the path that must be taken to move the system from the delivery location to the
installation site.
2. Verify that the height of all doorways, elevators, and other areas are sufficient to allow moving the
system to the installation site.
3. Verify that the weight limitations of elevators, ramps, floors, and floor tiles are sufficient to allow
moving the system to the installation site.
4. If the height or weight of the system can cause a problem when the system is moved to the
installation site, contact your local site planning or sales representative.

Racks are shipped in three packing crates. The packing crates can be moved with a lift truck. The
dimensions of the first box are 1778 mm x 940 mm x 2299 mm (70 in. x 37 in. x 90.5 in.) (length, width,
height). The frame is typically removed from the shipping crate at the loading dock. After the frame is
removed from the packing crate, the frame measures 60 in. x 30.9 in. x 79.5 in. Due to the size and weight
of each frame, a professional mover is required for moving the frames to their location on the data center
floor. The dimensions of the second box are 84 in. x 42 in. x 41 in. including the pallet. The third box is
the ship group packaging with dimensions of 40 in. x 48 in. x 39.5 in. including the pallet.

Frame size and weight reduction options for tight locations

The width is 785 mm (30.9 in.) and can be reduced to 749 mm (29.5 in.) by removing the side covers on
site.

The height is 2019 mm (79.5 in.) and can be reduced to 1549 mm (61 in.) by removing the bulk power
assemblies and the top section of the frame. This frame can be ordered at a reduced height from the
factory using feature code 7690, or the height reduction can be done in the field. The compact handling
option adds a considerable amount of assembly work to the installation.

Note: Only order the compact handling option if it is absolutely necessary.

Components can be removed on site to accommodate low payload elevators or other situations. Bulk
power regulators (BPR) and server processor books are the best components to remove to reduce frame
weight. BPR weight is approximately 13.2 kg (29.1 lb). Maximum processor book weight is approximately
59.9 kg (132 lb).

Front and rear door shipping box and installation

The front and rear doors are shipped in individual boxes separate from the frame. The frame should be
moved to the final location on the data center floor and placed in the final position prior to attaching the
front and rear doors. The doors can be removed from their packing boxes on the loading dock or on the
data center floor. However, try to keep leaving the covers in their packaging until the time that they are
ready to be attached to avoid damaging the covers.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 251

Planning the route from the receiving dock to the data center

The following should be considered when determining the route to the data center floor:
v Frame weight:
– Floor loading
– Floor material
– Inclines
– Elevator size and weight capability
v Frame dimensions:
– Door width and height

Phase imbalance and BPR configuration

Use the Phase imbalance and Bulk Power Regulators (BPR) configuration table to determine the phase
imbalance of your server's configuration.

9125-F2A frames that are configured with eight or more processor books have fully balanced, three-phase
power, while smaller configuration might or might not have balanced three-phase power. The proceeding
table shows that three bulk power regulators (BPR) per power cord are balanced three-phase
configuration, which means equal current is drawn from each of the three-phases of the power cord.
However, line cords with a partial population of BPRs present an unbalanced three-phase load to the
facility. This topic describes this imbalanced condition and shows how the facility level load can be
balanced when multiple imbalanced racks are deployed in an installation.
Table 223. Balanced three-phase (200 - 240 V ac)
Number of nodes
Drawers 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
0 B PA-B 0 0 01 01 1 2 2 31 31 31 31 31 31 31
LC 4
1 1 1
B PA-B 1 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 31 3 1
3 1
3 1
3 1
31
LC 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
B PA-A 0 0 0 0 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 31
LC 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
B PA-A 1 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 31
LC 1
1 1 1 1 1 1
1 B PA-B 0 0 0 1 1 2 3 3 3 3 3 31
LC 4
1 1 1 1 1 1
B PA-B 1 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 31
LC 3
1
B PA-A 0 0 0 1 1 2 31 3 1
3 1
3 1
31 3 1

LC 2
1
B PA-A 1 2 3 3 3 3 31 3 1
3 1
3 1
3 1
31
LC 1
1 1 1 1
2 B PA-B 0 0 1 1 2 3 3 3 31
LC 4
1 1 1 1
B PA-B 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 31
LC 3
1
B PA-A 0 0 1 1 2 31 3 1
31 31
LC 2
1 1 1 1
B PA-A 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 31
LC 1
1 1
3 BPA-B 0 1 1 2 3 31
LC 4
1 1
B PA-B 3 3 3 3 3 31
LC 3
1 1
B PA-A 0 1 1 2 3 31
LC 2
1 1
B PA-A 3 3 3 3 3 31
LC 1

252 Site and hardware planning

Table 223. Balanced three-phase (200 - 240 V ac) (continued)
Number of nodes
Drawers 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
4 BPA-B 1 2 2
LC 4
BPA-B 3 3 3 3
LC
BPA-A 1 2 2
LC 2
BPA-A 3 3 3
LC 1
1
Balanced three-phase configurations.

Table 224. Balanced three-phase (380 - 480 V ac)

Number of nodes
Drawers 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 1 1 1
0 B PA-B 0 0 0 0 1 1 2 3 3 31 31 3 1
3 1
31
LC 2
1 1 1
B PA-B 1 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 31 3 1
3 1
3 1
3 1
3 1

LC 1
1 1 1
B PA-A 0 0 0 0 1 1 2 3 31 31 31 31 31 31
LC 2
B PA-A 1 2 31 31 3 3 3 31 31 31 31 31 31 31
LC 1
1 1
1 B PA-B 0 0 0 0 1 2 2 31 31 31 31 31
LC 2
B PA-B 1 2 31 31 3 3 3 31 31 31 31 31
LC 1
1 1 1 1 1 1
B PA-A 0 0 0 0 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 31
LC 2
B PA-A 1 2 31 31 3 3 3 31 31 31 31 31
LC 1
1 1 1 1
2 B PA-B 0 0 0 1 2 2 3 3 31
LC 2
B PA-B 2 31 31 3 3 3 31 31 31
LC 1
1 1 1 1
B PA-A 0 0 0 1 2 2 3 3 31
LC 2
1
B PA-A 2 3 31 3 3 3 31 31 31
LC 1
1 1
3 BPA-B 0 0 1 2 2 31
LC 2
B PA-B 31 31 3 3 3 31
LC 1
1 1
B PA-A 0 0 1 2 2 31
LC 2
B PA-A 31 31 3 3 3 31
LC 1
4 BPA-B 1 1 2
LC 2
BPA-B 3 3 3
LC 1
BPA-A 1 1 2
LC 2
BPA-A 3 3 3
LC 1
1
Balanced three-phase configurations.

Balancing power panel loads

Use these methods to ensure that power panel loads are balanced.

There are one to three bulk power regulators (BPRs) for each of the four power cords. Power cords 1 and
2 always have the same configuration of BPRs, and the same is true for power cords 3 and 4. Three-phase
balance behavior is as follows for each power cord:
v When three BPRs per power cord are populated, the load for that power cord is balanced three-phase.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 253

v When two BPRs per power cord are populated, two of the three-phases draw an equal amount of
current and are nominally 57.8% of the current on the third phase.
v When one BPR per power cord is populated, two of three-phases carry an equal amount of current
with no current drawn on the third phase.

Note: Ground fault interrupt (GFI) circuit breakers are not recommended for this system because GFI
circuit breakers are earth leakage current sensing circuit breakers and this system is a high earth leakage
current product.

Figure 149. Power-panel load balancing

The method illustrated in the preceding figure requires that the connection from the three poles of each
breaker to the three-phase pins of a connector be varied. Some electricians might prefer to maintain a
consistent wiring sequence from the breakers to the connectors. The following figure shows a way to
balance the load without changing the wiring on the output of any breakers. The three-pole breakers are
alternated with single-pole breakers, so that the three-pole breakers do not all begin on Phase A.

254 Site and hardware planning

Figure 150. Power-panel load balancing

The following figure shows another way of distributing the unbalanced load evenly. In this case, the
three-pole breakers are alternated with two-pole breakers.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 255

Figure 151. Power-panel load balancing

Facility electrical equipment requirements

Follow these requirements and techniques on the 9125-F2A.

The recommended technique to power the 9125-F2A is to run four separately protected three-phase
power feeds to a location under the frame, and connect a feed to each of the four frame power cords. If
the IEC-60309 plug-equipped power cords are selected, the power cords will be plugged into mating
receptacles. For World Trade countries, an unterminated power cord might be selected. If the
unterminated power cords are selected, you have the option of installing an appropriately rated plug of
his choice and plugging it to the mating receptacle, or hard wiring the power cord into his facility.

Care should be taken to choose the correct power cord length. The 1.83 m (6 ft) and 4.27 m (14 ft) lengths
are measured from the exit location at the base of the frame. Some localities might limit the length of
power cords to a maximum of 6 ft. The unterminated power cords are available in 4.27 m (14 ft) lengths
only, but they can be cut to any desired length when they are terminated at the facility. See Floor Cutout
View of 2 Racks for a pictorial showing and example of power power cord routing.

The rating of the circuit breaker protecting each power cord should be equal to the power cord rating, for
example, 60 A or 100 A. Note that this facility circuit breaker protects only the facility wiring, the full
gauge system power cord, and a small amount of full gauge wiring in the primary power compartments
of the frame. High speed fusing is incorporated in the front end of each bulk regulator in the frame, and
is intended to provide protection in the event of failures within the bulk power regulators. It is suggested
that slow trip circuit breakers be used to protect the power cords so that the fuses in the bulk power

256 Site and hardware planning

regulators open first in the event of a BPR short circuit fault. This circuit breaker coordination can ease
troubleshooting and hasten the repair process if such a fault occurs.

Use of ground fault interrupt (GFI) circuit breakers is not recommended for this system because GFI
circuit breakers are earth leakage current sensing circuit breakers and this system is a high earth leakage
current product.

Coordinating line cord over current protection with internal 9125-F2A

protection
Use this information provided to understand the power cord draw.

The maximum phase current a power cord can draw is 90 A RMS, which is limited by electronic circuitry
internal to the 9125-F2A. Short circuit fault protection is provided in the extreme front-end of the
9125-F2A Bulk Power Regulators (BPR) by internal fuses. The electronic current limiting circuitry in each
BPR protects the fuses from opening under all conditions, including severe line voltage transients and
disturbances. If a short circuit fault should occur in a BPR the objective is for the BPR fuse is to clear
without tripping your circuit breaker on the associated power cord. In order to achieve this circuit
protection coordination, the facility protection must have a slower trip curve then the BPR fusing, whose
characteristics are shown by the following curve in the figure.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 257

Figure 152. Melting time/ fuse opening time

258 Site and hardware planning

Approximate system weights by configuration
Use the tables to calculate the approximate weight of your system based on its configuration.
Table 225. Maximum system weight as installed (lb) with water
Number of nodes
I/O
drawers 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
0 1355 1566 1796 1953 2164 2312 2532 2742 2900 3075 3232 3389 3546 3703
1 1517 1728 1958 2115 2326 2474 2694 2904 3062 3237 3394 3551
2 1890 2120 2277 2488 2636 2856 3066 3224 3399
3 2282 2439 2650 2798 3018 3228
4 2601 2812 2960

Table 226. Maximum system weight as installed (kg) with water

Number of nodes
I/O
drawers 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
0 615 710 815 886 982 1049 1148 1244 1315 1395 1466 1537 1608 1680
1 688 784 888 959 1055 1122 1222 1317 1389 1468 1539 1611
2 857 962 1033 1129 1196 1295 1391 1462 1542
3 1035 1106 1202 1269 1369 1464
4 1180 1276 1343

Floor construction and floor loading

Calculate the floor loads for your server with the proceeding formulas. A floor loading assessment is the
evaluation of the concrete sub floor and the raised floor. The weight of the raised floor is considered in
the floor loading formula.

The building floor must support the weight of the equipment to be installed. The following
pounds-per-square-foot (lb/ft2) and kilogram-per-square meter (kg/m2) formulas are used to calculate
floor loading. For assistance with floor load evaluation, contact a structural engineer that satisfies your
local requirements.

(Frame Weight [kg])/(Frame Area + (Service Area/2) [m2])) + ((75[kg]/m2) x Service Area[m2])/(Frame
Area + (Service Area/2)[m2]) + (50 [kg]/m2)

(Frame Weight [lb])/(Frame Area + (Service Area/2) [ft2])) + ((15 [lb]/ft2) x (Service Area[ft2]/1)/Frame
Area + (Service Area/2)[ft2]) + (10[lb]/ft2)
v Frame area equal 1.20 m2 (12.9 ft2)
v Minimum service area equal 1.9 m2 (20.6 ft2)

Note: Limited to 1.52 m (60 in.) maximum from frame

v Maximum frame weight equal 1680 kg (3704 lb)

Floor loading formula notes

When the service clearance area is also used to distribute machine weight (weight distribution/service
clearance), 75 kg/m2 (15lb/ft2) is considered for personnel and equipment traffic. The distribution weight
is applied over 0.5 of the service clearance up to a maximum of 760 mm (30 in.) as measured from the
machine frame.

75 kg/[m2] x Service Area [m2]/1

15 lb/[ft2] x Service Area [ft2]/1

Chapter 4. Server specifications 259

The raised-floor weight plus the cable weight adds 50 kg/m2 (10 lb/ft2) uniformly across the total area
used in calculations. (The total area is defined as: machine area + 0.5 service clearance.)

Figure 153. Example of a minimum service clearance area

Unit emergency power off

The server has a unit emergency power off (EPO) switch on the front of the frame. When the switch is
reset, the utility power is confined to the system power compartment, and all volatile data is lost.

Refer to the following figure, which shows a simplified unit EPO panel.

260 Site and hardware planning

Figure 154. Unit emergency power off

It is possible to attach the computer room emergency power off (EPO) system to the unit EPO. When this
is done, resetting the computer room EPO disconnects all power from the power cords and the internal
battery backup unit, if it is provided. All volatile data will be lost in this case also.

If the room EPO is not connected to the unit EPO, resetting the computer room unit EPO removes
alternating current power from the system. If the interlock bypass feature is used, the system remains
powered for a short time based on system configuration.

Computer room emergency power off

You can incorporate the integrated battery backup into a computer room emergency power off (EPO)
system. Otherwise, volatile data can be lost.

When the integrated battery backup is installed and the computer room EPO is reset, the batteries engage
and the computer continues to run. It is possible to attach the computer room EPO circuit to the unit
EPO. When this is done, resetting the computer room EPO disconnects all power from the power cords
and from the internal battery backup unit. In this event, all volatile data will be lost.

To incorporate the integrated battery backup into the computer room EPO circuit, a cable must connect to
the back of the unit EPO panel.

This figure illustrates the back of the unit EPO panel with the computer room EPO cable plugging into
the system. Notice the switch actuator. After it is moved to make the cable connection possible, the
computer room EPO cable must be installed for the system to power on.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 261

Figure 155. Computer room emergency power off

In the following figure, AMP connector 770019-1 is needed to connect to the unit EPO panel. For
computer room EPO cables using wire sizes #20 - #24 AWG, use AMP pins (part number 770010-4). This
connection should not exceed 5 Ohms, which is approximately 61 m (200 ft) of #24 AWG.

Figure 156. AMP connector

Model 9406-250 server specifications

Server specifications provide detailed information for your server, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Use the following specifications to plan for your server.

Pictured is model 9406-250 server. The model 9406-250 allows the 7102 expansion unit to be attached to
one side.

262 Site and hardware planning

Table 227. Dimensions
Width with 7101 or
Measurements Width 7102 Depth Height
Metric 340 mm 550 mm 662 mm 610 mm
English 13.4 in. 21.7 in. 26.1 in. 24.0 in.

Table 228. Maximum configuration weight

Without 7101 or 7102 With 7101 or 7102
38.6 kg (85 lb) 70.5 kg (155 lb)

Table 229. Electrical

Electrical characteristics Without 7101 or 7102 With 7101 or 7102
kVA (maximum) 0.469 0.815
1
Rated voltage and frequency 100 - 127

200 - 240 V ac

at 50/60 plus or minus 0.5 Hz

Thermal output (maximum) 1536 Btu/hr 2669 Btu/hr
Power requirements (IP
450 782
measurement) maximum
1
The power supplies automatically accept any voltage with the published rated voltage range. If dual power
supplies are installed and operating, the power supplies draw approximately equal current from the utility (mains)
and provide approximately equal current to the load.

Table 230. Electrical

Electrical characteristics Properties
Power factor 0.95
Inrush current 45 A
Leakage current (maximum) 3.5 mA
Phase 1

Chapter 4. Server specifications 263

Table 231. Temperature requirements
Operating Nonoperating
10 - 37.8°C (50 - 100°F) 1 - 60°C (33.8 - 140°F)

Table 232. Environment requirements

Environment Operating Nonoperating
Noncondensing humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80%
Wet bulb temperature 23°C (73.4 - °F) 27°C (80.6 - °F)
Maximum altitude 3048 m (10 000 ft)

Table 233. Noise emissions Model 9406-250

Operating Idle
LWAd (Category 2E, General business) 5.7 bels 5.6 bels
LpAm (1-meter bystander) 40 dB 38 dB
For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.

Table 234. Noise emissions Model 9406-250 with 7101 or 71021

Operating Idle
LWAd (Category 2E, General business) 6.3 bels 6.2 bels
LpAm (1-meter bystander) 45 dB 44 dB
For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.

Table 235. Service clearances

Front Back Sides Top
762 mm 762 mm 762 mm 762 mm
30 in. 30 in. 30 in. 30 in.

Related information:
Acoustics

Model 9406-270 server specifications

Server specifications provide detailed information for your server, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Use the following specifications to plan for your server. The 7104 expansion unit requires a power cord.
Dimensions are shown for model 9406-270 only.

Pictured is model 9406-270. The 7104 expansion unit is available with model 9406-270.

264 Site and hardware planning

Table 236. Dimensions
9406-270 with 7104
Measurements 9406-270 width width 9406-270 depth 9406-270 height
Metric 366 mm 552 mm 728 mm 610 mm
English 14.5 in. 21.9 in. 28.7 in. 24.0 in.

Table 237. Maximum configuration weight

Model 9406-270 Model 9406-270 with 7104
52.7 kg (116 lb) 79.5 kg (175 lb)

Table 238. Electrical Model 9406-270

Power factor 0.95
Inrush current Maximum kVA (each has
41 A 0.421
its own power cord)
Leakage current Rated voltage and 100-127/200-240 V ac at
3.5 mA
(maximum) frequency3 50-60 plus or minus 0.5 Hz
Phase 1 Thermal output (maximum) 1365 Btu/hr

Table 239. Electrical 7104 expansion unit

Power factor 0.95
Inrush current Maximum kVA (each has
41 A 0.368
its own power cord)
Leakage current Rated voltage and 100-127/200-240 V ac at
3.5 mA
(maximum) frequency3 50-60 plus or minus 0.5 Hz
Phase 1 Thermal output (maximum) 1194 Btu/hr

Table 240. Temperature requirements

Operating Nonoperating
10 - 38°C (50 - 100.4°F) 1 - 60°C (33.8 - 140°F)

Chapter 4. Server specifications 265

Table 241. Environment requirements
Environment Operating Nonoperating
Noncondensing humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80%
Wet bulb temperature 23°C (73.4 - °F) 27°C (80.6 - °F)
Maximum altitude 3048 m (10 000 ft)

Table 242. Noise emissions1

Operating Idle
LWAd (Category 2E, General business)
5.9 bels 5.8 bels
9406-270 only
LWAd (Category 2E, General business)
6.3 bels 6.1 bels
9406-270 with 7104
LpAm (1-meter bystander) 9406-270
41 dB 40 dB
only
LpAm (1-meter bystander) 9406-270
45 dB 43 dB
with 7104

Table 243. Service clearances

2 2
Measurements Front Back Sides Top
Metric 762 mm 762 mm 762 mm 762 mm
English 30 in. 30 in. 30 in. 30 in.

Table 244. Notes

Notes:
1. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.
2. Side and top clearances are optional when operating.
3. The power supplies automatically accept any voltage with the published rated voltage range. If dual power
supplies are installed and operating, the power supplies draw approximately equal current from the utility
(mains) and provide approximately equal current to the load.

Related information:
Acoustics

Model 9406-520, 9111-520, 9405-520, 9111-285, 9131-52A, 9406-525, and

9407-515 server specifications
Server specifications provide detailed information for your server, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Use the following specifications to plan for your server.

Table 245. Dimensions - Rack-mounted drawer
Measurements Width Depth Height EIA units1 Weight
Metric 437 mm 584 mm 178 mm 43 kg
4
English 17.20 in. 23 in. 7 in. 95 lb

266 Site and hardware planning

Table 246. Dimensions - Stand-alone model
Measurements Width Depth Weight

630 mm (without rear cover

Metric 201 mm 43 kg
706 mm (with 6587 rear
cover)

23 in. (without rear cover)

English 7.9 in. 95 lb
27.8 in. (with 6587 rear cover)

Table 247. Shipping dimensions - Rack-mounted drawer

Measurements Width Depth Height Weight
Metric 630 mm 933 mm 584 mm 53 kg
English 24.80 in. 36.75 in. 23 in. 117 lb

Table 248. Shipping dimensions - Rack-mounted drawer (China)

Measurements Width Depth Height Weight
Metric 679 mm 978 mm 610 mm 53 kg
English 26.75 in. 38.50 in. 24 in. 117 lb

Table 249. Shipping dimensions - Stand-alone model

Measurements Width Depth Height Weight
Metric 584 mm 880 mm 813 mm 50 kg
English 23 in. 34.65 in. 32 in. 110 lb

Table 250. Shipping dimensions - Stand-alone model (China)

Measurements Width Depth Height Weight
Metric 616 mm 904 mm 832 mm 63 kg
English 24.25 in. 35.60 in. 32.75 in. 138 lb

Table 251. Electrical

Electrical characteristics Properties
kVA (maximum) 0.789
6
Rated voltage and frequency 100 - 127/200 - 240 V ac at 50/60 plus or minus 0.5 Hz
Thermal output (maximum) 2560 Btu/hr
Maximum power consumption 750 W
Power factor 0.95
Inrush current (maximum) 88 A
Leakage current (maximum) 1.2 mA
Phase 1
Dual power feature code 5159
Branch circuit breaker 20 A (maximum)

Chapter 4. Server specifications 267

Table 252. Environment requirements
Environment Temperature
Recommended operating 5 - 35°C (41 - 95°F)
temperature2
Nonoperating temperature 5 - 45°C (41 - 113°F)
Shipping temperature -40 - 60°C (-40 - 140°F)
Operating4 Nonoperating
Maximum dew point 28°C (82.4°F) 29°C (84.2°F)
Noncondensing humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80%
Maximum altitude 3048 m (10 000 ft) 3048 m (10 000 ft)

Table 253. Noise emissions3, 8, 9

Declared A-weighted sound power level, LWad (B) Declared A-weighted sound pressure level, LpAm (dB)
Product description
Operating Idle Operating Idle
9111-285 workstation 5.0 5.0 35 32
9131-52A, 9406-520,
9111-520, and 9405-520
stand-alone model with
5.7 5.6 40 39
two power supplies, eight
hard drives and acoustic
package
9131-52A, 9406-520,
9111-520, and 9405-520
stand-alone model with 6.1 5.9 44 41
two power supplies and
eight hard drives
9406-520 and 9111-520
6.0 5.8 43 42
rack-mounted server

Table 254. Service clearances

Clearances Front Back Left or right Top
Operating 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.)
762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30
Nonoperating 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.)
in.)

Electromagnetic compatibility compliance: This server meets the following electromagnetic compatibility
specifications: FCC (CFR 47, Part 15); VCCI; CISPR-22; 89/336/EEC; BSMI (A2/NZS 3548:1995); C-Tick;
ICES/NMB-003; Korean EMI/EMC (MIC Notice 2000–94, Notice 2000–72); People's Republic of China
Commodity Inspection Law

Safety compliance: This server is designed and certified to meet the following safety standards: UL
60950; CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950–00; EN 60950; IEC 60950 including all National Differences

268 Site and hardware planning

Table 255. Notes
Note:
1. See 0551, 0553, 7014, and 0555 rack configurations for typical configurations when the 0551, 0553, 7014, and 0555
rack is populated with various server models.
2. Class 3 product as defined in ASHRAE Thermal Guidelines for Data Processing Environments. The allowable
operating range is 5 - 35°C (41 - 95°F). See the Temperature and humidity design criteria topic.
3. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.
4. All Model 520 disk bays should be filled when the unit is shipped from IBM with either disk drives or slot
fillers, but if a disk is removed, refill the disk slot with either another disk drive or a disk slot filler. Filling the
disk drive slot will help ensure proper airflow for cooling and help maintain optimal EMI compliance. Ordering
feature 6598 results in four additional disk slot fillers being shipped.
5. The model 9405-520 is available as a stand-alone model only.
6. The power supplies automatically accept any voltage with the published rated voltage range. If dual power
supplies are installed and operating, the power supplies draw approximately equal current from the utility
(mains) and provide approximately equal current to the load.
7. The model 9111-2858, is only available as a stand-alone model.
8. When a tape drive is installed, using the acoustic cover feature will reduce the noise emissions when the tape
drive is in use.
9. All measurements made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.

Special Hardware Management Console considerations

When the 9406-520, 9111-520, 9405-520, 9111-285, 9131-52A, 9406-525, and 9407-515 servers are managed
by a Hardware Management Console (HMC), the console must be provided within the same room and
within 8 m (26 ft) of the server.

Note: As an alternative to the local HMC requirement, it is acceptable for you to provide a supported
device (such as, a PC), with connectivity and authority to operate through a remotely attached HMC.
This local device must be in the same room and within 8 m (26 ft) of your server, and provide functional
capability equivalent to the HMC that it replaces and that is needed by the service representative to
service the system.
Related reference:
Chapter 9, “Power distribution unit and power cord options for 7014, 0551, 0553, and 0555 rack,” on page
487
Power distribution units (PDUs) can be used with the 7014, 0551, 0553 and 0555 racks. The various
configurations and specifications are provided.
“0551 rack” on page 445
The 0551 rack specifications provide detailed information for your rack.
“Planning for the 7014-T00 and 7014-T42 racks” on page 464
Rack specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.
“Model 7014-T42, 7014-B42, and 0553 rack” on page 448
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical,
power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.
“Model 0555 and 7014-S25 rack” on page 461
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical,
power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.
“0551, 0553, 0555, and 7014 rack configurations” on page 451
The 0551 or 7014-T00 provide a 1.8 meter rack (36 EIA units of total space). The 7014-T42 or 0553
provides a 2.0 meter rack (42 EIA units of total space).
Related information:

Chapter 4. Server specifications 269

 Acoustics
Temperature and humidity design criteria

Plan view for model 9406-520 and 9111-520

Dimensional planning information is shown in this top down view of your server.

Note: A flat, supportive surface is optimal for placement of the 9111-520 and 9406-520 stand-alone model.
This allows the front cover to be properly supported.

The following figure shows dimensional planning information for the stand-alone model 9406-520 and
9111-520.

Figure 157. Model 9406-520 and 9111-520 plan view

270 Site and hardware planning

Figure 158. Model 520 plan view with feature code 6587

The feature code 6587 is a decorative rear cover that has sound-deadening capability. This cover is for
servers that do not have external I/O attached to a high speed link (HSL) loop. The cover cannot be used
if HSL cables are attached to the server.

ASHRAE declarations
Use the ASHRAE declarations table and figures to determine the measurement reporting requirements
defined in the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
Thermal Guidelines for Data Processing Environments.

The following table and figures show the measurement reporting requirements as defined in the
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Thermal
Guidelines for Data Processing Environments. These guidelines are available at ASHRAE Technical
Committee.
Table 256. ASHRAE declarations
Typical Heat Airflow maximum1 at 35°C
Airflow nominal1
Description Release2 (95°F)
watts cfm m3/hr cfm m3/hr
Configuration 1 420 26 44 40 68
Configuration 2 450 26 44 40 68
Configuration 3 500 30 51 45 76
Configuration 4 485 30 51 45 76
Configuration 5 550 30 51 45 76
Configuration 6 530 30 51 45 76
Configuration 7 560 30 51 45 76
See Model 9406-520, 9111-520, 9405-520, 9111-285, 9131-52A, 9406-525, and 9407-515 server specifications for Weight and
Overall system dimension.
ASHRAE Class 3

Chapter 4. Server specifications 271

Table 256. ASHRAE declarations (continued)
Typical Heat Airflow maximum1 at 35°C
Airflow nominal1
Description Release2 (95°F)
Configuration 1 1-core, 1.5 GHz processor, 16 GB memory, eight hard disk drives, six PCI cards, tape,
DVD
Configuration 2 1-core, 1.65 GHz processor, 16 GB memory, eight hard disk drives, four PCI cards,
tape, DVD
Configuration 3 2-core, 1.65 GHz processor, 32 GB memory, eight hard disk drives, five PCI cards, tape,
DVD
Configuration 4 1-core, 1.9 GHz processor, 16 GB memory, eight hard disk drives, three PCI cards,
tape, two DVDs
Configuration 5 2-core, 1.9 GHz processor, 32 GB memory, eight hard disk drives, five PCI cards, tape,
DVD
Configuration 6 2-core, 2.1 GHz, 8 GB memory, eight hard disk drives, two PCI cards, tape, DVD
Configuration 7 4-core, 1.65 GHz, 8 GB memory, eight hard disk drives, five PCI cards, tape, DVD
Notes:
1. Airflow for the typical and minimum configurations do not include redundant power supply, feature code 5158.
2. The product safety rating label contains the following information:
v 100-127/200-240 V ac
v 10/5 A | 1.0 kVa
v 50/60 Hz | 1-phase

Figure 159. Airflow figure for server mounted in a rack

272 Site and hardware planning

Figure 160. Airflow figure for a stand-alone server

Related information:
ASHRAE Technical Committee
ASHRAE guidelines are available in this website

Planning for model 9406-550, 9113-550, OpenPower 720 (9124-720), and

9133-55A server specifications
Server specifications provide detailed information for your server, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Use the following specifications to plan for your server.

Note: The following specifications are approximate and do not represent measured data. They are
provided for informational purposes only.
Table 257. Dimensions - Rack-mounted drawer
Measurements Width Depth Height EIA Units3 Weight
Metric 437 mm 731 mm 178 mm 44.7 kg
4
English 17.2 in. 28.8 in. 7.0 in. 98.5 lb

Table 258. Dimensions - stand-alone server

Measurements Width Depth Height Weight
Metric 201 mm 779 mm 533 mm 62 kg
English 7.9 in. 30.7 in. 21.0 in. 137 lb

Chapter 4. Server specifications 273

Table 259. Shipping dimensions - Rack-mounted drawer
Measurements Width Depth Height Weight
Metric 648 mm 991 mm 704 mm 80 kg
English 25.5 in. 39 in. 27.7 in. 175 lb

Table 260. Shipping dimensions - Rack-mounted drawer (China)

Measurements Width Depth Height Weight
Metric 640 mm 965 mm 692 mm 80 kg
English 25.2 in. 38 in. 27.25 in. 1.75 lb

Table 261. Shipping dimensions - stand-alone server4

Measurements Width Depth Height Weight
Metric 648 mm 991 mm 704 mm 80 kg
English 25.5 in. 39 in. 27.7 in. 175 lb

Table 262. Shipping dimensions - stand-alone server (China)4

Measurements Width Depth Height Weight
Metric 640 mm 965 mm 692 mm 80 kg
English 25.2 in. 38 in. 27.25 in. 175 lb
0230 (9113-550), 7886
Feature code for drawer mounted in rack (9406-550)
Power distribution Unit (PDU), 0551,7014-T00, 7014-T42 and 0553,
and 0555 racks

Table 263. Electrical

Electrical characteristics Properties
kVA (maximum) 1.158
Rated voltage, rated amps, and frequency6 9113-550, OpenPower 720, 9133-55A

One processor card installed

100 - 127 V ac (12 A) to 200-240 V ac (10 A) at 50 to 60 plus or

minus 0.5 Hz
9133-55A, 9113-550

9406-550OpenPower 720

Two processor cards installed

200 - 240 V ac (10 A) at 50 to 60 plus or minus 0.5 Hz

200 - 240 V ac (10 A) at 50 to 60 plus or minus 0.5 Hz

Thermal output (maximum) 3754 Btu/hr
Maximum power consumption 1100 W
Power factor 0.95
Inrush current (maximum) 85 A
Leakage current (maximum) 1.5 mA

274 Site and hardware planning

Table 263. Electrical (continued)
Electrical characteristics Properties
Phase 1
Dual power feature code Included
Branch circuit breaker 20 A (maximum)

Table 264. Environment requirements

Environment Temperature
Recommended operating 5 - 35 °C (41 - 95 °F)
temperature2
Nonoperating temperature 5 - 45 °C (41 - 113 °F)
Shipping temperature -40 - 60 °C (-40 - 140°F
Operating5 Nonoperating
Maximum dew point 28 °C (82.4 - °F) 29 °C (84.2 - °F)
Noncondensing humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80%
Maximum altitude 3048 m (10 000 ft) 3048 m (10 000 ft)

Table 265. Noise emissions1, 10

Declared A-weighted sound power level, LWad Declared A-weighted sound pressure level, LpAm
Product description (B) (dB)
Operating Idle Operating Idle
stand-alone models: 9406-550, 9113-550, OpenPower 720 with
6.0 5.9 42 41
two hard drives and non-redundant power
Rack-mounted models:9406-550, 9113-550, OpenPower 720 with
6.1 6.0 44 43
two hard drives and non-redundant power
Rack-mounted models:9406-550, 9113-550, OpenPower 720 with
6.3 6.2 45 45
eight hard drives and redundant power
Rack-mounted model: 9133-55A with eight hard drives and
6.89 6.69
redundant power

Table 266. Service clearances

Clearances Front Back Left/right Top
Operating 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.)
Nonoperating 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.)

Electromagnetic compatibility compliance: This server meets the following electromagnetic compatibility
specifications: FCC (CFR 47, Part 15); VCCI; CISPR-22; 89/336/EEC; BSMI (A2/NZS 3548:1995); C-Tick;
ICES/NMB-003; Korean EMI/EMC (MIC Notice 2000–94, Notice 2000–72); People's Republic of China
Commodity Inspection Law

Safety compliance: This server is designed and certified to meet the following safety standards: UL
60950; CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950–00; EN 60950; IEC 60950 including all National Differences

Chapter 4. Server specifications 275

Table 267. Notes
Notes:
1. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.
2. Class 3 product as defined in ASHRAE Thermal Guidelines for Data Processing Environments. The allowable
operating range is 5 - 35 °C (41 - 95 °F). See the Temperature and humidity design criteria topic for more
information.
3. See 0551, 0553, 0555, and 7014 rack configurations for typical configurations when the 0551, 0553, 0555 or 7014
rack is populated with various server models.
4. stand-alone server is shipped on its side
5. All Model 550 disk bays should be filled when the unit is shipped from IBM with either disk drives or slot
fillers, but if a disk is removed, refill the disk slot with either another disk drive or a disk slot filler. Filling the
disk drive slot will help ensure proper airflow for cooling and help maintain optimal EMI compliance.
Ordering feature 6598 results in four additional disk slot fillers being shipped.
6. The power supplies automatically accept any voltage with the published rated voltage range for a defined
processor configuration. If dual power supplies are installed and operating, the power supplies draw
approximately equal current from the utility (mains) and provide approximately equal current to the load.
7. Configured with two disk drives and non-redundant power system.
8. Configured with eight disk drives and redundant power system.
9. This is an estimated value.
10. All measurements made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.

Special Hardware Management Console considerations

When the 9406-550, 9113-550, OpenPower 720, 9133-55A servers are managed by a Hardware
Management Console (HMC), the console must be provided within the same room and within 8 m (26 ft)
of the server.

Note: As an alternative to the local HMC requirement, it is acceptable for you to provide a supported
device, such as a PC, with connectivity and authority to operate through a remotely attached HMC. This
local device must be in the same room and within 8 m (26 ft) of your server, and provide functional
capability equivalent to the HMC that it replaces and that is needed by the service representative to
service the system.
Related reference:
Chapter 9, “Power distribution unit and power cord options for 7014, 0551, 0553, and 0555 rack,” on page
487
Power distribution units (PDUs) can be used with the 7014, 0551, 0553 and 0555 racks. The various
configurations and specifications are provided.
“0551 rack” on page 445
The 0551 rack specifications provide detailed information for your rack.
“Planning for the 7014-T00 and 7014-T42 racks” on page 464
Rack specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.
“Model 7014-T42, 7014-B42, and 0553 rack” on page 448
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical,
power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.
“Model 0555 and 7014-S25 rack” on page 461
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical,
power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.
“0551, 0553, 0555, and 7014 rack configurations” on page 451
The 0551 or 7014-T00 provide a 1.8 meter rack (36 EIA units of total space). The 7014-T42 or 0553
provides a 2.0 meter rack (42 EIA units of total space).
Related information:

276 Site and hardware planning

 Acoustics
Temperature and humidity design criteria

Plan view for model 9406-550, 9113-550, and OpenPower 720

Dimensional planning information is shown in this top down view of your server.

Note: A flat, supportive surface is optimal for placement of the 9113-550 and 9406-550 stand-alone model.
This allows the front cover to be properly supported.

The following figure shows dimensional planning information for the stand-alone model 9406-550 and
9113-550.

Figure 161. Model 9406-550, 9113-550, plan view

ASHRAE declarations
Use the ASHRAE declarations table and figures to determine the measurement reporting requirements
defined in the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
Thermal Guidelines for Data Processing Environments.

The following table and figures show the measurement reporting requirements as defined in the
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Thermal
Guidelines for Data Processing Environments. These guidelines are available at ASHRAE Technical
Committee.
Table 268. ASHRAE declarations
Typical Heat Airflow maximum1 at 35°C
Airflow nominal1
Release2 (95°F)
Description watts cfm m3/hr cfm m3/hr
Configuration 1 500 28 48 45 76
Configuration 2 575 32 60 50 85

Chapter 4. Server specifications 277

Table 268. ASHRAE declarations (continued)
Typical Heat Airflow maximum1 at 35°C
Airflow nominal1
Release2 (95°F)
Configuration 3 800 32 60 50 85
Configuration 4 650 32 60 50 85
Configuration 5 865 32 60 50 85
Configuration 6 925 32 60 50 85
Configuration 7 699 32 60 50 85
Configuration 8 935 32 60 50 85
See Planning for model 9406-550, 9113-550, OpenPower 720 (9124-720), and 9133-55A server specifications for Weight and
Overall system dimension.
ASHRAE Class 3
Configuration 1 1-core, 1.65 GHz processor, 32 GB memory, eight hard disk drives, five PCI cards,
tape, DVD
Configuration 2 2-core, 1.65 GHz processor, 32 GB memory, eight hard disk drives, four PCI cards,
tape, DVD
Configuration 3 4-core, 1.65 GHz processor, 48 GB memory, eight hard disk drives, four PCI cards,
tape, DVD
Configuration 4 2-core, 1.9 GHz processor, 32 GB memory, eight hard disk drives, five PCI cards, tape,
DVD
Configuration 5 4-core, 1.9 GHz processor, 48 GB memory, eight hard disk drives, five PCI cards, tape,
DVD
Configuration 6 8-core, 1.5 GHz processor, 48 GB memory, eight hard disk drives, five PCI cards, tape,
2 DVDs
Configuration 7 4-core, 2.1 GHz processor, 12 GB memory, eight hard disk drives, four PCI cards, tape,
DVD
Configuration 8 8-core, 1.65 GHz processor, 16 GB memory, eight hard disk drives, five PCI cards,
tape, DVD
Notes:
1. Airflow for the typical and minimum configurations.
2. The product safety rating label contains the following information:
v 100-127/200-240 V ac
v 10/10 A | 1.0/2.0 kVa
v 50/60 Hz | 1-phase

278 Site and hardware planning

Figure 162. Airflow figure for server mounted in a rack

Figure 163. Airflow figure for stand-alone server

Related information:
ASHRAE Technical Committee
ASHRAE guidelines are available in this website

Chapter 4. Server specifications 279

Model 9406-570, 9117-570, and 9116-561 server specifications
Server specifications provide detailed information for your server, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Use the following specifications to plan for your server.

Pictured is model 9406-570, and 9117-570 server.

Figure 164. Model 9406-570, and 9117-570 server

See Top down view

See ASHRAE declarations

Table 269. Dimensions
Measurements Width Depth Height EIA units1 Weight
Metric 483 mm 790 mm 174.1 mm 63.6 kg
4
English 19 in. 31.1 in. 6.85 in. 140 lb

Table 270. Shipping dimensions - Rack-mounted drawer

Measurements Width Depth Height Weight
Metric 648 mm 991 mm 704 mm 80 kg
English 25.5 in. 39 in. 27.7 in. 175 lb

Table 271. Shipping dimensions - Rack-mounted drawer (China)

Measurements Width Depth Height Weight
Metric 640 mm 965 mm 692 mm 80 kg
English 25.2 in. 38 in. 27.25 in. 175 lb

Table 272. Electrical

Electrical characteristics Properties
kVA (maximum) 1.368
Rated voltage and frequency6 200 - 240 V ac at 50/60 plus or minus 0.5 Hz
9
Thermal output (maximum) 4437 Btu/hr
4, 7
Maximum power consumption 1300 W
Power factor 0.95

280 Site and hardware planning

Table 272. Electrical (continued)
Electrical characteristics Properties
Inrush current (maximum) 88 A
Leakage current (maximum) 3 mA
Phase 1
Dual power feature code Included
Branch circuit breaker 20 A maximum
The 9117-570 and 9116-561 are multi-drawer systems. The values represented in the table are for one drawer. To
obtain the total for all drawers, multiply the table values by following numbers: FC 0232 and 0261 by 2. FC 0241 by
3. FC 0242 by 4. FC 0231 and 0260 are single drawer systems.

Table 273. Environment requirements

Environment Temperature
Recommended operating 20 - 25 C (68 - 77 °F)
temperature
Nonoperating temperature10 5 - 40 °C (41 - 104 °F)
Shipping temperature -40 - 60 °C (-40 - 140 °F)
Operating Nonoperating
Wet bulb temperature 23 °C (73.4 - °F) 27 °C (80.6 - °F)
Noncondensing humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80% (5 - 100% shipping)
Maximum altitude 3048 m (10 000 ft) 3048 m (10 000 ft)

Table 274. Noise emissions2, 8

Product description Declared A-weighted sound power level,LWad (B) Declared A-weighted sound pressure level,LpAm (dB)
Operating Idle Operating Idle
9406-570, 9117-570, and
9116-561, 1.65 and 1.9 GHz,
4-core configuration with 6.8 6.8 533 533
four hard drives and two
power supplies
9406-570, 9117-570, and
9116-561, 1.65 and 1.9 GHz,
4-core configuration with
four hard drives and two 6.23 6.23 463 463
power supplies and
acoustic doors (feature
code 6248 or 6249)
9406-570, 9117-570, and
9116-561, 1.65 and 1.9 GHz,
16-core configuration with 7.4 7.3 59 59
four hard drives and two
power supplies
9406-570, 9117-570, and
9116-561, 1.65 and 1.9 GHz,
4-core configuration with
four hard drives and two 6.83 6.73 533 533
power supplies and
acoustic doors (feature
code 6248 or 6249)

Table 275. Service clearances

Clearances Front Back Left or right Top
Operating 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.)
Nonoperating 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.)

Chapter 4. Server specifications 281

Electromagnetic compatibility compliance: FCC Part 15, ICES-003

Safety compliance: IEC 60950; UL 60950; CSA 60950

Table 276. Notes
Note:
1. See 0551, 0553, 0555, or 7014 rack configurations for typical configurations when the 0551, 0553, 0555 or 7014 rack
is populated with various server models.
2. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.
3. This is an estimated value.
4. Maximum power consumption is specified for each 9117-570 4-core drawer. The 8-core, 12-core, and 16-core
configurations are based on the use of multiple 4-core drawers (for example, an 8-core configuration consists of
two 4-core drawers, a 12-core configuration consists of three 4-core drawers, and a 16-core configuration
consists of four 4-core drawers).
5. All Model 570 disk bays should be filled when the unit is shipped from IBM with either disk drives or slot
fillers, but if a disk is removed, refill the disk slot with either another disk drive or a disk slot filler. Filling the
disk drive slot will help ensure proper airflow for cooling and help maintain optimal EMI compliance.
Ordering feature 6598 results in four additional disk slot fillers being shipped.
6. The power supplies automatically accept any voltage with the published, rated-voltage range. If dual power
supplies are installed and operating, the power supplies draw approximately equal current from the utility
(mains) and provide approximately equal current to the load.
7. Maximum power consumption is specified for each 9116-561 8-core drawer. The 8-core and 16-core
configurations are based on the use of multiple 8-core drawers (for example, a 16-core configuration consists of
two 8-core drawers).
8. All measurements made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.
9. Thermal output value is for each 4-core drawer configuration.
10. The allowable operating temperature is the same as nonoperating temperature.

Special Hardware Management Console considerations

When the server is managed by a Hardware Management Console (HMC), the console must be provided
within the same room and within 8 m (26 ft) of the server.

Note: As an alternative to the local HMC requirement, it is acceptable for you to provide a supported
device, such as a PC, with connectivity and authority to operate through a remotely attached HMC. This
local device must be in the same room and within 8 m (26 ft) of your server, and provide functional
capability equivalent to the HMC that it replaces and that is needed by the service representative to
service the system.

Delivery and subsequent transportation of the equipment

DANGER
Heavy equipment—personal injury or equipment damage might result if mishandled. (D006)

You must prepare your environment to accept the new product based on the installation planning
information provided, with assistance from an IBM Installation Planning Representative (IPR) or IBM
authorized service provider. In anticipation of the equipment delivery, prepare the final installation site in
advance so that professional movers or riggers can transport the equipment to the final installation site
within the computer room. If for some reason, this is not possible at the time of delivery, you must make
arrangements to have professional movers or riggers return to finish the transportation at a later date.
Only professional movers or riggers should transport the equipment. The IBM authorized service

282 Site and hardware planning

provider can only perform minimal frame repositioning within the computer room, as needed, to perform
required service actions. You are also responsible for using professional movers or riggers when you
relocate or dispose of equipment.
Related reference:
“0551 rack” on page 445
The 0551 rack specifications provide detailed information for your rack.
“Planning for the 7014-T00 and 7014-T42 racks” on page 464
Rack specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.
“Model 7014-T42, 7014-B42, and 0553 rack” on page 448
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical,
power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.
“Model 0555 and 7014-S25 rack” on page 461
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical,
power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.
Chapter 9, “Power distribution unit and power cord options for 7014, 0551, 0553, and 0555 rack,” on page
487
Power distribution units (PDUs) can be used with the 7014, 0551, 0553 and 0555 racks. The various
configurations and specifications are provided.
“0551, 0553, 0555, and 7014 rack configurations” on page 451
The 0551 or 7014-T00 provide a 1.8 meter rack (36 EIA units of total space). The 7014-T42 or 0553
provides a 2.0 meter rack (42 EIA units of total space).
Related information:
Acoustics

Plan view for model 9406-570, 9117-570, and 9116-561

Dimensional planning information is shown in this top down view of your server.

The following figure shows dimensional planning information for model 9406-570, 9117-570, and
9116-561.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 283

Figure 165. Model 9406-570, 9117-570, and 9116-561 plan view (rack-mount)

ASHRAE declarations
Use the ASHRAE declarations table and figures to determine the measurement reporting requirements
defined in the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
Thermal Guidelines for Data Processing Environments.

The following table and figures show the measurement-reporting requirements as defined in the
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Thermal
Guidelines for Data Processing Environments. These guidelines are available at ASHRAE Technical
Committee.
Table 277. ASHRAE declarations
Airflow
Typical Heat
Airflow nominal1 maximum1 at
Release2
Description 35°C (95°F)
watts cfm m3/hr cfm m3/hr
Configuration 1 750 90 153 140 238
Configuration 2 950 90 153 140 238
Configuration 3 910 90 153 140 238
Configuration 4 1000 90 153 140 238
Configuration 5 925 90 153 140 238
See Model 9406-570, 9117-570, and 9116-561 server specifications for Weight and Overall system dimension.
ASHRAE Class 3
Configuration 1 4-core, 1.65 GHz processor, 48 GB memory, six hard disk drives, six PCI cards, DVD

284 Site and hardware planning

Table 277. ASHRAE declarations (continued)
Airflow
Typical Heat
Airflow nominal1 maximum1 at
Release2
Description 35°C (95°F)
Configuration 2 4-core, 1.9 GHz processor, 12 GB memory, six hard disk drives, five PCI cards, two
DVDs
Configuration 3 8-core, 1.5 GHz processor, 4 GB memory, six hard disk drives, two PCI cards, DVD
Configuration 4 4-core, 2.2 GHz processor, 32 GB memory, six hard disk drives, four PCI cards, DVD
Configuration 5 8-core, 1.8 GHz processor, 16 GB memory, six hard disk drives, four PCI cards, two
DVDs
Notes:
1. Airflow for the typical and minimum configurations.
2. The product safety rating label contains the following information:
v 200-240 V ac
v 10 A | 2.0 kVa
v 50/60 Hz | 1-phase

Figure 166. Airflow figure for server mounted in a rack

Related information:
ASHRAE Technical Committee
ASHRAE guidelines are available in this website

Chapter 4. Server specifications 285

Model 9406-800 and 9406-810 server specifications
Server specifications provide detailed information for your server, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Use the following specifications to plan for your server.

The 7116 expansion unit is available with model 9406-800 or 9406-810.

The 7116 expansion unit requires a power cord.

Dimensions are shown for model 9406-800 or 9406-810 only.

Table 278. Dimensions
9406-800 and
9406-800 and 9406-800 and 9406-800 and Height in 0551
Measurements 9406-810 with
9406-810 Width 9406-810 Depth 9406-810 Height rack2, 4
7116 Width
Metric 366 mm 552 mm 610 mm 610 mm 16 EIA
English 14.5 in. 21.9 in. 24 in. 24 in. 16 U

Table 279. Maximum configuration weight

Model 9406-800 and 9406-810 Model 9406-800 and 9406-810 with 7116
52.7 kg (116 lb) 79.6 kg (175 lb)

Table 280. Electrical

Power factor Model 9406-800 and
0.95 7116 expansion unit
9406-810
Inrush current Maximum kVA (each
41 A has its own power 0.421 0.368
cord)

286 Site and hardware planning

Table 280. Electrical (continued)
Leakage current Rated voltage and 100-127/200-240 V ac 100-127/200-240 V ac
(maximum) 3.5 mA frequency5 at 50-60 plus or at 50-60 plus or
minus 0.5 Hz minus 0.5 Hz
Phase Thermal output
1 1365 Btu/hr 1194 Btu/hr
(maximum)
Power requirements
400 350
maximum (watts)

Table 281. Temperature requirements

Operating Nonoperating
10 - 38°C (50 - 100.4°F) 1 - 60°C (33.8 - 140°F)

Table 282. Environment requirements

Environment Operating Nonoperating
Noncondensing humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80%
Wet bulb temperature 23°C (73.4 - °F) 27°C (80.6°F)
Maximum altitude 3048 m (10000 ft)

Table 283. Noise emissions1

Property Operating Idle
LWAd (Category 2E, General business)
5.9 bels 5.8 bels
9406-800 or 9406-810 only
LWAd (Category 2E, General business)
6.3 bels 6.1 bels
9406-800 or 9406-810 with 7116
LpAm (1-meter bystander) 9406-800 or
41 dB 40 dB
9406-810 only
LpAm (1-meter bystander) 9406-800 or
45 dB 43 dB
9406-810 with 7116

Table 284. Service clearances

Front Back Sides3 Top3
762 mm 1219 mm 762 mm 762 mm
30 in. 48 in. 30 in. 30 in.

Table 285. Notes

Notes:
1. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.
2. Feature code 0133 is manufacturing installed in a rack. Feature code 0137 is field installed in a rack.
3. Side and top clearances are optional when operating.
4. See 0551 rack configurations for typical configurations when the 0551 rack is populated with various server
models.
5. The power supplies automatically accept any voltage with the published rated voltage range. If dual power
supplies are installed and operating, the power supplies draw approximately equal current from the utility
(mains) and provide approximately equal current to the load.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 287

Delivery and subsequent transportation of the equipment

DANGER
Heavy equipment—personal injury or equipment damage might result if mishandled. (D006)

You must prepare your environment to accept the new product based on the installation planning
information provided, with assistance from an IBM Installation Planning Representative (IPR) or IBM
authorized service provider. In anticipation of the equipment delivery, prepare the final installation site in
advance so that professional movers or riggers can transport the equipment to the final installation site
within the computer room. If for some reason, this is not possible at the time of delivery, you must make
arrangements to have professional movers or riggers return to finish the transportation at a later date.
Only professional movers or riggers should transport the equipment. The IBM authorized service
provider can only perform minimal frame repositioning within the computer room, as needed, to perform
required service actions. You are also responsible for using professional movers or riggers when you
relocate or dispose of equipment.
Related reference:
“0551, 0553, 0555, and 7014 rack configurations” on page 451
The 0551 or 7014-T00 provide a 1.8 meter rack (36 EIA units of total space). The 7014-T42 or 0553
provides a 2.0 meter rack (42 EIA units of total space).
Related information:
Acoustics

288 Site and hardware planning

Model 9406-820 server specifications
Server specifications provide detailed information for your server, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Use the following specifications to plan for your server.

The 5074, 5079, 507, or 5078 expansion unit is available with model 9406-820.
Table 286. Dimensions
Measurements Width Depth Height
Metric 483 mm 728 mm 610 mm
English 19.0 in. 28.7 in. 24.0 in.

The maximum configuration weight is: 96 kg (210 lb)

Table 287. Electrical
Electrical characteristics Properties
kVA (maximum) 0.862
Rated voltage and frequency 100-127/200-240 V ac at 50-60 plus or minus 0.5 Hz
Thermal output (maximum) 2867 Btu/hr
Power requirements (maximum) 840 W
Power factor 0.95
Inrush current 90 A
Leakage current (maximum) 3.5 mA

Chapter 4. Server specifications 289

Table 287. Electrical (continued)
Electrical characteristics Properties
Phase 1

Table 288. Temperature requirements

Operating Nonoperating
10 - 38°C (50 - 100.4°F) 1 - 60°C (33.8 - 140°F)

Table 289. Environment requirements

Environment Operating Nonoperating
Noncondensing humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80%
Wet bulb temperature 22.8°C (73°F) 27°C (80.6°F)
Maximum altitude 3048m (10 000 ft)

Table 290. Noise emissions1

Property Operating Idle
LWAd Category 2E, General Business 6.1 bel 5.9 bel
LpAm (1-meter bystander) 43 dB 40 dB

Table 291. Service clearances

Front Back Sides2 Top2
762 mm 762 mm 762 mm 762 mm
30 in. 30 in. 30 in. 30 in.

Table 292. Notes

Notes:
1. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.
2. Side and top clearances are optional during operation.

Related reference:
“HSL, SPCN, RIO, and InfiniBand cable planning” on page 678
Use these tables to select your HSL, SPCN, RIO and InfiniBand cables.
Related information:
Acoustics

Model 9406-825 server specifications

Server specifications provide detailed information for your server, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Use the following specifications to plan for your server.

Note: Redundant power and power cords are standard on model 9406-825. The server uses dual
alternating current power cords. For maximum availability, each of the power cords should be fed from
independent power grids.

290 Site and hardware planning

The 5094 and 5095 expansion units are available with model 9406-825.
Table 293. Dimensions
Maximum
Height in 0551
Dimensions Width Depth Height configuration
rack2, 4
weight
Metric 445 mm 830 mm 610 mm 110 kg 16 EIA
English 17.5 in. 32.7 in. 24 in. 242 lb 16 U

Table 294. Electrical

Electrical characteristics Property
kVA 1.540
Thermal output (Btu/hr) 4993
Power requirements (watts) 1463
Rated voltage and frequency 3-core, 4-core, 5-core, and
200 - 240 V ac at 50-60 plus or minus 0.5 Hz
6-core5
Power factor 0.95
Inrush current 125 A
Leakage current (maximum) 3.5 mA
Phase 1

Table 295. Temperature requirements

Operating Nonoperating
10 - 38°C (50 - 100.4°F) 1 - 60°C (33.8 - 140°F)

Table 296. Environment requirements

Environment Operating Nonoperating
Noncondensing humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80%

Chapter 4. Server specifications 291

Table 296. Environment requirements (continued)
Environment Operating Nonoperating
Wet bulb temperature 23°C (73.4°F) 27°C (80.6°F)
Maximum altitude 3048 m (10 000 ft)

Table 297. Noise emissions1

Property Operating Idle
LWAd (Category 2D, General business) 6.8 bels 6.8 bels
LpAm (1-meter bystander) 50 dB 49 dB

Table 298. Service clearances

Front Back Sides3 Top3
762 mm 762 mm 762 mm 762 mm
30 in. 30 in. 30 in. 30 in.

Table 299. Notes

Notes:
1. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.
2. Feature codes 0134 and 0138 are both field install in rack.
3. Side and top clearances are optional when operating.
4. See 0551 rack configurations for typical configurations when the 0551 rack is populated with various server
models.
5. The power supplies automatically accept any voltage with the published rated voltage range. If dual power
supplies are installed and operating, the power supplies draw approximately equal current from the utility
(mains) and provide approximately equal current to the load.

Delivery and subsequent transportation of the equipment

DANGER
Heavy equipment—personal injury or equipment damage might result if mishandled. (D006)

You must prepare your environment to accept the new product based on the installation planning
information provided, with assistance from an IBM Installation Planning Representative (IPR) or IBM
authorized service provider. In anticipation of the equipment delivery, prepare the final installation site in
advance so that professional movers or riggers can transport the equipment to the final installation site
within the computer room. If for some reason, this is not possible at the time of delivery, you must make
arrangements to have professional movers or riggers return to finish the transportation at a later date.
Only professional movers or riggers should transport the equipment. The IBM authorized service
provider can only perform minimal frame repositioning within the computer room, as needed, to perform
required service actions. You are also responsible for using professional movers or riggers when you
relocate or dispose of equipment.
Related reference:
“0551, 0553, 0555, and 7014 rack configurations” on page 451
The 0551 or 7014-T00 provide a 1.8 meter rack (36 EIA units of total space). The 7014-T42 or 0553
provides a 2.0 meter rack (42 EIA units of total space).
Related information:
Acoustics

292 Site and hardware planning

Model 9406-830 and SB2 server specifications
Server specifications provide detailed information for your server, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Use the following specifications to plan for your server.

The 5074, 5078, or 5079 PCI expansion unit is available with model 9406-830 or model SB2.
Table 300. Dimensions
Maximum
Measurements
Width Depth Height configuration weight
Metric 483 mm 1080 mm 1270 mm 400 kg
English 19.0 in. 42.5 in. 50.0 in. 881.5 lb

Table 301. Electrical

Electrical characteristics Property
kVA (maximum) 1.684
3
Rated voltage and frequency 200-240 V ac at 50-60 plus or minus 0.5 Hz
Thermal output (maximum) 5461 Btu/hr

Chapter 4. Server specifications 293

Table 301. Electrical (continued)
Electrical characteristics Property
Power requirements (maximum) 1600 W
Power factor 0.95
Inrush current 80 A
Leakage current (maximum) 3.5 mA
Phase 1

Table 302. Temperature requirements

Operating Nonoperating
10 - 38°C (50 - 100.4°F) 1 - 60°C (33.8 - 140°F)

Table 303. Environment requirements

Property Operating Nonoperating
Noncondensing humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80%
Wet bulb temperature 22.8°C (73°F) 27°C (80.6°F)
Maximum altitude 3048 m (10 000 ft)

Table 304. Noise emissions

Property Operating Idle
LWAd (Category 2D, General busness) 6.7 bels 6.7 bels
LpAm (1-meter bystander) 50 dB 49 dB
For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.

Table 305. Service clearances

Front Back Sides1 Top1
762 mm 762 mm 762 mm 762 mm
30 in. 30 in. 30 in. 30 in.
1
Side and top clearances are optional when operating.

Table 306. Notes

Note: The power supplies automatically accept any voltage with the published rated voltage range. If dual power
supplies are installed and operating, the power supplies draw approximately equal current from the utility (mains)
and provide approximately equal current to the load.

Related reference:
“HSL, SPCN, RIO, and InfiniBand cable planning” on page 678
Use these tables to select your HSL, SPCN, RIO and InfiniBand cables.
Related information:
Acoustics

294 Site and hardware planning

Model 9406-840 and SB3 server specifications
Server specifications provide detailed information for your server, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Use the following specifications to plan for your server.

The 5074 expansion unit, 5078 expansion unit, 8079 optional 1.8 m model 9406-840 I/O rack or 5079 1.8
m expansion unit are available with model 9406-840 or model SB3 servers.
Table 307. Dimensions
Maximum
Measurements
configuration weight Width Depth Height
Metric 397 kg 565 mm 1320 mm 1577 mm
English 875 lb 22.3 in. 52.0 in. 62.0 in.

Table 308. Electrical

Electrical Properties
kVA (maximum) 2.526

Chapter 4. Server specifications 295

Table 308. Electrical (continued)
Electrical Properties
3
Rated voltage and frequency 200-240 V ac at 50-60 plus or minus 0.5 Hz
Thermal output (maximum) 8191 Btu/hr
Power requirements (maximum) 2400 W
Power factor 0.95
Inrush current 100 A
Leakage current (maximum) 3.5 mA
Phase 1

Table 309. Temperature requirements

Operating Nonoperating
10 - 38°C (50 - 100.4°F) 1 - 60°C (33.8 - 140°F)

Table 310. Environment requirements

Operating Nonoperating
Noncondensing humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80%
Wet bulb temperature 22.8°C (73°F) 27°C (80.6°F)
Maximum altitude 3048 m (10000 ft)

Table 311. Noise emissions1

Operating Idle
LWAd (Category 2D, General business) 7.0 bels 6.9 bels
LpAm (1-meter bystander) 51 dB 51 dB

Table 312. Service clearances

Front Back Sides2 Top2
762 mm 762 mm 762 mm 762 mm
30 in. 30 in. 30 in. 30 in.

Table 313. Notes

Notes:
1. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.
2. Side and top clearances are optional when operating
3. The power supplies automatically accept any voltage with the published rated voltage range. If dual power
supplies are installed and operating, the power supplies draw approximately equal current from the utility
(mains) and provide approximately equal current to the load.

Related reference:
“HSL, SPCN, RIO, and InfiniBand cable planning” on page 678
Use these tables to select your HSL, SPCN, RIO and InfiniBand cables.
Related information:
Acoustics

296 Site and hardware planning

Model 9406-870 and 9406-890 server specifications
Server specifications provide detailed information for your server, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.

This product meets the technical requirements of IEC 61000-3-3.

Models 9406-870 and 9406-890 have some additional information that is important during planning.

Pictured is model 9406-870 or 9406-890 server with the 9094 expansion unit
Table 314. Dimensions
Measurements Width Depth Height
Metric (mm) 785 1494 2025
English (in.) 30.91 58.83 79.72
Depth without covers 1173.5 mm (46.2 in)
Standard shipping crate 940 mm (37 in.) 1422 mm (56 in.) 2337 mm (92 in.)
Reduced height shipping
940 mm (37 in. 1422 mm (56 in.) 2032 mm (80 in.)
crate

Chapter 4. Server specifications 297

Table 314. Dimensions (continued)
Measurements Width Depth Height
Height reduction feature
0126 System frame is
included in two pieces to 1.65 m (65 in)
be fully assembled at
customer location.

Table 315. Maximum configuration weight

800 kg (1758 lb)

Table 316. Electrical and thermal

Electrical characteristics Properties
kVA (maximum) 8-core (9406-870) 16-core (9406-870) 6.315
24-core (9406-890) 32-core (9406-890)
6.315

8.201

10.099
3, 4
Rated voltage at 50-60 plus or minus 0.5 Hz (3-phase) 200-240 V ac

380-415 V ac

480 V ac
Rated current (amperes per phase) 200-240 V ac 380-415 45 A
V ac 480 V ac
25 A

20 A
Thermal output (maximum) 8-core (9406-870) 16-core 20.478 kBtu/hr
(9406-870) 24-core (9406-890) 32-core (9406-890)
20.478 kBtu/hr

26.591 kBtu/hr

32.744 kBtu/hr
Power requirements maximum 8-core (9406-870) 16-core 6000 W
(9406-870) 24-core (9406-890) 32-core (9406-890)
6000 W

7791 W

9594 W
Power factor 0.95
Frequency (Hertz) 50 to 60
3
Inrush current 163 A
Leakage current 42 mA
Phase 3

Table 317. Temperature requirements

Temperature properties Temperature
Operating 10 - 32°C (50 - 89.6°F)

298 Site and hardware planning

Table 317. Temperature requirements (continued)
Temperature properties Temperature
Nonoperating 10 - 43°C (50 - 109.4°F)
Storage 1 - 60°C (33.8 - 140 °F)
Shipping -40 - 60°C (-40 - 140 °F)

Table 318. Environment requirements

Properties Operating Non operating Storage Shipping
Noncondensing
8 - 80% 8 - 100% 5 - 80% 5 - 100%
humidity
Wet bulb temperature 23°C (73.4°F) 27°C (80.6°F) 29°C (84.2°F) 29°C (84.2°F)
Maximum altitude 2134 m (7000 ft)

Table 319. Noise emissions1

Operating Idle
LWAd 7.2 bels 7.2 bels
LpAm (1-meter bystander) 54 dB 54 dB

Table 320. Service clearances

1
Front Back Sides Top1
1143 mm 914 mm 762 mm 762 mm
45 in. 36 in. 30 in. 30 in.

Table 321. Notes

Notes:
1. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.
2. Inrush currents occur only at initial application of power (very short duration for charging capacitors). No
inrush currents occur during the normal power on or off cycle.
3. The system will function normally with a nominal input voltage in the range of 200-480 V ac, three-phase.
4. The power supplies automatically accept any voltage with the published rated voltage range. If dual power
supplies are installed and operating, the power supplies draw approximately equal current from the utility
(mains) and provide approximately equal current to the load.
1
Side and top clearances are optional when operating if the building floor loading specifications are met.

Related information:
Acoustics

iSeries 9406-870 and 9406-890 power and height considerations

Special power and height considerations apply to the these servers.

Doors and covers

Covers are an integral part of the server and are required for product safety and EM compliance.

The enhanced acoustical cover consists of a special rear door which is approximately 200 mm (8 in.) in
depth and contains acoustical treatment that lowers the noise level of the machine by approximately 6 dB

Chapter 4. Server specifications 299

compared to a nonacoustical rear door. With this door, the server meets the acoustical Specifications for
Category 1A for Data Processing Areas, with a declared A-weighted sound power level, LWAd of 7.4 bels (B)
for the most common system configuration.

Moving, weight, and height considerations for the 9406-870 and 9406-890
Learn about the unique weight and height considerations for your server.

The customer should determine the path that the system must take to be moved from the delivery
location to the installation site. The customer should verify that the height of all doorways, elevators, and
so on are sufficient to allow movement of the system to the installation site. The customer should also
determine that the weight limitation of elevators, ramps and so on are sufficient to allow movement of
the system to the installation site, including considerations for the additional height resulting from the
use of protective materials on the floors (such as, 3/8 in. plywood to protect floors during movement of
heavy systems. If it is determined that the height or weight of the system can cause a problem in
movement to the installation site, contact your local site planning or sales representative. See the Model
9406-870 and 9406-890 server specifications for weight and height details.

If height is a concern, order feature code 0126, model 9406-870 and 9406-890 EIA reduction option. This
feature indicates that the system frame is to be shipped in two pieces to be fully assembled at the
customer's location. The top section of the system frame (including the power subsystem) is removed.
The height of the system frame with the upper section removed is approximately 1.65 meters (65 inches).
Related reference:
“Model 9406-870 and 9406-890 server specifications” on page 297
Server specifications provide detailed information for your server, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Power and electrical requirements

Use the power cord options table to determine the circuit breaker rating, power cord specifications,
receptacles, and geographic requirements for your server.

Redundant power and power cords are standard on the Servers 9406-870 and 9406-890. The server uses
dual alternating current power cords. For maximum availability, each of the power cords should be fed
from independent power grids.

The following table illustrates the power cord options for the Servers 9406-870 and 9406-890 with their
geographic, breaker rating, and cord information.
Table 322. Power cord options
3-Phase supply voltage
200 - 240 V ac 380 - 415 V ac 480 V ac
(50/60 Hz)
United States, Canada, Europe, Middle East,
Geography United States, Canada
Japan Africa, Asia Pacific
Customer circuit breaker
rating (See note 1) (See 60 A 30 A 30 A
Note 1)
6 and 14 foot, 6 AWG 14 foot, 6 or 8 AWG power 6 and 14 foot, 10 AWG
Cord information
power cord cord, (electrician installed) power cord
IEC 60309, 60 A, type Not specified, electrician IEC 60309, 30 A, type
Recommended receptacle
460R9W (not provided) installed 430R7W (not provided)

Note: The exact circuit breaker ratings might not be available in all countries. Where the specified circuit
breaker ratings are not acceptable, use the nearest available rating. Use of a time delayed circuit breaker
is recommended.

300 Site and hardware planning

Phase imbalance and bulk power regulator configuration
Use the Phase imbalance as a function of BPR configuration table to determine the phase imbalance of
your server's configuration.

Depending on the number of Bulk Power Regulators (BPRs) in your system, phase imbalance can occur
in line currents. All systems are provided with 2 bulk power assemblies (BPAs), with separate power
cords. The following table illustrates phase imbalance as a function of BPR configuration.
Table 323. Phase imbalance as a function of BPR configuration
Number of BPRs per BPA Phase A line current Phase B line current Phase C line current
1 Power / V line Power / V line 0
2 0.5 power / V line 0.866 power / V line 0.5 power / V line

V line is line-to-line nominal input voltage.

Balancing power panel loads

Use these methods to ensure that power panel loads are balanced.

The servers 9406-870 and 9406-890 require three-phase power. Depending on the system configuration,
the phase currents can be single phase, line-to-line, or unbalanced. System configurations with two bulk
power regulators (BPRs) per bulk power assembly (BPA) have unbalanced power panel loads. With two
BPRs per BPA, two of the three-phases draw an equal amount of current, and are, nominally, 57.8% of the
current on the third phase. With one BPR per BPA, two of the three-phases carry an equal amount of
current, with no current drawn on the third phase. The following figure is an example of feeding several
loads of this type from two power panels in a way that balances the load among the three-phases.

The method illustrated in the preceding figure requires that the connection from the three poles of each
breaker to the three-phase pins of a connector be varied. Some electricians might prefer to maintain a
consistent wiring sequence from the breakers to the connectors. The following figure shows a way to
balance the load without changing the wiring on the output of any breakers. The three-pole breakers are
alternated with single-pole breakers. This way the three-pole breakers do not all begin on Phase A.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 301

The following figure shows another way of distributing the unbalanced load evenly. In this case, the
three-pole breakers are alternated with two-pole breakers.

Power cord configuration

Learn how to route power cords through floor tile cutouts.

The power cords exit the system from different points of the servers 9406-870 and 9406-890 frame as
indicated in the following figure.

302 Site and hardware planning

Figure 167. Single frame system power cord configuration

Checking the facility outlets and power source

Use these guidelines to ensure that appropriate power is available for your servers.

Attention: Do not touch the receptacle or the receptacle faceplate with anything other than your test
probes before you have met the following requirements.

Performing the following will ensure that appropriate power will be used by the iSeries® 9406-870 and
9406-890 system frames. The following checklist is for reference purposes and will likely be performed by
a service engineer prior to installation.
1. The iSeries 9406-870 and 9406-890 system frames are equipped to use 200-240 V, 380-415 V, and 480
V alternating current, three-phase. Check that the correct power source is available.
2. Before system installation, locate and turn off the branch circuit breaker. Attach the "Do not operate"
tag, S229-0237.
3. All measurements are made with the receptacle faceplate in the normally installed position. If the
receptacle case or faceplate is painted, be sure the probe tip penetrates the paint and makes good
electrical contact with the metal. Do not use a digital multimeter to measure grounding resistance.
Some receptacles are enclosed in metal housings. On receptacles of this type, perform the following
steps:
a. Check for less than 1 volt from the receptacle case to any grounded metal structure in the
building, such as a raised floor metal structure, water pipe, building steel, or similar structure.
b. Check for less than 1 volt from receptacle ground pin to a grounded point in the building.
4. Check the resistance from the ground pin of the receptacle to the receptacle case. Check resistance
from the ground pin to building ground. The reading should be less than 1.0 ohm, which indicates
the presence of a continuous grounding conductor.
5. If any of the checks made in steps 2 and 3 are not correct, remove the power from the branch circuit
and make the wiring corrections; then check the receptacle again.
6. Check for infinite resistance between the phase pins. This is a check for a wiring short.

Chapter 4. Server specifications 303

 Attention: If the reading is other than infinity, do not proceed. You must make the necessary wiring
corrections to satisfy the criteria before continuing. Do not turn on the branch circuit, circuit breaker
until all the above steps are satisfactorily completed.
7. Remove the "Do not operate" tag, S229-0237.
8. Turn on the branch-circuit circuit breaker. Measure for appropriate voltages between phases. If no
voltage is present on the receptacle case or grounded pin, the receptacle is safe to touch.
9. With an appropriate meter, verify that the voltage at the outlet is correct.
10. Verify that the grounding impedance is correct by using the ECOS 1020, 1023, B7106, or an
appropriately approved ground impedance tester.
11. Turn off the branch-circuit circuit breaker.
12. Attach the "Do not operate" tag, S229-0237.
13. You are now ready to install and connect the power cables to the iSeries 9406-870 and 9406-890
system frames.

Dual power installation

Three dual power installation configurations are available for your server.

The iSeries 9406-890 system frame is designed with a fully redundant power system. Each system has
two power cords attached to two power input ports which, in turn, power a fully redundant power
distribution system within the system. To take full advantage of the redundancy and reliability that is
built into the computer system, the system must be powered from two distribution panels. There are
three possible power installation configurations.

Dual power installation - redundant distribution panel and switch: This configuration requires that the
system receives power from two separate power distribution panels. Each distribution panel receives
power from a separate piece of building switch gear. This level of redundancy is not available in most
facilities.

304 Site and hardware planning

Dual power installation - redundant distribution panel: This configuration requires that the system
receives power from two separate power distribution panels. The two distribution panels receive power
from the same piece of building switch gear. Most facilities should be able to achieve this level of
redundancy.

Single distribution panel - dual circuit breakers: This configuration requires that the system receives
power from two separate circuit breakers in a single power panel. This does not make full use of the
redundancy provided by the processor. It is, however, acceptable if a second power distribution panel is
not available.

Additional installation considerations

In the United States, installation must be made in accordance with Article 645 of the National Electric
Code (NEC). In Canada, installation must be made in accordance with Article 12-020 of the Canadian
Electrical Code (CEC).

Chapter 4. Server specifications 305

306 Site and hardware planning
Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications
Expansion unit and migration tower specifications provide detailed information for your hardware,
including dimensions, electrical, power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Select a model to view its specifications.

5074 expansion unit or 9079 expansion unit with 5078 expansion unit
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your expansion unit, including dimensions,
electrical, power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Pictured is the 5074 expansion unit or 9079 expansion unit with 5078 expansion unit.

Table 324. Dimensions

Width Depth Height Maximum
Dimensions
configuration weigh
Metric 485 mm 1075 mm 1110 mm 418 kg
English 19.1 in. 42.3 in. 43.8 in. 922 lb

Table 325. Electrical

Electrical characteristics Properties
kVA (maximum) 1.470
Rated voltage frequency 200 - 240 V ac at 50-60 plus or minus 0.5 Hz
Thermal Output (maximum) 4573 Btu/hr

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2007, 2009 307

Table 325. Electrical (continued)
Electrical characteristics Properties
Power requirements (maximum) 1340 W
Power factor 0.91
Inrush current 90 A
Leakage current (maximum) 3.5 mA
Phase 1

Table 326. Temperature requirements

Operating Nonoperating
10 - 38°C (50 - 100.4°F) 1 - 60°C (33.8 - 140°F)

Table 327. Environment requirements

Properties Operating Nonoperating
Noncondensing humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80%
Wet bulb temperature 23°C (73.4°F) 27°C (80.6°F)

Table 328. Maximum altitude

3048 m (10 000 ft)

Table 329. Noise emissions 5074

Properties Operating Idle
LWAd 6.7 bels 6.6 bels
LpAm (1-meter bystander) 48 dB 48 dB
For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.

Table 330. Noise emissions 5074 with 5078 expansion unit

Properties Operating Idle
LWAd 6.9 bels 6.8 bels
LpAm (1-meter bystander) 52 dB 51 dB

Table 331. Service clearances

Front Back Sides1 Top1
762 mm 762 mm 762 mm 762 mm
30 in. 30 in. 30 in. 30 in.
1
Side and top clearances are optional during operation.

Related information:
Acoustics

308 Site and hardware planning

5075 PCI expansion entry tower
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your expansion unit, including dimensions,
electrical, power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Dimensions are shown for the 5075 PCI expansion unit only.

Table 332. Dimensions

Maximum
Dimensions Width Depth Height
configuration weight
Metric 52.7 kg 330 mm 690 mm 560 mm
English 116 lb 12.9 in. 27.1 in. 22.0 in.

Table 333. Electrical

Electrical characteristics Properties
kVA (maximum) 0.316
Rated voltage and frequency 100 - 127 V ac

200-240 V ac at 50-60 plus or minus 0.5 Hz

Thermal output (maximum) 1024 Btu/hr
Power requirements (maximum) 300 W
Power factor 0.95
Inrush current 74 A
Leakage current (maximum) 3.5 mA
Phase 1

Table 334. Temperature requirements

Operating Nonoperating
10 - 38°C (50 - 100.4 °F) 1 - 60 °C (33.8 - 140 °F)

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 309

Table 335. Environment requirements
Properties Operating Nonoperating
Noncondensing Humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80%
Wet bulb temperature 23 °C (73.4 °F) 27 °C (80.6 °F)
Maximum altitude 3048 m (10 000 ft)

Table 336. Noise emissions

Properties Operating Idle
LWAd 6.0 bels 5.7 bels
LpAm (1-meter bystander) 42 dB 39 dB
For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.

Table 337. Service clearances

Front Back Sides1 Top1
762 mm 762 mm 762 mm 762 mm
30 in. 30 in. 30 in. 30 in.
1
Side and top clearances are optional when operating.

Related information:
Acoustics

5078 or 0578 expansion unit for 5074 expansion unit, 9079 base, or
0551 IBM i rack
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your expansion unit, or rack, including
dimensions, electrical, power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Pictured is the 5078 or 0578 expansion unit.

The 5078 or 0578 expansion unit is attached to the top of a 5074, 9079. Or it can be mounted in an 0551
IBM i rack.

310 Site and hardware planning

Table 338. Dimensions
Maximum
configuration Height in 0551
Dimensions weight Width Depth Height rack
Metric 68 kg 485 mm 1075 mm 200 mm 8 EIA
English 150 lb 19.1 in. 42.3 in. 8.0 in. 8U
Feature code 0578 is PCI expansion unit in a rack.

Table 339. Electrical

Electrical Characteristics Properties
kVA (maximum) 0.370
Rated voltage and frequency 200-240 V ac at 50-60 plus or minus 0.5 Hz
Thermal output (maximum) 1195 Btu/hr
Power requirements (maximum) 350 W
Power factor 0.95
Inrush current 48 A
Leakage current (maximum) 3.5 mA
Phase 1

Table 340. Temperature requirements

Operating Non operating
10 - 38°C (50 - 100.4 °F) 1 - 60°C (33.8 - 140°F)

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 311

Table 341. Environment requirements
Properties Operating Nonoperating
Noncondensing humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80%
Wet bulb temperature 23°C (73.4°F) 27°C (80.6°F)

Table 342. Maximum altitude

3048 m (10 000 ft)

Table 343. Noise emissions

Properties Operating Idle
LWAd - 5078 with 5074 or 9079 5.7 bels 5.7 bels
LpAm (1-meter bystander) - 5078 with
40 dB 40 dB
5074 or 9079
For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.

Table 344. Service clearances

Front Back Sides1 Top1
762 mm 762 mm 762 mm 762 mm
30 in. 30 in. 30 in. 30 in.
1
Side and top clearances are optional during operation.

Related information:
Acoustics

0588 and 5088 expansion unit for 5094 expansion unit, 9094 I/O
expansion unit, 5074 expansion unit, 9079 I/O expansion unit, or 0551
System i rack
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your expansion unit or rack, including
dimensions, electrical, power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Pictured is the 0588 or 5088 PCI-X expansion unit.

The 5088 PCI-X expansion unit is attached to the top of a 5094, 9094, 5074.

0588 is mounted in an 0551 system i rack.

312 Site and hardware planning

Table 345. Dimensions
Maximum
configuration Height in 0551
Dimensions weight Width Depth Height rack2, 4
Metric 68 kg 485 mm 1075 mm 200 mm 8 EIA
English 150 lb 19.1 in. 42.3 in. 8.0 in. 8U

Table 346. Electrical

Electrical characteristics Properties
kVA (maximum) 0.370
Rated voltage and frequency 200-240 V ac at 50-60 plus or minus 0.5 Hz
Thermal output (maximum) 1195 Btu/hr
Power requirements (maximum) 350 W
Power factor 0.95
Inrush current 48 A
Leakage current (maximum) 3.5 mA
Phase 1

Table 347. Temperature requirements

Operating Nonoperating
10 - 38°C (50 - 100.4°F) 1 - 60°C (33.8 - 140°F)

Table 348. Environment requirements

Properties Operating Nonoperating
Noncondensing humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80%

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 313

Table 348. Environment requirements (continued)
Properties Operating Nonoperating
Wet bulb temperature 23°C (73.4°F) 27°C (80.6°F)

Table 349. Maximum altitude

3048 m (10 000 ft)

Table 350. Noise emissions1

Properties Operating Idle
LWAd - 5088 with 5094, 9094, or 5074
5.7 bels 5.7 bels
expansion units
LpAm (1-meter bystander) - 5088 with
40 dB 40 dB
5094, 9094, or 5074 expansion units

Table 351. Service clearances

Front Back Sides3 Top3
762 mm 762 mm 762 mm 762 mm
30 in. 30 in. 30 in. 30 in.

Table 352. Notes

Notes:
1. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.
2. Feature code 0588 is a PCI-X expansion unit in a rack.
3. Side and top clearances are optional during operation.
4. See 0551 rack configurations for typical configurations when the 0551 rack is populated with various server
models.

Related reference:
“0551, 0553, 0555, and 7014 rack configurations” on page 451
The 0551 or 7014-T00 provide a 1.8 meter rack (36 EIA units of total space). The 7014-T42 or 0553
provides a 2.0 meter rack (42 EIA units of total space).
Related information:
Acoustics

314 Site and hardware planning

5094 expansion unit, 9094 I/O expansion unit with 5088 PCI-X
expansion unit, or 9194 expansion unit
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your expansion unit, including dimensions,
electrical, power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Pictured is the 5094 expansion unit or 9094 expansion unit with 5088 PCI-X expansion unit.

Table 353. Dimensions

Maximum
Dimensions configuration weight Width Depth Height
Metric 418 kg 485 mm 1075 mm 1110 mm
English 922 lb 19.1 in. 42.3 in. 43.8 in.

Table 354. Electrical

Electrical characteristics Properties
kVA (maximum) 1.470
Rated voltage and frequency 200 - 240 V ac at 50-60 plus or minus 0.5 Hz
Thermal output (maximum) 4573 Btu/hr
Power requirements (maximum) 1340 W
Power factor 0.91
Inrush current 90 A
Leakage current (maximum) 3.5 mA
Phase 1

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 315

Table 355. Temperature requirements
Operating Nonoperating
10 - 38°C (50 - 100.4°F) 1 - 60°C (33.8 - 140°F)

Table 356. Environmental requirements

Properties Operating Nonoperating
Noncondensing humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80%
Wet bulb temperature 23°C (73.4°F) 27°C (80.6°F)

Table 357. Maximum altitude

3048 m (10 000 ft)

Table 358. Noise emissions1

Properties Operating Idle
LWAd 6.7 bels 6.6 bels
LpAm (1-meter bystander) 48 dB 48 dB

Table 359. Service clearances

Front Back Sides2 Top2
762 mm 762 mm 762 mm 762 mm
30 in. 30 in. 30 in. 30 in.

Table 360. Note

Notes:
1. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.
2. Side and top clearances are optional during operation.

Related information:
Acoustics

0595 or 5095 PCI-X expansion unit

Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your expansion unit, including dimensions,
electrical, power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Pictured is the PCI-X expansion unit.

Table 361. Dimensions for 5095 expansion unit
Depth (with 30 mm (1.2
in.) front cover and 100
Dimensions Width mm (3.9 in.) rear cover) Height
Metric 217 mm 818 mm 555 mm
English 8.5 in. 32.2 in. 21.9 in.

316 Site and hardware planning

Table 362. Dimensions for 0595 expansion unit
Dimensions Width Depth Height Height in 0551 rack2, 4

Metric 430 mm 658 mm 217 mm 5 EIA

English 16.9 in. 25.9 in. 8.5 in. 5U

Table 363. Electrical

Electrical characteristics Properties
Maximum configuration weight 52.7 kg (116 lb)
kVA (maximum) 0.358
Rated voltage and frequency 100 - 127 or 200 - 240 V ac at 50 - 60 plus or minus 0.5
Hz
Thermal output (maximum) 1161 Btu/hr
Power requirements (maximum) 340 W
Power factor 0.95
Inrush current 60 A
Leakage current (maximum) 3.5 mA
Redundant power and cooling 1

Table 364. Temperature requirements

Operating Nonoperating
10 - 38°C (50 - 100.4 °F) 1 - 60 C (33.8 - 140 °F)

Table 365. Environment requirements

Properties Operating Nonoperating
Noncondensing humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80%
Wet bulb temperature 23°C (73.4°F) 27°C (80.6°F)

Table 366. Maximum altitude

3048 m (10 000 ft)

Table 367. Noise emissions1

Properties Operating Idle
LWAd 6.2 bels 6.1 bels
LpAm (1-meter bystander) 44 dB 43 dB

Table 368. Service clearances

Front Back Sides3 Top3
762 mm 762 mm 762 mm 762 mm
30 in. 30 in. 30 in. 30 in.

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 317

Table 369. Notes
Notes:
1. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.
2. Feature code 0595 is a PCI-X expansion unit in a rack.
3. Side and top clearances are optional when operating.
4. See 0551 rack configurations for typical configurations when the 0551 rack is populated with various server
models.

Related reference:
“0551, 0553, 0555, and 7014 rack configurations” on page 451
The 0551 or 7014-T00 provide a 1.8 meter rack (36 EIA units of total space). The 7014-T42 or 0553
provides a 2.0 meter rack (42 EIA units of total space).
Related information:
Acoustics

5096 expansion unit

Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your expansion unit, including dimensions,
electrical, power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.
Table 370. Dimensions
Maximum
configuration Height in 0551
Dimensions weight Width Depth Height rack
Metric 280 kg 485 mm 1075 mm 910 mm 18 EIA
English 617 lb 19.1 in. 42.3 in. 35.8 in. 18 U

Table 371. Electrical

Electrical characteristics Properties
4
kVA 0.389 - 1.100
Rated voltage and frequency 200 - 240 V ac at 50 - 60 plus or minus 0.5 Hz
4
Thermal Output 1075 - 3379 Btu/hr
4
Power requirements (maximum) 315 - 990 W
Power factor 0.95
Inrush current 42 A
Leakage current (maximum) 3.5 mA
Phase 1

Table 372. Temperature requirements

Operating Nonoperating
10 - 38°C (50 to 100.4 °F) 1 - 60°C (33.8 - 140 °F)

Table 373. Environment requirements

Properties Operating Nonoperating
Noncondensing Humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80%
Wet bulb temperature 23 °C (73.4 °F) 27 °C (80.6 °F)

318 Site and hardware planning

Table 374. Maximum altitude
3048 m (10 000 ft)

Table 375. Noise emissions1

Properties Operating Idle
LWAd 6.7 bels 6.6 bels
LpAm (1-meter bystander) 49 dB 49 dB

Table 376. Service clearances

Front Back Sides3 Top3
762 mm 762 mm 762 mm 762 mm
30 in. 30 in. 30 in. 30 in.

Table 377. Notes

Notes:
1. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.
2. It is strongly recommended that you get the dual power cord feature (feature 5116) for this I/O expansion unit.
Feature 5116 uses two power cords and has two AC boxes.
3. Side and top clearances are optional when operating.
4. Each tower can have 45 disk drives installed. Each disk drive that is installed adds 15 W, 0.0158 kVa to the
power. The range of power represents configurations from no disk drives to 45 disk drives.

Related information:
Acoustics

5294 or 8294 1.8 m I/O rack

Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical,
power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Pictured is the 5294 or 8294 1.8 m I/O rack.

There are two 5094 expansions (with side covers and casters removed) in a 5294 1.8 m I/O rack.

Dimensions are shown for the 5294 1.8 m I/O rack only.

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 319

Table 378. Dimensions
Maximum
Dimensions configuration weight Width Depth Height
Metric 726 kg 1800 mm 650 mm 1020 mm
English 1600 lb 71.0 in. 25.5 in. 40.1 in.

Table 379. Electrical(1, 2)

Electrical characteristics 5094(1) 5094 (2)
4
kVA 1.100 1.100
Rated voltage and frequency 200-240 V ac at 50-60 plus or minus 200-240 V ac at 50-60 plus or minus
0.5 Hz 0.5 Hz
Thermal Output4 3379 Btu/hr 3379 Btu/hr
4
Power requirements (maximum) 990 W 990 W
Power factor 0.91 0.91
Inrush current 50 A 50 A
Leakage current (maximum) 3.5 mA 3.5 mA
Phase 1 1

Table 380. Temperature requirements

Operating Nonoperating
10 - 38°C (50 - 100.4°F) 1 - 60°C (33.8 - 140°F)

Table 381. Environment requirements

Properties Operating Non-Operating
Noncondensing Humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80%
Wet bulb temperature 23°C (73.4°F) 27°C (80.6°F)

320 Site and hardware planning

Table 382. Maximum altitude
3048 m (10 000 ft)

Table 383. Noise emissions1

Properties Operating Idle
LWAd Category 2E, General business 7.0 bels 6.9 bels
<LpA>m 52 dB 52 dB

Table 384. Service clearances

Dimensions Front Back Sides Top
Metric 762 mm 762 mm 762 mm 762 mm
English 30 in. 30 in. 30 in. 30 in.

Table 385. Notes

Notes:
1. Because the 5294 1.8 m I/O rack consists of two 5094 PCI-X expansion units, electrical requirements for each
5094 need to be planned for individually. Hence, the (1) and (2) represent the specs for each 5094. The 5094
requires the appropriate receptacle for the power cord included with each 5094
2. The usable length of the power cord for the top/upper 5094 is reduced by 4 ft (1.2 m) because of the routing
inside the 1.8 m enclosure. Therefore, a 14 ft (4.3 m) cord results in a usable length of 10 ft (3 m), and a 9 ft (2.7
m) cord results in a usable length of 5 ft (1.5 m).

For information about floor loading, contact your IBM service or Installation Planning representative.
Because the thickness of the covers are negligible, the height, width, and depth of the overall dimensions
might be used in floor loading calculations.

5296 1.8 m I/O rack

Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical,
power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.
Table 386. Dimensions
Maximum
Dimensions configuration weight Width Depth Height
Metric 726 kg 650 mm 1020 mm 1800 mm
English 1600 lb 25.5 in. 40.1 in. 71.0 in.

Table 387. Electrical

Electrical characteristics 50961 50962
kVA3 0.389 - 1.100 0.389 - 1.100
Rated voltage and frequency 200 - 240 V ac at 50 - 60 plus or 200 - 240 V ac at 50 - 60 plus or
minus 0.5 Hz minus 0.5 Hz
Thermal output (maximum)3 1075 - 3379 Btu/hr 1075 - 3379 Btu/hr
Power requirements (maximum)3 315 - 990 W 315 - 990 W
Power factor 0.95 0.95
Inrush current 50 A 50 A
Leakage current (maximum) 3.5 mA 3.5 mA

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 321

Table 387. Electrical (continued)
Electrical characteristics 50961 50962
Phase 1 1

Table 388. Temperature requirements

Operating Nonoperating
10 - 38°C (50 - 100.4°F) 1 - 60°C (33.8 - 140°F)

Table 389. Environment requirements

Properties Operating Non-Operating
Noncondensing Humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80%
Wet bulb temperature 23°C (73.4°F) 27°C (80.6°F)

Table 390. Maximum altitude

3048 m (10 000 ft)

Table 391. Noise emissions1

Properties Operating Idle
LWAd Category 2E, General business 7.0 bels 6.9 bels
LpAm (1-meter bystander) 52 dB 52 dB

Table 392. Service clearances

Dimensions Front Back Sides Top
Metric 762 mm 762 mm 762 mm 762 mm
English 30 in. 30 in. 30 in. 30 in.

Table 393. Notes

Notes:
1. Because the 5296 1.8 m I/O rack consists of two 5096 expansion units, electrical requirements for each 5096 need
to be planned for individually. Hence, the (1) and (2) represent the specifications for each 5096. The 5096 requires
the appropriate receptacle for the power cord included with each 5096
2. The usable length of the power cord for the top/upper 5096 is reduced by 4 ft (1.2 m) because of the routing
inside the 1.8 m enclosure. Therefore, a 14 ft (4.3 m) cord results in a usable length of 10 ft (3 m), and a 9 ft (2.7
m) cord results in a usable length of 5 ft (1.5 m).
3. Each 5096 can have 45 disk drives installed. Each disk drive that is installed adds 15 W, 0.0158 kVa to the power.
The range of power represents configurations from no disk drives to 45 disk drives.

For information about floor loading, contact your IBM service or Installation Planning representative.
Because the thickness of the covers are negligible, the height, width, and depth of the overall dimensions
might be used in floor loading calculations.

322 Site and hardware planning

5786, 5787, 7031-D24, and 7031-T24 expansion units
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your expansion unit, including dimensions,
electrical, power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.
Table 394. Dimensions for rack-mounted expansion unit
Maximum
Dimensions configuration weight Width Depth Height
Metric 54 kg 447 mm 660 mm 171 mm
English 120 lb 17.5 in. 26 in. 6.75 in.

Table 395. Dimensions for stand-alone expansion unit with stabilizer foot and decorative covers
Maximum
Dimensions configuration weight Width Depth Height
Metric 66 kg 305 mm 655 mm 508 mm
English 145 lb 12.0 in. 26.0 in. 20.0 in.

Table 396. Electrical

Electrical characteristics Properties
kVA 0.740
Rated voltage and frequency
100 - 127 V ac at 50-60 plus or minus 3 Hz and 12 A

200 - 240 V ac at 50-60 plus or minus 3 Hz and 6.2 A

Machine rating with two redundant power cords

Thermal output (maximum) 2382 Btu/hr
4
Power requirements (maximum) 700 W
Power factor 0.95
Inrush current 55 A per power cord
Leakage current (maximum) 3.10 mA
Phase 1

Table 397. Temperature requirements

Operating Nonoperating
3
10 - 38°C (50 - 100.4°F) -40 - 60°C (-40 - 140°F)

Table 398. Environment requirements

Properties Operating Non-Operating
Noncondensing Humidity 20 - 80% (allowable) 8 - 80% (including condensing)

40 - 55% (recommended)
Wet bulb temperature 21°C (69.8°F) 27°C (80.6°F)

Table 399. Maximum altitude

2134 m (7000 ft) above sea level

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 323

Table 400. Noise emissions1,4
Models Properties Operating Idle
Single 5786 or 7031-D24 LWAd
drawer in standard 19-inch 6.6 bels 6.5 bels
rack with 24 hard drives,
nominal environmental LpAm (1-meter bystander)
conditions, and no front or 49 dB 49 dB
rear doors on rack.
5787 or 7031-T24 tower LWAd 6.6 bels 6.5 bels
with 24 hard drives, and
nominal environmental LpAm (1-meter bystander)
conditions. 47 dB 47 dB

Table 401. Service clearances for rack-mounted expansion unit

Dimensions Front Back Sides2 Top2
Metric 914 mm 914 mm 914 mm
English 36 in. 36 in. 36 in.

Table 402. Service clearances for stand-alone expansion unit

Front Back Sides Top
368.3 mm 381 mm
14.5 in. 15 in.

Table 403. Notes

Notes:
1. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.
2. Side and top clearances are optional during operation.
3. The maximum 38°C (100.4 °F) temperature must be derated 1°C (1.8 °F) per 137 m (450 ft) above 1295 m (4250
ft). Maximum altitude is 2134 m (7000 ft).
4. All measurements made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.

Safety compliance: This hardware is designed and certified to meet the following safety standards: UL
60950; CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950–00; EN 60950; IEC 60950 including all National Differences
Related information:
Acoustics

5790 PCI expansion drawer

Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your expansion unit, including dimensions,
electrical, power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.
Table 404. Dimensions for 5790
Measurements Height Width Depth EIA
Metric 170 mm 220 mm 711 mm 3.8
English 6.6 in. 8.7 in. 28.0 in.

324 Site and hardware planning

Table 405. Dimensions for two 5790s with 7311 enclosure
Measurements Height Width Depth EIA
Metric 178 mm 445 mm 711 mm 4
English 7.0 in. 17.5 in. 28.0 in.

Table 406. Weight

Measurements 5790 Two 5790 with 7311 enclosure
Metric 16.8 kg 39.1 kg
English 37 lb 86 lb

Table 407. Electrical

Electrical characteristics Properties
Power source loading per 5790 0.21 kVa
Voltage range 200 - 240 V ac, v dc not supported
Frequency 50 or 60 Hz
Thermal output per 5790 683 Btu/hr
Power requirements for 5790 200 W
Power factor 0.91
Inrush current 64 A

Table 408. Temperature requirements

Measurements Operating Nonoperating Storage
Metric 10 - 38°C 1 - 60°C 1 - 60°C
English 50 - 100.4°F 33.8 - 140°F 33.8 - 140°F

Table 409. Environment requirements

Environment requirements Operating Nonoperating Storage
Noncondensing humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80% 8 - 80%
Wet bulb temperature 23°C (73.4°F) 27°C (80.6°F) 29°C (84.2°F)

Table 410. Altitude

Maximum altitude 3048 m (10 000 ft)
1
Noise emissions Operating Idle
LWAd, two 5790 5.9 bels 5.9 bels
<LpA>m, two 5790 43 dB 43 dB
Install/Air Flow Maintenance of service clearance will allow proper airflow.
1
For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.

Table 411. Service clearances

Front Back
762 mm 762 mm
30 in. 30 in.

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 325

Related information:
Acoustics

5877 expansion unit

Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your expansion unit, including dimensions,
electrical, power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.
Table 412. Dimensions for rack-mounted expansion unit
Maximum configuration
weight Width Depth Height
48 kg (105 lb) 444.5 mm (17.5 in.) 711.2 mm (28 in.) 4U

Table 413. Electrical

Electrical characteristics Properties
kVA (maximum) 0.531 kVA
Rated voltage and frequency 100 - 127 V ac or 200 - 240 V ac at 50 - 60 Hz
Thermal output (maximum) 1760 BTU/hr
Power requirements (maximum) 515 W
Power factor 0.97
Leakage current (maximum) 3.5 mA
Phase Single
Plug type (Canada and U.S.) 26
Power cord length 14 ft

Table 414. Temperature requirements

Operating Storage Shipping
10 - 38°C (32 - 100.4°F) 1 - 60°C (33.8 - 140°F) -40 - 60°C (-40 - 140°F)

Table 415. Environment requirements

Properties Operating Nonoperating Storage Shipping
Noncondensing Recommended: 34 - 5 - 80% 5 - 80% 5 - 100%
humidity 54%

Allowable: 20 - 80%

Table 416. Maximum altitude

3048 m (10 000 ft)

Table 417. Noise emissions

Models Properties
IBM Feature Code 5802 - 4U I/O drawer consists of 18 LWAd (B)
SSF disk drives, 10 PCI Express 8x slots, and 2 DCAs
LpAm (dB)

326 Site and hardware planning

Table 417. Noise emissions (continued)
Models Properties
Notes:
1. LWAd is the upper-limit A-weighted sound power level (rounded to the nearest 0.1 bel).
2. LpAm is the mean A-weighted emission sound pressure level measured at the 1 meter bystander positions
(rounded to the nearest dB).
3. 10 dB (decibel) equals 1 B (bel).
4. All measurements are made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.

Table 418. Service clearances

Front Back Sides
915 mm (36 in. ) 915 mm (36 in. ) 914 mm (36 in. )

Planning for 5792 base rack

Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical,
power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.

The 5792 base rack is an optional second base frame with its own separate connection to AC power that
is designed for use with model 590, and 595. A complete set of planning information is provided to
address the resulting system.

The 5792 consists of multiple components, as summarized in the following table.

Table 419. 5792 base rack components
Minimum per Maximum per
Model Description system system
FC6251 Slimline door set for primary rack (front and 1 2
rear) See Doors and covers.
FC6252 Acoustic door set for primary rack (front and 1 2
rear) See Doors and covers.
FC8691 Optional expansion frame (16-core and 32-core 0 1
only)
Various Hardware Management Console (HMC)3 01 21
7040-61D (9119-590 and Optional I/O drawer (20 PCI cards max., 16 0 122
9119-595), 5791 and 5794 disk drives max.)
(9406-595)
FC6200 or FC6201 Optional integrated battery backup feature 0 6
Note:
1. A Hardware Management Console (HMC) can connect to multiple systems (therefore, a Hardware Management
Console might not need to be ordered), or up to two HMCs can connect to the system for redundancy.
2. A maximum of 12 I/O drawers can be connected to a single 590 or 595 frame. Typically, I/O drawers are
populated in the server frame first, which reduces the maximum number of drawers available in the 5792 frame.
3. For the 5792 base rack, a Hardware Management Console must be provided within the same room and within 8
m (26 ft) of the server. Or, as an alternative to the local HMC requirement, it is acceptable for you to provide a
supported device, such as a PC, with connectivity and authority to operate through a remotely attached HMC.
This local device must be in the same room and within 8 m (26 ft) of your server, and provide functional
capability equivalent to the HMC that it replaces and that is needed by the service representative to service the
server.

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 327

Table 420. Dimensions and weight
Physical
Characteristic Slimline doors Acoustical doors
1 Frame 2 Frames 1 Frame 2 Frames
Height 2025 mm (79.7 in.) 2025 mm (79.7 in.) 2025 mm (79.7 in.) 2025 mm (79.7 in.)
Width 785 mm (30.9 in.) 1575 mm (62.0 in.) 785 mm (30.9 in.) 1575 mm (62.0 in.)
Depth 1326 mm (52.2 in.) 1326 mm (52.2 in.) 1681 mm (66.2 in.) 1681 mm (66.2 in.)
Weight - Maximum 1264 kg (2786 lb) 2659 kg (5863 lb) 1273 kg (2806 lb) 2677 kg (5901 lb)
Configuration4

Table 421. Shipping dimensions and weight

Dimensions Height Width Depth Weight
Metric 2311 mm 940 mm 1511 mm Varies by
configuration
English 91 in. 37 in. 59.5 in. Varies by
configuration

Table 422. Electrical and thermal characteristics (3-phase)

Electrical characteristics Properties
Rated voltage and 200 - 240 V ac at 50 - 60 Hz 380 - 415 V ac at 50 - 60 Hz 480 V ac at 50 - 60 Hz
frequency (three-phase)
Rated current, power cord 60 32 24
with 100 A plug FC 8686 or
8687 (amperes per phase)
Rated current, power cord
with 60 A plug, FC 8688 or 48 –– ––
8689 (amperes per phase)
Rated current, all other
power cords (amps per –– 32 24
phase)
Maximum power 21.4 kW 21.4 kW 21.4 kW
Power factor, typical 0.99 0.97 0.93
3
Inrush current (maximum) 163 A 163 A 163 A
Thermal output 73 kBtu/hr 73 kBtu/hr 73 kBtu/hr

Table 423. Cord information

Dual power feature code Standard
Branch circuit breaker and cord information See Breaker rating and cord information

Table 424. Environment specifications

Recommended operating Nonoperating temperature Storage temperature (All Shipping temperature (All
temperature (All models) models) models)
10 - 32 °C (50 - 89.6 °F) 10 - 43 °C (50 - 109.4 °F) 1 - 60 °C (33.8 - 140 °F) -40 - 60 °C (-40 - 140 °F)

328 Site and hardware planning

Table 425. Environment requirements
Environment Operating Nonoperating Storage3 Shipping3
Maximum wet bulb 23 °C (73.4 °F) 27 °C (80.6 °F) 29 °C (84.2 °F) 29 °C (84.2 °F)
Noncondensing
8 - 80 % 8 - 80 % 5 - 80 % 5 to 100 %
relative humidity
Maximum altitude3 3048 m (10 000 ft) 3048 m (10 000 ft) 3048 m (10 000 ft) 3048 m (10 000 ft)

Table 426. Acoustical noise emissions1, 5, 6

Product
Configuration LWAd (Bels) 5 LpAM (dB)5 (bystander, 1 m)
Operating Idle Operating Idle
Single, typical I/O
drawer in rack,
7.5 7.5 60 60
nominal conditions,
slimline door set
Single, typical I/O
drawer in rack,
6.8 6.8 53 53
nominal conditions,
acoustical door set
Single, typical I/O
drawer in rack plus
bulk power unit, 7.8 7.8 62 62
nominal conditions,
slimline door set
Single, typical I/O
drawer in rack plus
bulk power unit, 7.1 7.1 55 55
nominal conditions,
acoustical door set

Service clearances: For a graphical representation of service clearances, see Service clearances.

Seismic considerations: See Securing the rack.

Electromagnetic compatibility compliance: This server meets the following electromagnetic compatibility
specifications: FCC (CFR 47, Part 15); VCCI; CISPR-22; 89/336/EEC; BSMI (A2/NZS 3548:1995); C-Tick;
ICES/NMB-003; Korean EMI/EMC (MIC Notice 2000–94, Notice 2000–72); People's Republic of China
Commodity Inspection Law

Safety compliance: This server is designed and certified to meet the following safety standards: UL
60950-1; CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1; EN 60950-1; IEC 60950-1 including all national differences

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 329

Table 427. Notes
Note:
1. Noise levels are only reported for the base machine type.
2. Inrush currents occur only at initial application of power (short duration for charging capacitors). No inrush
occurs during normal power off-on cycle.
3. The upper limit of the dry bulb temperature must be derated 1 °C (1.8 °F) per 219 m (719 ft) above 1295 m (4250
ft). Maximum altitude is 3048 m (10000 ft).
4. For specific configuration weights, see Approximate system weights by configuration .
5. LWAd is the upper-limit A-weighted sound level; LpAM is the mean A-weighted sound pressure measured at the
1-meter bystander postions; 1 B = 10 dB.
6. All measurements made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with 9296.

Front-service access is necessary on the 5792 to accommodate a lift tool for the servicing of large drawers
(I/O drawers). Front and rear service access is necessary to accommodate the lift tool for servicing of the
optional integrated battery backup.

Figure 168. Floor plan considerations for single units

Related reference:
“Model 9119-590, 9406-595, and 9119-595 server specifications” on page 140
Server specifications provide detailed information for your server, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Breaker rating and cord information

Use the Breaker rating and cord information table to determine the circuit breaker rating for the power
cords used with your server.
Table 428. Breaker rating and cord information
Voltage (Phase to phase) 200-240 V 200-240 V 380-415 V 480 V
Circuit breaker rating 60 A (60 A plug) 63 A (No plug) 30 A 32 A
or 80 A (100 A
plug)

330 Site and hardware planning

Table 428. Breaker rating and cord information (continued)
Note:
1. The exact circuit breaker ratings might not be available in all countries. Where the specified circuit breaker
ratings are not acceptable, use the nearest available rating. These recommendations are based on a maximum
configuration running in "n-mode."
2. IBM encourages the use of a metal backbox with power cords using IEC 60309 plugs.

Power cord features

Use the Power cord features table to view the power cord specifications available for your server.

The following three-phase power cord features are available for the 5792:
Table 429. Power cord features
Supply type Nominal voltage Voltage tolerance (V Frequency range (Hz)
range (V ac) ac)
Two redundant 200-480 180-509 47-63
three-phase power
cords

Feature code Description Voltage (V ac) Plug Customer receptacle

(not provided)
8697 Power cord, 8 AWG,
4.3 m (14 ft) IEC 60309 Type
480 IEC 60309 30 A plug
8698 Power cord, 8 AWG, 430R7W
1.8 m (6 ft)
8688 Power cord, 6 AWG,
4.3 m (14 ft) IEC 60309 Type
200-240 IEC 60309 60 A plug
8689 Power cord, 6 AWG, 460R9W
1.8 m (6 ft)
8686 Power cord, 6 AWG,
4.3 m (14 ft) IEC 60309 Type
200-240 IEC 60309 100 A plug
8687 Power cord, 6 AWG, 4100R9W
1.8 m (6 ft)
86941 Power cord, 6 AWG, 380-415
4.3 m (14 ft)
Not provided ––
86771 Power cord, 8 AWG, 380-415
4.3 m (14 ft)
Note:
1. These power cords are shipped without a plug or receptacle. An electrician might be required to install the plug
and receptacle to meet applicable country or region electrical codes.

Doors and covers

Covers are an integral part of the 5792 and are required for product safety, proper airflow and cooling,
and electromagnetic compatibility compliance.

The following rear door options are available for the 5792:
v Enhanced acoustical cover option
This feature provides a low-noise option for sites with stringent acoustical requirements and where a
minimal system footprint is not critical. The acoustical cover option consists of a special front and rear

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 331

 doors which are approximately 250 mm (10 in.) deep and contain acoustical treatment that lowers the
noise level of the machine by approximately 7 dB (0.7 B) compared to the slimline doors. This
reduction in noise emission levels means that the noise level of a single 5792 with slimline covers is
about the same as the noise level of five model 5792 systems with acoustical covers.
v Slimline cover option
This feature provides an option to take up less floor space and cost less, when space is be more critical
than acoustical noise levels. The slimline cover option consists of a front door, which is approximately
100 mm (4 in) deep, and a rear door, which is approximately 50 mm (2 in) deep. No acoustical
treatment is available for this option.

Note: For declared levels of acoustical noise emissions, refer to Planning for 5792 base rack.

Plan views
Dimensional planning information is shown in this top down view of your server.

The following figures show dimensional planning information for systems with acoustical doors.

Figure 169. Plan view for single-frame systems with slimline doors and acoustical doors

332 Site and hardware planning

Figure 170. Plan view for double-frame systems with slimline doors and acoustical doors

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 333

Attention: When moving the rack, note the caster swivel diameters shown in the following figure. Each
caster swivels in an approximate 130 mm (5.1 inch) diameter.

Figure 171. Leveling foot and frame dimensions

Raised-floor requirements and preparation

A raised-floor is required for the 5792 to ensure optimal performance and to comply with electromagnetic
compatibility requirements.

It will also provide optimum system cooling and cable management. Raised-floor cutouts should be
protected by electrically nonconductive molding, appropriately sized, with edges treated to prevent cable
damage and to prevent casters from rolling into the floor cutouts.

Cutting and placing floor panels

These guidelines specify how to make the necessary openings in the raised floor for installing your
server.

Use the following procedure to cut and place floor panels in the raised floor. The x-y alphanumeric grid
positions are used to identify relative positions of cutout floor panels that might be cut in advance.
1. Measure the panel size of the raised floor.
2. Verify the floor panel size. The floor panel size illustrated is 600 mm (23.6 in.) and 610 mm (24 in.)
panels.

334 Site and hardware planning

3. Ensure adequate floor space is available to place the frames over the floor panels exactly as shown in
the figure. For front-to-back and side-to-side clearances, refer to Planning for 5792 base rack. Use the
plan view, if necessary. Consider all obstructions above and below the floor.
4. Identify the panels needed, and list the total quantity of each panel required for the installation.
5. Cut the required quantity of panels. When cutting the panels, you must adjust the size of the cut for
the thickness of the edge molding you are using. The dimensions shown in the figures are finished
dimensions. For ease of installation, number each panel as it is cut, as shown in the following figure.

Note: Depending on the panel type, additional panel support (pedestals) might be required to restore
structural integrity of the panel. Consult the panel manufacturer to ensure that the panel can sustain a
concentrated load of 476 kg (1050 lb). For multiple frame installation, it is possible that two casters
will produce loads as high as 953 kg (2100 lb).
6. Use Raised floor with 610 mm (24 in.) floor panels figure to install the panels in the proper positions.

Note:
a. This floor-tile arrangement is recommended so that the castors or leveling pads are placed on
separate floor tiles to minimize the weight on a single floor tile. Furthermore, it is recommended
that the tiles bearing the weight (having castors or leveling pads on the tiles) should be uncut to
retain the strength of the floor tile.
b. The following figure is intended only to show relative positions and accurate dimensions of floor
cutouts. The figure is not intended to be a machine template and is not drawn to scale.

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 335

Note: This figure shows a dual frame configuration. If your installation uses a single frame configuration, use the
dimensions associated with the primary frame.

Figure 172. Raised floor with 610 mm (24 in.) floor panels figure

Related reference:
“Considerations for multiple-system installations” on page 348
Learn about the installation requirements for a multiple-system installation.

Securing the rack

Securing your rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor or to a raised floor prevents movement when
vibrations occur.

Note: Securing the rack is an optional procedure. See Vibration and shock for more information.

The following can be ordered by the customer as additional rack-securing options for the 5792.

336 Site and hardware planning

v Request for Price Quotation (RPQ) 8A1183 for attaching the rack-mounting plates to the concrete floor
(nonraised floor)
v RPQ 8A1185 to attach the rack to a concrete floor when server is on a raised floor 228.6 - 330.2 mm (9 -
13 in. depth)
v RPQ 8A1186 to attach the rack to a concrete floor when server is on a raised floor 304.8 - 558.8 mm (12
- 22 in. depth)

Before the service representative can perform the tie-down procedure you must complete the floor
preparation described in Cutting and placing floor panels and the procedures described in Attaching the rack
to a concrete (nonraised) floor or Attaching the rack to a 9 - 13 in. or 12 - 22 in. floor.
Related reference:
“Cutting and placing floor panels” on page 334
These guidelines specify how to make the necessary openings in the raised floor for installing your
server.
“Attaching the rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor” on page 338
Use this procedure to attach the rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor.
“Attaching the rack to a 9 - 13 in. or 12 - 22 in. floor” on page 340
Use these steps to attach your rack to a 228.6 mm to 330.2 mm (9 in. to 13 in. depth). floor.
Related information:
Vibration and shock

Installing the frame tie-down kit

This procedure describes how to install a frame tie-down kit and floor tie-down hardware.

The following procedures describe how to install a frame tie down kit and floor tie-down hardware to
secure an IBM rack to a concrete floor beneath a 228.6 mm to 330.2 mm (9 in. to 13 in. depth) or a 304.8
mm to 558.8 mm (12 in. to 22 in. depth) raised-floor environment or to a nonraised floor.

Positioning the rack

Use this procedure to unpack and position your rack.

To unpack and position the rack, do the following:

Note: See Moving the system to the installation site before attempting to position the rack.
1. Remove all packing and tape from the rack.
2. Place the last floor covering exactly adjacent and in the front of the final installation location.
3. Position the rack according to the customer floor plan.
4. Lock each caster wheel by tightening the thumbscrew on the caster.

Figure 173. Caster thumbscrew

5. While moving the system to its final installed location and during relocation, it might be necessary to
lay down floor covering, such as Lexan sheets, to prevent floor panel damage.
Related reference:

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 337

“Moving the system to the installation site” on page 360
Several factors must be considered before moving the system to the installation site.

Attaching the rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor

Use this procedure to attach the rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor.

It is your responsibility to ensure the following steps are completed before the service representative
performs the tie-down procedure.

Note: You should obtain the service of a qualified structural engineer to determine appropriate anchoring
of the mounting plates. A minimum of three anchor bolts for each mounting plate must be used to secure
the plates to the concrete floor. Because some of the drilled holes might be aligned with concrete
reinforcement rods below the surface of the concrete floor, additional holes must be drilled. Each
mounting plate must have at least three usable holes, two that are on opposite sides and opposite ends of
each other, and one hole at the center. The mounting plates should be able to withstand 1134 kg (2500 lb)
of pulling force on each end.
1. Be sure the rack is in the correct location. To ensure that the holes are in the correct location, the
diagonal distance of the center of the holes should be 1211.2 mm (47.7 in.). The distance between the
center holes to the center of the next holes should be 654.8 mm (25.8 in.) (the side-to-side distance)
and 1019 mm (40.1 in.) (the front-to-back distance).

338 Site and hardware planning

Figure 174. Rack tie down (nonraised floor)

2. Place the mounting plates (item 1 shown in the previous figure), front and back, in the approximate
mounting position under the system rack.
3. To align the mounting plates to the system rack, do the following:
a. Place the four rack-mounting bolts (item 6 shown in the previous figure) through the plate
assembly holes at the bottom of the rack. Install the bushings and washers (item 4 and 5 shown
in the figure) to ensure bolt positioning.

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 339

 Note: The plastic bushing is intended to provide electrical insulation between the frame and the
ground. When such insulation is not required, the plastic bushing does not need to be installed.
b. Position the mounting plates (item 1 shown in the previous figure) under the four rack-mounting
bolts (item 6 shown in the previous figure) so that the mounting bolts are centered directly over
the tapped holes.
c. Turn the rack-mounting bolts (item 6 shown in the previous figure) three or four rotations into
the tapped holes.
4. Mark the floor around the edge of the mounting plates, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 175. Mark floor around edge of mounting plates

5. Remove the mounting bolts from the threaded holes.

6. Move the rack away from the mounting plates.
7. Mark the floor at the center of each hole in the mounting plate (including tapped holes).
8. Remove the mounting plates from the marked locations.
9. At the marked location of the tapped mounting holes, drill two holes approximately 19 mm (.75 in.)
to allow clearance for the ends of the two rack-mounting bolts. The ends of the rack-mounting bolts
might protrude past the thickness of the mounting plate. Drill one hole in each group of anchor bolt
location marks as indicated on the marked floor.
10. Using at least five heavy duty concrete anchoring bolts for each mounting plate, mount the
mounting plates to the concrete floor.

Attaching the rack to a 9 - 13 in. or 12 - 22 in. floor

Use these steps to attach your rack to a 228.6 mm to 330.2 mm (9 in. to 13 in. depth). floor.

Attention: The frame tie downs are intended to secure a frame weighing less than 1429 kg (3150 lb).
These tie downs are designed to secure the frame on a raised floor installation.

340 Site and hardware planning

Use the following to determine your next step:
1. If the rack is being attached to a short depth raised floor environment 228.6 mm to 330.2 mm (9 in. to
13 in. depth) install the Raised Floor Tie Down Kit (Part number 16R1102) described in the following
table.
Table 430. Raised Floor Tie Down Kit (Part number 16R1102)
228.6 mm to 330.2 mm (9 in. to 13 in.) Raised Floor Tie Down Kit (Part number 16R1102)
Item Part Number Quantity Description
1 44P3438 1 Wrench
2 44P2996 2 Stabilizer bar
3 44P2999 4 Turnbuckle Assembly

2. If the rack is being attached to a deep raised floor environment 304.8 mm to 558.8 mm (12 in. to 22 in.
depth) install the Raised Floor Tie Down Kit (Part number 16R1103) described in the following table.
Table 431. Raised Floor Tie Down Kit (Part number 16R1103)
304.8 mm to 558.8 mm (12 in. to 22 in.) Raised Floor Tie Down Kit (Part number 16R1103)
Item Part Number Quantity Description
1 44P3438 1 Wrench
2 44P2996 2 Stabilizer bar
3 44P3000 4 Turnbuckle Assembly

It is the customer's responsibility to ensure the following steps are completed before the service
representative performs the tie-down procedure.

Note: To accommodate a floor with a depth of more than 558.8 mm (22 in.), a steel beam or a steel
channel adapter for mounting the subfloor eyebolts are required. The customer must supply the floor
eyebolts.

Consider the following when preparing the floor for tie-down:

v The hardware is designed to support a frame weighing no more than 1578.5 kg (3480 lb).
v The estimated maximum concentrated load on one caster for a 1578.5 kg (3480 lb)-system is 526.2 kg
(1160 lb). For a multiple system installation, it is possible that one floor tile will bear a total
concentrated load of 1052.3 kg (2320 lb).

To install the eyebolts, do the following:

1. Obtain the service of a qualified structural engineer to determine appropriate installation of the
eyebolts.
2. Consider the following before installing the eyebolts:
v Floor eyebolts must be securely anchored to the concrete floor.
v For a single frame installation, four 1/2-in. diameter by 13-inch subfloor eyebolts should be secured
to the subfloor.
v The minimum height of the center of the internal diameter is 2.54 mm (1 in.) above the concrete
floor surface.
v The maximum height is 63.5 mm (2.5 in.) above the concrete floor surface. A height greater than
63.5 mm (2.5 in.) can cause excessive lateral deflection to the tie-down hardware.
v The eyebolt's internal diameter should be 1-3/16 inch, and each eyebolt should be able to withstand
1224.7 kg (2700 lb). The customer should obtain the service of a qualified consultant or structural
engineer to determine the appropriate anchoring method for these eyebolts and to ensure that the
raised floor can support the floor-loading specifications.

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 341

 v To ensure that the holes are in the correct location, the diagonal distance of the center of the holes
should be 1211.2 mm (47.7 in.). The distance between the center holes to the center of the next holes
should be 654.8 mm (25.8 in.) (the side to side distance) and 1019 mm (40.1 in.) (the front to back
distance)
3. Verify that the four eyebolts are positioned to match the dimensions is given in the following figures.

Figure 176. Eyebolt positioning for 610 mm (24 in.) floor tile layout

342 Site and hardware planning

Figure 177. Eyebolt positioning for 600 mm (23.6 in.) floor tile layout

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 343

Figure 178. Stabilizer bar layout (top view)

4. Install the eyebolts to the floor.

344 Site and hardware planning

Figure 179. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie-down hardware for 228.6 mm to 330.2 mm (9 in. to 13 in.) raised floor
(Part number 44P2999)

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 345

Figure 180. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie-down hardware for 228.6 mm to 330.2 mm (9 in. to 13 in.) raised floor
(Part number 44P2999)

346 Site and hardware planning

Figure 181. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie-down hardware for 304.8 mm to 558.8 mm (12 in. to 22 in.) raised floor
(Part number 44P3000)

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 347

Figure 182. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie-down hardware for 304.8 mm to 558.8 mm (12 in. to 22 in.) raised floor
(Part number 44P3000)

Considerations for multiple-system installations

Learn about the installation requirements for a multiple-system installation.

When you are integrating a 5792 with a model 9119-590 and other products in your data center, there are
several factors to consider:
v Minimum aisle width
The minimum aisle width in the front of the system is 1041 mm (41 in.) to allow room to perform
service operations. The minimum aisle width in the rear of the system is 914 mm (36 in.) to allow room
to perform service operations. The front and rear service clearances should be at least 1143 mm (45 in.)
and 914 mm (36 in.), respectively. Service clearances are measured from the edges of the frame with
frame extenders to the nearest obstacle.
v Thermal interactions
Systems should be faced front-to-front and rear-to-rear to create "cold" and "hot" aisles to maintain
effective system thermal conditions, as shown in the following figure.
Cold aisles need to be of sufficient width to support the airflow requirements of the installed systems
as indicated in Cooling requirements. The airflow per tile will be dependent on the under floor pressure

348 Site and hardware planning

 and perforations in the tile. A typical under floor pressure of 0.025 in. of water will supply 300-400 cfm
through a 25% open 0.61 mm by 0.61 m (2 ft by 2 ft) floor tile.
v Floor tile requirements
In a multiple frame installation, it is possible that a floor tile with cable cutouts (refer to Cutting and
placing floor panels) will bear two concentrated static loads up to 408 kg (900 lb) per caster or leveler.
Thus, the total concentrated load can be as high as 816 kg (1800 lb). Contact the floor tile manufacturer
or consult a structural engineer to ensure that the raised floor assembly can support this load.

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 349

Figure 183. Proposed floor layout for multiple systems

Related reference:
“Cooling requirements” on page 358
Use the system cooling requirements table in conjunction with the cooling requirements graph and chilled
350 Site and hardware planning
airflow area graphic to determine the area of floor tiles to supply chilled air to the system.
“Cutting and placing floor panels” on page 334
These guidelines specify how to make the necessary openings in the raised floor for installing your
server.

Service clearances
The service clearance area is the area around the server that is needed for IBM service representatives to
service the server.

The minimum service clearance for systems with slimline doors is shown in the following figure.

Figure 184. Service clearances for system with slimline doors

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 351

Figure 185. Service clearances for single-frame systems with slimline doors (with alternative right-side service
clearance)

352 Site and hardware planning

Figure 186. Service clearances for double-frame systems with slimline doors

The minimum service clearance for systems with acoustical doors is shown in the following figure.

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 353

Figure 187. Service clearances for single-frame system with acoustical doors

354 Site and hardware planning

Figure 188. Service clearances for single-frame system with acoustical doors (with alternative right side service
clearance)

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 355

Figure 189. Service clearances for double-frame system with acoustical doors

Refer to the figure in Raised-floor requirements and preparation for service clearances shown in a raised-floor
installation.
Related reference:
“Raised-floor requirements and preparation” on page 334
A raised-floor is required for the 5792 to ensure optimal performance and to comply with electromagnetic
compatibility requirements.

ASHRAE declarations
Use the ASHRAE declarations table and figures to determine the measurement reporting requirements
defined in the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
Thermal Guidelines for Data Processing Environments.

These guidelines are available at ASHRAE Technical Committee.

Table 432. ASHRAE declarations
Airflow maximum1 at 35°C
Typical Heat Release Airflow nominal1
(95°F)
Description watts cfm m3/hr cfm m3/hr

356 Site and hardware planning

Table 432. ASHRAE declarations (continued)
Minimum configuration 1500 410 697 580 985
Maximum configuration 14400 2060 2990 2560 373876
Typical configuration 6200 1010 1716 1300 2209
See Planning for 5792 base rack for Weight and Overall system dimension.
ASHRAE Class 3
Minimum configuration One I/O drawer
Maximum configuration 12 I/O drawers
Typical configuration 5 I/O drawers
Note:
1. Airflow for the typical and minimum configurations do not include redundant power supply, feature code 5158.

Figure 190. Airflow figure for server mounted in a rack

Related information:
ASHRAE Technical Committee
ASHRAE guidelines are available in this website

Total system power consumption

Use the Total system power consumption table to determine the total system power consumption for
your server's configuration.

The following table provides input power ranges based on system configuration.
Table 433. Total system power consumption
Configuration - number of I/O drawers and
switches AC power (kW)
1 1.5
2 2.7

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 357

Table 433. Total system power consumption (continued)
3 3.7
4 5.0
5 6.2
6 7.4
7 8.5
8 9.7
9 10.9
10 12.0
11 13.2
12 14.4
Note:
1. Configurations are based in 16 disk drives per I/O drawer and 20 PCI cards per I/O drawer. To determine the
typical power consumption for a specific configuration, subtract the following typical power values for each
unpopulated disk drive or PCI card:
v Each PCI card - 20 W
v Each disk drive - 20 W

Cooling requirements
Use the system cooling requirements table in conjunction with the cooling requirements graph and chilled
airflow area graphic to determine the area of floor tiles to supply chilled air to the system.

The 5792 requires air for cooling. As shown in Considerations for multiple system installations, rows of 5792
systems must face front-to-front. The use of a raised floor is recommended to provide air through
perforated floor panels placed in rows between the fronts of systems (the cold aisles shown in
Considerations for multiple system installations).

The following table provides system cooling requirements based on system configuration. The letter
designations in the table correspond to the letter designations in the graph shown in Cooling
requirements graph.
Table 434. System cooling requirements based on system configuration
Configuration -number of I/O drawers and switches AC power (kW)
1 A
2 A
3 A
4 B
5 B
6 C
7 C
8 D
9 D
10 E
11 E
12 F

358 Site and hardware planning

Related reference:
“Considerations for multiple-system installations” on page 348
Learn about the installation requirements for a multiple-system installation.

Cooling requirements graph

Use the cooling requirements graph in conjunction with the cooling requirements tables and the chilled
airflow area graphic to determine the area of the floor tiles to supply chilled air to the system.

Figure 191. Cooling requirements

Requirements for the chilled airflow area

The Chilled airflow area figure shows the chilled airflow area required for a system.

Use the system cooling requirements tables and the Cooling requirements graph to determine the area of
floor tiles to supply chilled air to the system.

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 359

Figure 192. Chilled airflow area

Moving the system to the installation site

Several factors must be considered before moving the system to the installation site.

You should determine the path that must be taken to move the system from the delivery location to the
installation site. You should verify that the height of all doorways, elevators, and so on are sufficient to
allow moving the system to the installation site. You should also verify that the weight limitations of
elevators, ramps, floors, floor tiles, and so on, are sufficient to allow moving the system to the installation
site. If the height or weight of the system can cause a problem when the system is moved to the
installation site, you should contact your local site planning or sales representative. For more detailed
information, see Access.

Delivery and subsequent transportation of the equipment

DANGER
Heavy equipment—personal injury or equipment damage might result if mishandled. (D006)

You must prepare your environment to accept the new product based on the installation planning
information provided, with assistance from an IBM Installation Planning Representative (IPR) or IBM

360 Site and hardware planning

authorized service provider. In anticipation of the equipment delivery, prepare the final installation site in
advance so that professional movers or riggers can transport the equipment to the final installation site
within the computer room. If for some reason, this is not possible at the time of delivery, you must make
arrangements to have professional movers or riggers return to finish the transportation at a later date.
Only professional movers or riggers should transport the equipment. The IBM authorized service
provider can only perform minimal frame repositioning within the computer room, as needed, to perform
required service actions. You are also responsible for using professional movers or riggers when you
relocate or dispose of equipment.
Related information:
Acoustics

Phase imbalance and BPR configuration

Use the Phase imbalance and BPR configuration table to determine the phase imbalance of your server's
configuration.

Depending on the number of Bulk Power Regulators (BPRs) in your system, phase imbalance can occur
in line currents. All systems are provided with two bulk power assemblies (BPAs), with separate power
cords. Phase currents will be divided between two power cords in normal operation. The following table
illustrates phase imbalance as a function of BPR configuration. For information about power
consumption, see Total system power consumption.
Table 435. Phase imbalance and BPR configuration
Number of BPRs per BPA Phase A Line Current Phase B Line Current Phase C Line Current
1 Power / Vline Power / Vline 0
2 0.5 Power / Vline 0.866 Power / Vline 0.5 Power / Vline
3 0.577 Power / Vline 0.577 Power / Vline 0.577 Power / Vline
Note: Power is calculated from Total system power consumption. Vline is line-to-line nominal input voltage. Because
total system power is divided between two power cords, divide the power number by 2.

Related reference:
“Total system power consumption” on page 357
Use the Total system power consumption table to determine the total system power consumption for
your server's configuration.

Balancing power panel loads

Use these methods to ensure that power panel loads are balanced.

When three-phase power is used, and depending on the system configuration, the phase currents can be
fully balanced or unbalanced. System configurations with three BPRs per BPA have balanced power panel
loads, while configurations with only one or two have unbalanced loads. With two BPRs per BPA, two of
the three-phases draw an equal amount of current, and are, nominally, 57.8% of the current on the third
phase. With one BPR per BPA, two of three-phases carry an equal amount of current, with no current
drawn on the third phase. The following figure is an example of feeding several loads of this type from
two power panels in a way that balances the load among the three-phases.

Note: Use of ground-fault-interrupt (GFI) circuit breakers is not recommended for this system because
GFI circuit breakers are earth-leakage-current sensing circuit breakers and this system is a high
earth-leakage-current product.

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 361

Figure 193. Power panel load balancing

The method illustrated in the preceding figure requires that the connection from the three poles of each
breaker to the three-phase pins of a connector be varied. Some electricians might prefer to maintain a
consistent wiring sequence from the breakers to the connectors. The following figure shows a way to
balance the load without changing the wiring on the output of any breakers. The three-pole breakers are
alternated with single-pole breakers, so that the three-pole breakers do not all begin on Phase A.

Figure 194. Power panel load balancing

The following figure shows another way of distributing the unbalanced load evenly. In this case, the
three-pole breakers are alternated with two-pole breakers.

362 Site and hardware planning

Figure 195. Power panel load balancing

Power cord configuration

Use the Single-frame system power cord configuration and Double-frame system power cord
configuration figures to route power cords through floor tile cutouts.

The power cords exit the system from different points of the frame as indicated in the following figure.
For raised-floor applications, it is recommended that both cords be routed to the rear of the frame and
through the same floor-tile cutout.

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 363

Figure 196. Single-frame system power cord configuration

364 Site and hardware planning

Figure 197. Double-frame system power cord configuration

Dual power installation

Some 5792 configurations are designed with a fully redundant power system. These systems have two
power cords attached to two power input ports which, in turn, power a fully redundant power
distribution system within the system. To take full advantage of the redundancy and reliability that is
built into the computer system, the system must be powered from two distribution panels.

Approximate system weights by configuration

Use the Approximate system weight by configuration tables to calculate the approximate weight of your
system based on its configuration.
Table 436. Approximate system weight by configuration without integrated battery backup and with acoustic doors
Number of I/O drawers System weight - kg (lb) A-frame weight - kg (lb)
1 549 (1211) 549 (1211)
2 649 (1431) 649 (1431)
3 749 (1651) 749 (1651)
4 852 (1878) 852 (1878)
5 952 (2098) 952 (2098)

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 365

Table 436. Approximate system weight by configuration without integrated battery backup and with acoustic
doors (continued)
6 1051 (2318) 1051 (2318)
7 1173 (2586) 1173 (2586)
8 1273 (2806) 1273 (2806)
9 1680 (3704) 1254 (2765)
10 1780 (3924) 1255 (2767)
11 1880 (4144) 1256 (2769)
12 1980 (4364) 1257 (2771)
Note:
1. I/O drawers are populated based on the number of processor books in the server frame.

Table 437. Approximate system weight by configuration with integrated battery backup and with acoustic doors
Number of I/O drawers System weight - kg (lb) A-frame weight - kg (lb)
1 640 (1410) 640 (1410)
2 739 (1630) 739 (1630)
3 839 (1850) 839 (1850)
4 942 (2077) 942 (2077)
5 1042 (2297) 1042 (2297)
6 1142 (2517) 1142 (2517)
7 1658 (3655) 1143 (2519)
8 1758 (3875) 1144 (2521)
9 1861 (4102) 1148 (2530)
10 1960 (4322) 1149 (2534)
11 2060 (4542) 1149 (2534)
12 2159 (4760) 1149 (2534)
Note:
1. I/O drawers are populated based on the number of processor books in the server frame.

Table 438. Approximate system weight by configuration without integrated battery backup and with slimline doors
Number of I/O drawers System weight - kg (lb) A-frame weight - kg (lb)
1 541 (1192) 541 (1192)
2 641 (1412) 641 (1412)
3 740 (1632) 740 (1632)
4 843 (1859) 843 (1859)
5 943 (2079) 943 (2079)
6 1043 (2299) 1043 (2299)
7 1164 (2567) 1164 (2567)
8 1264 (2787) 1264 (2787)
9 1672 (3685) 1246 (2746)
10 1771 (3905) 1247 (2750)
11 1871 (4125) 1247 (2750)
12 1971 (4345) 1248 (2752)

366 Site and hardware planning

Table 438. Approximate system weight by configuration without integrated battery backup and with slimline
doors (continued)
Note:
1. I/O drawers are populated based on the number of processor books in the server frame.

Table 439. Approximate system weight by configuration with integrated battery backup and with slimline doors
Number of I/O drawers System weight - kg (lb) A-frame weight - kg (lb)
1 631 (1391) 631 (1391)
2 731 (1611) 731 (1611)
3 831 (1831) 831 (1831)
4 934 (2058) 934 (2058)
5 1033 (2278) 1033 (2278)
6 1133 (2498) 1133 (2498)
7 1649 (3636) 1134 (2500)
8 1749 (3856) 1135 (2502)
9 1842 (4083) 1139 (2511)
10 1952 (4303) 1141 (2515)
11 2052 (4523) 1141 (2515)
12 2151 (4741) 1141 (2515)
Note:
1. I/O drawers are populated based on the number of processor books in the server frame.

Weight distribution
Use the Floor loading for system tables to determine the floor loading for various configurations.

The following table shows the values used for calculating floor loading for the 5792. The weights
specified include covers, while the width and depth are indicated without covers.
Table 440. Floor loading for system with 8 I/O drawers and without integrated battery backup
Floor loading for system with 8 I/O drawers and without integrated battery backup
a (sides) b (front) c (back) 1 frame
2
mm in. mm in. mm in. lb/ft kg/m2
25 1.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 208.9 1020.2
25 1.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 166.3 811.8
25 1.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 139.7 681.9
254 10.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 142.1 693.6
254 10.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 114.9 561.0
254 10.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 98.0 478.3
508 20.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 108.4 529.1
508 20.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 89.0 434.7
508 20.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 77.0 375.8
762 30.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 89.7 438.2
762 30.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 74.7 364.8
762 30.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 65.4 319.1

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 367

Table 440. Floor loading for system with 8 I/O drawers and without integrated battery backup (continued)
Note:
1. Service clearance is independent from weight distribution distance and must be at least 1143 mm (45 in.) for the
front of the frame and 914 mm (36 in.) for the rear of the frame (measured from the base frame).
2. Weight distribution area should not be overlapped.
3. Floor loading weight distribution distances should not exceed 762 mm (30 in.) in any direction when measured
from the base frame.

Table 441. Floor loading for systems with 6 I/O drawers and with integrated battery backup
Floor loading for systems with 6 I/O drawers and with integrated battery backup
a (sides) b (front) c (back) 1 frame
mm in. mm in. mm in. lb/ft2 kg/m2
25 1.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 189.0 922.9
25 1.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 151.0 737.1
25 1.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 127.2 621.2
254 10.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 129.4 631.7
254 10.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 105.2 513.4
254 10.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 90.1 439.7
508 20.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 99.3 485.0
508 20.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 82.1 400.8
508 20.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 71.3 348.3
762 30.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 82.7 403.9
762 30.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 69.3 338.5
762 30.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 61.0 297.8
Note:
1. Service clearance is independent from weight distribution distance and must be at least 1143 mm (45 in.) for the
front of the frame and 914 mm (36 in.) for the rear of the frame (measured from the base frame).
2. Weight distribution area should not be overlapped.
3. Floor loading weight distribution distances should not exceed 762 mm (30 in.) in any direction when measured
from the base frame.

Table 442. Floor loading for system with 12 I/O drawers and without integrated battery backup
Floor loading for system with 12 I/O drawers and without integrated battery backup
a (sides) b (front) c (back) 2 frames
2
mm in. mm in. mm in. lb/ft kg/m2
25 1.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 167.5 817.7
25 1.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 134.4 656.3
25 1.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 113.8 555.7
254 10.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 135.5 661.6
254 10.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 109.9 536.4
254 10.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 93.9 458.4
508 20.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 113.4 553.9
508 20.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 92.9 453.7
508 20.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 80.1 391.3

368 Site and hardware planning

Table 442. Floor loading for system with 12 I/O drawers and without integrated battery backup (continued)
762 30.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 98.7 482.1
762 30.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 81.6 398.5
762 30.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 71.0 346.5
Note:
1. Service clearance is independent from weight distribution distance and must be at least 1143 mm (45 in.) for the
front of the frame and 914 mm (36 in.) for the rear of the frame (measured from the base frame).
2. Weight distribution area should not be overlapped.
3. Floor loading weight distribution distances should not exceed 762 mm (30 in.) in any direction when measured
from the base frame.

Table 443. Floor loading for system with 12 I/O drawers and with integrated battery backup
Floor loading for system with 12 I/O drawers and with integrated battery backup
a (sides) b (front) c (back) 2 frames
mm in. mm in. mm in. lb/ft2 kg/m2
25 1.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 181.3 885.3
25 1.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 145.1 708.3
25 1.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 122.4 597.9
254 10.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 146.2 714.0
254 10.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 118.1 576.7
254 10.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 100.6 491.1
508 20.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 122.0 595.9
508 20.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 99.5 485.9
508 20.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 85.5 417.4
762 30.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 105.9 517.0
762 30.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 87.1 425.4
762 30.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 75.4 368.3
Note:
1. Service clearance is independent from weight distribution distance and must be at least 1143 mm (45 in.) for the
front of the frame and 914 mm (36 in.) for the rear of the frame (measured from the base frame).
2. Weight distribution area should not be overlapped.
3. Floor loading weight distribution distances should not exceed 762 mm (30 in.) in any direction when measured
from the base frame.

Floor loading for the system is illustrated in the Proposed Floor Layout for Multiple Systems in
Considerations for multiple system installations.
Related reference:
“Considerations for multiple-system installations” on page 348
Learn about the installation requirements for a multiple-system installation.

Unit emergency power off

The server has a unit emergency power off (UEPO) switch on the front of the first frame (A Frame).
When the switch is reset, the utility power is confined to the system power compartment, and all volatile
data is lost.

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 369

The server has a unit emergency power off (UEPO) switch on the front of the first frame (A Frame). Refer
to the following figure, which shows a simplified UEPO panel.

Figure 198. Unit emergency power off

When the switch is reset, the utility power is confined to the system power compartment. All volatile
data will be lost.

It is possible to attach the computer room emergency power off (EPO) system to the system UEPO. When
this is done, resetting the computer room EPO disconnects all power from the power cords and the
internal battery backup unit, if it is provided. All volatile data will be lost in this case also.

If the room EPO is not connected to the UEPO, resetting the computer room EPO removes ac power from
the system. If the interlock bypass feature is used, the system remains powered for a short time based on
system configuration.

Computer room emergency power off

You can incorporate the integrated battery backup into a computer room emergency power off (EPO)
system. Otherwise, volatile data can be lost.

370 Site and hardware planning

When the integrated battery backup is installed and the room EPO is reset, the batteries will engage and
the computer will continue to run. It is possible to attach the computer room EPO system to the machine
EPO. When this is done, resetting the room EPO will disconnect all power from the power cords and the
internal battery backup unit. In this event all volatile data will be lost.

To incorporate the integrated battery backup into the room Emergency Power Off systems (EPO), a cable
must be made to connect to the back of the system EPO panel. The following figures illustrate how this
connection is made.

Figure 199. Computer room emergency power off

The preceding figure illustrates the back of the machine UEPO panel with the room EPO cable plugging
into the machine. Notice the switch actuator. After it is moved to make the cable connection possible, the
room EPO cable must be installed for the machine to power on.

In the following figure, an AMP connector 770019-1 is needed to connect to the system EPO panel. For
room EPO cables using wire sizes #20 AWG to #24 AWG, use AMP pins (part number 770010-4). This
connection should not exceed 5 Ohms, which is approximately 200 ft(61 m) of #24 AWG.

Figure 200. AMP connector figure

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 371

Machine holdup times
Use the Typical machine holdup time tables to determine the typical machine holdup times (time versus
load) for fresh and aged batteries.

The following criteria apply to both tables.

v All times are listed in minutes
v Machine load is listed in total ac input power (power for both power cords combined)
v A fresh battery is defined as 2.5 years old or less.
v An aged battery is defined as 6.5 years.

Note: Battery capacity decreases gradually as the battery ages (from fresh-battery value to aged-battery
value). The system diagnoses a failed-battery condition if the capacity decreases below the aged-battery
value.
Table 444. Typical machine-holdup time versus load for fresh battery
Typical machine holdup time vs. load for fresh battery
Machine load 3.3 kW 6.67 kW 10 kW 13.33 kW 16.67 kW 20 kW 21.67 kW
Integrated
battery backup N R N R N R N R N R N R N R
configuration
1 BPR 7.0 21.0 2.1 7.0
2 BPR 21.0 50.0 7.0 21.0 4.0 11.0 2.1 7.0
3 BPR 32.0 68.0 12.0 32.0 7.0 21.0 4.9 12.0 3.2 9.5 2.1 7.0 1.7 6.5
N=Non-redundant, R=Redundant

Table 445. Typical machine-holdup time versus load for aged battery
Typical machine holdup time vs. load for aged battery
Machine load 3.3 kW 6.67 kW 10 kW 13.33 kW 16.67 kW 20 kW 21.67 kW
Integrated
battery backup N R N R N R N R N R N R N R
configuration
1 BPR 4.2 12.6 1.3 4.2
2 BPR 12.6 30.0 4.2 12.6 2.4 6.6 1.3 4.2
3 BPR 19.2 41.0 7.2 19.2 4.2 12.6 2.9 7.2 1.9 5.7 1.3 4.2 1.0 3.9
N=Non-redundant, R=Redundant

5802 expansion unit

Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your expansion unit, including dimensions,
electrical, power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.
Table 446. Dimensions for rack-mounted expansion unit
Maximum configuration
weight Width Depth Height
54 kg (120 lb) 444.5 mm (17.5 in.) 711.2 mm (28 in.) 4U

372 Site and hardware planning

Table 447. Electrical
Electrical characteristics Properties
kVA (maximum) .768 kVA
Rated voltage and frequency 100 - 127 V ac or 200 - 240 V ac at 50 - 60Hz
Thermal output (maximum) 2542 BTU/hr
Power requirements (maximum) 745 W
Power factor .97
Leakage current (maximum) 3.5 mA
Phase Single
Plug type (Canada and U.S.) 26
Power cord length 14 ft

Table 448. Temperature requirements

Operating Storage Shipping
10 - 38°C (32 - 100.4°F) 1 - 60°C (33.8 - 140°F) -40 - 60°C (-40 - 140°F)

Table 449. Environment requirements

Properties Operating Nonoperating Storage Shipping
Noncondensing Recommended: 34 - 5 - 80% 5 - 80% 5 - 100%
humidity 54%

Allowable: 20 - 80%

Table 450. Maximum altitude

3048 m (10 000 ft)

Table 451. Noise emissions

Models Properties Operating Idle
WAd
IBM Feature Code 5802 - L (B) 7.0 7.0
4U I/O drawer consists of pAm
L (dB) 52 52
18 SSF disk drives, 10
PCI-Express 8x slots, and 2
DCAs
Notes:
1. LWAd is the statistical upper-limit A-weighted sound power level (rounded to the nearest 0.1 B).
2. LpAm is the mean A-weighted emission sound pressure level measured at the 1-meter bystander positions
(rounded to the nearest dB).
3. 10 dB (decibel) = 1 B (bel).
4. All measurements made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.

Table 452. Service clearances

Front Back Sides
915 mm (36 in. ) 915 mm (36 in. ) 914 mm (36 in. )

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 373

5886 expansion unit
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your expansion unit, including dimensions,
electrical, power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.
Table 453. Dimensions for rack-mounted expansion unit
Weight (with no Depth (including
Dimensions drives installed) Width front bezel) Height
Metric 17.7 kg 445 mm 521 mm 89 mm
English 39 lb 17.5 in. 20.5 in. 3.5 in.

Table 454. Electrical

Electrical characteristics Properties
4
kVA 0.358
Rated voltage and frequency 100 - 240 V ac at 50 - 60 Hz
4
Thermal Output 1160 Btu/hr
Power requirements (maximum) 340 W
Power factor 0.95
Inrush current 55 A per power cord
Leakage current (maximum) 3.10 mA
Phase 1

Table 455. Maximum altitude

2134 m (7000 ft) above sea level

Table 456. Temperature requirements

Operating Nonoperating
3
10 - 38°C (50 - 100.4°F) -40 - 60°C (-40 - 140°F)

Table 457. Environmental requirements

Environment Operating Nonoperating
Noncondensing humidity
20 - 80% (allowable)
8 - 80% (including condensing)
40 - 55% (recommended)
Wet bulb temperature 21°C (69.8°F) 27°C (80.6°F)

Table 458. Noise emissions1, 4

Properties Operating Idle
Single 5886 drawer in LWAd
standard 19-inch rack with 6.6 bels 6.5 bels
24 hard drives, nominal
environmental conditions, LpAm (1-meter bystander)
and no front or rear doors 49 dB 49 dB
on rack.

374 Site and hardware planning

Table 459. Service clearances for rack-mounted expansion unit
Dimensions Front Back Sides2 Top2
Metric 914 mm 914 mm 914 mm
English 36 in. 36 in. 36 in.

Table 460. Service clearances for stand-alone expansion unit

Dimensions Front Back
Metric 368.3 mm 381 mm
English 14.5 in. 15 in.

Table 461. Hardware specifications

Notes:
1. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.
2. Side and top clearances are optional during operation.
3. The maximum 38°C (100.4°F temperature must be derated 1°C (1.8 °F) per 137 m (450 ft) above 1295 m (4250 ft).
Maximum altitude is 2134 m (7000 ft).
4. All measurements made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.

Safety compliance: This hardware is designed and certified to meet the following safety standards: UL
60950; CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950–00; EN 60950; IEC 60950 including all National Differences
Related information:
Acoustics

Planning for 6954 and 6953 racks

Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical,
power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.

The 6954 base rack is an optional second base frame with its own separate connection to AC power that
is designed for use with model 9119-FHA. A complete set of planning information is provided to address
the resulting system.
Table 462. 6954 base rack components
Feature code Description Minimum per system Maximum per system
6869 Slimline door set for FC 1 2
6954 rack
6870 Acoustic door set for FC 1 2
6954 rack
6953 Optional non-powered
expansion rack
Note:
1. A Hardware Management Console (HMC) can connect to multiple systems (therefore, a Hardware Management
Console might not need to be ordered), or up to two HMCs can connect to the system for redundancy.
2. A maximum of 16 I/O drawers using one FC 6954 and one FC 6953 can be connected to the 9119-FHA rack.
Typically, I/O drawers are populated in the server frame first, which reduces the maximum number of drawers
available in the 6954 frame.

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 375

Table 463. Full system weights (no doors)
Physical characteristics Weight
Powered I/O rack 1275 kg (2810 lb)
Powered I/O rack and expansion rack 2341 kg (5160 lb)

Table 464. Cover weights

Physical characteristics Weight
One acoustic door 25 kg (56 lb)
One non-acoustic door 15 kg (33 lb)

Table 465. Dimensions and weight

Physical
characteristics Slim Line Acoustic
Number of frames One frame Two frame One frame Two frame
Height 2024.38 mm (79.7 in.) 2024.38 mm (79.7 in.) 2024.38 mm (79.7 in.) 2024.38 mm (79.7 in.)
Width 784.86 mm (30.9 in.) 1567.18 mm (61.7 in.) 784.86 mm (30.9 in.) 1567.18 mm (61.7 in.)
Depth 1485.9 mm (58.5 in.) 1485.9 mm (58.5 in.) 1805.94 mm (71.1 in.) 1805.94 mm (71.1 in.)

Table 466. Maximum rack weights

Physical characteristics Weight
Powered I/O rack 1388 kg (3060 lb)
Powered I/O rack and bolt on expansion rack 2567 kg (5660 lb)

Table 467. Powered I/O rack without the internal battery feature
I/O drawers Weight
1 571 kg (1258 lb)
2 668 kg (1473 lb)
3 766 kg (1688 lb)
4 863 kg (1903 lb)
5 986 kg (2174 lb)
6 1084 kg (2389 lb)
7 1181 kg (2604 lb)
8 1279 kg (2819 lb)

Table 468. Powered I/O rack with bolt on expansion rack, without the internal battery feature
I/O drawers Weight
9 1750 kg (3858 lb)
10 1847 kg (4073 lb)
11 1945 kg (4288 lb)
12 2068 kg (4559 lb)
13 2165 kg (4774 lb)
14 2263 kg (4989 lb)
15 2360 kg (5204 lb)

376 Site and hardware planning

Table 468. Powered I/O rack with bolt on expansion rack, without the internal battery feature (continued)
I/O drawers Weight
16 2458 kg (5419 lb)

Table 469. Powered I/O rack with the internal battery feature
I/O drawers Weight
1 777 kg (1712 lb)
2 874 kg (1927 lb)
3 972 kg (2142 lb)
4 1095 kg (2413 lb)
5 1192 kg (2628 lb)
6 1290 kg (2843 lb)
7 1387 kg (3058 lb)

Table 470. Powered I/O rack with bolt on expansion rack, with the internal battery feature
I/O drawers Weight
8 1858 kg (4097 lb)
9 1956 kg (4312 lb)
10 2053 kg (4527 lb)
11 2176 kg (4798 lb)
12 2274 kg (5013 lb)
13 2371 kg (5228 lb)
14 2469 kg (5443 lb)
15 2566 kg (5658 lb)

Table 471. Shipping dimension and weight per rack

Physical characteristics Dimensions
Height 231 cm (91 in.)
Width 94 cm (37 in.)
Depth 162 cm (63.5 in.)
Weight 1134 kg (2500 lb)

Table 472. System Rating. The system rating varies by configuration. See Total system power consumption for which
system configurations will have the higher rating.
World Trade World Trade
US, Canada, Japan US High Voltage Corporation Corporation
Voltage 200 - 240 V ac at 50 - 60 480 V ac at 50 - 60 Hz 200 - 240 V ac at 50 - 60 380 - 415 V ac at 50 - 60
and Hz Hz Hz
frequency
System 48 A 63 A 24 A 24 A 48 A 63 A 34 A 34 A
rating, I/O
rack

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 377

Table 473. Electrical and thermal characteristics
Electrical and thermal characteristics Properties
Maximum power for one fully configured powered I/O 9.8 kW
rack (FC 6954)
Maximum power for one fully configured powered I/O 19.7 kW
rack (FC 6954) and one fully configured non powered
I/O rack (FC 6953)
Power factor, typical 99
Inrush current 134
Thermal output for one fully configured powered I/O 3.34 kBTU/hr
rack (FC 6954
Thermal output power for one fully configured powered 6.72 kBTU/hr
I/O rack (FC 6954) and one fully configured non
powered I/O rack (FC 6953)

Table 474. Environment specifications

Environment Properties Operating Storage Shipping
Temperature 8 - 32-core 50 - 89.6°F (10 - 32°C) 33.8 - 140°F (1 - 60°C) -40 - 140°F (-40 -
60°C)
Temperature 40 - 64-core 50 - 82.4°F (10 - 28°C) 33.8 - 140°F (1 - 60°C) -40 - 140°F (-40 -
60°C)
Relative humidity 20 - 80% 5 - 80% 5 - 100%
Maximum altitude 8 - 32 core 3048 m (10 000 ft)
40 - 64 core 2133 m (7000 ft)

Table 475. Declared acoustical noise emissions for powered I/O rack for the 9119-FHA
Declared A-Weighted Sound Power Level, Declared A-Weighted Sound Pressure Level,
LWAd (B) LpAm (dB)
Product
Configuration Operating Idling Operating Idling
Single I/O drawer 7.0 7.0 52 52
alone in rack with
acoustical door set.
Blowers at nominal
speeds.
Single I/O drawer 7.5 7.5 59 59
alone in rack with
nonacoustical
(slimline) door set.
Blowers at nominal
speeds.
Bulk power assembly 6.9 6.9 52 52
alone in rack with
acoustical door set.
Blowers at nominal
speeds.

378 Site and hardware planning

Table 475. Declared acoustical noise emissions for powered I/O rack for the 9119-FHA (continued)
Declared A-Weighted Sound Power Level, Declared A-Weighted Sound Pressure Level,
LWAd (B) LpAm (dB)
Product
Configuration Operating Idling Operating Idling
Bulk power assembly 7.5 7.5 59 59
alone in rack with
Non-Acoustical
(Slimline) Door Set.
Blowers at nominal
speeds.
Typical configuration 7.75 7.75 59 59
of powered I/O rack
with acoustical door
set: 4 I/O drawers
and bulk power
assembly. Blowers at
nominal speeds.
Typical configuration 8.2 8.2 66 66
of powered I/O rack
with nonacoustical
(slimline) Door set: 4
I/O drawers and
bulk power assembly.
Blowers at nominal
speeds.
Maximum 7.94 7.94 61 61
configuration of
powered I/O rack
with acoustical
doorset: 8 I/O
drawers and bulk
power assembly.
Blowers at nominal
speeds.
Maximum 8.4 8.4 68 68
configuration of
powered I/O rack
with nonacoustical
(slimline) door set: 8
I/O drawers and
bulk power assembly.
Blowers at nominal
speeds.
1
Declared level LWAd is the upper-limit A-weighted sound power level. Declared level LpAm is the mean A-weighted
sound pressure level measured at the 1-meter bystander positions.
2
All measurements made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.
3
B, dB, abbreviations for bels and decibels, respectively, where 1 B = 10 dB.
4
Meets IT Product Noise Limits for, Generally Unattended Data Center, per Statskontoret Technical Standard 26:6.
5
Meets IT Product Noise Limits for, Generally Attended Data Center, per Statskontoret Technical Standard 26:6.

Front-service access is necessary on the 6954 to accommodate a lift tool for the servicing of large drawers
(I/O drawers). Front and rear service access is necessary to accommodate the lift tool for servicing of the

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 379

optional integrated battery backup.

Figure 201. Floor plan considerations for single units

Related reference:
“Model 9119-FHA server specifications” on page 87
Server specifications provide detailed information for your server, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Power cord and breaker information

Use the breaker rating and cord information tables to determine the circuit breaker rating for the power
cords used with your server.
Table 476. Powered I/O rack
US, Canada, Japan US High Voltage World Trade Corporation
200 - 240 V ac 480 V ac 200 - 240 V ac 380 - 415 V ac
Lower rated power Higher rated power Lower rated power Higher rated power Lower rated power Higher rated power Lower rated power Higher rated power
cord set cord set cord set cord set cord set cord set cord set cord set
Plug Rating Needed 60 A 100 A1 30 A 30 A1 No plug No plug1 No plug No plug1
System Rating, I/O
rack 48 A 63 A1 24 A 24 A1 48 A 63 A1 34 A 34 A1
Recommended
circuit breaker rating 60 A 80 A1 30 A 30 A1 60 A 80A1 40 A 40 A1
Cord size 6 AWG 6 AWG1 8 AWG 8 AWG1 6 AWG 6 AWG1 8 AWG 8 AWG1
Recommended
receptacle (Not IEC60309, 60 A, type IEC60309, 100 A, IEC60309, 30 A, type IEC60309, 30 A, type Not specified, Not specified, Not specified, Not specified,
provided) 460R9W type 4100R9W 1 430R7W 430R7W1 electrician installed electrician installed1 electrician installed electrician installed1
Power Cord Feature
Code 4.3 m (14 ft) 8688 8686 8697 8697 8694 8694 8677 8677
1One frame requires the lower rated power cord set. Two frames require the higher rated power cord set.

Related reference:
“Total system power consumption” on page 416
Use the tables to determine the total system power consumption for your server's configuration.

Doors and covers

Covers are an integral part of the 6954 and are required for product safety, proper airflow and cooling,
and electromagnetic compatibility compliance.

The following rear door options are available for the 6954:

380 Site and hardware planning

v Acoustical door option
This feature provides a specially designed, noise-reducing door set for those who want lower noise
levels in their data center or who might want to meet certain acoustical or noise exposure
requirements. The acoustical door option consists of a special front door, approximately 250 mm (10
in.) in depth. It contains acoustical treatment and when used with the required rear door heat
exchanger, it lowers the noise level of the machine by approximately 7 dB (0.7 B) in comparison to the
slimline door option.
v Slimline cover option
This feature provides an option to take up less floor space, when space is be more critical than
acoustical noise levels. The slimline door option consists of a front and rear door set, approximately
100 mm (4 in.) in depth, to be used in conjunction with the required rear-door heat exchanger
previously described. No acoustical treatment is available for the slimline door option, and the
9119-FHA system generally does not meet industry acoustical noise limits with this option installed.
The slimline door set is offered as a selectable option for those who are more concerned with floor
space than noise levels because each slimline door is about 100 mm (4 in.) less deep than each
acoustical door.

Note: For declared levels of acoustical noise emissions, refer to Planning for 6954 base rack.

Plan views
The Powered I/O frame, FC 6954, can be placed on either side of the 9119-FHA. The maximum distance
between the frames is limited by the Infiniband (IB) frame to frame communication cables, which are 8 m
(26.2 ft) long. When determining the maximum distance the Powered I/O frame can be placed from the
9119-FHA, make sure to account for the following three lengths:
1. The distance from IB cable plug location of the 9119-FHA CEC frame to the under floor.
2. The distance along the under floor.
3. The distance from the underfloor to the Powered I/O expansion frame IB cable plug location.

The non-powered I/O frame, FC 6953, must be on the left side of the powered I/O frame, when facing
the front of the rack.

Dimensional planning information is shown in this top down view of your server.

The following figure shows dimensional planning information for single-frame systems.

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 381

Figure 202. Plan view for single-frame systems with acoustical doors

The following figure shows dimensional planning information for double-frame systems.

382 Site and hardware planning

Figure 203. Plan view for double-frame systems with acoustical doors

The following figure shows dimensional planning information for single-frame systems.

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 383

Figure 204. Plan view for single-frame systems with slimline doors

The following figure shows dimensional planning information for single-frame systems.

384 Site and hardware planning

Figure 205. Plan view for single-frame systems with slimline doors and a Rear door heat exchanger

Attention: When moving the rack, note the caster swivel diameters shown in the following figure. Each
caster swivels in an approximate 130 mm (5.1 in.) diameter.

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 385

Figure 206. Leveling foot and frame dimensions

Installing the frame tie-down kit

This procedure describes how to install a frame tie-down kit and floor tie-down hardware.

The following procedures describe how to install a frame tie-down kit and floor tie-down hardware to
secure an IBM rack to a concrete floor beneath a 228.6 - 330.2 mm (9 -13 in. depth) or a 304.8 - 558.8 mm
(12 - 22 in. depth) raised-floor environment or to a nonraised floor.

Positioning the rack

Use this procedure to unpack and position your rack.

To unpack and position the rack, do the following steps:

Note: Before attempting to position the rack, see Moving the system to the installation site.
1. Remove all packing and tape from the rack.
2. Place the last floor covering exactly adjacent and in the front of the final installation location.
3. Position the rack according your floor plan.
4. Lock each caster wheel by tightening the thumbscrew on the caster.

386 Site and hardware planning

Figure 207. Caster thumbscrew

5. While moving the system to its final installed location and during relocation, it might be necessary to
lay down floor covering, such as Lexan sheets, to prevent floor panel damage.

Securing the rack

Securing your rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor or to a raised floor prevents movement when
vibrations occur.

Note: Securing the rack is an optional procedure. See Vibration and shock for more information..

Before the service representative can perform the tie-down procedure, you must complete the floor
preparation described in Cutting and placing floor panels and Attaching the rack to a 9 - 13 in. or 12 - 22 in.
floor.
Related reference:
“Cutting and placing floor panels” on page 395
These guidelines specify how to make the necessary openings in the raised floor for installing your
server.

Attaching the rack to a 9 - 13 in. or 12 - 22 in. floor

Use these steps to attach your rack to a 228.6 mm to 330.2 mm (9 in. to 13 in. depth). floor.

Attention: The frame tie downs are intended to secure a frame weighing less than 1429 kg (3150 lb).
These tie downs are designed to secure the frame on a raised-floor installation.

Use the following to determine your next step:

1. If the rack is being attached to a short-depth raised-floor environment 228.6 - 330.2 mm (9 - 13 in.
depth), install the Raised floor tie-down kit (part number 16R1102) described in the following table.
Table 477. Raised floor tie-down kit 228.6 - 330.2 mm (9 - 13 in. depth)
Raised floor tie-down kit (part number 16R1102)
Item Part number Quantity Description
1 44P3438 1 Wrench
2 44P2996 2 Stabilizer bar
3 44P2999 4 Turnbuckle Assembly

2. If the rack is being attached to a deep, raised-floor environment 304.8 - 558.8 mm (12 - 22 in. depth),
install the Raised floor tie-down kit (part number 16R1103) described in the following table.
Table 478. Raised floor tie-down kit 304.8 - 558.8 mm (12 - 22 in. depth)
Raised floor tie-down kit (part number 16R1103)
Item Part number Quantity Description
1 44P3438 1 Wrench
2 44P2996 2 Stabilizer bar

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 387

Table 478. Raised floor tie-down kit 304.8 - 558.8 mm (12 - 22 in. depth) (continued)
Raised floor tie-down kit (part number 16R1103)
3 44P3000 4 Turnbuckle Assembly

It is your responsibility to ensure that the following steps are completed before the service representative
performs the tie-down procedure.

Note: To accommodate a floor with a depth of more than 558.8 mm (22 in.), a steel beam or a steel
channel adapter for mounting the sub-floor eyebolts are required. The customer must supply the floor
eyebolts.

Consider the following when preparing the floor for tie-down procedure:
v The hardware is designed to support a frame weighing no more than 1429 kg (3150 lb).
v The estimated maximum concentrated load on one caster for a 1429 kg (3150 lb) system is 476.3 kg
(1050 lb). For a multiple-system installation, one floor tile might bear a total concentrated load of 952.5
kg (2100 lb).

To install the eyebolts, do the following steps:

1. Obtain the service of a qualified structural engineer to determine the appropriate installation of the
eyebolts.
2. Consider the following before installing the eyebolts:
v Floor eyebolts must be securely anchored to the concrete floor.
v For a single-frame installation, four 1/2-in. diameter by 13-in. sub-floor eyebolts should be secured
to the sub-floor.
v The minimum height of the center of the internal diameter is 2.54 mm (1 in.) above the concrete
floor surface.
v The maximum height is 63.5 mm (2.5 in.) above the concrete floor surface. A height greater than
63.5 mm (2.5 in.) can cause excessive lateral deflection to the tie-down hardware.
v The eyebolt's internal diameter should be 1-3/16 inch, and each eyebolt should be able to withstand
1224.7 kg (2700 lb). The customer should obtain the services of a qualified consultant or structural
engineer to determine the appropriate anchoring method for these eyebolts and to ensure that the
raised floor and the building can support the floor-loading specifications.
v To ensure that the holes are in the correct location, the diagonal distance of the center of the holes
should be 1211.2 mm (47.7 in.). The distance between the center holes to the center of the next holes
should be 654.8 mm (25.8 in.) (the side-to-side distance) and 1019 mm (40.1 in.) (the front-to-back
distance).
3. Verify that the four eyebolts are positioned to match the dimensions in the following figures.

388 Site and hardware planning

Figure 208. Eyebolt positioning for 610 mm (24 in.) floor tile layout

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 389

Figure 209. Eyebolt positioning for 600 mm (23.6 in.) floor tile layout

390 Site and hardware planning

Figure 210. Stabilizer bar layout (top view)

4. Install the eyebolts to the floor. The service representative can now install the frame.

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 391

Figure 211. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie-down hardware for 228.6 - 330.2 mm (9 - 13 in.) raised floor (part number
44P2999)

392 Site and hardware planning

Figure 212. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie-down hardware for 228.6 - 330.2 mm (9 - 13 in.) raised floor (part number
44P2999)

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 393

Figure 213. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie-down hardware for 304.8 - 558.8 mm (12 - 22 in.) raised floor (part number
44P3000)

394 Site and hardware planning

Figure 214. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie-down hardware for 304.8 - 558.8 mm (12 - 22 in.) raised floor (part number
44P3000)

Cutting and placing floor panels

These guidelines specify how to make the necessary openings in the raised floor for installing your
server.

Use the following procedure to cut and place floor panels in the raised floor. The x-y alphanumeric grid
positions are used to identify relative positions of cutout floor panels that might be cut in advance.
1. Measure the panel size of the raised floor.
2. Verify the floor panel size. The floor panel size illustrated is 600 mm (23.6 in.) and 610 mm (24 in.)
panels.
3. Ensure adequate floor space is available to place the frames over the floor panels exactly as shown in
the following figures. For front-to-back and side-to-side clearances, refer to Considerations for
multiple-system installations. Use the plan view, if necessary. Consider all obstructions above and below
the floor.
4. Identify the panels needed, and list the total quantity of each panel required for the installation.
5.

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 395

 Important: Cut the required quantity of panels. When cutting the panels, you must adjust the size of
the cut for the thickness of the edge molding you are using. The dimensions shown in the figures are
finished dimensions. For ease of installation, number each panel as it is cut.

Note: For a multiple frame installation, two casters could produce loads as high as 2750 lb.

Notes:
1. The weight distribution bar is a requirement for a model 9119-FHA on a raised floor. It is needed to
maintain the integrity of the floor that is holds the weight of the frame.
2. This floor-tile arrangement is recommended so that the casters or leveling pads are placed on separate
floor tiles to minimize the weight on a single floor tile. Load bearing tiles that have cutouts might
require additional pedestals to keep their structural integrity. Additionally, the cutouts span two tiles.
Raised floors utilizing a stringer system should leave the stringer intact.
3. The Raised floor with 610 mm (24 in.) floor panels figure and Raised floor with 600 mm (23.6 in.) floor panels
figure are intended only to show relative positions and accurate dimensions of floor cutouts. The
figures are not intended to be a machine template and is not drawn to scale.

Raised floor with 610 mm (24 in.) floor panels figure

Figure 215. Rack placement for 610 mm (24 in.) tiles

This image shows an overview perspective of the rack placement on floor tiles. The dashed lines
represent the rack. The solid lines are used for dimensions.
1. The rear of the server is placed 75 mm (3.0 in.) measuring up from the bottom edge of the first row
tile.
2. The front of the server is placed 20 mm (0.7 in.) measuring up from the bottom edge of the third row
tile.

396 Site and hardware planning

Figure 216. Cable cutout placement 610 mm (24 in.) tiles

This figure shows the floor cutouts for the cables. The solid rectangles indicate the cutouts, and the solid
lines are used for dimensions.
1. The first cutout is 94 mm (3.7 in.) high measuring up from the bottom edge of the first row tile. The
width of the first cutout is 110 mm (4.3 in.) measuring left from the right edge of the first column tile.
Continue cutting out an additional 545 mm (21.5 in.) measuring right from the left edge of the second
column tile. The total width of the cutout is 655 mm (25.8 in.).
2. The second cutout is 94 mm (3.7 in.) high measuring up from the bottom edge of the third row tile.
The width of the second cutout is 110 (4.3 in.) mm measuring left from the right edge of the first
column tile. Continue cutting out an additional 545 mm (21.5 in.) measuring right from the left edge
of the second column tile. The total width of the cutout is 655 mm (25.8 in.).

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 397

Figure 217. Single rack tiedown hole pattern

This figure shows the location of the rack tiedown for a single rack. The solid rectangles indicate the
cutouts, and the solid lines are used for dimensions.
1. The first circle, located on the top left, is 109 mm (4.3 in.) measuring from the right edge of the first
column tile. It is 52 mm (2.0 in.) measuring down from the top edge of the second row tile.
2. The second circle, located on the top right, is 65 mm (2.6 in.) measuring from the right edge of the
second column tile. It is 52 mm (2.0 in.) measuring down from the top edge of the second row tile.
3. The third circle, located on the bottom left, is 109 mm (4.3 in.) measuring from the right edge of the
first column tile. It is 1019 mm (40.1 in.) measuring down from the first circle.
4. The fourth circle, located on the bottom right, is 65 mm (2.6 in.) measuring from the right edge of the
second column tile. It is 1019 mm (40.1 in.) measuring down from the second circle.

Refer to Install the frame tie-down kit for instructions on how to install a frame tie-down kit and floor
tie-down hardware.

398 Site and hardware planning

Figure 218. Two rack placement on 610 mm (24 in.) tiles

This an overview image of the placement of two racks on the tiles. The dashed lines represents the racks.
1. The rear of the server is placed 75 mm (3.0 in.) measuring up from the bottom edge of the first row
tile.
2. The front of the server is placed 20 (0.7 in.) mm measuring up from the bottom edge of the third row
tile.

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 399

Figure 219. Cable cutout placement for two racks for 610 mm (24 in.) tiles

This is an overview image of the floor cutouts. The solid lines are used for the dimensions.
1. The first cutout, located on the top left, is 94 mm (3.7 in.) high measuring up from the bottom edge of
the first row tile. The width is 110 mm (4.3 in.) measuring left from the right edge of the first column
tile. Continue cutting out an additional 545 mm (21.5 in.) measuring right from the left edge of the
second column tile. The total width of the cutout is 655 mm (25.8 in.).
2. The second cutout, located on the top right, is 94 mm (3.7 in.) high measuring up from the bottom
edge of the first row tile. The width is 545 mm (21.5 in.) measuring left from the right edge of the
second column tile. Continue cutting out an additional 110 mm (4.3 in.) measuring right from the left
edge of the third column tile. The total width of the cutout is 655 mm (25.8 in.).
3. The third cutout, located on the bottom left, is 94 mm (3.7 in.) high measuring up from the bottom
edge of the third row tile. The width is 110 mm (4.3 in.) measuring left from the right edge of the first
column tile. Continue cutting out an additional 545 mm (21.5 in.) measuring right from the left edge
of the second column tile. The total width of the cutout is 655 mm (25.8 in.).
4. The fourth cutout, located on the bottom right, is 94 mm (3.7 in.) high measuring up from the bottom
edge of the third row tile. The width is 545 mm (21.5 in.) measuring left from the right edge of the
third column tile. Continue cutting out an additional 110 mm (4.3 in.) measuring right from the left
edge of the third column tile. The total width of the cutout is 655 mm (25.8 in.).

400 Site and hardware planning

Figure 220. Two rack tiedown hole placement

This figure shows the location of the rack tiedowns needed for two racks. The solid rectangles indicate
the cutouts, and the solid lines are used for dimensions.
1. The first circle located, on the top left, is 109 mm (4.3 in.) measuring left from the right edge of the
first column tile. It is 52 mm (2.0 in.) measuring down from the top edge of the second row tile.
2. The second circle, located in the top left center, is 64.5 mm (2.5 in.) measuring left from the right edge
of the second column tile. It is 52 mm (2.0 in.) measuring down from the top edge of the second row
tile.
3. The third circle, located in the top right center, is 64.5 mm (2.5 in.) measuring right from the left edge
of the third tile. It is 52 mm (2.0 in.) measuring down from the top edge of the second row tile.
4. The fourth circle, located on the top right, is 109 mm (4.3 in.) measuring right from the left edge of
the third column tile. It is 52 mm (2.0 in.) measuring down from the top edge of the second row tile.
5. The fifth circle located, on the bottom left, is 109 mm (4.3 in.) measuring right from the left edge of
the first column tile. It is 1019 mm (40.1 in.) measuring down from the first circle.
6. The sixth circle, located in the bottom left center, is 64.5 mm (2.5 in.) measuring left from the right
edge of the second tile. It is 1019 mm (40.1 in.) measuring down from the second circle.
7. The seventh circle, located in the bottom right center, is 64.5 mm (2.5 in.) measuring right from the
left edge of the third column tile. It is 1019 mm (40.1 in.) measuring down from the third circle.
8. The eighth circle, located on the bottom right, is 109 mm (4.3 in.) measuring right from the left edge
of the fourth column tile. It is 1019 mm (40.1 in.) measuring down from the fourth circle.

Refer to Installing the frame tie-down kit for instructions on how to install a frame tie-down kit and floor
tie-down hardware.

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 401

Raised floor with 600 mm (23.6 in.) floor panels figure

Figure 221. Rack placement for 600 mm (23.6 in.) tiles

This image shows an overview perspective of the rack placement on the floor tiles. The dashed lines
represent the rack. The solid lines are used for dimensions.
1. The rear of the server is placed 83 mm (3.3 in.) measuring up from the bottom edge of the first row
tile.
2. The front of the server is placed 10 mm (0.4 in.) measuring up from the bottom edge of the third row
tile.

402 Site and hardware planning

Figure 222. Cable cutout placement 600 mm (23.6 in.) tiles

This figure shows the floor cutouts for the cables. The solid rectangles indicate the cutouts, and the solid
lines are used for dimensions.
1. The first cutout is 94 mm (3.7 in.) high measuring up from the bottom edge of the first row tile. The
width of the first cutout is 110 mm (4.3 in.) measuring left from the right edge of the first column tile.
Continue cutting out an additional 545 mm (21.5 in.) measuring right from the left edge of the second
column tile. The total width of the cutout is 655 mm (25.8 in.).
2. The second cutout is 94 mm (3.7 in.) high measuring up from the bottom edge of the third row tile.
The width of the second cutout is 110 mm (4.3 in.) measuring left from the right edge of the first
column tile. Continue cutting out an additional 545 mm (21.5 in.) measuring right from the left edge
of the second column tile. The total width of the cutout is 655 mm (25.8 in.).

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 403

Figure 223. Rack tiedown hole pattern

This figure shows the location of the rack tiedown for a single rack. The solid rectangles indicate the
cutouts, and the solid lines are used for dimensions.
1. The first circle, located on the top left, is 119 mm (4.7 in.) measuring from the right edge of the first
column tile. It is 44 mm (1.7 in.) measuring down from the top edge of the second row tile.
2. The second circle, located on the top right, is 65 mm (2.6 in.) measuring from the right edge of the
second column tile. It is 44 mm (1.7 in.) measuring down from the top edge of the second row tile.
3. The third circle, located on the bottom left, is 119 mm (4.7 in.) measuring from the right edge of the
first column tile. It is 1019 mm (40.1 in.) measuring down from the first circle.
4. The fourth circle, located on the bottom right, is 65 mm (2.6 in.) measuring from the right edge of the
second column tile. It is 1019 mm (40.1 in.) measuring down from the second circle.

Refer to Installing the frame tie-down kit for instructions on how to install a frame tie-down kit and floor
tie-down hardware.

404 Site and hardware planning

Figure 224. Two rack placement on 600 mm (23.6 in.) tiles

This an overview image of the placement of two racks on the tiles. The dashed lines represents the racks.
1. The rear of the server is placed 83 mm (3.3 in.) measuring up from the bottom edge of the first row
tile.
2. The front of the server is placed 10 mm (0.4 in.) measuring up from the bottom edge of the third row
tile.

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 405

Figure 225. Two cable cutout placement for 600 mm (23.6 in.) tiles

This is an overview image of the floor cutouts. The solid lines are used for the dimensions.
1. The first cutout, located on the top left, is 94 mm (3.7 in.) high measuring up from the bottom edge of
the first row tile. The width is 110 mm (4.3 in.) measuring left from the right edge of the first column
tile. Continue cutting out an additional 545 mm (21.5 in.) measuring right from the left edge of the
second column tile. The total width of the cutout is 655 mm (25.8 in.).
2. The second cutout, located on the top right, is 94 mm (3.7 in.) high measuring up from the bottom
edge of the first row tile. The width is 545 mm (21.5 in.) measuring left from the right edge of the
second column tile. Continue cutting out an additional 110 mm (4.3 in.) measuring right from the left
edge of the third column tile. The total width of the cutout is 655 mm (25.8 in.).
3. The third cutout, located on the bottom left, is 94 mm (3.7 in.) high measuring up from the bottom
edge of the third row tile. The width is 110 mm (4.3 in.) measuring left from the right edge of the first
column tile. Continue cutting out an additional 545 mm (21.5 in.) measuring right from the left edge
of the second column tile. The total width of the cutout is 655 mm (25.8 in.).
4. The fourth cutout, located on the bottom right, is 94 mm (3.7 in.) high measuring up from the bottom
edge of the third row tile. The width is 545 mm (21.5 in.) measuring left from the right edge of the
third column tile. Continue cutting out an additional 110 mm (4.3 in.) measuring right from the left
edge of the third column tile. The total width of the cutout is 655 mm (25.8 in.).

406 Site and hardware planning

Figure 226. Rack placement for 600 mm (23.6 in.) tiles

This figure shows the location of the rack tiedowns needed for two racks. The solid rectangles indicate
the cutouts, and the solid lines are used for dimensions.
1. The first circle located, on the top left, is 119 mm (4.7 in.) measuring left from the right edge of the
first column tile. It is 44 mm (1.7 in.) measuring down from the top edge of the second row tile.
2. The second circle, located in the top left center, is 64.5 mm (2.5 in.) measuring left from the right edge
of the second column tile. It is 44 mm (1.7 in.) measuring down from the top edge of the second row
tile.
3. The third circle, located in the top right center, is 64.5 mm (2.5 in.) measuring right from the left edge
of the third tile. It is 44 mm (1.7 in.) measuring down from the top edge of the second row tile.
4. The fourth circle, located on the top right, is 119 mm (4.7 in.) measuring right from the left edge of
the third column tile. It is 44 mm (1.7 in.) measuring down from the top edge of the second row tile.
5. The fifth circle located, on the bottom left, is 119 mm (4.7 in.) measuring right from the left edge of
the first column tile. It is 1019 mm (40.1 in.) measuring down from the first circle.
6. The sixth circle, located in the bottom left center, is 64.5 mm (2.5 in.) measuring left from the right
edge of the second column tile. It is 1019 mm (40.1 in.) measuring down from the second circle.
7. The seventh circle, located in the bottom right center, is 64.5 mm (2.5 in.) measuring right from the
left edge of the third column tile. It is 1019 mm (40.1 in.) measuring down from the third circle.
8. The eighth circle, located on the bottom right, is 119 mm (4.7 in.) measuring right from the left edge
of the fourth column tile. It is 1019 mm (40.1 in.) measuring down from the fourth circle.

Refer to Installing the frame tie-down kit for instructions on how to install a frame tie-down kit and floor
tie-down hardware.

Additional pedestal placement

Placing large cutouts in the raised floor tiles, such as the cutouts needed for the 9119-FHA, can
substantially change the structural integrity of each tiles. Additional support pedestals might be needed.

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 407

Pedestals might be placed approximately under each caster position to prevent tiles from sagging.
Pedestals might also be used to support the cut corners of floor tiles. Pedestals might be needed for tiles
where the equipment is moving across, even though they are not permanent load bearing tiles. All
pedestals should be installed and adjusted to barely contact the underside of each floor panel, before the
frames are rolled into place. All pedestal locations are recommendations. Each facility is unique and
additional pedestal supports might be needed for certain floors. You are responsible for verifying all floor
loading capacities and requirements to determine where any additional pedestals might be needed.

Note: Use the following figure as an example of where the floor pedestals should be placed. It is only
intended to show relative positions. This figure is not drawn to scale.

Figure 227. Additional pedestal placement

Important: Extra pedestals might be placed as shown.

1. Pedestals Bp1, Bp2, Bp3, Bp4, Cp4, and Cp6 might be placed approximately under each caster
position to prevent floor tiles from sagging.
2. Pedestals Ap1, Ap2, Ap3, Ap4, Ap5, and Ap6 might be used to support the cut corns of floor tiles A1,
A2, A3, and A. Although these flour tiles are not load-bearing, equipment, moving in the row where
these floor panels site, might place high loads momentarily on the tiles.
Related reference:

408 Site and hardware planning

“Considerations for multiple-system installations”
Learn about the installation requirements for a multiple-system installation.
“Installing the frame tie-down kit” on page 105
This procedure describes how to install a frame tie-down kit and floor tie-down hardware.

Securing the rack

Securing your rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor or to a raised floor prevents movement when
vibrations occur.

Note: Securing the rack is an optional procedure. See Vibration and shock for more information..

Before the service representative can perform the tie-down procedure, you must complete the floor
preparation described in Cutting and placing floor panels and Attaching the rack to a 9 - 13 in. or 12 - 22 in.
floor.
Related reference:
“Cutting and placing floor panels” on page 395
These guidelines specify how to make the necessary openings in the raised floor for installing your
server.

Considerations for multiple-system installations

Learn about the installation requirements for a multiple-system installation.

When you are integrating a 6954 with a model 9119-FHA and other products in your data center, there
are several factors to consider:
v Minimum aisle width
The minimum aisle width in the front of the system is 1219 mm (48 in.) to allow room to perform
service operations. The minimum aisle width in the rear of the system is 1219 mm (48 in.) to allow
room to perform service operations. Service clearances are measured from the edges of the frame with
frame extenders to the nearest obstacle.
v Thermal interactions
Systems should be faced front-to-front and rear-to-rear to create "cold" and "hot" aisles to maintain
effective system thermal conditions, as shown in the following figure.
Cold aisles need to be of sufficient width to support the airflow requirements of the installed systems
as indicated in Cooling requirements. The airflow per tile will be dependent on the under floor pressure
and perforations in the tile. A typical under floor pressure of 0.025 in. of water will supply 300 - 400
cfm through a 25% open 0.61 mm by 0.61 m (2 ft by 2 ft) floor tile.

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 409

Figure 228. Proposed floor layout for multiple systems

Related reference:
“Cooling requirements” on page 417
Use the system cooling requirements table in conjunction with the cooling requirements graph and chilled
410 Site and hardware planning
airflow area graphic to determine the area of floor tiles to supply chilled air to the system.

Service clearances
The service clearance area is the area around the server that is needed for authorized service
representatives to service the server.

The minimum service clearance for systems with slimline doors is shown in the following figures.

Figure 229. Service clearance for single system unit frame or single I/O rack with slimline doors

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 411

Figure 230. Service clearance for single system unit frame or single I/O rack with slimline doors (with alternative right
side service clearance)

412 Site and hardware planning

Figure 231. Service clearances for double I/O frame systems with slimline doors

The minimum service clearance for systems with acoustical doors is shown in the following figures.

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 413

Figure 232. Service clearance for single system unit frame or single I/O rack with acoustic doors

414 Site and hardware planning

Figure 233. Service clearance for single system unit frame or single I/O rack with acoustic doors (with alternative right
side service clearance)

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 415

Figure 234. Service clearances for double I/O frame systems with acoustic doors

Refer to the figure in Raised-floor requirements and preparation for service clearances that are shown in a
raised-floor installation.
Related reference:
“Raised-floor requirements and preparation” on page 98
A raised floor is required for model 9119-FHA and its associated racks to ensure optimal performance
and to comply with electromagnetic compatibility requirements.

Total system power consumption

Use the tables to determine the total system power consumption for your server's configuration.
Table 479. Powered I/O racks
Drawers kW
1 1.4
2 2.9
3 4.3
4 5.8
5 7.2

416 Site and hardware planning

Table 479. Powered I/O racks (continued)
Drawers kW
6 8.7
7 10.1
8 11.6
1
9 13.0
1
10 14.5
1
11 15.9
1
12 17.4
1
13 18.8
1
14 20.2
1
15 21.7
16 23.11
1
A higher rated line cord is required.

Cooling requirements
Use the system cooling requirements table in conjunction with the cooling requirements graph and chilled
airflow area graphic to determine the area of floor tiles to supply chilled air to the system.

The 6954 requires air for cooling. As shown in the graphic in Considerations for multiple system installations,
rows of 6954 systems must face front-to-front. The use of a raised floor is recommended to provide air
through perforated floor panels placed in rows between the fronts of systems (the cold aisles shown in
the graphic in Considerations for multiple system installations).

The following table provides system cooling requirements based on system configuration. The letter
designations in the table correspond to the letter designations in the graph shown in Cooling requirements
graph.
Table 480. System cooling requirements based on system configuration
Letters Power (kW)
A 1.2
A 2.5
B 3.7
B 4.9
C 6.2
C 7.4
D 8.6
E 9.8
E 11.1
F 12.3
F 13.5
G 14.8
G 16
H 17.2
I 18.5

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 417

Table 480. System cooling requirements based on system configuration (continued)
Letters Power (kW)
I 19.7

Related reference:
“Considerations for multiple-system installations” on page 409
Learn about the installation requirements for a multiple-system installation.

Cooling requirements graph

Use the cooling requirements graph in conjunction with the cooling requirements tables and the chilled
airflow area graphic to determine the area of the floor tiles to supply chilled air to the system.

Figure 235. Cooling requirements

Requirements for the chilled airflow area

The Chilled airflow area figure shows the chilled airflow area required for a system.

Use the system cooling requirements tables and the Cooling requirements graph to determine the area of
floor tiles to supply chilled air to the system.

418 Site and hardware planning

Figure 236. Chilled airflow area

Related reference:
“Cooling requirements graph” on page 418
Use the cooling requirements graph in conjunction with the cooling requirements tables and the chilled
airflow area graphic to determine the area of the floor tiles to supply chilled air to the system.

Phase imbalance and BPR configuration balancing power panel loads

These guidelines specify how to balance power panel loads.

Depending on the number of Bulk Power Regulators (BPRs) in your system, phase imbalance can occur
in line currents. All systems are provided with two bulk power assemblies (BPAs) and two separate
power cords. Phase currents are divided between two power cords in normal operation.

System configurations with three or four BPRs per BPA have balanced power panel loads, while
configurations with only one or two have unbalanced loads. The following figure is an example of
feeding several loads of this type from two power panels in a way that balances the load among the
three-phases.

Note: Use of ground-fault-interrupt (GFI) circuit breakers is not recommended for this system because
GFI circuit breakers are earth-leakage-current sensing circuit breakers and this system is a high
earth-leakage-current product.

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 419

Figure 237. Power panel load balancing

The method illustrated in the preceding figure requires that the connection from the three poles of each
breaker to the three-phase pins of a connector be varied. Some electricians might prefer to maintain a
consistent wiring sequence from the breakers to the connectors. The following figure shows a way to
balance the load without changing the wiring on the output of any breakers. The three-pole breakers are
alternated with single-pole breakers so that the three-pole breakers do not all begin on phase A.

Figure 238. Power panel load balancing

The following figure shows another way of distributing the unbalanced load evenly. In this case, the
three-pole breakers are alternated with two-pole breakers.

420 Site and hardware planning

Figure 239. Power panel load balancing

Dual power installation

All 6954 configurations are designed with a fully redundant power system. These systems have two
power cords attached to two power input ports which power a fully redundant power distribution
system within the system. To take full advantage of the redundancy and reliability that is built into the
computer system, the system must be powered from two distribution panels.

Weight distribution
Use the floor loading information to determine the floor loading for various configurations.

The following figure shows the floor loading dimensions for 6954 and 6953 expansion racks. Use this
figure in conjunction with the tables to determine the floor loading for various configurations.

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 421

Figure 240. Floor loading dimensions

The following tables show values for calculating floor loading for the 6954 and 6953 expansion racks.
Weights include acoustical covers. Width and depth are indicated without covers.
Table 481. Powered I/O rack 8 I/O drawers
Condition a (sides) b (front) c (back) Powered I/O rack
1 25.4 mm (1 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 206.0 lb/ft2 1006.0 kg/m2
2
2 25.4 mm (1 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 165.8 lb/ft 809.8 kg/m2
2
3 25.4 mm (1 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 140.3 lb/ft 684.8 kg/m2
2
4 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 140.2 lb/ft 684.6 kg/m2
2
5 254 mm (10 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 114.6 lb/ft 559.7 kg/m2
6 254 mm (10 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 98.3 lb/ft2 480.2 kg/m2
7 508 mm (20 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 107.1 lb/ft2 522.7 kg/m2
2
8 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 88.8 lb/ft 433.8 kg/m2
2
9 508 mm (20 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 77.2 lb/ft 377.1 kg/m2
2
10 762 mm (30 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 88.7 lb/ft 433.2 kg/m2
2
11 762 mm (30 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 74.6 lb/ft 364.1 kg/m2
12 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 65.6 lb/ft2 320.1 kg/m2

422 Site and hardware planning

Table 482. Powered I/O rack 4 drawers
Condition a (sides) b (front) c (back) Powered I/O rack
1 25.4 mm (1 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 146.0 lb/ft2 713.0 kg/m2
2
2 25.4 mm (1 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 119.2 lb/ft 581.9 kg/m2
2
3 25.4 mm (1 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 102.1 lb/ft 498.3 kg/m2
2
4 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 102.0 lb/ft 498.1 kg/m2
5 254 mm (10 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 84.9 lb/ft2 414.7 kg/m2
6 254 mm (10 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 74.0 lb/ft2 361.5 kg/m2
2
7 508 mm (20 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 79.9 lb/ft 389.9 kg/m2
2
8 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 67.7 lb/ft 330.5 kg/m2
2
9 508 mm (20 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 59.9 lb/ft 292.6 kg/m2
10 762 mm (30 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 67.6 lb/ft2 330.1 kg/m2
11 762 mm (30 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 58.1 lb/ft2 283.9 kg/m2
2
12 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 52.1 lb/ft 254.5 kg/m2

Table 483. Powered I/O rack 7 drawers and internal battery feature
Condition a (sides) b (front) c (back) Powered I/O rack
1 25.4 mm (1 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 221.6 lb/ft2 1081.8 kg/m2
2
2 25.4 mm (1 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 177.9 lb/ft 868.7 kg/m2
2
3 25.4 mm (1 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 150.1 lb/ft 733.1 kg/m2
4 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 150.1 lb/ft2 732.8 kg/m2
5 254 mm (10 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 122.3 lb/ft2 597.2 kg/m2
2
6 254 mm (10 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 104.6 lb/ft 510.9 kg/m2
2
7 508 mm (20 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 114.1 lb/ft 557.0 kg/m2
2
8 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 94.3 lb/ft 460.5 kg/m2
2
9 508 mm (20 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 81.7 lb/ft 399.0 kg/m2
10 762 mm (30 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 94.2 lb/ft2 459.8 kg/m2
11 762 mm (30 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 78.8 lb/ft2 384.9 kg/m2
2
12 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 69.0 lb/ft 337.1 kg/m2

Table 484. Powered I/O and expansion unit 16 drawers

Condition a (sides) b (front) c (back) Powered I/O and expansion unit
1 25.4 mm (1 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 192.9 lb/ft2 941.9 kg/m2
2
2 25.4 mm (1 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 155.6 lb/ft 759.9 kg/m2
2
3 25.4 mm (1 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 131.9 lb/ft 644.1 kg/m2
4 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 155.9 lb/ft2 761.3 kg/m2
5 254 mm (10 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 126.9 lb/ft2 619.4 kg/m2
2
6 254 mm (10 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 108.4 lb/ft 529.1 kg/m2
2
7 508 mm (20 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 130.2 lb/ft 635.6 kg/m2
2
8 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 106.8 lb/ft 521.6 kg/m2
9 508 mm (20 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 92.0 lb/ft2 449.0 kg/m2
10 762 mm (30 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 112.9 lb/ft2 551.2 kg/m2
2
11 762 mm (30 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 93.4 lb/ft 455.9 kg/m2
2
12 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 81.0 lb/ft 395.3 kg/m2

Table 485. Powered I/O and expansion unit 9 drawers

Condition a (sides) b (front) c (back) Powered I/O and expansion unit
1 25.4 mm (1 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 142.6 lb/ft2 696.1 kg/m2
2
2 25.4 mm (1 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 116.5 lb/ft 568.7 kg/m2
3 25.4 mm (1 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 99.9 lb/ft2 487.6 kg/m2
4 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 116.7 lb/ft2 569.7 kg/m2
2
5 254 mm (10 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 96.3 lb/ft 470.3 kg/m2

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 423

Table 485. Powered I/O and expansion unit 9 drawers (continued)
Condition a (sides) b (front) c (back) Powered I/O and expansion unit
6 254 mm (10 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 83.4 lb/ft2 407.0 kg/m2
2
7 508 mm (20 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 98.6 lb/ft 481.6 kg/m2
2
8 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 82.3 lb/ft 401.8 kg/m2
2
9 508 mm (20 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 71.9 lb/ft 351.0 kg/m2
10 762 mm (30 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 86.5 lb/ft2 422.5 kg/m2
11 762 mm (30 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 72.9 lb/ft2 355.8 kg/m2
2
12 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 64.2 lb/ft 313.4 kg/m2

Table 486. Powered I/O and expansion unit 15 drawers and internal battery feature
Condition a (sides) b (front) c (back) Powered I/O and expansion unit
1 25.4 mm (1 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 200.6 lb/ft2 979.6 kg/m2
2
2 25.4 mm (1 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 161.6 lb/ft 789.2 kg/m2
2
3 25.4 mm (1 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 136.8 lb/ft 668.0 kg/m2
4 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 161.9 lb/ft2 790.6 kg/m2
5 254 mm (10 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 131.5 lb/ft2 642.2 kg/m2
2
6 254 mm (10 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 112.2 lb/ft 547.7 kg/m2
2
7 508 mm (20 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 135.0 lb/ft 659.2 kg/m2
2
8 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 110.6 lb/ft 539.9 kg/m2
9 508 mm (20 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 95.0 lb/ft2 464.0 kg/m2
10 762 mm (30 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 116.9 lb/ft2 570.9 kg/m2
2
11 762 mm (30 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 96.5 lb/ft 471.3 kg/m2
2
12 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 83.5 lb/ft 407.8 kg/m2

Table 487. Powered I/O and expansion unit 8 drawers and internal battery feature
Condition a (sides) b (front) c (back) Powered I/O and expansion unit
1 25.4 mm (1 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 150.3 lb/ft2 733.8 kg/m2
2
2 25.4 mm (1 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 122.5 lb/ft 598.0 kg/m2
3 25.4 mm (1 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 104.8 lb/ft2 511.5 kg/m2
4 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 122.7 lb/ft2 599.0 kg/m2
2
5 254 mm (10 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 101.0 lb/ft 493.1 kg/m2
2
6 254 mm (10 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 87.2 lb/ft 425.7 kg/m2
2
7 508 mm (20 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 103.5 lb/ft 505.2 kg/m2
2
8 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 86.1 lb/ft 420.2 kg/m2
9 508 mm (20 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 75.0 lb/ft2 366.0 kg/m2
10 762 mm (30 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 90.6 lb/ft2 442.2 kg/m2
2
11 762 mm (30 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 508 mm (20 in.) 76.0 lb/ft 371.2 kg/m2
2
12 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 762 mm (30 in.) 66.8 lb/ft 325.9 kg/m2

7101 or 7102 expansion unit

Expansion units are optional features that you can attach to your server for additional storage.

Expansion units 7101 and 7102 are optional features that you can order for your model 9406-250. The
7101 or 7102 are physically attached to the right side of the base system tower.

Models 9406-250 can use the optional external uninterruptible power supply that acts like a backup
battery unit (BBU). The uninterruptible power supply has power cords that connect the uninterruptible
power supply to the base system, the 7101 or 7102 expansion units, and a power cord that connects the
uninterruptible power supply to the power outlet.

424 Site and hardware planning

7104 expansion unit
Expansion units are optional features that you can attach to your server for additional storage.

Expansion units 7104 is an optional feature that you can order for your model 9406-270. The 7104 is
physically attached to the right side of the base system tower.

Model 9406-270 can use the optional external IBM uninterruptible power supply that acts like a BBU
(Backup Battery Unit). The uninterruptible power supply has power cords that connect the
uninterruptible power supply to the base system, the 7104 expansion unit, and a power cord that
connects the uninterruptible power supply to the power outlet.

7116 expansion unit

Expansion units are optional features that you can attach to your server for additional storage.

System unit expansion 7116 is an optional feature that you can order for your model 9406-800 or
9406-810. The 7116 is physically attached to the right side of the base system tower.

7214-1U2 media drawer

Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your media drawer, including dimensions,
electrical, power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.
Table 488. Dimensions for rack-mounted media drawer
Dimensions Weight Width Depth Height
Metric 12.25 kg 440 mm 735 mm 45 mm
English 27 lb 17.3 in. 28.9 in. 1.7 in.

Table 489. Electrical

Electricity characteristics Properties
kVA (maximum) 0.092
Rated voltage and frequency 100 - 127 V ac or 200 - 240 V ac at 50 - 60 Hz
Thermal output (maximum) 307 Btu/hr
Power requirements (maximum) 90 W
Power factor 0.98
Inrush current 55 A5
Leakage current (maximum) 3.10 mA5
Phase 1

Table 490. Temperature requirements

Operating Nonoperating
3
10 - 35°C (50 - 95°F) -40 - 65°C (-40 - 149°F)

Table 491. Environmental requirements

Properties Operating Nonoperating
Noncondensing humidity
20 - 80% (allowable)
8 - 80% (including condensing)
40 - 55% (recommended)

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 425

Table 491. Environmental requirements (continued)
Properties Operating Nonoperating
Wet bulb temperature 21°C (69.8°F) 27°C (80.6°F)

Table 492. Maximum altitude

2134 m (7000 ft) above sea level

Table 493. Noise emissions1, 4

Properties Operating Idle
Single 7214-1U2 media drawer in LWAd 4.8 bels5
standard 19-inch rack nominal
LpAm (1-meter bystander)
environmental conditions, and no
front or rear doors on rack.

Table 494. Service clearances for rack-mounted unit

Front Back Sides2 Top2
914 mm 914 mm 914 mm
36 in. 36 in. 36 in.

Table 495. Notes

Notes:
1. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.
2. Side and top clearances are optional during operation.
3. The maximum 38 °C (100.4°F) temperature must be derated 1 °C (1.8°F) per 137 m (450 ft) above 1295 m (4250
ft). Maximum altitude is 2134 m (7000 ft).
4. All measurements made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.
5. Estimated value.

Safety compliance: This hardware is designed and certified to meet the following safety standards: UL
60950; CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950–00; EN 60950; IEC 60950 including all National Differences
Related information:
Acoustics

7311-D10 expansion unit

Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your expansion unit, including dimensions,
electrical, power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.
Table 496. Dimensions
Dimensions Height Width Depth
Metric 168 mm 221 mm 711 mm
English 6.6 in. 8.7 in. 28.0 in.

Table 497. Dimensions (two 7311-D10 with drawer enclosure

Dimensions Height Width Depth
Metric 178 mm 445 mm 711 mm

426 Site and hardware planning

Table 497. Dimensions (two 7311-D10 with drawer enclosure (continued)
Dimensions Height Width Depth
English 7.0 in. 17.5 in. 28.0 in.

Table 498. Maximum configuration weight

7311-D10 Two 7311-D10 with drawer enclosure
16.8 kg (37 lb) 39.1 kg (86 lb)

Table 499. Electrical

Electrical characteristics Properties
kVA (maximum configuration) 0.21 0.42
Rated voltage and frequency 200 - 240 V ac at 50 - 60 Hz, V dc not 200 - 240 V ac at 50 - 60 Hz, V dc not
supported supported
Thermal output per 7311-D10 683 Btu/hr 1366 Btu/hr
(maximum)
Power requirements (maximum) 200 W 400 W
Power factor 0.95 0.95
2
Inrush current per 7311-D10 64 A 64 A

Table 500. Temperature requirements3

Operating Nonoperating Storage
10 - 38°C (50 - 100°F) 1 - 60°C (33.8 - 140°F) 1 - 60°C (33.8 -140°F)

Table 501. Environment requirements

Properties Operating Nonoperating
Noncondensing humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80%
4
Wet bulb temperature 23 °C (73.4°F) 27 °C (80.6°F)

Table 502. Maximum altitude3, 4

3048 m (10 000 ft)

Table 503. Noise emissions1

Properties Operating Idle
LWAd, one 7311-D10 5.6 bels 5.6 bels
LWAd, two 7311-D10 5.9 bels 5.9 bels
LWAd, four 7311-D10 6.2 bels 6.2 bels
<LpA>m, one 7311-D10 40 dB 40 dB
<LpA>m, two 7311-D10 43 dB 43 dB
<LpA>m, four 7311-D10 46 dB 46 dB

Table 504. Service clearances

Dimensions Front Back Sides
Metric 915 mm 915 mm 915 mm

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 427

Table 504. Service clearances (continued)
Dimensions Front Back Sides
English 36 in. 36 in. 36 in.

Table 505. Hardware specifications

Note:
1. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.
2. Inrush currents occur only at initial application of power, no inrush occurs during normal power off-on cycle.
3. The upper limit of the dry bulb temperature must be derated 1°C per 137 m (450 ft) above 915 m (3000 ft).
4. The upper limit of the wet bulb temperature must be derated 1°C per 274 m (900 ft) above 305 m (1000 ft).

Related information:
Acoustics

7311-D11 expansion unit

Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your expansion unit, including dimensions,
electrical, power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.
Table 506. Dimensions
Maximum
configuration
Dimensions Height Width Depth Maximum weight two
configuration 7311-D11 with
weight7311-D11 drawer enclosure
Metric 168 mm 221 mm 711 mm 16.8 kg 39.1 kg
English 6.6 in. 8.7 in. 28.0 in. 37 lb 86 lb

Table 507. Electrical

Electrical characteristics Properties
kVA 0.211 0.421
Rated voltage and frequency 200 - 240 V ac at 50 - 60 plus or 200 - 240 V ac at 50 - 60 plus or
minus 0.5 Hz minus 0.5 Hz
Thermal output (maximum) 683 Btu/hr1 1366 Btu/hr1
Power requirements (maximum) 200 W1 400 W1
Power factor 0.951 0.951
Inrush current per 7311-D11 71 A1 71 A1
Leakage current (maximum) 3 mA1 3 mA1
Phase 1 1

Table 508. Temperature requirements

Operating Nonoperating
10 - 38°C (50 - 100.4°F) 1 - 60°C (33.8 - 140°F)

Table 509. Environment requirements

Environment Operating Nonoperating
Noncondensing humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80%

428 Site and hardware planning

Table 509. Environment requirements (continued)
Environment Operating Nonoperating
Wet bulb temperature 23°C (73.4°F) 27°C (80.6°F)

Table 510. Maximum altitude

3048 m (10 000 ft)

1
Table 511. Noise emissions (one 7311-D11 unit)
Properties Operating Idle
LWAd 5.6 bels 5.6 bels
<LpA>m 40 dB 40 dB

Table 512. Service clearances

Dimensions Front Back Sides Top
Metric 915 mm 915 mm 915 mm 915 mm
English 36 in. 36 in. 36 in. 36 in.

Table 513. Note

Note:
1. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.

For information about floor loading, contact your IBM service or Installation Planning representative.
Because the thickness of the covers are negligible, the height, width, and depth of the overall dimensions
might be used in floor loading calculations.
Related information:
Acoustics

7311-D20 expansion unit

Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your expansion unit, including dimensions,
electrical, power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.
Table 514. Dimensions
Dimensions Height Width Depth
Metric 178 mm 445 mm 610 mm
English 7.0 in. 17.5 in. 24.0 in.

Table 515. Maximum configuration weight

45.9 kg (101 lb)

Table 516. Electrical

Electrical Characteristics Properties
kVA 0.358
Rated voltage and frequency 100 - 240 V ac at 50 - 60 Hz, V dc not supported
Thermal output (typical) 775 Btu/hr

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 429

Table 516. Electrical (continued)
Electrical Characteristics Properties
Thermal output (maximum) 1161 Btu/hr
Power requirements (typical) 227 W
Power requirements (maximum) 340 W
Power factor 0.95
2
Inrush current per 7311-D20 60 A

Table 517. Temperature requirements3

Operating Nonoperating Storage
5 - 35°C (41 - 95°F) 1 - 60°C (33.8 - 140°F) 1 - 60°C (33.8 - 140°F)

Table 518. Environment requirements

Environemtn Operating Nonoperating Storage
Noncondensing humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80% 5 - 80%
4
Wet bulb temperature 23°C (73.4°F) 27°C (80.6°F) 29°C (84.2°F)

Table 519. Maximum altitude3, 4

3048 m (10 000 ft)

Table 520. Noise emissions

Properties Operating Idle
LWAd 6.2 bels 6.1 bels
<LpA>m 44 dB 43 dB

Table 521. Service clearances

Dimensions Front Back Sides
Metric 915 mm 915 mm 915 mm
English 36 in. 36 in. 36 in.

Table 522. Notes

Notes:
1. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.
2. Inrush currents occur only at initial application of power, no inrush occurs during normal power off-on cycle.
3. The upper limit of the dry bulb temperature must be derated 1°C per 137 m (450 ft) above 915 m (3000 ft).
4. The upper limit of the wet bulb temperature must be derated 1°C per 274 m (900 ft) above 305 m (1000 ft).

Related information:
Acoustics

430 Site and hardware planning

7314-G30 and 5796 expansion unit
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your expansion unit, including dimensions,
electrical, power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.
Table 523. Dimensions I/O drawer only
Dimensions Height Width Depth
Metric 172 mm 224 mm 800 mm
English 6.8 in. 8.8 in. 31.5 in.

Table 524. Dimensions - with required I/O drawer mounting enclosure

Dimensions Height Width Depth
Metric 176 mm 473 mm 800 mm
English 6.9 in. 18.6 in. 31.5 in.

Table 525. Maximum configuration weight

One I/O drawer Two I/O drawers plus the mounting enclosure
20 kg (44 lb) 45.9 kg (101 lb)

Table 526. Electrical

Electrical characteristics Properties
kVA 0.275
Rated voltage and frequency 200 - 240 V ac at 50 - 60 Hz, V dc not supported
Thermal output 853 Btu/hr
Power requirements (maximum) 250 W
Power factor 0.91
2
Inrush current per 7314-G30 60 A

Table 527. Temperature requirements3

Operating Nonoperating Storage
10 - 38°C (50 - 100°F) 1 - 60°C (33.8 - 140°F) 1 - 60°C (33.8 - 140°F)

Table 528. Environment requirements

Environment Operating Nonoperating Storage
Noncondensing humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80% 5 - 80%
4
Wet bulb temperature 23°C (73.4°F) 27°C (80.6°F) 29°C (84.2°F)

Table 529. Maximum altitude

3048 m (10 000 ft)

Table 530. Noise emissions1

Properties Operating Idle
LWAd 6.2 bels 6.1 bels
<LpA>m 44 dB 43 dB

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 431

Table 531. Service clearances
Dimensions Front Back Sides
Metric 915 mm 915 mm 915 mm
English 36 in. 36 in. 36 in.

Table 532. Notes

Notes:
1. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.
2. Inrush currents occur only at initial application of power, no inrush occurs during normal power off-on cycle.
3. The upper limit of the dry bulb temperature must be derated 1°C per 137 m (450 ft) above 915 m (3000 ft).
4. The upper limit of the wet bulb temperature must be derated 1°C per 274 m (900 ft) above 305 m (1000 ft).

Related information:
Acoustics

8079 optional base 1.8 m model 9406-840 I/O rack

Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical,
power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Pictured is the 8079 optional base 1.8 m model 9406-840 I/O rack.

The 8079 consists of a 1.8 m rack with a bottom enclosure (9079 Base I/O Tower with side covers and
casters removed) and a top enclosure (5074 PCI expansion unit with side covers and casters removed).

Table 533. Dimensions

Maximum
Dimensions Width Depth Height
configuration weight
Metric 726 kg 650 mm 1020 mm 1800 mm
English 1600 lb 25.5 in. 40.1 in. 71.0 in.

432 Site and hardware planning

Table 534. Electrical1
Electrical characteristics 8079 (1) 8079 (2)
kVA 1.100 1.100
Rated voltage and frequency 200 - 240 V ac at 50 - 60 plus or 200 - 240 V ac at 50 - 60 plus or
minus 0.5 Hz minus 0.5 Hz
Thermal output (maximum) 3379 Btu/hr 3379 Btu/hr
Power requirements (maximum) 990 W 990 W
Power factor 0.91 0.91
Inrush current 50 A 50 A
Leakage current (maximum) 3.5 mA 3.5 mA
Phase 1 1

Table 535. Temperature requirements

Operating Nonoperating
10 - 38°C (50 - 100.4°F) 1 - 60°C (33.8 - 140°F)

Table 536. Environment requirements

Environment Operating Nonoperating
Noncondensing humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80%
Wet bulb temperature 23°C (73.4°F) 27°C (80.6°F)

Table 537. Maximum altitude

3048 m (10 000 ft)

Table 538. Noise emissions4

Properties Operating Idle
LWAd (Category 2D, General business) 7.0 bels 6.9 bels
LpAm (1-meter bystander) 52 dB 52 dB

Table 539. Service clearances3

Dimensions Front Back Sides Top
Metric 762 mm 762 mm 762 mm 762 mm
English 30 in. 30 in. 30 in. 30 in.

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 433

Table 540. Notes
Notes:
1. The electrical requirements for the 5074 and 9079 in the 8079 rack need to be planned for individually. The
power cords for the 5074 and 9079 must be used to determine the appropriate receptacles.
2. The usable length of the power cord for the 5074 is reduced by 4 ft (1.2 m) because of the routing inside the 1.8
m enclosure. Therefore, a 14 ft (4.3 m) cord results in a usable length of 10 ft (3 m), and a 9 ft (2.7 m) cord
results in a usable length of 5 ft (1.5 m).
3. For information about floor loading, contact your IBM service or Installation Planning representative. Because
the thickness of the covers are negligible, the height, width, and depth of the overall dimensions might be used
in floor loading calculations.
4. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.

Related information:
Acoustics

8094 and 5097 base I/O expansion unit optional 1.8 m rack
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical,
power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Pictured is the 8094 and 5097 base I/O expansion unit (for servers 9406-870 and 9406-890) optional 1.8 m
rack.

The 8094 base I/O expansion unit consists of a 1.8 m rack with a bottom enclosure (9094 expansion unit
with side covers and casters removed) and a top enclosure (5074 PCI-X expansion unit with side covers
and casters removed).

Table 541. Dimensions

Dimensions Maximum Width Depth Height
configuration weight
Metric 726 kg 650 mm 1020 mm 1800 mm

434 Site and hardware planning

Table 541. Dimensions (continued)
Dimensions Maximum Width Depth Height
configuration weight
English 1600 lb 25.5 in. 40.1 in. 71.0 in.

Table 542. Electrical1

Electrical characteristics 8094 base I/O expansion unit (1) 8094 base I/O expansion unit (2)
kVA 1.100 (est.) 1.100 (est.)
Rated voltage and frequency 200 - 240 V ac at 50 - 60 plus or 200 - 240 V ac at 50 - 60 plus or
minus 0.5 Hz minus 0.5 Hz
Thermal output (maximum) 3379 Btu/hr (est.) 3379 Btu/hr (est.)
Power requirements (maximum) 990 W (est.) 990 W (est.)
Power factor 0.91 0.91
Inrush current 50 A (est.) 50 A (est.)
Leakage current (maximum) 3.5 mA 3.5 mA
Phase 1 1

Table 543. Maximum altitude

3048 m (10 000 ft)

Table 544. Temperature requirements

Operating Nonoperating
10 - 38°C (50 - 100.4 °F) 1 - 60°C (33.8 - 140°F)

Table 545. Environment requirements

Environment Operating Nonoperating
Noncondensing humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80%
Wet bulb temperature 23°C (73.4°F) 27°C (80.6°F)

Table 546. Noise emissions4

Properties Operating Idle
LWAd Category 2E, General business 7.0 bels 6.9 bels
<LpA>m (dB) 52 dB 52 dB

Table 547. Service clearances3

Dimensions Front Back Sides Top
Metric 762 mm 762 mm 762 mm 762 mm
English 30 in. 30 in. 30 in. 30 in.

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 435

Table 548. Notes
Notes:
1. The electrical requirements for the 5094 and 9094 in the 8094 base I/O expansion unit need to be planned for
individually. The power cords for the 5094 and 9094 must be used to determine the appropriate receptacles.
2. The usable length of the power cord for the 5094 is reduced by 4 ft (1.2 m) because of the routing inside the
1.8 m enclosure. Therefore, a 14 ft (4.3 m) cord results in a usable length of 10 ft (3 m), and a 9 ft (2.7 m) cord
results in a usable length of 5 ft (1.5 m).
3. For information about floor loading, contact your IBM service or Installation Planning representative. Because
the thickness of the covers are negligible, the height, width, and depth of the overall dimensions might be used
in floor loading calculations.
4. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.

Related information:
Acoustics

9074 base I/O enclosure

The 9074 Base I/O Enclosure is included with models 9406-830 and SB2. The 9074 is the lower part of the
system.

9079 base I/O expansion unit or 5074 expansion unit

Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your expansion unit, including dimensions,
electrical, power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Pictured is the 9079 base I/O expansion unit or 5074 expansion unit.

The 9079 base I/O expansion unit is included with models 9406-840 and SB3.

Dimensions are shown for the 9079 base I/O expansion unit or 5074 expansion unit. Measurements do
not include models 9406-840 or SB3.

Table 549. Dimensions

Maximum
Height in 0551
configuration Width Depth Height
rack2
Dimensions weight
Metric 280 kg 485 mm 1075 mm 910 mm 18 EIA

436 Site and hardware planning

Table 549. Dimensions (continued)
Maximum
Height in 0551
configuration Width Depth Height
rack2
Dimensions weight
English 617 lb 19.1 in. 42.3 in. 35.8 in. 18 U

Table 550. Electrical

Electrical characteristics Properties
kVA 1.100
Rated voltage and frequency 200 - 240 V ac at 50 - 60 plus or minus 0.5 Hz
Thermal output 3379 Btu/hr
Power requirements (maximum) 990 W
Power factor 0.9
Inrush current 42 A
Leakage current (maximum) 3.5 mA
Phase 1

Table 551. Temperature requirements

Operating Nonoperating
10 - 38°C (50 - 100.4°F) 1 - 60°C (33.8 - 140°F)

Table 552. Environment requirements

Environment Operating Nonoperating
Noncondensing humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80%
Wet bulb temperature 23°C (73.4°F) 27°C (80.6°F)

Table 553. Maximum altitude

3048 m (10 000 ft)

Table 554. Noise emissions

Properties Operating Idle
LWAd 6.7 bels 6.6 bels
LpAm (1-meter bystander) 49 dB 49 dB

Table 555. Service clearances

Dimensions Front Back Sides3 Top3
Metric 762 mm 762 mm 762 mm 762 mm
English 30 in. 30 in. 30 in. 30 in.

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 437

Table 556. Note
Notes:
1. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.
2. Feature code 0574 is equivalent to the 5074 expansion unit. Feature code 0123 is equivalent to a 5074 lower unit
in the rack.
3. Side and top clearances are optional when operating.

Related information:
Acoustics

9094 base I/O expansion unit, 9194 I/O expansion unit, or 5094
expansion unit
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your expansion unit, including dimensions,
electrical, power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Pictured is the 9094, 9194 base I/O expansion unit, or the 5094 expansion unit.

The 9094, 9194 base I/O expansion unit is included with models 9406-870 and 9406-890. The 5094 is
available with models 9406-870 and 9406-890.

Dimensions are shown for the 9094 base I/O expansion unit or 5094 expansion unit. Measurements do
not include models 9406-870 and 9406-890.

Table 557. Dimensions

Dimensions Maximum Width Depth Height Height in 0551
configuration rack3
weight

Metric 280 kg 485 mm 1075 mm 910 mm 18 EIA

English 617 lb 19.1 in. 42.3 in. 35.8 in. 18 U

438 Site and hardware planning

Table 558. Electrical
Electrical characteristics Properties
kVA 1.100
Rated voltage and frequency 200 - 240 V ac at 50 - 60 plus or minus 0.5 Hz
Thermal Output 3379 Btu/hr
Power requirements (maximum) 990 W
Power factor 0.9
Inrush current 42 A
Leakage current (maximum) 3.5 mA
Phase 1

Table 559. Temperature requirements

Operating Nonoperating
10 - 38°C (50 - 100.4°F) 1 - 60°C (33.8 - 140°F)

Table 560. Environment requirements

Environment Operating Nonoperating
Noncondensing Humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80%
Wet bulb temperature 23°C (73.4°F) 27°C (80.6°F)

Table 561. Maximum altitude

3048 m (10 000 ft)

Table 562. Noise emissions1

Properties Operating Idle
LWAd 6.7 bels 6.6 bels
LpAm (1-meter bystander) 49 dB 49 dB

Table 563. Service clearances

Dimensions Front Back Sides4 Top4
Metric 762 mm 762 mm 762 mm 762 mm
English 30 in. 30 in. 30 in. 30 in.

Table 564. Notes

Notes:
1. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.
2. It is strongly recommended that you get the dual line cord feature (feature 5114) for this I/O expansion unit.
Feature 5114 uses 2 power cords and has 2 AC boxes.
3. Feature code 0694 is equivalent to the 5094 expansion unit.
4. Side and top clearances are optional when operating.

Related information:
Acoustics

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 439

5079 1.8 m storage and PCI expansion unit
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your expansion unit, including dimensions,
electrical, power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Pictured is the 5079 1.8 m storage and PCI expansion unit.

There are two 5074 expansions (with side covers and casters removed) in a 5079 1.8 m storage and PCI
expansion unit.

Dimensions are shown for the 5079 1.8 m storage and PCI expansion unit only.

Table 565. Dimensions

Maximum
Dimensions Height Width Depth
configuration weight
Metric 726 kg 1800 mm 650 mm 1020 mm
English 1600 lb 71.0 in. 25.5 in. 40.1 in.

Table 566. Electrical

Electrical characteristics 50741 50742
kVA 1.100 1.100
Rated voltage and frequency 200 - 240 at 50 - 60 plus or minus 0.5 200 - 240 at 50 - 60 plus or minus 0.5
Hz Hz
Thermal Output (maximum) 3379 Btu/hr 3379 Btu/hr
Power requirements (maximum) 990 W 990 W
Power factor 0.91 0.91
Inrush current 50 A 50 A
Leakage current (maximum) 3.5 mA 3.5 mA
Phase 1 1

440 Site and hardware planning

Table 567. Temperature requirements
Operating Nonoperating
10 - 38°C (50 - 100.4°F) 1 - 60°C (33.8 - 140°F)

Table 568. Environment requirements

Environment Operating Nonoperating
Noncondensing Humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80%
Wet bulb temperature 23°C (73.4°F) 27°C (80.6°F)

Table 569. Maximum altitude

3048 m (10 000 ft)

Table 570. Noise emissions

Properties Operating Idle
LWAd Category 2E, General Business 7.0 bels 6.9 bels
<LpA>m 52 dB 52 dB

Table 571. Service clearances

Dimensions Front Back Sides Top
Metric 762 mm 762 mm 762 mm 762 mm
English 30 in. 30 in. 30 in. 30 in.

Table 572. Notes

Notes:
1. Because the 5079 1.8 m storage and PCI expansion unit consists of two 5074 storage/PCI expansions, electrical
requirements for each 5074 need to be planned for individually. Hence, the (1) and (2) represent the specs for
each 5074. The 5074 requires the appropriate receptacle for the power cord included with each 5074.
2. The usable length of the power cord for the upper 5074 is reduced by 1.2 m (4 ft) because of the routing inside
the 1.8 m enclosure. Therefore, a 4.3 m (14 ft) cord results in a usable length of 3 m (10 ft), and a 2.7 m (9 ft)
cord results in a usable length of 1.5 m (5 ft).
3. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.

For information about floor loading, contact your IBM service or installation planning representative.
Because the thickness of the covers are negligible, the height, width, and depth of the overall dimensions
might be used in floor loading calculations.
Related reference:
“5074 expansion unit or 9079 expansion unit with 5078 expansion unit ” on page 307
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your expansion unit, including dimensions,
electrical, power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.
Related information:
Acoustics

Chapter 5. Expansion unit and migration tower specifications 441

442 Site and hardware planning
Chapter 6. Rack specifications
Rack specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.

For information on previously released pSeries racks, see the IBM Systems Information Center.

For non-IBM rack specifications, see Specifications for non-IBM rack installation.

Select your rack model to view its specifications.

Related reference:
Chapter 12, “Rack installation procedures for racks not purchased at IBM,” on page 725
Learn the requirements and specifications for installing IBM systems into racks that were not purchased
at IBM.
“5079 1.8 m storage and PCI expansion unit” on page 440
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your expansion unit, including dimensions,
electrical, power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.
“5294 or 8294 1.8 m I/O rack” on page 319
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical,
power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.
“Planning for 5792 base rack” on page 327
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical,
power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.

0550 model 9406-830 rack

Rack specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Pictured is the 0550 iSeries rack.

When ordered by itself, the 0550 rack provides an empty 1.8 meter tall rack (36 EIA units of total vertical
space).

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2007, 2009 443

Table 573. Dimensions
Maximum
configuration Width Depth Height
Dimensions weight1
Metric 644 kg 650 mm 1020 mm 1800 mm
English 1417 lb 25.5 in. 40.0 in. 71.0 in.

Table 574. Electrical

Electrical characteristics Properties
kVA (maximum) 1.684
Rated voltage and frequency 200 - 240 V ac at 50 - 60 plus or minus 0.5 Hz
Thermal output (maximum) 5461 Btu/hr
Power requirements (maximum) 1600 W
Power factor 0.95
Inrush current 80 A
Leakage current (maximum) 3.5 mA
Phase 1

Table 575. Service clearance

Front Back Sides2 Top2
762 mm 762 mm 762 mm 762 mm
30 in. 30 in. 30 in. 30 in.

444 Site and hardware planning

Table 576. Notes
Notes:
1. The 1.8 meter rack has 10 EIA units of space remaining. This space will be filled with a 5 EIA filler panel, a 3
EIA filler panel, and two of the 1 EIA filler panels. Because the rack does not have power distribution, the model
9406-830 requires a power cord of sufficient length to reach the receptacle. The power cord for model 9406-830
must be used to determine the appropriate receptacle.
2. Side and top clearances are optional when operating.

Related reference:
“High-speed link information” on page 671
High-speed link (HSL) cables connect systems to I/O enclosures, IXA cards in System x® expansion units
and other systems.
“0550 rack configuration”
The 0550 rack configuration is provided to assist in planning for your 0550 rack.

0550 rack configuration

The 0550 rack configuration is provided to assist in planning for your 0550 rack.

When ordered by itself, the 0550 provides an empty 1.8 meter rack (36 EIA units of total space). The
configuration for the 0551 rack is:

Feature Code 05501

Top rack specify none
Bottom rack specify none
PDU support 0 to 42
Power cords Model 9406-8303, PDU

Note:
1. Ten EIA units of space not managed by the configurator.
2. Feature codes 5160, 5161, and 5162.
3. Model 9406-830 does not plug into a power distribution unit.

0551 rack
The 0551 rack specifications provide detailed information for your rack.

Pictured is the 0551 rack

Chapter 6. Rack specifications 445

The 0551 provides an empty 1.8 m rack (36 EIA units of total space). See the plug types for specific
information on the power distribution units.

Table 577. Dimensions

Maximum Width Depth Height
Dimensions configuration weight
Metric The weight of the
empty rack is 244 kg
(535 lb). Click the 650 mm 1020 mm 1800 mm
appropriate link to
see the weight for
what is installed.
English 0123, 0133, 0134, 0578,
0588, 0595, 0137, 0138,
9406-570 and 25.5 in. 40.0 in. 71.0 in.
9117-570,0574, 0694,
7884

Table 578. Electricity

Electrical characteristics Properties
Click the appropriate link to see the electrical 0123, 0133, 0134, 0578, 0588, 0595, 0137, 0138, 9406-570
characteristics for what is installed. and 9117-570,0574, 0694, 7884

Table 579. Temperature requirements

Operating Nonoperating
10 - 38°C (50 - 100.4°F) 1 - 60°C (33.8 - 140°F )

Table 580. Environment requirements

Environment Operating Nonoperating
Noncondensing humidity 8 - 80% 8 - 80%
Wet bulb temperature 22.8°C (73°F) 22.8°C (73°F)

446 Site and hardware planning

Table 580. Environment requirements (continued)
Environment Operating Nonoperating
Maximum altitude 3048 m (10000 ft) 3048 m (10000 ft)
4
Noise emissions Rack noise levels are a function of Rack noise levels are a function of
the number and type of drawers the number and type of drawers
installed. See your server or installed. See your server or
hardware specifications for specific hardware specifications for specific
requirements requirements

Table 581. Service clearances

Front Back Sides2 Top2
762 mm 762 mm 762 mm 762 mm
30 in. 30 in. 30 in. 30 in.

Table 582. Notes

Notes:
1. The 1.8 meter rack has 10 EIA units of space remaining. This space will be filled with a 5 EIA filler panel, a 3
EIA filler panel, and two of the 1 EIA filler panels. Because the rack does not have power distribution, the model
830 requires a power cord of sufficient length to reach the receptacle. The power cord for model 830 must be
used to determine the appropriate receptacle.
2. Side and top clearances are optional during operation.
3. Acoustic doors are available for the IBM racks. Feature code 6248 is available for the 0551 and 7014-T00 racks.
Feature code 6249 is available for the 0553 and 7014-T42 racks. The overall sound reduction is approximately 6
dB. The doors add 381 mm (15 in.) to the depth of the racks.
4. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.

See 0551 or 7014 rack configurations for typical configurations when the 0551 or 7014 rack is populated
with various server models.

Caster and leveler locations

The following diagram provides the caster and leveler locations for the 7014-T00, 7014-T42, 0551, 0553
and 0555 racks.

Chapter 6. Rack specifications 447

Figure 241. Caster and leveler locations

Related reference:
Chapter 9, “Power distribution unit and power cord options for 7014, 0551, 0553, and 0555 rack,” on page
487
Power distribution units (PDUs) can be used with the 7014, 0551, 0553 and 0555 racks. The various
configurations and specifications are provided.
“0551, 0553, 0555, and 7014 rack configurations” on page 451
The 0551 or 7014-T00 provide a 1.8 meter rack (36 EIA units of total space). The 7014-T42 or 0553
provides a 2.0 meter rack (42 EIA units of total space).
Related information:
Acoustics

Model 7014-T42, 7014-B42, and 0553 rack

Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical,
power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.

Note: Before installing rear door heat exchangers on your 7014-T42 rack, see Planning for the installation of
rear door heat exchangers.
Table 583. Dimensions
Dimensions Properties
Height 2015 mm (79.3 in.)
Capacity 42 usable EIA units
Height with PDP - DC only Not applicable
Width without side panels 623 mm (24.5 in.)
Width with side panels 644 mm (25.4 in)

448 Site and hardware planning

Table 583. Dimensions (continued)
Dimensions Properties
Depth with back door only 1042 mm (41.0 in.)
Depth with back door and front door 1098 mm (43.3 in.)
Depth with sculptured style front door 1147 mm (45.2 in.)
Weight Base rack (empty) 261 kg (575 lb)
Weight Full rack
930 kg (2045 lb)

See 7014-T00, 7014-T42 and 0553 rack weight distribution

and floor loading
Weight Slim doors 15.4 kg (34 lb)
Weight Side covers 16.3 kg (36 lb)

Table 584. Electrical1

Electrical characteristics Properties
DC rack voltage (nominal) -48 V dc
Power source loading maximum in kVa2 See Power cord options for the 7014, 0551, 0553, and 0555
racks for details
Voltage range (V dc) -40 - -60
AC rack 683 Btu/hr
3
Power source loading maximum in kVa (per PDB) 135 W
Voltage range (V ac) 200 - 240
Frequency (Hz) 50 or 60

Table 585. Service clearances1

Front Back Sides
915 mm (36 in.) 915 mm (36 in.) 915 mm (36 in.)

See your server or hardware specifications for specific requirements.

See your server or hardware specifications for specific requirements.

Rack noise levels are a function of the number and type of drawers installed. See your server or
hardware specifications for specific requirements3.

Rack airflow requirements are a function of the number and type of drawers installed4. Refer to the
individual drawer specifications.

Chapter 6. Rack specifications 449

Table 586. Notes
Note:
1. Recommended minimum vertical service clearance from floor is 2439 mm (8 ft)
2. When installing a model 9117-570 or 9406-570 in a 7014-T42 rack, there are restrictions to what height the rack
installation can begin so that SMP and FSP flex assemblies are accommodated. The installation configurations are
as follows:
v 16-core configurations (16U) start installation between EIA 1 through EIA 21
v 12-core configurations (12U) start installation between EIA 1 though EIA 25
v 8-core configurations (8U) start installation between EIA 1 through EIA 29
v 4-core configurations (4U) start installation between EIA 1 through EIA 37, EIA 37 through 39 (does not use
SMP or SMP flex assemblies)
Associated I/O platforms can be mounted in the upper locations of the rack.
3. Acoustic doors are available for the IBM racks. Feature code 6248 is available for the 0551 and 7014-T00 racks.
Feature code 6249 is available for the 0553 and 7014-T42 racks. The overall sound reduction is approximately 6
dB. The doors add 381 mm (15 in.) to the depth of the racks.
4. All rack installations require careful site and facilities planning designed to address both the cumulative drawer
heat output and provide the airflow volume rates necessary to comply with drawer temperature requirements.

Caster and leveler locations

The following diagram provides the caster and leveler locations for the 7014-T00, 7014-T42, 0551, 0553,
and 0555 racks.

Figure 242. Caster and leveler locations

Related reference:
Chapter 9, “Power distribution unit and power cord options for 7014, 0551, 0553, and 0555 rack,” on page
487
Power distribution units (PDUs) can be used with the 7014, 0551, 0553 and 0555 racks. The various

450 Site and hardware planning

configurations and specifications are provided.
Related information:
Planning for the installation of rear door heat exchangers

0551, 0553, 0555, and 7014 rack configurations

The 0551 or 7014-T00 provide a 1.8 meter rack (36 EIA units of total space). The 7014-T42 or 0553
provides a 2.0 meter rack (42 EIA units of total space).

The various configurations for the 0551, 7014, 0553 and 0555 racks are:
v 9406 feature code 7884, 9111 rack content specify code 0229 - 9406-520 and 9111-520 in rack
v 9113 rack content specify code 0230, 9406 rack content specify code 7886
v 9406-570 and 9117-570 in rack, 9117 rack content specify codes 0231, 0232, 0241, 0242
v Feature code 0123 - 5074 lower expansion unit in rack; Feature code 0574 - 5074 equivalent
v Feature code 0694 - 5094 equivalent
v Feature code 0133 - Manufacturing install in rack (models 9406-800 and 9406-810); Feature code 0137 -
Field install in rack (models 9406-800 and 9406-810)
v Feature code 0134 - Field install in rack (model 9406-825); Feature code 0138 - Field install in rack
(model 9406-825)
v Feature code 0578 - PCI-X expansion unit in rack
v Feature code 0588 - PCI-X expansion unit in rack
v Feature code 0595 - PCI-X expansion unit in rack

9406 feature code 7884, 9111 rack content specify code 0229 - 9406-520 and 9111-520 in rack

IBM rack 05511, 05531, 701413, 0555

Top rack, specify code
Bottom rack, specify code
Rack, specify code 7884, 0229
PDU support 0 to 42
Power cords 7884, PDU3

9113 rack content, specify code 0230; 9406 rack content, specify code 7886

Chapter 6. Rack specifications 451

IBM rack 701413
Top rack, specify code
Bottom rack, specify code
Rack, specify code 0230 (9113-550), 7886 (9406-550)
PDU support 0 to 42
Power cords PDU4

9406-570 in rack, 9117-570 rack content, specify codes 0231, 0232, 0241, 0242

IBM rack 05511, 05531, 701413, and 0555

Top rack, specify code
Bottom rack, specify code
Rack, specify code 0231, 0232, 0241, 0242
PDU support 0 to 42
Power cords PDU4

452 Site and hardware planning

Feature code 0123 - 5074 lower expansion unit in rack; Feature code 0574 - 5074 equivalent

IBM rack 05511, 05531, and 0555

Top rack, specify code
Bottom rack, specify code 0123
Rack, specify code 0574
PDU support 0 to 42
Power cords 0123, 0574, PDU5

Feature code 0694 - 5094 equivalent

IBM rack 05511, 05531, and 0555

Top rack, specify code
Bottom rack, specify code
Rack, specify code 0694
PDU support 0 to 42
Power cords 0694, PDU6

Feature code 0133 - Manufacturing install in rack (models 9406-800 and 9406-810); Feature code 0137 -
Field install in rack (models 9406-800 and 9406-810)

Chapter 6. Rack specifications 453

IBM rack 05511, 05531, and 0555
Top rack, specify code
Bottom rack, specify code
Rack, specify code 01339, 01379
PDU support 0 to 42
Power cords 0133, 0137, PDU4

Feature code 0134 - Field install in rack (model 9406-825); Feature code 0138 - Field install in rack
(model 9406-825)

IBM rack 05511, 05531, and 0555

Top rack, specify code
Bottom rack, specify code
Rack, specify code 013410, 013810
PDU support 0 to 42
Power cords 0134, 0138, PDU4

Feature code 0578 - PCI-X expansion unit in rack

454 Site and hardware planning

IBM rack 05511, 05531, and 0555
Top rack, specify code
Bottom rack, specify code
Rack, specify code 0578
PDU support 0 to 42
Power cords PDU8

Feature code 0588 - PCI-X expansion unit in rack

IBM rack 05511, 05531, and 0555

Top rack, specify code
Bottom rack, specify code
Rack, specify code 0588
PDU support 0 to 42
Power cords PDU12

Feature code 0595 - PCI-X expansion unit in rack

Chapter 6. Rack specifications 455

IBM rack 05511, 05531, and 0555
Top rack, specify code
Bottom rack, specify code
Rack, specify code 0595
PDU support 0 to 42
Power cords 0595, PDU11

Notes:
1. 0551 is an empty 1.8 meter rack with 36 EIA units of total space. 0553 is a 2.0 meter rack with 42 EIA
units of total space.
2. 0551, 0553, and 0555 feature codes 5160, 5161, 5163, and 7188. 7014 feature codes 7176, 7177, 7178,
and 7188.
3. If units plug into a power distribution unit (PDU), power jumper cord feature code 6458, 6459, 6095,
or 9911 is required. If redundant power supply (feature code 5158) is ordered, a second power
jumper cord feature code is required.
4. If unit plugs into a PDU, two feature code 6458, 6459, 6095, or 9911 power jumper cords are
required.
5. Feature code 0123 or 0574 do not plug into a PDU.
6. Feature code 0125 does not plug into a PDU.
7. Supported only on MES orders and includes a rack shelf with rail assembly, adapter plate, and
cable-management-arm assembly.
8. 0578 includes two rack power cords that plug into a PDU.
9. Field install in rack feature is used to mount a model 9406-270, 9406-800, or 9406-810 system unit (14
U) with attached expansion unit. This feature provides a rack shelf (2 U) with rail assembly,
cable-management-arm assembly, adapter plate, and a pair of lift covers.
10. Field install in rack feature is used to mount a model 9406-825 system unit (14 U). This feature
provides a rack shelf (2 U), cable-management-arm assembly, adapter plate, and a pair of lift covers.
11. If unit plugs into a PDU, feature code 1422 is required. If redundant power supply (feature code
5138) is ordered, a second feature code 1422 is required.
12. 0588 comes with two rack power cords that plug into a PDU.
13. 7014-T00 is a 1.8 meter rack with 36 EIA units of total space. 7014-T42 is a 2.0 meter rack with 42
EIA units of total space. The rack includes one PDU, feature code 9188, 9176, 9177, or 9178.

0551 model 9406-270 rack system units

Server specifications provide detailed information for your server, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.

456 Site and hardware planning

Pictured is the 0551 model 9406-270 Rack system units. The 0551 consists of two model 9406-270s with
7104 system unit expansions installed in a 1.8 m rack. Specify code 0121 represents the first model
9406-270 in the rack (on the bottom). Specify code 0122 represents the second model 9406-270 in the rack
(on the top).

Table 587. Dimensions

Maximum
Dimensions configuration Height Width Depth
weight1
Metric 403 kg 1800 mm 650 mm 1020 mm
English 885 lb 71.0 in. 25.5 in. 40.0 in.

Table 588. Electrical

Electrical characteristics Properties
kVA (maximum) 0.789
Rated voltage and frequency 100 - 127 or 200 - 240 V ac at 50 - 60 plus or minus 0.5
Hz
Thermal output (maximum) 2560 Btu/hr
Power requirements (maximum) 750 W
Power factor 0.95
Inrush current 41 A
Leakage current (maximum) 3.5 mA
Phase 1

Table 589. Temperature requirements

Operating Nonoperating
10 - 38°C (50 - 100.4°F) 1 - 60°C (33.8 - 140°F)

Chapter 6. Rack specifications 457

Table 590. Environment requirements
Environment Operating Nonoperating
Wet bulb temperature 23°C (73.4°F) 27°C (80.6°F)
Maximum altitude 3048 m (10 000 ft) 3048 m (10 000 ft)

Table 591. Noise emissions5

Properties Operating Idle
LWAd (Category 2E, General business) 6.6 bels 6.3 bels
<LpA>m 48 dB 46 dB

Table 592. Service clearances

Front Back Sides3 Top3
762 mm 762 mm 762 mm 762 mm
30 in. 30 in. 30 in. 30 in.

Table 593. Notes

Notes:
1. The 1.8 meter rack has 6 EIA units of space remaining. This space will be filled with a 3 EIA filler panel and
three of the 1 EIA filler panels.
2. Only the 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord features are offered for racked 9406-270 systems. There are a total of four
power cords that are routed through cable management arms. Also, there is a cable management device that
might be used to restrict the length of the power cord exiting the bottom of the rack (for cities like Chicago). See
model 9406-270 Cable Poster Addendum included with the 0551 model 9406-270 rack.
3. Side and top clearances are optional when operating.
4. The rack does not have power distribution. Each model 9406-270 and 7104 requires a power cord of sufficient
length to reach the receptacle. The power cord feature codes for model 9406-270s must be used to determine the
appropriate receptacles.
5. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.

See High Speed Link (HSL) cable requirements

Related reference:
“High-speed link information” on page 671
High-speed link (HSL) cables connect systems to I/O enclosures, IXA cards in System x expansion units
and other systems.
Related information:
Acoustics

Model 0554 and 7014-S11 rack

Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical,
power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.
Table 594. Dimensions
Dimension Properties
Height 611 mm (24 in.)
Capacity 11 usable EIA units
Height with PDP - DC only Not applicable

458 Site and hardware planning

Table 594. Dimensions (continued)
Dimension Properties
Width without side panels Not applicable
Width with side panels 518 mm (20.4 in.)
Depth without doors 820 mm (32.3 in.)
Depth with front door 873 mm (34.4 in.)
Depth with sculptured style front door Not applicable
Weight Base rack (empty) 36 kg (80 lb)
1
Weight Full rack 218 kg (481 lb)

Table 595. Electrical3

Electrical characteristics Properties
DC rack voltage (nominal) Not applicable
Power source loading maximum in kVa Not applicable
Voltage range (V dc) Not applicable
AC rack See your server or hardware specifications for specific
requirements
Power source loading maximum in kVa (per PDU) See your server or hardware specifications for specific
requirements
Voltage range (V ac) See your server or hardware specifications for specific
requirements
Frequency (Hz) 50 or 60

Table 596. Service clearances2

Front Back Sides
915 mm (36 in.) 254 mm (10 in.) 71 mm (2.8 in.)

See your server or hardware specifications for specific temperature requirements

See your server or hardware specifications for specific humidity requirements

Rack noise levels are a function of the number and type of drawers installed. See your server or
hardware specifications for specific requirements.

Rack airflow requirements are a function of the number and type of drawers installed. Refer to the
individual drawer specifications.
Table 597. Notes
Note:
1. Configuration dependent, base rack weight plus the weight of the drawers mounted in the rack. The rack can
support up to a maximum weight of 15.9 kg (35 lb) per EIA unit.
2. Recommended minimum vertical service clearance from floor is 2439 mm (8 ft).
3. The 7188 power distribution unit used with this rack is mounted horizontally and requires one EIA unit of
space.

Chapter 6. Rack specifications 459

Model 0554 and 7014-S11 rack operational clearances

Model 0554 and 7014-S11 with stabilizer bar

Model 0554 and 7014-S11 plan view

460 Site and hardware planning

Model 0554 and 7014-S11 caster locations

Model 0555 and 7014-S25 rack

Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical,
power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.
Table 598. Dimensions
Dimensions Properties
Height 1240 mm (49 in.)
Capacity 25 usable EIA units
Height with PDP - DC only Not applicable
Width without side panels 590 mm (23.2 in.)
Width with side panels 610 mm (24 in)
Depth with back door only 996 mm (39.2 in.)
Depth with back door and front door 1000 mm (39.4 in.)
Depth with sculptured style front door Not applicable
Weight
Base rack (empty) 98 kg (217 lb)
1
Full rack 665 kg (1467 lb)

Table 599. Electrical3

Electrical characteristics Properties
DC rack voltage (nominal) Not applicable
Power source loading maximum in kVa Not applicable
Voltage range (V dc) Not applicable
AC rack See your server or hardware specifications for specific
requirements
Power source loading maximum in kVa (per PDU) See your server or hardware specifications for specific
requirements
Voltage range (V ac) See your server or hardware specifications for specific
requirements

Chapter 6. Rack specifications 461

Table 599. Electrical3 (continued)
Electrical characteristics Properties
Frequency (Hz) 50 or 60

Table 600. Service clearance

Front Back Sides
915 mm (36 in.) 760 mm (30 in.) 915 mm (36 in.)

See your server or hardware specifications for specific Temperature requirements

See your server or hardware specifications for Humidity specific requirements

Rack noise levels are a function of the number and type of drawers installed. See your server or
hardware specifications for specific requirements

Rack airflow requirements are a function of the number and type of drawers installed. Refer to the
individual drawer specifications.
Table 601. Notes
Note:
1. Configuration dependent, base rack weight plus the weight of the drawers mounted in the rack. The rack can
support up to a maximum weight of 22.7 kg (50 lb) per EIA unit.
2. Recommended minimum vertical service clearance from floor is 2439 mm (8 ft).
3. The 7188 power distribution unit used with this rack is mounted horizontally and requires one EIA unit of
space.

Model 0555 and 7014-S25 rack operational clearances

Model 0555 and 7014-S25 with stabilizer foot

462 Site and hardware planning

Model 0555 and 7014-S25 plan view

Chapter 6. Rack specifications 463

Model 0555 and 7014-S25 caster locations

Planning for the 7014-T00 and 7014-T42 racks

Rack specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.

The following provide specifications for the 7014-T00, and 7014-T42 or 0553 racks.
Related reference:
“Model 7014-T00 rack” on page 465
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical,
power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.
“Model 7014-T42, 7014-B42, and 0553 rack” on page 448
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical,
power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.

464 Site and hardware planning

Model 7014-T00 rack
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical,
power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.
Table 602. Dimensions
Dimensions Properties
Height 1804 mm (71.0 in.)
Capacity 36 usable EIA units
Height with PDP - DC only 1926 mm (75.8 in.)
Width without side panels 623 mm (24.5 in.)
Width with side panels 644 mm (25.4 in)
Depth with rear door only 1042 mm (41.0 in.)
Depth with rear door and front door 1098 mm (43.3 in.)
Depth with sculptured style front door 1147 mm (45.2 in.)

Table 603. Weight

Base rack (empty) Full rack
244 kg (535 lb) 816 kg (1795 lb)

See 7014-T00, 7014-T42 and 0553 rack weight distribution

and floor loading

Table 604. Electrical1

Electrical characteristics Properties
DC rack voltage (nominal) -48 V dc
2
Power source loading maximum in kVa See Power distribution unit and power cord options for 7014,
0551, 0553, and 0555 rack for details
Voltage range (V dc) -40 - -60
AC rack 683 Btu/hr
3
Power source loading maximum in kVa (per PDB) 135 W
Voltage range (V ac) 200 - 240
Frequency (Hz) 50 or 60

Table 605. Service clearances

Front Back Sides
915 mm (36 in.) 915 mm (36 in.) 915 mm (36 in.)

See your server or hardware specifications for specific temperature requirements

See your server or hardware specifications for specific humidity requirements

Rack noise levels are a function of the number and type of drawers installed. See your server or
hardware specifications for specific requirements5

Rack airflow requirements are a function of the number and type of drawers installed4. Refer to the
individual drawer specifications.

Chapter 6. Rack specifications 465

Table 606. Note
Note:
1. The total rack power should be derived from the sum of the power used by the drawers in the rack.
2. The power distribution panel (PDP) on the DC-powered rack can hold up to eighteen (nine per power source)
48-volt, 20 - 50 amperes circuit breakers (configuration dependent). Each power source supports up to 8.4 kVa.
3. Each ac power distribution bus (PDB) can supply 4.8 kVa. A rack can have up to four PDBs as required by the
drawers mounted in the rack.
4. All rack installations require careful site and facilities planning designed to both address the cumulative drawer
heat output and provide the airflow volume rates necessary to comply with drawer temperature requirements.
5. Acoustic doors are available for the IBM racks. Feature code 6248 is available for the 0551 and 7014-T00 racks.
Feature code 6249 is available for the 0553 and 7014-T42 racks. The overall sound reduction is approximately 6
dB. The doors add 381 mm (15 in.) to the depth of the racks.

Related reference:
Chapter 9, “Power distribution unit and power cord options for 7014, 0551, 0553, and 0555 rack,” on page
487
Power distribution units (PDUs) can be used with the 7014, 0551, 0553 and 0555 racks. The various
configurations and specifications are provided.

7014-T00, 7014-T42, and 0553 service clearances and caster location

Use the Service clearances and caster location for 7014-T00, 7014-T42 and 0553 racks figure to plan the
correct service clearances and caster locations for your rack.

The service clearances and caster locations are shown in the following figure:

Figure 243. Service clearances and caster location for 7014-T00, 7014-T42, and 0553 racks

Note: Rack units are large and heavy and are not easily moved. Because maintenance activities require
access at both the front and back, extra room needs to be allowed. The footprint shows the radius of the
swinging doors on the I/O rack. The figure shows the minimum space required.

466 Site and hardware planning

7014-T00, 7014-T00, and 0553 racks multiple attachment
7014-T00, 7014-T42 or 0553 racks can be bolted together in a multiple rack arrangement. This figure
shows that arrangement.

A kit is available including the bolts, spacers, and decorative trim pieces to cover the 25.4 mm (1 in.)
space. For service clearances, see the service clearances as shown in the table for the Model 7014-T00 rack.
Related reference:
“Model 7014-T00 rack” on page 465
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical,
power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.

7014-T00, 7014-T42, and 0553 rack weight distribution and floor

loading
Racks can be heavy when populated with several drawers. Use the Weight distribution distances for
racks when loaded and Floor loading for racks when loaded tables to ensure proper floor loading and
weight distribution.

The 7014-T00, 7014-T42, and 0553 racks can be extremely heavy when several drawers are present. The
following table shows the necessary weight distribution distances for the 7014-T00, 7014-T42, and 0553
racks when loaded.
Table 607. Weight distribution distances for racks when loaded
Rack System Width (2) in. Depth (2) in. Weight distribution distance (3)
weight (1) lb (mm) (mm)
Front and back in. (mm) Left and right in. (mm)
(kg)
7014-T00 (4) 1795 (816) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8 (477.5) 18.4 (467.4)
7014-T00 (5) 1795 (816) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8 (477.5) 0.0 (0.0)
7014-T00 (6) 1795 (816) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8 (477.5) 22 (559)
7014-T42 and 2045 (930) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8 (477.5) 18.4 (467.4)
0553 (4)
7014-T42 and 2045 (930) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8 (477.5) 0.0 (0.0)
0553 (5)
7014-T42 and 2045 (930) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8 (477.5) 27 (686)
0553(6)

The following table shows the necessary floor loading for the 7014-T00, 7014-T42 and 0553 racks when
loaded.
Chapter 6. Rack specifications 467
Table 608. Floor loading for racks when loaded
Rack Floor loading
Raised kg/m2 Non-raised kg/m2 Raised lb/ft2 Non-raised lb/ft2
7014-T00 (4) 366.7 322.7 75 66
7014-T00 (5) 734.5 690.6 150.4 141.4
7014-T00 (6) 341 297 70 61
7014-T42 and 0553 (4) 403 359 82.5 73.5
7014-T42 and 0553 (5) 825 781 169 160
7014-T42 and 0553(6) 341.4 297.5 70 61

The following notes are for both of the preceding tables.

Note:
1. Maximum weight of fully populated rack, units are lb with kg in parentheses.
2. Dimensions without covers, units are inches with mm in parentheses.
3. The weight distribution distance in all four directions is the area around the rack perimeter (minus
covers) necessary to distribute the weight beyond the perimeter of the rack. Weight distribution areas
cannot overlap with adjacent computer equipment weight distribution areas. Units are inches with
mm in parentheses.
4. Weight distribution distance is 1/2 the service clearance values shown in the figure plus cover
thickness.
5. No left and right weight distribution distance.
6. Left and right weight distribution distance required for a 70 lb/ft2 raised floor loading objective.

468 Site and hardware planning

Chapter 7. Hardware management console specifications
Hardware management console (HMC) specifications provide detailed information for your HMC,
including dimensions, electrical, power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.

7042-C07 desktop Hardware Management Console specifications

Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your Hardware Management Console (HMC),
including dimensions, electrical, power, temperature, and environmental specifications.

The HMC controls managed systems, including the management of logical partitions and the use of
capacity on demand. Using service applications, the HMC communicates with managed systems to
detect, consolidate, and send information to IBM for analysis. The HMC provides service technicians with
diagnostic information for systems that can operate in a multiple-partitioned environment.

Use the following specifications to plan for your HMC.

Table 609. Hardware Management Console specifications
Measurements Width Depth Height Weight Weight (maximum
(minimum configuration)
configuration
as shipped)
Metric 438 mm 540 mm 216 mm 16.3 kg 25.2 kg
English 17.25 in. 21.25 in. 8.5 in. 36 lb 56 lb
1
Electrical
Power source loading 0.106 kVa to 0.352 kVa
100 - 127 V ac (low range)
Input voltage
200 - 240 V ac (high range)
47 Hz to 53 Hz (low range)
Frequency (hertz)
57 Hz to 63 Hz (high range)
Thermal output (minimum) 630 Btu/hr. (185 watts)
Thermal output (maximum) 1784 Btu/hr. (523 watts)
Maximum altitude (Server off) 2133 m (7000 ft)
Air temperature requirements
Operating Shipping
-40 to 60°C (-40 - 140°F)
10 to 32°C (50 to 89.6°F)
Humidity requirements
Operating Nonoperating
Noncondensing
8 - 80% 8 - 80%
humidity
Noise emissions2
Declared A-weighted sound power
Product Declared A-weighted sound pressure level, LpAm (dB)
level, LWAd (bels)
description
Operating Nonoperating Operating Nonoperating

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2007, 2009 469

Table 609. Hardware Management Console specifications (continued)
One hard disk
drive 5.2 4.8 37 33
configuration
Notes:
1. Power consumption and heat output vary depending on the number and type of optional features installed and
the power management optional features in use.
2. These levels were measured in controlled acoustical environments according to the procedures specified by the
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) S12.10 and ISO 7779 and are reported in accordance with IS) 9296.
Actual sound-pressure levels in a given location might exceed the average values stated because of room
reflections and other nearby noise sources. The declared sound-power levels indicate an upper limit, below
which a large number of computers will operate.

7042-CR6 rack-mounted Hardware Management Console specifications

Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your Hardware Management Console (HMC),
including dimensions, electrical, environmental requirements, and noise emissions.

The HMC controls managed systems, including the management of logical partitions and the use of
capacity on demand. Using service applications, the HMC communicates with managed systems to
detect, consolidate, and send information to IBM for analysis. The HMC provides service technicians with
diagnostic information for systems that can operate in a multiple-partitioned environment.

Use the following specifications to plan for your HMC.

Table 610. Dimensions
Width Depth Height Weight (maximum
configuration)
440 mm (17.3 in.) 711 mm (28.0) 43 mm (1.7 in.) 15.9 kg (35.1 lb)

Table 611. Electrical requirements

Electrical characteristics Properties
Maximum measured power 675 W
Maximum kVA 0.7 kVA
Minimum thermal output 662 BTU/hr
Maximum thermal output 2302 BTU/hr
Input voltage low range 100 V ac - 127 V ac
Input voltage high range 200 V ac - 240 V ac
Frequency (Hertz) 47 - 63 Hz

Table 612. Environmental requirements

Environment Temperature
Recommended operating temperature 10°C - 35°C (50°C - 95°F)
Nonoperating temperature 5°C - 45°C (41°C - 113°F)
Maximum altitude 3048 m (10000 ft)
Operating humidity 8% - 80%
Nonoperating humidity 20% - 80%

470 Site and hardware planning

Table 613. Noise emissions (Maximum configuration)1
Idling Operating
LWAd 6.1 bels 6.1 bels
1
These levels were measured in controlled acoustical environments according to the procedures specified by the
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) S12.10 and ISO 7779 and are reported in accordance with ISO 9296.
Actual sound-pressure levels in a given location might exceed the average values stated because of room reflections
and other nearby noise sources. The declared sound-power levels indicate an upper limit, below which a large
number of computers will operate.

7042-CR5 rack-mounted Hardware Management Console specifications

Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your Hardware Management Console (HMC),
including dimensions, electrical, environmental requirements, and noise emissions.

The HMC controls managed systems, including the management of logical partitions and the use of
capacity on demand. Using service applications, the HMC communicates with managed systems to
detect, consolidate, and send information to IBM for analysis. The HMC provides service technicians with
diagnostic information for systems that can operate in a multiple-partitioned environment.

Use the following specifications to plan for your HMC.

Table 614. Dimensions
Width Depth Height Weight (maximum
configuration)
440 mm (17.3 in.) 711 mm (28 in.) 43 mm (1.69 in.) 15.4 kg (34 lb)

Table 615. Electrical

Electrical characteristics Properties
Maximum measured power 350 W
Maximum kVA 0.362 kVA1
Maximum thermal output 1195 BTU/hr
Input voltage low range 100 V ac - 127 V ac
Input voltage high range 200 V ac - 240 V ac

1. Value based on a configuration with one 2.3 GHz processor, 4 x 1 GB memory, six disk, 2 PCI, and one DVD

Table 616. Environment requirements

Environment Temperature
Recommended operating temperature 10 - 35°C (50.0 - 95.0°F)
Nonoperating temperature -40 - 60°C (-104 -140°F)
Maximum altitude 2133 m (6998.0 ft)
Operating humidity 8 - 80%
Nonoperating humidity 8 - 80%
Maximum thermal output 2302 BTU/hr

Chapter 7. Hardware management console specifications 471

7310-C03 desktop Hardware Management Console specifications
Hardware specifications for model 7310-C03 provide detailed information for your Hardware
Management Console (HMC), including dimensions, electrical, power, temperature, and environment.

The HMC controls managed systems, including the management of logical partitions and the use of
Capacity on Demand. Using service applications, the HMC communicates with managed systems to
detect, consolidate, and send information to IBM for analysis. The HMC provides service technicians with
diagnostic information for systems that can operate in a multiple-partitioned environment.

Dimensions
Width Depth Height Weight
Metric 425 mm 425 mm 140 mm 12.0 kg
English 16.7 in. 16.7 in. 5.5 in. 26.5 lb
Electrical
Power source loading 0.11 kVa to 0.35 kVa
Input voltage
100 V ac to 127 V ac
200 V ac to 240 V ac
Frequency (hertz) 50 Hz to 60 Hz
Thermal output (minimum) 375 Btu/hr. (110 watts)
Thermal output (maximum) 1195 Btu/hr. (350 watts)
Maximum altitude 3048 m (10000 ft)
Air temperature requirements
Operating Nonoperating
10 to 43°C (50 to 109.4°F)
10 to 35°C (50 to 95°F) at altitude 0 to 914 m
(2999 ft)
Humidity requirements
Operating Nonoperating
Noncondensing
8 - 80% 8 - 80%
humidity
Noise emissions1
Operating Nonoperating
LWAd 6.5 bels 6.5 bels
Note: For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.

Related information:
Acoustics

7310-C04 desktop Hardware Management Console specifications

Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your Hardware Management Console (HMC),
including dimensions, electrical, power, temperature, and environment.

The HMC controls managed systems, including the management of logical partitions and use of capacity
on demand. Using service applications, the HMC communicates with managed systems to detect,
consolidate, and send information to IBM for analysis. The HMC provides service technicians with
diagnostic information for systems that can operate in a multiple-partitioned environment.

472 Site and hardware planning

Dimensions
Width Depth Height Weight (minimum Weight (maximum
configuration as configuration)
shipped)
Metric 442 mm 401 mm 146 mm 11.0 kg 14.0 kg
English 17.4 in. 15.8 in. 5.7 in. 24 lb 31 lb
1
Electrical
Power source loading 0.09 kVa to 0.32 kVa
90 V ac to 100 V ac (low range)
Input voltage
137 V ac to 265 V ac (high range)
47 Hz to 53 Hz (low range)
Frequency (hertz)
57 Hz to 63 Hz (high range)
Thermal output (minimum) 256 Btu/hr. (75 watts)
Thermal output (maximum) 1058 Btu/hr. (310 watts)
Maximum altitude 2134 m (7000 ft)
Air temperature requirements
Operating Nonoperating
10 to 43°C (50 to 109.4°F)
10 to 35°C (50 to 95°F) at altitude 0 to 2134 m
(7000 ft)

10 to 32°C (50 to 89.6°F) at altitude 914 m

(2999 ft) to 2133 m (6998 ft)
Humidity requirements
Operating Nonoperating
Noncondensing
8 - 80% 8 - 80%
humidity
2
Noise emissions
Operating Nonoperating
LWAd 4.4 bels 4.3 bels
LpAm (1-meter
31 dB 29 dB
bystander position)
LpAm (.5-meter
35 dB 33 dB
operator postion)
Notes:
1. Power consumption and heat output vary depending on the number and type of optional features installed and the power
management optional features in use.
2. These levels were measured in controlled acoustical environments according to the procedures specified by the American
National Standards Institute (ANSI) S12.10 and ISO 7779 and are reported in accordance with IS) 9296. Actual sound-pressure
levels in a given location might exceed the average values stated because of room reflections and other nearby noise sources.
The declared sound-power levels indicate an upper limit, below which a large number of computers will operate.

7310-C05 desktop Hardware Management Console specifications

Hardware specifications for model 7310-C05 provide detailed information for your Hardware
Management Console (HMC), including dimensions, electrical, power, temperature, and environmental
specifications.

The HMC controls managed systems, including the management of logical partitions and use of capacity
on demand. Using service applications, the HMC communicates with managed systems to detect,
consolidate, and send information to IBM for analysis. The HMC provides service technicians with
diagnostic information for systems that can operate in a multiple-partitioned environment.

Chapter 7. Hardware management console specifications 473

Use the following specifications to plan for your HMC.
Table 617. Hardware Management Console specifications
Dimensions
Width Depth Height Weight Weight (maximum
(minimum configuration)
configuration
as shipped)
Metric 438 mm 540 mm 216 mm 16.3 kg 20.8 kg
English 17.25 in. 21.25 in. 8.5 in. 36 lb 45.8 lb
1
Electrical
Power source loading 0.106 kVa to 0.352 kVa
100 - 127 V ac (low range)
Input voltage
200 - 240 V ac (high range)
47 Hz to 53 Hz (low range)
Frequency (hertz)
57 Hz to 63 Hz (high range)
Thermal output (minimum) 361 Btu/hr. (106 watts)
Thermal output (maximum) 1201 Btu/hr. (352 watts)
Maximum altitude 2134 m (7000 ft)
Air temperature requirements
Operating Nonoperating and shipping
10 to 35°C (50 to 95°F) 0 to 60°C (-32 to 140°F)
Humidity requirements
Operating Nonoperating
Noncondensing
8 - 80% 8 - 80%
humidity
Noise emissions2
Declared A-weighted sound power
Product Declared A-weighted sound pressure level, LpAm (dB)
level, LWAd (bels)
description
Operating Nonoperating Operating Nonoperating
One hard disk
drive 5.2 4.8 37 33
configuration
Notes:
1. Power consumption and heat output vary depending on the number and type of optional features installed and
the power management optional features in use.
2. These levels were measured in controlled acoustical environments according to the procedures specified by the
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) S12.10 and ISO 7779 and are reported in accordance with IS) 9296.
Actual sound-pressure levels in a given location might exceed the average values stated because of room
reflections and other nearby noise sources. The declared sound-power levels indicate an upper limit, below
which a large number of computers will operate.

7310-C06 and 7042-C06 desktop Hardware Management Console

specifications
Hardware specifications for models 7310-C06 and 7042-C06 provide detailed information for your
Hardware Management Console (HMC), including dimensions, electrical, power, temperature, and
environmental specifications.

474 Site and hardware planning

The HMC controls managed systems, including the management of logical partitions and use of capacity
on demand. Using service applications, the HMC communicates with managed systems to detect,
consolidate, and send information to IBM for analysis. The HMC provides service technicians with
diagnostic information for systems that can operate in a multiple-partitioned environment.

Use the following specifications to plan for your HMC.

Table 618. Hardware Management Console specifications
Dimensions
Width Depth Height Weight Weight (maximum
(minimum configuration)
configuration
as shipped)
Metric 438 mm 540 mm 216 mm 16.3 kg 20.8 kg
English 17.25 in. 21.25 in. 8.5 in. 36 lb 45.8 lb
1
Electrical
Power source loading 0.106 kVa to 0.352 kVa
100 - 127 V ac (low range)
Input voltage
200 - 240 V ac (high range)
47 Hz to 53 Hz (low range)
Frequency (hertz)
57 Hz to 63 Hz (high range)
Thermal output (minimum) 361 Btu/hr. (106 watts)
Thermal output (maximum) 1201 Btu/hr. (352 watts)
Maximum altitude 2134 m (7000 ft)
Air temperature requirements
Operating Nonoperating and shipping
0 to 60°C (-32 to 140°F)
10 to 35°C (50 to 95°F)
Humidity requirements
Operating Nonoperating
Noncondensing
8 - 80% 8 - 80%
humidity
Noise emissions2
Declared A-weighted sound power
Product Declared A-weighted sound pressure level, LpAm (dB)
level, LWAd (bels)
description
Operating Nonoperating Operating Nonoperating
One hard disk
drive 5.2 4.8 37 33
configuration
Notes:
1. Power consumption and heat output vary depending on the number and type of optional features installed and
the power management optional features in use.
2. These levels were measured in controlled acoustical environments according to the procedures specified by the
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) S12.10 and ISO 7779 and are reported in accordance with IS) 9296.
Actual sound-pressure levels in a given location might exceed the average values stated because of room
reflections and other nearby noise sources. The declared sound-power levels indicate an upper limit, below
which a large number of computers will operate.

Chapter 7. Hardware management console specifications 475

7310-CR2 rack-mounted Hardware Management Console specifications
Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your Hardware Management Console (HMC),
including dimensions, electrical, power, temperature, and environmental specifications.

The Hardware Management Console (HMC) controls managed systems, including the management of
logical partitions and use of capacity on demand. Using service applications, the HMC communicates
with managed systems to detect, consolidate, and send information to IBM for analysis. The HMC
provides service technicians with diagnostic information for systems that can operate in a
multiple-partitioned environment.

This HMC mounts in a 19-inch system rack. The 0551 rack is recommended. This rack operates with a
voltage range of 200 V ac to 240 V ac. For additional information about this rack, see 0551 rack.

Use the following specifications to plan for your HMC.

Dimensions
Width Depth Height Weight
Metric 440 mm 660 mm 43 mm 12.7 kg
English 17.3 in. 25.98 in. 1.69 in. 28.4 lb
Electrical
Power source loading 0.11 kVa to 0.35 kVa
Input voltage
100 V ac to 127 V ac
200 V ac to 240 V ac
Frequency (hertz) 50 Hz to 60 Hz
Thermal output (minimum) 375 Btu/hr. (110 watts)
Thermal output (maximum) 1195 Btu/hr. (350 watts)
Maximum altitude 3048 m (10000 ft)
Air temperature requirements
Operating Nonoperating
10 to 43°C (50 to 109.4 - °F)
10 to 3 °C (50 to 95°F) at altitude 0 to 914 m
(2999 ft)

10 to 32 - °C (50 to 89.6°F) at altitude 914 m

(2999 ft) to 2133 m (6998 ft)
Humidity requirements
Operating Nonoperating
Noncondensing
8 - 80% 8 - 80%
humidity
Noise Emissions1
Operating Nonoperating
LWAd 6.5 bels 6.5 bels
Note:
1. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.

Related reference:

476 Site and hardware planning

“0551 rack” on page 445
The 0551 rack specifications provide detailed information for your rack.
Related information:
Acoustics

7310-CR3 rack-mounted Hardware Management Console specifications

Hardware specifications provide detailed information for your Hardware Management Console (HMC),
including dimensions, electrical, power, temperature, and environmental specifications.

The Hardware Management Console (HMC) controls managed systems, including the management of
logical partitions and use of capacity on demand. Using service applications, the HMC communicates
with managed systems to detect, consolidate, and send information to IBM for analysis. The HMC
provides service technicians with diagnostic information for systems that can operate in a
multiple-partitioned environment.

This HMC mounts in a 19-inch system rack. The 0551 rack is recommended. This rack operates with a
voltage range of 200 V ac to 240 V ac. For additional information about this rack, see 0551 rack.

Use the following specifications to plan for your HMC.

Dimensions
Width Depth Height Weight Weight
(minimum (maximum
configuration) configuration)
Metric 440 mm 686 mm 43 mm 12.7 kg 15.6 kg
English 17.32 in. 27.0 in. 1.69 in. 28 lb 35 lb
1
Electrical
Power source loading 0.172 kVa to 0.550 kVa
100 V ac to 127 V ac (low range)
Input voltage
200 V ac to 240 V ac (high range)
Frequency (hertz) 50 Hz to 60 Hz
Thermal output (minimum) 587 Btu/hr. (172 watts)
Thermal output (maximum) 1878 Btu/hr. (550 watts)
Maximum altitude 2133 m (6998 ft)
Air temperature requirements
Operating Nonoperating
10 to 43°C (50 to 109.4°F)
10 to 35°C (50 to 95°F) at altitude 0 to
2133 m (6998 ft)
Humidity requirements
Operating Nonoperating
Noncondensing
8 - 80% 8 - 80%
humidity
Noise emissions2
Operating Nonoperating
LWAd 6.9 bels 6.9 bels

Chapter 7. Hardware management console specifications 477

Dimensions
Notes:
1. Power consumption and heat output vary depending on the number and type of optional features installed and
the power management optional features in use.
2. These levels were measured in controlled acoustical environments according to the procedures specified by the
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) S12.10 and ISO 7779 and are reported in accordance with IS) 9296.
Actual sound-pressure levels in a given location might exceed the average values stated because of room
reflections and other nearby noise sources. The declared sound-power levels indicate an upper limit, below
which a large number of computers will operate.

Related reference:
“0551 rack” on page 445
The 0551 rack specifications provide detailed information for your rack.

7310-CR4 and 7042-CR4 Hardware Management Console specifications

Hardware specifications for models 7310-CR4 and 7042-CR4 provide detailed information for your
Hardware Management Console (HMC), including dimensions, electrical, power, temperature, and
environmental specifications.

The Hardware Management Console (HMC) controls managed systems, including the management of
logical partitions and use of capacity on demand. Using service applications, the HMC communicates
with managed systems to detect, consolidate, and send information to IBM for analysis. The HMC
provides service technicians with diagnostic information for systems that can operate in a
multiple-partitioned environment.

Use the following specifications to plan for your HMC.

Dimensions
Width Depth Height Weight (maximum configuration)
Metric 440 mm 711 mm 43 mm 15.6 kg
English 17.3 in. 28.0 in. 1.69 in. 34 lb
1
Electrical
Power source loading 0.194 kVa to 0.700 kVa
100 V ac to 127 V ac (low range)
Input voltage
200 V ac to 240 V ac (high range)
Frequency (hertz) 50 Hz to 60 Hz
Thermal output (minimum) 662 Btu/hr. (194 watts)
Thermal output (maximum) 2390 Btu/hr. (700 watts)
Maximum altitude 2133 m (6998 ft)
Air temperature requirements
Operating Nonoperating
-40 to 60°C (-104 - 140°F)
10 to 35°C (50 to 95°F) at altitude 0 to
914 m (2998.7 ft)
Humidity requirements
Operating Nonoperating
Noncondensing
8 - 80% 8 - 80%
humidity

478 Site and hardware planning

Dimensions
Noise emissions2
Operating Nonoperating
LWAd 6.8 bels 6.8 bels
Notes:
1. Power consumption and heat output vary depending on the number and type of optional features installed and
the power management optional features in use.
2. These levels were measured in controlled acoustical environments according to the procedures specified by the
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) S12.10 and ISO 7779 and are reported in accordance with IS) 9296.
Actual sound-pressure levels in a given location might exceed the average values stated because of room
reflections and other nearby noise sources. The declared sound-power levels indicate an upper limit, below
which a large number of computers will operate.

This HMC mounts in a 19-inch system rack. The following IBM racks can be used with this HMC:

Chapter 7. Hardware management console specifications 479

480 Site and hardware planning
Chapter 8. Uninterruptible power supply
To meet the power protection needs of IBM servers, uninterruptible power supplies are available for
System i®, System p®, and Power Systems™ configurations. The uninterruptible power supply is the IBM
type 9910.

The IBM 9910 uninterruptible power supply solutions are compatible with the power requirements for
System i and System p servers and have passed IBM testing procedures. The uninterruptible power
supplies are intended to provide a single source for purchase and protection of IBM servers. All 9910
uninterruptible power supplies include a premium warranty package that is designed to enhance the
potential for return on investment over the uninterruptible power supplies available on the market today.

Type 9910 uninterruptible power supply solutions are available from Eaton.

1827 service processor communications port to uninterruptible power supply cable for System i5®,
System p5, and Power Systems

The 1827 is a 140 mm (5.5 in.) service processor communications port to uninterruptible power supply
cable for System i5, System p5®, and Power Systems models. Uninterruptible power supply
communications is supported through a designated service processor communications port through the
1827 cable. See the following figures.

Figure 244. Models 520 and 52A rear view with cable installation location

Figure 245. Models 550 and 55A rear view with connection port

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2007, 2009 481

Figure 246. Models 570, 561, and MMA rear view with connection port

Note:

On some models, a label by the ports shows the serial port symbol and a number 2 or S2 instead of the
location P1-T2 or P1-T4. Here are examples: On a model 9409-M50, figure 249 shows the UPS port as
P1-T2. On the frame of the M50, this will be the serial symbol and the number 2. In Figure 248, a model
M25 shows the connection as P1-T4. The label on the back will be the serial symbol and S2.

The cover of the system has a label that matches the figures in this section.

Figure 247. Models 570, 561, and MMA drawer layout

482 Site and hardware planning

Figure 248. IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, 9408-M25) System Serial Cable 2 (P1-T4)

Figure 249. IBM Power 550 (8204-E8A and 9409-M50) System Serial Port 2 (P1-T2)

Chapter 8. Uninterruptible power supply 483

Figure 250. Model 9406-595 and 9194 base PCI-X expansion tower rear view with J14 connection port

Note: The 8-core, 12-core, and 16-core processor configurations for the model 570 consist of several
4-core processors connected together. At a minimum, the 1827 uninterruptible power supply converter
cable must be connected to the 4-core drawer that has the operator’s panel on the front of the unit. If
models 570 and 561 have the redundant FSP option, the uninterruptible power supply converter cable
should be connected to P1-T2 on the Secondary 1 drawer, see the previous figure. Model MMA comes
with a redundant FSP and the 1827 should be connected to both the primary and secondary 1 drawers.

The service processor communications port supports two modes: RS-232 service processor
communications port mode and uninterruptible power supply mode. Only one mode is supported at a
time. The service processor will detect the presence of an uninterruptible power supply attached through
service processor communications port through the 1827 cable when the server is started and set the
control hardware to condition the signals for the uninterruptible power supply. The mode cannot be
changed unless the system is started again. The following figure shows the converter cable wiring.

Note: Serial ports are rendered useless for AIX use when an Hardware Management Console (HMC) is
connected. However, platform connection to the UPS, which is managed by the FSP, is independent of an
HMC being attached. Whether or not an HMC is connected, the designated serial port for UPS attach will
setup correctly in feature code 1827 is connected before power is applied to the server (UPS attach is
detected on FSP IPL). The serial ports are not standard EIA-232 ports. Therefore, the UPS must be
attached through the 1827 cable and a relay contact interface (such as IBM type 9910, feature code 2939)
via the UPS to use the IBM platform managed solution.

To use a standard UPS manufacturer serial interface and UPS monitoring application for the AIX
operating system, an asynchronous adapter (such as 2943 and 5723) must be installed and configured in
AIX. The IBM i operating system only supports the IBM platform managed solution.

For the 9194, the 1827 convertor cable is not needed. Plug the System i uninterruptible power supply
communications cable provided by the uninterruptible power supply supplier into the J14 port.

484 Site and hardware planning

Figure 251. 1827 converter cable schematic for System i5 servers

Both ends of the cable have a female 9-pin D-shell connector. The following figure shows the serial to
uninterruptible power supply converter cable end (designated B) that plugs into the service processor
communications port on the 9406-520, 9406-550, and the 9406-570. It has external threads that mate with
the cable retention on the service processor communications port. The other end of the cable (designated
A) plugs into the uninterruptible power supply vendor-supplied cable for System i communications. It
has threads that mate with the cable external threads on the uninterruptible power supply.

Chapter 8. Uninterruptible power supply 485

Figure 252. Uninterruptible power supply connector for the uninterruptible power supply communications cable

486 Site and hardware planning

Chapter 9. Power distribution unit and power cord options for
7014, 0551, 0553, and 0555 rack
Power distribution units (PDUs) can be used with the 7014, 0551, 0553 and 0555 racks. The various
configurations and specifications are provided.

Power distribution unit

The following figure shows the four vertical PDU locations in a rack.

Power distribution units (PDUs) are required with 7014-T00, 7014-T42 IBM racks and optional with
7014-B42, 0553, and 0555 racks, except with a 0578 or 0588 expansion unit. If a PDU is not defaulted or
ordered, a power cord is provided with each individual rack-mounted drawer for connection to a
country-specific utility mains receptacle or uninterruptible power supply. See the individual
rack-mounted drawer specifications for the appropriate power cords.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2007, 2009 487

9188 or 7188 universal PDU
Table 619. 9188 or 7188 universal PDU features
PDU Number Racks usage Supported power cords
9188 universal PDU 7014-T00 and 7014-T42 racks v 6458
v 6671
v 6672
v 6489
v 6491
v 6492
v 6653
v 6654
v 6655
v 6656
v 6657
v 6658
7188 universal PDU 7014-T00, 7014-T42, 0551, 0553, v 6458
and 0555 racks.
v 6671
v 6672
v 6489
v 6491
v 6492
v 6653
v 6654
v 6655
v 6656
v 6657
v 6658

The amperage rating of the PDU is either 16 A, 24 A, or 48 A, single phase or three-phase, depending on
the power cord.

Note: All power cords are 4.3 m (14 ft). For installation in Chicago, only 2.8 m (6 ft) of the 4.3 m (14 ft)
power cord can extend beyond the perimeter of the rack frame. If more than 2.8 m (6 ft) can exit the rack,
retain any additional cordage within the rack frame with Velcro ties in the cable management space until
2.8 (6 ft) or less exits the rack.

The PDU has twelve customer-usable IEC 320-C13 outlets rated at 200 - 240 V ac. There are six groups of
two outlets fed by six circuit breakers. Each outlet is rated up to 10 A (220 - 240 V ac) or 12 A (200 - 208
V ac), but each group of two outlets is fed from one 20 A circuit breaker derated to 16 A. The following
IEC 320-C13 to IEC 320-C14 power cords are available to supply power from the PDU outlet to the
rack-mounted device:
v 1422 - 3.0 m (10 ft)
v 6458 - 4.3 m (14 ft)
v 6459 - 3.7 m (12 ft)
v 6095 - 3.0 m - 4.3 m (10 ft - 14 ft)
v 9911 - 4.3 m (14 ft)

488 Site and hardware planning

To calculate the power loading requirements and proper loading sequence for the 7188 and 9188 PDU,
see Power load calculating for 7188 or 9188 power distribution units.

Chapter 9. Power distribution unit and power cord options for 7014, 0551, 0553, and 0555 rack 489
9176 or 7176 single phase PDU
Table 620. 9176 or 7176 single phase PDU features
PDU Number Racks usage Supported power cords
9176 or 7176 single 7014 IBM racks v 6458
phase PDU
v 6671
v 6672
v 6442, 9800, or 9824
– 200 V ac; 4.3 m (14 ft) locking power cord (L6-30P)
v 6443 or 9801
– 200 V ac; 4.3 m (14 ft) watertight power cord
(3750DP)
v 6444 or 9822
– 200 V ac; 4.3 m (14 ft) PDL 250 V ac; 30 A plug
v 6447 or 9826
– 200 V ac; 4.3 m (14 ft) PDL 250 V ac; 30 A plug
Right Angle
v 6448 or 9835
– 200 V ac; 4.3 m (14 ft) 250 V ac, 30 A Korean plug
v 6449 or 9986
– 200 V ac; 1.8 m (6 ft) locking power cord (L6-30P)
Chicago
v 6450 or 9987
– 200 V ac; 1.8 m (6 ft) watertight power cord
(3750DP) Chicago

9177 or 7177 single phase PDU

Table 621. 9177 or 7177 single phase PDU features
PDU Number Racks usage Supported power cords
9177 or 7177 single 7014 IBM racks v 6458
phase PDU
v 6671
v 6672
v 6445 or 9823
– 200 V ac; 4.3 m (14 ft) (IEC 60309, 3-pin, 32 A; plug
type 46)

9178 or 7178 three-phase wye PDU

Table 622. 9178 or 7178 three-phase wye PDU features
PDU Number Racks usage Supported power cords
9178 or 7178 7014 IBM racks v 6458
three-phase wye PDU
v 6671
v 6672
v 400 V ac; 4.3 m (14 ft) (IEC 60309, 5-pin, 16 A; plug
type 46)

490 Site and hardware planning

The PDUs have nine customer-usable IEC 320-C13 outlets rated at 200-240 V ac. There are three groups of
three outlets fed by three circuit breakers. Each outlet is rated up to 10 A, but each group of three outlets
is fed from one 15 A circuit breaker. The following IEC 320-C13 to IEC 320-C14 power cords are available
to supply from the PDU outlet to the rack-mounted device:
v 6095 - 3.0 m – 4.3 m (10 ft – 14 ft)
v 9911 - 4.3 m (14 ft)

5160 single phase PDU

Table 623. 5160 single phase PDU features
PDU Number Racks usage Supported power cords
5160 single phase 0551, 0553, and 0555 IBM racks v 6458
PDU
v 6671
v 6672
v 1426
v 1427
v 1446
v 1447
v 1448

Chapter 9. Power distribution unit and power cord options for 7014, 0551, 0553, and 0555 rack 491
5161 single phase PDU
Table 624. 5161 single phase PDU features
PDU Number Racks usage Supported power cords
5161 single phase 0551, 0553, and 0555 IBM racks v 6458
PDU
v 6671
v 6672
v 6458
v 6671
v 6672
v 6458
v 6671
v 6672
v 1449

5163 three-phase wye PDU

Table 625. 5163 three-phase wye PDU features
PDU Number Racks usage Supported power cords
5163 three-phase wye 0551, 0553, and 0555 IBM racks v 6458
PDU
v 6671
v 6672
v 1477

The PDUs have six customer-usable IEC 320-C13 outlets rated at 200-240 V ac. Each outlet is rated 8 A
and is protected by a circuit breaker. The following IEC 320-C13 to IEC 320-C14 power cords are available
to supply from the PDU outlet to the rack-mounted device:
v 1422 - 3.0 m (10 ft)
v 6458 - 4.3 m (14 ft)
v 6459 - 3.7 m (12 ft)

492 Site and hardware planning

Typical rack and PDU configurations

See 0551, 0553, 7014, and 0555 rack configurations for typical configurations and PDUs when the rack is
populated with various server models.

Power distribution unit plus specifications

The power distribution unit plus (PDU+) has power-monitoring capabilities. The PDU+ is an intelligent
ac power distribution unit (PDU+) that monitors the amount of power being used by the devices that are
plugged into it. The PDU+ provides twelve C13 power outlets and receives power through a Souriau
UTG connector. It can be used in many geographies and for many applications by varying the
PDU-to-wall power cord, which must be ordered separately. Each PDU+ requires one PDU-to-wall power
cord. When the PDU+ is connected to a dedicated power source, it conforms to UL60950, CSA
C22.2-60950, EN-60950, and IEC-60950 standards.

Chapter 9. Power distribution unit and power cord options for 7014, 0551, 0553, and 0555 rack 493
5889 PDU+
Table 626. 5889 PDU+ features
PDU Number Racks usage Supported power cords
5889 PDU+ 7014 IBM racks v 6458
v 6671
v 6672
v 6489
v 6491
v 6492
v 6653
v 6654
v 6655
v 6656
v 6657
v 6658

Table 627. 5889 PDU+ specifications

PDU number 5889
Height 43.9 mm (1.73 in.)
Width 447 mm (17.6 in.)
Depth 350 mm (13.78 in.)
Additional clearance 25 mm (0.98 in.) for circuit breakers

3 mm (0.12 in.) for outlets

Weight (not including power cord) 6.3 kg (13.8 lb)
Weight of power cord (approximate) 5.4 kg (11.8 lb)
Operating temperature at 0 - 914 m (0 - 3000 ft) 10 - 32°C (50 - 90°F)
(room ambient)
Operating temperature at 914 - 2133 m (3000 - 10 - 35°C (50 - 95°F)
7000 ft) (room ambient)
Operating humidity 8 - 80% (noncondensing)
Localized air temperature in PDU 60 °C (140°F) maximum
Rated frequency (all feature codes) 50 - 60 Hz
Circuit breakers Six double-pole branch rated circuit breakers rated at 20 A
Power outlet 12 IEC 320-C13 outlets rated at

10 A (VDE) or 15 A (UL/CSA)

7189 PDU+
Table 628. 7189 PDU+ features
PDU Number Racks usage Supported power cords
7189 PDU+ 7014 IBM racks v 6489
v 6491
v 6492
v 6653

494 Site and hardware planning

Table 629. 7189 PDU+ specifications
PDU number 7189
Height 43.9 mm (1.73 in.)
Width 447 mm (17.6 in.)
Depth 350 mm (13.78 in.)
Additional clearance 25 mm (0.98 in.) for circuit breakers

3 mm (0.12 in.) for outlets

Weight (not including power cord) 6.3 kg (13.8 lb)
Weight of power cord (approximate) 5.4 kg (11.8 lb)
Operating temperature at 0 - 914 m (0 - 3000 ft) 10 - 32°C (50 - 90°F)
(room ambient)
Operating temperature at 914 - 2133 m (3000 - 10 - 35°C (50 - 95°F)
7000 ft) (room ambient)
Operating humidity 8 - 80% (noncondensing)
Localized air temperature in PDU 60°C (140°F) maximum
Rated frequency (all feature codes) 50 - 60 Hz
Circuit breakers Six double-pole branch rated circuit breakers that are rated at 20
A
Power outlet1 Six IEC 320-C19 outlets rated at

16 A (VDE) or 20 A (UL/CSA)
1
FC 7189 also contains 3 C13 connectors that are located in the back of the PDU. These connectors are not accessible
when the PDU is installed in a rack.

7196 PDU+
Table 630. 7196 PDU+ features
PDU Number Racks usage Supported power cords
7196 PDU+ 7014 IBM racks v Fixed power cord with IEC 60309, 3P+E, 60 A plug
7014-B42, v 6653
v 6654
v 6655
v 6656
v 6657
v 6658
v 7196

Table 631. 7196 PDU+ specifications

PDU number 7196
Height 43.9 mm (1.73 in.)
Width 447 mm (17.6 in.)
Depth 350 mm (13.78 in.)
Additional clearance 25 mm (0.98 in.) for circuit breakers

3 mm (0.12 in.) for outlets

Chapter 9. Power distribution unit and power cord options for 7014, 0551, 0553, and 0555 rack 495
Table 631. 7196 PDU+ specifications (continued)
Weight (not including power cord) 6.3 kg (13.8 lb)
Weight of power cord (approximate) 5.4 kg (11.8 lb)
Operating temperature at 0 - 914 m (0 - 3000 ft) 10 - 32°C (50 - 90°F)
(room ambient)
Operating temperature at 914 - 2133 m (3000 - 10 - 35°C (50 - 95°F)
7000 ft) (room ambient)
Operating humidity 8 - 80% (noncondensing)
Localized air temperature in PDU 60 °C (140 °F) maximum
Rated frequency (all feature codes) 50 - 60 Hz
Circuit breakers Six double-pole branch rated circuit breakers that are rated at 20
A
Power outlet1 Six IEC 320-C19 outlets rated at

16 A (VDE) or 20 A (UL/CSA)
1
FC 7196 also contains 3 C13 connectors that are located in the back of the PDU. These connectors are not accessible
when the PDU is installed in a rack.

7109 PDU+
Table 632. 7109 PDU+ features
PDU Number Racks usage Supported power cords
7109 PDU+ 0551, 0553, and 0555 IBM racks v 6458
v 6671
v 6672
v 6489
v 6491
v 6492
v 6653
v 6654
v 6655
v 6656
v 6657
v 6658

Table 633. 7109 PDU+ specifications

PDU number 7109
Height 43.9 mm (1.73 in.)
Width 447 mm (17.6 in.)
Depth 350 mm (13.78 in.)
Additional clearance 25 mm (0.98 in.) for circuit breakers

3 mm (0.12 in.) for outlets

Weight (not including power cord) 6.3 kg (13.8 lb)
Weight of power cord (approximate) 5.4 kg (11.8 lb)
Operating temperature at 0 - 914 m (0 - 3000 10 - 32°C (50 - 90°F)
ft) (room ambient)

496 Site and hardware planning

Table 633. 7109 PDU+ specifications (continued)
Operating temperature at 914 - 2133 m (3000 - 10 - 35°C (50 - 95°F)
7000 ft) (room ambient)
Operating humidity 8 - 80% (noncondensing)
Localized air temperature in PDU 60°C (140°F) maximum
Rated frequency (all feature codes) 50 - 60 Hz
Circuit breakers Six double-pole branch rated circuit breakers that are rated at 20 A
Power outlet 12 IEC 320-C13 outlets rated at

10 A (VDE) or 15 A (UL/CSA)

Related reference:
“Power load calculating for 7188 or 9188 power distribution units” on page 622
Learn how to calculate the power load for power distribution units.
“0551, 0553, 0555, and 7014 rack configurations” on page 451
The 0551 or 7014-T00 provide a 1.8 meter rack (36 EIA units of total space). The 7014-T42 or 0553
provides a 2.0 meter rack (42 EIA units of total space).

Chapter 9. Power distribution unit and power cord options for 7014, 0551, 0553, and 0555 rack 497
498 Site and hardware planning
Chapter 10. Planning for power
Planning the power for your system requires knowledge of your server's power requirements, the power
requirements of compatible hardware, and the uninterruptible power supply needs for your server. Use
this information to build a complete power plan.

Before you begin your planning tasks, be sure you have completed the items in the following checklist:
v Know your server power requirements.
v Know your compatible hardware requirements.
v Know your uninterruptible power supply needs.

Review power considerations

Complete the following checklist:

v Consult a qualified electrician regarding power needs.
v Determine an uninterruptible power supply vendor.
v Complete your server information form or forms.

Determining your power requirements

Use these guidelines to ensure that your server has the proper power to operate.

Your server can have power requirements different from a PC (such as, different voltage and different
plugs). IBM supplies power cords with an attached plug that corresponds to the power outlet most
commonly used in the country or region to which the product is being shipped. You are responsible for
supplying the proper power outlets.
v Plan for system electrical service. For information on power requirements for a specific model, refer to
the electrical section in the server specifications for that particular server. For information on power
requirements for expansion units or peripherals, select the appropriate device from the list of
compatible hardware specifications. For equipment not listed, check your equipment documentation
(owner's manuals) for specifications.
v Determine your server's plug and receptacle types: By model so you can have the proper outlets installed.

Tip: Print a copy of your plug and receptacle table and give it to your electrician. The table contains
information needed for installing outlets.
v Write down power information in your Server Information Form 3A. Include:
– Plug type
– Input voltage
– Power cord length (optional)
v Plan for power outages. Consider purchasing an uninterruptible power supply to protect your system
against power fluctuations and outages. If your company owns a uninterruptible power supply,
involve your uninterruptible power supply vendor with any type of uninterruptible power supply
modification.
v Plan an emergency power-off switch. As a safety precaution, you should provide some method for
disconnecting power to all equipment in your server area. Put emergency power-off switches in
locations readily accessible to your systems operator and at designated exits from the room.
v Ground your system. Electrical grounding is important both for safety and correct operation. Your
electrician should follow your national and local electrical codes when installing the electrical wiring,
outlets, and power panels. These codes take precedence over any other recommendations.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2007, 2009 499

v Contact an electrician. Contact a qualified electrician to take care of your server power requirements
and install needed power outlets. Give the electrician a copy of your power information. You can print
the recommended power distribution wiring diagram as a reference for your electrician.
Related reference:
“Plug and receptacle types: By model” on page 546
Select your model to find its plug and receptacle type and power cord features.

Server Information Form 3A

Use this form to record the type and quantity of power cords that you need for your server.

Frame Device Type Device Description Plug Type/Input Notes

Feature Code Voltage

Licensed Programs

500 Site and hardware planning

Workstation Information Form 3B
Use this form to record the type and quantity of cables you need for your server.

Part number Device type Device Device Cable length Plug Telephone
description location type/Input contact
voltage

Licensed Programs

Determining power cord, plug, and receptacle type

To determine what power cord, plug, and receptacle type your server or system requires, you need to
know the country or region in which your server or system will reside, your server or system model, and
the voltage and amperage of your power supply.

Chapter 10. Planning for power 501

The server or system and all of the expansion units and attached equipment will require an isolated
power supply. This means, it must have its own circuit. Use an uninterruptible power supply to help
protect both the server and its data.

Figure 253. Typical power distribution system that is grounded properly

Plugs and receptacles: By country or region

Choose the country or region in which your system will be installed to see the plugs and receptacles
used.
v Abu Dhabi
v Afghanistan
v Albania
v Algeria
v Andorra
v Angola
v Anguilla
v Argentina

502 Site and hardware planning

v Armenia
v Aruba
v Australia
v Austria
v Azores
v Bahamas
v Bahrain
v Bangladesh
v Barbados
v Belarus
v Belgium
v Belize
v Benin
v Bermuda
v Bolivia
v Bonaire
v Bosnia
v Botswana
v Brazil
v Brunei
v Bulgaria
v Burkina Faso
v Burundi
v Caicos Islands
v Cambodia
v Cameroon
v Canada
v Canary Islands
v Cape Verde Islands
v Cayman Islands
v Central African Republic
v Chad
v Chile
v China
v Colombia
v Congo
v Costa Rica
v Croatia
v Curacao
v Cyprus
v Czech Republic
v Dahomey
v Denmark
v Djibouti
v Dominica

Chapter 10. Planning for power 503

v Dominican Republic
v Ecuador
v Egypt
v El Salvador
v Equatorial Guinea
v Eritrea
v Estonia
v Ethiopia
v Faero Islands
v Fiji
v Finland
v France
v French Guiana
v French Polynesia
v Gabon
v Gambia
v Georgia
v Germany
v Ghana
v Greece
v Greenland
v Grenada
v Grenadines
v Guadeloupe
v Guam
v Guatemala
v Guinea
v Guinea-Bissau
v Haiti
v Honduras
v Hong Kong S.A.R. of the PRC
v Hungary
v Iceland
v India
v Indonesia
v Iran
v Iraq
v Ireland
v Israel
v Italy
v Ivory Coast
v Jamaica
v Japan
v Jordan
v Kazakhstan

504 Site and hardware planning

v Kenya
v Kirghizia
v Kuwait
v Laos
v Latvia
v Lebanon
v Lesotho
v Liberia
v Libya
v Liechtenstein
v Lithuania
v Luxembourg
v Macao S.A.R. of the PRC
v Macedonia
v Malagasy Republic
v Malawi
v Malaysia
v Mali
v Malta
v Martinique
v Mauritania
v Mexico
v Moldavia
v Mongolia
v Monaco
v Montserrat
v Morocco
v Mozambique
v Myanmar
v Namibia
v Nepal
v Netherlands
v Netherlands Antilles
v Nevis
v New Caledonia
v New Zealand
v Nicaragua
v Niger
v Nigeria
v North Korea
v Norway
v Oman
v Pakistan
v Panama
v Papua New Guinea

Chapter 10. Planning for power 505

v Paraguay
v People's Republic of China
v Peru
v Philippines
v Poland
v Portugal
v Principe
v Puerto Rico
v Qatar
v Reunion
v Romania
v Russia
v Rwanda
v Sabah
v Samoa, Western
v Sao Tome Island
v Saudi Arabia
v Senegal
v Serbia
v Seychelles
v Sierra Leone
v Singapore
v Slovakia
v Slovenia
v Somalia
v South Africa
v South Korea
v Spain
v Sri Lanka
v St. Kitts
v St. Lucia
v St. Martin
v St. Vincent
v Sudan
v Suriname
v Swaziland
v Sweden
v Switzerland
v Syria
v Tahiti
v Taiwan
v Tanzania
v Thailand
v Tobago
v Togo

506 Site and hardware planning

v Tortola (BVI)
v Trinidad
v Tunisia
v Turkey
v Turks Islands
v Uganda
v Ukraine
v United Arab Emirates
v United Kingdom
v United States
v Uruguay
v Uzbekistan
v Venezuela
v Vietnam
v Virgin Islands
v Western Samoa
v Yemen
v Zaire
v Zambia
v Zimbabwe

Plug and receptacle types: 2 , 12

Use the Plugs and receptacles types table to determine the plugs and receptacles available for your
country or region.

Chapter 10. Planning for power 507

Table 634. Plug and receptacle types
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, and
9117-570
v Models 9406-270, 9406-800,
9406-810, 9406-820, and 9406-825
v Expansion units 5075, 5077, 5095,
7104 and 7116
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9115-505, 9111-285, 9131-52A,
9133-55A
v 7314-G30, 5796
200V 10A v 9406-525 Type 2
v 9407-515
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

v Models 9406-730, 9406-740

250V 30A v Models 9406-840, SB3 Type 12
v 0550 and 0551 racks
Countries or regions
Paraguay, Uruguay

Plug and receptacle types: 12, 18

Use the Plugs and receptacles table to determine the plugs and receptacles available for your country or
region.

508 Site and hardware planning

Table 635. Plug and receptacle types
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, and
9117-570
v Expansion units 507x, 508x, 5094,
5095, 7116, 7104, 7316, 9316
v 9406-8xxx base I/O Rack
v 9251, 9079 base I/O expansion unit
v 9074 and 9094 base I/O enclosure
v Models 9406-270, 9406-720,
9406-800, 9406-810, 9406-820,
9406-825, 9406-830, SB2
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9115-505, 9111-285, 9131-52A,
250V 16A 9133-55A Type 18
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

v Models 9406-730, 9406-740

250V 30A v Models 9406-840, SB3 Type 12
v 0550 and 0551 racks
Countries or regions
Afghanistan, Cape Verde Islands, Indonesia, Paraguay, Suriname, Uruguay

Plug and receptacle types: 12, 22

Use the Plugs and receptacles table to determine the plugs and receptacles available for your country or
region.

Chapter 10. Planning for power 509

Table 636. Plug and receptacle types
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, and
9117-570
v Expansion units 507x, 508x, 5094,
5095, 7116, 7104
v 9406-8xxx base I/O Rack
v 9251, 9079 base I/O expansion unit
v 9074 and 9094 base I/O enclosure
v Models 9406-270, 9406-720,
9406-800, 9406-810, 9406-820,
9406-825, 9406-830, SB2
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9115-505, 9111-285, 9131-52A,
250V 16A 9133-55A Type 22
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

v Models 9406-730, 9406-740

250V 30A v Models 9406-840, SB3 Type 12
v 0550 and 0551 racks
Countries or regions
Bangladesh, Sri Lanka

Plug and receptacle types: 23, 12

Use the Plugs and receptacles table to determine the plugs and receptacles available for your country or
region.

510 Site and hardware planning

Table 637. Plug and receptacle types
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, and
9117-570
v Expansion units 507x, 508x, 5094,
5095, 7116, 7104
v 9406-8xxx base I/O Rack
v 9251, 9079 base I/O expansion unit
v 9074 and 9094 base I/O enclosure
v Models 9406-270, 9406-720,
9406-800, 9406-810, 9406-820,
9406-825, 9406-830, SB2
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9115-505, 9111-285, 9131-52A,
250V 13A 9133-55A Type 23
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

v Models 9406-730, 9406-740

250V 30A v Models 9406-840, SB3 Type 12
v 0550 and 0551 racks
Countries or regions
Brunei, Hong Kong S.A.R. of the PRC, Malaysia (Plug Type 23), Myanmar

Plug and receptacle types: 18, 46 (P+N+E) [32A]

Use the Plugs and receptacles table to determine the plugs and receptacles available for your country or
region.

Chapter 10. Planning for power 511

Table 638. Plug and receptacle types
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, and
9117-570
v Expansion units 507x, 508x, 5094,
5095, 7116, 7104
v 8xxx base I/O Rack
v 9251, 9079 base I/O expansion unit
v 9074 and 9094 base I/O enclosure
v Model 9406-270, 9406-720,
9406-800, 9406-810, 9406-820,
9406-825
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9115-505, 9111-285, 9131-52A,
9133-55A
v 7037-A50
250V 16A Type 18
v 7047-185
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

v Models 8234-EMA, 9406-730,

9406-740
250V 32A Type 46 (P+N+E) [32A]
v Models 9406-840, SB3
v 0550 and 0551 rack
Countries or regions
Albania, Algeria, Andorra, Angola, Armenia, Austria, Azores, Belarus, Belgium, Benin, Bosnia, Bulgaria, Burkina
Faso, Burundi, Cambodia, Cameroon, Central African Republic, Chad, Congo, Croatia, Dahomey, Djibouti, Egypt,
Equatorial Guinea, Ethiopia, Faero Islands, France, French Guiana, French Polynesia, Gabon, Georgia, Germany,
Greece, Greenland, Guadeloupe, Guinea, Guinea-Bissau, Hungary, Iceland, Iran, Ivory Coast, Kazakhstan, Kirghizia,
Laos, Lebanon, Luxembourg, Macau S.A.R. of the PRC, Macedonia, Malagasy Republic, Mali, Martinique,
Mauritania, Moldavia, Monaco, Mongolia, Morocco, Mozambique, Netherlands, New Caledonia, Niger, Norway,
Poland, Portugal, Principe, Reunion, Romania, Rwanda, Sao Tome Island, Senegal, Serbia, Slovakia, Slovenia,
Somalia, Spain, Syria, Tahiti, Togo, Tunisia, Ukraine, Uzbekistan, Vietnam, Zaire, Zimbabwe

Plug and receptacle types: 18, 46 (3P+N+E)

Use the Plugs and receptacles table to determine the plugs and receptacles available for your country or
region.

512 Site and hardware planning

Table 639. Plug and receptacle types
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, and
9117-570
v Expansion units 507x, 508x, 5095,
7116, 7104
v 9251, 9079 base I/O expansion unit
v 9074 base I/O enclosure
v Model 9406-250, 9406-270,
9406-720, 9406-800, 9406-810,
9406-820, 9406-825, 9406-830, SB2
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9115-505, 9111-285, 9131-52A,
9133-55A
v 7037-A50
v 7047-185
250V 16A Type 18
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50
v 9409-M50

v Models 8234-EMA, 9406-730,

250V 16A 9406-740, 9406-840, SB3 Type 46 (3P+N+E)
v 0550 and 0551 racks
Countries or regions
Czech Republic, Estonia, Ethiopia, Finland, Lithuania, Russia, Sweden, Turkey

Plug and receptacle types: 22, 46 (P+N+E) [32A]

Use the Plugs and receptacles table to determine the plugs and receptacles available for your country or
region.

Chapter 10. Planning for power 513

Table 640. Plug and receptacle types
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, and
9117-570
v Expansion units 507x, 508x, 5094,
5095, 7116, 7104
v 9406-8xxx base I/O Rack
v 9251, 9079 base I/O expansion unit
v 9074 and 9094 base I/O enclosure
v Models 9406-270, 9406-720,
9406-800, 9406-810, 9406-820,
9406-825, 9406-830, SB2
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9115-505, 9111-285, 9131-52A,
250V 16A 9133-55A Type 22 f2346
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

v Models 8234-EMA, 9406-730,

250V 32A 9406-740, 9406-840, SB3 Type 46 (P+N+E) [32A]
v 0550 and 0551 Racks
Countries or regions
Swaziland, Uganda

Plug and receptacle types: 23, 46 (P+N+E) [32A]

Use the Plugs and receptacles table to determine the plugs and receptacles available for your country or
region.

514 Site and hardware planning

Table 641. Plug and receptacle types
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, and
9117-570
v Expansion units 507x, 508x, 5094,
5095, 7116, 7104
v 8xxx base I/O Rack
v 9251 base I/O expansion unit
v 9079 base I/O expansion unit
v 9074 and 9094 base I/O enclosure
v Model 9406-250, 9406-270,
9406-720, 9406-800, 9406-810,
9406-820, 9406-825, 9406-830, SB2
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9115-505, 9111-285, 9131-52A,
9133-55A
250V 13A v 7037-A50 Type 23
v 7047-185
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

v Models 8234-EMA, 9406-730,

250V 32A 9406-740, 9406-840, SB3 Type 46 (P+N+E) [32A]
v 0550 and 0551 racks
Countries or regions
Abu Dhabi, Bahrain, Botswanna, Cyprus, Dominica, Gambia, Ghana, Grenada, Grenadines, Guyana, India, Iraq,
Ireland, Jordan, Kenya, Kuwait, Lesotho, Liberia, Malawi, Malaysia, Malta, Namibia, Nepal, Nigeria, Oman, Qatar,
Sabah, Saudi Arabia, Seychelles, Sierra Leone, Singapore, St. Lucia, St. Vincent, Sudan, Tanzania, United Arab
Emirates, United Kingdom, Zambia

Plug and receptacle types: 24, 46 (P+N+E) [16A], 46 (3P+N+E)

Use the Plugs and receptacles table to determine the plugs and receptacles available for your country or
region.

Chapter 10. Planning for power 515

Table 642. Plug and receptacle types
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, and
9117-570
v Expansion units 5070, 5071, 5072,
5073, 5075, 5077, 508x, 5095, 7116,
7104
v 9251 base I/O expansion unit
v Model 9406-270, 9406-800,
9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9115-505, 9111-285, 9131-52A,
9133-55A
v 7037-A50
v 7047-185
250V 10A Type 24
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

v Models 8234-EMA, 9406-720,

9406-830, SB2
250V 16A v Expansion unit 5074, 5079, 5094 Type 46 (P+N+E) [16A]
v 8xxx base I/O Rack
v 9074 and 9094 base I/O enclosure

v Models 8234-EMA, 9406-730,

9406-740, SB1
250V 16A Type 46 (3P+N+E)
v Models 9406-840, SB3
v 0550 and 055 racks
Countries or regions
Liechtenstein, Switzerland

Plug and receptacle types: 25, 46 (P+N+E) [32A]

Use the Plugs and receptacles table to determine the plugs and receptacles available for your country or
region.

516 Site and hardware planning

Table 643. Plug and receptacle types
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, and
9117-570
v Expansion units 507x, 508x, 5094,
5095, 7116, 7104
v 8xxx base I/O Rack
v 9251, 9079 base I/O expansion unit
v 9074 and 9094 base I/O enclosure
v Models 9406-270, 9406-720,
9406-820, 9406-830, SB2
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9115-505, 9111-285, 9131-52A,
9133-55A
v 7037-A50
250V 16A v 7047-185 Type 25
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

v Models 8234-EMA, 9406-730,

250V 32A 9406-740, 9406-840, SB3 Type 46 (P+N+E) [32A]
v 0550 and 0551 racks
Countries or regions
Chile, Eritrea, Italy, Libya

Plug and receptacle types: 4, 10, 12

Use the Plugs and receptacles table to determine the plugs and receptacles available for your country or
region.

Chapter 10. Planning for power 517

Table 644. Plug and receptacle types
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, and
9117-570
v Expansion units 5070, 5072, 5075,
5077, 5080, 5082, 5095, 7104, 7116
v Model 9406-270, 9406-800,
9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9115-505, 9111-285, 9131-52A,
9133-55A
v 7037-A50
125V 15A Type 4
v 7047-185
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-570, and 9117-570
v Expansion units 5070, 5071, 5072,
5073, 5077, 5075, 5074, 5079, 5094,
5095, 508x, 7116, 7104
v 8xxx base I/O Rack
v 9251 base I/O expansion unit
v 9079 base I/O expansion unit
v 9074 base I/O enclosure
v Models 9406-270, 9406-720,
9406-800, 9406-810, 9406-820,
250V 15A 9406-825, 9406-830, SB2, 9074, 9079 Type 10
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9111-285, 9131-52A, 9133-55A
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 5096
v 5296
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA

v Models 9406-730, 9406-740

250V 30A v Models 9406-840, SB3 Type 12
v 0550 and 0551 racks

518 Site and hardware planning

Table 644. Plug and receptacle types (continued)
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type
Countries or regions
Colombia, Mexico

Plug and receptacle types: 4, 5, 12

Use the Plugs and receptacles table to determine the plugs and receptacles available for your country or
region.
Table 645. Plug and receptacle types
Voltage and amperage Models Plug receptacle type

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, and
9117-570, and OpenPower 720
v Expansion units 5070, 5072, 5075,
5077, 5080, 5082, 5095, 7104, 7116
v Model 9406-270, 9406-800,
9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9115-505, 9111-285, 9131-52A,
9133-55A
v 7037-A50
125V 15A Type 4
v 7047-185
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

Chapter 10. Planning for power 519

Table 645. Plug and receptacle types (continued)
Voltage and amperage Models Plug receptacle type

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570
9117-570, and OpenPower 720
v Expansion units 5070, 5071, 5072,
5073, 5074, 5075, 5077, 5079, 508x,
5094, 5095, 7116, 7104
v 8xxx base I/O Rack
v 9079 base I/O expansion unit
v 9074 base I/O enclosure
v 9251 base I/O expansion unit
v Models 9406-270, 9406-720,
9406-800, 9406-810, 9406-820,
9406-825, 9406-830, SB2, 9074, 9079
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9115-505, 9111-285, 9131-52A,
250V 15A 9133-55A Type 5
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 5096
v 5296
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

v Models 9406-730, 9406-740

v Models 9406-840, SB3
250V 30A Type 12
v 0550 and 0551 racks
v OpenPower 720
Countries or regions
Anguilla, Antigua, Aruba, Bahamas, Barbados, Belize, Bermuda, Bolivia, Bonaire, Caicos Islands, Cayman Islands,
Costa Rica, Curacao, Dominican Republic, Ecuador, El Salvador, Guam, Guatemala, Haiti, Honduras, Jamaica,
Montserrat, Netherlands Antilles, Nevis, Nicaragua, Panama, Philippines, Puerto Rico, St. Kitts, St. Martin, Taiwan,
Tobago, Tortola (BVI), Trinidad, Turks Islands, Venezuela, Virgin Islands, Yemen

Plug and receptacle types: 2, 12

Use the Plugs and receptacles table to determine the plugs and receptacles available for your country or
region.

520 Site and hardware planning

Table 646. Plug and receptacle types
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, and
9117-570
v Models 9406-270, 9406-800,
9406-810, 9406-820, and 9406-825
v Expansion units 5075, 5077, 5095,
7104 and 7116
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9115-505, 9111-285, 9131-52A,
9133-55A
v 7314-G30, 5796
200V 10A v 9406-525 Type 2
v 9407-515
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

v 53x Processor Side

v Model SB1
250V 30A v Models 9406-730, 740 Type 12
v Models 9406-840, SB3
v 0550 and 0551
Countries or regions
Argentina

Plug and receptacle types: 6, 54, PDL

Use the Plugs and receptacles table to determine the plugs and receptacles available for your country or
region.

Chapter 10. Planning for power 521

Table 647. Plug and receptacle types
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, and
9117-570
v Expansion units 507x, 508x, 5095,
7116, 7104
v 9251 base I/O expansion unit
v Models 9406-270, 9406-800,
9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9115-505, 9111-285, 9131-52A,
9133-55A
v 7314-G30, 5796
250V 10A Type 6
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

v Models 9406-720
v Expansion unit 5065, 5066,
5079(x2), 5074, 5094
250V 15A v 8xxx base I/O Rack Type 54
v 9079 base I/O expansion unit
v 9074 and 9094 base I/O enclosure
v Models 9406-830, SB2

v Models 9406-730, 740

250V 32A v Models 9406-840, SB3 Type PDL
v 0550 and 0551 racks
Countries or regions
Australia, Fiji, New Zealand, Papua New Guinea

Plug and receptacle types: 46 (P+N+E) [32A], 70, 73

Use the Plugs and receptacles table to determine the plugs and receptacles available for your country or
region.
Table 648. Plug and receptacle types
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type
250V 25A v 0550 and 0551 racks Type 46 (P+N+E) [32A]
v Models 9406-840, SB3

522 Site and hardware planning

Table 648. Plug and receptacle types (continued)
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type
100V 10A v Models 9406-520, 9111-520, Type 70
9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, and
9117-570
v Models 9406-270, 9406-800,
9406-810, and 9406-820
v Expansion units 5075, 5077, 5095,
7104, 7116
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9115-505, 9111-285, 9131-52A,
9133-55A
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

v 9406-270, 9406-800, 9406-810,

9406-820, 9406-825, 5075, 5077,
5095, 7104, 7116, 9406-500,
9406-510, 5070, 5071, 5072, 5073,
5080, 5081, 5082, 5083, 9251
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9117-MMA

200-240 V 10A v 9406-MMA

Type 73
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50
250V 60A 415V 30A v Models 9406-870, 9406-890 No plug, shipped without cord

Countries or regions
Brazil

Plug and receptacle types: 4, 7, 51, 5, 10, 34, 40, 12

Use the Plugs and receptacles table to determine the plugs and receptacles available for your country or
region.

Chapter 10. Planning for power 523

Table 649. Plug and receptacle types
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, and
9117-570
v Expansion units 5070, 5072, 5075,
5077, 5080, 5082, 5095, 7104, 7116
v Model 9406-270, 9406-800,
9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9115-505, 9111-285, 9131-52A,
9133-55A
v 7037-A50
125V 15A Type 4
v 7047-185
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50
125V 15A Locking v Expansion units 5070, 5072, 5075, Type 7
5077, 5080, 5082, 5095, 7104, 7116
v Model 9406-270, 9406-800,
9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825
125V 13A/15A Water Resistant v Expansion units 5070, 5072, 5075, Type 51
5077, 5080, 5082, 5095, 7104, 7116

524 Site and hardware planning

Table 649. Plug and receptacle types (continued)
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, and
9117-570, and OpenPower 720
v Expansion units 5070, 5071, 5072,
5073, 5074, 5075, 5077, 5079, 508x,
5094, 5095, 7116, 7104
v 8xxx base I/O Rack
v 9079 base I/O expansion unit
v 9074 base I/O enclosure
v 9251 base I/O expansion unit
v Models 9406-270, 9406-720,
9406-800, 9406-810, 9406-820,
9406-825, 9406-830, SB2, 9074, 9079
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9115-505, 9111-285, 9131-52A,
9133-55A
v 7037-A50
250V 15A Type 5
v 7047-185
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 5096
v 5296
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

Chapter 10. Planning for power 525

Table 649. Plug and receptacle types (continued)
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type
250V 15A Locking v Models 9406-520, 9111-520, Type 10
9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570
9117-570, and OpenPower 720
v Models 9406-270, 9406-720,
9406-800, 9406-810, 9406-820,
9406-825, 9406-830, SB2
v Expansion units 507x, 508x, 5094,
5095, 7116, 7104
v 8xxx base I/O Rack
v 9251 base I/O expansion unit
v 9074 and 9094 base I/O enclosure
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9111-285, 9131-52A, 9133-55A
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 5096
v 5296
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
250V 10A/15A Water Resistant v Models 9406-520, 9111-520, Type 34
9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, and
9117-570
v Models 9406-270, 9406-720,
9406-800, 9406-810, 9406-820,
9406-825, 9406-830, SB2
v Expansion units 507x, 508x, 5094,
5095, 7116, 7104
v 8xxx base I/O Rack
v 9251 base I/O expansion unit
v 9074 and 9094 base I/O enclosure
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9131-52A, 9133-55A
v 5096
v 5296
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
250V 30A Water Resistant v Models 9406-730, 9406-740, Type 40
9406-840, SB3
v 0550 and 0551 racks
250V 30A Locking v Models 9406-730, 9406-740, Type 12
9406-840, SB3
v 0550 and 0551 racks
Countries or regions
Canada

526 Site and hardware planning

Plug and receptacle types: 18, 46 (P+N+E) [32A]
Use the Plugs and receptacles table to determine the plugs and receptacles available for your country or
region.
Table 650. Plug and receptacle types
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, and
9117-570
v Models 9406-720
v Expansion units 507x, 508x, 5094,
5095, 7104, 7116,
v 8xxx base I/O Rack
v 9251, 9079 base I/O expansion unit
v 9074, 9094 base I/O enclosure
v Model 9406-270, 9406-800,
9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9115-505, 9111-285, 9131-52A,
9133-55A
v 7037-A50
250V 16A Type 18
v 7047-185
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

v 0550 and 0551 racks

250V 25A Type 46 (P+N+E) [32A]
v Models 8234-EMA, 9406-840 SB3
250V 60A 415V 30A v Models 9406-870, 9406-890 No plug, shipped without cord
Countries or regions
Canary Islands

Plug and receptacle types: 25, 12

Use the Plugs and receptacles table to determine the plugs and receptacles available for your country or
region.

Chapter 10. Planning for power 527

Table 651. Plug and receptacle types
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, and
9117-570
v Model 9406-720
v Expansion units 507x, 508x, 5094,
5095, 7116, 7104
v 8xxx base I/O Rack
v 9251, 9079 base I/O expansion unit
v 9074 and 9094 base I/O enclosure
v Models 9406-270, 9406-800,
9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9115-505, 9111-285, 9131-52A,
9133-55A
v 7037-A50
250V 16A Type 25
v 7047-185
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

v 53x Processor Side

v Model SB1
250V 30A v Models 9406-730, 740 Type 12
v Models 9406-840, SB3
v 0550 and 0551
Countries or regions
Chile

Plug and receptacle types: 62, 12, 72

Use the Plugs and receptacles table to determine the plugs and receptacles available for your country or
region.
Table 652. Plug and receptacle types
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type

v Models 9406-730, 9406-740

250V 30A v Models 9406-840, SB3 Type 12
v 0550 and 0551 racks

528 Site and hardware planning

Table 652. Plug and receptacle types (continued)
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, and
9117-570
v Models 9406-270, 9406-800,
9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825
v Expansion units 507x, 508x, 5095,
7116, 7104
v 9251 base I/O expansion unit
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9115-505, 9111-285, 9131-52A,
9133-55A
v 7037-A50
v 7047-185
250V 10A Type 62
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

v Models 9406-720
v Expansion unit 5065, 5066,
5079(x2), 5074, 5094
250V 15A v 8xxx base I/O Rack Type 72
v 9079 base I/O expansion unit
v 9074 and 9094 base I/O enclosure
v Models 9406-830, SB2
Countries or regions
People's Republic of China

Plug and receptacle types: 19, 46 (3P+N+E), 46 (P+N+E) [16A]

Use the Plugs and receptacles table to determine the plugs and receptacles available for your country or
region.

Chapter 10. Planning for power 529

Table 653. Plug and receptacle types
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, and
9117-570
v Models 9406-270, 9406-800,
9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825
v Expansion units 507x, 508x, 5095,
7116, 7104
v 9251 base I/O expansion unit
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9115-505, 9111-285, 9131-52A,
9133-55A
v 7037-A50
v 7047-185
250V 10A v 9116-561 Type 19
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

v Models 8234-EMA, 9406-720,

9406-830, SB2
v Expansion I/O units 5074, 5079,
250V 16A 5094 Type 46 (P+N+E) [16A]
v 8xxx base I/O Rack
v 9079 base I/O expansion unit
v 9074 and 9094 base I/O enclosure

v Models 8234-EMA, 9406-730,

250V 16A 9406-740, 9406-840, SB3 Type 46 (3P+N+E)
v 0550 and 0551 racks
Countries or regions
Denmark

Plug and receptacle types: 32, 46 (P+N+E) [32A], 46 (3P+N+E)

Use the Plugs and receptacles table to determine the plugs and receptacles available for your country or
region.

530 Site and hardware planning

Table 654. Plug and receptacle types
Plug and receptacle
Voltage and amperage Models type

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570,

and 9117-570
v Models 9406-720, 9406-270, 9406-800, 9406-810, 9406-820,
9406-825
v Expansion units 507x, 508x, 5094, 5095, 7116, 7104
v 8xxx base I/O Rack
v 9251, 9079 base I/O expansion unit
v 9074 and 9094 base I/O enclosure
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9115-505, 9111-285, 9131-52A, 9133-55A
v 7037-A50
v 7047-185
250V 16A v 9116-561 Type 32
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

v Models 8234-EMA, 9406-730, 9406-740, 9406-840, SB3

250V 16A Type 46 (3P+N+E)
v 0550 and 0551 racks
Countries or regions
Israel

Plug and receptacle types: 34, 10, 12, 57, 59

Use the Plugs and receptacles table to determine the plugs and receptacles available for your country or
region.

Chapter 10. Planning for power 531

Table 655. Plug and receptacle types
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, and
9117-570
v Models 9406-270, 9406-800,
9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825,
9406-830, SB2
v Model 9406-720
v Expansion units 507x, 508x, 5094,
250V 10A/15A Water Resistant 5095, 7116, 7104 Type 34
v 8xxx base I/O Rack
v 9251 base I/O expansion unit
v 9074 and 9094 base I/O enclosure
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9131-52A, 9133-55A
v 9406-525
v 9407-515

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570,
9117-570, and OpenPower 720
v Model 9406-720
v Expansion units 5070, 5071, 5072,
5073, 5074, 5075, 5077, 5079, 508x,
5094, 5095, 7116, 7104
v 8xxx base I/O Rack
v 9079 base I/O expansion unit
v 9074 base I/O enclosure
v 9251 base I/O expansion unit
250V 20A Locking Type 10
v Models 9406-270, 9406-800,
9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825,
9406-830, SB2, 9074, 9079
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9111-285, 9131-52A, 9133-55A
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA

v Models 9406-730, 9406-740,

250V 30A Locking 9406-840, SB3 Type 12
v 0550 and 0551 racks

532 Site and hardware planning

Table 655. Plug and receptacle types (continued)
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type

v OpenPower 710, 9110-510,

OpenPower 720, 5786, 5787,
7031-D24, 9111-520, 9113-550,
9117-570, 9115-505, 9111-285,
9131-52A, 9133-55A
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
200 - 240 V 12 A Type 57
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

v Expansion units 5070, 5072, 5080,

5082
v OpenPower 710, 9110-510,
OpenPower 720, 5786, 5787,
7031-D24, 7031-T24, 9115-505,
9111-285, 9131-52A, 9133-55A
v 8204-E8A
250V 15A Type 59
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50
Countries or regions
Japan

Plug and receptacle types: 66, KP

Use the Plugs and receptacles table to determine the plugs and receptacles available for your country or
region.

Chapter 10. Planning for power 533

Table 656. Plug and receptacle types
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570,
9117-570 and expansion units used
with IBM System i5 and System p5
, 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24,
9115-505, 9111-285, 9131-52A,
9133-55A
v 7311-D11
v 7037-A50
v 7047-185
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
200-240 V 10 A Type 66
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

v Models 9406-730, 9406-740,

250V 32A 9406-840, SB3 Type KP
v 0550 and 0551 racks
Countries or regions
North Korea, South Korea

Plug and receptacle types: 18, 46 (3P+N+E)

Use the Plugs and receptacles table to determine the plugs and receptacles available for your country or
region.

534 Site and hardware planning

Table 657. Plug and receptacle types
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type

v 9406-520,
v 9111-520
v 9406-550,
v 9113-550
v 9406-570
v 9117-570
v 9406-720
v Expansion units 507x, 508x, 5094,
5095, 7104, 7116,
v 8xxx base I/O Rack
v 9251, 9079 base I/O expansion unit
v 9074 and 9094 base I/O enclosure
v 9406-270
v 9406-800
v 9406-810
v 9406-820
v 9406-825
250V 16A v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24 Type 18
v 9115-505, 9111-285, 9131-52A,
9133-55A
v 7037-A50
v 7047-185
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

v Models 8234-EMA, 9406-730,

250V 16A 9406-740, 9406-840, SB3 Type 46 (3P+N+E)
v 0550 and 0551 racks
Countries or regions
Latvia

Plug and receptacle types: 22, 46 (P+N+E) [32A]

Use the Plugs and receptacles table to determine the plugs and receptacles available for your country or
region.

Chapter 10. Planning for power 535

Table 658. Plug and receptacle types
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, and
9117-570
v Models 9406-720
v Expansion units 507x, 508x, 5094,
5095, 7116, 7104
v 8xxx base I/O Rack
v 9251, 9079 base I/O expansion unit
v 9074 and 9094 base I/O enclosure
v Models 9406-270, 9406-800,
9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825,
9406-830, SB2
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9115-505, 9111-285, 9131-52A,
9133-55A
250V 16A v 7037-A50 Type 22
v 7047-185
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

v Models 8234-EMA, 9406-730,

250V 32A 9406-740, 9406-840, SB3 Type 46 (P+N+E) [32A]
v 0550 and 0551 rack
Countries or regions
Pakistan

Plug and receptacle types: 4, 5, 12

Use the Plugs and receptacles table to determine the plugs and receptacles available for your country or
region.

536 Site and hardware planning

Table 659. Plug and receptacle types
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570
9117-570, and OpenPower 720
v Expansion units 5070, 5072, 5075,
5077, 5080, 5082, 5095, 7104, 7116
v Model 9406-270, 9406-800,
9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9115-505, 9111-285, 9131-52A,
9133-55A
125V 15A Type 4
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

Chapter 10. Planning for power 537

Table 659. Plug and receptacle types (continued)
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-550, 9113-550,
9406-5709117-570, and OpenPower
720
v Expansion units 5070, 5071, 5072,
5073, 5074, 5075, 5077, 5079, 508x,
5094, 5095, 7116, 7104
v 8xxx base I/O Rack
v 9079 base I/O expansion unit
v 9074 base I/O enclosure
v 9251 base I/O expansion unit
v Models 9406-270, 9406-720,
9406-800, 9406-810, 9406-820,
9406-825, 9406-830, SB2, 9074, 9079
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9115-505, 9111-285, 9131-52A,
250V 15A 9133-55A Type 5
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 5096
v 5296
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

v Models 9406-730, 9406-740,

250V 30A Locking 9406-840, SB3 Type 12
v 0550 and 0551 racks
Countries or regions
Peru

Plug and receptacle types: 22, 46 (3+N+E)

Use the Plugs and receptacles table to determine the plugs and receptacles available for your country or
region.

538 Site and hardware planning

Table 660. Plug and receptacle types
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, and
9117-570
v Model 9406-720
v Expansion units 507x, 508x, 5094,
5095, 7116, 7104
v 8xxx base I/O Rack
v 9251, 9079 base I/O expansion unit
v 9074 and 9094 base I/O enclosure
v Models 9406-270, 9406-800,
9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825,
9406-830, SB2
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9115-505, 9111-285, 9131-52A,
9133-55A
250V 16A v 7037-A50 Type 22
v 7047-185
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

v Models 8234-EMA, 9406-730,

250V 32 A 9406-740, 9406-840, SB3 Type 46 (P+N+E)
v 0550 and 0551 racks
Countries or regions
South Africa

Plug and receptacle types: 5, 12

Use the Plugs and receptacles table to determine the plugs and receptacles available for your country or
region.

Chapter 10. Planning for power 539

Table 661. Plug and receptacle types
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570,
9117-570, and OpenPower 720
v Model 9406-720
v Expansion units 5070, 5071, 5072,
5073, 5074, 5075, 5077, 5079, 508x,
5094, 5095, 7116, 7104
v 8xxx base I/O Rack
v 9079 base I/O expansion unit
v 9074 base I/O enclosure
v 9251 base I/O expansion unit
v Models 9406-270, 9406-800,
9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825,
9406-830, SB2, 9074, 9079
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9115-505, 9111-285, 9131-52A,
250V 15A 9133-55A Type 5
v 7037-A50
v 7047-185
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

v Models 9406-730, 9406-740

v Models 9406-840 SB3
250V 30A Type 12
v 0550 and 0551 racks
v OpenPower 720
Countries or regions
Thailand

Plug and receptacle types: 4, 7, 51, 5, 10, 34, 40, 12

Use the Plugs and receptacles table to determine the plugs and receptacles available for your country or
region.

540 Site and hardware planning

Table 662. Plug and receptacle types
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-550, 9113-550
v Expansion units 5070, 5072, 5075,
5077, 5080, 5082, 5095, 7104, 7116
v Model 9406-270, 9406-800,
9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9115-505, 9111-285, 9131-52A,
9133-55A
v 7037-A50
125V 15A v 7047-185 Type 4
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

v Expansion units 5070, 5072, 5075,

5077, 5080, 5082, 5095, 7104, 7116
125V 15A Locking Type 7
v Models 9406-270, 9406-800,
9406-820, 9406-825

125V 13A/15A Water Resistant v Expansion units 5070, 5072, 5075, Type 51
5077, 5080, 5082, 5095, 7104, 7116

Chapter 10. Planning for power 541

Table 662. Plug and receptacle types (continued)
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570,
9117-570, and OpenPower 720
v Model 9406-720
v Expansion units 5070, 5071, 5072,
5073, 5074, 5075, 5077, 5079, 508x,
5094, 5095, 7116, 7104
v 8xxx base I/O Rack
v 9079 base I/O expansion unit
v 9074 base I/O enclosure
v 9251 base I/O expansion unit
v Models 9406-270, 9406-800,
9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825,
9406-830, SB2, 9074, 9079
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9115-505, 9111-285, 9131-52A,
9133-55A
250V 15A v 7037-A50 Type 5
v 7047-185
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 5096
v 5296
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

542 Site and hardware planning

Table 662. Plug and receptacle types (continued)
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570,
9117-570, and OpenPower 720
v Models 9406-270, 9406-800,
9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825,
9406-830, SB2
v Model 9406-720
v Expansion units 507x, 508x, 5094,
5095, 7116, 7104
v 8xxx base I/O Rack
v 9251 base I/O expansion unit
250V 15A Locking v 9074 and 9094 base I/O enclosure Type 10
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9111-285, 9131-52A, 9133-55A
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 5096
v 5296
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, and
9117-570
v Models 9406-270, 9406-800,
9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825,
9406-830, SB2
v Model 9406-720
v Expansion units 507x, 508x, 5094,
5095, 7116, 7104
250V 10A/15A Water Resistant v 8xxx base I/O Rack Type 34
v 9251 base I/O expansion unit
v 9074 and 9094 base I/O enclosure
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9131-52A, 9133-55A
v 5096
v 5296
v 9406-525
v 9407-515

v Models 9406-730, 9406-740,

250V 30A Water Resistant 9406-840, SB3 Type 40
v 0550 and 0551 racks

v Models 9406-730, 9406-740,

250V 30A Locking 9406-840, SB3 Type 12
v 0550 and 0551 racks

Chapter 10. Planning for power 543

Table 662. Plug and receptacle types (continued)
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type
Countries or regions
United States

Plug and receptacle types: 6, 54, 46 (P+N+E) [32A]

Use the Plugs and receptacles table to determine the plugs and receptacles available for your country or
region.
Table 663. Plug and receptacle types
Voltage and amperage Models Plug and receptacle type

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520,

9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, and
9117-570
v 53x I/O Side
v Expansion units 5070, 5071, 5072,
5073, 5075, 5077, 508x, 5095, 5094
v 9251 base I/O expansion unit
v 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24
v 9115-505, 9111-285, 9131-52A,
250V 10A 9133-55A Type 6
v 7037-A50
v 7047-185
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA

v Model SB2
v Model 9406-720
250V 15A v Expansion unit 5033, 5034, 5035, Type 54
5065, 5066
v 9251, 9079 base I/O expansion unit
v 9074 base I/O enclosure

v 53x Processor Side

250V 32A v Models SB1 Type 46 (P+N+E) [32A]
v Models 9406-730, 9406-740
Countries or regions
Western Samoa

Plug type 12 countries or regions

Listed are countries or regions that use plug type 12.

Afghanistan, Anguilla, Antigua, Argentina, Aruba, Bahamas, Bangladesh, Barbados, Belize, Bermuda,
Bolivia, Bonaire, Brunei, Caicos Islands, Canada, Cape Verde Islands, Cayman Islands, Chile, Colombia,
Costa Rica, Curacao, Dominican Republic, Ecuador, El Salvador, Guam, Guatemala, Haiti, Honduras,
Hong Kong S.A.R. of the PRC, Indonesia, Jamaica, Japan, Mexico, Montserrat, Myanmar, Netherlands

544 Site and hardware planning

Antilles, Nicaragua, Panama, Paraguay, People's Republic of China, Peru, Philippines, Puerto Rico, Sri
Lanka, St. Kitts, St. Martin, Suriname, Taiwan, Thailand, Tobago, Tortola (BVI), Trinidad, Turks Island,
United States, Uruguay, Venezuela, Virgin Islands

Plug type 18 countries or regions

Listed are countries or regions that use plug type 18.

Afghanistan, Albania, Algeria, Andorra, Armenia, Austria, Azores, Belarus, Belgium, Benin, Bosnia,
Bulgaria, Burkina Faso, Burundi, Cambodia, Cameroon, Canary Islands, Cape Verde Islands, Central
African Republic, Chad, Congo, Croatia, Czech Republic, Dahomey, Djibouti, Egypt, Equatorial Guinea,
Estonia, Faero Islands, Finland, France, French Polynesia, French Guyana, Gabon, Georgia, Germany,
Greece, Greenland, Guadeloupe, Guinea, Guinea-Bissau, Hungary, Iceland, Indonesia, Iran, Ivory Coast,
Kazakhstan, Kirghizia, Laos, Latvia, Lebanon, Liberia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Macau S.A.R. of the PRC,
Macedonia, Malagasy Republic, Mali, Martinique, Mauritania, Moldavia, Monaco, Mongolia, Morocco,
Mozambique, Netherlands, New Caledonia, Niger, North Korea, Norway, Peru, Poland, Portugal,
Principe, Reunion, Romania, Russia, Rwanda, Sao Tome Island, Saudi Arabia, Senegal, Serbia, Slovenia,
Slovakia, South Korea, Spain, Sudan, Suriname, Swaziland, Sweden, Syria, Tahiti, Togo, Tunisia, Turkey,
Ukraine, Uzbekistan, Vietnam, Zaire, Zimbabwe

Plug type 46 (P+N+E) [32A] countries or regions

Listed are countries or regions that use plug type 46.

Abu Dhabi, Albania, Algeria, Andorra, Angola, Armenia, Azores, Bahrain, Belarus, Belgium, Benin,
Bosnia, Botswana, Brazil, Bulgaria, Burkina Faso, Burundi, Cambodia, Cameroon, Canary Islands, Central
African Republic, Chad, Congo, Croatia, Cyprus, Dahomey, Djibouti, Dominica, Egypt, Equatorial Guinea,
Eritrea, Ethiopia, Faero Islands, France, French Guyana, French Polynesia, Gabon, Gambia, Georgia,
Germany, Ghana, Greece, Greenland, Grenada, Grenadines, Guadeloupe, Guinea, Guinea-Bissau, Guyana,
Hungary, Iceland, India, Iran, Iraq, Ireland, Italy, Ivory Coast, Jordan, Kazakhstan, Kenya, Kirghizia,
Kuwait, Laos, Lesotho, Lebanon, Liberia, Libya, Luxembourg, Macedonia, Malagasy Republic, Macau
S.A.R. of the PRC, Malawi, Mali, Malta, Martinique, Mauritania, Moldavia, Mongolia, Monaco, Morocco,
Mozambique, Namibia, Nepal, Netherlands, New Caledonia, Niger, Nigeria, Norway, Oman, Pakistan,
Poland, Principe, Qatar, Reunion, Romania, Rwanda, Sabah, Sao Tome Island, Saudi Arabia, Senegal,
Serbia, Seychelles, Sierra Leone, Singapore, Slovakia, Slovenia, Somalia, Spain, St. Lucia, St. Vincent,
Sudan, Swaziland, Syria, Tahiti, Tanzania, Togo, Tunisia, Uganda, Ukraine, United Arab Emirates, United
Kingdom, Uzbekistan, Vietnam, Western Samoa, Zaire, Zambia, Zimbabwe

Plug type 46 (P+N+E) [16A] countries or regions

Listed are countries or regions that use plug type 46.

Denmark, Liechtenstein, Switzerland

(J) Only: Abu Dhabi, Bahrain, Botswana, Brazil, Brunei, , Cyprus, Dominica, Gambia, Ghana, Grenada,
Grenadines, Guyana, Hong Kong S.A.R. of the PRC, India, Iraq, Ireland, Jordan, Kenya, Kuwait, Lesotho,
Malawi, Malaysia, Malta, Namibia, Nepal, Nigeria, Oman, Qatar, Sabah, Seychelles, Sierra Leone,
Singapore, St. Lucia, St. Vincent, Tanzania, Uganda, United Arab Emirates, United Kingdom, Zambia

Plug and receptacle type 12 part numbers

Use the Plug type 12 part numbers table to determine the part number, countries or regions, and systems
that use plug type 12.
Table 664. Plug type 12 part numbers
Part Number Accommodating Countries or regions
Anguilla, Antigua, Canada, Cape Verde Islands, Cayman
11F0114 (6 ft) (C) (F) (G) Islands, Honduras, Montserrat, St. Kitts & Nevis, Tortola
(BVI), United States
11F0113 (14 ft) (C) (F) (G) (H)

Chapter 10. Planning for power 545

Table 664. Plug type 12 part numbers (continued)
Part Number Accommodating Countries or regions
Afghanistan, Argentina, Aruba, Bahamas, Bangladesh,
11F0115 (14 ft) (C) (F) (H) Barbados, Belize, Bermuda, Bolivia, Bonaire, Brunei,
Caicos Islands, Chile, Colombia, Costa Rica, Curacao,
11F0113 (14 ft) (G) (H) Dominican Republic, Ecuador, El Salvador, Guatemala,
Haiti, Hong Kong S.A.R. of the PRC, Indonesia, Japan,
Jamaica, Mexico, Myanmar, Netherland Antilles,
Nicaragua, Panama, Paraguay, People's Republic of
China, Peru, Philippines, Sri Lanka, St. Martin, Suriname,
Taiwan, Thailand, Trinidad/Tobago, Turks Island,
Uruguay, Venezuela
Systems and expansion units

(C) - Model 53x Processor Side

(F) - Models 9406-730, 9406-740, SB1

(G) - Models 9406-840 SB3

(H) - 9309 rack

Plug and receptacle types: By model

Select your model to find its plug and receptacle type and power cord features.

Plug and receptacle types: Model 7037-A50 and 7047-185

Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.
Table 665. Plug and receptacle types by voltage and amperage
Voltage and amperage Plug and receptacle type
250 V, 10 A Type 2, Type 6, Type 19, Type 24, Type 25, Type 32, Type 62
100-127 V, 10 A Type 75
100-127 V, 15 A Type 4, Type 70
100-127 V, 12 A Type 59
250 V, 15 A Type 5
250 V, 16 A Type 18, Type 22, Type 25, Type 32
250 V, 13 A Type 23
200-240 V, 10 A Type 26, Type 66, Type 69, Type 73, Type 76
200-240 V, 12 A Type 57

To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the preceding table, find the Voltage and Amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type that is listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports
your model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.

If more than one plug is displayed in your row:

1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.

546 Site and hardware planning

2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will be located) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your country or region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your country or region is the type for which you need to plan.

Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your sales representative.

Plug and receptacle types: Model 5886

Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.
Table 666. Plug and receptacle types by voltage and amperage
Voltage and amperage Plug and receptacle type
100 - 127 V, 10 A Type 70, Type 75
100 - 127 V, 12 A Type 59
100 - 127 V, 15 A Type 4
250 V, 10 A Type 2, Type 6, Type 19, Type 24, Type 25, Type 32, Type 62
250 V, 15 A Type 5
250 V, 16 A Type 18, Type 22, Type 25, Type 32
250 V, 13 A Type 23
200-240 V, 10 A Type 66, Type 69, Type 73, Type 76
200-240 V, 12 A Type 57
100-240 V, 10 A Type 26

To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the preceding table, find the Voltage and amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports your
model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.

If more than one plug is displayed in your row:

1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will be located) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your country or region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your country or region is the type for which you need to plan.

Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug
and receptacle type, contact your seller.

Plug and receptacle types: Model 6458

Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.
Table 667. Plug and receptacle types by voltage and amperage
Voltage and amperage Plug and receptacle type
250 V, 10 A Type 26

Chapter 10. Planning for power 547

To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the preceding table, find the Voltage and amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports your
model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.

If more than one plug is displayed in your row:

1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will be located) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your country or region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your country or region is the type for which you need to plan.

Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug
and receptacle type, contact your seller.

Plug and receptacle types: Model 7214-1U2

Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.
Table 668. Plug and receptacle types by voltage and amperage
Voltage and amperage Plug and receptacle type
100 - 127 V, 10 A Type 70, Type 75
100 - 127 V, 12 A Type 59
100 - 127 V, 15 A Type 4
250 V, 10 A Type 2, Type 6, Type 19, Type 24, Type 25, Type 32, Type 62
250 V, 15 A Type 5
250 V, 16 A Type 18, Type 22, Type 25, Type 32
250 V, 13 A Type 23
200-240 V, 10 A Type 66, Type 69, Type 73, Type 76
200-240 V, 12 A Type 57
100-240 V, 10 A Type 26

To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the previous table, find the Voltage and amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports your
model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.

If more than one plug appears in your row:

1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your country or region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your country or region is the type for which you need to plan.

Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your seller.

548 Site and hardware planning

Plug and receptacle types: Model 7311-D10, 7311-D11, 5790
Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.
Table 669. Plug and receptacle types by voltage and amperage
Voltage and amperage Plug and receptacle type
250 V, 10 A Type 2, Type 6, Type 19, Type 24, Type 25, Type 32, Type 62
250 V, 15 A Type 5
250 V, 16 A Type 18, Type 22, Type 25, Type 32
250 V, 13 A Type 23
200-240 V, 10 A Type 66, Type 69, Type 73, Type 76
200-240 V, 12 A Type 57
100-240 V, 10 A Type 26

To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the previous table, find the Voltage and amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports your
model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.

If more than one plug appears in your row:

1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your country or region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your country or region is the type for which you need to plan.

Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your seller.

Plug and receptacle types: Model 7311-D20

Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.
Table 670. Plug and receptacle types by voltage and amperage
Voltage and amperage Plug and receptacle type
250 V, 10 A Type 2, Type 6, Type 19, Type 24, Type 25, Type 32, Type 62
250 V, 15 A Type 5
250 V, 16 A Type 18, Type 22, Type 25, Type 32
250 V, 13 A Type 23
200-240 V, 10 A Type 66, Type 69, Type 73, Type 76
200-240 V, 12 A Type 57, Type 10
100-240 V, 10 A Type 26
100-127 V, 10 A Type 70, Type 75
100-127 V, 10 A Type 4, Type 59

To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:

Chapter 10. Planning for power 549

1. In the previous table, find the Voltage and amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports your
model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.

If more than one plug appears in your row:

1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your country or region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your country or region is the type for which you need to plan.

Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your seller.

Plug and receptacle types: Model 7314-G30, 5796

Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.
Table 671. Plug and receptacle types by voltage and amperage
Voltage and amperage Plug and receptacle type
250 V, 10 A Type 2, Type 6, Type 19, Type 24, Type 25, Type 32, Type 62
250 V, 15 A Type 5
250 V, 16 A Type 18, Type 22, Type 25, Type 32
250 V, 13 A Type 23
200-240 V, 10 A Type 66, Type 69, Type 73, Type 76
200-240 V, 12 A Type 57, Type 10, Type 34 (5796 only)
100-240 V, 10 A Type 26

To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the previous table, find the Voltage and amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports your
model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.

If more than one plug appears in your row:

1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your country or region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your country or region is the type for which you need to plan.

Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your seller.

Plug and receptacle types: Model 8204-E8A and 9409-M50

Use the Plug and receptacle types by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.

550 Site and hardware planning

Table 672. Plug and receptacle types by voltage and amperage
Voltage and
amperage Plug and receptacle type
100 - 127 V, 10 A Type 70, Type 75
100 - 127 V, 12 A Type 59
100 - 127 V, 15 A Type 4
100 - 240 V, 10 A Type 2
100 - 240 V, 12 A Type 57
250 V, 10 A Type 2, Type 6, Type 19, Type 24, Type 32, Type 62
250 V, 15 A Type 5
250 V, 16 A Type 18, Type 22, Type 25, Type 32
250 V, 13 A Type 23
200-240 V, 10 A Type 66, Type 69. Type 73, Type 76

To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the previous table, find the Voltage and amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports your
model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.

If more than one plug appears in your row:

1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your country or region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your country or region is the type for which you need to plan.

Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your seller.

Plug and receptacle types: Model 8234-EMA

Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.
Table 673. Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage
Voltage and amperage Plug and receptacle type
100 - 127 V, 15 A v 4
v 70
v 75
200 - 240 V, 10 A v 2
v 66
v 68
v 69
200 - 240 V, 12 A v 57
v 76

Chapter 10. Planning for power 551

Table 673. Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage (continued)
Voltage and amperage Plug and receptacle type
250 V, 10 A v 6
v 24
v 25
v 26
v 32
v 62
250 V, 13 A v 23
250 V, 15 A v 5
250 V, 16 A v 22
v 25
v 46 (3P+N+E)
250 V, 30 A v KP
250 V, 32 A v 40
v 46 (P+N+E) [32 A]

v 12
v 18
v 19

To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the previous table, find the Voltage and amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports your
model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.

If more than one plug appears in your row:

1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your country or region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your country or region is the type for which you need to plan.

Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug
and receptacle type, contact your seller.

Plug and receptacle types: Models 8203-E4A, 9407-M15, 9408-M25

Use the Plug and receptacle types by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.
Table 674. Plug and receptacle types by voltage and amperage
Voltage and
amperage Plug and receptacle type
100 - 127 V, 10 A Type 70, Type 75
100 - 127 V, 12 A Type 59
100 - 127 V, 15 A Type 4

552 Site and hardware planning

Table 674. Plug and receptacle types by voltage and amperage (continued)
Voltage and
amperage Plug and receptacle type
100 - 240 V, 10 A Type 2
100 - 240 V, 12 A Type 57
250 V, 10 A Type 2, Type 6, Type 19, Type 24, Type 32, Type 62
250 V, 15 A Type 5
250 V, 16 A Type 18, Type 22, Type 25, Type 32
250 V, 13 A Type 23
200-240 V, 10 A Type 66, Type 69. Type 73, Type 76

To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the previous table, find the Voltage and amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports your
model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.

If more than one plug appears in your row:

1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your country or region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your country or region is the type for which you need to plan.

Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your seller.

Plug and receptacle types: Model 9110-510 and OpenPower 710

Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.
Table 675. Plug and receptacle types by voltage and amperage
Voltage and amperage Plug and receptacle type
250 V, 10 A Type 2, Type 6, Type 19, Type 24, Type 25, Type 32, Type 62
100-127 V, 15 A Type 4, Type 70
100-127 V, 12 A Type 59
250 V, 15 A Type 5
250 V, 16 A Type 18, Type 22, Type 25, Type 32
250 V, 13 A Type 23
200-240 V, 10 A Type 66, Type 69, Type 73

To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the preceding table, find the Voltage and Amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type that is listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports
your model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.

Chapter 10. Planning for power 553

If more than one plug appears in your row:
1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your country or region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your country or region is the type for which you need to plan.

Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your sales representative.

Plug and receptacle types: Model 9115-505

Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.
Table 676. Plug and receptacle types by voltage and amperage
Voltage and amperage Plug and receptacle type
250 V, 10 A Type 2, Type 6, Type 19, Type 24, Type 25, Type 32, Type 62
100-127 V, 15 A Type 4, Type 70
100-127 V, 10 A Type 75
100-127 V, 12 A Type 59
100-240 V, 10 A Type 26
250 V, 15 A Type 5
250 V, 16 A Type 18, Type 22, Type 32
250 V, 13 A Type 23
200-240 V, 10 A Type 66, Type 69, Type 73, Type 76
200-240 V, 12 A Type 57

To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the previous table, find the Voltage and amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports your
model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.

If more than one plug appears in your row:

1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your country or region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your country or region is the type for which you need to plan.

Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your seller.

Plug and receptacle types: Model 9119-FHA

Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.

For a detailed description of the plug and receptacles see 9119-FHA power cord features.

554 Site and hardware planning

Plug and receptacle types: Model 9125-F2A
Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.

For a detailed description of the plug and receptacles see Power cord information in Breaker rating and
cord information.

Plug and receptacle types: Model 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, and
OpenPower 720, 9111-285, 9131-52A, 9133-55A, 9406-525, 9407-515
Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.
Table 677. Plug and receptacle types by voltage and amperage
Voltage and amperage Plug and receptacle type
250 V, 10 A Type 2, Type 6, Type 19, Type 24, Type 25, Type 32, Type 34, Type 62
100-127 V, 15 A Type 4, Type 70
250 V, 15 A Type 5, Type 10, Type 34, Type 73
250 V, 16 A Type 18, Type 22, Type 25, Type 32
250 V, 13 A Type 23
200-240 V, 10 A Type 66, Type 69

To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the previous table, find the Voltage and Amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports your
model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.

If more than one plug appears in your row:

1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your country or region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your country or region is the type for which you need to plan.

Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your seller.

Plug and receptacle types: Model 9116-561

Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.
Table 678. Plug and receptacle types by voltage and amperage
Voltage and amperage Plug and receptacle type
250 V, 10 A Type 2, Type 6, Type 19, Type 24, Type 25, Type 32, Type 62
250 V, 15 A Type 5, Type 10
250 V, 16 A Type 18, Type 22, Type 25, Type 32
250 V, 13 A Type 23
200-240 V, 10 A Type 26, Type 66, Type 69, Type 73, Type 76
200-240 V, 12 A Type 57

Chapter 10. Planning for power 555

To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the preceding table, find the Voltage and Amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type that is listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports
your model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.

If more than one plug appears in your row:

1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your country or region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your country or region is the type for which you need to plan.

Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your sales representative.

Plug and receptacle types: Model 9406-570 and 9117-570

Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.
Table 679. Plug and receptacle types by voltage and amperage
Voltage and
amperage Plug and receptacle type
250 V, 10 A Type 2, Type 6, Type 19, Type 24, Type 25, Type 32, Type 34, Type 62
250 V, 15 A Type 5, Type 10, Type 34, Type 64
250 V, 16 A Type 18, Type 22, Type 25, Type 32
250 V, 13 A Type 23
200-240 V, 10 A Type 66, Type 69

To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the previous table, find the Voltage and amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports your
model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.

If more than one plug appears in your row:

1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your country or region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your country or region is the type for which you need to plan.

Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your seller.

Plug and receptacle types: Model 9117-MMA and 9406-MMA

Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.

556 Site and hardware planning

Table 680. Plug and receptacle types by voltage and amperage
Voltage and
amperage Plug and receptacle type
100 - 240 V, 10 A Type 26
250 V, 10 A Type 2, Type 6, Type 19, Type 24, Type 25, Type 32, Type 62
250 V, 15 A Type 5, Type 10
250 V, 16 A Type 18, Type 22, Type 25, Type 32
250 V, 13 A Type 23
200-240 V, 10 A Type 66, Type 69
200-240 V, 12 A Type 57

To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the previous table, find the Voltage and amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports your
model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.

If more than one plug appears in your row:

1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your country or region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your country or region is the type for which you need to plan.

Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your seller.

Plug and receptacle types: Model 9118-575

Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.

For a detailed description of the plug and receptacles used with the Model 9118-575, see 9118-575 power
cord features.

Plug and receptacle types: Model 9119-590, 9119-595, and 9406-595

Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.

For a detailed description of the plug and receptacles used with Models 9119-590, 9119-595, 9406-595, and
9119-FHA, see 9119-590, 9119-595, and 9406-595 power cord features.
Related reference:
“Power cord features” on page 146
Use the Power cord features table to view the power cord specifications available for your server.

Plug and receptacle types: 8079, 8093, and 9094

Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.

Chapter 10. Planning for power 557

Table 681. Plug and receptacle types by voltage and amperage
Voltage and amperage Plug and receptacle type
250 V, 15 A Type 54, Type 72
250 V, 16 A Type 25, Type 32, Type 18, Type 22, Type 46 (P+N+E)[16A]
250 V, 20 A Type 11, Type 29, Type 35
250 V, 13 A Type 23
250 V, 15 A Type 5, Type 10, Type 34

To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the previous table, find the Voltage and amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports your
model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.

If more than one plug appears in your row:

1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your country or region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your country or region is the type for which you need to plan.

Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your seller.

Plug and receptacle types: 0550 and 0551 (1.8 m racks)

Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.
Table 682. Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage
Voltage and amperage Plug and receptacle type
250 V, 16 A/phase Type 46 3P+N+E
250 V, 30 A Type 12 Type KP Type PDL
250 V, 32 A Type 40 Type 46 P+N+E [32A]

To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the previous table, find the Voltage and amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports your
model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.

If more than one plug appears in your row:

1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your country or region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your country or region is the type for which you need to plan.

558 Site and hardware planning

Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your seller.

Plug and receptacle types: 0553 and 7014-T42 (1.8 m racks)

Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.
Table 683. Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage
Voltage and amperage Plug and receptacle type
100 -240 V, 10 (HV), 12 Type 26
(LV)
250 V, 16 A/phase Type 46 3P+N+E
250 V, 30 A Type 12 Type KP Type PDL
250 V, 32 A Type 40 Type 46 P+N+E [32A]

To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the previous table, find the Voltage and amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports your
model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.

If more than one plug appears in your row:

1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your country or region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your country or region is the type for which you need to plan.

Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your seller.

Plug and receptacle types: 0554, 0555, 7014-S11, 7014-S25 racks

Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.
Table 684. Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage
Voltage and amperage Plug and receptacle type
100 -240 V, 10 (HV), 12 Type 26
(LV)

To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the previous table, find the Voltage and amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports your
model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.

If more than one plug appears in your row:

1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).

Chapter 10. Planning for power 559

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your country or region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your country or region is the type for which you need to plan.

Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your seller.

Plug and receptacle types: Model 9406-250

Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.
Table 685. Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage
Voltage and amperage Plug and receptacle type
125 V, 15 A Type 4
250 V, 10 A Type 6, Type 19, Type 24
250 V, 10 A or 16 A Type 25, Type 32
250 V, 13 A Type 23
250 V, 15 A Type 5, Type 10 (Colombia and Mexico only)
250 V, 16 A Type 18, Type 22

To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the previous table, find the Voltage and amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports your
model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.

If more than one plug appears in your row:

1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your country or region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your country or region is the type for which you need to plan.

Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your seller.

Plug and receptacle types: Model 9406-270

Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.
Table 686. Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage
Voltage and amperage Plug and receptacle type
100 V, 10 A Type 70
125 V, 15 A Type 4
200 V, 10 A Type 2
250 V, 10 A Type 6, Type 19, Type 24, Type 62
250 V, 10 A or 16 A Type 25, Type 32
250 V, 13 A Type 23
250 V, 15 A Type 5, Type 34, Type 10

560 Site and hardware planning

Table 686. Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage (continued)
Voltage and amperage Plug and receptacle type
250 V, 16 A Type 18, Type 22

To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the previous table, find the Voltage and amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports your
model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.

If more than one plug appears in your row:

1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your country or region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your country or region is the type for which you need to plan.

Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your seller.

Plug and receptacle types: Models 9406-870 and 9406-890

Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.
Table 687. Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage
Voltage and amperage Plug and receptacle type
200-240 V, 60 A, three-phase Type 460 R9W
480 V, 30 A, three-phase Type 430 R7W
380-415 V, 30 A, three-phase See 1304 power cord description.

To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the previous table, find the Voltage and amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports your
model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.

If more than one plug appears in your row:

1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your country or region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your country or region is the type for which you need to plan.

Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your seller.

Chapter 10. Planning for power 561

Plug and receptacle types: Models 9406-800, 9406-810, 9406-825, and 5075, 5095,
0595, 7116, 7316, and 9316
Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.
Table 688. Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage
Voltage and amperage Plug and receptacle type
125 V, 15 A (model 800 and 810 only) Type 4
250 V, 10 A Type 6 Type 19 Type 24 Type 62
250 V, 10 A or 16 A Type 25 Type 32
250 V, 13 A Type 23
250 V, 15 A Type 5 Type 10 Type 34
250 V, 16 A Type 18 Type 22

To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the previous table, find the Voltage and amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports your
model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.

If more than one plug appears in your row:

1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your country or region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your country or region is the type for which you need to plan.

Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your seller.

Plug and receptacle types: 5094 and 5294

Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.

Voltage and amperage Plug and receptacle type

250 V, 15 A Type 54
250 V, 16 A Type 25, Type 32, Type 18, Type 22, Type 46 (P+N+E)[16A]
250 V, 20 A Type 11, Type 29
250 V, 13 A Type 23
250 V, 15 A Type 5, Type 10, Type 34

To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the previous table, find the Voltage and amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports your
model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.

If more than one plug appears in your row:

562 Site and hardware planning

1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your country or region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your country or region is the type for which you need to plan.

Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your seller.

Plug and receptacle types: 5096, 5296

Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.

Voltage and amperage Plug and receptacle type

250 V, 15 A Type 5, Type 10, Type 34

To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the previous table, find the Voltage and amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports your
model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.

If more than one plug appears in your row:

1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your country or region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your country or region is the type for which you need to plan.

Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your seller.

Plug and receptacle types: Model 9406-820 and expansion units 5074, 5075, 5077,
5078, and 5079
Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.
Table 689. Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage
Voltage and amperage Plug and receptacle type
100 V, 10 A Type 70
125 V, 15 A Type 4 and Type 7 (Types 4 and 7 are valid only for: Model 9406-820, 5075 &
5077)
200 V, 10 A Type 2
250 V, 10 A or 15 A Type 5, Type 10, Type 34
250 V, 10 A or 16 A Type 25
250 V, 13 A Type 23
250 V, 16 A Type 18, Type 22, Type 32
250 V, 10 A Type 6, Type 19, Type 24, Type 62

Chapter 10. Planning for power 563

To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the previous table, find the Voltage and amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports your
model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.

If more than one plug appears in your row:

1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your country or region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your country or region is the type for which you need to plan.

Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your seller.

Plug and receptacle types: 0554, 0555, 7014-S11, 7014-S25 racks

Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.
Table 690. Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage
Voltage and amperage Plug and receptacle type
100 -240 V, 10 (HV), 12 Type 26
(LV)

To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the previous table, find the Voltage and amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports your
model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.

If more than one plug appears in your row:

1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your country or region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your country or region is the type for which you need to plan.

Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your seller.

Plug and receptacle types: 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24 expansion units
Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.
Table 691. Plug and receptacle types by voltage and amperage
Voltage and amperage Plug and receptacle type
250 V, 10 A Type 2, Type 6
100-127 V, 15 A Type 4

564 Site and hardware planning

Table 691. Plug and receptacle types by voltage and amperage (continued)
Voltage and amperage Plug and receptacle type
100-240 V, 10 A(HV) 12 Type 4
A (LV)
250 V, 15 A Type 5, Type 10

To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the previous table, find the Voltage and amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports your
model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.

If more than one plug appears in your row:

1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your country or region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your country or region is the type for which you need to plan.

Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your seller.

Plug and receptacle types: 5792 rack

Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.

For a detailed description of the plug and receptacles used with the 5792 rack, see 5792 power cord
features.
Related reference:
“Power cord features” on page 331
Use the Power cord features table to view the power cord specifications available for your server.

Plug and receptacle types: models 9406-830 and SB2; base I/O enclosure 9074;
and expansion units 5065, 5066, 5074, and 5079
Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.
Table 692. Plug and receptacle types by voltage and amperage
Voltage and amperage Plug and receptacle type
200 V, 16 A Type 64
250 V, 15 A Type 54, Type 72
250 V, 16 A Type 25, Type 18, Type 32, Type 22, Type 46 (P+N+E)[16A]
250 V, 20 A Type 11, Type 29, Type 35 (valid for 5065 & 5066 only)
250 V, 13 A Type 23
250 V, 15 A Type 5, Type 10, Type 34 (not valid for 5065 & 5066)

To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the previous table, find the Voltage and Amperage of your power supply.

Chapter 10. Planning for power 565

 The Plug and receptacle type listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports your
model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.

If more than one plug appears in your row:

1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your country or region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your country or region is the type for which you need to plan.

Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your seller.

Plug and receptacle types: Models 9406-840 and SB3

Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.
Table 693. Plug and receptacle types by voltage and amperage
Voltage and amperage Plug and Receptacle Type
250 V, 16 A/phase Type 46 3P+N+E
250 V, 30 A Type 12, Type KP, Type PDL
250 V, 32 A Type 40, Type 46 P+N+E [32A]

To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the previous table, find the Voltage and amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports your
model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.

If more than one plug appears in your row:

1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your Country or region in the Plug and receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your Country or Region is the type for which you need to
plan.

Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your seller.

Plug and receptacle types: 9079 base I/O expansion unit

Use the Plug and receptacle type by voltage and amperage table to determine the plugs and receptacles
available for your system.
Table 694. Plug and receptacle types by voltage and amperage
Voltage and amperage Plug and receptacle type
250 V, 15 A Type 54, Type 72
250 V, 16 A Type 25, Type 32, Type 18, Type 22, Type 46 (P+N+E)[16A]
250 V, 20 A Type 11, Type 29, Type 35

566 Site and hardware planning

To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the previous table, find the Voltage and amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports your
model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.

If more than one plug appears in your row:

1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your country or region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your country or region is the type for which you need to plan.

Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your seller.

Plug and receptacle configurations

Use the Plug type and connectors table to see a graphical representation of your plug type and connector.
Table 695. Plug type and connectors
Plug Type Connector
IEC320-C14/C13

IEC320-C20/C19

IEC 60309 (3 PIN)

IEC 60309 (5 PIN)

Chapter 10. Planning for power 567

Table 695. Plug type and connectors (continued)
Plug Type Connector
NEMA 5-15

NEMA 6-15

L6-30

Plug and receptacle type 2

Plug type 2 is a 200 - 240 V, 10 A, IEC 83-A5 plug.

Plug Receptacle Countries/Regions International

Electrotechnical Commission

IEC 83-A5

Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay

Type 2 200 - 240 V 10 A

568 Site and hardware planning

Cord Feature Part Number

2961 (B) 36L8879 and 39M50671 - 1.8 m (6 ft)

(Default) (H) 13F9940 - 2.7 m (9 ft) (G) (T)

1397 (K) (T) 36L6881 and 39M50691 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (B) (H) (K) (N) (P) (Q) (R) (S) (T)

1412 (G) (T) 86G7648 - 1.8 m (6 ft)(T)

5102 dual power cord (Model 36L8880 and 39M50681 - 2.7 m (9 ft)(T)
9406-820 only)
36L8877 and 39M50661 - 4.3 m (14 ft)(U)
6488 (T)

6453(U)

9831 (N) (P) (Q) (R) (S)

9908 (Q)

Cord Rating 2.4 kVA cord (B) (G) (H) (K) (T)

Systems and expansion units

(B) - Models 53x I/O Side, and expansion units 5070, 5071, 5072, 5073, 5080, 5081, 5082, 5083, 9251

(G) - Models 9406-250, 9910-080

(H) - 9251 base I/O, and expansion units 5071, 5073, 5081, 5083

(K) - Model 9406-270, 9406-800, 9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825, 5075, 5077, 5095, 7104, 7116, 9316, 5070, 5071, 5072,
5073, 5080, 5081, 5082, 5083, 9251

(N) - pSeries 640 - B80

(P) - 7025 - pSeries 620 - 6F0, 6F1

(Q) - pSeries 620 (7028) - 6C1

(R) - 7026 - M80, pSeries 660 (7026) - 6H0, 6H1, 6M1

(S) - pSeries 620 (7028) - 6E1

(T) - Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9115-505, 5786 , 5787 , 7031-D24, 7031-T24,
9111-285, 9131-52A, 9133-55A, 7037-A50, 7047-185, 9116-561, 9110-51A, 9110-510, 9405-520, 7310-CR3, 7310-C04, and
7310-C05, 7314-G30, 5796, 9117-MMA, 9406-MMA, 9407-M15, 9406-525, 9407-515, 9408-M25, 7310-C06, 7310-CR4,
7042-C06, 7042-CR4, 8203-E4A, 8204-E8A, 5886, 7214-1U2, 7042-C07, 8234-EMA, 8261-E4S

(U) - 7311-D11, 7311-D10, 5790

Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous
Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

Chapter 10. Planning for power 569

Plug and receptacle type 4
Plug type 4 is a 100 - 127 V, 15 A, NEMA WD-1: 5-15P plug.
Table 696. Plug and receptacle type 4

Plug Receptacle Countries/Regions National Electrical

Manufacturers Association

NEMA WD-1: 5-15P

Anguilla, Antigua, Aruba, Bahamas,

Barbados, Belize, Bermuda, Bonaire,
Bolivia, Caicos Islands, Canada,
Canary Islands, Cayman Islands,
Colombia, Costa Rica, Curacao,
Dominican Republic, El Salvador,
Ecuador, Guam, Guatemala, Guyana,
Type 4 100 - 127 V 15 A
Haiti, Honduras, Jamaica, Mexico,
Montserrat, Netherland Antilles,
Nevis, Nicaragua, Panama, Peru,
Philippines, Puerto Rico, Saudi
Arabia, St. Kitts, St. Martin, Taiwan,
Tobago, Tortola BVI, Trinidad, Turk
Islands, United States, Venezuela,
Virgin Islands, Yemen

Cord Feature Part Number

2960 (B) 75G2695 - 2.7 m (9 ft) (G)

2960 + 9082 (B) 86G7648 and 39M50801 - 1.8 m (6 ft) (B) (K) (P) (Q) (S) (T)

1412 (I) (G)(K) (T) 87G3880 and 39M50821 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (B) (K) (P) (Q) (U)(T)

9800 (P) (Q) (S) 12J5112 and 39M52581 - 2.7 m (9 ft) (I)

9900 (Q) 6952301 and 39M50801 - 1.8 m (6 ft) (U)

5102 dual power cord (Model

9406-820 only)

6470 and 6460 (T) (K) (B) (U)

Cord Rating

1.6 kVA Cord (B) (G) (K)

2.0 kVA cord (I)

570 Site and hardware planning

Table 696. Plug and receptacle type 4 (continued)

Systems and expansion units

(B) - Models 53x I/O Side, and expansion units 5070, 5072, 5080, 5082, 8234-EMA, 8261-E4S

(G) - Models 9406-250, 9910-080

(I) - Models 9910-140

(K) - Model 9406-270, 9406-800, 9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825, 5075, 5077, 5095, 9316, 7116, 7316 , 5786, 5787,
8234-EMA, 8261-E4S

(P) - 7025 - pSeries 620 - 6F0, 6F1, pSeries 640 - B80

(Q) - pSeries 620 (7028) - 6C1, 7316

(S) - pSeries 620 (7028) - 6E1

(T) - Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9115-505, 5786 , 5787 , 7031-D24, 7031-T24,
9111-285, 9131-52A, 9133-55A, 7037-A50, 7047-185, 9116-561, 9110-51A, 9110-510, 9405-520, 7310-CR3, 7310-C04, and
7310-C05, OpenPower 710, OpenPower 720, 9406-525, 9407-515, 7310-C06, 7310-CR4, 7042-C06, 7042-CR4, 8204-E8A,
5886, 7214-1U2, 8203-E4A, 9407-M15, 9408-M25, 7042-C07, 9409-M50, 8234-EMA, 8261-E4S

(U) - 7310-C04, 7310-C05 and 7310-CR2, 8234-EMA, 8261-E4S

Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous
Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

Plug and receptacle type 5

Plug type 5 is a 250 V, 15 A, NEMA WD-1: 6-15P plug.

Plug Receptacle Countries/Regions National Electrical

Manufacturers Association

NEMA WD-1: 6-15P

Anguilla, Antigua, Aruba, Bahamas,

Barbados, Belize, Bermuda, Bolivia,
Bonaire, Canada, Caicos Islands,
Cayman Islands, Costa Rica, Curacao,
Dominican Republic, Ecuador, El
Salvador, Guam, Guatemala, Haiti,
Honduras, Jamaica, Montserrat,
Type 5 250V 15A Netherland Antilles, Nicaragua,
Panama, Peru, Philippines, Puerto
Rico, Saudi Arabia, St. Marten,
Taiwan, Thailand, Tobago, Tortola,
Turks Island, United States,
Venezuela, Virgin Islands

Chapter 10. Planning for power 571

Cord Feature Part Number

Migration (J) 1838576 and 39M50941 - 1.8 m (6 ft) (B) (H) (K) (P) (Q) (R) (S) (N) (U)(T)

2961 (A) (B) 14F1547 and 39M52611 - 1.8 m (6 ft) (C) (J) (D) (L) (M)

2961 + 9082 (B) 1838573 and 39M50961 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (B) (H) (K) (N) (P) (Q) (R) (T)

(Default) (D) (H) 6952287 and 39M50931 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (T) (W)

9082 (D) (H) 14F1548 and 39M52631 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (C) (D) (J) (L) (M)

1412 (G) (I) 1838574 and 39M50951 - 2.7 m (9 ft) (G)

1410 (K) 12J5120 and 39M52621 - 2.7 m (9 ft) (I) (M)

1451 (L) (M) 25R2573 - 1.8 m (6 ft) (V)

1452 (L) 25R2575 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (V)

1457 (M)

5102 dual power cord (Model

9406-820 only)

5103 dual power cord (C)

5105 dual power cord (5074 and top

expansion unit in 8079)

5106 dual power cord (single

expansion unit in 5079)

6469 (T) (K)

6487 (U) (T)

6687 (V)

6669 (V)

6455(W)

9800 (P) (R) (N)

9833 (Q) (S)

9909 (Q)

Cord Rating

2.4 kVA cord (B) (G) (H) (K) (T)

3.6 kVA cord (C) (I) (J) (D) (L) (M)

572 Site and hardware planning

Systems and expansion units

(B) - Models 53x I/O Side, and expansion units 5070, 5072, 5080, 5082

(C) - Model 9406-830 in a 0550 rack

(D) - Models 9406-720, 9406-830, SB2, and expansion units 5065, 5074

(G) - Models 9406-250, 9910-080

(H) - 9251 base I/O, and expansion units 5071, 5073, 5081, 5083

(I) - Models 9910-140, 9910-180

(J) - Migration expansion units 5033, 5034, 5035

(K) - Model 9406-270, 9406-800, 9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825, 5075, 5077, 5095, 7104, 7116, 9316, 5070, 5071, 5072,
5073, 5080, 5081, 5082, 5083, 9251, 8204-E8A, 5886, 7214-1U2, 8203-E4A, 8261-E4S, 9407-M15, 9408-M25, 9409-M50,
8234-EMA

(L) - Model 9406-830, 9406-SB2, 5074, 5094, 9079, 9074, 5294, 8079, 8093, 8094, 9094, 5033, 5034, 5035, 9194, 5096, 5296

(M) - Model Feature 5079, 5294, 8079, 8094, 5296

(N) - pSeries 640 - B80

(P) - 7025 - pSeries 620 - 6F0, 6F1

(Q) - pSeries 620 (7028) - 6C1

(R) - 7026 - M80, pSeries 660 (7026) - 6H0, 6H1, 6M1

(S) - pSeries 620 (7028) - 6E1

(T) - 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9115-505, 5786 , 5787 , 7031-D24, 7031-T24, 9111-285,
9131-52A, 9133-55A, 7037-A50, 7047-185, 9116-561, 9110-51A, 9110-510, 9405-520, 7310-CR3, 7310-C04, 7310-C05,
OpenPower 710, OpenPower 720, 7314-G30, 5796 , 9117-MMA, 9406-MMA, 7310-C06, 7310-CR4, 7042-C06, 7042-CR4,
8204-E8A, 5886, 7214-1U2, 8203-E4A 9407-M15, 9408-M25, 7042-C07, 9409-M50, 8234-EMA, 8261-E4S

(U) - 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9115-505, 5786 , 5787 , 7031-D24, 7031-T24, 9111-285,
9131-52A, 9133-55A, 7037-A50, 7047-185, 9116-561, 9110-51A, 9110-510, 9405-520, 7310-CR3, 7310-C04, 7310-C05,
OpenPower 710, OpenPower 720, 7314-G30, 5796 , 9117-MMA, 9406-MMA, 7310-C06, 7310-CR4, 7042-C06, 7042-CR4,
8204-E8A, 5886, 7214-1U2, 8203-E4A 9407-M15, 9408-M25, 7042-C07, 9409-M50, 8234-EMA, 8261-E4S

(V) - OpenPower 720, 8234-EMA, (T) (U) - 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9115-505, 5786 ,
5787 , 7031-D24, 7031-T24, 9111-285, 9131-52A, 9133-55A, 7037-A50, 7047-185, 9116-561, 9110-51A, 9110-510, 9405-520,
7310-CR3, 7310-C04, 7310-C05, OpenPower 710, OpenPower 720, 7314-G30, 5796 , 9117-MMA, 9406-MMA, 7310-C06,
7310-CR4, 7042-C06, 7042-CR4, 8204-E8A, 5886, 7214-1U2, 8203-E4A 9407-M15, 9408-M25, 7042-C07, 9409-M50,
8234-EMA, 8261-E4S

(W) - 7311-D11, 7311-D10, 5790

Note: This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain
Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

Chapter 10. Planning for power 573

Plug and receptacle type 6
Plug type 6 is a 250 V, 10 A, IEC 83-A5 plug.

Plug Plug Countries/Regions International

Electrotechnical Commission

IEC 83-A5

Australia, Fiji, New Zealand, Papua

New Guinea, Western Samoa,
Kiribati, Nauru

Type 6 250V 10A

Cord Feature Part Number

2961 (B) 13F9939 and 39M51011 - 1.8 m (6 ft)

(Default) (H) 13F9940 and 39M51021 - 2.7 m (9 ft) (T)

1438 (K) 13F9938 and 39M51001 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (T) (U)

5102 dual power cord (Model 13F9941 and 39M51031 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (B) (H)(K) (N) (P) (Q) (R) (S) (T)
9406-820 only)

6479 (T)

6680 (T)

6468 and 6681(U)

9831 (N) (P) (Q) (R) (S)

9908 (Q)

Cord Rating 2.4 kVA cord (B) (G) (H) (K) (T)

574 Site and hardware planning

Systems and expansion units

(B) - Models 53x I/O Side, and expansion units 5070, 5072, 5080, 5082

(G) - Models 9406-250, 9910-080

(H) - 9251 base I/O, and expansion units 5071, 5073, 5081, 5083

(K) - Model 9406-270, 9406-800, 9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825, 5075, 5077, 5095, 7104, 7116, 9316, 5070, 5071, 5072,
5073, 5080, 5081, 5082, 5083, 9251

(N) - pSeries 640 - B80

(P) - 7025 - pSeries 620 - 6F0, 6F1

(Q) - pSeries 620 (7028) - 6C1

(R) - 7026 - M80, pSeries 660 (7026) - 6H0, 6H1, 6M1

(S) - pSeries 620 (7028) - 6E1

(T) - Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9115-505, 5786 , 5787 , 7031-D24, 7031-T24,
9111-285, 9131-52A, 9133-55A, 7037-A50, 7047-185, 9116-561, 9110-51A, 9110-510, 9405-520, 7310-CR3, 7310-C04,
7310-C05, OpenPower 710, OpenPower 720, 7314-G30, 5796, 9117-MMA, 9406-MMA, 9406-525, 9407-515, 7310-C06,
7310-CR4, 7042-C06, 7042-CR4, 8204-E8A, 5886, 7214-1U2, 8203-E4A 9407-M15, 9408-M25, 7042-C07, 9409-M50,
8234-EMA, 8261-E4S

(U) - 7311-D11, 7311-D10, 5790

Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous
Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

Plug and receptacle type 7

Plug type 7 is a 100 - 127 V, 15 A, NEMA WD-1: L5-15P plug.

Plug Plug Countries/Regions National Electrical

Manufacturers Association

NEMA WD-1: L5-15P

Canada, United States

Type 7 100-127V 15A Locking

Cord Feature Part Number

2960 + 9083 (A) 86G7874 and 39M51081 - 1.8 m (6 ft) (A)

2960 + 9083 + 9082(A) 87G3881 and 39M51101 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (A)

Cord Rating 1.6 kVA cord (A)

Chapter 10. Planning for power 575

Systems and expansion units

(A) - Expansion units 5070, 5072, 5080, 5082

Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous
Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

Plug and receptacle type 10

Plug type 10 is NEMA WD-5: L6-15P plug.

Plug Receptacle Countries/Regions

National Electrical Manufacturers

Association NEMA WD-5: L6-15P

Canada, Colombia, Japan, Mexico,

United States, Uruguay

Note: Plug Type 10 supports models

9910-080 in Colombia and Mexico.
Plug Type 10 is not available in
Canada and the United States for
these models.
NEMA L6-15R

Type 10 250V 15A Locking

Cord Feature Part Number

2961 + 9083 (B) 86G7878 and 39M51151 (10 A only) - 1.8 m (6 ft) (B) (H) (J) (M)

2961 + 9083 + 9082 (B) 14F1549 and 39M52731 - 1.8 m (6 ft) (C) (D) (F) (K) (L)

9083 (D) (H) 12J5119 and 39M52741 - 2.7 m (9 ft) (L)

9083 + 9082 (D) (H) 86G7879 and 39M51171 (10 A only) - 4.3 m (14 ft) (B) (H) (J) [outside Canada
and United States - (G) (K)]
Migration (C)
14F1550 and 39M52751 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (C) (D) (F) (I) (K) (L)
1414 (I) (J) (M)

1453 (C) (F) (K) (L)

1454 (F) (K) (L)

1458 (C) (K) (L)

5102 dual power cord (Model

9406-820 only)

5103 dual power cord (F)

5105 dual power cord (5074 and top

expansion unit in 8079)

5106 dual power cord (single

expansion unit in 5079)

6497(J) (M)

576 Site and hardware planning

Cord Rating 2.4 kVA cord (B) (H) (J) [outside United States - (G)]

3.8 kVA cord (C) (D) (F) (I) (K) (L)

Systems and expansion units

(B) - Models 53x I/O Side, and expansion units 5070, 5072, 5080, 5082

(C) - Expansion units 5033, 5034, 5035

(D) - Models 9406-720, 9406-830, SB2

(F) - Model 9406-830 in a 0550 rack

(H) - 9251 base I/O, and expansion units 5071, 5073, 5081, 5083

(I) - Models 9910-140, 9910-180, 9406-270

(J) - Model 9406-270, 9406-800, 9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825, 5075, 5077, 5095, 7104, 7116, 9316, 5070, 5071, 5072, 5073,
5080, 5081, 5082, 5083, 9251

(K) - Models 9406-830, 940-SB2, 5074, 5094, 9079, 9074, 5065, 5066, 5074, 5079, 5094, 5294, 8094, 9194

(L) - Model Feature 5079, 5294, 8079, 8093, 8094

(M) - Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9115-505, 5786 , 5787 , 9111-285, 9131-52A,
9133-55A, 7037-A50, 7047-185, 9116-561, 9110-51A, 9110-510, 9405-520, 7310-CR3, 7310-C04, 7314-G30, 5796,
9117-MMA, 9406-MMA, 7310-C06, 7310-CR4, 7042-C06, 7042-CR4, 7042-C07
Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous
Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

Plug and receptacle type 11

Plug type 11 is NEMA WD-1: L6-20P plug.

Plug Receptacle Countries/Regions

National Electrical Manufacturers

Association

NEMA WD-1: L6-20P

Argentina, Cape Verde Islands

(K) (L) Only: US, Canada, Japan

Type 11 250V 20A

Chapter 10. Planning for power 577

Cord Feature Part Number

1414 (I) 14F1553 and 39M52791 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (C) (I) (J) (M) (K) (L) (N)

1406 (C) (K) (L) (M) (N) 07H0095 and 39M52771 - 1.8 m (6 ft)(C) (K) (L) (M) (N)

5103 dual power cord (C) 12J5118 and 39M52781 - 2.7 m (9 ft) (N)

5105 dual power cord (5074 and top

expansion unit in 8079)

5106 dual power cord (single

expansion unit in 5079)

Migration (J)

Cord Rating 4.5 kVA cord (C) (I) (J) (K) (L) (N)

Systems and expansion units

(C) - Model 9406-830 in a 0550 rack

(I) - Models 9910-140, 9910-180

(J) - Features 5033, 5034, 5035

(K) - Feature 5065

(L) - Feature 5066

(M) - Models 9406-830, SB2, Features 5074, 5094, 9074, 9079

(N) - Feature 5079, 5294, 8079, 8094

Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous
Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

Plug and receptacle type 12

Plug type 12 is NEMA WD-5: L6-30P plug.

Plug Receptacle Countries/Regions National Electrical

Manufacturers Association

NEMA WD-5: L6-30P

Anguilla, Antigua and Barbuda,

Aruba, Bahamas, Barbados, Belize,
Bermuda, Bolivia, Bonnaire, Calicos
Island, Canada, Cayman Islands,
Colombia, Costa Rica, Cuba, Curacao,
Dominican Republic, Ecuador, El
Salvador, Guam, Guatemala, Haiti,
Honduras, Jamaica, Micronesia,
Montserrat, Netherlands Antilles,
Type 12 250V 30A Locking Nicaragua, Panama, Peru, Phillipines,
St Marten, Taiwan, Tortola (BVI),
Thailand, United States, Venezuela

578 Site and hardware planning

Cord Feature Part Numbers

4961 + 9183 (C) 11F0113 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (P) (J) (Q) (G) (R) (S)

1426 (G) (J) (R) 11F0114 - 1.8 m (6 ft) (P) (J) (R) (S)

9183 (F) 11F0115 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (Q) (S)

4961 + 9183 + 9182 (C) 25R2555 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (S)

5104 dual power cord (G)

8622 dual power cord (P)

9183 + 9182 (F)

9081 (H)

9800 (P)

9986 (P)

6654, 6442, 6446, 6449 (S)

Cord Rating 7.2 kVA cord (C) (F) (G) (P) (J)

Systems and expansion units

(C) - Model 53x Processor Side

(F) - Models 9406-730, 9406-740, SB1

(G) - Models 9406-840 SB3

(H) - 9309 rack

(J) - 0550 and 0551 racks

(P) - 7017 - S85

(Q) - 7014 racks

(R) - System i 5160 PDU for 0551 rack (System p 7014 racks when ordered with IBM eServer p5

(S) - 7188 and 9188 power distribution units when used with 7014-S11, 7014-S25, 0554, 7014-T00, 7014-T42, 0550,
0551, 8234-EMA, 8261-E4S

Chapter 10. Planning for power 579

Plug and receptacle type 18
Plug type 12 is CEE 7 VII plug.

Plug Receptacle Countries/Regions International Rule

for the Approval of Electrical Equipment

CEE 7 VII

Afghanistan, Albania, Algeria,

Andorra, Armenia, Austria, Azores,
Belarus, Belgium, Benin, Bosnia,
Bulgaria, Burkina Faso, Burundi,
Cambodia, Cameroon, Canary
Islands, Cape Verde Islands, Central
African Republic, Chad, Congo,
Croatia, Czech Republic, Dahomey,
Type 18 250V 16A
Djibouti, Egypt, Equatorial Guinea,
Estonia, Ethiopia, Faero Islands,
Finland, France, French Polynesia,
French Guyana, Gabon, Georgia,
Germany, Greece, Greenland,
Guadeloupe, Guinea, Guinea-Bissau,
Hungary, Iceland, Indonesia, Iran,
Ivory Coast, Kazakhstan, Kirghizia,
Laos, Latvia, Lebanon, Lithuania,
Luxembourg, Macau S.A.R. of the
PRC, Macedonia, Malagasy Republic,
Mali, Martinique, Mauritania,
Moldavia, Monaco, Mongolia,
Morocco, Mozambique, Netherlands,
New Caledonia, Niger, Norway,
Poland, Portugal, Principe, Reunion,
Romania, Russia, Rwanda, Sao Tome
Island, Senegal, Serbia, Slovenia,
Slovakia, Somalia, Spain, Suriname,
Sweden, Syria, Tahiti, Togo, Tunisia,
Turkey, Ukraine, Uzbekistan,
Vietnam, Zaire, Zimbabwe

580 Site and hardware planning

Cord Feature Part Number

2961 (B) 13F9978 and 39M51221 - 1.8 m (6 ft)

(Default) (H) 13F9979 and 39M51231 - 2.7 m (9 ft) (G) (T)

1420 (C) (L) 13F9980 and 39M51241 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (B) (H) (K) (N) (P) (Q) (R) (S) (T)

1439 (K) 14F1554 and 39M52831 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (C) (I) (J) (L)

5102 dual power cord (Model 13F9977 and 39M51211 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (U)
9406-820 only)

5103 dual power cord (C)

5105 dual power cord (5074 and top

expansion unit in 8079)

5106 dual power cord (single

expansion unit in 5079)

6472 (T)

6461 (U)

9820 (N) (P) (Q) (R) (S)

9901 (Q)

Migration (J)

Cord Rating 2.4 kVA cord (B) (G) (H) (K)

3.8 kVA (C) (I) (J) (L)

Chapter 10. Planning for power 581

Systems and expansion units

(B) - Models 53x I/O Side, and expansion units 5070, 5072, 5080, 5082

(C) - Model 9406-830 in a 0550 rack

(G) - Models 9406-250, 9910-080

(H) - 9251 base I/O, and expansion units 5071, 5073, 5081, 5083

(I) - Models 9910-140, 9910-180

(J) - Features 5033, 5034, 5035

(K) - Model 9406-270, 9406-800, 9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825, 5075, 5077, 5095, 7104, 7116, 9316, 5070, 5071, 5072,
5073, 5080, 5081, 5082, 5083, 9251

(L) - Model 9406-830, SB2, 5065, 5066(x2), 5074, 5079(x2), 5094, 5294, 9079 , 8079, 8094, 9094, 5033, 5034, 5035, 9194

(N) - pSeries 640 - B80

(P) - 7025 - pSeries 620 - 6F0, 6F1

(Q) - pSeries 620 (7028) - 6C1

(R) - 7026 - M80, pSeries 660 (7026) - 6H0, 6H1, 6M1

(S) - pSeries 620 (7028) - 6E1

(T) - Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9115-505, 5786 , 5787 , 7031-D24, 7031-T24,
9111-285, 9131-52A, 9133-55A, 7037-A50, 7047-185, 9116-561, 9110-51A, 9110-510, 9405-520, 7310-CR3, 7310-C04,
7310-C05, OpenPower 710, OpenPower 720, 7314-G30, 5796, 9117-MMA, 9406-MMA, 9406-525, 9407-515, 7310-C06,
7310-CR4, 7042-C06, 7042-CR4, 8204-E8A, 5886, 7214-1U2, 8203-E4A 9407-M15, 9408-M25, 7042-C07, 9409-M50,
8234-EMA, 8261-E4S

(U) - 7311-D11, 7311-D10, 5790

Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous
Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

Plug and receptacle type 19 (P+N+E) [10A]

Plug type 19 (P+N+E) [10A] is CEE plug.

Plug Receptacle Countries/Regions International Rule

for the Approval of Electrical Equipment

CEE

Denmark

Type 19 250V 10A

582 Site and hardware planning

Cord Feature Part Number

2961 (B) 13F9996 and 39M51291 - 1.8 m (6 ft)

(Default) (H) 13F9997 and 39M51301 - 2.7 m (9 ft) (G) (T)

1412 (G) 13F9998 and 39M51311 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (B) (H) (K) (N) (P) (Q) (R) (S)

1440 (K) 86G7648 - 1.8 m (6 ft)(T)

5102 dual power cord (Model 13F9995 and 39M51281 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (U)
9406-820 only)

6473 (T)

9821 (N) (P) (Q) (R) (S)

9902 (Q)

6462 (U)

Cord Rating 2.4 kVA cord (B) (G) (H) (K) (T)

Systems and expansion units

(B) - Models 53x I/O Side, and expansion units 5070, 5072, 5080, 5082

(G) - Models 9406-250, 9910-080

(H) - 9251 base I/O, and expansion units 5071, 5073, 5081, 5083

(I) - Models 9910-140, 9910-180

(K) - Model 9406-270, 9406-800, 9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825, 5075, 5077, 5095, 7104, 7116, 9316, 5070, 5071, 5072,
5073, 5080, 5081, 5082, 5083, 9251

(N) - pSeries 640 - B80

(P) - 7025 - pSeries 620 - 6F0, 6F1

(Q) - pSeries 620 (7028) - 6C1

(R) - 7026 - M80, pSeries 660 (7026) - 6H0, 6H1, 6M1

(S) - pSeries 620 (7028) - 6E1

(T) - Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9115-505, 5786 , 5787 , 7031-D24, 7031-T24,
9111-285, 9131-52A, 9133-55A, 7037-A50, 7047-185, 9116-561, 9110-51A, 9110-510, 9405-520, 7310-CR3, 7310-C04,
7310-C05, 7314-G30, 5796, 9117-MMA, 9406-MMA, 9406-525, 9407-515, 8204-E8A, 5886, 7214-1U2, 8203-E4A
9407-M15, 9408-M25, 9409-M50, 8234-EMA, 8261-E4S

(U) - 7311-D11, 7311-D10, 5790

Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous
Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

Chapter 10. Planning for power 583

Plug and receptacle type 22
Plug type 22 is a 250 V, 16 A, SABS 164 BS 546 plug.

Plug Receptacle Countries/Regions South African

Bureau of Standards

SABS 164 BS 546

Bangladesh, Pakistan, South Africa,

Sri Lanka, Lesotho, Maceo, Maldives,
Namibia, Nepal, Samoa, Swaziland,
Uganda

Type 22 250V 16A

Cord Feature Part Number

2961 (B) 14F0015 and 39M51441 - 2.7 m (9 ft) (T)

(Default) (H) 14F0014 and 39M51431 - 1.8 m (6 ft)

1418 (J) (K) 14F0016 and 39M51451 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (B) (H) (K) (N) (P) (Q) (R) (S)

1441 (K) 14F1557 and 39M52911 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (C) (I) (J) (L)

5102 dual power cord (Model 14F0013 and 39M51421 - 4.3 m (14 ft)(U)
9406-820 only)

5103 dual power cord (C)

5105 dual power cord (5074 and top

expansion unit in 8079)

5106 dual power cord (single

expansion unit in 5079)

6477 (T)

6466 (U)

9829 (N) (P) (Q) (R) (S)

9906 (Q)

Migration (J) (K)

Cord Rating 2.4 kVA cord (B) (G) (H) (K)

3.8 kVA cord (C) (I) (J) (L)

584 Site and hardware planning

Systems and expansion units

(B) - Models 53x I/O Side, and expansion units 5070, 5072, 5080, 5082

(C) - Model 9406-830 in a 0550 rack

(G) - Models 250, 9910-080

(H) - 9251 base I/O, and expansion units 5071, 5073, 5081, 5083

(I) - Models 9910-140, 9910-180

(J) - Features 5033, 5034, 5035

(K) -Model 9406-270, 9406-800, 9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825, 5075, 5077, 5095, 7104, 7116, 9316, 5070, 5071, 5072,
5073, 5080, 5081, 5082, 5083, 9251

(L) - Model 9406-830, SB2, 5065, 5066(x2), 5074, 5079(x2), 5094, 5294, 8079, 8094, 9074, 9079, 8093, 9094

(N) - pSeries 640 - B80

(P) - 7025 - pSeries 620 - 6F0, 6F1

(Q) - pSeries 620 (7028) - 6C1

(R) - 7026 - M80, pSeries 660 (7026) - 6H0, 6H1, 6M1

(S) - pSeries 620 (7028) - 6E1

(T) - Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9115-505, 5786 , 5787 , 7031-D24, 7031-T24,
9111-285, 9131-52A, 9133-55A, 7037-A50, 7047-185, 9116-561, 9110-51A, 9110-510, 9405-520, 7310-CR3, 7310-C04,
7310-C05, 7314-G30, 5796, 9117-MMA, 9406-MMA, 9406-525, 9407-515, 7310-C06, 7310-CR4, 7042-C06, 7042-CR4,
8204-E8A, 5886, 7214-1U2, 8203-E4A 9407-M15, 9408-M25, 7042-C07, 9409-M50, 8234-EMA, 8261-E4S

(U) - 7311-D11, 7311-D10, 5790

Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous
Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

Plug and receptacle type 23

Plug type 23 is a 250 V, 13 A, BS 1363A plug.

Plug Receptacle Countries/Regions British Standards

Institution

BS 1363A

Abu Dhabi, Bahrain, Botswana,

Brunei, Channel Islands, Cyprus,
Dominica, Gambia, Ghana, Grenada,
Grenadines, Guyana, Iraq, Ireland,
Hong Kong S.A.R. of the PRC,
Jordan, Kenya, Kuwait, Liberia,
Malawi, Malaysia, Malta, Myanmar,
Nevis, Nigeria, Oman, Qatar, Sabah,
Seychelles, Sierra Leone, Singapore,
St. Lucia, St. Kitts, St. Vincent, Sudan,
Type 23 250V 13A Tanzania, Trinidad and Tobago,
United Arab Emirates, United
Kingdom, Yemen, Zambia

Chapter 10. Planning for power 585

Cord Feature Part Number

2961 (B) 14F0032 and 39M51501- 1.8 m (6 ft)

9082 (H) 14F0033 and 39M51511 - 2.7 m (9 ft) (G) (T)

1476 (C) (L) 14F0034 and 39M51521 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (B) (H) (K) (N) (P) (Q) (R) (S)(T)

1443 (K) 12J5988 and 39M52951 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (C) (I) (J) (L)

5102 dual power cord (Model 14F0031 and 39M51491 - 4.3 m (14 ft)(U)
9406-820 only)

5103 dual power cord (C)

5105 dual power cord (5074 and top

expansion unit in 8079)

5106 dual power cord (single

expansion unit in 5079)

6474 (T)

6463 (U)

9825 (N) (P) (Q) (R) (S)

9903 (Q)

Migration (J)

Cord Rating 2.5 kVA cord (B) (G) (H) (K)

3.2 kVA cord (C) (I) (J) (L)

586 Site and hardware planning

Systems and expansion units

(B) - Models 53x I/O Side, and expansion units 5070, 5071, 5072, 5073, 5080, 5081, 5082, 5083, 9251

(C) - Model 9406-830 in a 0550 rack

(G) - Models 9406-250, 9910-080

(H) - 9251 base I/O, and expansion units 5071, 5073, 5081, 5083

(I) - Models 9910-140, 9910-180

(J) - expansion units 5033, 5034, and 5035

(K) - Model 9406-270, 9406-800, 9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825, 5075, 5077, 5095, 7104, 7116, 9316, 5070, 5071, 5072,
5073, 5080, 5081, 5082, 5083, 9251

(L) - Model 830, SB2, 5065, 5066(x2), 5074, 5079(x2), 5094, 5294, 8079, 8094, 9079, 9094, 5033, 5034, 5035, 9194

(N) - pSeries 640 - B80

(P) - 7025 - pSeries 620 - 6F0, 6F1

(Q) - pSeries 620 (7028) - 6C1

(R) - 7026 - M80, pSeries 660 (7026) - 6H0, 6H1, 6M1

(S) - pSeries 620 (7028) - 6E1

(T) - Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9115-505, 5786 , 5787 , 7031-D24, 7031-T24,
9111-285, 9131-52A, 9133-55A, 7037-A50, 7047-185, 9116-561, 9110-51A, 9110-510, 9405-520, 7310-CR3, 7310-C04,
7310-C05, 7314-G30, 5796, 9117-MMA, 9406-MMA, 9406-525, 9407-515, 7310-C06, 7310-CR4, 7042-C06, 7042-CR4,
8204-E8A, 5886, 7214-1U2, 8203-E4A 9407-M15, 9408-M25, 7042-C07, 9409-M50, 8234-EMA, 8261-E4S

(U) - 7311-D11, 7311-D10, 5790

Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous
Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

Plug and receptacle type 24

Plug type 24 is a 250 V, 10 A, SEV 24507 plug.

Plug Receptacle Countries/Regions

*Schweizerischer Elecktrotechnischer
Verein

SEV 24507

Liechtenstein, Switzerland

Type 24 250V 10A

Chapter 10. Planning for power 587

Cord Feature Part Number Cord Rating

2961 (B) 14F0050 - 1.8 m (6 ft) 2.4 kVA cord (B) (G) (H) (K) (T)

(Default) (H) 14F0051 and 39M51581 - 2.7 m (9 ft)

(G) (T)
1412 (G) (T)
14F0049 and 39M51561 - 4.3 m (14 ft)
1442 (K) (U)

5102 dual power cord (Model 14F0052 and 39M51591 - 4.3 m (14 ft)
9406-820 only) (B) (H) (K) (N) (P) (Q) (R) (S)

6476 (T)

6465 (U)

9828 (N) (P) (Q) (R) (S)

9905 (Q)

Systems and expansion units

(B) - Models 53x I/O Side, and expansion units 5070, 5072, 5080, 5082

(G) - Models 9406-250, 9910-080

(H) - 9251 base I/O, and expansion units 5071, 5073, 5081, 5083

(K) - Model 9406-270, 9406-800, 9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825, 5075, 5077, 5095, 7104, 7116, 9316, 5070, 5071, 5072,
5073, 5080, 5081, 5082, 5083, 9251

(N) - pSeries 640 - B80

(P) - 7025 - pSeries 620 - 6F0, 6F1

(Q) - pSeries 620 (7028) - 6C1

(R) - 7026 - M80, pSeries 660 (7026) - 6H0, 6H1, 6M1

(S) - pSeries 620 (7028) - 6E1

(T) - Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9115-505, 5786 , 5787 , 7031-D24, 7031-T24,
9111-285, 9131-52A, 9133-55A, 7037-A50, 7047-185, 9116-561, 9110-51A, 9110-510, 9405-520, 7310-CR3, 7310-C04,
7310-C05, 7314-G30, 5796, 9117-MMA, 9406-MMA, 9406-525, 9407-515, 7310-C06, 7310-CR4, 7042-C06, 7042-CR4,
8204-E8A, 5886, 7214-1U2, 8203-E4A, 9407-M15, 9408-M25, 7042-C07, 9409-M50, 8234-EMA, 8261-E4S

(U) - 7311-D11, 7311-D10, 5790

Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous
Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

588 Site and hardware planning

Plug and receptacle type 25
Plug type 25 is a 250 V, 10 A or 16 A, CEI 23-16 plug.

Plug Receptacle Countries/Regions

Comitato Electtrotecnico Italiano

CEI 23-16

Chile, Italy, Libya

Type 25 250V 10A/16A

Cord Feature Part Number Cord Rating

2961 (B) 14F0068 - 1.8 m (6 ft) 2.4 kVA cord (B) (G) (H) (K) (T)

(Default) (H) 14F0069 and 39M51651 - 2.7 m (9 ft) 3.8 kVA cord (C) (I) (J) (L)
(T)
1408 (C) (J) (L)
14F0070 and 39M51661 - 4.3 m (14 ft)
1444 (K) (B) (H) (K) (N) (P) (Q) (R) (S)(T)

5102 dual power cord (Model 14F1560 and 39M52991 - 4.3 m (14 ft)
9406-820 only) (L)

5103 dual power cord (C) 14F0067 and 39M51631 - 4.3 m (14
ft)(U)
5105 dual power cord (5074 and top
expansion unit in 8079)

5106 dual power cord (single

expansion unit in 5079)

6478 (T)

6467(U)

9830 (N) (P) (Q) (R) (S)

9907 (Q)

Migration (J)

Chapter 10. Planning for power 589

Systems and expansion units

(B) - 53x I/O Side, and expansion units 5070, 5072, 5080, 5082

(C) - 9406-830 in a 0550 rack, 8261-E4S

(G) - Models 9406-250, 9910-080

(H) - 9251 base I/O, and expansion units 5071, 5073, 5081, 5083

(I) - Models 9910-140, 9910-180

(J) - Features 5033, 5034, 5035, 8261-E4S

(K) - Model 9406-270, 9406-800, 9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825, 5075, 5077, 5095, 7104, 7116, 9316, 5070, 5071, 5072,
5073, 5080, 5081, 5082, 5083, 9251

(L) -9406-830, SB2, 5065, 5066(x2), 5074, 5079(x2), 5094, 5294, 8079, 8093, 8094, 9074, 9079, 9094, 8261-E4S

(N) - pSeries 640 - B80

(P) - 7025 - pSeries 620 - 6F0, 6F1

(Q) - pSeries 620 (7028) - 6C1

(R) - 7026 - M80, pSeries 660 (7026) - 6H0, 6H1, 6M1

(S) - pSeries 620 (7028) - 6E1

(T) - Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9115-505, 5786 , 5787 , 7031-D24, 7031-T24,
9111-285, 9131-52A, 9133-55A, 7037-A50, 7047-185, 9116-561, 9110-51A, 9110-510, 9405-520, 7310-CR3, 7310-C04,
7310-C05, 7314-G30, 5796, 9117-MMA, 9406-MMA, 9406-525, 9407-515, 7310-C06, 7310-CR4, 7042-C06, 7042-CR4,
8204-E8A, 5886, 7214-1U2, 8203-E4A 9407-M15, 9408-M25, 7042-C07, 9409-M50, 8234-EMA, 8261-E4S

(U) - 7311-D11, 7311-D10, 5790

Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous
Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

Plug and receptacle type 26

Plug type 26 is a 250 V, 10 A, IEC 320 - C14 plug.

Plug Receptacle Countries/Regions

Worldwide

IEC 320 - C14 (Plug)

IEC 320 - C13 (Receptacle)

250 V ac 10A

(F)

590 Site and hardware planning

Cord Feature Part Number Cord Rating

1422 (A) 36L8860 or 36L8913 - 1.8 m (6 ft)

6458 (A) (B) (F) 36L8861 or 39M53781 - 4.3 m (14

ft)(B)
6459 (E)
39M5377 - 2.7 m (9 ft)(C)
6671 (C)
36L8861 or 39M53751 - 1.5 m (5 ft)(D)
6672 (D)
36L8859, 39M5374, or 041U01141 - 3.2
5802 (F) m (10.5 ft)(E)

39M5510 (F)

Systems and expansion units

(A) - 0551 (0121, 0122, 0127 only), 9316, 7116, 7316, 9131-52A, 9133-55A, 9117-MMA , 8204-E8A, 5886, 7214-1U2,
8203-E4A, 8261-E4S, 9407-M15, 9408-M25, 9409-M50, 8234-EMA

(B) - 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9115-505, 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24, 9111-285,
9131-52A, 9133-55A, 7037-A50, 7047-185, 9116-561, 9110-51A, 9110-510, 9405-520, 7310-CR3, 7310-C04, 8204-E8A, 5886,
7214-1U2, 8203-E4A, 8261-E4S, 9407-M15, 9408-M25, 9409-M50, 8234-EMA

(C) - 7014-S25 racks, 9131-52A, 9133-55A, 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9115-505,
9110-510, 7314-G30, 5796, 9117-MMA, 9406-MMA, 8204-E8A, 5886, 7214-1U2, 8203-E4A 9407-M15, 9408-M25,
9409-M50, 8234-EMA, (T) (U) - 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9115-505, 5786 , 5787 ,
7031-D24, 7031-T24, 9111-285, 9131-52A, 9133-55A, 7037-A50, 7047-185, 9116-561, 9110-51A, 9110-510, 9405-520,
7310-CR3, 7310-C04, 7310-C05, OpenPower 710, OpenPower 720, 7314-G30, 5796 , 9117-MMA, 9406-MMA, 7310-C06,
7310-CR4, 7042-C06, 7042-CR4, 8204-E8A, 5886, 7214-1U2, 8203-E4A 9407-M15, 9408-M25, 7042-C07, 9409-M50,
8234-EMA, 8261-E4S

(D) - 0554, 7014-S11, 7014-S25 racks, 9131-52A, 9133-55A, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9115-505,
9110-510, 7310-CR3, 7310-C04, 7310-C05, 9117-MMA, 9406-MMA, 8204-E8A, 5886, 7214-1U2, 8203-E4A 9407-M15,
9408-M25, 9409-M50, 8234-EMA, (T) (U) - 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9115-505, 5786 ,
5787 , 7031-D24, 7031-T24, 9111-285, 9131-52A, 9133-55A, 7037-A50, 7047-185, 9116-561, 9110-51A, 9110-510, 9405-520,
7310-CR3, 7310-C04, 7310-C05, OpenPower 710, OpenPower 720, 7314-G30, 5796 , 9117-MMA, 9406-MMA, 7310-C06,
7310-CR4, 7042-C06, 7042-CR4, 8204-E8A, 5886, 7214-1U2, 8203-E4A 9407-M15, 9408-M25, 7042-C07, 9409-M50,
8234-EMA, 8261-E4S

(E) - 7311-D11, 7311-D10, 5790, 8234-EMA, 9117-MMA, 9119-FHA, 9406-MMA

(F) - 5802, 8261-E4S

Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous
Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

Chapter 10. Planning for power 591

Plug and receptacle type 29
Plug type 29 is a 250 V, 20 A, NEMA WD-1; 6-20P plug.

Plug Receptacle Countries/Regions

National Electrical Manufacturers

Association NEMA WD-1: 6-20P

Anguilla, Antigua, Aruba, Bahamas,

Barbados, Belize, Bermuda, Bolivia,
Bonaire, Caicos Islands, Canada,
Cayman Islands, Colombia, Costa
Rica, Curacao, Dominican Republic,
Ecuador, El Salvador, Guam,
Guatemala, Haiti, Honduras, Jamaica,
Japan, Mexico, Netherlands Antilles,
Type 29 250V 20A Nevis, Nicaragua, Panama,
Philippines, Puerto Rico, St. Kitts, St.
Martin, Taiwan, Tortola (BVI),
Trinidad, Tobago, Turk Islands,
United States, Venezuela, Virgin
Islands, Yemen

Cord Feature Part Number Cord Rating

1401 (J) 36L8851 and 39M53011 - 1.8 m (6 ft) 3.8 kVA cord (J)
(J)

36L8852 and 39M53021 - 2.7 m (9 ft)

(J)

36L8853 and 39M53031 - 4.3 m (14 ft)

(J)

Systems and expansion units

(J) - Features 5065, 5066

Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous
Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

592 Site and hardware planning

Plug and receptacle type 32
Plug type 32 is a 250 V, 10 A or 16 A, SII 32-1971 plug.

Plug Receptacle Countries/Regions

Standards Institution of Israel

SII 32-1971

Israel

Type 32 250V 10A/16A

Cord Feature Part Number Cord Rating

2961 (B) 14F0086 - 1.8 m (6 ft) 2.4 kVA cord (B) (G) (H) (K) (T)

(Default) (H) 14F0087 and 39M51721 - 2.7 m (9 ft) 3.8 kVA cord (C) (I) (J) (L)
(G) (T)
1419 (C) (L)
14F0088 and 39M51731 - 4.3 m (14 ft)
1445 (K) (B) (H) (K) (N) (P) (Q) (R) (S)(T)

5102 dual power cord (Model 14F1561 and 39M53111 - 4.3 m (14 ft)
9406-820 only) (C) (I) (J) (L)

5103 dual power cord (C) 14F0085 and 39M51701 - 4.3 m (14
ft)(U)
5105 dual power cord (5074 and top
expansion unit in 8079)

5106 dual power cord (single

expansion unit in 5079)

6475 (T)

6464(U)

9827 (N) (P) (Q) (R) (S)

9904 (Q)

Migration (J)

Chapter 10. Planning for power 593

Systems and expansion units

(B) - Models 53x I/O Side, and expansion units 5070, 5072, 5080, 5082

(C) - Model 9406-830 in a 0550 rack

(G) - Models 250, 9910-080

(H) - 9251 base I/O, and expansion units 5071, 5073, 5081, 5083

(I) - Models 9910-140, 9910-180

(J) - Features 5033, 5034, 5035

(K) - Model 9406-270, 9406-800, 9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825, 5075, 5077, 5095, 7104, 7116, 9316, 5070, 5071, 5072,
5073, 5080, 5081, 5082, 5083, 9251

(L) - Model 830, SB2, 5065, 5066(x2), 5074, 5079(x2), 5094, 5294, 8079, 8094, 9079, 9094, 5033, 5034, 5035, 9194

(N) - pSeries 640 - B80

(P) - 7025 - pSeries 620 - 6F0, 6F1

(Q) - pSeries 620 (7028) - 6C1

(R) - 7026 - M80, pSeries 660 (7026) - 6H0, 6H1, 6M1

(S) - pSeries 620 (7028) - 6E1

(T) - Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9115-505, 5786 , 5787 , 7031-D24, 7031-T24,
9111-285, 9131-52A, 9133-55A, 7037-A50, 7047-185, 9116-561, 9110-51A, 9110-510, 9405-520, 7310-CR3, 7310-C04,
7310-C05, 7314-G30, 5796, 9117-MMA, 9406-MMA, 9406-525, 9407-515, 7310-C06, 7310-CR4, 7042-C06, 7042-CR4,
8204-E8A, 5886, 7214-1U2, 8203-E4A 9407-M15, 9408-M25, 7042-C07, 9409-M50, 8234-EMA, 8261-E4S

(U) - 7311-D11, 7311-D10, 5790

Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous
Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

Plug and receptacle type 34

Plug type 34 is a 250 V, 10 A or 15 A, 3720U-2 plug with a 3743U-2 receptacle.

Plug Receptacle Countries/Regions

Manufacturer's Number Russel/Stoll

Plug 3720U-2

Connector 3913U-2 (DuraGard

9C23U2)

Receptacle 3743U-2 (DuraGard

9R23U2W)

Canada, Japan, United States

Type 34 250V 10A/15A Water

Resistant

594 Site and hardware planning

Cord Feature Part Number Cord Rating

1415 (J) (M) 73F4931 - 1.8 m (6 ft) (B) (H) (J) (M) 2.4 kVA cord (B) (H) (J) (M)

1455 (F) (K) (L) 14F1551 and 39M53131 - 1.8 m (6 ft) 3.8 kVA cord (C) (D) (F) (K) (L)
(D) (F) (K)
1456 (F) (K) (L)
55H6644 and 39M53141 - 2.7 m (9 ft)
1459 (L) (C) (L)

2961 + 9080 (B) 73F4932 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (B) (H) (J)

2961 + 9080 + 9082 (B) 14F1552 and 39M53151 - 4.3 m (14 ft)
(C) (D) (F) (K)
5102 dual power cord (Model
9406-820 only)

5103 dual power cord (F)

5105 dual power cord (5074 and top

expansion unit in 8079)

5106 dual power cord (single

expansion unit in 5079)

6498 (M) (J)

9080 (D) (H)

9080 + 9082 (D) (H)

Migration (C)

Systems and expansion units

(B) - Models 53x I/O Side, and expansion units 5070, 5072, 5080, 5082

(C) - Expansion units 5033, 5034, 5035

(D) - Models 9406-720, 830, SB2

(F) - Model 9406-830 in a 0550 rack

(H) - 9251 base I/O and expansion units 5071, 5073, 5081, 5083

(J) - Model 9406-270, 9406-800, 9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825, 5075, 5077, 5095, 7104, 7116, 7316, 5070, 5071, 5072, 5073,
5080, 5081, 5082, 5083, 9251

(K) - Models 9406-830, 9406-SB2, 5074, 5094, 9079, 5079, 5294, 8079, 8093, 8094, 9094, 9194, 5096

(L) - Model Feature 5079, 5294, 8079, 8094, 5296

(M) - Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, and 9117-570 and expansion units used with IBM
System i5 and System p5 , 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24, 9131-52A, 9133-55A, 9405-520, 5796, 7310-C06, 7310-CR4,
7042-C06, 7042-CR4, 7042-C07
Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous
Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

Chapter 10. Planning for power 595

Plug and receptacle type 35
Plug type 35 is a 250 V, 20 A, water resistant, 3720DP plug with a 3743 receptacle.

Plug Receptacle Countries/Regions

Manufacturer's Number Russel/Stoll

Plug 3720DP

Connector 3913 (DuraGard 9C23U0)

Receptacle 3743 (DuraGard

9R23U0W)

US, Canada, Japan

Figure 255. Artwork for t35r
Figure 254. Artwork for t35p

Type 35 250V 20A Water Resistant

Cord Feature Part Number Cord Rating

1407 (J) 36L8857 and 39M53191 - 4.3 m (14 ft) 3.8 kVA cord (J)
(J)

Systems and expansion units

(J) - Features 5065, 5066

Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous
Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

Plug and Receptacle type 40

Plug type 40 is a 250 V, 32 A, 3750 plug with a 3753 receptacle.

Plug Receptacle Countries/Regions Manufacturer's

Number Russel / Stoll

Plug 3750

Connector 3933 (DuraGard 9C33U0)

Receptacle 3753 (DuraGard

9R33U0W)

Canada, United States

Type 40 250V 32A

596 Site and hardware planning

Cord Feature Part Number

4961 + 9180 (C) 46F4593 - 1.8 m (6 ft) (C) (F) (G) (J) (P)

4961 + 9180 + 9182 (C) 46F4594 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (C) (F) (G) (H) (J) (P)

1427(G) (J) 25R2557 - 4.3 m (14 ft)(Q)

5104 dual power cord (G)

8622 dual power cord (P)

9180 (F)

9180 + 9182 (F)

9080 (H)

9801 (P)

9987 (P)

6655 (Q)

Cord Rating

7.2 kVA cord (C) (F) (G) (J) (P)

Systems and expansion units

(C) - Model 53x Processor Side

(F) - Models 9406-730, 9406-740, SB1

(G) - Models 9406-840, 9406-SB3

(H) - 9309 rack

(J) - 0550, 0551, 5160, and 7014 racks

(P) - 7017 - S85

(Q) - 7188 and 9188 power distribution units, model 8234-EMA, 8261-E4S

Plug and receptacle type 46 (P+N+E) [32A]

Plug type 46 (P+N+E) is a 250 V, 32 A, IEC 60309 plug.

Plug Receptacle Countries/Regions International

Electrotechnical Commission

IEC 309 (32A)

(C) and (F) - Portugal

(C) only - Austria, Brazil, Czech

Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Ethiopia,
Finland, Israel, Latvia, Liberia,
Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Malaysia,
Russia, Saudi Arabia, Somalia, South
Type 46 (P+N+E) 250V 32A Africa, Swaziland, Sudan, Sweden,
Switzerland, Turkey, Uganda

Chapter 10. Planning for power 597

Cord Feature Part Number

Country Code (F) 76X3559 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (C)

1449 (J) (G) 21H7693 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (F) (G) (J) (P)

4961 (C)

5104 dual power cord (G)

8622 dual power cord (P)

9823 (P)

49611

Cord Rating 7.4 kVA cord (C) (F) (G) (J) (P)

Systems and expansion units

(C) - Model 53x Processor Side

(F) - Models 9406-730, 9406-740, SB1

(G) - Models 9406-840 SB3

(J) - 0550 and 0551 racks

(P) - 7017 - S85

8234-EMA1

Plug and receptacle type 46 (3P+N+E)

Plug type 46 (3P+N+E) is a 250 V, 16 A, dual phase, IEC 60309 plug.

Plug Plug Pinout Countries/Regions International

Electrotechnical Commission

IEC 309

Austria, Czech Republic, Denmark,

Estonia, Finland, Israel, Latvia,
Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Russia,
Sweden, Switzerland, Turkey

Type 46 (3P+N+E) 250 V 16 A, dual

phase

Cord Feature Part Number

Country Code (F) 21H7691 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (F) (G) (J)

1450, (G) (J) 39M5413s1

6489 (Z)

Cord Rating 3.8 kVA cord (F) (G) (J)

598 Site and hardware planning

Systems and expansion units

(F) - Models 9406-730, 9406-740, SB1

(G) - Models 9406-840 SB3

(J) - 0550 and 0551 racks

(Z) - Model 8234-EMA, 8261-E4S

Plug and receptacle type 46 (P+N+E) [16A]

Plug type 46 (P+N+E) is a 250 V, 16 A, IEC 60309 plug.

Plug Receptacle Countries/Regions International

Electrotechnical Commission

IEC 60309 (16A)

Type 46 (P+N+E) 250V 16A

Cord Feature Part Number

2961 + 9180 + 9182 14F1555 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (C) (I) (J) (K)

1414 (I)

1421 (C) (K)

5103 dual power cord (C)

5105 dual power cord (5074 and top

expansion unit in 8079)

5106 dual power cord (single

expansion unit in 5079)

Migration (J)

Cord Rating 3.8 kVA cord (C) (I) (J) (K)

Systems and expansion units

(C) - Model 9406-830 in a 0550 rack

(I) - Models 9910-140, 9910-180

(J) - Features 5033, 5034, 5035

(K) - Model 9406-830, SB2, 5065, 5066(x2), 5074, 5079(x2), 5079, 8079, 8094, 9074, 9079

Chapter 10. Planning for power 599

Plug and receptacle type 51
Plug type 51 is a 125 V, 13 A or 15 A, 3720U-1 plug with a 3743U-1 receptacle.

Plug Receptacle Countries/Regions

Manufacturer's Number Russel/Stoll

Plug 3720U-1

Connector (DuraGard 9C23UI)

Receptacle 3743U-1 (DuraGard

9R23U1W)

Canada, United States

Type 51 125V 13A/15A Water
Resistant

Cord Feature Part Number

2960 + 9080 (B) 46F5893 - 1.8 m (6 ft) (B)

2960 + 9080 + 9082 (B) 46F5894 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (B)

Cord Rating 1.6 kVA cord (B) (A)

Systems and expansion units

(B) - Expansion units 5070, 5072, 5080, 5082

Plug and receptacle type 54

Plug type 54 is a 250 V, 15 A, SAA-AS 3112 plug.

Plug Receptacle Countries/Regions International

Electrotechnical Commission

SAA-AS 3112

Australia, Fiji, New Zealand, Papua

New Guinea, Western Samoa

Type 54 250V 15A

600 Site and hardware planning

Cord Feature Part Number

2961 + 9082 14F1559 and 39M53311 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (C) (I) (J) (K)

1414 (I)

1409 (C) (J) (K)

5103 dual power cord (C)

5105 dual power cord (5074 and top

expansion unit in 8079)

5106 dual power cord (single

expansion unit in 5079)

Migration (J)

Cord Rating 3.8 kVA cord (C) (I) (J) (K)

Systems and expansion units

(C) - Model 9406-830 in a 0550 rack

(I) - Models 9910-140, 9910-180

(J) - Features 5033, 5034, 5035

(K) - Model 9406-830, SB2, 5065, 5066(x2), 5074, 5079(x2), 5094, 5294(x2), 8079, 8093, 8094(x2), 9074, 9079, 9094, 9194
Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous
Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

Plug and receptacle type 57

Plug type 57 is a 200 - 240 V, 12 A, NEMA 6-15 plug.

Plug Receptacle Type 57 200 - 240 V 12 A Countries/RegionsNEMA 6-15

Japan

Type 57 200 - 240 V 12 A

Chapter 10. Planning for power 601

Cord Feature Part Number

6687 (A) (B) 25R2576 and 39M51851 - 1.8 m (6 ft) (A) (B)

6669 (A) (B) 25R2578 and 39M51871 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (A) (B)

6456 (A) (B) 25R2575 and 39M51841 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (A) (B)

6691 (C) 25R2573 and 39M51731 - 1.8 m (6 ft) (A) (B)

25R2582 and 39M53351 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (A) (B)

25R2580 and 39M53331 - 1.8 m (6 ft) (A) (B)

25R2581 and 39M53341 - 2.7 m (9 ft) (A) (B)

25R2577 and 39M51861 - 2.7 m (9 ft) (A) (B)

25R2582 and 39M53351 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (C)

Systems and expansion units

(A) - 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9115-505, 5786 , 5787 , 7031-D24, 7031-T24, 9111-285,
9131-52A, 9133-55A, 7037-A50, 7047-185, 9116-561, 9110-51A, 9110-510, 9405-520, 7310-CR3, 7310-C04, 7310-C05,
7314-G30, 5796, 9117-MMA, 9406-MMA, 8204-E8A, 5886, 7214-1U2, 8203-E4A 9407-M15, 9408-M25, 9409-M50,
8234-EMA, (T) (U) - 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9115-505, 5786 , 5787 , 7031-D24,
7031-T24, 9111-285, 9131-52A, 9133-55A, 7037-A50, 7047-185, 9116-561, 9110-51A, 9110-510, 9405-520, 7310-CR3,
7310-C04, 7310-C05, OpenPower 710, OpenPower 720, 7314-G30, 5796 , 9117-MMA, 9406-MMA, 7310-C06, 7310-CR4,
7042-C06, 7042-CR4, 8204-E8A, 5886, 7214-1U2, 8203-E4A 9407-M15, 9408-M25, 7042-C07, 9409-M50, 8234-EMA,
8261-E4S

(B) - 7311-D11, 7311-D10, 5790, 7314-G30, 5796, 9117-MMA, 9117-MMA, 8204-E8A, 5886, 7214-1U2, 8203-E4A,
9407-M15, 9408-M25, 9409-M50, 8234-EMA, (T) (U) - 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, 9117-570,
9115-505, 5786 , 5787 , 7031-D24, 7031-T24, 9111-285, 9131-52A, 9133-55A, 7037-A50, 7047-185, 9116-561, 9110-51A,
9110-510, 9405-520, 7310-CR3, 7310-C04, 7310-C05, OpenPower 710, OpenPower 720, 7314-G30, 5796 , 9117-MMA,
9406-MMA, 7310-C06, 7310-CR4, 7042-C06, 7042-CR4, 8204-E8A, 5886, 7214-1U2, 8203-E4A 9407-M15, 9408-M25,
7042-C07, 9409-M50, 8234-EMA, 8261-E4S

(C) - Model 9406-830, 9406-SB2, 5074, 5079, 5094, 5294, 8079, 8093, 8094, 9079, 9094, 5033, 5034, 5035, 9194

Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous
Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

Plug and receptacle type 59

Plug type 59 is a 125 V, 20 A, JIS C-8303-1983 plug.

Plug Receptacle Type 59 250V 15A Countries/RegionsJIS C-8303-1983

Japan

Type 59 125V 20A

602 Site and hardware planning

Cord Feature Part Number

2960 (A) (B) 34G0222 and 39M51981 - 1.8 m (6 ft) (B) (C)

2960 + 9082 (B) 34G0223 and 39M51991 - 2.7 m (9 ft) (A)

6670 (C) 34G0224 and 39M52001 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (B) (C)

6660 (C)

Cord Rating 1.2 kVA cord (A) (B)

Systems and expansion units

(A) - Model 9406-270 [plug not available for these models in United States]

(B) - Expansion units 5070, 5072, 5080, 5082

(C) - OpenPower 710, 9110-510, and OpenPower 720, 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24, 9115-505, 9111-285, 9131-52A,
9133-55A, 7037-A50, 7047-185, 9116-561, 7310-C04, 7310-C05, 8204-E8A, 5886, 7214-1U2, 8203-E4A, (T) (U) - 9406-520,
9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9115-505, 5786 , 5787 , 7031-D24, 7031-T24, 9111-285, 9131-52A,
9133-55A, 7037-A50, 7047-185, 9116-561, 9110-51A, 9110-510, 9405-520, 7310-CR3, 7310-C04, 7310-C05, OpenPower
710, OpenPower 720, 7314-G30, 5796 , 9117-MMA, 9406-MMA, 7310-C06, 7310-CR4, 7042-C06, 7042-CR4, 8204-E8A,
5886, 7214-1U2, 8203-E4A 9407-M15, 9408-M25, 7042-C07, 9409-M50, 8234-EMA, 8261-E4S, 9407-M15, 9408-M25,
9409-M50
Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous
Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

Plug and receptacle type 62

Plug type 62 is a 250 V, 10 A, CCC certified GB 1053 plug.

Plug Plug Countries/Regions International

Electrotechnical Commission 320 C13

CCC certified GB 1053

People's Republic of China

Type 62 250V 10A

Chapter 10. Planning for power 603

Cord Feature Part Number

1395 (K) 02K0547 and 39M52071 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (B) (H) (K) (N) (P) (Q) (R) (S)

2961 (B) 02K0546 and 39M52061 - 2.7 m (9 ft) (T)

(Default) (H) 02K0544 and 39M52041 - 4.3 m (14 ft)(U)

1438 (K) (T)

1412 (G) (T)

5102dual power cord (Model

9406-820 only)

6452(U)

6493 (T)

9831 (N) (P) (Q) (R) (S)

9908 (Q)

Cord Rating 2.4 kVA cord (B) (G) (H) (K) (K) (T)

Systems and expansion units

(B) - Models 53x I/O Side, and expansion units 5070, 5072, 5080, 5082

(G) - Models 9406-250, 9910-080

(H) - 9251 base I/O, and expansion units 5071, 5073, 5081, 5083

(K) - Model 9406-270, 9406-800, 9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825, 5075, 5077, 5095, 7104, 7116, 9316, 5070, 5071, 5072,
5073, 5080, 5081, 5082, 5083, 9251, 7311-D20

(N) - pSeries 640 - B80

(P) - 7025 - pSeries 620 - 6F0, 6F1

(Q) - pSeries 620 (7028) - 6C1

(R) - 7026 - M80, pSeries 660 (7026) - 6H0, 6H1, 6M1

(S) - pSeries 620 (7028) - 6E1

(T) - Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9115-505, 5786 , 5787 , 7031-D24, 7031-T24,
9111-285, 9131-52A, 9133-55A, 7037-A50, 7047-185, 9116-561, 9110-51A, 9110-510, 9405-520, 7310-CR3, 7310-C04,
7310-C05, 7314-G30, 5796, 9117-MMA, 9406-MMA, 9406-525, 9407-515, 7310-C06, 7310-CR4, 7042-C06, 7042-CR4,
8204-E8A, 5886, 7214-1U2, 8203-E4A 9407-M15, 9408-M25, 7042-C07, 9409-M50, 8234-EMA, 8261-E4S

(U) - 7311-D11, 7311-D10, 5790

Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous
Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

604 Site and hardware planning

Plug and receptacle type 64
Plug type 64 is a 250 V, 15 A, iNMETRO plug.

Plug Receptacle Countries/Regions International

Electrotechnical Commission

iNMETRO

Type 64 250V 15A

Cord Feature Part Number

2961 + 9082 36L8885 and 39M53431 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (C) (K) (J)

1414 (I) (A) 36L8884 and 39M53421 - 2.7 m (9 ft) (C) (K)

1399 (C) (K) (J) 39M53411,2 - 1.8 m (5.9 ft)

1394 (A)

5103 dual power cord (C)

5105 dual power cord (5074 and top

expansion unit in 8079)

5106 dual power cord (single

expansion unit in 5079)

6495 (L)

Migration (J)

Cord Rating

2.5 kVA cord (A)

3.8 kVA cord (C) (I) (J) (K) (L)

Systems and expansion units

(A) - Models 9406-270, 9406-800, 9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825

(C) - Model 9406-830 in a 0550 rack

(I) - Models 9910-140, 9910-180

(J) - Features 5033, 5034, 5035

(K) - Model 9406-830, 9406-SB2, 5065, 5066(x2), 5074, 5079(x2), 5094, 5294(x2), 8079, 8093, 8094(x2), 9074, 9079, 9094,
5033, 5034, 5035, 9194

(L) - Models 9406-520, 9111-520, , 9406-525, 9407-515,9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, and 9117-570IBM System i5 and
System p5 , 7310-C06, 7310-CR4, 7042-C06, 7042-CR4, 7042-C07

Chapter 10. Planning for power 605

Notes:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous
Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.
2. This part uses an IEC 320 C19 receptacle.

Plug and receptacle type 66

Plug type 66 is a 200 - 240 V, 10 A, KETI plug.

Plug Receptacle Countries/Regions International

Electrotechnical Commission

KETI
Type 66 200-240 V 10 A
North Korea, South Korea

Cord Feature Part Number

6496 (A) (when ordered with IBM 24P6873 and 39M52191 - 2.7 m (9 ft) (A)
System i5 and System p5 )
24P6877 and 39M52171 - 4.3 m (14 ft)(B)
6454 (B)

Cord Rating

2.5 kVA cord (A)

Systems and expansion units

(A) - Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9115-505, 5786 , 5787 , 7031-D24, 7031-T24,
9111-285, 9131-52A, 9133-55A, 7037-A50, 7047-185, 9116-561, 9110-51A, 9110-510, 9405-520, 7310-CR3, 7310-C04,
7310-C05, 7314-G30, 5796, 9117-MMA, 9406-MMA, 9406-525, 9407-515, 7310-C06, 7310-CR4, 7042-C06, 7042-CR4,
8204-E8A, 5886, 7214-1U2, 8203-E4A 9407-M15, 9408-M25, 7042-C07, 9409-M50, 8234-EMA, 8261-E4S

(B) - 7311-D11, 7311-D10, 5790

Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous
Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

Plug and receptacle type 68

Plug type 68 is a 200 - 240 V, 10 A, IS6538 plug.

Plug Receptacle Countries/Regions International

Electrotechnical Commission

IS6538
Type 68 200-240 V 10 A India

Cord Rating

2.5 kVA cord (A)

606 Site and hardware planning

Systems and expansion units

(A) - Models 9110-510, 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, and 9117-570, OpenPower 710, OpenPower
720, 8234-EMA, 8261-E4S

(B) - 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24, 7311-D10, 7311-D11

Plug and receptacle type 69

Plug type 69 is a 200 - 240 V, 10 A, IS6538 plug.

Plug Receptacle Countries/Regions International

Electrotechnical Commission

IS6538

Type 69 200-240 V 10 A India

Cord Feature Part Number

6494 (A) (when ordered with IBM 74P4424 and 39M52261 - 2.7 m (9 ft) (A)
System i5 and System p5)
74P4422 and 39M52241 - 4.3 m (14 ft)(B)
6451 (B)

Systems and expansion units

(A) - Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9115-505, 5786 , 5787 , 7031-D24, 7031-T24,
9111-285, 9131-52A, 9133-55A, 7037-A50, 7047-185, 9116-561, 9110-51A, 9110-510, 9405-520, 7310-CR3, 7310-C04,
7310-C05, 7314-G30, 5796, 9117-MMA, 9406-MMA, 9406-525, 9407-515, 7310-C06, 7310-CR4, 7042-C06, 7042-CR4,
8204-E8A, 5886, 7214-1U2, 8203-E4A 9407-M15, 9408-M25, 7042-C07, 9409-M50, 8234-EMA, 8261-E4S

(B) - 7311-D11, 7311-D10, 5790

Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous
Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

Plug and receptacle type 70

Plug type 70 is a 100 - 127 V, 15 A, iNMETRO NBR 6147 plug.
Table 697. Plug and receptacle Type 70

Plug Receptacle Countries/Regions National Electrical

Manufacturers Association

iNMETRO NBR 6147

Brazil

Figure 257. Artwork for t4r

Figure 256. Artwork for t4p Type 70

100 - 127 V ac 15 A

Chapter 10. Planning for power 607

Table 697. Plug and receptacle Type 70 (continued)

Cord Feature Part Number

2960 (B) 75G2695 - 2.7 m (9 ft) (G)

2960 + 9082 (B) 49P2109 - 1.8 m (6 ft) (B) (K) (P) (Q) (S)

1398 (B) (K) (U) 49P2111 and 39M52341 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (B) (K) (P) (Q) (U)

6471(T) 12J5112 - 2.7 m (9 ft) (I)

9800 (P) (Q) (S) 86G7648 - 1.8 m (6 ft) (T)

9900 (Q) 49P2110 and 39M52331 - 2.7 m (9 ft) (T)

5102 dual power cord (Model

9406-820 only)

Cord Rating

1.6 kVA Cord (B) (G) (K) (T)

2.0 kVA cord (I)

Systems and expansion units

(B) - Models 53x I/O Side, and expansion units 5070, 5072, 5080, 5082

(G) - Models 9406-250, 9910-080

(I) - Models 9910-140

(K) - Model 9406-270, 9406-800, 9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825, 5075, 5077, 5095, 7104, 7116

(P) - 7025 - pSeries 620 - 6F0, 6F1, pSeries 640 - B80

(Q) - pSeries 620 (7028) - 6C1

(S) - pSeries 620 (7028) - 6E1

(T) - Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9115-505, 5786 , 5787 , 7031-D24, 7031-T24,
9111-285, 9131-52A, 9133-55A, 7037-A50, 7047-185, 9116-561, 9110-51A, 9110-510, 9405-520, 7310-CR3, 7310-C04,
7310-C05, 9406-525, 9407-515, 7310-C06, 7310-CR4, 7042-C06, 7042-CR4, 8204-E8A, 5886, 7214-1U2, 8203-E4A
9407-M15, 9408-M25, 7042-C07, 9409-M50, 8234-EMA, 8261-E4S

(U) - 7311-D20
Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous
Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

608 Site and hardware planning

Plug and receptacle type 72
Plug type 72 is a 250 V, 15 A, CCC certified GB 1053 plug.

Plug Receptacle Countries/Regions International

Electrotechnical Commission 320 C19

CCC certified GB 1053

People's Republic of China

Type 72 250V 15A

Cord Feature Part Number

1396 (J) (K) 01K9852 and 39M53551 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (C) (I) (J) (K)

2961 + 9082

1414 (I)

1409 (C) (K)

5103 dual power cord (C)

5105 dual power cord (5074 and top

expansion unit in 8079)

5106 dual power cord (single

expansion unit in 5079)

Migration (J)

Cord Rating 3.8 kVA cord (C) (I) (J) (K)

Systems and expansion units

(C) - Model 9406-830 in a 0550 rack

(I) - Models 9910-140, 9910-180

(J) - Features 5033, 5034, 5035

(K) - Model 9406-830, SB2, 5065, 5066(x2), 5074, 5079(x2), 5094, 5294(x2), 8079, 8093, 8094(x2), 9079, 9094, 9194
Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous
Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

Chapter 10. Planning for power 609

Plug and receptacle type 73
Plug type 73 is a 250 V, 15 A plug.

Plug Receptacle Type 73 250V 15A Countries/Regions

Brazil

Cord Feature Part Number

1394 (D) 74P4393 and 39M52401 - 2.7 m (9 ft) (A)

6495 (A) (C) 25R2584 and 39M52401 - 2.7 m (9 ft) (A) (C)

6499 (D) (B) 25R2585 and 39M52411 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (B) (D)

Systems and expansion units

(A) - Model 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9115-505, 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24,
9111-285, 9131-52A, 9133-55A, 7037-A50, 7047-185, 9116-561, 9110-51A, 9110-510, 9405-520, 7310-CR3, 7310-C04,
7310-C05, OpenPower 710, OpenPower 720, 7314-G30, 5796, 9117-MMA, 9406-MMA, 8204-E8A, 5886, 8203-E4A
9407-M15, 9408-M25, 9409-M50

(B) - 7311-D10, 7311-D11 expansion units, 5786, 5787, 7031-D24, 7031-T24

(C) - 7310-CR3, 7310-C04, 7310-C05, 7314-G30, 5796, 9117-MMA conref="iphwsym.dita#iphwsym/eclhwpMLxmtm">,

9406-MMA, 8204-E8A, 5886, 7214-1U2, 8203-E4A 9407-M15, 9408-M25, 9409-M50

(D) - Model 7311-D20, 9406-270, 9406-800, 9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825, 5075, 5077, 5095, 7104, 7116, 9316, 5070, 5071,
5072, 5073, 5080, 5081, 5082, 5083, 9251
Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous
Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

Plug and receptacle type 74

Plug type 74 is a 250 V, 15 A plug.

Plug Receptacle Type 74 250V 15A Countries/Regions

Brazil

610 Site and hardware planning

Cord Feature Part Number

6690(A) 25R2585 and 39M52411 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (A)

Systems and expansion units

(A) - 7311-D10, 7311-D11 expansion units

Plug and receptacle type 75

Plug type 75 is a 100 - 127 V, 10 A, NEMA 5-15P plug.

Plug Receptacle Type 75 100 - 127 V 10A Countries/Regions

NEMA 5-15P

Taiwan

Cord Feature Part Number

6651 (A) 39M5247 - 2.7 m (9 ft) (A)

39M5246 - 1.8 m (6 ft) (A)

Systems and expansion units

(A) - 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9115-505, 5786 , 5787 , 7031-D24, 7031-T24, 9111-285,
9131-52A, 9133-55A, 7037-A50, 7047-185, 9116-561, 9110-51A, 9110-510, 9405-520, 7310-CR3, 7310-C04, 7310-C05,
OpenPower 710, OpenPower 720, 9406-525, 9407-515, 7310-C06, 7310-CR4, 7042-C06, 7042-CR4, 8204-E8A, 5886,
7214-1U2, 9406-270, 9406-800, 9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825, 5075, 5077, 5095, 7104, 7116, 9316, 5070, 5071, 5072, 5073,
5080, 5081, 5082, 5083, 9251, 8203-E4A 9407-M15, 9408-M25, 7042-C07, 9409-M50, 8234-EMA, 8261-E4S
Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous
Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

Plug and receptacle type 76

Plug type 76 is a 200 - 240 V, 15 A plug.

Plug Receptacle Countries/Regions

Taiwan

Type 76 200-240 V 15A

Type 76 200 - 240 V 15A

Chapter 10. Planning for power 611

Cord Feature Part Number

6659 (A) 39M52541 - 2.7 m (9 ft) (A)

6663 (B) 39M52521 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (B)

Systems and expansion units

(A) - 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9115-505, 5786 , 5787 , 7031-D24, 7031-T24, 9111-285,
9131-52A, 9133-55A, 7037-A50, 7047-185, 9116-561, 9110-51A, 9110-510, 9405-520, 7310-CR3, 7310-C04, 7310-C05,
9406-270, 9406-800, 9406-810, 9406-820, 9406-825, 5075, 5077, 5095, 7104, 7116, 9316, 5070, 5071, 5072, 5073, 5080, 5081,
5082, 5083, 9251, 7314-G30, 5796, 9117-MMA, 9406-MMA, 9406-525, 9407-515, 7310-C06, 7310-CR4, 7042-C06,
7042-CR4, 8204-E8A, 5886, 7214-1U2, 8203-E4A 9407-M15, 9408-M25, 9409-M50, 8234-EMA, 8261-E4S

(B) - 7311-D11, 7311-D10, 5790, 7042-C07

Note: This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain
Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

Power cords: Plugs and receptacles

Select the appropriate plug and receptacle type for your system.

Note: When you select a plug and receptacle type, you will see a Plug and receptacle type table. Look for
your country or region (where your system or server will reside) in the Countries or regions section (right
side of table) and your model type in the Systems and expansion units section (bottom of table). You will
find the plug type that supports your system or server in the table that lists both your model and your
country or region.

Voltage and amperage Plug and receptacle type

100 - 127 V 10 A Type 75
100 - 127 V 10A/15A Type 70
100 - 127 V 12A/16A Type 51
100 - 127V 15A Type 4 , Type 7
100 - 127 V 12A Type 59
100 - 240 V (maximum Type 26
12A @ 100 - 127 V ac,
maximum 10A @ 200 -
240 V ac)
200 - 240 V 10A Type 2, Type 66, Type 68, Type 69
200 - 240 V 15A Type 64
200 - 240V 10A Type 6, Type 19, Type 24, Type 62, Type 76
200 - 240 V 12 A Type 57
200 - 240 V 10A/15A Type 34, Type 73
200 - 240 V 10A/16A Type 25, Type 32
200 - 240 V 10A/13A Type 23
200 - 240 V 15A Type 5, Type 54, Type 10, Type 72, Type 74, Type 76
200 - 240 10A/16A Type 18, Type 22, Type 46 P+N+E, Type 46 3P+N+E
200 - 240 V 20A Type 11, Type 29, Type 35
200 - 208, 240 V 30A Type 12 Type 40
250V 32A Type 46 P+N+E

612 Site and hardware planning

Voltage and amperage Plug and receptacle type
220V 30 A Type KP
230 - 240 V 30 A Type PDL

Plug and receptacle type KP

Plug type KP is a 250 V, 30 A plug.

Plug Receptacle Countries/Regions

North Korea, South Korea

Type KP 250V 30A

Cord Feature Part Number Cord Rating

4961 + 9180 + 9182 (C) 87G6067 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (C) (F) (G) (J) 7.5 kVA cord (C) (F) (G) (J) (P)
(P)
1446 (G) (J)
25R2559 - 4.3 m (14 ft)(R)
5104 dual power cord (G)

6658 (R)

8622 dual power cord (P)

9835 (P)

Country Code (F)

Systems and expansion units

(C) - Model 53x Processor Side

(F) - Models 9406-730, 9406-740, SB1

(G) - Models 9406-840 SB3

(J) - 0550 and 0551 racks

(P) - 7017 - S85

(R) - 7188 and 9188 power distribution units, model 8234-EMA, 8261-E4S

Chapter 10. Planning for power 613

Plug and receptacle type PDL
Type PDL is a 250 V, 30 A plug.

Plug Receptacle Countries/Regions Australia, Fiji,

New Zealand, Papua New Guinea

Type PDL 250V 30A

Cord Feature Part Number

4961 + 9180 + 9182 (C) 11F0106 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (C) (F) (G) (J) (R)
v (Australia)
1447 (G) (J)
11F0107 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (C) (F) (G) (J)
1448 (G) (J)
v (New Zealand)
5104 dual power cord (G)

6657(Q)

6444 (R)

8622 dual power cord (P)

9822 (P)

9826 (P)

Country Code (F)

Cord Rating 6.0 kVA cord (C) (F) (G) (J) (P)

Systems and expansion units

(C) - Model 53x Processor Side

(F) - Models 9406-730, 9406-740, SB1

(G) - Models 9406-840 SB3

(J) - 0550 and 0551 racks

(P) - 7017 - S85

(Q) - 7188 and 9188 power distribution units, 8261-E4S

(R) - System i 5160 PDU for 0551 rack (System p 7014 racks when ordered with System p server.

614 Site and hardware planning

Plug type 430 P7W and receptacle type 430 R7W
Plug type 430 P7W is a 480 V, 30 A, three-phase plug with a 430 R7W receptacle.

Plug Receptacle Countries or regions

Canada, Japan, United States of
America

480V, 30A, three-phase

Cord Feature Part Number

1302 (H) 11P0914 - 1.8 m (6 ft) (H)

1303 (H) 11P0916 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (H)

Cord Rating

Systems and expansion units

(H) - Models 9406-870 and 9406-890

Plug type 460 P9W and receptacle type 460 R9W

Plug type 460 P9W is a 200 - 240 V, 60 A, three-phase plug with a 460 R9W receptacle.

Plug Receptacle Countries or regions

Canada, Japan, United States of America

200-240V, 60A, three-phase

Cord Feature Part Number

1300 (H) 11P0365 - 1.8 m (6 ft) (H)

1301 (H) 11P0367 - 4.3 m (14 ft) (H)

Cord Rating

Systems and expansion units

Chapter 10. Planning for power 615

Plug Receptacle Countries or regions

(H) - Model 9406-890

Power cord features

Use the Power cord features table to find the specifications for your power cords.

When ordering power cords (also known as power cables), use power cord options to specify features
like length and general plug type.

You can use some of the option numbers in conjunction with each other. For example, 9182 specifies
a 4.3 m (14 ft) cord, and 9183 specifies a locking power cord.

The following lists the power cords and a general description of the power cord. Select the option number
for a full description, including requirements.

Note: Some features are not available in all Countries or Regions, for all systems, or with all other
options. Select the option number and check the full descriptions of the power cord for these
prohibitions.
Table 698. Power cord features
Feature Voltage Amperage Length System connector Plug Comments
or
option
code
1300 200-240 V ac 60 A, 3-phase 1.8 m (6 ft) 04N1868 460P9W wall plug (9406-870 and
9406-890 only)
1301 200-240 V ac 60 A, 3-phase 4.3 m (14 ft) 04N1868 460P9W wall plug (9406-870 and
9406-890 only)
1302 480 V ac 30 A, 3-phase 1.8 m (6 ft) 11P0767 430P5W wall plug (9406-870 and
9406-890 only)
1303 480 V ac 30 A, 3-phase 4.3 m (14 ft) 11P0767, 430P5W wall plug (9406-870 and
9406-890 only)
1304 380-415 V ac 30 A, 3-phase 4.3 m (14 ft) 11P0918 no wall plug (9406-870 and
9406-890 only)
1394 200-240 V ac 16 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13 IEC60083
non-locking wall
plug
1395 200-240 V ac 10 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13 CCC certified GB
1053 non-locking
plug
1396 200-240 V ac 15 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C19 CCC certified GB
1053 plug
1397 200 V ac 10 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13 IRAM 2073
non-locking wall
plug
1398 100 V ac 10 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13 INMETRO NBR
6147 non-locking
wall plug
1399 200 V ac 16 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C19 IEC60083 wall
plug
1401 200-240 V ac 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C19 NEMA 6-20P wall
plug
1406 200-240 V ac 16 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C19 NEMA L6-20P
locking plug

616 Site and hardware planning

Table 698. Power cord features (continued)
1407 200-240 V ac 16 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C19 water-resistant
plug
1408 200-240 V ac 16 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C19 CEI-16
non-locking wall
plug
1409 200-240 V ac 15 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C19 AS3112
non-locking plug
1410 200-240 V ac 12 A 1.8 m (6 ft) IEC320-C13 NEMA 6-15P
non-locking wall
plug
1411 200-240 V ac 12 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13 NEMA 6-15P
non-locking wall
plug
1412 100-127 V ac 12 A 1.8 m (6 ft) IEC320-C13 NEMA 5-15P
non-locking wall
plug
1414 200-240 V ac 12 A 1.8 m (6 ft) IEC320-C13 NEMA L6-15P
locking wall plug
1415 200-240 V ac 12 A 1.8 m (6 ft) IEC320-C13 water-resistant
plug
1418 200-240 V ac 16 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C19 SABS 164
non-locking wall
plug
1419 200-240 V ac 16 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C19 SII-32 wall plug
1420 200-240 V ac 16 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C19 Schuko
non-locking wall
plug
1421 200-240 V ac 16 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C19 IEC 60309
non-locking wall
plug
1422 1. 100-127 V ac 1. 12 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13 IEC320-C14 Inside the rack,
this cord goes
2. 200-240 V ac 2. 10 A from the 516x
PDU to the rack
drawer
1426 200-240 V ac 24 A 4.3 m (14 ft) L6-30R NEMA L6-30P This connects the
locking plug 5160 PDU to the
wall power source
1427 200-240 V ac 24 A 4.3 m (14 ft) L6-30R Water-resistant This connects the
plug 5160 PDU to the
wall power source
1438 200-240 V ac 10 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13 AS3112 This connects the
non-locking wall 5160 PDU to the
plug wall power source
1439 200-240 V ac 10 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13 Schuko
non-locking wall
plug
1440 200-240 V ac 10 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13 Denmark
non-locking wall
plug
1441 200-240 V ac 10 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13 SABS 164
non-locking wall
plug
1442 200-240 V ac 10 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13 SEV 24507
non-locking wall
plug

Chapter 10. Planning for power 617

Table 698. Power cord features (continued)
1443 200-240 V ac 10 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13 BS1363A
non-locking wall
plug
1444 200-240 V ac 10 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13 CEI 23-16
non-locking wall
plug
1445 200-240 V ac 10 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13 SII-32 non-locking
wall plug
1446 200-240 V ac 30 A 4.3 m (14 ft) L6-30R Korean 32 A This cord connects
non-locking wall PDU to wall
plug power source
1447 200-240 V ac 30 A 4.3 m (14 ft) L6-30R Australian 32 A This cord connects
non-locking wall PDU to wall
plug power source
1448 200-240 V ac 30 A 4.3 m (14 ft) L6-30R New Zealand 32 This cord connects
A non-locking PDU to wall
wall plug power source
1449 200-240 V ac 32 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC 60309 IEC 60309 3-pin This cord connects
non-locking wall PDU to wall
plug power source
1450 200-240 V ac 16 A per phase 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC 60309 IEC 60309 5-pin This cord connects
non-locking wall PDU to wall
plug power source (2
of 3 phases)
1451 200-240 V ac 12 A 1.8 m (6 ft) IEC320-C19 NEMA 6-15P
non-locking wall
plug
1452 200-240 V ac 12 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C19 NEMA 6-15P
non-locking wall
plug
1453 200-240 V ac 12 A 1.8 m (6 ft) IEC320-C19 NEMA L6-15P
locking wall plug
1454 200-240 V ac 12 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C19 L6-15P locking
wall plug
1455 200-240 V ac 12 A 1.8 m (6 ft) IEC320-C19 Water-resistant
wall plug
1456 200-240 V ac 12 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C19 Water-resistant
wall plug
1457 200-240 V ac 12 A 2.7 m (9 ft) IEC320-C19 NEMA 6-15P
non-locking wall
plug
1458 200-240 V ac 12 A 2.7 m (9 ft) IEC320-C19 NEMA L6-15P
locking wall plug
1459 200-240 V ac 12 A 2.7 m (9 ft) IEC320-C19 Water-resistant
wall plug
1476 200-240 V ac 13 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C19 BS 1363A
non-locking wall
plug
1477 200-240 V ac 16 A per phase 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC 60309R IEC 60309 5-pin This cord connects
wall plug the 5163 PDU to
wall power source
(3 of three-phases)
2960 100-127 V ac 12 A Low voltage cord
feature
2961 200-240 V ac 10 A High voltage cord
feature
4961 200-240 V ac 30 A Cord feature

618 Site and hardware planning

Table 698. Power cord features (continued)
6451 200-240 V ac 10 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13 IS 6538
6452 200-240 V ac 10 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13 GB 1053 (CCC
Cert)
6453 200-240 V ac 10 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13 IRAM 2073
6454 200-240 V ac 16 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13 KSC 8305
6455 200-240 V ac 15 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13
6456 200-240 V ac 12 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13 NEMA 6-15
6458 100-240 V ac 10 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13 IEC320-14 Inside the rack,
this cord connects
a drawer to the
PDU for power
6459 200-240 V ac 10 A 3.66 m (12 ft) IEC320-C13 IEC320-C14 Inside the rack,
this cord connects
a drawer to the
PDU for power
6460 120-127 V ac 12 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13 NEMA 5-15 This cord connects
non-locking wall a stand-alone or
plug rack drawer to its
power source
6461 200-240 V ac 10 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13 CEE 7 VII
6462 200-240 V ac 10 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13 DK2-5e
6463 200-240 V ac 10 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13 BS1364A
6464 200-240 V ac 10 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13 SII 32-1971
6465 200-240 V ac 10 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13 SEV 24507
6466 200-240 V ac 10 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13 SABS 1661
6467 200-240 V ac 10 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13 CEI 23-16
6468 200-240 V ac 10 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13 AS3112-1964, NZS
198
6469 200-240 V ac 12 A (15 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13
derated)
6470 100-127 V ac 12 A 1.8 m (6 ft) IEC320-C13 NEMA 5-15 This cord connects
non-locking wall a stand-alone or
plug rack drawer to its
power source
6471 100-127 V ac 15 A 2.7 m (9 ft) IEC320-C13 INMETRO NBR This cord connects
6147 (NEMA 5-15) a stand-alone or
non-locking wall rack drawer to its
plug power source
6472 200-240 V ac 10 A 2.7 m (9 ft) IEC320-C13 Schucko This cord connects
non-locking wall a stand-alone or
plug rack drawer to its
power source
6473 200-240 V ac 10 A 2.7 m (9 ft) IEC320-C13 CEE Danish This cord connects
non-locking plug a stand-alone or
rack drawer to its
power source
6474 200-240 V ac 10 A 2.7 m (9 ft) IEC320-C13 BS1364A This cord connects
non-locking wall a stand-alone or
plug rack drawer to its
power source
6475 200-240 V ac 10 A 2.7 m (9 ft) IEC320-C13 SII 32 non-locking This cord connects
wall plug a stand-alone or
rack drawer to its
power source

Chapter 10. Planning for power 619

Table 698. Power cord features (continued)
6476 200-240 V ac 10 A 2.7 m (9 ft) IEC320-C13 SEV 24507 This cord connects
non-locking wall a stand-alone or
plug rack drawer to its
power source
6477 200-240 V ac 10 A 2.7 m (9 ft) IEC320-C13 SABS 164 This cord connects
non-locking wall a stand-alone or
plug rack drawer to its
power source
6478 200-240 V ac 10 A 2.7 m (9 ft) IEC320-C13 CEI 23-16 This cord connects
non-locking wall a stand-alone or
plug rack drawer to its
power source
6479 200-240 V ac 10 A 2.7 m (9 ft) IEC320-C13 AS3112 This cord connects
a stand-alone or
rack drawer to its
power source
6487 200-240 V ac 12 A 1.8 m (6 ft) IEC320-13 NEMA 6-15 This cord connects
non-locking wall a stand-alone or
plug rack drawer to its
power source
6488 200-240 V ac 10 A 2.7 m (9 ft) IEC320-13 IRAM 2073 This cord connects
non-locking wall a stand-alone or
plug rack drawer to its
power source
6489 380-415 V ac 24 A, 3-phase 4.3 m (14 ft) Souriau UTG IEC 60309 (32 A, This cord connect
(32A) 3P+N+E) the 7188 or 9188
non-locking wall PDU to the wall
plug for power
6491 200-240 V ac 63 A, 1-phase 4.3 m (14 ft) Souriau UTG IEC 60309 (63 A, This cord connect
P+N+E) the 7188 or 9188
non-locking wall PDU to the wall
plug for power
6492 200-240 V ac 48 A, 1-phase 4.3 m (14 ft) Souriau UTG IEC 60309 (60 A, This cord connect
2P+E) non-locking the 7188 or 9188
wall plug PDU to the wall
for power
6493 200-240 V ac 10 A 2.7 m (9 ft) IEC320-C13 GB53 non-locking This cord connects
wall plug a stand-alone or
rack drawer to its
power source
6494 200-240 V ac 10 A 2.7 m (9 ft) IEC320-C13 IS6538 This cord connects
non-locking wall a stand-alone or
plug rack drawer to its
power source
6495 200-240 V ac 10 A 2.7 m (9 ft) IEC320-C13 IEC60083-A5 This cord connects
non-locking wall a stand-alone or
plug rack drawer to its
power source
6496 200-240 V ac 10 A 2.7 m (9 ft) IEC320-C13 KETI non-locking This cord connects
wall plug a stand-alone or
rack drawer to its
power source
6497 200-240 V ac 12 A 1.8 m (6 ft) IEC320-13 NEMA L6-15 This cord connects
locking wall plug a stand-alone or
rack drawer to its
power source
6498 200-240 V ac 12 A 1.8 m (6 ft) IEC320-C13 RS37204-2 This cord connects
water-resistant a stand-alone or
rack drawer to its
power source

620 Site and hardware planning

Table 698. Power cord features (continued)
6499 200-240 V ac 15 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C19
6651 100 - 127 V ac 10 A 2.7 m (9 ft) IEC320-C13 NEMA 5-15P
non-locking wall
plug
6653 380-415 V ac 16 A, 3-phase 4.3 m (14 ft) Souriau UTG IEC 60309 (16 A, This cord connect
3P+N+E) the 7188 or 9188
non-locking wall PDU to the wall
plug for power
6654 200-240 V ac 24 A, 1-phase 4.3 m (14 ft) Souriau UTG NEMA L6-30P This cord connect
locking wall plug the 7188 or 9188
PDU to the wall
for power
6655 200-240 V ac 24 A 4.3 m (14 ft) Souriau UTG Water-resistant This cord connect
the 7188 or 9188
PDU to the wall
for power
6656 200-240 V ac 32 A 4.3 m (14 ft) Souriau UTG IEC 60309 (32 A, This cord connect
P+N+E) the 7188 or 9188
non-locking wall PDU to the wall
plug for power
6657 200-240 V ac 24 A 4.3 m (14 ft) Souriau UTG Plug type PDL This cord connect
non-locking wall the 7188 or 9188
plug PDU to the wall
for power
6658 200-240 V ac 24 A 4.3 m (14 ft) Souriau UTG Plug type KP This cord connect
non-locking wall the 7188 or 9188
plug PDU to the wall
for power
6659 200 - 240 V ac 10 A 2.7 m (9 ft) IEC320-C13 NEMA 6-15P
6660 120-127 V ac 15 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13 NEMA 5-15 This cord connects
non-locking wall a stand-alone or
plug rack drawer to its
power source
6663 200-240 V ac 10 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13 right NEMA 6-15P
angle
6669 200-240 V ac 12 A (15 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13
derated)
6670 100-127 V ac 15 A 1.8 m (6 ft) IEC320-C13 NEMA 5-15 This cord connects
non-locking wall a stand-alone or
plug rack drawer to its
power source
6671 100-240 V ac 10 A (HV), 12 A 2.7 m (9 ft) IEC320-C13 IEC320-C14 wall
(LV) plug
6672 100-240 V ac 10 A (HV), 12 A 1.5 m (5 ft) IEC320-C13 IEC320-C14 wall
(LV) plug
6673 100-240 V ac 10 A 1 m (3.2 ft) IEC320-C13 IEC320-C14 wall
plug
6680 200 - 240 V ac 10 A 2.7 m (9 ft) IEC320-C13 AS3112-1964, NZS
198
6681 200 - 240 V ac 10 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C13 AS3112-1964, NZS
198
6687 200-240 V ac 15 A 1.8 m (6 ft) IEC320-13 NEMA 6-15 This cord connects
non-locking wall a stand-alone or
plug rack drawer to its
power source
6690 200-240 V ac 16 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C19

Chapter 10. Planning for power 621

Table 698. Power cord features (continued)
6691 200-240 V ac 15 A 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC320-C19 NEMA 6-15P
Denan
6692 250 V ac 15 A 4.3 m (14 ft) C19 SAA-AS 3112
8677 380-415 V ac 30 A 4.3 m (14 ft) No wall plug
provided
8686 200-240 V ac 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC 60309 wall
plug
8687 200-240 V ac 1.8 m (6 ft) IEC 60309 wall
plug
8688 200-240 V ac 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC 60309 wall
plug
8689 200-240 V ac 1.8 m (6 ft) IEC 60309 wall
plug
8694 380-415 V ac 4.3 m (14 ft) No wall plug
provided
8697 480 V ac 4.3 m (14 ft) IEC 60309 wall
plug
8698 480 V ac 1.8 m (6 ft) IEC 60309 wall
plug
9080 200-240 V ac Water-resistant
power cord
9081 200-240 V ac 30 A NEMA L6-30R Locking power
cord
9180 200-240 V ac Water-resistant
power cord
9182 200-240 V ac 4.3 m (14 ft)
power cord
9183 200-240 V ac Locking power
cord

Power load calculating for 7188 or 9188 power distribution units

Learn how to calculate the power load for power distribution units.

Rack-mounted 7188 or 9188 power distribution unit

This topic provides the power loading requirements and proper loading sequence for the 7188 or 9188
power distribution unit.

The IBM 7188 or 9188 rack-mounted power distribution unit (PDU) contains 12 IEC 320-C13 outlets
connected to six 20 A circuit breakers (two outlets per circuit breaker). The PDU employs an inlet current
that allows a variety of power cord options that are listed in the following chart. Based on the power
cord that is used, the PDU can supply from 4.8 kVa to 19.2 kVa.
Table 699. Power cord options
Feature KVa
code Power cord description available
6489 Power cord, PDU to wall, 4.3 m (14 ft), 3-phase, Souriau UTG, IEC 60309 32 A 21.0
3P+N+E plug
6491 Power cord, PDU to wall, 4.3 m (14 ft), 200 - 240 V ac, Souriau UTG, IEC 60309 63 A 9.6
P+N+E plug
6492 Power cord, PDU to wall, 4.3 m (14 ft), 200 - 240 V ac, Souriau UTG, IEC 60309 60 A 9.6
2P+E plug

622 Site and hardware planning

Table 699. Power cord options (continued)
Feature KVa
code Power cord description available
6653 Power cord, PDU to wall, 4.3 m (14 ft), 3-phase, Souriau UTG, IEC 60309 16A 3P+N+E 9.6
plug
6654 Power cord, PDU to wall, 4.3 m (14 ft), 200 - 240 V ac, Souriau UTG, Plug type 12 4.8
plug
6655 Power cord, PDU to wall, 4.3 m (14 ft), 200 - 240 V ac, Souriau UTG, Plug type 40 4.8
plug
6656 Power cord, PDU to wall, 4.3 m (14 ft), 200 - 240 V ac, Souriau UTG, IEC 60309 32 A 4.8
P+N+E plug
6657 Power cord, PDU to wall, 4.3 m (14 ft), 200 - 240 V ac, Souriau UTG, Plug type PDL 4.8
plug
6658 Power cord, PDU to wall, 4.3 m (14 ft), 200 - 240 V ac, Souriau UTG, Plug type KP 4.8
plug

Loading requirements

The power loading of the 7188 or 9188 PDU must follow these rules:
1. Total power load connected to the PDU must be limited to below the kVa listed in the table.
2. Total power load connected to any one circuit breaker must be limited to 16 A (derating of circuit
breaker).
3. Total power load connected to any one IEC320-C13 outlet must be limited to 10 A.

Note: The load on the PDU when a dual line configuration is used will only be half the total load of the
system. When calculating the power load on the PDU, you must include the total power load of each
drawer even if the load is distributed over two PDUs.

Loading sequence

Follow these loading sequence steps:

1. Collect power requirements for all units that will be connected to the 7188 or 9188 PDU. See your
server specifications for specific power requirements.
2. Sort list by total power required from highest power draw to lowest power draw.
3. Connect highest power drawer to outlet 1 on circuit breaker 1.
4. Connect next highest power drawer to outlet 3 on circuit breaker 2.
5. Connect next highest power drawer to outlet 5 on circuit breaker 3.
6. Connect next highest power drawer to outlet 7 on circuit breaker 4.
7. Connect next highest power drawer to outlet 9 on circuit breaker 5.
8. Connect next highest power drawer to outlet 11 on circuit breaker 6.
9. Connect next highest power drawer to outlet 12 on circuit breaker 6.
10. Connect next highest power drawer to outlet 10 on circuit breaker 5.
11. Connect next highest power drawer to outlet 8 on circuit breaker 4.
12. Connect next highest power drawer to outlet 6 on circuit breaker 3.
13. Connect next highest power drawer to outlet 4 on circuit breaker 2.
14. Connect next highest power drawer to outlet 2 on circuit breaker 1.

Chapter 10. Planning for power 623

Following these rules will allow the load to be distributed more evenly across the six PDU circuit
breakers. Ensure that your total power load is below the maximum listed in the table and that each
circuit breaker is not loaded above 15 A.

Power cord 1300 for models 9406-870 and 9406-890

This option is the 3-phase, 200-240 V ac, 60 A, 1.8 m (6 ft) power cord with part number 04N1868
machine input connector, and a 460R9W plug on the wall side.

Install the IEC 60309 receptacle in a metal-backed box with the green wire ground-connected to the
grounding lug within the box. Ensure continuity between the box and the metallic shielding of the
conduit.

624 Site and hardware planning

Power cord 1301 for models 9406-870 and 9406-890
This option is the 3-phase, 200-240 V ac, 60 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with part number 04N1868
machine input connector, and a 460R9W plug on the wall side.

Install the IEC 60309 receptacle in a metal-backed box with the green wire ground-connected to the
grounding lug within the box. Ensure continuity between the box and the metallic shielding of the
conduit.

Power cord 1302 for models 9406-870 and 9406-890

This option is the 3-phase, 480 V ac, 30 A, 1.8 m (6 ft) power cord with part number 11P0767 machine
input connector, and a 430R5W plug on the wall side.

Install the IEC 60309 receptacle in a metal-backed box with the green wire ground-connected to the
grounding lug within the box. Ensure continuity between the box and the metallic shielding of the
conduit.

Power cord 1303 for models 9406-870 and 9406-890

This option is the 3-phase, 480 V ac, 30 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with part number 11P0767 machine
input connector, and a 430R5W plug on the wall side.

Install the IEC 60309 receptacle in a metal-backed box with the green wire ground-connected to the
grounding lug within the box. Ensure continuity between the box and the metallic shielding of the
conduit.

Chapter 10. Planning for power 625

Power cord 1304 description
This option is the 3-phase, 380-415 V ac, 30 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with part number 11P0918
machine input connector, and no plug on the wall side.

Power cord 1394 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and an IEC60083 plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-570, and 9117-570, 570, 9406-270, and 9406-820
v 5075 PCI expansion unit
v 7104 attached expansion unit
v Model 9406-800 or 9406-810
v Model 9406-825
v 5095 PCI-X expansion unit

Power cord 1395 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and a CCC certified GB 1053 plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-570, and 9117-570,models 9406-270 and 9406-820
v 5075 PCI expansion unit
v 7104 attached expansion unit
v Model 9406-800 or 9406-810
v Model 9406-820
v Model 9406-825
v 5095 PCI-X expansion unit

Power cord 1396 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 15 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C19 machine input
connector and a CCC certified GB 1053 plug

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-830 and SB2
v 9079 I/O unit and 5074 PCI expansion unit
v 5079 1.8M I/O rack
v 5094 PCI-X expansion unit

626 Site and hardware planning

v 5294 1.8M I/O rack
v 8094 1.8M I/O rack

Power cord 1397 description

This option is the 200 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC320-C13 system connector and an
IRAM 2073 wall plug

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9406-270, 9406-800, 9406-810, and 9406-820
v 5075, 5077, 5095, 7104, and 7116 expansion units

Power cord 1398 description

This option is the 100 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC320-C13 system connector and
iNMETRO NBR 6147 wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9406-270, 9406-800, 9406-810, and 9406-820
v 5075, 5095, 7104, and 7116 expansion units

Power cord 1399 description

This option is the 200 V ac, 16 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC320-C19 system connector and
IEC60083 wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-830 and SB2
v 5074 and 5094 expansion units

Power cord 1401 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC320-C19 machine input connector
and a NEMA 6-20P plug on the wall side for the 5065 and 5066 (two cords needed).

Power cord 1406 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 16 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) twist lock/locking power cord with an IEC320-C1
machine input connector and L6-15 wall plug

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-830 and SB2
v The 5065, 5066 (two cords needed), 5074 PCI expansion unit, and 5079 (two cords needed) the 1.8M
I/O rack
v The 9079 Base I/O Tower in Argentina and Cape Verde Islands only, but worldwide for just the 5065,
5066 (two cords needed).
v 5094 PCI-X expansion unit
v 5294 1.8M I/O rack
v 8094 1.8M I/O rack

Power cord 1407 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 16 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) water-resistant power cord with an IEC320-C19
machine input connector and water-resistant wall plug for just the 5065 and 5066 (two cords needed).

Power cord 1408 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 16 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C19 machine input
connector and a CEI16 plug.

Chapter 10. Planning for power 627

This option is used on the following:
v 5079 1.8M I/O rack
v 5094 PCI-X expansion unit
v 5294 1.8M I/O rack
v 8094 1.8M I/O rack
v 9079 I/O unit and 5074 PCI expansion unit
v Model 8234-EMA
v 8261-E4S
v Models 9406-830 and SB2

Power cord 1409 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 15 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C19 machine input
connector and an AS3112 plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-830 and SB2
v 9079 I/O unit and 5074 PCI expansion unit
v 5079 1.8M I/O rack
v 5094 PCI-X expansion unit
v 5294 1.8M I/O rack
v 8094 1.8M I/O rack

Power cord 1410 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 12 A, 1.8 m (6 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and NEMA 6-15P wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9406-270 and 9406-820
v 5075 PCI expansion unit
v 7104 attached expansion unit
v Model 9406-800 or 9406-810
v Model 9406-825
v 5095 PCI-X expansion unit

Power cord 1411 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 12 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and NEMA 6-15P wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-270, 9406-810, 9406-820, and 9406-825
v 5075 PCI expansion unit, 5077 migration tower, and 5095 PCI-X expansion unit
v 7104 system unit expansion sidecar

Power cord 1412 description

This option is the 100-127 V ac, 12 A, 1.8 m (6 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and NEMA 5-15P wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9406-270 and 9406-820
v 5075 PCI expansion unit

628 Site and hardware planning

v 7104 attached expansion unit
v Model 9406-800 or 9406-810
v Model 9406-825
v 5095 PCI-X expansion unit

Power cord 1414 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 12 A, 1.8 m (6 ft) power cord with a twist-lock and an IEC 320-C13
machine input connector.

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9406-270 and 9406-820
v 5075 PCI expansion unit
v 7104 attached expansion unit
v Model 9406-800 or 9406-810
v Model 9406-825
v 5095 PCI-X expansion unit

Power cord 1415 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 12 A, 1.8 m (6 ft) water-resistant power cord with an IEC320-C13 machine
input connector.

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9406-270 and 9406-820
v 5075 PCI expansion unit
v 7104 attached expansion unit
v Model 9406-800 or 9406-810
v Model 9406-825
v 5095 PCI-X expansion unit

Power cord 1418 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 16 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC320-C19 machine input
connector and SABS164 wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-830 and SB2
v 5074 PCI expansion unit
v 5079 1.8M I/O rack
v 9079 I/O unit
v 5094 PCI-X expansion unit
v 5294 1.8M I/O rack
v 8094 1.8M I/O rack

Power cord 1419 description

This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 16 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC320-C19 machine input
connector and SII-32 plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-830 and SB2
v 5074 PCI expansion unit
v 5079 1.8M I/O rack

Chapter 10. Planning for power 629

v 9079 I/O unit
v 5094 PCI-X expansion unit
v 5294 1.8M I/O rack
v 8094 1.8M I/O rack

Power cord 1420 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 16 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC320-C19 machine input
connector and Schuko plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 5074 PCI expansion unit
v 5079 1.8M I/O rack
v 9079 I/O unit
v 5094 PCI-X expansion unit
v 5294 1.8M I/O rack
v 8094 1.8M I/O rack

Power cord 1421 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 16 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC320-C19 machine input
connector and IEC 60309 plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-830 and SB2
v 5074 PCI expansion unit
v 5079 1.8M I/O rack
v 9079 I/O unit
v 5094 PCI-X expansion unit
v 5294 1.8M I/O rack
v 8094 1.8M I/O rack

Power cord 1422 description

This option is the 100-240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC320-C13 that connects to
IEC320-C14, and requires 5160, 5161, or 5162.

Power cord 1426 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 24 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) locking power cord with a NEMA L6-30P wall plug
and L6-30R machine input connector for the models 9406-840, SB3, and 0550 and 0551.

Power cord 1427 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 4.3 m (14 ft) water-resistant power cord with a RS 3570 wall plug and a
L6-30R machine input connector for models 9406-840, SB3, and 0550 and 0551.

Power cord 1438 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 30 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and an AS3112 plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9406-270 and 9406-820
v 5075 PCI expansion unit
v 7104 attached expansion unit
v Model 9406-800 or 9406-810

630 Site and hardware planning

v Model 9406-825
v 5095 PCI-X expansion unit

Power cord 1439 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and Schuko plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9406-270 and 9406-820
v 5075 PCI expansion unit
v 7104 attached expansion unit
v Model 9406-800 or 9406-810
v Model 9406-825
v 5095 PCI-X expansion unit

Power cord 1440 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and a Denmark wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9406-270 and 9406-820
v 5075 PCI expansion unit
v 7104 attached expansion unit
v Model 9406-800 or 9406-810
v Model 9406-825
v 5095 PCI-X expansion unit

Power cord 1441 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and an SABS164 plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9406-270 and 9406-820
v 5075 PCI expansion unit
v 7104 attached expansion unit
v Model 9406-800 or 9406-810
v Model 9406-825
v 5095 PCI-X expansion unit

Power cord 1442 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord.

This option is used on the following:

v Model 9406-520
v Model 9111-520
v Model 9406-570
v Model 9117-570
v 9406-270
v 9406-820
v 7104 expansion unit

Chapter 10. Planning for power 631

v 5077 migrated rack

Power cord 1443 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and a BS 1363 A plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9406-270 and 9406-820
v 5075 PCI expansion
v 7104 attached expansion unit
v Model 9406-800 or 9406-810
v Model 9406-825
v 5095 PCI-X expansion unit

Power cord 1444 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and a CEI23-16 plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9406-270 and 9406-820
v 5075 PCI expansion unit
v 7104 attached expansion unit
v Model 9406-800 or 9406-810
v Model 9406-825
v 5095 PCI-X expansion unit

Power cord 1445 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and an SII-32 plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-570, 9117-570, 9406-270 and 9406-820
v 5075 PCI expansion unit
v 7104 attached expansion unit
v Model 9406-800 or 9406-810
v Model 9406-825
v 5095 PCI-X expansion unit

Power cord 1446 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 30 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 60309 machine input
connector and 32 A Korean plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Model 9406-840
v Model SB3

Power cord 1447 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 30 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 60309 machine input
connector and 32 A Australian plug.

This option is used on the following:

632 Site and hardware planning

v Model 9406-840
v Model SB3

Power cord 1448 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 30 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 60309 machine input
connector and 32 A New Zealand plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Model 9406-840
v Model SB3

Power cord 1449 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 32 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 60309 machine input
connector and 3-pin, IEC 60309 plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Model 9406-840
v Model SB3

Power cord 1450 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 16 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 60309 machine input
connector and 5-pin, IEC 60309 plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Model 9406-840
v Model SB3

Power cord 1451 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 12 A, 1.8 m (6 ft) power cord with an IEC320-C19 machine input
connector and NEMA 6-15P plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-830 and SB2
v 5074 PCI expansion unit
v 5079 1.8M I/O rack
v 9079 I/O unit
v 5094 PCI-X expansion unit
v 5294 1.8M I/O rack
v 8094 1.8M I/O rack
v 5096
v 5296

Power cord 1452 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 12 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC320-C19 machine input
connector and NEMA 6-15P plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-830 and SB2
v 5074 PCI expansion unit
v 5079 1.8M I/O rack
v 9079 I/O unit

Chapter 10. Planning for power 633

v 5094 PCI-X expansion unit
v 5294 1.8M I/O rack
v 5096
v 5296

Power cord 1453 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 12 A, 1.8 m (6 ft) power cord with an IEC320-C19 machine input
connector and a NEMA L6-15P twist-lock plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-830 and SB2
v 5074 PCI expansion unit
v 5079 1.8M I/O rack
v 9079 I/O unit
v 5094 PCI-X expansion unit
v 5294 1.8M I/O rack
v 8094 1.8M I/O rack
v 5096
v 5296

Power cord 1454 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 12 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC320-C19 machine input
connector and NEMA L6-15P twist-lock plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-830 and SB2
v 5074 PCI expansion unit
v 5079 1.8M I/O rack
v 9079 I/O unit
v 5094 PCI-X expansion unit
v 5294 1.8M I/O rack
v 8094 1.8M I/O rack
v 5096
v 5296

Power cord 1455 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 12 A, 1.8 m (6 ft) power cord with an IEC320-C19 machine input
connector and water-resistant plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-830 and SB2
v 5074 PCI expansion unit
v 5079 1.8M I/O rack
v 9079 I/O unit
v 5094 PCI-X expansion unit
v 5294 1.8M I/O rack
v 8094 1.8M I/O rack
v 5096
v 5296

634 Site and hardware planning

Power cord 1456 description
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 12 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC320-C19 machine input
connector and water-resistant plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-830 and SB2
v 5074 PCI expansion unit
v 5079 1.8M I/O rack
v 9079 I/O unit
v 5094 PCI-X expansion unit
v 5294 1.8M I/O rack
v 8094 1.8M I/O rack
v 5096
v 5296

Power cord 1457 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 12 A, 2.7 m (9 ft) upper power cord with an IEC320-C19 machine input
connector and NEMA 6-15P plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 5079 1.8M I/O rack
v 8094 1.8M I/O rack
v 5096
v 5296

Power cord 1458 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 12 A, 2.7 m (9 ft) upper power cord with an IEC320-C19 machine input
connector and NEMA 6-15P twist-lock plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 5079 1.8M I/O rack
v 8094 1.8M I/O rack
v 5096
v 5296

Power cord 1459 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 12 A, 2.7 m (9 ft) upper power cord with an IEC320-C19 machine input
connector and a water-resistant plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 5079 1.8M I/O rack
v 8094 1.8M I/O rack
v 5096
v 5296

Power cord 1476 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 13 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC320-C19 machine input
connector and BS 1363 A non-locking plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-830 and SB2

Chapter 10. Planning for power 635

v 5074 PCI expansion unit
v 5079 1.8M I/O rack
v 9079 I/O unit
v 5094 PCI-X expansion unit
v 5294 1.8M I/O rack
v 8094 1.8M I/O rack

Power cord 1477 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 16 A per phase, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 60309R machine
input connector that connects the 5163 PDU to the wall power source.

Power cord 2960 description

This option specifies all power cords for the ordered system unit to be low voltage (100-127 V ac).

The following conditions apply to the use of this option.

v The 2960 option affects the power cord for models 200, 20S, and 4xx System Units; the 3xx, 5xx, 600,
and S10 System Towers; and the 5060, 5061, 5062, 5063, 5070, 5072, 5080, and 5082 expansion units.
v This voltage feature is not used by models 620, 640, 650, 7xx, and 9406-8xx; models S20, S30, S40, SB1,
SB2, and SB3; the 5071, 5073, 5074, 5079, 5065, 5066, 5075, 5081, 5083, and Expansion Units; and the
5033, 5034, 5035, and 5077 Migration Units.
v You can add the specification codes 9080, 9082, and 9083 in addition to 2960 to specify other attributes
of the line-cord such as length and plug type.
v You must specify the I/O side of 530 and 53S system towers separately, using either 2960 or 2961.
v 2961 is not allowed on the same power cord as 2960.

Power cord 2961 description

This option specifies all power cords for the ordered system unit to be high voltage (200-240 V ac).

The following conditions apply to the use of this option.

v The 2961 option affects the power cord for models 200, 20S, and 4xx System Units; models 3xx, 5xx,
600, and S10 System Towers; and the 5060, 5061, 5062, 5063, 5070, 5072, 5080, and 5082 expansion units.
v This voltage feature is not used by models 620, 640, 650, 7xx, and 9406-8xx; models S20, S30, S40, SB1,
SB2, and SB3; the 5071, 5073, 5074, 5079, 5065, 5066, 5075, 5081, 5083, and Expansion Units; and the
5033, 5034, 5035, and 5077 Migration Units.
v You can add the specification codes 9080, 9082, and 9083 in addition to 2961 to specify other attributes
of the line-cord such as length and plug type.
v You must specify the I/O side of 530 and 53S system towers separately, using 2960 or 2961.
v 2960 is not allowed on the same power cord as 2961.

Power cord 4961 description

This option specifies that the power cord for the processor side of model 53x System Tower is 30 A and
200-240 V ac.

The following conditions apply to the use of this option.

v Models 640, 650, 9406-730, 9406-740, and 9406-840 and models S30, S40, SB1, and SB3 do not use this
power cord.
v 4961 does not affect other power cords of the system.
v There is no 120 Volt option on the processor side of the 53x System Tower; models 640, 650, 9406-730,
9406-740, and 9406-840; or models S30, S40, SB1, and SB3.
v You can add the specification codes 9180, 9182, and 9183 in addition to 4961 to specify other attributes
of the power cord such as length and plug type for the processor side.

636 Site and hardware planning

Power cord 5102 description
This option is for a dual power cord.

This option is for a model 9406-820. Two 14xx power cords must be ordered for each 5102 on a model
9406-820 initial order.

Power cord 5103 description

This option is for a dual power cord.

This option is for a model 9406-830 or SB2. Two 14xx power cords must be ordered for each 5103 on a
model 9406-830 or SB2 initial order.

Power cord 5104 description

This option is the dual power cord.

This option is for a model 9406-840 or SB3. Two 14xx power cords must be ordered for each 5104 on a
model 9406-840 or SB3 initial order.

Power cord 5105 description

This option is the dual power cord.

This option is for a 5074 expansion unit and for the top unit in a 8079 expansion unit.
v Two 14xx power cords must be ordered for each 0574 expansion unit with a 5101 when a 5101 is
ordered on a 5074 initial order. Batteries are not included and two 840 W power supplies are included.
v When ordering a 5105 for an existing 5074 expansion unit, one additional 14xx power cord must be
ordered. The batteries are removed and the 765 W power supplies are replaced with two 840 W power
supplies. A 5074 expansion unit installed in a 0551 rack is supported with this feature.

Note: If the 5074 expansion unit has 5101 installed, 5105 must be converted to 5111 (no parts included).

Power cord 5106 description

This option is for a dual power cord.

This option provides dual power cord capability for a single unit in a 5079 expansion unit.
v Two 14xx power cords must be ordered for each 5106 when a 5106 is ordered on a 5079 initial order.
Batteries are not included and two 840 W power supplies are included.
v When ordering a 5106 for an existing 5079 expansion unit, one additional 14xx power cord must be
ordered. The batteries are removed and the 765 W power supplies are replaced with two 840 W power
supplies.

The configurator will default a quantity of two 5106s for each 5079 expnsion unit on a server that has
dual power cords.

Power cord 6451 description

This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and IS 6538 wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 5786 expansion unit
v 5787 expansion unit
v 7031-D24 expansion unit
v 7031-T24 expansion unit

Chapter 10. Planning for power 637

Power cord 6452 description
This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and GB 1053 (CCC Cert) wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 5786 expansion unit
v 5787 expansion unit
v 7031-D24 expansion unit
v 7031-T24 expansion unit

Power cord 6453 description

This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and IRAM 2073 wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 7311-D10
v 7311-D11

Power cord 6454 description

This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 16 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and KSC 8305 wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 5786 expansion unit
v 5787 expansion unit
v 7031-D24 expansion unit
v 7031-T24 expansion unit

Power cord 6455 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 15 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC320-C13 machine input
connector.

This option is used on the following:

v 7311-D11
v 5786 expansion unit
v 5787 expansion unit
v 7031-D24 expansion unit
v 7031-T24 expansion unit

Power cord 6456 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 12 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC320-C13 machine input
connector.

This option is used on the following:

v 7311-D11

Power cord 6458 description

This option is the 100-240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and an IEC 320-C14 plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 5095 PCI-X expansion unit

638 Site and hardware planning

v 5802
v 5886
v 7037-A50
v 7047-185
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 8204-E8A
v 8234-EMA
v 8261-E4S
v 9111-285
v 9111-520
v 9115-505
v 9116-561
v 9113-550
v 9117-MMA
v 9117-570
v 9131-52A
v 9133-55A
v 9406-MMA
v 9406-520
v 9406-550
v 9406-570
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

Power cord 6459 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 10 A, 3.66 m (12 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and an IEC 320-14 plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 5790,
v 7311-D10, 7311-D11
v 8234-EMA
v 8261-E4S

Power cord 6460 description

This option is the 120-127 V ac, 12 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and an NEMA 5-15 plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 5786
v 5787
v 5886
v 7031-D24
v 7031-T24
v 7037-A50

Chapter 10. Planning for power 639

v 7047-185
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 8234-EMA
v 8204-E8A
v 8261-E4S
v 9111-285
v 9115-505
v 9111-520
v 9113-550
v 9131-52A
v 9133-55A
v 9406-520
v 9406-525
v 9406-550
v 9407-515
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

Power cord 6461 description

This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and CEE 7 VII wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 5786 expansion unit
v 5787 expansion unit
v 7031-D24 expansion unit
v 7031-T24 expansion unit

Power cord 6462 description

This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and DK2-5e wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 5786 expansion unit
v 5787 expansion unit
v 7031-D24 expansion unit
v 7031-T24 expansion unit

Power cord 6463 description

This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and BS1364A wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 5786 expansion unit
v 5787 expansion unit
v 7031-D24 expansion unit
v 7031-T24 expansion unit

640 Site and hardware planning

Power cord 6464 description
This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and SII 32-1971 wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 5786 expansion unit
v 5787 expansion unit
v 7031-D24 expansion unit
v 7031-T24 expansion unit

Power cord 6465 description

This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and SEV 24507 wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 5786 expansion unit
v 5787 expansion unit
v 7031-D24 expansion unit
v 7031-T24 expansion unit

Power cord 6466 description

This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and SABS 1661 wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 7311-D10
v 7311-D11
v 5790

Power cord 6467 description

This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and CEI23-16 wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 7311-D10
v 7311-D11
v 5790

Power cord 6468 description

This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and AS3112-1964, NZS 198 wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 7311-D10, 7311-D11

Power cord 6469 description

This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 12 A (15 A derated), 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13
machine input connector.

This option is used on the following:

v 5786 expansion unit
v 5787 expansion unit

Chapter 10. Planning for power 641

v 5796
v 5886
v 7031-D24 expansion unit
v 7031-T24 expansion unit
v 7037-A50
v 7047-185
v 7214-1U2
v 7314-G30
v 8203-E4A
v 8204-E8A
v 8234-EMA
v 8261-E4S
v 9111-285
v 9111-520
v 9113-550
v 9115-505
v 9116-561
v 9117-MMA
v 9117-570
v 9131-52A
v 9133-55A
v 9406-MMA
v 9406-525
v 9407-M15
v 9407-515
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

Power cord 6470 description

This option is the 100-127 V ac, 12 A, 1.8 m (6 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and NEMA 5-15 wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, and 9113-550
v 5095 PCI-X expansion unit
v 5786 expansion unit
v 5787 expansion unit
v 7031-D24 expansion unit
v 7031-T24 expansion unit
v 8203-E4A
v 8204-E8A
v 8261-E4S
v 9115-505
v 9111-285
v 9131-52A
v 9133-55A

642 Site and hardware planning

v 7037-A50
v 7047-185
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

Power cord 6471 description

This option is the 100-127 V ac, 15 A, 2.7 m (9 ft) power cord with an IEC320-C13 system connector and
an iNMETRO NBR 6147 non-locking wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 5786 expansion unit
v 5787 expansion unit
v 5886
v 7031-D24 expansion unit
v 7031-T24 expansion unit
v 7037-A50
v 7047-185
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 8204-E8A
v 8234-EMA
v 8261-E4S
v 9111-285
v 9111-520
v 9113-550
v 9115-505
v 9117-570
v 9131-52A
v 9133-55A
v 9406-520
v 9406-550
v 9406-570
v 9406-525
v 9407-M15
v 9407-515
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

Power cord 6472 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 10 A, 2.7 m (9 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and Schuko plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 9406-5209117-570

Chapter 10. Planning for power 643

v 9113-550
v 9111-520
v 9406-550
v 9406-570
v 5786 expansion unit
v 5787 expansion unit
v 7031-D24 expansion unit
v 7031-T24 expansion unit
v 8261-E4S
v 9115-505
v 9111-285
v 9131-52A
v 9133-55A
v 7037-A50
v 7047-185
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 8234-EMA
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

Power cord 6473 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 10 A, 2.7 m (9 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and a CEE wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 9406-520
v 9111-520
v 9406-550
v 9113-550
v 9406-570
v 9117-570
v 5786 expansion unit
v 5787 expansion unit
v 7031-D24 expansion unit
v 7031-T24 expansion unit
v 8261-E4S

644 Site and hardware planning

v 9115-505
v 9111-285
v 9131-52A
v 9133-55A
v 7037-A50
v 7047-185
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 8234-EMA
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

Power cord 6474 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 10 A, 2.7 m (9 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and a BS 1364 A plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 9406-520
v 9111-520
v 9406-550
v 9113-550
v 9406-570
v 9117-570
v 5786 expansion unit
v 5787 expansion unit
v 7031-D24 expansion unit
v 7031-T24 expansion unit
v 8261-E4S
v 9115-505
v 9111-285
v 9131-52A
v 9133-55A
v 7037-A50
v 7047-185
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9117-MMA

Chapter 10. Planning for power 645

v 9406-MMA
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 8234-EMA
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

Power cord 6475 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 10 A, 2.7 m (9 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and an SII-32 plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 9406-520
v 9111-520
v 9406-550
v 9113-550
v 9406-570
v 9117-570
v 5786 expansion unit
v 5787 expansion unit
v 7031-D24 expansion unit
v 7031-T24 expansion unit
v 9115-505
v 9111-285
v 9131-52A
v 9133-55A
v 7037-A50
v 7047-185
v 8261-E4S
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 8234-EMA
v 9407-M15

646 Site and hardware planning

v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

Power cord 6476 description

This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 2.7 m (9 ft) power cord with an IEC 320–C13 machine input
connector and an SEV24507 wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 9406-520
v 9111-520
v 9406-550,
v 9113-550
v 9406-570,
v 9117-570
v 5786 expansion unit
v 5787 expansion unit
v 7031-D24 expansion unit
v 7031-T24 expansion unit
v 9115-505
v 9111-285
v 9131-52A
v 9133-55A
v 7037-A50
v 7047-185
v 8261-E4S
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 8234-EMA
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

Power cord 6477 description

This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 2.7 m (9 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and an SABS164 plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-520
v 9111-520

Chapter 10. Planning for power 647

v 9406-550
v 9113-550
v 9406-570
v 9117-570
v 5095 PCI-X expansion unit
v 5786 expansion unit
v 5787 expansion unit
v 7031-D24 expansion unit
v 7031-T24 expansion unit
v 8261-E4S
v 9115-505
v 9111-285
v 9131-52A
v 9133-55A
v 7037-A50
v 7047-185
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 8234-EMA
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

Power cord 6478 description

This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 2.7 m (9 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and a CEI23-16 plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 9406-520
v 9111-520
v 9406-550
v 9113-550
v 9406-570
v 9117-570
v 5095 PCI-X expansion unit
v 5786 expansion unit
v 5787 expansion unit
v 7031-D24 expansion unit

648 Site and hardware planning

v 7031-T24 expansion unit
v 9115-505
v 9111-285
v 9131-52A
v 9133-55A
v 7037-A50
v 7047-185
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 8234-EMA
v 8261-E4S
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

Power cord 6479 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 10 A, 2.7 m (9 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and an AS3112 plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, and 9117-570
v 5095 PCI-X expansion unit when ordered with IBM System i5 and System p5
v 5786 expansion unit
v 5787 expansion unit
v 7031-D24 expansion unit
v 7031-T24 expansion unit
v 9115-505
v 9111-285
v 7037-A50
v 7047-185
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9406-525
v 9407-515

Power cord 6487 description

This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 12 A, 1.8 m (6 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and NEMA 6-15 wall plug.

Chapter 10. Planning for power 649

This option is used on the following:
v 9406-520
v 9111-520
v 9406-550
v 9113-550
v 9406-570
v 9117-570
v 5095 PCI-X expansion unit
v 5786 expansion unit
v 5787 expansion unit
v 7031-D24 expansion unit
v 7031-T24 expansion unit
v 9115-505
v 9111-285
v 9131-52A
v 9133-55A
v 7037-A50
v 7047-185
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 8204-E8A
v 8203-E4A
v 8234-EMA
v 8261-E4S
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

Power cord 6488 description

This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 2.7 m (9 ft) power cord with an IEC320-C13 system connector and
an IRAM 2079 wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 9406-520
v 9111-520
v 9406-550
v 9113-550
v 9406-570
v 9117-570
v 5095 PCI-X expansion unit when ordered with IBM System i5 and System p5
v 5786 expansion unit
v 5787 expansion unit

650 Site and hardware planning

v 7031-D24 expansion unit
v 7031-T24 expansion unit
v 9115-505
v 9111-285
v 9131-52A
v 9133-55A
v 7037-A50
v 7047-185
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 8261-E4S
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 8234-EMA
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

Power cord 6489 description

This option is the 380 - 415 V ac, 24 A, 3-phase, 24 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with a Souriau UTG (32A)
system connector and an IEC 60309 (32 A, 3P+N+E) non-locking wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v FC 7188
v 8234-EMA
v 8261-E4S
v FC 9188

Power cord 6491 description

This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 63 A, 1-phase, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with a Souriau UTG system
connector and an IEC 60309 (63 A, P+N+E) non-locking wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v FC 7188
v Model 8234-EMA
v 8261-E4S
Chapter 10. Planning for power 651
v FC 9188

Power cord 6492 description

This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 48 A, 1-phase, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with a Souriau UTG system
connector and an IEC309 (63A, 2P+G) locking wall plug. The wall plug is a 363P6W and is compatible
with a 360R6W receptacle or a 360C6W connector.

This option is used on the following:

v FC 7188
v Model 8234-EMA
v 8261-E4S
v FC 9188

Power cord 6493 description

This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 2.7 m (9 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and a GB 53 plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-520
v 9111-520
v 9406-550
v 9113-550
v 9406-570
v 9117-570
v 5095 PCI-X expansion unit
v 5786 expansion unit
v 5787 expansion unit
v 7031-D24 expansion unit
v 7031-T24 expansion unit
v 9115-505
v 9131-52A
v 9133-55A
v 7037-A50
v 7047-185
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796

652 Site and hardware planning

v 8261-E4S
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 8234-EMA
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

Power cord 6494 description

This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 2.7 m (9 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and a IS 6538 plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 9406-520
v 9111-520
v 9406-550
v 9113-550
v 9406-570
v 9117-570
v 5095 PCI-X expansion unit
v 5786 expansion unit
v 5787 expansion unit
v 7031-D24 expansion unit
v 7031-T24 expansion unit
v 9115-505
v 9111-285
v 9131-52A
v 9133-55A
v 7037-A50
v 7047-185
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 8261-E4S
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2

Chapter 10. Planning for power 653

v 8203-E4A
v 8234-EMA
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

Power cord 6495 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 10 A, 2.7 m (9 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and an IEC 60083-AS plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, and 9117-570
v 5095 PCI-X expansion unit
v 5786 expansion unit
v 5787 expansion unit
v 7031-D24 expansion unit
v 7031-T24 expansion unit
v 9115-505
v 9111-285
v 9131-52A
v 9133-55A
v 7037-A50
v 7047-185
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

Power cord 6496 description

This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 2.7 m (9 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector with a KETI wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 9406-520
v 9111-520
v 9406-550
v 9113-550
v 9406-570

654 Site and hardware planning

v 9117-570
v 5095 PCI-X expansion unit
v 5786 expansion unit
v 5787 expansion unit
v 7031-D24 expansion unit
v 7031-T24 expansion unit
v 9115-505
v 9111-285
v 9131-52A
v 9133-55A
v 7037-A50
v 7047-185
v 8261-E4S
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 8234-EMA
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

Power cord 6497 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 12 A, 1.8 m (6 ft) power cord with a twist-lock and an IEC 320-C13
machine input connector and a NEMA L6-15 locking wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, and 9117-570
v 5095 PCI-X expansion unit
v 5786 expansion unit
v 5787 expansion unit
v 7031-D24 expansion unit
v 7031-T24 expansion unit
v 9111-285
v 9131-52A
v 9133-55A
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA

Chapter 10. Planning for power 655

v 9406-525
v 9407-515

Power cord 6498 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 12 A, 1.8 m (6 ft) water-resistant power cord with an IEC320-C13 machine
input connector and RS37204-2 water-resistant plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Models 9406-520, 9111-520, 9406-550, 9113-550, 9406-570, and 9117-570
v 5095 PCI-X expansion unit
v 5786 expansion unit
v 5787 expansion unit
v 7031-D24 expansion unit
v 7031-T24 expansion unit
v 9406-525
v 9407-515

Power cord 6499 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 15 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) non-locking power cord with an IEC320-C19 machine
input connector.

This option is used on the following:

v 7311-D10, 7311-D11
v 5786 expansion unit
v 5787 expansion unit
v 7031-D24 expansion unit
v 7031-T24 expansion unit

Power cord 6651 description

This option is the 100 - 127 V ac, 10 A, 2.7 m (9 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and NEMA 5-15P wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 9113-550
v 9406-520
v 9406-550
v 9115-505
v 9111-285
v 9131-52A
v 9133-55A
v 7037-A50
v 7047-185
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 8234-EMA

656 Site and hardware planning

v 8261-E4S
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

Power cord 6653 description

This option is the 380 - 415 V ac, 16 A, 3-phase, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with a Souriau UTG system
connector and an IEC 60309 (16 A, 3P+N+E) non-locking wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 8234-EMA
v 8261-E4S

Power cord 6654 description

This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 24 A, 1-phase, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with a Souriau UTG system
connector and a NEMA L6-30P locking wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 8234-EMA
v 8261-E4S

Power cord 6655 description

This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 24 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with a Souriau UTG system connector
and a water-resistant wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 8234-EMA
v 8261-E4S

Power cord 6656 description

This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 32 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with a Souriau UTG system connector
and an IEC 60309 (32 A, P+N+E) non-locking wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 8234-EMA
v 8261-E4S

Power cord 6657 description

This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 24 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with a Souriau UTG system connector
and a plug type PDL non-locking wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 8234-EMA
v 8261-E4S

Power cord 6658 description

This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 24 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with a Souriau UTG system connector
and a plug type KP non-locking wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 8234-EMA
v 8261-E4S

Chapter 10. Planning for power 657

Power cord 6659 description
This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 2.7 m (9 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and NEMA 6-15P wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 8261-E4S
v 9110-510
v 9111-520
v 9113-550
v 9115-505
v 9117-570
v 9406-520
v 9406-550
v 9406-570
v 9406-270
v 9406-800
v 9406-810
v 9406-820
v 9406-825
v OpenPower 705
v OpenPower 710
v OpenPower 720
v 7031-D24
v 7031-T24
v 7311-D20
v 5095
v 5786
v 5787
v 7310-CR3
v 9114-275
v 9114-285
v 7028-6C1/6E1
v 9112-265
v 7029-6C3/6E3
v 7025-6F0/6F1
v 7028-6C4
v 7028-6E4
v 7026-B80
v 7038-6M2
v 5075
v 5077
v 5095
v 7104
v 7116
v 9115-505
v 9111-285
658 Site and hardware planning
v 9131-52A
v 9133-55A
v 7037-A50
v 7047-185
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 8234-EMA
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

Power cord 6660 description

This option is the 120-127 V ac, 15 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and an NEMA 5-15 plug.

This option is used on the following:

v OpenPower 720
v 5786 expansion unit
v 5787 expansion unit
v 7031-D24 expansion unit
v 7031-T24 expansion unit
v 9115-505
v 9111-285
v 9131-52A
v 9133-55A
v 7037-A50
v 7047-185
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 8261-E4S
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

Power cord 6663 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 right-angle machine
input connector.

Chapter 10. Planning for power 659

This option is use on the following:
v 7311-D11, 7311-D10, 5790 expansion units

Power cord 6665 description

This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A single phase cord with an IEC320/C13 and an IEC320/C20 plug
type.

This option is used on the following:

v 8234-EMA
v 8261-E4S

Power cord 6669 description

This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 12 A (15 A derated), 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13
machine input connector.

This option is used on the following:

v OpenPower 720
v 9115-505
v 9111-285
v 9131-52A
v 9133-55A
v 7037-A50
v 7047-185
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 8234-EMA
v 8261-E4S
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

Power cord 6670 description

This option is the 100-127 V ac, 15 A, 1.8 m (6 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and NEMA 5-15 wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v OpenPower 720
v 5786 expansion unit
v 5787 expansion unit
v 7031-D24 expansion unit
v 7031-T24 expansion unit
v 9115-505
v 9111-285

660 Site and hardware planning

v 9131-52A
v 9133-55A
v 7037-A50
v 7047-185
v 8204-E8A
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

Power cord 6671 description

This option is the 100 - 240 V ac, 10 A (HV), 12 A (LV), 2.7 m (9 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13
machine input connector and IEC 320-C14 wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 7014-S25 rack
v 0555 rack
v 9131-52A
v 9133-55A
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 8234-EMA
v 8261-E4S
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

Power cord 6672 description

This option is the 100 - 240 V ac, 10 A (HV), 12 A (LV), 1.5 m (5 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13
machine input connector and IEC 320-C14 wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 7014-S11 rack
v 7014-S25 rack
v 0554 rack
v 0555 rack
v 9131-52A
v 9133-55A
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 8204-E8A
v 5886

Chapter 10. Planning for power 661

v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 8234-EMA
v 8261-E4S
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

Power cord 6673 description

This option is the 100 - 240 V ac, 10 A 1 m (3.2 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and IEC 320-C14 wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 9110-51A
v 9111-520
v 9113-550
v 9115-505
v 9110-510
v 9117-570
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 9131-52A
v 9133-55A
v 9405-520
v 9406-520
v 9406-550
v 9406-570
v 0555 rack

Power cord 6680 description

This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 2.7m (9 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and AS3112-1964 and NZS 198 wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 9110-510
v 9111-520
v 9113-550
v 9115-505
v 9117-570
v 9406-520
v 9406-550
v 9406-570
v 5786
v 5787
v 0595
v 7310-CR3
v 7310-C04

662 Site and hardware planning

v 5786 expansion unit
v 5787 expansion unit
v 7031-D24 expansion unit
v 7031-T24 expansion unit
v 9111-285
v 9131-52A
v 9133-55A
v 7037-A50
v 7047-185
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796
v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 9406-525
v 9407-515
v 8204-E8A
v 5886
v 7214-1U2
v 8203-E4A
v 8234-EMA
v 8261-E4S
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

Power cord 6681 description

This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and AS3112-1964 and NZS 198 wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v 7311-D10
v 7311-D11

Power cord 6687 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 15 A, 1.8 m (6 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and NEMA 6-15 wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v OpenPower 720
v 9115-505
v 9111-285
v 9131-52A
v 9133-55A
v 7037-A50
v 7047-185
v 9116-561
v 7314-G30, 5796

Chapter 10. Planning for power 663

v 9117-MMA
v 9406-MMA
v 8204-E8A
v 8203-E4A
v 9407-M15
v 9408-M25
v 9409-M50

Power cord 6690 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 16 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C19 machine input
connector.

This option is used on the following:

v 7311-D10, 7311-D11 expansion units

Power cord 6691 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 15 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 320-C19 machine input
connector and NEMA 6-15P wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Expansion units 5074, 5079, 5094, 5294, 8079, 8093, 8094, 9079, 9094, 9194

Power cord 6692 description

This option is the 250 V ac, 15 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an SAA-AS 3112 wall plug with a C19
system connector.

This option is used on the following:

v 9910-P30 uninterruptible power supply
v 9910-P33 uninterruptible power supply

Power cord 8677 description

This option is for the 380-415 V ac, 30 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord.

This option is used on the following:

v Model 9119-590
v Model 9406-595
v Model 9119-595
v Model 9119-FHA
No wall plug is shipped with this power cord.

Power cord 8686 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 100 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with a IEC 60309 wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Model 9119-590
v Model 9406-595
v Model 9119-595
v Model 9119-FHA

664 Site and hardware planning

Power cord 8687 description
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 100 A, 1.8 m (6 ft) power cord with a IEC 60309 wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Model 9119-590
v Model 9406-595
v Model 9119-595
v Model 9119-FHA

Power cord 8688 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 60 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with a IEC 60309 wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Model 9119-590
v Model 9406-595
v Model 9119-595
v Model 9119-FHA

Power cord 8689 description

This option is the 200-240 V ac, 24 A, 1.8 m (6 ft) power cord with a IEC 60309 wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Model 9119-590
v Model 9406-595
v Model 9119-595
v Model 9119-FHA

Power cord 8694 description

This option is the 380-415 V ac, 60 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord.

This option is used on the following:

v Model 9119-590
v Model 9406-595
v Model 9119-595
v Model 9119-FHA

No wall plug is shipped with this power cord.

Power cord 8697 description

This option is the 480 V ac, 30 A, 4.3 m (14 ft) power cord with an IEC 60309 wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

v Model 9119-590
v Model 9406-595
v Model 9119-595
v Model 9119-FHA

Power cord 8698 description

This option is the 480 V ac, 30 A, 1.8 m (6 ft) power cord with an IEC 60309 wall plug.

This option is used on the following:

Chapter 10. Planning for power 665

v Model 9119-590
v Model 9406-595
v Model 9119-595
v Model 9119-FHA

Power cord 9002 description

This option is specified when a dual power cord is required.

The following conditions apply to this option.

v This specific code is used to determine that the 9406-820 power subsystem is enabled to support dual
power cords.
v The 9002 specific code is added to all model 9406-820 servers regardless of the operating system level
ordered.

Power cord 9080 description

This option is specified when a water resistant power cord is required.

The following conditions apply to this option.

v You can add the specification code 9082, which specifies the length of the power cord.
v 9083 is not allowed on the same power cord as 9080.
v Option 9080 is only available in Canada, Japan, and the United States.

Power cord 9081 description

This option is specified when a locking power cord is required on the processor side of your rack.

This option is specified when a locking power cord is required on the processor side of the 9309 rack.
v The voltage and amperage rating is: 250V 30A.
v The receptacle number is NEMA L6-30R.

Power cord 9082 description

This option is specified when a 14 ft (4.3 m) power cord is required.

The following conditions apply to this option.

v The prerequisite is either 2960 or 2061.
v Option 9082 is only available in Canada, Japan, and the United States.

Power cord 9083 description

This option is specified when a locking power cord is required.

The following conditions apply to this option.

v The prerequisite is either 2960 or 2961.
v You can add specification code 9082 in addition to 9083 to specify length of the power cord.
v 9080 is not allowed on the same power cord as 9083.
v Option 9083 is only available in Canada, Japan, and the United States.

Power cord 9180 description

This option is specified when a water-resistant power cord is required.

This option is specified when a water-resistant power cord is required on the processor side of models
53x, 640, 650, S30, S40, and SB1. The following conditions apply to this option.
v The prerequisite for the processor side of the 53x System is 4961.
v You can add specification code 9182 in addition to 9180 to specify length of the power cord.

666 Site and hardware planning

v 9183 is not allowed on the same power cord as 9180.
v Option 9180 is only available in Canada, Japan, and the United States.

Power cord 9182 description

This option is specified when a 14 ft (4.3 m) power cord is required.

This option is specified when a 14 ft (4.3 m) power cord is required on the processor side of models 53x,
640, 650, S30, S40, and SB1. The following conditions apply to this option.
v The prerequisite for the processor side of the 53x System is 4961.
v You can add specification codes 9180 or 9183 in addition to 9182 to specify other attributes of the
power cord such as length and plug type.

Power cord 9183 description

This option is specified when a locking power cord is required.

This option is specified when a locking power cord is required on the processor side of models 53x, 640,
650, S30, S40, and SB1. The following conditions apply to this option.
v The prerequisite for the processor side of the 53x System is 4961.
v You can add the specification code 9182 in addition to 9183 to specify length of the power cord.
v 9180 is not allowed on the same power cord as 9183.

Modification of IBM-provided power cords

Modification of IBM-provided power cords should only be done in rare circumstances, because the power
cords provided with IBM systems meet stringent design and manufacturing specifications.

IBM encourages the use of an IBM released power cord because of the specifications that must be met for
both the design and manufacture of our IBM power cords. The specifications, the components used in the
design, and the manufacturing process is an external safety agency approved process that is audited by
safety agencies on a periodic and ongoing basis to ensure quality and compliance with design
requirements.

When a server leaves the manufacturing site, it is safety agency listed, therefore, IBM does not
recommend modifying IBM-provided power cords. In the rare circumstance where modification of an
IBM provided power cord is deemed essential, you should:
v Discuss the modification with their insurance provider to assess the effect, if any, on insurance
coverage
v Consult with a professional electrician regarding compliance with local codes

The following excerpts from the Services Reference Manual (SRM) explains IBM policy on power cord
alteration and the liabilities involved.

SRM excerpts

A cable group associated with a purchased IBM machine, and bearing an IBM label, is the property of the
IBM machine owner. All other IBM furnished cable groups (except those for which specific purchase
invoices have been paid) are the property of IBM.

Customers assume all risks associated with turning a machine over to others for the performance of
technical work such as, but not limited to, the installation or removal of features, alterations or
attachments.

Chapter 10. Planning for power 667

IBM will advise the customer of any limitation, resulting from the alteration, affecting IBM's ability to
provide Warranty Service or Maintenance after review by the appropriate Service Delivery and Field
Marketing Practices personnel.

Definition of an alteration

An alteration is any change to an IBM machine that deviates from IBM physical, mechanical, electrical, or
electronic design (including microcode) whether or not additional devices or parts are used. An alteration
is also an interconnection at some place other than an IBM defined interface. See the Multiple Supplier
Systems Bulletin for more detail.

For an altered machine, service will be confined to the unaltered portions of the IBM machine.

After inspection, IBM will continue to make Warranty Service or Maintenance available, as appropriate,
for the unaltered portion of an IBM machine.

IBM will not maintain the altered portion of an IBM machine under either an IBM Agreement or on an
Hourly Service basis.

If you have more questions about power cord modification, contact an IBM service representative.

668 Site and hardware planning

Chapter 11. Planning for cables
Learn how to develop plans for cabling your server and devices.

This topic helps you plan your layout by presenting planning information on some cables used to
interconnect the system units and devices. This topic includes information on cable length and measuring
techniques and some sample cable planning charts.

You must plan the type of cable, cable path, and cable length, considering not only your current needs,
but also your anticipated growth and the relocation of personnel.

To assist with the installation of your system, you should note cable paths on your office layout.

You are responsible for planning for the installation if interconnecting cables, including the proper
lightning and surge protection as necessary and should contact the appropriate contractor for guidance
and assistance, as required. If the cables specified herein do not meet your needs, talk to your IBM
representative or cabling vendor about custom cabling alternatives.

General cabling considerations

Cabling your server can be fairly complex. Use these guidelines to ensure proper cable installation.

You have to purchase, install, label, and test all your own workstation cables. These are cables to your
server, PCs, display stations, and printers. Without cables, however, a server cannot exist. What you really
have is a system of cables, connecting everything together. And, if your cables cause problems, your
server goes down. Because cables are critical to your business, you should purchase pre-assembled cables
rather than assemble the cables yourself.

If you ordered a Total System Package with one or more display stations, a 6 m (20 ft) cable will be
include with your server. If you ordered one or more printers, one 6 m (20 ft) cable is included.

Consider the following when routing your cables:

v Do not create a safety hazard. Do not route cables where they can harm personnel and equipment. For
instance, make sure people cannot trip over cables.
v Do not expose a cable to damage. Do not route cables near a heat source or where they can be pinched
(like under a door).
v Avoid sources of electrical interference. Do not route cables near electric motors or transformers.
v Be careful not to exceed the bend radius of the cable. This is especially true for the high-speed link
cables.
v Do not lay cables over sharp edges, the weight of the cable along with vibrations will eventually wear
through the cable.

Measuring cables
Accurate measuring of cables is critical to a successful and efficient installation. Do not guess or estimate
your cable lengths.

To determine the cable lengths that you need, be sure to consider the following:
v Length allowed for service access, on both server and device ends
v Length from server to floor
– Tabletop to floor for desktop models

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2007, 2009 669

 – 460 mm (1.5 ft) for stand-alone models
v Horizontal and vertical cable runs. Be sure to route cables around furniture to avoid tripping hazards.
v Distance from floor to device. (This can include distance between floors, between buildings, and so on,
depending on the complexity of the installation.

For model 595, the length of the RIO-G cable is a limiting factor in determining the distance between the
server and a separately powered I/O frame.

Special requirements for model 595 cabling

The distance between the server frame and the I/O frame is limited by the RIO-G cable length.

The 8 m (26 ft) RIO-G cable is a limiting factor in determining the distance between the server frame and
a separately powered I/O frame. The RIO-G cables are the communication cables that connect the server
to the I/O drawers. Up to 2 m (6.5 ft) of the cable length is needed to exit the server frame. An
additional 2 m (6.5 ft) might be required to connect the I/O drawer in the I/O frame, depending on the
position of the drawer in the frame. The additional cable length to go horizontally between the two
frames is approximately 1 m (3.2 ft) even with the frames touching. This leaves approximately 3 m (9.8 ft)
to use under a raised floor or to space the server frame and I/O frame further apart.

Determining cable requirements and ordering cables

Follow these guidelines to select and order the correct cables for your server.

You must order, install, label, and test all your own workstation cables. These are cables to your servers,
towers, PCs, display stations, and printers. Because assembling cables can be complex, purchase
preassembled cables.

For information on high-speed link cabling, see High speed link information.

Packages with one or more display stations, recieve one 6 m (20 ft) cable with your server. If you ordered
one or more printers, you get one 6 m (20 ft) cable. You must order any additional cables separately.

Follow this procedure to order your cables:

1. From the site plan that you drew, determine how much cable you need. See Measuring cables to
determine the length of cables that you need.
2. Select the types of cables to view specifications and part numbers:
v High speed link cables
v Operations Console cables
v Twinaxial cables (workstations, remote workstation controllers, host servers)
3. Write down the type and quantity of cables you need in the Workstation Information Form 3B.

4. Using the information you entered in the form, order your cables. Make sure you specify:
v Type of cable (for instance, twinaxial)
v Lengths and quantity of cable (such as, ten 6-foot cables, and so on)
v Type of covering if applicable (such as vinyl covered twinaxial cables)
Remember to order any necessary cable accessories, such as adapters and T-connectors.
Note: If you are ordering cables from IBM, you must specify part numbers and, in some cases, length
or feature number. Verify the cable part tables (twinaxial cables).

For more details on cables, contact an authorized service provider.

Related reference:

670 Site and hardware planning

“High-speed link information”
High-speed link (HSL) cables connect systems to I/O enclosures, IXA cards in System x expansion units
and other systems.
“Measuring cables” on page 669
Accurate measuring of cables is critical to a successful and efficient installation. Do not guess or estimate
your cable lengths.
“HSL, SPCN, RIO, and InfiniBand cable planning” on page 678
Use these tables to select your HSL, SPCN, RIO and InfiniBand cables.
“Operations Console and remote control panel cables” on page 711
Use the Operations Console cables and Remote control panel cables tables to determine the cable
specifications for your server.
“Workstation Information Form 3B” on page 501
Use this form to record the type and quantity of cables you need for your server.
“Twinaxial cables from IBM” on page 711
Use the Twinaxial cables table to choose a cable for your server.

High-speed link information

High-speed link (HSL) cables connect systems to I/O enclosures, IXA cards in System x expansion units
and other systems.

High-speed link OptiConnect Loop is the designation for an HSL loop which connects multiple systems.
It provides system-to-system connectivity and switch disk environments.

Planning for HSL cabling

High-speed link cable options and loop maximums contains HSL cables and lists the maximum loops
for each server.

High-speed link terminology provides definitions for some of the common terms used in HSL cabling
information.

HSL and SPCN cable planning topic collection lists cables and also contains cable planning diagrams.
Related reference:
“High-speed link cable options and loop maximums” on page 672
Use the Cable options tables to determine the high-speed link (HSL) cables available for your servers,
expansion units, and the maximum number of expansion units on an HSL loop.
“High-speed link terminology” on page 677
Use this information to familiarize yourself with basic high-speed link cable terminology.
“HSL, SPCN, RIO, and InfiniBand cable planning” on page 678
Use these tables to select your HSL, SPCN, RIO and InfiniBand cables.

Chapter 11. Planning for cables 671

High-speed link cable options and loop maximums
Use the Cable options tables to determine the high-speed link (HSL) cables available for your servers,
expansion units, and the maximum number of expansion units on an HSL loop.

Use the following table to identify the cables for model numbers and machine types identified.
Table 700. Cable options for model 270, 800, 810, 820, 825, 830, 840, 870, and 890
800 830 870
and and and
Cable feature Cable name 270 810 820 825 840 890
Copper
1307 1.75 m (5.7 ft) HSL-2 cable X X
1460 3 m (9.8 ft) HSL copper cable X X X X
1461 6 m (19.7 ft) HSL copper cable X X X X
1462 15 m (49.2 ft) HSL copper cable note 2 X
1474 6 m (19.7 ft) HSL to HSL-2 cable X X X X X X
1475 10 m (32.8 ft) HSL to HSL-2 cable note 2 X X X
1481 1.2 m (3.9 ft) HSL-2 cable X X
1482 4 m (13.1 ft) HSL-2 cable X X
1483 10 m (32.8 ft) HSL-2 cable X X
1485 15 m (49.2 ft )HSL-2 cable X X
Fiber Optic see note 1
1470 6 m (19.7 ft) HSL fiber optic cable X X X
1471 30 m (98.4 ft) HSL fiber optic cable X X X
1472 100 m (328 ft) HSL fiber optic cable X X X
1473 250 m (820.2 ft) HSL fiber optic cable X X X
SPCN
0369 250 m (820.2 ft) Fiber Optic SPCN cable X X X
1463 2 m (6.6 ft) SPCN cable X X X X X X
1464 6 m (19.7 ft) SPCN cable X X X X X X
1465 15 m (49.2 ft) SPCN cable X X X X X X
1466 30 m (98.4 ft) SPCN cable X X X X X X
1468 100 m (328 ft) Fiber Optic SPCN cable X X X
Note:
1. Fiber optic cable requires a base or feature optical HSL port card in the system.
2. 15 m (49.2 ft) HSL copper cables are not supported on the A1 port of model 820. They can be used on the A0
port of model 820.

Use the following table to identify the RIO/HSL cables for model numbers and machine types identified.
Table 701. System unit RIO/HSL cable options
Cable feature 9117-MMA or 9406-MMA
1307 (copper)
1308 (copper)
1460 (copper)

672 Site and hardware planning

Table 701. System unit RIO/HSL cable options (continued)
Cable feature 9117-MMA or 9406-MMA
1461 (copper)
1462 (copper)
1470 (fiber optic)
1471 (fiber optic)
1472 (fiber optic)
1473 (fiber optic)
1474 (copper)
1475 (copper)
1481 (copper)
1482 (copper) X
1483 (copper)
1485 (copper)
1487 (copper)
3146 (copper) X
3147 (copper) X
3148 (copper) X
3168 (copper) X
3170 (copper)
7924 (copper)

Table 702. Cable options for the expansion units available with iSeries servers
0694
5078 5079 IXA 5094 5095 5088 5294
Cable feature Cable name 5074 5075 0578 8079 card 9094 0595 0588 8094
Copper
1460 3 m (9.8 ft) HSL copper cable X X X X X
1461 6 m (19.7 ft) HSL copper cable X X X X X
1462 15 m (49.2 ft) HSL copper cable X X X X X
1474 6 m (19.7 ft) HSL to HSL-2 cable X X X X X X X X X
1475 10 m (32.8 ft) HSL to HSL-2 cable X X X X X X X X X
1482 4 m (13.1 ft) HSL-2 cable X X X X
1483 10 m (32.8 ft) HSL-2 cable X X X X
1485 15 m (49.2 ft) HSL-2 cable X X X X
Optical see notes
1470 6 m (19.7 ft) HSL fiber optic cable X X X X X X X
1471 30 m (98.4) HSL fiber optic cable X X X X X X X
1472 100 m (328 ft) HSL fiber optic X X X X X X X
cable
1473 250 m (820.2 ft) HSL fiber optic X X X X X X X
cable
SPCN

Chapter 11. Planning for cables 673

Table 702. Cable options for the expansion units available with iSeries servers (continued)
0694
5078 5079 IXA 5094 5095 5088 5294
Cable feature Cable name 5074 5075 0578 8079 card 9094 0595 0588 8094
0369 250 m (820.2 ft) Fiber Optic SPCN X X X X X X X X
cable
1463 2 m (6.6 ft) SPCN cable X X X X X X X X X
1464 6 m (19.7 ft) SPCN cable X X X X X X X X X
1465 15 m (49.2 ft) SPCN cable X X X X X X X X X
1466 30 m (98.4 ft) SPCN cable X X X X X X X X X
1468 100 m (328 ft) Fiber Optic SPCN X X X X X X X X
cable
Note:
v Optical cable requires a base or feature optical HSL port card in the expansion unit.
v Fiber optic cable requires a base or feature optical HSL port card in the system.
v 15 m (49.2 ft) HSL copper cables are not supported on the A1 port of model 820. They can be used on the A0 port
of model 820.

Table 703. Cable options for the expansion units available with IBM eServer hardware
5078 5079 5095 5088 5294
Cable feature Cable name 0578 8079 0595 0588 8094
Copper
1460 3 m (9.8 ft) HSL copper cable X X
1461 6 m (19.7 ft) HSL copper cable X X
1462 15 m (49.2 ft) HSL copper cable X X
1474 6 m (19.7 ft) HSL to HSL-2 cable X X X X X
1475 10 m (32.8 ft) HSL to HSL-2 cable X X X X X
1482 4 m (13.1 ft) HSL-2 cable X X X
1483 10 m (32.8 ft) HSL-2 cable X X X
1485 15 m (49.2 ft) HSL-2 cable X X X
Optical see notes
1470 6 m (19.7 ft) HSL fiber optic cable X X X X X
1471 30 m (98.4 ft) HSL fiber optic cable X X X X X
1472 100 m (328 ft) HSL fiber optic cable X X X X X
1473 250 m (820.2 ft) HSL fiber optic cable X X X X X
SPCN
0369 250 m (820.2 ft) Fiber Optic SPCN cable X X X X X
1463 2 m (6.6 ft) SPCN cable X X X X X
1464 6 m (19.7 ft) SPCN cable X X X X X
1465 15 m (49.2 ft) SPCN cable X X X X X
1466 30 m (98.4 ft) SPCN cable X X X X X
1468 100 m (328 ft) Fiber Optic SPCN cable X X X X X
Note:
v Optical cable requires a base or feature optical HSL port card in the expansion unit.
v Fiber optic cable requires a base or feature optical HSL port card in the system.

674 Site and hardware planning

Table 704. Maximum expansion units on an HSL for iSeries servers
System maximums 270 800 810 820 825 830 840 870 870 890 890 520 570
2489 2486 2487 2488
HSL loops 1 1 1 1 3 4 8 4 8 12 14 1 2
HSL loops supporting fiber optic cables 0 0 0 0 2 1 2 2 6 10 12 0 1
I/O expansion units 1 1 4 5 18 13 23 23 47 47 47 6 12
IXA cards in xSeries expansion units 2 3 7 8 18 16 60 48 60 60 60 8 16
I/O expansion units and IXA cards 3 4 8 9 27 21 60 48 60 60 60 9 18
HSL OptiConnect loops 1 1 1 1 2 2 4 3 7 11 13 1 2
Fiber optic HSL OptiConnect loops 0 0 0 0 1 1 2 2 6 10 12 0 1
HSL migration expansion unit 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
HSL Loop Maximums
I/O expansion units 1 1 4 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
IXA cards in xSeries expansion units 2 3 7 8 5* 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
I/O expansion units and IXA cards 3 4 8 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
HSL OptiConnect Loop - 2 systems
I/O expansion units and IXA cards 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
HSL OptiConnect Loop - 3 systems
I/O expansion units and IXA cards 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Note:
v Optical cable requires a base or feature optical HSL port card in the expansion unit.
v Fiber optic cable requires a base or feature optical HSL port card in the system.
v 15 m (49.2) HSL copper cables are not supported on the A1 port of model 9406-820. They can be used on the A0 port of model
9406-820.

Table 705. RIO/HSL configuration rules for expansion units

Configuration Maximum number Maximum number of Maximum Maximum
of ports loops number of number of
expansion units supported
per loop expansion units
9111-520 or 9111-285 2 1 4 4
9405-520 or 9406-520 2 1 6 6
9113-550 4 2 4 8
p5 550Q, or 720 4 2 6 12
9406-550 4 2 6 12
9117-570 16 8
4 14

(7 with a 9411-100 (20 with a

attachment1) 9411-100
attachment)
9406-570 16 8 6 48
9118-575 or 9125-F2A 2 per node 1 per node 1 1
9119-590 or 9119-FHA 24 12
1 8

(7 with a 9411-100 (14 with a

attachment2) 9411-100
attachment)

Chapter 11. Planning for cables 675

Table 705. RIO/HSL configuration rules for expansion units (continued)
Configuration Maximum number Maximum number of Maximum Maximum
of ports loops number of number of
expansion units supported
per loop expansion units
9119-595 48 24
1 12

(7 with a 9411-100 (18 with a

attachment2) 9411-100
attachment)
9406-595 62 31 6 96
Notes:
1. A model 9117-570 with a 9411-100 attachment cannot be mixed on the same loop as a 7040-61D, 7311-D10,
7311-D11, or 7311-D20 expansion unit.
2. A model 9119-590, 9119-595, or 9119-FHA with a 9411-100 attachment cannot be mixed on the same loop as a
5791, 5794, or 7040-61D expansion unit.

Table 706. RIO/HSL and InfiniBand configuration rules for expansion units for System i
Configuration Maximum number Maximum number of Maximum Maximum
of ports loops number of number of
expansion units supported
per loop expansion units
9406-MMA (RIO/HSL) 16 8 6 48

5790

5095

0595
9406-MMA12X adapter 16 8 4 32

5796

Table 707. RIO/HSL and InfiniBand configuration rules for expansion units for System p
Configuration Maximum number Maximum number of Maximum Maximum
of ports loops number of number of
expansion units supported
per loop expansion units
9117-MMA(RIO/HSL) 16 8 4 20

7311-D11

7311-D20
9117-MMA (12x adapter) 16 8 4 32

7314-G30

676 Site and hardware planning

Model 820 HSL loop configuration
Use this figure to set up an HSL loop for your Model 820.

High-speed link terminology

Use this information to familiarize yourself with basic high-speed link cable terminology.

The following list provides the terminology used for high-speed link cabling.
v Alternate server: For a given tower, the server to which a tower can be switched.
v Base tower: Same as power-controlled tower.
v System unit node: A node that is the hub for a server.
v External tower: An I/O tower that is contained within a physical package separate from a system unit.
Note that more than one external tower might be contained within a single physical package (for
example, a 5079 tower is actually two external towers).
v Home server: Same as power-controlling server.
v HSL: High-speed link technology. A high-speed connection mechanism that takes advantage of the I/O
bus structure or the memory to connect multiple systems or partitions.
v HSL loop segment: A portion of an HSL loop whose endpoints are defined by two system unit nodes
(servers) and which contains only I/O nodes.
v HSL OptiConnect: The System i system area network that provides high-speed interconnectivity
between multiple System i systems in a local environment. Along with WAN and LAN technologies,
OptiConnect provides the high-speed connectivity between cluster nodes in System i cluster
environments.
v Internal tower: An I/O tower that is contained within the same physical package as a server.
v I/O node: A node that is the bridge to an I/O tower (internal or external) or IXS tower.
v IXS tower: Integrated xSeries Server tower (cannot be switchable, such as, an IXS tower is always a
private tower).
v Managing server: Same as owning server.
v Node: An addressable entity on an HSL loop.

Chapter 11. Planning for cables 677

v Owning server: The server that is currently responsible for accessing and controlling a tower.
v Power-controlling server: For a given tower, the server that has system power control network (SPCN)
control over that tower.
v Power-controlled tower: For a given system, a tower over which that system has SPCN control.
v Private tower: A tower that is not switchable.
v Switchable tower: A tower that has been configured to allow it to be owned by an alternate system.
v Switched tower: A tower that is currently owned by the alternate system.

HSL, SPCN, RIO, and InfiniBand cable planning

Use these tables to select your HSL, SPCN, RIO and InfiniBand cables.

The following table shows the high speed link (HSL) cable descriptions and feature code numbers
available for your servers and expansion units.
Table 708. HSL cables
Cable Number
HSL - 3 m (9.8 ft) 1460
HSL - 6 m (19.7 ft) 1462
HSL - 15 m (49.2 ft) 1462
HSL - 6 m (19.7 ft) 1470
HSL - 30 m (98.4 ft) 1471
HSL - 100 m (328 ft) 1472
HSL - 250 m (820.2 ft) 1473
HSL to HSL2 - 6 m (19.7 ft) 1474
HSL to HSL2 - 10 m (32.8 ft) 1475
HSL2 - 1 m (3.28 ft) 1481
HSL2 - 3.5 m (11.5 ft) 1482
HSL2 - 10 m (32.8 ft) 1483
HSL2 - 15 m (49.2 ft) 1485

The following table shows the InfiniBand cable descriptions and feature code numbers available for your
servers and expansion units.
Table 709. InfiniBand cables
Cable feature Cable type Length Part number
1829 12x InfiniBand cable 0.6 m (2 ft) 41V0226
1830 12x InfiniBand cable 1.5 m (5 ft) 41V0227
1834 12x InfiniBand cable 8 m (26 ft) 39J5642
1840 12x InfiniBand cable 3 m (9.8 ft) 42V2132

The following table shows the SPCN cable descriptions and feature code numbers available for your
servers and expansion units.
Table 710. SPCN cables
Cable Number
SPCN - 2 m (6.6 ft) 1463

678 Site and hardware planning

Table 710. SPCN cables (continued)
SPCN - 6 m (19.7 ft) 1464
SPCN - 15 m (49.2 ft) 1465
SPCN - 30 m (98.4 ft) 1466
SPCN - 2 m (6.6 ft) 6001
SPCN - 3 m (9.8 ft) 6006
SPCN - 6 m (19.7 ft) 6008
SPCN - 15 m (49.2 ft) 6007
SPCN - 30 m (98.4 ft) 6029

The following table shows the RIO cable descriptions and feature code numbers available for your
servers and expansion units.
Table 711. RIO cables
Cable Number
RIO - 1.2 m (3.9 ft) 3146
RIO - 3.5 m (11.5 ft) 3147
RIO - 1.75 m (5.7 ft) 3156
RIO - 10 m (32.8 ft) 3148
RIO - 2.5 m (8.2 ft) 3168

HSL handling requirements

The cables are included with protective coverings (end caps) over the connectors. The purpose of these
end caps is to protect the cable ends from mechanical damage and contact contamination. Keep the end
caps on while routing cables, etc. until it is time to plug the connectors into the equipment.

Excess cable might be coiled. The recommended bend radius is 152.4 mm (6 in.); however, the minimum
bend radius is 76.2 mm (3 in.). If cable ties or other restraining devices are used to hold the coiled cable
in place, make sure these fit loosely on the cable jacket.

Attention: Do not compress or crush the cables. This might result in mechanical damage to the wires
and insulation.

Notes:
1. The 15 m (49.2 ft) HSL cable (1462) is not supported on the 9406-270.
2. A 15 m (49.2 ft) HSL cable should not be used to directly connect the system unit port A1 on model
9406-820 to a 5075, 5074, or 5079. It can be used for all other connections on model 9406-820. For the
9406-830 and 9406-840, 1462 can be used for all connections.

Serial-attached SCSI cable planning

Serial-attached SCSI (SAS) cables provide serial communication for transfer of data for directly attached
devices, such as hard disk drives, solid-state drives, and CD-ROM drives.

SAS cable overview

Serial-attached SCSI (SAS) is an evolution of the parallel SCSI device interface into a serial point-to-point
interface. SAS physical links are a set of four wires used as two differential signal pairs. One differential

Chapter 11. Planning for cables 679

signal transmits in one direction while the other differential signal transmits in the opposite direction.
Data might be transmitted in both directions simultaneously. SAS physical links are contained in ports. A
port contains one or more SAS physical links. A port is a wide port if there are more than one SAS
physical link in the port. Wide ports are designed to enhance performance and provide redundancy
incase an individual SAS physical link fail.

Each SAS cable contains four SAS physical links that are typically organized into either a single 4x SAS
port or two 2x SAS ports. Each end of the cable uses a mini SAS 4x connector. Review the following
design and installation criteria before installing your SAS cables:
v Only specific cabling configurations are supported. Many configurations could be constructed that are
not supported and will either not function correctly or will generate errors. Refer to “SAS cabling
configurations” on page 685 for diagrams of the supported cabling configurations.
v Each mini-SAS 4x connector is keyed to help prevent cabling an unsupported configuration.
v Each cable end has a label that graphically describes the correct component port to which it is
connected, such as:
– SAS adapter
– Expansion drawer
– System external SAS port
– Internal SAS disk slots connection.
v Cable routing is important. For example, YO, YI, and X cables must be routed along the right side of
the rack frame (as viewed from the rear) when connecting to a disk expansion drawer. Additionally, X
cables must be attached to the same numbered port on both SAS adapters to which it connects.
v When a choice of cable lengths is available, select the shortest cable that will provide the needed
connectivity.
v Always use care when inserting or removing a cable. The cable should slide easily into the connector.
Forcing a cable into a connector can cause damage to the cable or connector.
v The X cables are only supported on all SAS PCI (RAID) adapters and only when RAID is enabled.
v Not all cabling configurations are supported when using solid-state drives (SSD). Refer to Installing and
configuring Solid State Drives for more information.

Supported SAS cable information

The following table contains a list of the supported SAS cable types and their designed usage.
Table 712. Functions for supported SAS cables
Cable type Function
AA cable This cable is used to connect between the top ports on
two tri-port SAS adapters in a RAID configuration.
AI cable This cable is used to connect from a SAS adapter to
internal SAS disk slots using an FC3650 or FC3651 cable
card or to the System External SAS port on models
8204-E8A (FC3669) or 8203-E4A (FC3670). This cable is
also used between the adapter connector and cable card
connector on an FC5909 or FC5911 combination adapter
and cable card.
AE cable These cables are used to connect a SAS adapter to a
media expansion drawer. These cables can also be used
to connect two SAS adapters to a disk expansion drawer
in a unique JBOD configuration.
AT cable This cable is used with a PCIe 12X I/O drawer to
connect from a PCIe SAS adapter to the internal SAS
disk slots.

680 Site and hardware planning

Table 712. Functions for supported SAS cables (continued)
Cable type Function
EE cable This cable is used to connect one disk expansion drawer
to another in a cascaded configuration. Disk expansion
drawers can only be cascaded one level deep, and only
in certain configurations.
YO cable This cable is used to connect a SAS adapter to a disk
expansion drawer. It is also used to connect a 9125-F2A
system I/O unit to a disk expansion drawer. The cable
must be routed along the right side of the rack frame (as
viewed from the rear) when connecting to a disk
expansion drawer.
YI cable This cable is used to connect a system external SAS port
to a disk expansion drawer. The cable must be routed
along the right side of the rack frame (as viewed from
the rear) when connecting to a disk expansion drawer.
X cable This cable is used to connect two SAS adapters to a disk
expansion drawer in a RAID configuration. The cable
must be routed along the right side of the rack frame (as
viewed from the rear) when connecting to a disk
expansion drawer.
YR cable This cable is used to connect two SAS adapters to
internal SAS disk slots using an FC3651 cable card.

The following table contains specific information about each supported SAS cable.
Table 713. Supported SAS cables
Name Length IBM part number Feature code
SAS AA cable 3 m (9.8 ft) 44V8231 3681

6 m (19.6 ft) 44V8230 3682

SAS 4x AI cable 1 m (3.2 ft) 44V4041 3679
SAS 4x AE cable 3 m (9.8 ft) 44V4163 3684
6 m (19.6 ft) 44V4164 3685
SAS 4x AT cable 0.6 m (1.9 ft) 44V5132 3688
SAS 4x EE cable 1 m (3.2 ft) 44V4147 3652
3 m (9.8 ft) 44V4148 3653
6 m (19.6 ft) 44V4149 3654
SAS YO cable 1.5 m (4.9 ft) 44V4157 3691
3 m (9.8 ft) 44V4158 3692
6 m (19.6 ft) 44V4159 3693
15 m (49.2 ft) 44V4160 3694
SAS YI cable 1.5 m (4.9 ft) 44V4161 3686
3 m (9.8 ft) 44V4162 3687
SAS X cable 3 m (9.8 ft) 44V4154 3661
6 m (19.6 ft) 44V4155 3662
15 m (49.2 ft) 44V4156 3663
SAS YR cable 1 m (3.2 ft) 44V4818 3667

Chapter 11. Planning for cables 681

Table 713. Supported SAS cables (continued)
Name Length IBM part number Feature code
Split disk backplane cable 44V3557 3650
card for a 3/3 split
9117-MMA
Split disk backplane cable 44V3435 3651
card for a 6/0 split
9117-MMA
Disk backplane to rear 42R5751 3668
bulkhead, cascading.
(internal cable) 8204-E8A,
9409-M50
Split disk backplane to rear 44V5252 3669
bulkhead (internal cable)
8204-E8A
Split disk backplane to rear 44V5253 3670
bulkhead (internal cable)
8203-E4A
Disk backplane to rear 44V3382 3674
bulkhead, cascading.
(internal cable) 8203-E4A,
9408-M25

The following table contains cable label information. The graphic labels are designed to match the correct
component port to which the cable end is to be attached.
Table 714. SAS cable labeling
Name Connects Label
SAS AA cable Top connectors on tri-port SAS
adapter to tri-port SAS adapter.

SAS 4x AI cable SAS adapter to internal SAS disk

slots through an FC3650 or FC3651
cable card or an FC5909 or FC5911
combination adapter and cable card
or to the System External SAS port
on models 8204-E8A (with FC3669
installed) or 8203-E4A (with FC3670
installed)
SAS 4x AE cable SAS adapter to a media expansion
drawer or two SAS adapters to a disk
expansion drawer in a unique JBOD
configuration

682 Site and hardware planning

Table 714. SAS cable labeling (continued)
Name Connects Label
SAS 4x AT cable PCIe SAS adapter in PCIe 12X I/O
drawer to the internal SAS disk slots

SAS 4x EE cable One disk expansion drawer to

another disk expansion drawer in a
cascaded configuration

SAS YO cable SAS adapter or 9125-F2A system I/O

unit to a disk expansion drawer

SAS YI cable System external SAS port to a disk

expansion drawer

SAS X cable Two SAS adapters to a disk

expansion drawer in a RAID
configuration

SAS YR cable Two SAS adapters to internal SAS

disk slots through an FC3651 cable
card

Chapter 11. Planning for cables 683

Cable section lengths

Figure 258. SAS external X cable assembly cable lengths

Figure 259. SAS external YO-cable assembly cable lengths

Figure 260. SAS external YI-cable assembly cable lengths

684 Site and hardware planning

Figure 261. SAS external YR-cable assembly cable lengths

SAS cabling configurations

The following sections provide the typical supported SAS cabling configurations. Many configurations
could be constructed that are not supported and will either not function correctly or will generate errors.
To avoid problems, restrict cabling to only the general types of configurations shown in the following
sections.
v “SAS adapter to disk expansion drawers”
v “SAS adapter to media expansion drawer” on page 688
v “SAS adapter to expansion drawer combinations” on page 689
v “System external SAS port to disk expansion drawer- models 8204-E8A, 8203-E4A, 9408-M25, and
9409-M50” on page 690
v System I/O unit external SAS port to disk expansion drawer- model 9125-F2A
v “SAS adapter to internal SAS disk slots in models 9117-MMA” on page 693
v “Two SAS adapters to internal SAS disk slots in models 9117-MMA and 9406-MMA” on page 698
v “SAS adapter to internal SAS disk slots in models 8204-E8A and 8203-E4A” on page 699
v “Two SAS adapters to disk expansion drawer multi-initiator high availability (HA) RAID
configuration” on page 701
v “Two SAS adapters to disk expansion drawer - multi-initiator HA JBOD configuration” on page 705
v PCIe SAS adapter in PCIe 12X I/O drawer to the internal SAS disk slots

SAS adapter to disk expansion drawers

Figure 262 on page 686, Figure 263 on page 686, Figure 264 on page 687, and Figure 265 on page 688
illustrate connecting a SAS adapter to one, two, three, or four disk expansion drawers. It is also possible
to connect three disk expansion drawers by omitting one of the cascaded drawers shown in Figure 264 on
page 687. Disk expansion drawers can be cascaded only one level deep.

Chapter 11. Planning for cables 685

Figure 262. SAS adapter to a disk expansion drawer

Note: The YO cable must be routed along the right side of the rack frame.

Figure 263. SAS adapter to two disk expansion drawers

686 Site and hardware planning

Note: The YO cable must be routed along the right side of the rack frame.

Figure 264. SAS adapter to four disk expansion drawers

Note: The YO cable must be routed along the right side of the rack frame.

Chapter 11. Planning for cables 687

Figure 265. Tri-port SAS adapter to disk expansion drawers

When attaching only hard disk drives, it is also possible to cascade a second disk expansion drawer off of
two out of the three drawers for a maximum of five disk expansion drawers per adapter. Refer to
Figure 264 on page 687. Disk expansion drawers can be cascaded only one level deep.

Note: The YO cable must be routed along the right side of the rack frame.

SAS adapter to media expansion drawer

Figure 266 on page 689 illustrates connecting a SAS adapter to a media expansion drawer. It is also
possible to connect a second media expansion drawer to the second port of the SAS adapter.

688 Site and hardware planning

Figure 266. SAS adapter to a media expansion drawer

SAS adapter to expansion drawer combinations

Figure 267 on page 690 illustrates connecting a SAS adapter to both a disk expansion drawer and a media
expansion drawer on separate adapter ports. It is also possible to cascade a second disk expansion
drawer (refer to Figure 264 on page 687).

Chapter 11. Planning for cables 689

Figure 267. SAS adapter to both a disk expansion drawer and a media expansion drawer

Note: The YO cable must be routed along the right side of the rack frame.

System external SAS port to disk expansion drawer- models 8204-E8A, 8203-E4A,
9408-M25, and 9409-M50

Figure 268 on page 691 illustrates connecting a system external SAS port to a disk expansion drawer. Disk
expansion drawers cannot be cascaded.

690 Site and hardware planning

Figure 268. System external SAS adapter port to a disk expansion drawer

Note: The YI cable must be routed along the right side of the rack frame.

System I/O unit external SAS port to disk expansion drawer- model 9125-F2A

Figure 269 on page 692 and Figure 270 on page 692 illustrate connecting a 9125-F2A system I/O unit
external SAS port to one or two disk expansion drawers.

Note: The disk expansion drawers can be cascaded only one level deep.

Chapter 11. Planning for cables 691

Figure 269. SAS adapter to a disk expansion drawer

Note: The YO cable must be routed along the right side of the rack frame.

Figure 270. SAS adapter to two disk expansion drawers

Note: The YO cable must be routed along the right side of the rack frame.

692 Site and hardware planning

SAS adapter to internal SAS disk slots in models 9117-MMA

Figure 271 and Figure 272 on page 694 illustrate connecting a SAS adapter to internal SAS disk slots
through one or two FC3650 or FC3651 cable cards. Figure 274 on page 696 and Figure 276 on page 697
illustrate connecting a disk expansion or media expansion drawer in addition to the internal SAS disk
slots. Figure 277 on page 697 illustrates connecting a SAS adapter to internal SAS disk slots through an
FC5909 or FC5911 combination adapter and cable card.

Note: When installing Feature Code 3650 or 3651, you might have difficulties inserting and plugging the
card assembly. This is caused by an interference of a bracket installed within the enclosure. When this
problem is encountered contact IBM for removal of the bracket and installation of the feature at no
charge. Removal of this bracket does not affect the functionality of the system.

Figure 271. SAS adapter to internal SAS disk slots through an FC3650 or FC3651 cable card

Chapter 11. Planning for cables 693

Figure 272. SAS adapter to internal SAS disk slots through two FC3650 or FC3651 cards

694 Site and hardware planning

Figure 273. FC5904 or FC5908 adapter connecting to three system units through an FC3650 or FC3651 cable card

Chapter 11. Planning for cables 695

Figure 274. SAS adapter to disk expansion drawer and internal SAS disk slots through an FC3650 or FC3651 cable
card

Figure 275. FC5904 or FC5908 adapter connecting to the FC3650 or FC3651 in a system unit and connecting to a
disk expansion drawer

696 Site and hardware planning

Figure 276. SAS adapter to media expansion drawer and internal SAS disk slots through an FC3650 or FC3651 cable
card

Figure 277. SAS adapter to internal SAS disk slots through an FC5909 or FC5911 combination adapter and cable
card.

Chapter 11. Planning for cables 697

Note: The middle connector on the FC5909 is not used for any connection. The middle connector on the
FC5911 can be used to connect an additional disk expansion or media expansion drawer. Refer to the
expansion drawer connection in Figure 274 on page 696 and Figure 276 on page 697.

Two SAS adapters to internal SAS disk slots in models 9117-MMA and 9406-MMA

Figure 278 and Figure 279 illustrate connecting two SAS adapters to internal SAS disk slots through one
or two FC3651 cable cards.

Figure 278. Two SAS adapters to internal SAS disk slots through an FC3651 cable card

Figure 279. Two SAS adapters to internal SAS disk slots through two FC3651 cable cards

698 Site and hardware planning

SAS adapter to internal SAS disk slots in models 8204-E8A and 8203-E4A

Figure 280 on page 700 illustrates connecting a SAS adapter to internal SAS disk slots through the system
external SAS port.

Note: Internal cable FC3670 for model 8203-E4A or FC3669 for model 8204-E8A must be installed to
enable this configuration. For more information, see Installing the external SAS port on a model
8203-E4A, 9407-M15, or 9408-M25 or Installing the external SAS port on a model 8204-E8A or 9409-M50.

Chapter 11. Planning for cables 699

Figure 280. SAS adapter to internal SAS disk slots through the system external SAS port

Notes:
v Internal cable FC3670 for model 8203-E4A or FC3669 for model 8204-E8A must be installed to enable
this configuration. For more information, see Installing the external SAS port on a model 8203-E4A,
9407-M15, or 9408-M25 or Installing the external SAS port on a model 8204-E8A or 9409-M50.
v The second connector on the adapter can be used to attach a disk expansion or media expansion
drawer as shown in Figure 262 on page 686 or Figure 266 on page 689.

700 Site and hardware planning

Figure 281. FC5904 or FC5908 adapter attached to disk expansion drawers

Note:
v The remaining two connectors on the adapter can be used to attach disk expansion drawers as shown
in Figure 265 on page 688.

Two SAS adapters to disk expansion drawer multi-initiator high availability (HA)
RAID configuration

Figure 282 on page 702, Figure 283 on page 703, Figure 284 on page 704, and Figure 285 on page 705
illustrate connecting two SAS adapters to one, two, or four disk expansion drawers in a RAID
configuration. It is also possible to connect three disk expansion drawers by omitting one of the cascaded
drawers shown in Figure 284 on page 704. Disk expansion drawers can be cascaded only one level deep.

Chapter 11. Planning for cables 701

Figure 282. Two SAS RAID adapters to a disk expansion drawer in a multi-initiator HA RAID configuration

Note:
1. The X cable must be routed along the right side of the rack frame.
2. The X cable must be attached to the same numbered port on all adapters.

702 Site and hardware planning

Figure 283. Two SAS RAID adapters to two disk expansion drawers in a multi-initiator HA RAID configuration

Note:
1. The X cable must be routed along the right side of the rack frame.
2. The X cable must be attached to the same numbered port on all adapters.

Chapter 11. Planning for cables 703

Figure 284. Two SAS RAID adapters to four disk expansion drawers in a multi-initiator HA RAID configuration

Note:
1. The X cable must be routed along the right side of the rack frame.
2. The X cable must be attached to the same numbered port on all adapters.

704 Site and hardware planning

When attaching only hard disk drives, it is also possible to cascade a second disk expansion drawer off of two out of
the three drawers for a maximum of five disk expansion drawers per adapter. Refer to Figure 264 on page 687.

Notes:
v Disk expansion drawers can be cascaded only one level deep.
v The X cable must be routed along the right side of the rack frame.
v The X cable must be attached to the same numbered port on all adapters.

Figure 285. Two Tri-port SAS adapters to disk expansion drawers in a multi-initiator HA raid configuration

Two SAS adapters to disk expansion drawer - multi-initiator HA JBOD

configuration

Figure 286 on page 706 illustrates connecting two SAS adapters to a disk expansion drawer in a unique
JBOD configuration.

Chapter 11. Planning for cables 705

Figure 286. Two RAID SAS adapters to a disk expansion drawer in a multi-initiator HA JBOD configuration

Note: This configuration is only supported by the AIX and Linux operating systems with specific SAS
adapters and requires special user configuration setup. Refer to the SAS RAID controllers for AIX or the
SAS RAID controllers for Linux for additional information.

PCIe SAS adapter in PCIe 12x I/O drawer to the internal SAS disk slots

There are several possible configurations for attaching PCIe SAS adapters to the internal SAS disk slots in
the PCIe 12X I/O drawer, and multiple ways of setting up the disk layout within the drawer. The disk
unit partitions switch setting on the rear of the PCIe 12X I/O drawer controls the grouping of the disk
units within the drawer. This will also affect the way the adapter or adapters are cabled to specific ports
on the PCIe 12X I/O drawer. The desired switch position should be selected before attaching the AT
cables. If the disk unit partitions switch is changed, the PCIe 12X I/O drawer must be powered off and
on for the new position to be detected.

All internal disk units are attached using AT cables. There are also options where other external
expansion drawers might be connected to these same SAS adapters. External disk expansion drawers are
attached using YO cables for single adapter configurations or X cables for two adapter configurations.
External media expansion drawers are attached using AE cables for single adapter configurations.
External media expansion drawers are not supported for two adapter configurations.

For complete details and examples of these configurations within the PCIe 12X I/O drawer, see
Configuring the 5802 disk-drive subsystem. Figure Figure 287 on page 707 illustrates the rear view of a
typical connection from two PCIe SAS adapters to the PCIe 12X I/O drawer. Use the AT cable to attach
from an adapter port to a SAS port on the PCIe 12X I/O drawer.

706 Site and hardware planning

Figure 287. Two RAID SAS adapters to a disk expansion drawer in a multi-initiator HA JBOD configuration

Related information:
Installing and configuring Solid State Drives

Cable connectors
Use the Cable connectors table to select a cable connector for your server.
Table 715. Cable connectors
Number Description iSeries connector
2811 25 Mbps (UTP-3) I/O adapter RJ-45
2812 45 Mbps (DS-3) I/O adapter BNC
2815 155 Mbps (UTP-5) I/O adapter RJ-45
2816 155 Mbps (MMF) I/O adapter SC
2818 155 Mbps (SMF) I/O adapter SC
2819 34 Mbps (E-3) I/O adapter BNC

Twinaxial console requirements

A twinaxial console allows you to use a basic command line interface and does not require you to use a
personal computer as a system console.

A twinaxial console requires:

v A console monitor and keyboard.
v A twinaxial console cable (supplied by the customer). The twinaxial console cable must be ordered
separately. See Twinaxial cables to verify the correct part number required for the console.

Chapter 11. Planning for cables 707

Local console directly attached to the server
Use this diagram to directly attach your server to a local console.

Ordering server cables

Follow these steps to order cables for your server.

To order your server cables, follow these steps:

1. Check out General Cabling Considerations.
2. Figure out how much cable you need by consulting the site plan you drew.
3. Click types of cable to view specifications and part numbers.
v Twinaxial cables (workstations, remote workstation controllers, host servers)
v Operations Console Cables
4. Write down the type and quantity of cables you need in the Workstation Information Form 3B.
5. Using the information you entered in the form, order your cables. Make sure you specify:
v Type of cable (for instance, twinaxial)
v Lengths and quantity of cable (as in, ten 1.8 m (6 ft) cables, and so on)
v Type of covering if applicable (like vinyl- or Teflon-covered twinaxial cables)
Remember to order any necessary cable accessories, such as adapters and T connectors.
Note: If you are ordering cables from IBM, you must specify part numbers and, in some cases, length
or feature number. Verify the cable part tables (twinaxial cables and iSeries Access Console cables).

For more details on cables, contact an IBM service representative.

Related reference:
“Workstation Information Form 3B” on page 501
Use this form to record the type and quantity of cables you need for your server.

Twinaxial cables
Use this information to plan for devices that require twinaxial cables.
Related reference:
“General twinaxial cabling considerations” on page 709
Use these guidelines when planning your twinaxial cables.

708 Site and hardware planning

“Twinaxial workstations cabling configurations for model 9406-7xx and 9406-8xx 8-port attachment”
Use the cabling twinaxial workstations to the twinaxial 8-port workstation attachment figure to cable
your server.
“Distance guidelines for workstation cabling” on page 710
Use these distance guidelines to cable your workstation with various equipment.
“Twinaxial cables from IBM” on page 711
Use the Twinaxial cables table to choose a cable for your server.

General twinaxial cabling considerations

Use these guidelines when planning your twinaxial cables.
v Cable types: To connect twinaxial devices (that is, workstations) to your server, you can use
vinyl-covered cables, Teflon-covered cables, or both. The only major difference between vinyl- and
Teflon-covered cables is that Teflon-covered cables should be used for installation in an air plenum.
v Adapters: If you plan to connect two or more lengths of cable, order cable-to-cable adapters for the
type of cable you are using. Do not splice cables.
v Maximum workstation distance: The last workstation in your series can be no more than 1525 m (5000
ft) in cable distance away from your host server or remote workstation controller.
v Cable junctions: A cable junction occurs when a cable attaches to a workstation or when an adapter
which joins two cables. (Each pair of connections to a device is considered one junction.) Do not make
more than 11 cable junctions per line.
v Outdoor cables: If you plan to install cables outside a building, consult a qualified service
representative.
v Cabling configurations: See diagrams of how to arrange twinaxial workstations.
v Cable placement and electrical equipment: Do not install workstation cables near any power lines
(transmitting more than 440 volts) or electrical equipment (using more than 440 volts). You can install
cables near equipment of less than 440 volts if you follow distance guidelines.
v Workstation connections: Workstations have two sockets each for cable connections. Workstations are
connected in a series. Your server can have up to seven workstation addresses on each twinaxial port.
The last workstation in each of your series must have a cable terminator. Most workstations have this
feature built in. Older workstations might need an external terminating plug. Review your workstation
documentation.
Related reference:
“Twinaxial workstations cabling configurations for model 9406-7xx and 9406-8xx 8-port attachment”
Use the cabling twinaxial workstations to the twinaxial 8-port workstation attachment figure to cable
your server.
“Distance guidelines for workstation cabling” on page 710
Use these distance guidelines to cable your workstation with various equipment.

Twinaxial workstations cabling configurations for model 9406-7xx and

9406-8xx 8-port attachment
Use the cabling twinaxial workstations to the twinaxial 8-port workstation attachment figure to cable
your server.

This figure shows the cabling for twinaxial workstations to the twinaxial 8-port workstation attachment.
Your unit might look different, but the same cabling concepts still apply.

Chapter 11. Planning for cables 709

Figure 288. Cabling twinaxial workstations to the twinaxial 8-port workstation attachment

Distance guidelines for workstation cabling

Use these distance guidelines to cable your workstation with various equipment.

When using the following equipment, it must be the minimum distance listed from workstation cables.

Fluorescent, Neon, or Incandescent lighting fixtures Minimum distance from workstation cables 127 mm (5
in.)
Unshielded Power Lines or Electrical Equipment 0 - 2 Minimum distance from workstation cables 127 mm (5
kVA 2 - 5 kVA 5+ kVA in.) 305 mm (12 in.) 610 mm (24 in)

With Workstation Cable Enclosed in Metallic Conduit

Unshielded Power Lines or Electrical Equipment 0 - 2 Minimum distance from workstation cables 63.5 mm (2.5
kVA 2 - 5 kVA 5+ kVA in.) 152 mm (6 in.) 305 mm (12 in.)

With Workstation Cable Enclosed in Grounded Metallic Conduit

Power Lines Enclosed in Grounded Metallic Conduit 0 - Minimum distance from workstation cables 30.5 mm (1.2
2 kVA 2 - 5 kVA 5+ kVA in.) 76 mm (3 in.) 152 mm (6 in.)

710 Site and hardware planning

Twinaxial cables from IBM
Use the Twinaxial cables table to choose a cable for your server.

When ordering cables from IBM, remember to specify the total length of each cable.
Table 716. Twinaxial cables
Part name Part number
Cable Assembly (cable in specified length with IBM part 4236482 (with vinyl covering)
connectors at both ends)
IBM part 7362062 (with Teflon covering)
Adapter (cable-to-cable) IBM part 7362230 Amphenol 82-5588
Bulk Cable (cable in specified length, without connectors) IBM part 7362211 (with vinyl covering) AWM
IBM part 7362061 (with Teflon covering) CL2P
IBM part 483699 (tubing used with Teflon-covered cables)
CL2P
Connector (single plug connector) IBM part 7362229 82-5589 Amphenol AMP 22724-1
Terminator Plug IBM part 7362188 AMP 227504-1, 110 Ohms (twinaxial
cabling)
IBM part 6091068 AMP 227504-2, 150 Ohms (IBM cabling
server)
T Connector IBM part 94X3678 or 81X5387
Station Protector IBM part 7362426 (single station protector)
IBM part 7361807 (pair of station protectors)
Twinaxial Connector Shield Twinaxial Connector Shield Kits: IBM part 94X3698
Connector Kit (two plug connectors) IBM part 7362268 (for vinyl-covered cables)
IBM part 7362063 (for Teflon-covered cables)

Operations Console and remote control panel cables

Use the Operations Console cables and Remote control panel cables tables to determine the cable
specifications for your server.

You can connect a personal computer to your server as an operations console. The PC is attached through
a serial connection to a communications input/output adapter (IOA) installed on the server. You can then
use the PC as your Operations Console. Use a special Operations Console cable to do this.
Table 717. Operations Console cables
Model Part number Cable length Number
Models 9406-730 and 97H7556 6 m (19.7 ft) 2699
9406-740 (#36-pin, square)
Models 9406-170, 9406-250, 97H7557 or 39J5835 6 m (19.7 ft) 2721, 2742, 2745, 2771, 2793
and 9406-720
Models 9406-270, 9406-8xx, 97H7557 or 39J5835 6 m (19.7 ft) 2742, 2745, 2771, 2793
SSBx, 9406-520, 9111-520,
9406-550, 9406-570, and
9117-570, 9406-595
9406-MMA, 8204-E8A, 97H7557 or 39J5835 6 m (19.7 ft) 2742, 2793, 576C
8203-E4A 9407-M15,
9408-M25, 9409-M50

Chapter 11. Planning for cables 711

Table 718. Remote control panel cables
Remote control panel cables
Model Part number
Models 9406-270, 9406-8xx, and SB3
53P5704 (substitute for
04N5592)
All other servers, except POWER5 systems (and later) 97H7591

Notes:
1. All POWER5 systems (and later) models do not support a directly attached remote control panel. To
get remote control panel functions on the PC, you must use either the LAN-connected configuration
or the virtual control panel function in the console's serial cable.
2. For a local console directly attached to the server the console and the remote control panel functions
each need a special cable.
3. If you are currently using electronic customer support (ECS), you must move the electronic customer
support cabling to another communications port before trying to install Operations Console directly
attached. Note: You might need to reassign your ECS resources.
4. Any supported adapter might be used in a logical partition. There are cases where the Multi-function
Input/Output Processor (MFIOP) might not support certain Input/Output Adapter (IOA) types in a
logical partition. When in doubt, contact your sales representative. For more information, see Install
the operations console cable.
5. Part number 39J5835 meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of
Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

Optical cable fiber specifications

Learn about the optical fiber cable specifications for your server.

The preferred optical fiber for the server is 50/125 multimode fiber. This is because its bandwidth is a
factor of three higher than 62.5/125 at the 780 nm wavelength at which the system operates. The 62.5/125
multimode fiber is also supported but at reduced distances. For 3xx systems at 220 Mbps and 5xx, 6x0,
Sx0, and SB1 servers at 266 Mbps, a 50/125 fiber will support a distance of 2000 meters. A 62.5/125 fiber
will support a distance of 700 meters.

For 5xx, 6x0, Sx0, and SB1 systems that use the higher speed 1063 Mbps link, optical technology with
50/125 fiber will support a distance of 500 meters. A 62.5/125 fiber will support a distance of 175 meters.

Care should be taken so that optical fiber cables are not coiled to a diameter less than 16 cm (6.3 in) and
not bent to a radius less than 3 cm (1.2 in). Do not grip optical cables with mechanical tools.

More information about optical cable installation can be found in 940x Installation and Upgrade, SY44-5950.

Note: Although optical technology will support these distances, not all functions can operate at those
distances in all cases. Review disk unit and tape unit operation functions before supporting distances
beyond 100 meters.

Cable specifications for 50/125

v Bandwidth:
400 MHz-km at 780 nm. This is equivalent to 500 MHz-km at 850 nm.
v Attenuation:
4.0 dB/km at 780 nm. This is equivalent to 3.0 dB/km at 850 nm.

712 Site and hardware planning

v Cable specification for 62.5/125:
v Bandwidth:
160 MHz-km at 850 nm.
v Attenuation:
4.0 dB/km at 850 nm wavelength.

Depending on the data rate, the allowable link loss available to the user varies from 6 to 12 dB. Typical
optical fiber connectors have a loss of 0.2 dB with a 0.5 dB maximum loss, and splices run 0.1 to 0.3 dB
loss.
v Connectors for 3xx systems:
The connections to the optical ports of I/O Bus Expansion are SC duplex connectors. The jumper
cables available with the server when shipped are duplex cables. These cables terminate with SC
duplex connectors with a PC polish. Use the simplex ST connectors for the system power control
network (SPCN).
v Connectors for 5xx, 6x0, Sx0, and SB1 systems:
The connector used for the 266 and 1063 data rate is slightly different than that used on the 220 Mbps
links. For 3xx, a duplex SC connector is used. The 5xx, 6x0, Sx0, and SB1 machines have been changed
to conform to industry standard Fiber Channel Support (FCS) duplex SC connector. The FCS SC
connector is similar in appearance to the 3xx duplex SC connector but the keying orientation is
different. The FCS duplex connector used for 5xx, 6x0, Sx0, and SB1 also employs two SC connectors
joined together but the two SC connectors are rotated 90 - from the connectors used on 3xx systems.
v 2618/8664 Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Adapter
v 2665/8665 Shielded Twisted-Pair Distributed Data Interface (SDDI) Adapter
v 2666 High Speed Communications Adapter
v Wireless LAN Communications
v Integrated FAX Adapter
Related information:
940x Installation and Upgrade

Labeling cables
Labeling the cables you install helps you keep track the location of all your cables.

You can use label templates to label your cables. Print them, complete the information, and tape a label to
each end of each cable. The label contains all the information you need to know about the cable and
where it should be connected. For an example of the information on a label, see Label templates.

Label templates
Use the label template to clearly identify the cables used on your server.

Connect this end to: Other end connects to:

Device type/name

Location

Device address

Socket/port

Chapter 11. Planning for cables 713

 SX21–9920

Connect this end to: Other end connects to:

Device type/name

Location

Device address

Socket/port
SX21–9920

Connect this end to: Other end connects to:

Device type/name

Location

Device address

Socket/port
SX21–9920

Cables available from IBM

Use the Cables available from IBM table to find cables available from IBM.

Note: Some parts might be labeled with part numbers that are different from the ones specified in your
order. Check to make sure your parts match the parts in this table.
Table 719. Cables available from IBM
Fire-resistance
Description Length Part number CIN characteristics
For racks attached to model B
Bus Cable 4.0 m (13.1 ft) 62X3427 9984 _
Bus Cable 8.0 m (26.2 ft) 62X3428 9985 _
Power Sequence
Cable 3.0 m (10.0 ft) 89X2926 _ _
Power Sequence
Cable 6.0 m (19.7 ft) 89X2925 _ _
Power Sequence
Cable 12.0 m (39.3 ft) 93X2000 9120 CL2, FT4
Power Sequence
Cable 30.0 m (98.4 ft) 93X2147 9117 CL2, FT4
Power Sequence
Cable (plenum) 30.0 m (98.4 ft) 21F5135 9117 CL2P, FT6

714 Site and hardware planning

Table 719. Cables available from IBM (continued)
Fire-resistance
Description Length Part number CIN characteristics
Power Sequence
Cable 60.0 m (196.8 ft) 93X2148 9118 CL2, FT4
Power Sequence
Cable (plenum) 60.0 m (196.8 ft) 21F5136 9117 CL2P, FT6
SPD Communications Cable Non-Enhanced
RS232 Cable 15.2 m (50 ft) 21F9353 9836 CL2, FT4
Germany
RS232 Cable Japan 15.5 m (50 ft) 21F9349 9836 CL2, FT4
RS232 Cable 6.1 m (20 ft) 22F0149 9022 CL2, FT4
RS232 Cable 15.2 m (50 ft) 22F9348 9836 CL2, FT4
RS232 Cable 22F0150 9022 CL2, FT4
Germany 6.1 m (20 ft)
RS232 Cable Japan 6.1 m (20 ft) 22F0151 9022 CL2, FT4
RS366 Cable 6.1 m (20 ft) 72X5643 9840 CL2, FT4
RS366 Cable Japan 6.1 m (20 ft) 21F4415 9840 CL2, FT4
SPD Communications Cable Enhanced
V.24 Cable 6.1 m (20 ft) 22F0152 9203 CL2, FT4
V.24 Cable Germany 6.1 m (20 ft) 22F0153 9023 CL2, FT4
V.24 Cable Japan 6.1 m (20 ft) 22F0154 9023 CL2, FT4
V.24 Cable 15.2 m (50 ft) 21F9350 9835 CL2, FT4
V.24 Cable Japan 15.2 m (50 ft) 21F9351 9835 CL2, FT4
V.24 Cable Germany 15.2 m (50 ft) 21F9352 9835 CL2, FT4
V.24 Cable 24.2 m (80 ft) 74F1837 9869 CL2, FT4
Other SPD Communications Cables
X.21 Cable 6.1 m (20 ft) 72X5640 9021 CL2, FT4
X.21 Cable 15.2 m (50 ft) 21F9356 9839 CL2, FT4
V.35 Cable 6.1 m (20 ft) 72X5641 9020 CL2, FT4
V.35 Cable 15.2 m (50 ft) 21F9357 9838 CL2, FT4
V.35 Cable 24.4 m (80 ft) 74F1839 9870 CL2, FT4
2 Port Comm Cable 3 m (9.8 ft) 21F9345 9843 CL2, FT4
SPD and PCI Twinaxial Workstation Attachment Cables
Twinaxial 8 Port
Cable 6.1 m (20 ft) 21F5093 9842 CL2, FT4
Removable Media Device Attachment (2621)
SCSI 1 Cable 2.6 m (8.5 ft) 17G4142 9826 CL2, FT4
SCSI 1 Cable 4 m (13.1 ft) 6495268 9826 CL2, FT4
SCSI 1 Cable 12 m (39.3 ft) 6495269 9827 CL2, FT4
SCSI 1 Cable 20 m (65.6 ft) 21F4980 9846 CL2, FT4
Direct Access Storage Device Controller (6500)
SCSI 2 Cable 2 m (6.6 ft) 21F9043 9870 CL2, FT4
SCSI 2 Cable 4 m (13.1 ft) 21F9044 9871 CL2, FT4

Chapter 11. Planning for cables 715

Table 719. Cables available from IBM (continued)
Fire-resistance
Description Length Part number CIN characteristics
SCSI 2 Cable 64 m (19.7 ft) 56F0382 9872 CL2, FT4
SCSI 2 Cable 24 m (78.7 ft) 21F9045 9873 CL2, FT4
Tape and Disk Device Controller (6501)
SCSI P Cable 2 m (6.6 ft) 17G2007 9875 CL2, FT4
SCSI P Cable 4 m (13.1 ft) 21F9047 9876 CL2, FT4
SCSI P Cable 6 m (19.7 ft) 56F0381 9877 CL2, FT4
SCSI P Cable 24 m (78.7 ft) 21F9048 9878 CL2, FT4
Tape Device Controller (6534, 2729)
3490 model Fxx and
3570 Cables
SCSI 2 Cable 0.5 m (2 ft) 49G6456 5205 CL2, FT4
SCSI 2 Cable 4.5 m (15 ft) 49G6457 5245 CL2, FT4
SCSI 2 Cable 12 m (39 ft) 49G6458 5212 CL2, FT4
SCSI 2 Cable 18 m (59 ft) 49G6459 5218 CL2, FT4
3590 Cables
SCSI 2 Cable 4.5 m (15 ft) 05H4648 5145 CL2, FT4
SCSI 2 Cable 12 m (39 ft) 05H4649 5112 CL2, FT4
SCSI 2 Cable 18 m (59 ft) 05H4650 5118 CL2, FT4
SCSI 2 Cable 25 m (82 ft) 05H4651 5125 CL2, FT4
Tape and Disk Feature Device Controller (6112)
DFCI Cable .6 m (2 ft) 6495253 9801 CL2, FT4
DFCI Cable 1.5 m (5 ft) 6495254 9802 CL2, FT4
DFCI Cable 2.5 m (8.2 ft) 6495250 9803 CL2, FT4
DFCI Cable 4 m (13.1 ft) 6495252 9804 CL2, FT4
DFCI Cable 6 m (19.7 ft) 6495251 9805 CL2, FT4
DFCI Cable 10 m (32.8 ft) 6495255 9806 CL2, FT4
DFCI Cable 20 m (65.6 ft) 6495256 9807 CL2, FT4
DFCI Cable 30 m (98.4 ft) 6495257 9808 CL2, FT4
DFCI Cable
(plenum) 30 m (98.4 ft) 6495275 9811 CL2P, FT6
DFCI Cable 40 m (131.2 ft) 6495258 9809 CL2, FT4
DFCI Cable
(plenum) 40 m (131.2 ft) 6495276 9812 CL2P, FT6
DFCI Cable 60 m (196.8 ft) 6495264 9810 CL2, FT4
DFCI Cable
(plenum) 60 m (196.8 ft) 6495277 9813 CL2P, FT6
SPD High-Speed Communications Adapter (2666)
X.21 Cable 6.1 m (20 ft) 17G3987 9885 CL2, FT4
V.35 Cable 6.1 m (20 ft) 17G3991 9879 CL2, FT4
V.35 Cable 24.4 m (80 ft) 17G3992 9880 CL2, FT4

716 Site and hardware planning

Table 719. Cables available from IBM (continued)
Fire-resistance
Description Length Part number CIN characteristics
RS449 Cable 6.1 m (20 ft) 17G4000 9882 CL2, FT4
RS449 Cable 24.4 m (80 ft) 17G4001 9883 CL2, FT4
RS449 Cable 45.7 m (150 ft) 17G4002 9884 CL2, FT4
PCI and SPD Miscellaneous server cables
Diskette Cable 2.4 m (7.9 ft) 46G3658 9886 CL2, FT4
Diskette/Twinaxial
Cable 2.4 m (7.9 ft) 46G3585 9887 CL2, FT4
BBU cable 2.4 m (7.9 ft) 86G7712 5144 AWM, FT1
Ethernet 3.0 m (9.8 ft) 86G7691 9025 CL2, FT4
Token Ring 2.44 m (8 ft) 6339098 9024 CL2
For model 9406 and Expansion Units
SPCN Cable
(plenum) 0.6 m (1.96 ft) 21F9362 9216 CL2P, FT6
SPCN Cable
(plenum) 1.2 m (3.9 ft) 17G2017 9220 CL2P, FT6
SPCN Cable
(plenum) 2.0 m (6.6 ft) 87G6235 9206 CL2P, FT6
SPCN Cable
(plenum) 6.0 m (19.7 ft) 21F9469 9219 CL2P, FT6
SPCN Cable
(plenum) 15.0 m (49.2 ft) 21F9358 9213 CL2P, FT6
SPCN Cable
(plenum) 30.0 m (98.4 ft) 21F9359 9214 CL2P, FT6
SPCN Cable
(plenum) 60.0 m (196.8 ft) 21F9360 9215 CL2P, FT6
SPCN Cable
(plenum) 60.0 m (196.8 ft) 21F9414 9211 OFNP, OFN FT6
SPCN Cable
(plenum) 100 m (328 ft) 21F9415 9212 OFNP, OFN FT6
BUS Cable 4.0 m (13.1 ft) 62X3427 9984 AWM(VW-1)
BUS Cable 8.0 m (26.2 ft) 62X3428 9985 AWM(VW-1)
BUS Cable (plenum) 6.0 m (19.7 ft) 46F2440 9851 OFNP, OFN FT6
BUS Cable (plenum) 10.0 m (32.8 ft) 46F2441 9852 OFNP, OFN FT6
BUS Cable (plenum) 20.0 m (65.6 ft) 46F2442 9853 OFNP, OFN FT6
BUS Cable (plenum) 6.0 m (19.7 ft) 54G3385 Copper
BUS Cable (plenum) 10.0 m (32.8 ft) 54G3386 Copper
BUS Cable (plenum) 20.0 m (65.6 ft) 54G3387 Copper
BUS Cable 2.4 m (8 ft) 72X5638 _ _
BUS Cable 3 m (9.8 ft) 72X5638 _ _
ISDN Cable 7.0 m (22.9 ft) 72X6348 9844 AWM(VW-1)
ISDN Cable (France) 7.0 m (22.9 ft) 17G2528 9844 AWM(VW-1)

Chapter 11. Planning for cables 717

Table 719. Cables available from IBM (continued)
Fire-resistance
Description Length Part number CIN characteristics
ISDN Cable
(Switzerland) 7.0 m (22.9 ft) 8191781 9844 AWM(VW-1)
ISDN Cable (Europe
NIA) 7.0 m (22.9 ft) 8191822 9844 AWM(VW-1)
Data Encryption
Cable 6.1 m (20.0 ft) 85F8109 9848 CL2, FT4
Operations Console Cables
Operations Console
serial remote control
panel cable for
models 9406-170,
9406-250, 9406-720,
9406-730, and
9406-740 6.1 m (20.0 ft) 97H7591 0381 CL, FT4
Operations Console
(P for 2721 and 2745)
for models 9406-170,
9406-250 and 9406-720 6.1 m (20.0 ft) 97H7557 0367 CL2, FT4, or CMG
Operations Console
(D for 2699) for
models 9406-730 and
9406-740 6.1 m (20.0 ft) 97H7556 0328 CL2, FT4
Operations Console
for models 9406-8xx,
SBx, 9406-270,
9406-520, 9111-520,
9406-550,9406-570,
9117-570, 9406-595,
9406-MMA,
8204-E8A, 8203-E4A,
9407-M15, 9408-M25 6.0 m (20.0 ft) 97H7557 or 39J5835 0367 CL2, FT4, or CMG
Operations Console
parallel remote
control panel cable
for models 9406-270,
9406-8xx, and SBx
Note: Not supported
in V5R4 and later. 53P5704
PCI Communications Cables for models 15X, 170, 600, 620, S10, and S20
RS232 6.1 m (20.0 ft) 44H7480 0348 CL2, CMG
RS232, Germany 6.1 m (20.0 ft) 44H7482 0348 CL2, CMG
RS232, Japan 6.1 m (20.0 ft) 44H7484 0348 CL2, CMG
V.24 6.1 m (20.0 ft) 44H7486 0350 CL2, CMG
V.24, Germany 6.1 m (20.0 ft) 44H7489 0350 CL2, CMG
V.24, Japan 6.1 m (20.0 ft) 44H7492 0350 CL2, CMG
V.35 6.1 m (20.0 ft) 44H7495 0353 CL2, CMG
V.36 6.1 m (20.0 ft) 44H7498 0356 CL2, CMG
X.21 6.1 m (20.0 ft) 44H7501 0359 CL2, CMG

718 Site and hardware planning

Table 719. Cables available from IBM (continued)
Fire-resistance
Description Length Part number CIN characteristics
PCI Communications Cables for models 600, S10, 620, and S20
RS232 Cable 15.2 m (50 ft) 44H7481 0349 CL2, FT4
15.2 m (50 ft)
RS232 Cable Germany 44H7483 0349 CL2, FT4
RS232 Cable 15.5 m (50 ft) 44H7485 0349 CL2, FT4
V.24 Cable 15.2 m (50 ft) 44H7487 0351 CL2, FT4
V.24 Cable 15.2 m (50 ft) 44H7490 0351 CL2, FT4
Germany
V.24 Cable 15.5 m (50 ft)-Japan 44H7493 0351 CL2, FT4
V.24 Cable 24.4 m (80 ft) 44H7488 0352 CL2, FT4
24.4 m (80
V.24 Cable ft)-Germany 44H7491 0352 CL2, FT4
V.24 Cable 24.4 m (80 ft)-Japan 44H7494 0352 CL2, FT4
V.35 Cable 15.2 m (50 ft) 44H7496 0354 CL2, FT4
V.35 Cable 24.4 m (80 ft) 44H7497 0355 CL2, FT4
V.36 Cable 15.2 m (50 ft) 44H7499 0357 CL2, FT4
V.36 Cable 45.7 m (150 ft) 44H7500 0358 CL2, FT4
X.21 Cable 15.2 m (50 ft) 44H7502 0360 CL2, FT4
SPD Book Type Communications Cables for models 6x0, Sx0, and SB1
RS232 Cable 24.4 m (80 ft) 97H7389 0329
RS232 Cable
Germany 24.4 m (80 ft) 97H7390 0329
RS232 Cable Japan 24.4 m (80 ft) 97H7391 0329
RS232 Cable 6.1 m (20 ft) 21H3764 0330 CL2, FT4
RS232 Cable
Germany 6.1 m (20 ft) 21H3765 0330 CL2, FT4
RS232 Cable Japan 6.1 m (20 ft) 21H3766 0330 CL2, FT4
RS232 Cable 15.2 m (50 ft) 21H3767 0331 CL2, FT4
RS232 Cable
Germany 15.2 m (50 ft) 21H3768 0331 CL2, FT4
RS232 Cable Japan 15.2 m (50 ft) 21H3769 0331 CL2, FT4
V.24 Cable 6.1 m (20 ft) 21H3770 0332 CL2, FT4
6.1 m (20
V.24 Cable ft)-Germany 21H3771 0332 CL2, FT4
V.24 Cable 6.1 m (20 ft)-Japan 21H3772 0332 CL2, FT4
V.24 Cable 15.2 m (50 ft) 21H3773 0333 CL2, FT4
15.2 m (50
V.24 Cable ft)-Germany 21H3774 0333 CL2, FT4
V.24 Cable 15.5 m (50 ft)-Japan 21H3775 0333 CL2, FT4
V.24 Cable 24.4 m (80 ft) 21H3776 0334 CL2, FT4
24.4 m (80
V.24 Cable ft)-Germany 21H3777 0334 CL2, FT4

Chapter 11. Planning for cables 719

Table 719. Cables available from IBM (continued)
Fire-resistance
Description Length Part number CIN characteristics
V.24 Cable 24.4 m (80 ft)-Japan 21H3778 0334 CL2, FT4
V.36 Cable 6.1 m (20 ft) 21H3787 0335 CL2, FT4
V.36 Cable 15.2 m (50 ft) 21H3788 0336 CL2, FT4
V.36 Cable 45.7 m (150 ft) 21H3789 0337 CL2, FT4
V.35 Cable 6.1 m (20 ft) 21H3792 0338 CL2, FT4
V.35 Cable 15.2 m (50 ft) 21H3785 0339 CL2, FT4
V.35 Cable 24.4 m (80 ft) 21H3786 0340 CL2, FT4
X.21 Cable 6.1 m (20 ft) 21H3782 0341 CL2, FT4
X.21 Cable 15.2 m (50 ft) 21H3783 0342 CL2, FT4
Fax Coupler Cables
Fax Coupler Cable
Belgium 21H4903
Fax Coupler Cable
Israel 21H4905
Fax Coupler Cable
South Africa 21H4904
Fax Coupler Cable
Italy 75G3802
Fax Coupler Cable
France 75G3803
Fax Coupler Cable
Germany 75G3804
Fax Coupler Cable
United Kingdom 75G3805
Fax Coupler Cable
Sweden 75G3806
Fax Coupler Cable
Australia 75G3807
Fax Coupler Cable
China (Hong Kong
S.A.R.) 75G3808
Fax Coupler Cable
Finland 75G3809
Fax Coupler Cable
Netherlands 75G3810
Fax Coupler Cable
Switzerland 75G3811
Fax Coupler Cable
Denmark 75G3812
Fax Coupler Cable
US/Canada 87G6236
Miscellaneous Cables for models 9406-640, S30, 9406-730, 9406-650, S40, 9406-740, and SB1
HSL Cable 15 m (32.8 ft) 21H7377 0346 CL2, CMG, or FT4
Cables for servers 9406-270, 9406-820, 9406-830, 9406-840, SB2, and SB3

720 Site and hardware planning

Table 719. Cables available from IBM (continued)
Fire-resistance
Description Length Part number CIN characteristics
VS COM Cable 6 m (19.8 ft) 44L0007 031A
HSL Cable 250/500 3 m (10 ft) 44L0005 0343
HSL Cable 250/500 6 m (19.8 ft) 97H7490 0361
HSL Cable 250/500 15 m (32.8 ft) 04N7014 0368
ISDN PRI Cable WT 10 m (32.8 ft) 97H7698 984B
ISDN PRI Cable BRI 10 m (32.8 ft) 97H7699 984C
ISDN PRI Cable US 10 m (32.8 ft) 97H7697 984A
JTAG A Cable 6 m (19.8 ft) 97H7468 033A
JTAG E Cable 6 m (19.8 ft) 97H7604 033C
JTAG C Cable 6 m (19.8 ft) 97H7487 033B
SPCN 2 Port Cable 3 m (9.8 ft) 04N2652 036A
RS232 Cable 24.4 m (80 ft) 97H7386 0365
RS232 Cable
Germany 24.4 m (80 ft) 97H7387 0365
V.24 Cable Japan 24.4 m (80 ft) 97H7388 0365
High-Speed Link Cables for models 9406-650, 9406-740, S40, SB1, 9406-820, 9406-830, and 9406-840
HSL Cable 6 m (19.7 ft) 21H7643 0347 CL2, CMG or FT4
System Interconnect Cables for models 65X
OP Panel 5 m (16.4 ft) 21H7374 9819 CL2, CMG
JTAG Cable 3 m (9.8 ft) 21H7375 9817 CL2, CMG
Cables for models 9406-870 and 9406-890
HSL (copper) 3.0 m 44L0005 1460
HSL (copper) 6.0 m 97H7490 1461
HSL (copper) 15.0 m 97H7491 1462
HSL (optical) 6.0 m 21P5014 1470
HSL (optical) 30.0 m 21P5015 1471
HSL (optical) 100.0 m 21P5016 1472
HSL (optical) 250.0 m 21P6326 1473
HSL to HSL2 (copper) 6.0 m 21P5477 1474
HSL to HSL2 (copper) 10.0 m 21P5458 1475
HSL2 (copper) 1.0 m 21P5454 1481
HSL2 (copper) 3.5 m 53P2676 1482
HSL2 (copper) 10.0 m 21P5456 1483
HSL2 (copper) 15.0 m 21P5457 1485
IPCS video extension CL2, CL2, CMG or
cables for NT 4.5 m (15.0 ft) 44H8676 0325 FT4
IPCS mouse or
keyboard extension
cables for NT 5.0 m (16.0 ft) 44H8677 0325 AWM (VW-1)
RS232 6.0 m (20.0 ft) 44H7480 0348 CL2, CMG or FT4

Chapter 11. Planning for cables 721

Table 719. Cables available from IBM (continued)
Fire-resistance
Description Length Part number CIN characteristics
RS232, Germany 6.0 m (20.0 ft) 44H7482 0348 CL2, CMG or FT4
RS232, Japan 6.0 m (20.0 ft) 44H7484 0348 CL2, CMG or FT4
RS232 15.0 m (50.0 ft) 44H7481 0349 CL2, CMG or FT4
RS232, Germany 15.0 m (50.0 ft) 44H7483 0349 CL2, CMG or FT4
RS232, Japan 15.0 m (50.0 ft) 44H7485 0349 CL2, CMG or FT4
V.35 6.0 m (20.0 ft) 44H7495 0353 CL2, CMG or FT4
V.36 6.0 m (20.0 ft) 44H7498 0356 CL2, CMG or FT4
X.21 6.0 m (20.0 ft) 44H7501 0359 CL2, CMG or FT4
X.21 15.0 m (50.0 ft) 44H7502 0360 CL2, CMG or FT4
RS232 24.5 m (80.0 ft) 97H7386 0365 CL2, CMG or FT4
RS232, Germany 24.5 m (80.0 ft) 97H7387 0365 CL2, CMG or FT4
RS232, Japan 24.5 m (80.0 ft) 97H7388 0365 CL2, CMG or FT4
LC-SC adapter kit
(50um) 0.2 m (0.7 ft) 11P1373 0371 OFNR, FT4
LC-SC adapter kit
(62.5um) 0.2 m (0.7 ft) 11P1374 0372 OFNR, FT4
Remote control panel
cable 6.0 m (20.0 ft) 53P5704 0382 CL2, CMH
Modem cable -
Austria 10.0 m (33.0 ft) 21H4902 1010 AWM (VW-1)
Modem cable -
Belgium 10.0 m (33.0 ft) 21H4903 1011 AWM (VW-1)
Modem cable - Africa 10.0 m (33.0 ft) 21H4904 1012 AWM (VW-1)
Modem cable - Israel 10.0 m (33.0 ft) 21H4905 1013 AWM (VW-1)
Modem cable - Italy 10.0 m (33.0 ft) 75G3802 1014 AWM (VW-1)
Modem cable - France 10.0 m (33.0 ft) 75G3803 1015 AWM (VW-1)
Modem cable -
Germany 10.0 m (33.0 ft) 75G3804 1016 AWM (VW-1)
Modem cable - UK 10.0 m (33.0 ft) 75G3805 1017 AWM (VW-1)
Modem cable -
Iceland/Sweden 10.0 m (33.0 ft) 75G3806 1018 AWM (VW-1)
Modem cable -
Australia 10.0 m (33.0 ft) 75G3807 1019 IEC 60950 (V2)
Modem cable - China
(Hong Kong S.A.R.)
and New Zealand 10.0 m (33.0 ft) 75G3808 1020 AWM (VW-1)
Modem cable -
Finland and Norway 10.0 m (33.0 ft) 75G3809 1021 AWM (VW-1)
Modem cable -
Netherlands 10.0 m (33.0 ft) 75G3810 1022 AWM (VW-1)
Modem cable -
Switzerland 10.0 m (33.0 ft) 75G3811 1023 AWM (VW-1)

722 Site and hardware planning

Table 719. Cables available from IBM (continued)
Fire-resistance
Description Length Part number CIN characteristics
Modem cable -
Denmark 10.0 m (33.0 ft) 75G3812 1024 AWM (VW-1)
Modem cable -
US/Canada 10.0 m (33.0 ft) 87G6236 1025 AWM (VW-1)
SAS cables
SAS 4x AI cable 1 m (3.2 ft) 44V4041 FT4, CMG
SAS 4x AE cable 3 m (9.8 ft) 44V4163 FT4, CMG
SAS 4x AE cable 6 m (19.6 ft) 44V4164 FT4, CMG
SAS 4x EE cable 1 m (3.2 ft) 44V4147 FT4, CMG
SAS 4x EE cable 3 m (9.8 ft) 44V4148 FT4, CMG
SAS 4x EE cable 6 m (19.6 ft) 44V4149 FT4, CMG
SAS YO cable 1.5 m (4.9 ft) 44V4157 FT4, CMG
SAS YO cable 3 m (9.8 ft) 44V4158 FT4, CMG
SAS YO cable 6 m (19.6 ft) 44V4159 FT4, CMG
SAS YO cable 15 m (49.2 ft) 44V4160 FT4, CMG
SAS YI cable 1.5 m (4.9 ft) 44V4161 FT4, CMG
SAS YI cable 3 m (9.8 ft) 44V4162 FT4, CMG
SAS X cable 3 m (9.8 ft) 44V4154 FT4, CMG
SAS X cable 6 m (19.6 ft) 44V4155 FT4, CMG
SAS X cable 15 m (49.2 ft) 44V4156 FT4, CMG
SAS YR cable 1 m (3.2 ft) 44V4818 FT4, CMG
Split disk backplane
cable card for a 3/3
split 44V3557
Split disk backplane
cable card for a 6/0
split 44V3435
Disk backplane to
rear bulkhead 42R5751
Split disk backplane
to rear bulkhead 44V5252
Split disk backplane
to rear bulkhead 44V5253
Disk backplane to
rear bulkhead 44V3382
Note: Fire-resistance characteristics are defined in National Electrical Code, UL 1950/IEC 950/CSA 22.2-950.

Chapter 11. Planning for cables 723

724 Site and hardware planning
Chapter 12. Rack installation procedures for racks not
purchased at IBM
Learn the requirements and specifications for installing IBM systems into racks that were not purchased
at IBM.

This topic provides requirements and specifications for 19-inch racks used by certain systems. These
requirements and specifications are provided as an aid to help you understand the requirements to install
certain IBM systems into racks. It is your responsibility, working with your rack manufacturer, to ensure
that the rack chosen meets the requirements and specifications listed here.

Rack specifications

The general rack specifications are:

v The rack or cabinet must meet the EIA Standard EIA-310-D for 19-inch racks published August 24,
1992. The EIA-310-D standard specifies internal dimensions, for example, the width of the rack opening
(width of the chassis), the width of the module mounting flanges, the mounting hole spacing, and the
depth of the mounting flanges. The EIA-310-D standard does not control the overall external width of
the rack. There are no restrictions on the location of side walls and corner posts relative to the internal
mounting space.
The front rack opening must be 451 mm wide + 0.75 mm (17.75 in. + 0.03 in.), and the rail-mounting
holes must be 465 mm + 0.8 mm (18.3 in. + 0.03 in.) apart on center (horizontal width between vertical
columns of holes on the two front-mounting flanges and on the two rear-mounting flanges).

Top view of rack specifications dimensions

Figure 289. Top view of rack specifications dimensions

The vertical distance between mounting holes must consist of sets of three holes spaced (from bottom
to top) 15.9 mm (0.625 in.), 15.9 mm (0.625 in.), and 12.67 mm (0.5 in.) on center (making each three
hole set of vertical hole spacing 44.45 mm (1.75 in.) apart on center). The front and rear mounting
flanges in the rack or cabinet must be 719 mm (28.3 in.) apart and the internal width bounded by the
mounting flanges at least 494 mm (19.45 in.), for the IBM rails to fit in your rack or cabinet (see the
following figure).
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2007, 2009 725
 Rack specifications dimensions, top front view

Rack specifications dimensions, bottom front view

v The rack or cabinet must be capable of supporting an average load of 15.9 kg (35 lb) of product weight
per EIA unit.
For example, a four EIA drawer has a maximum drawer weight of 63.6 kg (140 lb).
The following rack hole sizes are supported for racks where IBM hardware is mounted:
– 7.1 mm plus or minus 0.1 mm
– 9.2 mm plus or minus 0.1 mm
– 12 mm plus or minus 0.1 mm
v Only ac power drawers are supported in the rack or cabinet. It is strongly recommended to use a
power distribution unit that meets the same specifications as IBM power distribution units to supply
rack power (for example, feature code 7188). Each power distribution unit installed in a rack requires a
dedicated power line of 200 to 240 V ac and 30 A. Rack or cabinet power distribution devices must
meet the drawer power requirements, as well as that of any additional products that will be connected
to the same power distribution device.
The rack or cabinet power receptacle (power distribution unit, uninterruptible power supply, or
multi-outlet strip) must have a compatible plug type for your drawer or device.

726 Site and hardware planning

 Note: If you want to use power distribution units that are designed for 7014 racks, refer to the sales
manual for 0551, 0553, 0555 7014 or racks. The customer is responsible for ensuring that the power
distribution unit is compatible with the rack or cabinet and assumes responsibility for any and all
agency certifications required.
v The rack or cabinet must be compatible with the drawer-mounting rails. The rail-mounting pins and
screws should fit securely and snugly into the rack or cabinet rail-mounting holes. It is strongly
recommended that the IBM mounting rails and mounting hardware that are included with the product
be used to install it in the rack. The mounting rails and mounting hardware that are provided with
IBM products have been designed and tested to safely support the product during operation and
service activities as well as to safely support the weight of your drawer or device. The rails must
facilitate service access by allowing the drawer to be safely extended, if necessary, forward, backward,
or both. Some rails, with IBM features for non-IBM racks, provide drawer specific anti-tip brackets, rear
lock-down brackets, and cable management guides that require clearance on the rear side of the rails.

Note: If the rack or cabinet has square holes on the mounting flanges, a plug-in hole adapter might be
required.
If non-IBM rails are used, the rails must be product-safety certified for use with the IBM products. At a
minimum, mounting rails must be able to support four times the maximum rated product weight in its
worst-case position (fully-extended front and rear positions) for one full minute without catastrophic
failure.
v The rack or cabinet must have stabilization feet or brackets installed both in the front and rear of the
rack, or have another means of preventing the rack/cabinet from tipping while the drawer or device is
pulled into its extreme front or rear service positions.
Examples of some acceptable alternatives: The rack or cabinet might be securely bolted to the floor,
ceiling or walls, or to adjacent racks or cabinets in a long and heavy row of racks or cabinets.
v There must be adequate front and rear service clearances (in and around the rack or cabinet).
The rack or cabinet must have sufficient horizontal width clearance in the front and rear to allow the
drawer to be fully slid into the front and, if applicable, the rear service access positions (typically this
requires 914.4 mm (36 in.) clearance in both the front and rear).
v If present, front and rear doors must be able to open far enough to provide unrestrained access for
service or be easily removable. If doors must be removed for service, it is the customer's responsibility
to remove them prior to service.
v The rack or cabinet must provide adequate clearance around the rack drawer.
There must be adequate clearance around the drawer bezel so that it can be opened and closed,
according to the product specifications.
Front or rear doors must also maintain a minimum of 51 mm (2 in.) front, 203 mm (8 in.) rear, door to
mounting flange clearance, and 494 mm (19.4 in.) front, 571 mm (22.5 in.) rear, side-to-side clearance
for drawer bezels and cables (see Figure 289 on page 725).
v The rack or cabinet must provide adequate front-to-back ventilation.
For optimum ventilation, it is recommended the rack or cabinet not have a front door. If the rack or
cabinet has doors, the doors must be fully perforated so that there is proper front-to-back airflow to
maintain the required drawer ambient inlet temperature as specified in the server specifications. The
perforations should yield at least 34 % minimum open area per square inch.

IBM features

IBM features adjustable rails for non-IBM racks are available in the product configurators as follows:
v System i servers
– 7883 - model 9406-520 non-IBM rack-mount drawer rail kit and hardware
– 7798 - model 9406-550 non-IBM rack-mount drawer rail kit and hardware
v System p servers
– 7161 - model 9111-520 non-IBM rack-mount drawer rail kit

Chapter 12. Rack installation procedures for racks not purchased at IBM 727
 – 7162 - model 9113-550 IBM or non-IBM rack-mount drawer rail kit
– 7163 - model 9113-550 non-IBM rack-mount drawer rail kit
– 7165 - model 9117-570 and 9117-MMA non-IBM rack-mount drawer rail kit
– 7166 - model 9110-510 IBM or non-IBM rack-mount drawer rail kit
v OpenPower server
– 7162 - OpenPower 720 IBM or non-IBM rack-mount drawer rail kit
– 7163- OpenPower 720 non-IBM rack-mount drawer rail kit
– 7166 - OpenPower 710 IBM or non-IBM rack-mount drawer rail kit
Power Systems servers
– 7114 - model 8203-E4A, 9407-M15 or 9408-M25, IBM or non-IBM rack mount drawer rail kit
– 7146 - model 8204-E8A,or 9409-M50, IBM or non-IBM rack mount drawer rail kit
– 7164 - model 9117-MMA, IBM or non-IBM rack mount drawer rail kit

Additional features for non-IBM racks are as follows:

v System p servers
– 7969 - model 9117-570 and 9117-MMA non-IBM chassis/bezel
– 7873 - model 9111-520 non-IBM rack-mount drawer bezel and hardware
– 7874 - model 9113-550 non-IBM rack-mount drawer bezel and hardware
– 7999 model 9110-510 non-IBM rack-mount drawer bezel and hardware
v OpenPower server
– 7999 - OpenPower 710 non-IBM rack-mount drawer bezel and hardware
– 7915 - OpenPower 720 OEM rack-mount drawer bezel and hardware

Special considerations for mounting an IBM Power 560 Express or an IBM Power 570 into a non-IBM
rack

For both the models 560 Express and the 570, the EIA rack specification regarding rack depth is critical to
successful installation of these models. The following graphics show the routing path of the 560 or 570
flex assembly in an IBM Enterprise rack when multiple system units are involved. The 570 front flex
assembly extends outside of the rail mounting flanges by 70 mm (2.75 in). The 560 or 570 rear flex
assembly extends outside of the rail mounting flanges by 25 mm (1.0 in.). A non-IBM rack must have this
additional space to properly install the flex assembly and to adequately protect the assembly from
physical damage.

Note: The 560 is limited to two drawers. The 570 can have up to four drawers.

728 Site and hardware planning

Figure 290. Routing path for POWER5 model 570 flex assembly (front view)

Figure 291. Routing path for POWER6 560 (8234-EMA) and POWER6 570 (9117-MMA)

Chapter 12. Rack installation procedures for racks not purchased at IBM 729
Figure 292. Routing path for model 570 flex assembly (rear view)

Note: The model 9117-MMA does not extend past the rail mounting flanges.

General safety requirements for IBM products installed in a non-IBM rack or cabinet

The general safety requirements for IBM products installed in non-IBM racks are:
v Any product or component that plugs into either an IBM power distribution unit or mains power (via
a power cord), or uses any voltage over 42 V ac or 60 V dc (considered to be hazardous voltage) must
be Safety Certified by a Nationally Recognized Test Laboratory (NRTL) for the country in which it will
be installed.
Some of the items that require safety certification might include: the rack or cabinet (if it contains
electrical components integral to the rack or cabinet), fan trays, power distribution unit, uninterruptible
power supplies, multi-outlet strips, or any other products installed in the rack or cabinet that connect
to hazardous voltage.
Examples of OSHA-approved NRTLs for the U.S.:
– UL
– ETL
– CSA (with CSA NRTL or CSA US mark)
Examples of approved NRTLs for Canada:
– UL (Ulc mark)
– ETL (ETLc mark)
– CSA
The European Union requires a CE mark and a Manufacturer's Declaration of Conformity (DOC).
Certified products should have the NRTL logos or marks somewhere on the product or product label.
However, proof of certification must be made available to IBM upon request. Proof consists of such
items as copies of the NRTL license or certificate, a CB Certificate, a Letter of Authorization to apply

730 Site and hardware planning

 the NRTL mark, the first few pages of the NRTL certification report, Listing in an NRTL publication, or
a copy of the UL Yellow Card. Proof should contain the manufacturers name, product type and model,
standard to which it was certified, the NRTL name or logo, the NRTL file number or license number,
and a list of any Conditions of Acceptance or Deviations. A Manufacturer's Declaration is not proof of
certification by an NRTL.
v The rack or cabinet must meet all electrical and mechanical safety legal requirements for the country in
which it is installed.
The rack or cabinet must be free of exposed hazards (such as voltages over 60 V dc or 42 V ac, energy
over 240 VA, sharp edges, mechanical pinch points, or hot surfaces).
v There must be an accessible and unambiguous disconnect device for each product in the rack,
including any power distribution unit.
A disconnect device might consist of either the plug on the power cord (if the power cord is no longer
than 1.8 m (6 ft)), the appliance inlet receptacle (if the power cord is of a detachable type), or a power
on/off switch, or an Emergency Power Off switch on the rack, provided all power is removed from the
rack or product by the disconnect device.
If the rack or cabinet has electrical components (such as fan trays or lights), the rack must have an
accessible and unambiguous disconnect device.
v The rack or cabinet, power distribution unit and multi-outlet strips, and products installed in the rack
or cabinet must all be properly grounded to the customer facility ground.
There must be no more than 0.1 Ohms between the ground pin of the power distribution unit or rack
plug and any touchable metal or conductive surface on the rack and on the products installed in the
rack. Grounding method must comply with applicable country's electric code (such as NEC or CEC).
Ground continuity can be verified by your IBM service personnel, after the installation is completed,
and should be verified prior to the first service activity.
v The voltage rating of the power distribution unit and multi-outlet strips must be compatible with the
products plugged into them.
The power distribution unit or multi-outlet strips current and power ratings are rated at 80% of the
building supply circuit (as required by the National Electrical Code and the Canadian Electrical Code).
The total load connected to the power distribution unit must be less than the rating of the power
distribution unit. For example, a power distribution unit with a 30 A connection will be rated for a
total load of 24 A (30 A x 80 %). Therefore, the sum of all equipment connected to the power
distribution unit in this example must be lower than the 24 A rating.
If an uninterruptible power supply is installed, it must meet all the electrical safety requirements as
described for a power distribution unit (including certification by an NRTL).
v The rack or cabinet, power distribution unit, uninterruptible power supply, multi-outlet strips and all
products in the rack or cabinet must be installed according to the manufacturer's instructions, and in
accordance with all national, state or province, and local codes and laws.
The rack or cabinet, power distribution unit, uninterruptible power supply, multi-outlet strips and all
products in the rack or cabinet must be used as intended by the manufacturer (per manufacturer's
product documentation and marketing literature).
v All documentation for use and installation of the rack or cabinet, power distribution unit,
uninterruptible power supply, and all products in the rack or cabinet, including safety information,
must be available on-site.
v If there is more than one source of power in the rack cabinet, there must be clearly visible safety labels
for "Multiple Power Source" (in the languages required for the country in which the product is
installed).
v If the rack or cabinet or any products installed in the cabinet had safety or weight labels applied by the
manufacturer, they must be intact and translated into the languages required for the country in which
the product is installed.
v If the rack or cabinet has doors, the rack becomes a fire enclosure by definition and must meet the
applicable flammability ratings (V-0 or better). Totally metal enclosures at least 1 mm (0.04 in.) thick are
considered to comply.

Chapter 12. Rack installation procedures for racks not purchased at IBM 731
 Nonenclosure (decorative) materials must have a flammability rating of V-1 or better. If glass is used
(such as in rack doors) it must be safety glass. If wood shelves are used in the rack/cabinet, they must
be treated with a UL Listed flame-retardant coating.
v The rack or cabinet configuration must comply with all IBM requirements for "safe to service" (contact
your IBM Installation Planning Representative for assistance in determining if the environment is safe).
There must be no unique maintenance procedures or tools required for service.
Elevated service installations, where the products to be serviced are installed between 1.5 m and 3.7 m
(5 ft and 12 ft) above the floor, require the availability of an OSHA- and CSA-approved nonconductive
step ladder. If a ladder is required for service, the customer must supply the OSHA- and CSA-
approved nonconductive step ladder (unless other arrangements have been made with the local IBM
Service Branch Office). Products installed over 2.9 m (9 ft) above the floor require a Special Bid to be
completed before they can be serviced by IBM service personnel.
For products not intended for rack-mounting to be serviced by IBM, the products and parts that will
be replaced as part of that service must not weigh over 11.4 kg (25 lb) Contact your Installation
Planning Representative if in doubt.
There must not be any special education or training required for safe servicing of any of the products
installed in the racks. Contact your Installation Planning Representative if you are in doubt.
Related reference:
Chapter 6, “Rack specifications,” on page 443
Rack specifications provide detailed information for your rack, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances.

732 Site and hardware planning

Appendix. Notices
This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.

The manufacturer may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in other
countries. Consult the manufacturer's representative for information on the products and services
currently available in your area. Any reference to the manufacturer's product, program, or service is not
intended to state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally
equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any intellectual property right of the
manufacturer may be used instead. However, it is the user's responsibility to evaluate and verify the
operation of any product, program, or service.

The manufacturer may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in
this document. The furnishing of this document does not grant you any license to these patents. You can
send license inquiries, in writing, to the manufacturer.

The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such
provisions are inconsistent with local law: THIS INFORMATION IS PROVIDED “AS IS” WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain
transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.

This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically
made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication.
The manufacturer may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s)
described in this publication at any time without notice.

Any references in this information to Web sites not owned by the manufacturer are provided for
convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at
those Web sites are not part of the materials for this product and use of those Web sites is at your own
risk.

The manufacturer may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes
appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.

Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment. Therefore, the
results obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly. Some measurements may have
been made on development-level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the
same on generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurements may have been estimated through
extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document should verify the applicable data for their
specific environment.

Information concerning products not produced by this manufacturer was obtained from the suppliers of
those products, their published announcements or other publicly available sources. This manufacturer has
not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of performance, compatibility or any other
claims related to products not produced by this manufacturer. Questions on the capabilities of products
not produced by this manufacturer should be addressed to the suppliers of those products.

All statements regarding the manufacturer's future direction or intent are subject to change or withdrawal
without notice, and represent goals and objectives only.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2007, 2009 733

The manufacturer's prices shown are the manufacturer's suggested retail prices, are current and are
subject to change without notice. Dealer prices may vary.

This information is for planning purposes only. The information herein is subject to change before the
products described become available.

This information contains examples of data and reports used in daily business operations. To illustrate
them as completely as possible, the examples include the names of individuals, companies, brands, and
products. All of these names are fictitious and any similarity to the names and addresses used by an
actual business enterprise is entirely coincidental.

If you are viewing this information in softcopy, the photographs and color illustrations may not appear.

The drawings and specifications contained herein shall not be reproduced in whole or in part without the
written permission of the manufacturer.

The manufacturer has prepared this information for use with the specific machines indicated. The
manufacturer makes no representations that it is suitable for any other purpose.

The manufacturer's computer systems contain mechanisms designed to reduce the possibility of
undetected data corruption or loss. This risk, however, cannot be eliminated. Users who experience
unplanned outages, system failures, power fluctuations or outages, or component failures must verify the
accuracy of operations performed and data saved or transmitted by the system at or near the time of the
outage or failure. In addition, users must establish procedures to ensure that there is independent data
verification before relying on such data in sensitive or critical operations. Users should periodically check
the manufacturer's support websites for updated information and fixes applicable to the system and
related software.

Trademarks
IBM, the IBM logo, and ibm.com are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business
Machines Corp., registered in many jurisdictions worldwide. Other product and service names might be
trademarks of IBM or other companies. A current list of IBM trademarks is available on the Web at
Copyright and trademark information at www.ibm.com/legal/copytrade.shtml.

INFINIBAND, InfiniBand Trade Association, and the INFINIBAND design marks are trademarks and/or
service marks of the INFINIBAND Trade Association.

Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both.

Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others.

Electronic emission notices

Class A Notices
The following Class A statements apply to the IBM servers that contain the POWER6 processor.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) statement

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with
the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this

734 Site and hardware planning

equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at his own expense.

Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission
limits. IBM is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than
recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment.
Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Industry Canada Compliance Statement

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Avis de conformité à la réglementation d'Industrie Canada

Cet appareil numérique de la classe A respecte est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

European Community Compliance Statement

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive 2004/108/EC on
the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. IBM cannot
accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a
non-recommended modification of the product, including the fitting of non-IBM option cards.

This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A Information Technology
Equipment according to European Standard EN 55022. The limits for Class A equipment were derived for
commercial and industrial environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with
licensed communication equipment.

European Community contact:

IBM Technical Regulations
Pascalstr. 100, Stuttgart, Germany 70569
Tele: 0049 (0)711 785 1176
Fax: 0049 (0)711 785 1283
E-mail: [email protected]

Warning: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio
interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

VCCI Statement - Japan

The following is a summary of the VCCI Japanese statement in the box above:

This is a Class A product based on the standard of the VCCI Council. If this equipment is used in a
domestic environment, radio interference may occur, in which case, the user may be required to take
corrective actions.
Appendix. Notices 735
Japanese Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA)
Confirmed Harmonics Guideline (products less than or equal to 20 A per phase)

Japanese Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA)

Confirmed Harmonics Guideline with Modifications (products greater than 20 A per
phase)

Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Statement - People's Republic of China

Declaration: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may need to perform practical action.

Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Statement - Taiwan

The following is a summary of the EMI Taiwan statement above.

Warning: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference
in which case the user will be required to take adequate measures.

IBM Taiwan Contact Information:

736 Site and hardware planning

Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Statement - Korea

Please note that this equipment has obtained EMC registration for commercial use. In the event that it
has been mistakenly sold or purchased, please exchange it for equipment certified for home use.

Germany Compliance Statement

Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis: Hinweis für Geräte der Klasse A EU-Richtlinie zur

Elektromagnetischen Verträglichkeit

Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG zur Angleichung der
Rechtsvorschriften über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit in den EU-Mitgliedsstaaten und hält die
Grenzwerte der EN 55022 Klasse A ein.

Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Geräte wie in den Handbüchern beschrieben zu installieren und zu
betreiben. Des Weiteren dürfen auch nur von der IBM empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. IBM
übernimmt keine Verantwortung für die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne
Zustimmung der IBM verändert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne
Empfehlung der IBM gesteckt/eingebaut werden.

EN 55022 Klasse A Geräte müssen mit folgendem Warnhinweis versehen werden:

"Warnung: Dieses ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung kann im Wohnbereich
Funk-Störungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber verlangt werden, angemessene
Maßnahmen zu ergreifen und dafür aufzukommen."

Deutschland: Einhaltung des Gesetzes über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten

Dieses Produkt entspricht dem “Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten
(EMVG)“. Dies ist die Umsetzung der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland.

Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von
Geräten (EMVG) (bzw. der EMC EG Richtlinie 2004/108/EG) für Geräte der Klasse A.

Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt, in Übereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das EG-Konformitätszeichen
- CE - zu führen.

Verantwortlich für die Konformitätserklärung nach des EMVG ist die IBM Deutschland GmbH, 70548
Stuttgart.

Appendix. Notices 737

Generelle Informationen:

Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022 Klasse A.

Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Statement - Russia

Terms and conditions

Permissions for the use of these publications is granted subject to the following terms and conditions.

Personal Use: You may reproduce these publications for your personal, noncommercial use provided that
all proprietary notices are preserved. You may not distribute, display or make derivative works of these
publications, or any portion thereof, without the express consent of the manufacturer.

Commercial Use: You may reproduce, distribute and display these publications solely within your
enterprise provided that all proprietary notices are preserved. You may not make derivative works of
these publications, or reproduce, distribute or display these publications or any portion thereof outside
your enterprise, without the express consent of the manufacturer.

Except as expressly granted in this permission, no other permissions, licenses or rights are granted, either
express or implied, to the publications or any information, data, software or other intellectual property
contained therein.

The manufacturer reserves the right to withdraw the permissions granted herein whenever, in its
discretion, the use of the publications is detrimental to its interest or, as determined by the manufacturer,
the above instructions are not being properly followed.

You may not download, export or re-export this information except in full compliance with all applicable
laws and regulations, including all United States export laws and regulations.

THE MANUFACTURER MAKES NO GUARANTEE ABOUT THE CONTENT OF THESE

PUBLICATIONS. THESE PUBLICATIONS ARE PROVIDED "AS-IS" AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, NON-INFRINGEMENT, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.

738 Site and hardware planning




Printed in USA